2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

OptiX OSN 3500 Quick Guide for Enterprise Customers

Product Version: V200R015C20
Library Version: 01
Date: 2017-01-15

For any question, please contact us.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2017. All rights reserved.

Library Information
Contents
1 Library Information
1.1 Version Mapping
1.2 Document Introduction
1.3 Documentation Conventions
1.4 Where to Obtain Documentation
1.5 How to Provide Documentation Feedback
1.6 Technical Support
1.7 Library Changes
1.7.1 Updates in Issue 01 (2017-01-15) Based on Product Version V200R015C20
1.8 Version Updates
1.8.1 Feature Updates
1.8.2 Hardware Updates
1.8.3 O&M Updates
2 Compliance and Safety
2.1 General Safety Precautions
2.2 Warning and Safety Symbols
2.3 Electrical Safety
2.4 Environment of Flammable Gas
2.5 Storage Batteries
2.6 Radiation
2.6.1 Laser and Optical Fibers
2.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure
2.6.3 Forbidden Areas
2.6.4 Laser
2.7 Working at Heights
2.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects
2.7.2 Using Ladders
2.8 Mechanical Safety
2.9 Other Precautions
2.10 Compliance and Safety
3 Quick View of Product
3.1 Product Highlights and Specifications
3.1.1 Product Highlights
3.1.2 Product Specifications
3.2 Product Application
3.2.1 Rail Transportation Industry: Unified Bearer, Flexible Adaptation
3.2.2 Power Industry: Hard and Soft Pipes, Ultra Long Haul Transmission, Customization
3.2.3 Broadcast Television Industry: Unified Transmission of Broadcast, Data, and Leased Line Services on One Network
3.3 System Architecture
3.4 Packet Services
3.4.1 Service Description
[Link] Service Models
[Link] Ethernet Services
[Link] CES Services
[Link] ATM/IMA Services
3.4.2 Service Interfaces
3.4.3 Service Receiving Capacity
3.5 TDM Services
3.5.1 Service Types
3.5.2 Service Interfaces
3.5.3 Service Receiving Capacity
4 Description of Common Hardware
4.1 Equipment Structure
4.2 Cabinet
localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 1/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
4.2.1 Introduction to Cabinets
4.2.2 Locations of Cable Holes
4.2.3 DC Power Distribution Unit
4.2.4 Hardware Accessories
4.3 Subrack
4.3.1 Subrack Structure
4.3.2 Slot Allocation
4.3.3 Slot Access Capacity in Packet Mode
4.3.4 Slot Access Capacity in TDM Mode
4.3.5 Ventilation Mode
4.3.6 Cable Management
4.3.7 Mapping Policies of Power Consumption
4.3.8 Technical Specifications
4.4 Overview of Boards
4.4.1 Appearances and Dimensions of the Boards
4.4.2 Bar Codes of the Boards
4.5 Classification of Boards
4.6 Cross-Connect Boards and System Control Boards
4.6.1 IXCSA
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.6.2 SXCSA
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.6.3 PSXCS(A)
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.6.4 GSCC
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.7 Packet Processing Boards
4.7.1 PEX2
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.7.2 PEG8
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.7.3 PEG16
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.8 Packet Interface Boards
4.8.1 PETF8
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.8.2 PEFF8
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.8.3 CQ1
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.8.4 MD12
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.8.5 MD75
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.9 EoD Boards
4.9.1 EDQ41
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.10 Smart Line Boards

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 2/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
4.10.1 HSNS3
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.11 SDH Boards
4.11.1 SL1
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.11.2 SL1A
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.11.3 SLQ1
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.11.4 SLQ1A
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.11.5 SLO1
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.11.6 SLT1
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.11.7 SLH1
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
[Link] Board Protection
4.11.8 SEP1
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
[Link] Board Protection
4.11.9 SL4
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.11.10 SL4A
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.11.11 SLD4
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.11.12 SLD4A
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.11.13 SLQ4
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.11.14 SLQ4A
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.11.15 SL16
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.11.16 SL16A
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.11.17 SLD16
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 3/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
[Link] Front Panel
4.11.18 SLQ16
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.11.19 SLO16
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.11.20 SF16
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.11.21 SF16E
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.11.22 SL64
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.11.23 SLD64
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.11.24 SF64
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.11.25 SF64A
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.11.26 SFD64
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.11.27 SLQ41
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.11.28 SLH41
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.11.29 EU04
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.11.30 EU08
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.11.31 OU08
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.12 PDH Boards
4.12.1 PQ1
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
[Link] Board Protection
4.12.2 PQM
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
[Link] Board Protection
4.12.3 PFL1
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.12.4 PL3
[Link] Application

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 4/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
[Link] Board Protection
4.12.5 PL3A
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.12.6 PD3
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
[Link] Board Protection
4.12.7 PQ3
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
[Link] Board Protection
4.12.8 DX1
[Link] Application of DX1
[Link] Functions and Features of DX1
[Link] Front Panel of DX1
[Link] Protection of DX1
4.12.9 DXA
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.12.10 SPQ4
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
[Link] Board Protection
4.12.11 D12B
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.12.12 D12S
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.12.13 D75S
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.12.14 D34S
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.12.15 C34S
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.12.16 MU04
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.12.17 DM12
[Link] Application of DM12
[Link] Functions and Features of DM12
[Link] Front Panel of DM12
4.12.18 TSB4
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.12.19 TSB8
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.13 EoS Boards
4.13.1 EFT8
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.13.2 EFT8A
[Link] Application

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 5/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.13.3 EGT2
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.13.4 EFS0
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
[Link] Board Protection
4.13.5 EFS0A
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
[Link] Board Protection
4.13.6 EFS4
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.13.7 EGS2
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.13.8 EMS2
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.13.9 EMS4
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
[Link] Board Protection
4.13.10 EGS4
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
[Link] Board Protection
4.13.11 EAS2
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.13.12 EFF8
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.13.13 EFF8A
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.13.14 ETF8
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.13.15 ETF8A
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.13.16 ETS8
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.14 RPR Boards
4.14.1 EGR2
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.14.2 EMR0
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.15 PCM Boards
4.15.1 FXSO12
[Link] Application

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 6/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.15.2 FXS12
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.15.3 FXO12
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.15.4 AT6
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.15.5 DX1
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.15.6 DM12
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.16 WDM Boards
4.16.1 MR2
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.16.2 MR4
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.17 Auxiliary Boards
4.17.1 AUX
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.17.2 FAN
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.18 Optical Amplifier Boards
4.18.1 BA2
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.18.2 BPA
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.18.3 COA
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.18.4 RPC01
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.18.5 RPC02
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.18.6 OBU1
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.18.7 OBU2
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.19 Dispersion Compensation Boards
4.19.1 DCU
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 7/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
4.20 Power Boards
4.20.1 UPM
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel (ETP4890)
[Link] Front Panel (EPS75-4815AF)
4.20.2 PIU
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.20.3 PIUA
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.20.4 PIUB
[Link] Application
[Link] Functions and Features
[Link] Front Panel
4.21 Pluggable Optical Module
4.21.1 Overview
4.21.2 SFP/eSFP/SFP+
4.21.3 XFP
4.21.4 CWDM/DWDM
4.22 Pluggable Electrical Module
4.23 Cables
4.23.1 Fiber Jumper
[Link] Categories of the Fiber Jumpers
[Link] Connector
4.23.2 Power Cable and Ground Cable
[Link] Power Cable of the Cabinet
[Link] Ground Cable of the Cabinet Door
[Link] Subrack Power Cable
[Link] COA Power Cable
[Link] RPC Power Cable
4.23.3 Alarm Cable
[Link] Cabinet Indicator Cable
[Link] Indicator Cascading Cable Between Subracks or Alarm Cascading Cable Between the OptiX OSN Equipment
[Link] Alarm Cascading Cable Between the OptiX OSN Equipment and the Other Huawei Transmission Equipment
[Link] Alarm Input/Output Cable
4.23.4 Management Cable
[Link] OAM Serial Cable
[Link] Serial 1 to 4/F1/F&f Serial Cable
[Link] RS-232/RS-422 Serial Cable
[Link] Orderwire Telephone Line
[Link] COA Cascading Cable
[Link] Straight-Through Cable
[Link] Crossover Cable
4.23.5 Signal Cable
[Link] 75-ohm 8xE1 Cable
[Link] 120-ohm 8xE1 Cable
[Link] E3/T3/STM-1 Cable
[Link] Framed E1 Cable
[Link] Nx64 kbit/s Cable
[Link] Anea 96 E1 Signal Cable
[Link] Anea 96 2/4-wire Audio and E&M Signal Cable
[Link] RJ-45 2/4-wire Audio and E&M Signal Cable
[Link] RS485/RS232 Sub-rate Cable
[Link] FXS/FXO Audio Cable
4.23.6 Clock Cable
[Link] 75-ohm/120-ohm Clock Cable
[Link] One-Channel Clock Transit Cable and Two-Channel Clock Transit Cable
[Link] 1PPS+TOD RJ45 Cable
5 Description of Common Features
5.1 Feature at a Glance
5.2 Packet Features
5.2.1 MPLS Basics
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link].1 MPLS Network Architecture
[Link].2 LSP
[Link].3 Bearer Mode for MPLS Packets
[Link].4 MPLS Label
[Link] Specifications
5.2.2 PWE3 Basics

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 8/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link].1 PWE3 Network Reference Model
[Link].2 PWE3 Protocol Reference Model
[Link].3 PWE3 Encapsulation Format
[Link].4 MS-PW
[Link].5 VCCV
[Link] Specifications
5.2.3 ETH PWE3
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link].1 Format of an ETH PWE3 Packet
[Link].2 Service-Delimiting Tag and PW Encapsulation Mode
[Link].3 QoS of ETH PWE3
[Link].4 E-Line Services Carried on PWs
[Link].5 E-LAN Services Carried on PWs
[Link] Specifications
5.2.4 TDM PWE3
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link].1 E1 Frame Format
[Link].2 SAToP
[Link].3 CESoPSN
[Link].4 Data Jitter Buffer
[Link].5 CES Alarm Transmission
[Link].6 Clock Recovery Schemes of TDM PWE3
[Link].7 QoS of TDM PWE3
[Link] Specifications
5.2.5 Layer 2 Switching
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link].1 VPLS
[Link].2 E-LAN Services Carried on PWs
[Link].3 Split Horizon Group
[Link].4 MAC Address Table Management
[Link] Specifications
5.2.6 Smart Line Board Solution
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Technology
[Link].1 PID Technology
[Link].2 Smart Technology
[Link] Specifications
5.2.7 Ethernet Port OAM
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link] Specifications
5.2.8 Ethernet Service OAM
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link] Specifications
5.2.9 MPLS OAM
[Link] Introduction to MPLS OAM
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link].1 CV/FFD
[Link].2 Tunnel Defect Type
[Link].3 PW Defect Type
[Link].4 BDI
[Link].5 FDI
[Link].6 Ping
[Link].7 Traceroute
[Link] Specifications
5.2.10 MPLS-TP OAM
[Link] Introduction
[Link].1 Introduction to MPLS-TP
[Link].2 Introduction to MPLS-TP OAM
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link].1 MPLS-TP OAM Protocol Model
[Link].2 MPLS-TP OAM Components
[Link].3 MPLS-TP OAM PDU Formats
[Link] Specifications
5.2.11 HQoS
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link].1 QoS Requirements

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 9/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
[Link].2 DiffServ
[Link].3 Traffic Classification
[Link].4 Queue Scheduling
[Link].5 Committed Access Rate
[Link].6 Congestion Management
[Link].7 QoS Policy
[Link] Specifications
5.2.12 IGMP Snooping
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link].1 Multicast Protocol
[Link].2 IGMP
[Link].3 IGMP Snooping
[Link] Specifications
5.2.13 LAG
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link].1 LACP
[Link].2 Link Aggregation Types
[Link].3 Load Sharing Modes
[Link].4 Port Types
[Link] Specifications
5.2.14 MC-LAG
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link] Specifications
5.2.15 PW APS
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link] Specifications
5.2.16 Tunnel APS
[Link] Introduction to Tunnel APS
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link] Specifications
5.2.17 MRPS
[Link] Introduction to MRPS
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link] Specifications
5.2.18 MS-PW
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link] Specifications
5.2.19 MSTP
[Link] Introduction
[Link].1 Background
[Link].2 Introduction to MSTP
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link].1 STP/RSTP-Related Concepts
[Link].2 MSTP-Related Concepts
[Link] Specifications
5.2.20 Packet-based linear MSP
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link] Specifications
5.2.21 Port Mirroring
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link] Specifications
5.2.22 PRBS
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Specifications
5.2.23 RMON
[Link] Introduction to RMON
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link].1 SNMP
[Link].2 RMON Management Groups
[Link] Specifications
5.2.24 TP-Assist Solution
[Link] Background
[Link] TP-Assist O&M System and Functions
5.3 TDM Features
5.3.1 AU-3
[Link] Introduction to AU-3
5.3.2 DLAG

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 10/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link].1 Revertive Mode
[Link].2 Priority
[Link].3 LACP
[Link] Specifications
5.3.3 E1 SNCP
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link] Specifications
5.3.4 Ethernet Port OAM
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Basic Concept
5.3.5 Ethernet Service OAM
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Basic Concept
5.3.6 IGMP Snooping
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link].1 Multicast Protocol
[Link].2 IGMP
[Link].3 IGMP Snooping Function
[Link] Specifications
5.3.7 IPA
[Link] Introduction to IPA
[Link] Basic Concepts
5.3.8 LAG
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link].1 LACP
[Link].2 Link Aggregation Types
[Link].3 Load Sharing Modes
[Link].4 Load Sharing Modes
[Link] Specifications
5.3.9 LCAS
[Link] Introduction to LCAS
[Link] Basic Concepts
5.3.10 LMSP
[Link] Introduction to LMSP
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link] Specifications
5.3.11 LPT
[Link] Introduction to LPT
[Link] Basic Concepts
5.3.12 MSTP
[Link] Introduction
[Link].1 Background
[Link].2 Introduction to MSTP
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link].1 STP/RSTP-Related Concepts
[Link].2 MSTP-Related Concepts
5.3.13 MSP Ring
[Link] Introduction to MSP Ring
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link] Specifications
5.3.14 Embedded PCM
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link] Specifications
5.3.15 Power Consumption Control
[Link] Overview
5.3.16 Orderwire Call
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link] Specifications
5.3.17 PPS
[Link] Introduction to PPS
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link] Specifications
5.3.18 PRBS
[Link] Introduction to PRBS
[Link] Reference Standards and Protocols
5.3.19 QinQ
[Link] Introduction to QinQ

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 11/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link].1 VLAN Stacking
[Link].2 Types of VLAN Tags
[Link].3 Structures of the S-VLAN and C-VLAN Tags
5.3.20 QoS
[Link] Introduction to QoS
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link] Specifications
5.3.21 RMON
[Link] Introduction to RMON
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link].1 SNMP
[Link].2 RMON Management Groups
5.3.22 RPR
[Link] Overview
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link].1 RPR Dual-Ring Topology
[Link].2 Data Operations on RPR Nodes
[Link].3 Fairness
[Link].4 Class of Service
[Link].5 Fixed Allocated Bandwidth
[Link].6 Statistical Multiplexing
5.3.23 SNCP
[Link] Introduction to SNCP
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link] Specifications
5.3.24 SNCMP
[Link] Introduction to SNCMP
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link] Specifications
5.3.25 SNCTP
[Link] Introduction to SNCTP
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link] Specifications
5.3.26 STP and RSTP
[Link] Introduction to STP and RSTP
[Link] Basic Concepts
5.3.27 TPS
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Specifications
5.4 OTN Features
5.4.1 OTN Overheads
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Structure of the OTN Interface
[Link] OTN Signal Types and Bit Rates
[Link] Frame Structure and Meaning of OTN Electrical-layer Overheads
[Link] Principles
5.5 ASON Feature
5.5.1 Background and Advantages
5.5.2 Huawei ASON Solution
5.5.3 Basic Concepts of ASON
[Link] Structure of the ASON Network
[Link] ASON Links
[Link] Rerouting
[Link] Protection and Restoration in an ASON Network
[Link] Position and Architecture of the ASON Software
5.5.4 Standard and Protocol Compliance of ASON
5.5.5 Specifications of ASON Services
5.5.6 ASON Feature
[Link] Automatic Discovery of the Topologies
[Link] End-to-End Service Configuration
[Link].1 Routing Computation Policies
[Link].2 Creation of an LSP
[Link].3 Deletion of an LSP
[Link].4 Rerouting of an LSP
[Link].5 Change of an LSP
[Link] SLA for ASON Services
[Link].1 Diamond Services
[Link].2 Gold Services
[Link].3 Silver Services
[Link].4 Copper Services
[Link].5 Iron Services
[Link] Tunnels
[Link] Crankback Mechanism

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 12/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
[Link] Service Optimization
[Link] Service Migration
[Link] Reverting Services to Original Routes
[Link] Presetting the Restoration Trail
[Link] Shared Mesh Restoration Trail
[Link] SRLG
[Link] Amalgamation of ASON and LCAS
[Link] ASON Service Creation on Interrupted Trails
[Link] Auto-Separation of the Working and Protection Trails
5.5.7 Overview of the Application Scenarios
[Link] Scenario for SDH ASON Protection and Restoration
[Link] Application Scenario of Differential Protection Services
[Link] Lower-order Service Bearer Scenario
[Link] ASON Service Group Scenario
[Link] Scenario for Virtual TE Links
[Link] Large ASON Management
5.5.8 Typical Networking of ASON NEs
[Link] Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration
[Link] Merging an ASON Network with a Traditional SDH Network
[Link] Using Association Service to Carry Mutually Protected Trails
[Link] Using Tunnels to Carry Lower Order Services
5.5.9 2M ASON Service
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Specifications
5.6 Clock Solution
5.6.1 Physical Clocks (SDH)
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link].1 Overview
[Link].2 Methods of Obtaining Clock Sources
[Link].3 Clock Source Tracing
[Link].4 Clock Source Selection
[Link].5 Clock Source ID
[Link].6 Clock Protection
5.6.2 IEEE 1588v2 (Packet and OTN)
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link].1 Clock Models and Architecture
[Link].2 Clock Domain and Clock ID
[Link].3 External Time Interface
[Link].4 Delay Compensation
[Link].5 Message Types
[Link].6 Message Encapsulation
[Link].7 Network-wide Time Synchronization
[Link] Specifications
5.6.3 Synchronous Ethernet Clock
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link] Specifications
5.6.4 CES ACR
[Link] Introduction
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link].1 CES ACR Clock Domain
[Link].2 Enhanced CES ACR Clock Synchronization Solution
[Link].3 Standard CES ACR Clock Synchronization Solution
[Link] Specifications
5.7 Security Management Features
5.7.1 RADIUS
[Link] Introduction
5.8 Outband DCN
5.8.1 Introduction to the DCN
[Link] DCN Composition
[Link] Huawei DCN Solution
5.8.2 HWECC Solution
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link] Introduction
5.8.3 IP over DCC Solution
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link] Introduction
5.8.4 OSI over DCC Solution
[Link] Basic Concepts
[Link] Introduction
5.8.5 Hybrid Networking Solution of DCC Transparent Transmission
[Link] Solution Overview

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 13/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
5.8.6 E1 DCN Solution
[Link] Solution Overview
[Link] Specifications
5.9 Inband DCN
5.9.1 Introduction
5.9.2 Basic Concepts
[Link] Protocol Stack
[Link] Access Methods
[Link] Access Control
5.9.3 Specifications
6 Troubleshooting
6.1 Requirements for the Maintenance personnel
6.1.1 Professional Skills
6.1.2 Network Layout
6.1.3 Collecting and Saving Fault Data
6.2 Basic Principle of Locating Faults
6.3 Common Methods of Locating Faults
6.3.1 Experience
6.3.2 Configuration Data Analysis
6.3.3 Alarm and Performance Event Analysis
[Link] Alarm Insertion
[Link] Service Quality Analysis for Ports
[Link] Alarm Suppression
[Link] Observing Equipment Indicators
[Link] Comparison of the Methods of Using the NMS and Observing Equipment Indicators
6.3.4 Port Mirroring
6.3.5 Configuration Modification
6.3.6 PRBS Test
6.3.7 Data Test Frame
6.3.8 Meter Test
6.3.9 RMON Performance Analysis
6.3.10 Loopback
6.3.11 One-Click Intelligent Fault Diagnosis
6.3.12 Replacement
7 Common Tasks on NMS
7.1 Starting or Shutting Down the U2000
7.1.1 Starting the U2000 Server
7.1.2 Logging In to the U2000 Client
7.1.3 Exiting a U2000 Client
7.1.4 Shutting Down the U2000 Server
7.2 Main Windows and Common Operations of the U2000
7.2.1 Components of the Client GUI
7.2.2 Key GUI Components
7.2.3 Frequently Used Buttons
7.2.4 Shortcut Icon
7.2.5 Common Shortcut Keys
7.3 Monitoring Alarm
7.3.1 Viewing the Current Alarms
7.3.2 Viewing the History Alarms
7.3.3 Setting the Threshold for the Bit Error Alarm
7.3.4 Setting the AIS Insertion Switch
7.3.5 Querying Boolean Values
7.4 Monitoring Performance
7.4.1 Browsing SDH Performance Events
7.4.2 Enabling, Disabling and Setting Performance Monitoring of the NE
7.4.3 Setting the Threshold for the SDH Performance Event
7.5 Software Loopback
7.5.1 Setting a Loopback on an SDH Optical Interface Board
7.5.2 Setting a Loopback on a PDH Electrical Interface Board
7.5.3 Setting a Loopback on an Ethernet Port
7.5.4 Setting a VC-3 Loopback on an Ethernet Port
7.5.5 Setting a Loopback on an ATM Board Port
7.6 Configuring a Laser
7.6.1 Enabling/Disabling Lasers
7.6.2 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown
7.7 Querying and Clearing the Switching Status
7.8 Querying the Optical Power
7.9 Querying Lower Order Cross-Connection Resources
7.10 Querying Port Traffic and Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet Boards
7.11 Querying Version and Manufacture Information
7.11.1 Querying the Board Information Report
7.11.2 Querying the Board Manufacturer Information Report
7.11.3 Querying Physical Board Information
7.11.4 Querying the Operation Log of the NMS

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 14/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
7.12 Querying the Working Temperature
7.13 Backing Up and Restoring the Configuration Data of the NE
7.13.1 Backing Up the NE Configuration Data to the SCC Board
7.13.2 Restoring Configuration Data of the NE from the SCC Board
7.14 Backing Up and Restoring the Database of the NE
7.14.1 Backing Up the NE Database Automatically
7.14.2 Backing Up the NE Database Manually
7.14.3 Restoring the Database of the NE
8 Configuration of Common Services
8.1 Configuring Packet Service
8.1.1 E-Line Services Configuration Videos
[Link] Configuring UNI-UNI E-Line Services
[Link] Configuring E-Line Services Carried by Ports
[Link] Configuring E-Line Services Carried by PWs (Based on VLAN)
[Link] Configuring E-Line Services Carried by PWs (Based on VLAN Priorities)
[Link] Configuring E-Line Services Carried by PWs (Based on VLAN Switching)
[Link] Configuring E-Line Services Carried by QinQ Links
8.1.2 Configuration Example: E-Line Services Carried by PWs (Based on VLAN)
[Link] Networking Diagram
[Link] Service Planning
[Link] Configuration Process (in End-to-End Mode)
[Link] Configuration Process (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis)
[Link] Verifying E-Line Services
8.1.3 E-LAN Services Configuration Videos
[Link] Configuring E-LAN Services Carried by Ports
[Link] Configuring E-LAN Services Carried by PWs
[Link] Configuring E-LAN Services Carried by QinQ links
8.1.4 Configuration Example: E-LAN Services Carried by PWs
[Link] Networking Diagram
[Link] Service Planning
[Link] Configuration Process (in End-to-End Mode)
[Link] Configuration Process (Configuration on a Per-NE Basis)
[Link] Verifying the E-LAN Service Configuration
8.2 Configuring the SDH Services
8.2.1 SDH Services Configuration Videos (End-to-End Mode)
[Link] Configuring SDH Protection Subnets
[Link] Configuring VC-4 and VC-12 Paths
[Link] Configuring the SNCP Ring Services
8.2.2 Configuring 1+1 Linear MSP Services
[Link] Networking Diagram
[Link] Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
[Link] Configuration Process
8.2.3 Configuring the Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Services
[Link] Configuration Networking Diagram
[Link] Service Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
[Link] Configuration Process
8.2.4 Configuring the SNCP Ring Services
[Link] Configuration Networking Diagram
[Link] Service Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
[Link] Configuration Process
8.2.5 Parameter Description
[Link] SDH/PDH Service Configuration Parameters
8.3 Configuring Ethernet Services
8.3.1 EoS Services Configuration Videos
[Link] Configuring EPL Services on Ethernet Transparent Transmission Board
[Link] Configuring EPL Services on an Ethernet Switching Board
[Link] Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL (VLAN) Services
[Link] Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge)
8.3.2 Configuring EPL Services on Ethernet Transparent Transmission Board
[Link] Networking Diagram
[Link] Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
[Link] Configuration Process
8.3.3 Configuring EPL Services on an Ethernet Switching Board
[Link] Networking Diagram
[Link] Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
[Link] Configuration Process
8.3.4 Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL (VLAN) Services
[Link] Networking Diagram
[Link] Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
[Link] Configuration Process
8.3.5 Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL (VLAN) Services
[Link] Networking Diagram
[Link] Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
[Link] Configuration Process

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 15/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
8.3.6 Configuring EPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1d Bridge)
[Link] Networking Diagram
[Link] Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
[Link] Configuration Process
8.3.7 Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge)
[Link] Networking Diagram
[Link] Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
[Link] Configuration Process
8.3.8 Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1ad Bridge)
[Link] Networking Diagram
[Link] Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
[Link] Configuration Process
8.3.9 Parameter Description
[Link] Basic Attributes
[Link] Flow Control
[Link] Network Attributes
[Link] Advanced Attributes
[Link] TAG Attributes
[Link] Encapsulation/Mapping
[Link] Bound Paths
[Link] LCAS Configuration Parameters
[Link] Configuring Ethernet Private Line Services
[Link] Configuring Ethernet Private Network Services
8.4 Configuring Services on Smart Line Boards
8.4.1 Configuration Process
8.4.2 Configuration Example: Configuring SDH Services
[Link] Networking Diagram
[Link] Service Signal Flows
[Link] Configuration Procedure (SDH Service)
[Link].1 Configuring Virtual Ports
[Link].2 Configuring Linear MSP
[Link].3 Configuring Services
8.4.3 Configuration Example: Replacing an SDH Board with a Smart Line Board
[Link] Precautions
[Link] Board Replacement Procedure
[Link] Configuring Services
8.4.4 Configuration Task Collection
[Link] Configuring WDM Ports
[Link] Searching for WDM Trails
[Link] Configuring Virtual Ports and Mapping Paths on a Per-NE Basis
[Link] Configuring Virtual Ports and Mapping Paths in End-to-End Mode
[Link] Operations on ASON Attributes and Services Before an SDH Board Replacement
[Link] Restoring ASON Services and Attributes After Replacing an SDH Board
8.5 Configuring PCM Services
8.5.1 Configuration Flow
[Link] Configuration Flow for PCM Services
[Link] Configuration Flow for PCM Conference Services
[Link] Configuration Flow for Multiplexer Group Services
8.5.2 PCM Services Configuration Videos
[Link] Configuring Z Interface Extension Services
[Link] Configuring Hotline Services
[Link] Configuring 2- or 4-Wire Audio and E&M Trunk Services
[Link] Configuring Sub-rate Services
[Link] Configuring PCM Conference Services
[Link] Configuring G.703 64 kbit/s Codirectional Services
[Link] Configuring Multiplexer Group Services
[Link].1 Configuring Data-P2MP Services
[Link].2 Configuring Data-Meeting Services
[Link].3 Configuring VF-P2MP Services
[Link].4 Configuring VF-Meeting Services
[Link] Configuring Point-to-Point Nx8 kbit/s Services
8.5.3 Configuring Z Interface Extension Services
[Link] Networking Diagram
[Link] Service Planning
[Link] Configuration Procedure
8.5.4 Configuring Hotline Services
[Link] Networking Diagram
[Link] Service Planning
[Link] Configuration Procedure
8.5.5 Configuring 2- or 4-Wire Audio and E&M Trunk Services
[Link] Networking Diagram
[Link] Service Planning
[Link] Configuration Procedure
8.5.6 Configuring Sub-rate Services

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 16/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
[Link] Networking Diagram
[Link] Service Planning
[Link] Configuration Procedure
8.5.7 Configuring PCM Conference Services
[Link] Networking Diagram
[Link] Service Planning
[Link] Configuration Procedure
8.5.8 Configuring Multiplexer Group Services
[Link] Configuring Data-P2MP Services
[Link].1 Networking Diagram
[Link].2 Service Planning
[Link].3 Configuration Process
[Link] Configuring Data-Meeting Services
[Link].1 Networking Diagram
[Link].2 Service Planning
[Link].3 Configuration Process
[Link] Configuring VF-P2MP Services
[Link].1 Networking Diagram
[Link].2 Service Planning
[Link].3 Configuration Process
[Link] Configuring VF-Meeting Services
[Link].1 Networking Diagram
[Link].2 Service Planning
[Link].3 Configuration Process
8.5.9 Configuring G.703 64 kbit/s Codirectional Services
[Link] Networking Diagram
[Link] Service Flow Directions and Timeslot Allocation
[Link] Configuration Procedure
8.5.10 Configuring Point-to-Point Nx8 kbit/s Services
[Link] Networking Diagram
[Link] Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
[Link] Configuration Process
8.5.11 Configuring Aggregation of Services from Multiple PCM Boards to One E1 Service
[Link] Networking Diagram
[Link] Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
[Link] Configuration Process
8.5.12 Configuration Task Collection
[Link] Configuring a DDN Clock Source
[Link] Configuring the Sub-rate Encapsulation Mode
[Link] Configuring a PCM Port
[Link] Configuring PCM Services
[Link].1 Configuring 64 kit/s Services
[Link].2 Configuring 8 kit/s Services
[Link] Configuring a PCM Conference
[Link] Configuring Multiplexer Group Services
8.5.13 Parameter Description
[Link] Sub-rate Encapsulation Mode
[Link] Framed E1 Interface Parameters
[Link] Port Management Parameters
[Link].1 Basic Configurations
[Link].2 Port Type Configurations
[Link].3 Service Configuration Control Parameters
[Link].4 FXS Port Configurations
[Link].5 FXO Port Configurations
[Link].6 ATI Port Configurations
[Link].7 Advanced Configurations
[Link] Parameters for Serial Port Management
[Link] Parameters for Configuring a PCM Service
[Link].1 64 kbit/s Service Parameters
[Link].2 8 kbit/s Service Parameters
[Link] Parameters for Configuring a PCM Conference
[Link] Parameters for Configuring Multiplexer Group Services
8.6 Configuring the DDN Service
8.6.1 Configuring the Point-to-Point Nx64 kbit/s Services
[Link] Networking Diagram
[Link] Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
[Link] Configuration Process
8.6.2 Configuring the Point-to-Point Framed E1 Service
[Link] Networking Diagram
[Link] Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
[Link] Configuration Process
8.6.3 Configuring the Combined Nx64 kbit/s and Framed E1 Services
[Link] Networking Diagram
[Link] Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 17/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
[Link] Configuration Process
8.7 Configuring ASON Differential Protection Services
8.7.1 Management of Differential Protection Services
[Link] Creating a Differential Protection Service
[Link] Deleting a Differential Protection Service
[Link] Viewing a Differential Protection Service
[Link] Modifying Routing Attributes of a Differential Protection Service
[Link] Setting the Preset Restoration Trail for a Differential Protection Service
[Link] Setting Original Route of a Differential Protection Service
[Link] Reverting a Differential Protection Service
[Link] Optimizing a Differential Protection Service
[Link] Converting a Differential Protection Service
8.7.2 Parameters of Differential Protection Services
[Link] Maximum Unidirectional Delay (Routing Attribute)
[Link] Service Interruption Time (ASON Trail Attribute)
8.8 Configuring 2M ASON Services
8.8.1 2M ASON Service Management
[Link] Create VC-12 Virtual TE Links
[Link] Creating a 2M ASON Service
[Link] Creating a 2M ASON Differential Protection Service
[Link] Setting the Preset Restoration Trail for a 2M ASON Service
[Link] Parameters of 2M ASON Services
[Link].1 Parameters for Creating VC-12 Virtual TE Links
8.9 Configuring Orderwire
8.9.1 Configuring Addressing Calls
8.9.2 Configuring Conference Calls
8.9.3 Configuring NNI Orderwire
8.9.4 Dividing Orderwire Subnets
8.9.5 Parameter Description: Orderwire Phone
9 Common Tasks on Site
9.1 Getting to Know Indicators
9.1.1 Indicators on the Cabinet
9.1.2 Alarm Indicators on the Boards
9.2 Checking and Cleaning Optical Connectors
9.2.1 Checking the Optical Fiber Connector
9.2.2 Cleaning the Optical Fiber Connector
[Link] Using the Fiber Cleaner to Clean the Optical Fiber Connector
[Link] Using the Lens Tissue to Clean the Optical Fiber Connector
[Link] Using the Dust-Free Cotton Bar to Clean the Optical Fiber Adapter
9.3 Hardware Loopback
9.4 Resetting Boards
9.5 Replacing Boards and Components
9.5.1 General Precautions
9.5.2 Tools
9.5.3 Name and Feature of a Board
9.5.4 Replacing a Packet Processing Board
9.5.5 Replacing a Packet Interface Board
9.5.6 Replacing an EoD board
9.5.7 Replacing a Smart Line Board
9.5.8 Replacing an SDH Board
9.5.9 Replacing a PDH Board
9.5.10 Replacing an EOS Board
9.5.11 Replacing an ATM Board
9.5.12 Replacing an SAN/Video Board
9.5.13 Replacing a PCM Board
9.5.14 Replacing the Interface Boards
9.5.15 Replacing an Electrical Interface Switching Board
9.5.16 Replacing a GSCC Board
9.5.17 Replace a Cross-Connect and Timing Board
9.5.18 Replacing an AUX/EOW/AMU Board
9.5.19 Replacing a Fan Tray Assembly
9.5.20 Replacing an OADM Board
9.5.21 Replacing an Optical Wavelength Conversion Board
9.5.22 Replacing a FIB Board
9.5.23 Replacing a BA2/BPA Board
9.5.24 Replacing a COA
9.5.25 Replacing a Raman Amplifier Board
9.5.26 Replacing a WDM Optical Booster Amplifier Board
9.5.27 Replacing a DCU
9.5.28 Replacing a PIU Board
9.5.29 Replacing a Pluggable Optical/Electrical Module
9.5.30 Replacing the Air Filter
9.6 Cleaning the Air Filter
9.7 Powering Off the Equipment

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 18/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
10 Technical Specifications
10.1 Overall Specifications of the Equipment
10.1.1 Specifications of the Cabinet
10.1.2 Specifications of the Subrack
10.1.3 Power Supply Parameters
10.1.4 Packet System Performance
10.1.5 Timing and Synchronization Performance
10.1.6 TDM Transmission Performance
10.1.7 Laser Safety Class
10.1.8 Electromagnetic Compatibility
10.1.9 Environmental Specification
10.1.10 Safety Certification
10.1.11 Environmental Conditions
[Link] Environment for Storage
[Link] Environment for Transportation
[Link] Environment for Operation
10.2 Board Information Quick Reference
10.2.1 Quick Reference of Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board
10.2.2 Board Version Replacement
10.2.3 Quick Reference Table for Optical Interfaces
[Link] Common Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces of SDH Boards
[Link] Common Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces of PDH Boards
[Link] Common Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces of Packet Boards
[Link] Common Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces of EoD Boards
[Link] Common Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces of Data Boards
[Link] Common Parameters Specified for Smart Line Boards
10.2.4 Quick Reference of Board Functions
[Link] Information Quick Reference of SDH Boards
[Link] Information Quick Reference of PDH Boards
[Link] Information Quick Reference of Data Boards
[Link] Information Quick Reference of Packet Boards
[Link] Information Quick Reference of Smart Line Boards
10.2.5 Loopback Capability of the Boards
10.2.6 Protection Schemes Supported by Each Board
11 Glossary

OptiX OSN 3500 Quick Guide for Enterprise Customers Issue: 01

Product Version: V200R015C20 Date: 2017-01-15

Home

Planning Deployment 2nd Line 1st Line

Common Information

FXSO12/AT6
Hardware
Board Category
HSNS3 Quick Reference Tables
Quick View of Boards
点击即可启用 Adobe Flash Player
Smart Line Board Solution
Feature
At a Glance
Embedded PCM

Specification
Related Links Product Specifications
Power Consumption and
Version Updates Weight of Each Board

Bookshelf Posters Infographics Datasheet

Interactive Multimedia: PCM Alarm and Event
Monitoring Alarm
Packet System Performance Monitoring Performance
Video Library Maintenance Technology Dictionary
Guide
TDM Transmission
Performance

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2017. All rights reserved

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 19/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

1 Version Mapping
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Table 1 Version Mapping Between the OptiX OSN 3500 and the NMS
Product Name Version

OptiX OSN 3500 V200R015C20

iManager U2000 V200R016C60

Parent topic: Library Information

2 Document Introduction
This section provides the document overview.
This document aims at helping enterprise subscribers quickly learn about the hardware and software features, common configurations,
and maintenance key points of the products. This document describes the maintenance measures, status check, fault locating and
troubleshooting of the transport system. For more details about operation guides, see the OSN 3500 product [Link]
documents are available in the product documentation CD-ROM delivered with products or on the [Link] website.

3 Documentation Conventions
mbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

DANGER indicates a hazard with a high level or medium level of risk which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury.

WARNING indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in minor
or moderate injury.

CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in
equipment damage, data loss, performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.

Provides a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time.
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points in the main text.

neral Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.

mmand Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no
item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a
maximum of all items can be selected.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 20/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Convention Description

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item
can be selected.

I Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click
OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File >
Create > Folder.

Parent topic: Library Information

4 Where to Obtain Documentation

This section describes the method of obtaining a document.

oduct Documents
Table 1 describes how to obtain a document.

Table 1 Methods of obtaining a document

Stage Method
HedEx Document Package Individual Electronic Document

Initial installation Obtain the documents from the CD-ROM Download the documents from [Link]
delivered with the equipment.
Download the documents from
[Link]
Apply for a required document from the
respective Huawei local office.

Version upgrade Download the documents from

[Link]
Apply for a required document from the
respective Huawei local office.

NOTE:

To check or obtain the documentation of OSN 3500, log in to [Link] and browse or search for "OSN 3500" on the Product Support
tab page.
When logging in to [Link] you are recommended to apply for a username and a password of "equipment user" authority by using
your company Email address. For any help, contact Huawei technical support engineers.

ine Help

The Online Help is integrated into the software package and released. Two methods are available to display the Online Help:

Choose Help from the Main Menu on the NMS.

Press F1 after starting the NMS.

ease Documents
A release document is delivered with the product software package. Contact the respective Huawei local office to obtain a release
document.

Parent topic: Library Information

5 How to Provide Documentation Feedback

You can feed back your comments or suggestions to Huawei by either dialing the hotline number of the regional office or sending
emails.
Huawei welcomes and values your comments and recommendations. You can use the following ways to provide your comments and
recommendations for product documents, Online Help and Release Notes.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 21/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Send an e-mail to [Link]@[Link].
Dial the hotline of Huawei at the local office.

Parent topic: Library Information

6 Technical Support
During the equipment operation and maintenance, if a fault occurs and is difficult to locate or rectify, or if you cannot rectify the fault by
referring to the after-sales customer documentation, contact Huawei Customer Service Center to obtain technical support.

Call local Huawei branches or representative offices or contact Huawei Customer Service Center.

1. Call local Huawei branches or representative offices.

Click Global Service Hotline on the website [Link] to obtain the hotline numbers of local Huawei branches
or representative offices.
2. Contact Huawei Customer Service Center.
E-mail: [Link]@[Link]

Parent topic: Library Information

7 Library Changes
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues.

Updates in Issue 01 (2017-01-15) Based on Product Version V200R015C20

This document is the first release of V200R015C20.

Parent topic: Library Information

7.1 Updates in Issue 01 (2017-01-15) Based on Product Version

200R015C20
This document is the first release of V200R015C20.

Parent topic: Library Changes

8 Version Updates
This section describes the updates on hardware, software feature, and O&M in V100R015C10 to V100R015C20.

Feature Updates
This section describes new or modified features.

Hardware Updates
This section describes new or modified hardware.

O&M Updates
This section describes new or modified O&M information.

Parent topic: Library Information

8.1 Feature Updates

This section describes new or modified features.

Table 1 Feature Updates

Feature Name Update Type Description
Smart Line Board Solution "Smart Line Board Solution" are added.
New

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 22/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Feature Name Update Type Description

OTN Overheads "OTN Overheads" are added.
New

Parent topic: Version Updates

8.2 Hardware Updates

This section describes new or modified hardware.

Table 1 Hardware Updates

Board Name Update Type Description

IXCSA New infinite cross-connect and synchronous timing

board

HSNS3 New Smart 40G Line Service Processing Board

Parent topic: Version Updates

8.3 O&M Updates

This section describes new or modified O&M information.

rm and Performance Event Updates

Item Update Type Description

BRDCASTRATIO_OVER New The BRDCASTRATIO_OVER alarm indicates

that the ratio of broadcast traffic exceeds the
threshold. This alarm is reported when the
ratio of broadcast and multicast packets to all
packets exceeds the specified threshold and
the port traffic is greater than or equal to 10
Mbit/s.

ODUk_LOFLOM New The ODUk_LOFLOM alarm indicates ODUk

frame or ODUk multiframe loss. This alarm is
reported when frame header information in
the signals received by an upstream NE and
that received by a downstream NE are
inconsistent. k indicates the rate level. the
value of k can be 1 or 2.

ODUk_PM_AIS New The ODUk_LOFLOM alarm indicates ODUk

frame or ODUk multiframe loss. This alarm is
reported when frame header information in
the signals received by an upstream NE and
that received by a downstream NE are
inconsistent. k indicates the rate level. the
value of k can be 1, 2 or 3.

ODUk_PM_BDI New The ODUk_PM_BDI alarm indicates that an NE

receives an ODUk PM backward defect
indication (BDI) (ODUk is short for optical
channel data unit - k, and PM for path
monitoring). When detecting a signal fail (SF)
condition using the PM field, an NE sends a
BDI signal (all bits of the BDI byte are "1") to
its upstream NE. Upon receiving the BDI
signal, the upstream NE reports an
ODUk_PM_BDI alarm. k indicates the rate level.
the value of k can be 1, 2 or 3.

ODUk_PM_DEG New The ODUk_PM_DEG alarm indicates that an

ODUk PM signal degraded. This alarm is
generated if signal degradation occurs or the
bit error count exceeds its threshold when
BIP8 detection is in burst mode. k indicates
the rate level. the value of k can be 1, 2 or 3.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 23/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Item Update Type Description

ODUk_PM_LCK New The ODUk_PM_LCK alarm indicates that ODUk

PM signals are locked. The LCK function is
used to lock signals of a desired user access
point during testing. The LCK function also
adapts the functions of a source and a sink
through the server layer. When the signals of
an access point are locked, the value of the
STAT byte is 101 and an ODUk_PM_LCK alarm
is reported. k indicates the rate level. the value
of k can be 1, 2 or 3.

ODUk_PM_OCI New The ODUk_PM_OCI alarm indicates an ODUk

PM open connection (ODUk is short for optical
channel data unit - k, and PM for path
monitoring). An optical port on an NE reports
an ODUk_PM_OCI alarm when its signal output
end is not connected to its signal input end
and the value of the STAT byte is "110". k
indicates the rate level. the value of k can be 1,
2 or 3.

ODUk_PM_SSF New The ODUk_PM_SSF alarm indicates that signals

fail at the ODUk PM server layer (ODUk is
short for optical channel data unit - k, and PM
for path monitoring). k indicates the rate level.
the value of k can be 1, 2 or 3.

ODUk_PM_TIM New The ODUk_PM_TIM alarm indicates ODUk PM

trace identifier mismatch. This alarm is
reported if the trace identifier mismatch (TIM)
detection function is enabled and the trace
identifier at the local end and that at the peer
end do not match during control processing. k
indicates the rate level. the value of k can be 1,
2 or 3.

OPUk_PLM New The OPUk_PLM alarm indicates OPUk payload

mismatch. This alarm is reported if the payload
type in the received signals differs from that
defined in the adaptation function. k indicates
the rate level. the value of k can be 1, 2 or 3.

OTUk_AIS New The OTUk_AIS alarm indicates that an NE

receives an ODUk alarm indication signal (AIS)
(ODUk is short for optical channel data unit -
k). When detecting a signal fail (SF) condition,
an NE sends an AIS signal to its downstream
NE. Upon receiving the AIS signal, the
downstream NE reports an OTUk_AIS alarm. k
indicates the rate level. the value of k can be 3.

OTUk_BDI New The OTUk_BDI alarm indicates that an NE

receives an OTUk backward defect indication
(BDI) (OTUk is short for optical channel
transport unit - k). When detecting a signal fail
(SF) condition using the section monitoring
(SM) field, an NE sends a BDI signal (all bits of
the BDI byte are "1") to its upstream NE. Upon
receiving the BDI signal, the upstream NE
reports an OTUk_BDI alarm. k indicates the
rate level. the value of k can be 3.

OTUk_DEG New The OTUk_DEG alarm indicates that an OTUk

signal is degraded. This alarm is generated if
signal degradation occurs or the bit error
count exceeds its threshold when BIP8
detection is in burst mode. k indicates the rate
[Link] value of k can be 3.

OTUk_LOF New The OTUk_LOF alarm indicates OTUk frame

loss. This alarm is reported if the out of frame
(OOF) state persists for 3 consecutive
milliseconds during frame alignment
processing. After the OOF state changes to the
IF state and the IF state persists for 3
consecutive milliseconds, the cumulative
counter is reset to 0 and the alarm is cleared. k
indicates the rate level. the value of k can be 3.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 24/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Item Update Type Description

OTUk_LOM New The OTUk_LOM alarm indicates OTUk

multiframe loss. This alarm is reported if the
out of multiframe (OOM) state persists for 3
consecutive milliseconds during multiframe
alignment processing. The alarm is cleared
when the OOM state changes to the IM state.
k indicates the rate level. the value of k can be
3.

OTUk_SSF New The OTUk_SSF alarm indicates that signals fail

at the OTUk server layer (OTUk is short for
optical channel transport unit - k). k indicates
the rate level. the value of k can be 3.

OTUk_TIM New The OTUk_TIM alarm indicates OTUk trace

identifier mismatch. This alarm is reported if
the trace identifier mismatch (TIM) detection
function is enabled and the trace identifier at
the local end and that at the peer end do not
match. k indicates the rate level. the value of k
can be 3.

INSUFFCNT_FLSH_SPACE New The INSUFFCNT_FLSH_SPACE alarm indicates

that the flash file space is insufficient.

INSUFFCNT_MEM_SPACE New The INSUFFCNT_MEM_SPACE alarm indicates

that the file system space in the memory is
insufficient.

KMC_KEY_SYNC_FAIL New The KMC_KEY_SYNC_FAIL alarm indicates a

KMC key synchronization failure. (KMC is short
for key management center.)

NEBD_XC_DIF New The NEBD_XC_DIF is an alarm indicating that

service data is inconsistent between a system
control board and a cross-connect board.

STORAGE_FAIL New The STORAGE_FAIL is an alarm indicating a

memory fault. This alarm is reported when a
fault is detected from the memory of an NE.

ARP_MAC_MISMATCH New The ARP_MAC_MISMATCH alarm indicates

that the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)
static MAC address is different from the actual
one.

DCN_FAIL New The DCN_FAIL alarm indicates that an

outband/inband DCN channel fails. The
DCN_FAIL alarm is reported at the receive end
when a fiber cut occurs or the DCN mode is
set to different values for the ports at the local
and opposite ends.

RXBRDCAST_RATIO New Ratio of broadcast and multicast packets to all

packets in the receive direction.

TXBRDCAST_RATIO New Ratio of broadcast and multicast packets to all

packets in the transmit direction.

Parent topic: Version Updates

Compliance and Safety

When installing or maintaining Huawei network equipment, follow relevant safety precautions to ensure the safety of human beings and
the equipment.

General Safety Precautions

This topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuring and testing instruments when you
install, operate, and maintain Huawei devices.

Warning and Safety Symbols

Before using the equipment, note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment.

Electrical Safety
This topic describes safety precautions for high voltage, lightning strikes, high leakage current, power cables, fuses, and ESD.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 25/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Environment of Flammable Gas
This topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device.

Storage Batteries
This topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries.

Radiation
This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers.

Working at Heights
This topic describes safety precautions for working at heights.

Mechanical Safety
This topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes, handling sharp objects, operating fans, and carrying heavy objects.

Other Precautions
This topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards, binding signal cables, and routing cables.

Compliance and Safety

1 General Safety Precautions

This topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuring and testing instruments when you install,
operate, and maintain Huawei devices.

Safety Precautions
To ensure the safety of humans and a device, follow the marks on the device and all the safety precautions in this document when
installing, operating, and maintaining a device.
The "CAUTION", "WARNING", and "DANGER" marks in this document do not cover all the safety precautions that must be followed. They
are supplements to the safety precautions.

cal Laws and Regulations

When operating a device, always comply with the local laws and regulations. The safety precautions provided in the documents are in
addition/supplementary to the local laws and regulations.

sic Installation Requirements

The installation and maintenance personnel of Huawei devices must receive strict training and be familiar with the proper operation
methods and safety precautions before any operation.

Only trained and qualified personnel are permitted to install, operate, and maintain a device.
Only certified professionals are permitted to remove the safety facilities, and to troubleshoot and maintain the device.
Only the personnel authenticated or authorized by Huawei are permitted to replace or change the device or parts of the device
(including software).
The operating personnel must immediately report the faults or errors that may cause safety problems to the person in charge.

ounding Requirements
The grounding requirements are applicable to the device that needs to be grounded.

When installing the device, always connect the grounding facilities first. When removing the device, always disconnect the
grounding facilities last.
Ensure that the grounding conductor is intact.
Do not operate the device in the absence of a suitably installed grounding conductor.
The device must be connected to the PGND permanently. Before operating the device, check the electrical connections of the
device, and ensure that the device is properly grounded.

man Safety

When there is a risk of a lightning strike, do not operate the fixed terminal or touch the cables.
When there is risk of a lightning strike, unplug the AC power connector. Do not use the fixed terminal or touch the terminal or
antenna connector.

NOTE:
The preceding requirements apply to wireless fixed station terminals.

To avoid electric shocks, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits to telephone-network voltage (TNV) circuits.
Do not look into optical ports without eye protection. Otherwise, human eyes may be hurt by laser beams.
Before operating the device, wear an ESD protective coat, ESD gloves, and an ESD wrist strap. In addition, you need to get off the
conductive objects, such as jewelry and watches, to prevent electric shock and burn.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 26/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
In case of fire, escape from the building or site where the device is located and press the fire alarm bell or dial the telephone
number for fire alarms. Do not enter the burning building again in any situation.

vice Safety

Before any operation, install the device firmly on the ground or other rigid objects, such as on a wall or in a rack.
When the system is working, ensure that the ventilation hole is not blocked.
When installing the front panel, use a tool to tighten the screws firmly, if required.
After installing the device, clean up the packing materials.

Parent topic: Compliance and Safety

2 Warning and Safety Symbols

Before using the equipment, note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment.
Table 1 lists the warning and safety symbols of the OptiX OSN equipments and their meanings.

Table 1 Warning and safety symbols of the OptiX OSN equipments

Symbol Indication

This symbol is for anti-static protection.

A notice with this symbol indicates that you should wear an anti-static
wrist strap or glove when you touch a board. Otherwise, you may cause
damage to the board.

This symbol is for the laser class.

A notice with this symbol indicates the class of the laser. Avoid direct
exposure to the laser beams. Otherwise, it may damage you eyes or skin.

A notice with this symbol indicates where the subrack is grounded.

This symbol is for fan safety.

A notice with this symbol indicates that the fan leaves should not be
touched when the fan is rotating.

A notice with the APD symbol indicates that the overload value of an
optical interface is -9 dBm.

A notice with this symbol indicates that the air filter should be cleaned
periodically.

Power port warning label, Indicates that you must read the operation
instructions before connecting a power cable.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 27/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Parent topic: Compliance and Safety

3 Electrical Safety
This topic describes safety precautions for high voltage, lightning strikes, high leakage current, power cables, fuses, and ESD.

h Voltage

DANGER:

A high-voltage power supply provides power for device operations. Direct human contact with the high voltage power supply or
human contact through damp objects can be fatal.
Unspecified or unauthorized high voltage operations could result in fire or electric shock, or both.

understorm
The requirements apply only to wireless base stations or devices with antennas and feeders.

DANGER:
Do not perform operations on high voltage, AC power, towers, or backstays in stormy weather conditions.

h Leakage Current

CAUTION:
Before powering on a device, ground the device. Otherwise, the safety of humans and the device cannot be ensured.

If a high leakage current mark is labeled near the power connector of the device, you must connect the PGND terminal on the shell to the
ground before connecting the device to an A/C input power supply. This is to prevent the electric shock caused by leakage current of the
device.

wer Cables

DANGER:
Do not install or remove the power cable with a live line. Transient contact between the core of the power cable and the conductor may
generate electric arc or spark, which may cause fire or eye injury.

Before installing or removing power cables, you must power off the device.
Before connecting a power cable, you must ensure that the label on the power cable is correct.

vice with Power On

DANGER:
Installing or removing a device is prohibited if the device is on.

ort Circuits
When installing and maintaining devices, place and use the associated tools and instruments in accordance with regulations to avoid
short-circuits caused by metal objects.

NOTICE:
To avoid short-circuits when using a tool (such as a screwdriver), do not place the tool on the ventilation plate of the subrack.

NOTICE:
Prevent any screws from dropping into the subrack or chassis to avoid short-circuits.

se

CAUTION:
If the fuse on a device blows, replace the fuse with a fuse of the same type and specifications to ensure safe operation of the device.

ctrostatic Discharge

NOTICE:

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 28/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
The static electricity generated by the human body may damage the electrostatic sensitive components on the board, such as the large-
scale integrated circuit (LSI).

The human body can generate static electromagnetic fields in the following situations: physical movement, clothing friction,
friction between shoes and the ground, plastics in the hand. Such static electromagnetic effects can remain for an appreciable
time.
Before operating a device, circuit boards, or ASICs, wear an ESD wrist strap that is properly grounded. The ESD wrist strap can
prevent the electrostatic-sensitive components from being damaged by the static electricity in the human body.

Figure 1 shows the method of wearing an ESD wrist strap.

Figure 1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap

Parent topic: Compliance and Safety

4 Environment of Flammable Gas

This topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device.

DANGER:
Do not place or operate devices in an environment of flammable or explosive air or gas.

Operating an electronic device in an environment of flammable gas causes a severe hazard.

Parent topic: Compliance and Safety

5 Storage Batteries
This topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries.

DANGER:
Before operating a storage battery, you must read the safety precautions carefully and be familiar with the method of connecting a
storage battery.

Incorrect operations of storage batteries cause hazards. During operation, prevent any short-circuit, and prevent the electrolyte
from overflowing or leakage.
If the electrolyte overflows, it causes potential hazards to the device. The electrolyte may corrode metal parts and the circuit
boards, and ultimately damage the circuit boards.
A storage battery contains a great deal of energy. Misoperations may cause a short-circuit, which leads to human injuries.

sic Precautions
To ensure safety, note the following points before installing or maintaining the storage battery:

Use special insulation tools.

Wear an eye protector and take effective protection measures.
Wear rubber gloves and a protection coat to prevent the hazard caused by the overflowing electrolyte.
When handling the storage battery, ensure that its electrodes are upward. Leaning or reversing the storage battery is prohibited.
Before installing, handling, maintaining the storage battery, ensure that the storage battery is disconnected from the power
supply that charges the storage battery.

ort-Circuit

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 29/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

DANGER:
A battery short-circuit may cause human injuries. Although the voltage of an ordinary battery is low, the instantaneous high current
caused by a short-circuit emits a great deal of energy.

Avoid any short-circuit of batteries caused by metal objects. If possible, disconnect the working battery before performing other
operations.

zardous Gas

NOTICE:
Do not use any unsealed lead-acid storage battery. Lay a storage battery horizontally and fix it properly to prevent the battery from
emitting flammable gas, which may cause fire or device erosion.

Working lead-acid storage batteries emit flammable gas. Therefore, ventilation and fireproofing measures must be taken at the sites
where lead-acid storage batteries are placed.

tery Temperature

NOTICE:
If a battery overheats, the battery may be deformed or damaged, and the electrolyte may overflow.

When the temperature of the battery is higher than 60°C, you need to check whether the electrolyte overflows. If the electrolyte
overflows, take appropriate measures immediately.

tery Leakage

NOTICE:
In the event of acid overflow or spillage, neutralize the acid and clean it up appropriately.

When handling a leaky battery, protect against the possible damage caused by the acid. When you find the electrolyte leaks, you can use
the following substances to counteract and absorb the leaking electrolyte:

Sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3)

Sodium carbonate (Na2CO3)

In the event of acid overflow or spillage, neutralize the acid and clean it up as recommended by the battery manufacturer and any local
regulations for acid disposal.
If a person contacts battery electrolyte, clean the skin that contacts the battery electrolyte immediately by using water. In case of a severe
situation, the person must be sent to a hospital immediately.

Parent topic: Compliance and Safety

6 Radiation
This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers.

Laser and Optical Fibers

The laser beam can cause damage to your eyes. Hence, you must exercise caution when using optical fibers.

Electromagnetic Exposure
This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure.

Forbidden Areas
The topic describes requirements for a forbidden area.

Laser
This topic describes safety precautions for lasers.

Parent topic: Compliance and Safety

6.1 Laser and Optical Fibers

The laser beam can cause damage to your eyes. Hence, you must exercise caution when using optical fibers.

DANGER:

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 30/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
When installing or maintaining an optical interface board or optical fibers, avoid direct eye exposure to the laser beams launched from
the optical interface board or fiber connectors. The laser beam can cause damage to your eyes.

ety Instructions Regarding Lasers

To avoid laser radiation, obey the following instructions:

All operations should be performed by authorized personnel who have completed the required training courses.
Wear a pair of eye-protective glasses when you are handling lasers or fibers.
Ensure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber connectors.
Do not look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector when you are not sure whether the optical source is switched
off.
Use an optical power meter to measure the optical power and ensure that the optical source is switched off.
Before opening the front door of an optical transmission device, ensure that you are not exposed to laser radiation.
Do not use an optical tool such as a microscope, a magnifying glass, or an eye loupe to view the optical connector or fiber that is
transmitting optical signals.

tructions Regarding Fiber Handling

Read and abide by the following instructions before handling fibers:

Only trained personnel are permitted to cut and splice fibers.

Before cutting or splicing a fiber, ensure that the fiber is disconnected from the optical source. After disconnecting the fiber, cap
to the fiber connectors.

aning Fiber Connectors and Optical Interfaces

NOTICE:
If fiber connectors or flanges are contaminated, optical power commissioning is seriously affected. Therefore, the two endfaces and
flange of every external fiber must be cleaned before the fiber is led into the equipment through the ODF for being inserted into an
optical interface on the equipment.

The fiber connectors and optical interfaces of the lasers must be cleaned with the following special cleaning tools and materials:

Special cleaning solvent: It is preferred to use isoamylol. Propyl alcohol, however, can also be used. It is prohibited that you use
alcohol and formalin.
Non-woven lens tissue
Special compressed gas
Cotton stick (medical cotton or long fiber cotton)
Special cleaning roll, used with the recommended cleaning solvent
Special magnifier for fiber connectors

placing Optical Fibers

When replacing an optical fiber, cover the fiber connector of the unused optical fiber with a protective cap.

nnecting Optical Fibers

Use an attenuator if the optical power is excessively high. A high received optical power damages the optical interface.
Directly connect an attenuator to a slanting optical interface. Install the attenuator on the IN port instead of the OUT port.
Do not directly connect an attenuator to the level optical interface. Use the optical distribution frame (ODF) to connect an
attenuator to a level optical interface.

Figure 1 shows a slanting optical interface, and Figure 2 shows a level optical interface.

Figure 1 Slanting optical interface

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 31/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 2 Level optical interface

Parent topic: Radiation

6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure

This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure.

CAUTION:
High-intensity RF signals are harmful to the human body.

If multiple transmit antennas are installed on a tower or backstay, you must request the relevant personnel to shut down the transmit
antenna before they install or maintain the antenna locally.
During the operation, the base transceiver station (BTS) may generate electromagnetic radiation (namely, radiation harm). Before
installing and operating the BTS equipment, read the guidelines to ensure safe operations. When installing the BTS equipment, obey the
local rules and regulations.

Parent topic: Radiation

6.3 Forbidden Areas

The topic describes requirements for a forbidden area.

The site of the antenna must be far away from the area where the electromagnetic radiation is beyond the specified range and
the public cannot reach.
Before entering the area where the electromagnetic radiation is beyond the specified range, the associated personnel must learn
about the area and shut down the electromagnetic radiator. The area where the electromagnetic radiation is beyond the specified
range, if any, should be within 10 meters away from the antenna.
A physical barrier and an eye-catching warning flag must be available in each forbidden area.

Parent topic: Radiation

6.4 Laser
This topic describes safety precautions for lasers.

CAUTION:
When handling optical fibers, do not stand close to, or look into the optical fiber outlet directly without eye protection.

Laser transceivers are used in the optical transmission system and associated test tools. The laser transmitted through the bare optical
fiber produces a small beam of light, and thus it has very high power density and is invisible to human eyes. When a beam of light enters
eyes, the eyes may be damaged.
In normal cases, viewing an un-terminated optical fiber or a damaged optical fiber without eye protection at a distance greater than 150
mm does not cause eye injury. Eye injury may occur, however, if an optical tool such as a microscope, magnifying glass, or eye loupe is
used to view an un-terminated optical fiber.

ety Instructions Regarding Lasers

To avoid laser radiation, obey the following instructions:

All operations should be performed by authorized personnel who have completed the required training courses.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 32/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Wear a pair of eye-protective glasses when you are handling lasers or fibers.
Ensure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber connectors.
Do not look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector when you are not sure whether the optical source is switched
off.
Use an optical power meter to measure the optical power and ensure that the optical source is switched off.
Before opening the front door of an optical transmission device, ensure that you are not exposed to laser radiation.
Do not use an optical tool such as a microscope, a magnifying glass, or an eye loupe to view the optical connector or fiber that is
transmitting optical signals.

tructions Regarding Fiber Handling

Read and abide by the following instructions before handling fibers:

Only trained personnel are permitted to cut and splice fibers.

Before cutting or splicing a fiber, ensure that the fiber is disconnected from the optical source. After disconnecting the fiber, cap
to the fiber connectors.

Parent topic: Radiation

7 Working at Heights
This topic describes safety precautions for working at heights.

CAUTION:
When working at heights, be cautious to prevent objects from falling down.

The requirements for working at heights are as follows:

The personnel who work at heights must be trained.

Carry and handle the operating machines and tools with caution to prevent them from falling down.
Safety measures, such as wearing a helmet and a safety belt, must be taken.
Wear cold-proof clothes when working at heights in cold areas.
Check all lifting appliances thoroughly before starting the work, and ensure that they are intact.

Hoisting Heavy Objects

This topic describes the safety precautions for hoisting heavy objects that you must follow when installing, operating, and
maintaining Huawei devices.

Using Ladders
This topic describes safety precautions for using ladders.

Parent topic: Compliance and Safety

7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects

This topic describes the safety precautions for hoisting heavy objects that you must follow when installing, operating, and maintaining
Huawei devices.

CAUTION:
When heavy objects are being hoisted, do not walk below the cantilever or hoisted objects.

Only trained and qualified personnel can perform hoisting operations.

Before hoisting heavy objects, check that the hoisting tools are complete and in good condition.
Before hoisting heavy objects, ensure that the hoisting tools are fixed to a secure object or wall with good weight-bearing
capacity.
Issue orders with short and explicit words to ensure correct operations.
Ensure that the angle between the two cables is less than or equal to 90 degrees during the lifting, as shown in Figure 1.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 33/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Hoisting heavy objects

Parent topic: Working at Heights

7.2 Using Ladders

This topic describes safety precautions for using ladders.

ecking Ladders

Before using a ladder, check whether the ladder is damaged. After checking that the ladder is in good condition, you can use the
ladder.
Before using a ladder, you should know the maximum weight capacity of the ladder. Avoid overweighing the ladder.

cing Ladders
The proper slant angle of the ladder is 75 degrees. You can measure the slant angle of the ladder with an angle square or your arms, as
shown in Figure 1. When using a ladder, to prevent the ladder from sliding, ensure that the wider feet of the ladder are downward, or take
protection measures for the ladder feet. Ensure that the ladder is placed securely.

Figure 1 Slanting a ladder

mbing Up a Ladder
When climbing up a ladder, pay attention to the following points:

Ensure that the center of gravity of your body does not deviate from the edges of the two long sides.
Before operations, ensure that your body is stable to reduce risks.
Do not climb higher than the fourth rung of the ladder (counted from up to down).

If you want to climb up a roof, ensure that the ladder top is at least one meter higher than the roof, as shown in Figure 2.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 34/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 2 Ladder top being one meter higher than the roof

Parent topic: Working at Heights

8 Mechanical Safety
This topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes, handling sharp objects, operating fans, and carrying heavy objects.

ling Holes

CAUTION:
Do not drill holes on the cabinet without prior permission. Drilling holes without complying with the requirements affects the
electromagnetic shielding performance of the cabinet and damages the cables inside the cabinet. In addition, if the scraps caused by
drilling enter the cabinet, the printed circuit boards (PCBs) may be short-circuited.

Before drilling a hole on the cabinet, remove the cables inside the cabinet.
Wear an eye protector when drilling holes. This is to prevent eyes from being injured by the splashing metal scraps.
Wear protection gloves when drilling holes.
Take measures to prevent the metallic scraps from falling into the cabinet. After the drilling, clean up the metallic scraps.

arp Objects

CAUTION:
Wear protection gloves when carrying the device. This is to prevent hands from being injured by the sharp edges of the device.

ns

When replacing parts, place the objects such as the parts, screws, and tools properly. This is to prevent them from falling into the
operating fans, which damages the fans or device.
When replacing the parts near fans, keep your fingers or boards from touching operating fans before the fans are powered off
and stop running. Otherwise, the hands or the boards are damaged.

rrying Heavy Objects

Wear protection gloves when carrying heavy objects. This is to prevent hands from being hurt.

CAUTION:

The carrier must be prepared for load bearing before carrying heavy objects. This is to prevent the carrier from being strained or
pressed by the heavy objects.
When you pull a chassis out of the cabinet, pay attention to the unstable or heavy objects on the cabinet. This is to prevent the
heavy objects on the cabinet top from falling down, which may hurt you.

Generally, two persons are needed to carry a chassis. It is prohibited that only one person carries a heavy chassis. When carrying a
chassis, the carriers should stretch their backs and move stably to avoid being strained.
When moving or lifting a chassis, hold the handles or bottom of the chassis. Do not hold the handles of the modules installed in
the chassis, such as the power modules, fan modules, and boards.

Parent topic: Compliance and Safety

9 Other Precautions
This topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards, binding signal cables, and routing cables.
localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 35/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
moving and Inserting a Board

NOTICE:
When inserting a board, wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and handle the board gently to avoid distorting pins on the backplane.

Slide the board along the guide rails.

Do not contact one board with another to avoid short-circuits or damage.
When holding a board in hand, do not touch the board circuits, components, connectors, or connection slots of the board to
prevent damage caused by ESD of the human body to the electrostatic-sensitive components.

ding Signal Cables

NOTICE:
Bind the signal cables separately from the high-current or high-voltage cables.

uting Cables
In the case of extremely low temperature, heavy shock or vibration may damage the plastic skin of the cables. To ensure the construction
safety, comply with the following requirements:

When installing cables, ensure that the environment temperature is above 0°C.
If the cables are stored in a place where the ambient temperature is below 0°C, transfer them to a place at room temperature and
store the cables for more than 24 hours before installation.
Handle the cables gently, especially in a low-temperature environment. Do not perform any improper operations, for example,
pushing the cables down directly from a truck.

Parent topic: Compliance and Safety

Quick View of Product

Product Highlights and Specifications
This topic describes the highlights and specifications of the OptiX OSN equipment.

Product Application
This section describes the networking application and key features of OptiX OSN equipment on enterprise networks.

System Architecture
This chapter describes the system architecture of the OptiX OSN equipment.

Packet Services
This section describes the service types, interfaces, and maximum receiving capacity of each service type supported by the OptiX
OSN equipment in packet mode.

TDM Services
The supported services are SDH services, PDH services and many other services.

1 Product Highlights and Specifications

This topic describes the highlights and specifications of the OptiX OSN equipment.

Product Highlights
This section describes the equipment characteristics in terms of structure and technology.

Product Specifications
This section describes the appearances and specifications of OptiX OSN equipment.

Parent topic: Quick View of Product

1.1 Product Highlights

This section describes the equipment characteristics in terms of structure and technology.

gregation&Core Intelligent Optical Transmission System Based on Universal Switching

Large capacity: provides 160 Gbit/s for packet services, 200 Gbit/s for higher order TDM services, and 20 Gbit/s for lower order
TDM services, with 15 service processing slots and 16 interface slots.
localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 36/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Ultra-broadband: provides a built-in WDM module to support the smooth evolution of bandwidth.
Future orientation: supports packet and TDM services on a single device.

hly Reliable and Efficient Transmission Through Hard and Soft Pipes

Traditional SDH hard pipes transmit TDM services with high quality and low delay, ensuring reliable transmission of production
dispatching services and leased line services.
MPLS-TP soft pipes support statistical multiplexing of packet services, ensuring reliable and efficient transmission of high-
bandwidth data services.
Hard and soft pipes based on universal switching reconciles live-network services and future-oriented IP services, ensuring
smooth evolution of transport networks.

mpetitive Features for Enterprise Subscribers

ASON mesh networking protects against multi-point faults, improving network reliability.
The all-in-one solution with the built-in PCM module provides low-speed service access for enterprise subscribers.
The capability of a 270-km ultra-long transmission distance without Raman amplifiers requires fewer relay stations and reduces
network construction costs and maintenance difficulty.

mple O&M Using the TP-Assist

MPLS-TP OAM solution: features easy planning, rapid deployment, and simple O&M of services, enabling management of large
packet networks
Network-level visualization: graphically displays end-to-end service configuration, as well as path performance and status.
Better O&M experience (than SDH O&M): delivers visualized end-to-end bandwidth management, smart fault locating, and
analyzable and predicable network management.

Parent topic: Product Highlights and Specifications

1.2 Product Specifications

This section describes the appearances and specifications of OptiX OSN equipment.

Table 1 Product appearances and specifications

Indicator and Specifications Description

Appearance

Dimensions (H x W x D) 722 mm x 497 mm x 295 mm

Number of valid slots 15 for processing boards and 16 for interface boards

Equipment capacity Packet 160 Gbit/s

TDM 200 Gbit/s higher order cross-connections and 20 Gbit/s lower order cross-connections

Service type supported SDH, PDH, ATM, CES, Ethernet , PCM, SAN, video and others

Smart line board HSNS3: 40 Gbit/s for a single optical port

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 37/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Indicator and Specifications Description

Network topology Point-to-point, chain, star, ring, ring with chain, intersecting rings, tangent rings

Backup and protection Network-level Tunnel 1:1/1+1 APS, PW 1:1/1+1 APS, packet linear MSP, LPT, MSTP, MRPS
protection (packet)

SDH protection: subnet connection protection, linear MSP, ring MSP, E1 SNCP, DNI
Network-level
protection, shared-fiber virtual path protection, optical-path-shared MSP
protection (TDM)
EoS protection: LCAS, LPT, STP/RSTP, MSTP, ERPS, RPR, VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection

Packet: LAG, MC-LAG

TDM: TPS, BPS, PPS, LAG, DLAG, 1+1 protection for ATM boards, 1+1 protection for
wavelength conversion units
1+1 hot backup for cross-connect and timing units
Device-level
1+1 hot backup for SCC units
protection
1+1 hot backup for power input units
1:N protection for +3.3 V power supply of the board
Intelligent fan
Board protection modes under abnormal conditions

Maintenance MPLS OAM CV, FFD, BDI, FDI, Ping, Traceroute

MPLS-TP OAM CC, RDI, AIS, LB, LT, LM (only single-ended LM), DM, TST, LCK, CSF (only PW CSF)

Ethernet service OAM: CC, LB, LT, LM (only single-ended LM), DM (only two-way DM)
ETH OAM (packet) Ethernet port OAM: OAM auto-discovery, link performance monitoring, remote loopback,
fault detection, self-loop detection

ETH OAM (TDM) Ethernet service OAM: CC, LB, LT, OAM_Ping
Ethernet port OAM: OAM auto-discovery, link performance monitoring, remote loopback,
fault detection, self-loop detection

Synchronization Packet Physical-layer clock

Synchronous Ethernet
IEEE 1588v2
CES ACR

TDM Physical-layer clock

DCN Outband DCN HWECC, IP over DCC, OSI over DCC
Inband DCN HWECC, IP
TP-Assist Service configuration: supports end-to-end service configuration and automatic
deployment of alarm management.
Service commissioning: supports the one-click service connectivity test, one-click service
performance test, and automatic test without any instrument.
Routine maintenance: supports performance statistics and monitoring and E-Line and E-
LAN service path visualization.
Fault diagnosis: supports intelligent fault locating, IP ping initiation and response, and
service loopback detection.

Standard working voltage If the standard voltage of the input power is -48 V, the power voltage ranges from -38.4 V
to -57.6 V.
If the standard voltage of the input power is -60 V, the power voltage ranges from -48 V to
-72 V.

Installation method ETSI cabinet

Equipment running Subrack temperature Long-time operation: 0ºC to 45ºC
environment
Short-time operation: -5ºC to +55ºC

Subrack humidity Long-time operation: 5-85%

(relatively)
Short-time operation: 5-95%

Reliability specifications System availability 0.999996370

Mean time to 1h
resolution (MTTR)
Mean time between 31.45 years
failures (MTBF)

Parent topic: Product Highlights and Specifications

2 Product Application
localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 38/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
This section describes the networking application and key features of OptiX OSN equipment on enterprise networks.

Rail Transportation Industry: Unified Bearer, Flexible Adaptation

The continued development of the rail transportation poses higher requirements on transport networks. The end-to-end MSTP
solution provides end-to-end highly secure and reliable transmission.

Power Industry: Hard and Soft Pipes, Ultra Long Haul Transmission, Customization
With the informationization requirements on smart grids, power communications networks need to transmit diverse, packet
services. Huawei's SDH hard pipe + IP soft pipe solution can fully meet communications requirements of the power industry.

Broadcast Television Industry: Unified Transmission of Broadcast, Data, and Leased Line Services on One Network
With the booming of VIP leased services, the broadcast television industry demands unified access, transmission and dispatching of
various leased line services. MSTP equipment enables one network to transmit broadcast, data, and leased line services.

Parent topic: Quick View of Product

2.1 Rail Transportation Industry: Unified Bearer, Flexible Adaptation

The continued development of the rail transportation poses higher requirements on transport networks. The end-to-end MSTP solution
provides end-to-end highly secure and reliable transmission.

working Scenarios
Figure 1 and Figure 2 show typical networking scenarios.
Figure 1 Rail networking

As shown in Figure 1, MSTP equipment universally transmits the services from the rail industry, such as orderwire phone, dispatching
phone, videoconferencing, environment monitoring, emergency command, wireless train dispatching, and TIMS/PMIS services, at
different network layers. OptiX OSN 1500 or OptiX OSN 500, and OptiX OSN 550 are used at the access layer, and OptiX OSN
3500/7500/7500 II at the aggregation layer and backbone networks of railway bureaus. WDM equipment is generally used on national
backbone networks.

Figure 2 Metro/Tram networking

As shown in Figure 2, a ring topology is used for metro/tram networking. MSTP equipment supports all-grained (PCM, E1, and 10GE)
service access for communications between the stations and the control center. OptiX OSN 580/7500 II is generally used for metro/tram
networking.

y Technologies
Smart 40G/10G, hard and soft pipes, MPLS-TP, and built-in PCM are key technologies of the MSTP solution. These technologies provides
highly secure and reliable transmission and simpler network structure and O&M, and meets the growth of bandwidth requirements.
Therefore, it is an ideal communications option for the rail industry.

Parent topic: Product Application

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 39/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

2.2 Power Industry: Hard and Soft Pipes, Ultra Long Haul Transmission,
ustomization
With the informationization requirements on smart grids, power communications networks need to transmit diverse, packet services.
Huawei's SDH hard pipe + IP soft pipe solution can fully meet communications requirements of the power industry.

working Scenarios
Figure 1 shows the typical topology.

Figure 1 Power networking

As shown in Figure 1, MSTP equipment transmits the services at different layers from the power industry, such as video, dispatching phone,
and RTU services, to the control center. OptiX OSN 1500 or OptiX OSN 500 and OptiX OSN 550 are used at the access layer, and OptiX
OSN 3500/7500 II at the core layer.

y Technologies
Single-fiber 40G on a smart line board, and customization features including built-in PCM, 2M optical port, ASON differential protection
and ultra-long transmission are key technologies of the MSTP hard and soft pipe solution for the power industry. Single-fiber 40G on a
smart line board adapts to the development of future-oriented data services. The customization features fully meet the urgent
requirements of the power industry. This MSTP hard and soft pipe solution is a combination of highly reliable bearers of TDM services
and highly efficient bearers of future-oriented packet services of the power industry.

Parent topic: Product Application

2.3 Broadcast Television Industry: Unified Transmission of Broadcast, Data,

nd Leased Line Services on One Network
With the booming of VIP leased services, the broadcast television industry demands unified access, transmission and dispatching of
various leased line services. MSTP equipment enables one network to transmit broadcast, data, and leased line services.

working Scenarios
Figure 1 shows the typical topology.
Figure 1 Broadcast television networking

As shown in Figure 1, MSTP equipment provides industrial interconnection, specifically VIP leased lines for industries such as enterprises,
finance, and governments, as well as basic services for the broadcast television industry. OptiX OSN 500/550 is used on the access point,
OptiX OSN 3500/580 on the access ring, and OptiX OSN 7500 II on the aggregation ring.

y Technologies
Smart 40G, hard/soft pipes, and MPLS-TP are key technologies of the MSTP solution, fully meeting VIP leased line requirements of the
broadcast television industry.

Parent topic: Product Application

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 40/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

3 System Architecture
This chapter describes the system architecture of the OptiX OSN equipment.
The OptiX OSN equipment uses various boards and forms a system architecture where the SDH cross-connect matrix unit and the packet
switching unit are the core. As shown in Figure 1, the system architecture of the OptiX OSN equipment consists of the units listed in Table 1.

Figure 1 System architecture

Table 1 Units supported by the OptiX OSN 3500

Unit Description

Network-side TDM mode:

service interface
SDH interface unit
units
WDM unit
Optical amplifier unit and dispersion compensation unit
Packet mode:
Ethernet interface unit
CES interface unit
ATM/IMA interface unit

Core units TDM mode: SDH cross-connect matrix unit

Packet mode: Packet switching unit

User-side service TDM mode:

interface units
SDH interface unit
PDH interface unit
Ethernet interface unit
DDN interface unit
ATM/IMA interface unit
RPR interface unit
SAN/Video interface unit
PCM interface unit
Packet mode:
Ethernet interface unit
CES interface unit
ATM/IMA interface unit

Common units Overhead processing unit

Synchronous timing unit
Power interface unit
Auxiliary interface unit
System control and communication unit

Parent topic: Quick View of Product

4 Packet Services
This section describes the service types, interfaces, and maximum receiving capacity of each service type supported by the OptiX OSN
equipment in packet mode.

Service Description
In packet mode, the OptiX OSN equipment supports Ethernet services , ATM/IMA services,and CES services.

Service Interfaces
This section provides the Ethernet CES and ATM/IMA service interfaces supported by the OptiX OSN equipment in packet mode.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 41/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Service Receiving Capacity
The capacities of services that the OptiX OSN equipment can receive vary according to the type and quantity of the configured
boards.

Parent topic: Quick View of Product

4.1 Service Description

In packet mode, the OptiX OSN equipment supports Ethernet services , ATM/IMA services,and CES services.

Service Models
The OptiX OSN equipment adopts different layered models on the UNI and NNI sides when it is interconnected with different
devices on the two sides.

Ethernet Services
The OptiX OSN equipment supports various Ethernet services and provides ideal L2VPN solutions.

CES Services
The circuit emulation service (CES) helps to solve the problem of insufficient optical fiber resources in the access ring and allows
TDM services to be transparently transmitted across the pure packet mode.

ATM/IMA Services
The OptiX OSN equipment supports ATM/IMA services in packet mode.

Parent topic: Packet Services

4.1.1 Service Models

The OptiX OSN equipment adopts different layered models on the UNI and NNI sides when it is interconnected with different devices on
the two sides.
The OptiX OSN equipment adopts the MPLS-based PWE3 model to process packet services.

NOTE:

The OptiX OSN equipment supports only static label allocation of PWE3.

sic Concepts
The associated basic concepts are customer edge (CE), provider edge (PE), and provider (P), as shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1 PWE3 networking diagram

CE: provides interfaces. A CE can be a router, an exchange, or a host. Generally, a CE need not support MPLS.
PE: refers to an edge device of the service provider (SP) network, which is directly connected to a CE.
P: refers to a backbone router on the SP network, which is indirectly connected to a CE. A P provides only the MPLS forwarding
function.

LS-Based PWE3 Model

Figure 2 shows the MPLS-based PWE3 model adopted by the OptiX OSN equipment that functions as a PE.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 42/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 2 MPLS-based PWE3 model

On the UNI side, a PE is interconnected with a CE and accesses services from users to the PSN. The layers of the MPLS-based PWE3
model have the following functions on the UNI side:

Physical layer
The physical layer provides the interfaces between the OptiX OSN equipment and transmission media (such as electrical cables
and optical fibers).
In the CE->PE direction, the physical layer processes the physical signals (optical or electrical signals) from the CE, extracts
information from the signals, and then sends the information to the service interface layer.
In the PE->CE direction, the physical layer receives information from the service interface layer, converts the information
to signals that can be transmitted over the transmission media, and then transmits the signals to the CE through physical
channels.

Service interface layer

The service interface layer transmits the services between the physical layer and the local service processing layer.
In the CE->PE direction, the service interface layer receives information from the physical layer, identifies service types,
and then sends the services to the respective parts of the local service processing layer.
In the PE->CE direction, the service interface layer receives service signals from the local service processing layer, chooses
proper physical channels, and then sends the service signals to the physical layer.

Local service processing layer

The local service processing layer processes different services according to user requirements.

On the NNI side, the OptiX OSN equipment is interconnected with the equipment on the PSN and transmits user services on the PSN.
The layers of the MPLS-based PWE3 model have the following functions on the NNI side:

Emulation service layer

The emulation service layer corresponds to the payload to be encapsulated into PWs. One emulation service corresponds to one
PW. This is a logical layer and the OptiX OSN equipment does not perform any operation at this layer.
PWE3 encapsulation layer
The PWE3 encapsulation layer uses different encapsulation modes for different emulation services. At this layer, emulation
services are uniformly encapsulated into PWE3 packets, or different emulation services are decapsulated from PWE3 packets.
MPLS layer
The MPLS layer includes two layers of MPLS labels.
The outer MPLS label is a tunnel label, which identifies a tunnel that traverses an MPLS network between the two PE sites
of a service. Such a tunnel carries PWs.
The inner MPLS label is a PW label, which identifies a PW in a tunnel.

Data link and physical layer

The data link and physical layer carry the MPLS layer and provide links for data transmission at the MPLS layer.
The OptiX OSN equipment supports Ethernet links (GE/10GE interfaces) on the NNI side.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 43/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
The forwarder between the UNI and NNI forwards the services that are locally processed on the UNI side to the NNI side and forwards
the emulation services on the NNI side to the UNI side.

NOTE:
It is not recommended that the OptiX OSN equipment use Ethernet links connected to FE electrical interfaces on the NNI side.

rvice Model of Ps
Figure 3 shows the service model adopted by the OptiX OSN equipment that functions as a P.
Figure 3 Service model of the OptiX OSN equipment

On the NNI side, the OptiX OSN equipment is interconnected with the equipment on the PSN so that services can be transmitted on the
PSN.
The OptiX OSN equipment provides only the MPLS forwarding function. That is, the equipment forwards the MPLS packets according to
the forwarding table of tunnel labels and the MPLS labels.

Parent topic: Service Description

4.1.2 Ethernet Services

The OptiX OSN equipment supports various Ethernet services and provides ideal L2VPN solutions.
A virtual private network (VPN) is a private network constructed on the basis of the public network. The L2VPN is the VPN based on
technologies of the link layer. The VPN constructed on the public network can provide the same security, reliability and manageability as
the existing private networks.
Service providers can provide the VPN value-added service for enterprises to fully use the existing network resources and to increase the
service volume. In addition, service providers can consolidate long-term partnership with enterprises.
For VPN users, the cost to lease the network is saved. The flexibility of the VPN networking makes the network management easier for
enterprises. As the network security and encryption technology develops, the private data can be transmitted over the public network
with security.

rvice Form
For the OptiX OSN equipment, the Ethernet service has the following forms.

Point-to-point service: E-Line service

Multipoint-to-multipoint service: E-LAN service

NOTE:
The OptiX OSN equipment also supports E-aggr services derived from E-Line and E-LAN services.

Standardization organizations such as ITU-T, IETF and MEF stipulate the model frames for L2 Ethernet services. Table 1 lists these model
frames. In this document, the L2 Ethernet services are of the model frame stipulated by MEF.

Table 1 Comparison among L2 Ethernet services stipulation

Service Type Service Multiplexing Transport Tunnel IETF Model ITU-T Model MEF Model

Point-to- Line Physically isolated Physically isolated - EPL E-Line

point

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 44/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
service
Service Type Service Multiplexing Transport Tunnel IETF Model ITU-T Model MEF Model

Virtual Line VLAN VLAN - EVPL

MPLS VPWS
Multipoint- LAN Physically isolated Physically isolated - EPLAN E-LAN
to-
Virtual LAN VLAN Physically isolated - EVPLAN
multipoint
service VLAN -
MPLS VPLS

ine Service
Figure 1 illustrates the E-Line service provided by the OptiX OSN equipment.
Company A has two branches in City 1 and City 3. Company B has two branches in City 2 and City 3. Company C has two branches in City
1 and City 2. The branches of Companies A, B, and C require data communication. The OptiX OSN equipment can separately provide a
private line service for Companies A, B, and C to meet the communication requirement. In addition, the service data is completely
isolated.
Figure 1 E-Line service

AN Service
Figure 2 illustrates the E-LAN service provided by the OptiX OSN equipment.
Company Z is headquartered in City 3. Branch A of the company is located in City 1 and City 2, and Branch B of the company is located in
City 1, City 2, and City 3. Branch A and Branch B do not communicate with each other, and the data of them should be separated from
each other. The headquarters, however, need to communicate with all the branches and need to access the Internet.
The OptiX OSN equipment can be used to provide the E-LAN service. Different VLAN tags are used to identify service data from different
branches. In this manner, the headquarters can communicate with the branches and the data from different branches is isolated. In
addition, the VLAN is used to isolate the Internet data accessed by the headquarters from the internal service data.

Figure 2 E-LAN service

AGGR Service
As shown in Figure 3, a mobile carrier needs to build a 3G network to aggregate the services of each NodeB and then transmit the
aggregated service to the radio network controller (RNC). In this case, the equipment processes the data between each NodeB and the
RNC as one service.
On the convergence node, the OptiX OSN equipment specifies the total bandwidth, QoS, and other parameters.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 45/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 3 E-AGGR service

Parent topic: Service Description

4.1.3 CES Services

The circuit emulation service (CES) helps to solve the problem of insufficient optical fiber resources in the access ring and allows TDM
services to be transparently transmitted across the pure packet mode.
At the physical layer on the UNI side, the OptiX OSN equipment is interconnected with a CE through the following physical channels for
accessing CES services:

Channelized STM-1
E1

Figure 1 Networking diagram of the CES

As shown in Figure 1, the OptiX OSN equipment can gain access to CES services at emulation node 1, emulation node 2, or emulation node
3.

At emulation node 1, the OptiX OSN 1500 transmits E1 services to the GE packet ring.
At emulation node 2, the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 7500 or OptiX OSN 7500 II transmits E1 signals that are received from the
BTS through TDM STM-1/STM-4 ring to the 10GE packet ring.
At emulation node 3, the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 7500 or OptiX OSN 7500 II converts E1 CESs on the 10GE packet ring into
STM-1 signals and then sends them to the BSC.

The OptiX OSN equipment supports both structure-aware TDM circuit emulation service over packet switched network (CESoPSN) and
structure-agnostic TDM over packet (SAToP).
In the case of CESoPSN, the features are as follows:

The equipment is aware of frame structures, frame alignment modes, and timeslots in TDM circuits.
The equipment processes the overheads in and extracts the payloads from the TDM frames. Then, the equipment loads timeslots
to the packet payload in a specific sequence. As a result, the services in each timeslot are fixed and visible in packets.

In the case of SAToP, the features are as follows:

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 46/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
The equipment is agnostic about the structures of the TDM signals. To be specific, the equipment treats TDM signals as constant
bit-rate (CBR) flows, and emulates all the TDM signals in the same way.
The overheads and payloads in TDM signals are transparently transmitted.

Parent topic: Service Description

4.1.4 ATM/IMA Services

The OptiX OSN equipment supports ATM/IMA services in packet mode.

M Services
ATM stands for asynchronous transfer mode, which is implemented based on cells. In ATM mode, the ATM PWE3 technology is used to
emulate ATM services on a packet switched network (PSN). Therefore, traditional ATM services can traverse the PSN. ATM service
networks can be classified into three types: one-to-one, N-to-one or ATM-TRANS, according to the encapsulation mode of ATM PWE3
packets.
Figure 1 Typical application of ATM PWE3 (in one-to-one cell encapsulation mode)

Figure 2 Typical application of ATM PWE3 (in N-to-one cell encapsulation mode)

NOTE:
The cell encapsulation modes at both ends of a PW must be the same.

A Services
The inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) technology multiplexes multiple low-speed ATM links into a high-speed link.
The IMA technology provides inverse multiplexing of an ATM cell stream over multiple low-speed links and retrieves the original stream
at the far-end from these physical links. Figure 3 shows how IMA transmits services.
Figure 3 IMA transmission

The IMA technology helps to group multiple physical links to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum
of the link rates. When the member links in the IMA group are dynamically added/deleted, or fail/recover, the logical link changes only in
bandwidth. The services on the logical link are not interrupted only when the bandwidth of the logical link is not lower than the required
minimum bandwidth.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 47/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
With the IMA technology, the transport network can transmit ATM services from customer equipment on an IMA group formed by
multiple low-speed links (for example, the three E1 links shown in Figure 4), therefore increasing link bandwidth utilization and providing
link protection.
Figure 4 Application of the IMA technology

Parent topic: Service Description

4.2 Service Interfaces

This section provides the Ethernet CES and ATM/IMA service interfaces supported by the OptiX OSN equipment in packet mode.
Table 1 lists the Ethernet service interfaces on the OptiX OSN equipment.

Table 1 Ethernet service interfaces on the OptiX OSN equipment

Type of Interface Description

FE electrical interface 100BASE-TX

FE optical interface 100BASE-FX/LX/VX/ZX
GE electrical interface 1000BASE-T
GE optical interface 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX
Colored optical interface types: CWDM (40 km), CWDM (80 km), and
DWDM (120 km)

10GE optical interface 10GBase-SR/SW/LR/LW/ER/EW/ZR/ZW

Colored optical interface types: CWDM (70 km), DWDM (40 km), and
DWDM (80 km)

Table 2 lists the CES and ATM/IMA service interfaces on the OptiX OSN equipment.

Table 2 CES and ATM/IMA service interfaces on the OptiX OSN equipment
Type of Interface Description

CES (E1) interface E1 electrical interface: DB44 connector

ATM/IMA (E1) interface E1 electrical interface: DB44 connector
CES (STM-1) interface STM-1 optical interfaces: S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2

Parent topic: Packet Services

4.3 Service Receiving Capacity

The capacities of services that the OptiX OSN equipment can receive vary according to the type and quantity of the configured boards.
lists the maximum capacities of different services that the OptiX OSN equipment can receive. The maximum capacity refers to the
Table 1
maximum number of services when a single subrack receives only this specific type of service.

Table 1 Service receiving capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 (in packet mode)
Service Type Maximum Number of Services Supported By a Single Subrack

Fast Ethernet (FE electrical interface) services 128

Fast Ethernet (FE optical interface) services 128
Gigabit Ethernet (GE electrical interface) services 80
Gigabit Ethernet (GE optical interface) services 80
10 Gigabit Ethernet (10GE optical interface) services 28
CES (E1) services 504
CES (channelized STM-1) services 64
E1 ATM/IMA services 504

Parent topic: Packet Services

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 48/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

5 TDM Services
The supported services are SDH services, PDH services and many other services.

Service Types
The OptiX OSN 3500 can process the following types of services: SDH, PDH, Ethernet, RPR, ATM, DDN, PCM, and SAN/Video
services.

Service Interfaces
Service interfaces include SDH service interfaces, PDH service interfaces and many other service interfaces.

Service Receiving Capacity

The capacities of services that the OptiX OSN 3500 can receive vary according to the type and quantity of the configured boards.

Parent topic: Quick View of Product

5.1 Service Types

The OptiX OSN 3500 can process the following types of services: SDH, PDH, Ethernet, RPR, ATM, DDN, PCM, and SAN/Video services.
For details about supported service types, see Table 1.

Table 1 Service types that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports

Service Type Description

SDH services Standard SDH services: STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/STM-64

Standard SDH concatenated services: VC-4-4c/VC-4-8c/VC-4-16c/VC-4-64c/AU-3
Standard SDH virtual concatenation services: VC-4-Xv (X≤8), VC-3-Xv (X≤24), VC-12-Xv (X≤63)
SDH services with FEC: 10.709 Gbit/s, 2.666 Gbit/s

PDH services E1 (optical) service

E1 (electrical)/T1 service
E3/T3 service
E4 service

NOTE:
With the E13/M13 function, the equipment can perform multiplexing and demultiplexing between E1/T1 signals and E3/T3 signals.

Ethernet services Ethernet private line (EPL) service

Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) service
Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) service
Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) service

RPR services EVPL service

EVPLAN service

ATM services Constant bit rate (CBR) service

Real-time variable bite rate (rt-VBR) service
Non real-time variable bite rate (nrt-VBR) service
Unspecified bit rate (UBR) service

DDN services Nx64 kbit/s (N = 1-31) service

Framed E1 service

Pulse code modulation (PCM) Z interface extension service

services
Hotline service
2/4 wire audio and E&M service
G.703 64 kbit/s codirectional service

Sub-rate services Synchronous/asynchronous: 0.6kbit/s, 1.2Kbit/s, 2.4kbit/s, 4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s,
48kbit/s services
Synchronous: 56kbit/s service

SAN services Fiber channel (FC) service

Fiber connection (FICON) service
Enterprise systems connection (ESCON) service

Video services Digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface (DVB-ASI) service

High definition-serial digital interface (HD-SDI) electrical service
Standard definition-serial digital interface (SD-SDI) electrical service

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 49/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Parent topic: TDM Services

5.2 Service Interfaces

Service interfaces include SDH service interfaces, PDH service interfaces and many other service interfaces.

erface Types
Table 1 lists the service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500.

Table 1 Service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500

Interface Description

SDH service interface STM-1 electrical interfaces: SMB connectors

STM-1 optical interfaces: I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
STM-4 optical interfaces: I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
STM-16 optical interfaces: I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je
STM-16 optical interfaces (FEC): Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f
STM-64 optical interfaces: I-64.1, I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, V-64.2b, P1L1-2D2
STM-64 optical interfaces (FEC): Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, Ue-64.2e
CWDM colored optical interfaces: 40 km, 70 km, 80 km
DWDM colored optical interfaces: 40 km, 80 km, 120 km, 170 km, and 640 km
STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.692 can output fixed wavelengths from
191.1 THz to 196.0 THz, and can be directly interconnected with the WDM equipment.

PDH service interface E1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors

T1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors
E3, T3 and E4 electrical interfaces: SMB connectors
E1 optical interfaces: I-2M

Ethernet service interface 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX

100BASE-FX/LX/VX/ZX
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
10GBASE-LW/LR

DDN service interface RS-449, RS-530, RS-530A, V.35, V.24, X.21, and Framed E1 interfaces

ATM service interface STM-1 optical interfaces: Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
STM-4 optical interfaces: S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
E3 interfaces: E3 services are received by the N1PD3/N1PL3/N1PL3A board.
E1 IMA interfaces: E1 IMA services are received by the N1PQ1/N1PQM/N2PQ1 board.

Pulse code modulation (PCM) 2/4 wire audio and E&M

service interface
FXS/FXO
G.703 64kbit/s codirectional service interface: Co64K

Sub-rate service interface RS-232, RS-422, RS-485, V.35, X.21, and V.24
SAN/Video service interface Optical interfaces: FC100, FICON, FC200, ESCON, DVB-ASI
SMB electrical interfaces: DVB-ASI, HD-SDI, SD-SDI

OTU3 optical interface 40GBASE-LR4 (10 km), 40GBASE-ER4 (40 km), and 40GBASE-ZR4(80 km)

NOTE:

Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je, Ve-1.2, I-2M, and Ve-4.2 are optical technical specifications defined by Huawei.
Some optical interfaces on OptiX OSN equipment support single-fiber bidirectional optical modules, on which one optical fiber can receive and transmit
optical signals simultaneously, saving many optical fiber resources. Different single-fiber bidirectional optical modules support different receive and transmit
wavelengths. The same type of single-fiber bidirectional optical modules must be used on two interconnected sites.

Parent topic: TDM Services

5.3 Service Receiving Capacity

The capacities of services that the OptiX OSN 3500 can receive vary according to the type and quantity of the configured boards.
lists the maximum capacities of different services that the OptiX OSN 3500 can receive. The maximum capacity refers to the
Table 1
maximum number of services when a single subrack receives only this specific type of service.

Table 1 Service receiving capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 in TDM mode

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 50/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Service Type Maximum Number of Services Supported by a Single Subrack

STM-64 standard or concatenated services 12

STM-64 (FEC) services 12
STM-16 standard or concatenated services 60
STM-16 (FEC) services 8
STM-16 (EFEC) services 8
STM-4 standard or concatenated services 142
STM-1 standard services 224
STM-1 (electrical) services 132
E4 services 32
E3/T3 services 117
E1 (electrical) services 504
E1 (optical) services 112
T1 services 504
FE services 180
GE services 56
10GE services 16
ATM (STM-1) services 60
ATM (STM-4) services 15
Nx64 kbit/s services (N: 1-31) 64
Framed E1 services 64
ESCON services 56
FICON/FC100 services 22
FC200 services 8
DVB-ASI (optical) services 56
DVB-ASI (electrical) services 56
HD-SDI (electrical) services 44
SD-SDI (electrical) services 56
FXS/FXO services 180
2/4-wire audio, E&M services 90
Sub-rate services 96
G.703 64kbit/s codirectional services 64
OTU3 services 2

Parent topic: TDM Services

Description of Common Hardware

Equipment Structure
The OptiX OSN 3500 equipment consists of the cabinet, cabinet doors, DC power distribution unit (PDU), subracks, orderwire phone
fixing frame, boards, and cables. The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack can be installed in a 300 mm or 600 mm ETSI cabinet.

Cabinet
Subracks are installed in a cabinet. OptiX OSN subracks need to be installed in appropriate cabinets.

Subrack
This topic describes the structure, capacity, slot layout, and technical specifications of the subrack.

Overview of Boards
This topic describes the appearances, dimensions, bar codes, and classification of the boards used on the OptiX OSN systems.

Classification of Boards
Boards are functionally classified into cross-connect boards and system control boards, packet processing boards, packet interface
boards, SDH boards, PDH boards, WDM boards, optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards, auxiliary boards, and
power boards.

Cross-Connect Boards and System Control Boards

This topic describes the system control boards and the cross-connect boards that have different capacities.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 51/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Packet Processing Boards
The packet processing boards include the PEX1, PEX2, PEG16, and PEG8. They achieve the packet switching function in the packet
domain.

Packet Interface Boards

The packet interface boards include the PETF8, PEFF8, CQ1, MD12, and MD75. They provide packet switching boards with cable
input/output interfaces for myriad signals.

EoD Boards
The OptiX OSN equipment supports the EoD (Ethernet over Dual Domains) board EDQ41, which bridges Ethernet services between
the TDM domain and packet domain.

Smart Line Boards

The smart line board includes the HSNS3.

SDH Boards
This topic describes the SDH boards that operate at the STM-64, STM-16, STM-4, and STM-1 rates.

PDH Boards
The PDH boards include the PDH service interface boards and PDH service processing boards, to transmit/receive and process E1/T1
signals, E3/T3 signals, E4/STM-1 electrical signals, and DDN signals.

EoS Boards
The EoS boards include the interface boards and processing boards for FE and GE services.

RPR Boards
The RPR boards include FE/GE Ethernet ring processing boards.

PCM Boards
The PCM boards include the FXS/FXO processing board, 2-/4- wire and E&M processing board, DX1 board and DM12 board.

WDM Boards
The WDM boards include the CMR2, CMR4, MR2, MR2A, MR2C, MR4, LWX, and FIB.

Auxiliary Boards
This topic describes the auxiliary boards including the AUX and FAN.

Optical Amplifier Boards

This topic describes the optical amplifier boards.

Dispersion Compensation Boards

This topic describes the dispersion compensation boards.

Power Boards
This topic describes the power boards such as the UPM, PIU and PIUA.

Pluggable Optical Module

Certain boards on the OptiX OSN equipment supports the small form-factor pluggable (SFP), enhanced small form-factor pluggable
(eSFP), 10 Gigabit small form-factor pluggable (XFP) optical modules. When you need to adjust the type of accessed services or
replace such a faulty optical module, you just need to directly replace the pluggable optical module without replacing its board.

Pluggable Electrical Module

A pluggable electrical module is used at an SFP interface to transmit/receive electrical signals.

Cables
This topic describes the cables that the equipment uses, including the fiber jumper, power cable, alarm cable, management cable,
signal cable, and clock cable.

1 Equipment Structure
The OptiX OSN 3500 equipment consists of the cabinet, cabinet doors, DC power distribution unit (PDU), subracks, orderwire phone
fixing frame, boards, and cables. The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack can be installed in a 300 mm or 600 mm ETSI cabinet.
Figure 1 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 3500 that is installed in the 300 mm ETSI cabinet.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 52/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Appearance of the OptiX OSN 3500 that is installed in the 300 mm ETSI cabinet

1. DC PDU 2. Side panel 3. Cable distribution plate 4. Orderwire phone fixing frame

5. Subrack 6. Cabinet 7. Fiber management tray 8. Front door

Figure 2 shows the appearance of the general OptiX OSN 3500 subrack and enhanced OptiX OSN 3500 subrack (1100 W).
Figure 2 Appearance of the general OptiX OSN 3500 subrack and enhanced OptiX OSN 3500 subrack (1100 w)

1. Interface board area 2. Fan area 3. Processing board area 4. Cable routing area

Figure 3 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 3500 type III subrack (2300 W).

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 53/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 3 Appearance of the OptiX OSN 3500 type III subrack (2300 W)

1. Interface board area 2. Fan area 3. Processing board area 4. Cable routing area

NOTE:
The difference between a general subrack, an enhanced subrack, and a type III subrack (2300 W) is with regard to applicable power boards. With different power
boards, the two types of subracks support different maximum power consumption values.

Parent topic: Description of Common Hardware

2 Cabinet
Subracks are installed in a cabinet. OptiX OSN subracks need to be installed in appropriate cabinets.

Introduction to Cabinets
The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack can be installed in the 300 mm or 600 mm ETSI cabinet.2600 mm high T63 cabinets are discontinued.
For details, see the released product change notice.

Locations of Cable Holes

Cable holes for cable outgoing are available on the top and bottom of a cabinet.

DC Power Distribution Unit

The DC power distribution unit (PDU) is located on the top of a cabinet and is used to supply power to the equipment.

Hardware Accessories
In addition to subracks, external case-shaped devices can be installed in a cabinet as required.

Parent topic: Description of Common Hardware

2.1 Introduction to Cabinets

The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack can be installed in the 300 mm or 600 mm ETSI cabinet.2600 mm high T63 cabinets are discontinued. For
details, see the released product change notice.

NOTE:
The cabinets described in this topic are provided by Huawei.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 54/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
The 300 mm ETSI cabinet is available in two types, namely, T63 cabinet and N63E cabinet. The 600 mm ETSI cabinet is called the N66T
cabinet. The N66T cabinet uses both the front and rear columns, and it has a single front door and a single rear door. Table 1 shows the
appearances of the cabinets.

Table 1 Types, appearances, and specifications of the cabinets supported by OptiX OSN equipment
Item T63 Cabinet N63E Cabinet N66T Cabinet

Appearance

Weight 2000 mm-high cabinet: 58 kg 2000 mm-high cabinet: 41 kg 2000 mm-high cabinet: 71kg
2200 mm-high cabinet: 63 kg 2200 mm-high cabinet: 45 kg 2200 mm-high cabinet: 76kg
2600 mm-high cabinet: 73 kg

Dimensions 600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H) 600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H) 600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000 (H)
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200 (H) 600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200 (H) 600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H)
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2600 (H)

Available space 2000 mm (height): 40 U 2000 mm (height): 40 U 2000 mm (height): 40 U

2200 mm (height): 45 U 2200 mm (height): 45 U 2200 mm (height): 45 U
2600 mm (height): 54 U

NOTE:
1 U = 44.5 mm

NOTE:
The N66T cabinet supports back-to-back installation of one ordinary OptiX OSN 3500 subrack and one enhanced OptiX OSN 3500 subrack (1,100 W).

Parent topic: Cabinet

2.2 Locations of Cable Holes

Cable holes for cable outgoing are available on the top and bottom of a cabinet.

3 Cabinet
There are two ground bolts on the frame at the top of the T63 cabinet. Figure 1 shows the locations of the cable holes at the top of the T63
cabinet. Figure 2 shows the locations of the cable holes at the bottom of the T63 cabinet.

Figure 1 Locations of the cable holes at the top of the T63 cabinet

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 55/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 2 Locations of the cable holes at the bottom of the T63 cabinet

3E Cabinet
There are two ground bolts on the frame at the top of the N63E cabinet. Figure 3 shows the locations of the cable holes at the top of the
N63E cabinet. Figure 4 shows the locations of the cable holes at the bottom of the N63E cabinet.

Figure 3 Locations of the cable holes at the top of the N63E cabinet

Figure 4 Locations of the cable holes at the bottom of the N63E cabinet

NOTICE:
The difference between the cable routing in the case of the T63 cabinet and the cable routing in the case of the N63E cabinet is with
regard to the cable routing at the top and bottom cable holes. The cable routing in the T63 cabinet is the same as the cable routing in
the N63E cabinet.
The T63 cabinet is approximately 16 mm deeper than the N63E cabinet. When you install the mounting ears of the components, select
proper mounting holes according to the type of cabinet on site.

closure Frame
Only the 2000 mm and 2200 mm high N63E cabinets are available. If the 2600 mm high N63E cabinet is required, you need to place a
400 mm high enclosure frame on the top of the 2200 mm high N63E cabinet.
Figure 5 shows the picture and dimensions of the enclosure frame.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 56/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 5 Picture and dimensions of the enclosure frame

6T Cabinet
There are two ground bolts on the frame at the top of the N66T cabinet. Figure 6 shows the locations of the cable holes at the top of the
N66T cabinet. Figure 7 shows the locations of the cable holes at the bottom of the N66T cabinet.
Figure 6 Locations of the cable holes at the top of the N66T cabinet

Figure 7 Locations of the cable holes at the bottom of the N66T cabinet

Parent topic: Cabinet

2.3 DC Power Distribution Unit

The DC power distribution unit (PDU) is located on the top of a cabinet and is used to supply power to the equipment.

Power Distribution Unit N1PDU

Figure 1 shows the front panel of the general cabinet DC PDU, N1PDU.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 57/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the N1PDU

1. Terminal block (A) 2. Power ground cable RTN1(+)

3. Power ground cable RTN2(+) 4. Power cable NEG1(-)

5. Power cable NEG2(-) 6. Terminal block (B)

7. PGND 8. Power switch

In the case of the OptiX OSN 3500, the output terminal block on side A supplies power to the power interface board on side A of the
subrack, and the output terminal block on side B supplies power to the power interface board on side B of the subrack. Table 1 shows the
connections of the output terminal blocks on side A and side B.

Table 1 Connections of the output terminal blocks on side A and side B

Terminal Block on Side A Corresponding Subrack and Power Interface Terminal Block on Side Corresponding Subrack and Power Interface
Board B Board

1 Power interface board on side A of the first 1 Power interface board on side B of the first
subrack subrack
2 Power interface board on side A of the second 2 Power interface board on side B of the second
subrack subrack
3 Power interface board on side A of the third 3 Power interface board on side B of the third
subrack subrack
4 Power interface board on side A of the fourth 4 Power interface board on side B of the fourth
subrack subrack

NOTE:
In the case of an enhanced subrack, the two power inputs work in load-sharing mode (each input carries 16 A). In the telecommunications room, however, the PDU
needs to provide power supply of 34 A to an entire subrack. In the case of a general subrack, the two power inputs work in load-sharing mode (each input carries 10
A). In the telecommunications room, however, the PDU needs to provide power supply of 20 A to an entire subrack. In this case, power failure will not occur if either
of the power inputs fails.

NOTICE:
In the case of the OptiX OSN 3500, the first and second terminal blocks are used. The third and fourth terminal blocks supplies power to
other equipment such as case-shaped optical amplifiers. The number of the subracks increases from the bottom up.

NOTE:
The DPD100-2-8 PDU can substitute for the N1PDU.

Power Distribution Unit DPD100-2-8 PDU

The DPD100-2-8 is installed at the top of the cabinet, and is divided into two parts, namely, part A and part B that back up each other.
Part A and part B each receive one -48 V power input and provide four power outputs to subracks inside the cabinet.
Figure 2 and Figure 3 show the front panel of the DPD100-2-8 PDU.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 58/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 2 Front panel of the DPD100-2-8 PDU (covered)

Figure 3 Front panel of the DPD100-2-8 PDU (uncovered)

Power output area: On both sides of the DC PDU, there are respectively four output terminal blocks that are used to connect to
the power cables of subracks.
Power input area: INPUT A and INPUT B are each connected to one -48 V DC power cable and one power ground cable, that is,
two -48 V DC power cables and two power ground cables in total.
Power switch area: On both sides of the DC PDU, there are respectively four power output switches that correspond to the output
terminal blocks. The power output switches control power supply to the corresponding subracks.

Power Distribution Unit TN51PDU

The TN51PDU is installed at the top of the cabinet, and is divided into two parts, namely, part A and part B that back up each other. Part
A and part B respectively access four -48 V power supplies. Among them:

Connections of main power supply: Part A is connected to RTN(+) and NEG(-).

Connections of standby power supply: Part B is connected to RTN(+) and NEG(-).

NOTE:
RTN(+)s and NEG(-)s are located at the upper layer and lower layer of the power input area respectively.

The TN51PDU provides eight power output interfaces, supplying power to the subracks inside the cabinet. Figure 4 shows the front panel of
the TN51PDU.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 59/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 4 Front panel of the TN51PDU

Power output area: On both sides of the DC PDU, there are respectively four output terminal blocks that are used to connect to
the power cables of subracks.
Power input area: The TN51PDU supports corresponding power input capability based on the power supply capacity of the
telecommunications room.
When the telecommunications room provides four power inputs not less than 63 A, part A and part B can respectively be
connected to four -48 V DC power cables and four power ground cables, that is, eight -48 V DC power cables and eight
power ground cables in total.
When the telecommunications room provides two power inputs not less than 125 A, part A and part B can respectively be
connected to two -48 V DC power cables and two power ground cables, that is, four-48 V DC power cables and four
power ground cables in total.

Power switch area: On both sides of the DC PDU, there are respectively four power output switches that correspond to the output
terminal blocks. The power output switches control power supply to the corresponding subracks.

Power Distribution Unit DPD63-8-8 PDU

The DPD63-8-8 PDU is installed at the top of the cabinet, and is divided into two parts, namely, part A and part B that back up each
other. Part A and part B each receive four -48 V power inputs and provide four power outputs subracks inside the cabinet.
Figure 5 and Figure 6 show the front panel of the DPD63-8-8 PDU.
Figure 5 Front panel of the DPD63-8-8 PDU (covered)

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 60/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 6 Front panel of the DPD63-8-8 PDU (uncovered)

Power output area: On both sides of the DC PDU, there are respectively four output terminal blocks that are used to connect to
the power cables of subracks.
Power input area: INPUT A and INPUT B are each connected to four -48 V DC power cables and four power ground cables, that is,
eight -48 V DC power cables and eight power ground cables in total.
Power switch area: On both sides of the DC PDU, there are respectively four power output switches that correspond to the output
terminal blocks. The power output switches control power supply to the corresponding subracks.

NOTE:
Each of part A and part B needs to be connected to only two -48 V DC power cables and two power ground cables.
The DPD63-8-8 PDU can substitute for the TN51PDU.
By default, one DPD63-8-8 PDU provides eight inputs and eight outputs. It can provide four inputs and eight outputs with a short-circuiting copper bar installed.

wer Distribution Scheme

The DC PDU provides two groups (left and right) of power output at the same time. Table 2 lists the power distribution scheme of the
N1PDU. Table 3 lists the power distribution scheme of the TN51PDU. Table 4 lists the power distribution scheme of the DPD100-2-8 [Link]
5 lists the power distribution scheme of the DPD63-8-8 PDU.

Table 2 Power distribution scheme of the N1PDU

Input/Output Group No. Power Ground Cable Remarks

Power input INPUT NEG1(-) RTN1(+) External power supply 1

NEG2(-) RTN2(+) External power supply 2
Power output 32 A power supply 1(-) 1(+) Two outputs, providing 1+1 hot backup of 32 A power to the
group subrack
2(-) 2(+) Two outputs, providing 1+1 hot backup of 32 A power to the
subrack
20 A power supply 3(-) 3(+) Two outputs, providing 1+1 hot backup of 20 A power to the
group subrack
4(-) 4(+) Two outputs, providing 1+1 hot backup of 20 A power to the
subrack
Protection ground - - - Connected to the protection ground of the cabinet

Table 3 Power distribution scheme of the TN51PDU

Input/Output Group No. Remarks

Power input (short-circuiting INPUT A Two 63 A power inputs and two 32 A power inputs
copper bar not installed)
INPUT B Two 63 A power inputs and two 32 A power inputs
Power input (short-circuiting INPUT A One 125 A power input and two 32 A power inputs
copper bar installed)
INPUT B One 125 A power input and two 32 A power inputs
Power output 63 A power supply group Four outputs, providing 1+1 hot backup of 63 A power to the subrack
32 A power supply group Four outputs, providing 1+1 hot backup of 32 A power to the subrack
Protection ground - Connected to the protection ground of the cabinet

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 61/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Table 4 Power distribution scheme of the DPD100-2-8 PDU

Input/Output Group No. Remarks

Power input INPUT A One 100 A power input

INPUT B One 100 A power input
Power output OUTPUT A Four outputs, providing two 32 A power inputs and two 20 A power inputs to subracks
OUTPUT B Four outputs, providing 1+1 hot backup for the two 32 A power inputs and two 20 A
power inputs to subracks
Protection ground - Connected to the protection ground of the cabinet

Table 5 Power distribution scheme of the DPD63-8-8 PDU

Input/Output Group No. Remarks

Power input (short-circuiting INPUT A Two 63 A power inputs and two 32 A power inputs
copper bar not installed)
INPUT B Two 63 A power inputs and two 32 A power inputs
Power input (short-circuiting INPUT A One 125 A power input and one 63 A power input
copper bar installed)
INPUT B One 125 A power input and one 63 A power input
Power output OUTPUT A Four outputs, providing two 63 A power inputs and two 32 A power inputs to subracks
OUTPUT B Four outputs, providing 1+1 hot backup for the two 63 A power inputs and two 32 A
power inputs to subracks
Protection ground - Connected to the protection ground of the cabinet

chnical Specifications

Table 6 Technical specifications of the PDU

Board Dimensions (mm) Single-Cabinet Input Voltage Single-Cabinet Output Voltage Output Current (A)
(V) (V)

DPD100-2-8 PDU 442 (W) x 79.6 (D) x 110 (H) -48 (DC) -38.4 to -57.6 4x32 A
-48 to -72 4x20 A
-60 (DC)

N1PDU 530 (W) x 97 (D) x 133 (H) -48 (DC) -38.4 to -57.6 4x32 A
-48 to -72 4x20 A
-60 (DC)

DPD63-8-8 PDU 442 (W) x 79.6 (D) x 110 (H) -48 (DC) -38.4 to -57.6 4x63 A
-48 to -72 4x32 A
-60 (DC)

TN51PDU 535 (W) x 147 (D) x 133 (H) -48 (DC) -38.4 to -57.6 4x63 A
-48 to -72 4x32 A
-60 (DC)

NOTE:
Two power inputs that back up each other need to be provided, and they work in load-sharing mode.
In the telecommunications room, it is required that the PDU needs to provide power supply for an entire subrack. In this case, normal power supply can be guaranteed when either of the
power inputs fails.

Parent topic: Cabinet

2.4 Hardware Accessories

In addition to subracks, external case-shaped devices can be installed in a cabinet as required.

Uninterruptible power module (UPM)

Roman pump amplifiers RPC01 and RPC02

Orderwire phone

Dispersion compensation module (DCM)

Case-shaped optical amplifier (COA)

Fiber management tray

Parent topic: Cabinet

3 Subrack
localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 62/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
This topic describes the structure, capacity, slot layout, and technical specifications of the subrack.

Subrack Structure
An OptiX OSN 3500 subrack has a two-layer structure. The subrack consists of an interface board area, a processing board area, a
fan area, and a cable routing area.

Slot Allocation
An OptiX OSN 3500 subrack consists of an upper layer and a lower layer. The upper layer, where 19 slots are available, is the slot
area for interface boards. The lower layer, where 18 slots are available, is the slot area for processing boards.

Slot Access Capacity in Packet Mode

This section describes the access capacity of each slot on the equipment.

Slot Access Capacity in TDM Mode

This section describes the access capacity of each slot on the equipment.

Ventilation Mode
The subrack of the equipment has many minute air vents and houses fans. The air enters from the front and exits from the back, and
the air flows from the bottom to the top. In this manner, the equipment has good performance in heat dissipation.

Cable Management
This topic describes the function of the cable distribution plate and fiber spool box and the overall scheme for cable routing.

Mapping Policies of Power Consumption

The increasing features supported by the equipment cause higher power consumption. To ensure the normal operation of the
equipment, the internal power supply system provides different mapping policies of power consumption according to different
power consumption requirements.

Technical Specifications
The technical specifications of the subrack include the dimensions, weight, and maximum power consumption.

Parent topic: Description of Common Hardware

3.1 Subrack Structure

An OptiX OSN 3500 subrack has a two-layer structure. The subrack consists of an interface board area, a processing board area, a fan
area, and a cable routing area.
Figure 1 shows the structure of an OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 63/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Structure of an OptiX OSN 3500 subrack

1. Interface board area 2. Fan area

3. Processing board area 4. Cable routing area

The functions of the areas are as follows:

Interface board area: This area houses the interface boards of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Fan area: This area houses three fan modules, which dissipate heat generated by the equipment.
Processing board area: This area houses the processing boards of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Cable routing area: This area houses fiber jumpers in a subrack.

NOTE:
An interface board is also called an access board or a transit board. An interface board provides physical interfaces for optical signals and electrical signals, and
transmits the optical signals or electrical signals to the corresponding processing board.

Parent topic: Subrack

3.2 Slot Allocation

An OptiX OSN 3500 subrack consists of an upper layer and a lower layer. The upper layer, where 19 slots are available, is the slot area for
interface boards. The lower layer, where 18 slots are available, is the slot area for processing boards.
Figure 1 shows the single-slot layout of an OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 64/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Slot layout of an OptiX OSN 3500 subrack

Figure 2 shows the dual-slot layout of an OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.

Figure 2 Dual-slot layout of an OptiX OSN 3500 subrack

The slots in an OptiX OSN 3500 subrack are allocated as follows:

Slots for service interface boards: slots 19-26 and 29-36

Slots for service processing boards: slots 1-8 and 11-17
Slots for cross-connect and timing boards: slots 9-10
Slots for system control and communication boards: slots 17-18 (slot 17 can also house a processing board)
Slots for power interface boards: slots 27-28
Slot for an auxiliary interface board: slot 37
Slots for fan boards: slots 38-40

NOTE:
In an OptiX OSN 3500 subrack, dual-slot boards and single-slot boards cannot be installed at the same time.

pping Between Slots for Interface Boards and Slots for Processing Boards
Table 1 lists the mapping between slots for interface boards and slots for processing boards.
localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 65/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Table 1 Mapping between slots for interface boards and slots for processing boards
Slot for Processing Board Dual-Slot for Processing Board Slot for Corresponding Interface Board

Slot 2 - Slots 19 and 20

Slot 3 Slot 3 Slots 21 and 22
Slot 4 - Slots 23 and 24
Slot 5 Slot 5 Slots 25 and 26
Slot 13 Slot 13 Slot 29 and 30
Slot 14 - Slot 31 and 32
Slot 15 Slot 15 Slot 33 and 34
Slot 16 - Slot 35 and 36

red Slots
If overhead bytes pass through the backplane bus between two slots, the two slots are called paired slots. Paired slots achieves automatic
transparent transmission of overhead bytes such as K bytes, D bytes, and E1 overhead bytes. This improves multiplex section protection
(MSP) switching performance and protects orderwire and DCC communication with other NEs even after the system control board on the
local NE cannot be detected. Table 2 lists paired slots.

Table 2 Paired slots

Cross-Connect Capacity Slot Paired Slot

200 Gbit/s Slot 2 Slot 17

Slot 3 Slot 16
Slot 4 Slot 15
Slot 5 Slot 14
Slot 6 Slot 13
Slot 7 Slot 12
Slot 8 Slot 11

Parent topic: Subrack

3.3 Slot Access Capacity in Packet Mode

This section describes the access capacity of each slot on the equipment.
When the N1PSXCS board is used, one service processing board occupies two slots. In this case, adjacent slots can be merged, as shown
in Figure 1.
Figure 1 Slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 when the N1PSXCS board is used (dual-slot)

Figure 2 shows the slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 when the N2PSXCSA or N3PSXCSA board is used.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 66/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 2 Slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 when the N2PSXCSA/N3PSXCSA board is used (single slots)

Parent topic: Subrack

3.4 Slot Access Capacity in TDM Mode

This section describes the access capacity of each slot on the equipment.
Figure 1 shows the slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Figure 1 Slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN equipment

Parent topic: Subrack

3.5 Ventilation Mode

The subrack of the equipment has many minute air vents and houses fans. The air enters from the front and exits from the back, and the
air flows from the bottom to the top. In this manner, the equipment has good performance in heat dissipation.

NOTE:
Make smooth ventilation of the air pipe of the cabinet. Do not block the air intake vents and air exhaust vents of the subrack. Do not place any sundries in the upper
part of the subrack to ensure that air can flow through the subrack.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 67/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Ventilation mode of the OptiX OSN 3500

NOTE:
When the arrow color changes from a cool color to a warm color, air temperature increases.

Parent topic: Subrack

3.6 Cable Management

This topic describes the function of the cable distribution plate and fiber spool box and the overall scheme for cable routing.

ble Distribution Plate

One subrack needs to have one cable distribution plate installed on its top. Figure 1 shows the appearance of the cable distribution plate.
The function of the cable distribution plate is to fix the equipment cable to avoid the difficulty that the board may not be easily reseated
or that the air vents of the equipment are blocked and therefore the heat dissipation of the equipment is poor.
Figure 1 Appearance of the cable distribution plate

er Spool Box
The fiber spool box is used to coil the redundant optical fibers inside the cabinet, and is installed under a subrack by default. Figure 2 shows
the appearance of a fiber spool box.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 68/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 2 Appearance of a fiber spool box

For the installation position of the fiber spool box and cable distribution plate in the cabinet, see Equipment Structure.

erall Scheme for Fiber Jumper Routing

The fiber jumpers of the equipment are routed through the front vertical columns at the two sides of the cabinet.
The fiber jumpers of the equipment are led out through the fiber hole of the cabinet.
The fiber jumpers between the cabinet and the ODF are protected with a protection pipe. The two ends of the protective pipe
should be extended 10 cm into the cabinet and the ODF.
The fiber jumpers are secured smoothly and interconnected reliably in the ODF. The redundant fiber jumpers are coiled tidily.
When the internal fiber jumpers are routed, the redundant fibers are coiled tidily in the fiber spool box.
The routing and connection of the fiber jumpers should be consistent with the design. The optical attenuators are added
according to the requirements of the engineering design.
The bend radius of the fiber jumper must be greater than its minimum curvature radius. Specifically, the minimum curvature
radius for the 2 mm fiber jumper is 40 mm, and that for the 3 mm fiber jumper is 60 mm.

erall Scheme for Cable Routing

The external power cables and ground cables are arranged separately from the signal cables, with a space more than 3 cm.
The power cables of the subrack are bundled under the cable distribution plate. The power cables of the subrack are routed
separately towards the back of the two sides of the cabinet, and are routed along the back of the side panels to reach the power
box.
In the case of overhead cabling, the signal cables of the upper subrack are led out from the cable-through holes in the top middle
of the cabinet, and the signal cables of the lower subrack are led out from the cable-through holes on the two sides of the top of
the cabinet.
In the case of underfloor cabling, the signal cables of the upper and lower subracks are led out from the cable-through holes on
the two sides of the bottom of the cabinet.

Parent topic: Subrack

3.7 Mapping Policies of Power Consumption

The increasing features supported by the equipment cause higher power consumption. To ensure the normal operation of the
equipment, the internal power supply system provides different mapping policies of power consumption according to different power
consumption requirements.
The internal power supply system consists of PDU and PIU. Table 1 shows different mapping policies of power consumption.

Table 1 Mapping policies of power consumption on the OptiX OSN 3500

Type of Subrack Label of Subrack Mapping PDU Mapping PIU Mapping UPM Maximum Power Fuse Capacity of
Consumption Circuit Breakers in
a DC PDU

Standard OptiX - N1PDU, DPD100- N1PIU, N1PIUA EPS75-4815AF, 720 W 20 A

OSN 3500 2-8 PDU ETP4890
subrack
Enhanced OptiX N1PDU, DPD100- N1PIUA EPS75-4815AF, 1100 W 32 A
OSN 3500 2-8 PDU ETP4890
subrack (1100 W)
OptiX OSN 3500 TN51PDU, N1PIUB EPS75-4815AF, 2300 W 63 A
type III subrack DPD63-8-8 PDU ETP4890
(2300 W)

NOTICE:

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 69/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
When the type III subrack (2300 W) is configured with N1PDU/DPD100-2-8 PDU, the maximum power consumption of the equipment is
1100 W. Therefore, it is recommended that the type III subrack (2300 W) be configured with 51PDU/DPD63-8-8 PDU.
The service boards supported by various subracks are the same. However, for a specific type of service board, the maximum number of
boards that can be configured per subrack is related to the power consumption of the subrack.

Parent topic: Subrack

3.8 Technical Specifications

The technical specifications of the subrack include the dimensions, weight, and maximum power consumption.
Table 1 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.

Table 1 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack

Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)

497 (W) x 295 (D) x 722 (H) 23 (net weight of the subrack that is not installed with boards or
fans)

Table 2 lists the maximum power consumption of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.

Table 2 Maximum power consumption of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack

Subrack Type Maximum Power Fuse Capacity Typical Configuration
Consumptiona Typical Power Consumption Typical Configuration

General OptiX OSN 720 W 20 A 480 W Two N1SLD64 (S-64.2b, LC) boards
3500 subrack
Two N2SLQ4 (S-4.1, LC) boards
Two N1SLQ16 (L-16.2, LC) boards
Two N1SLH1 (S-1.1, LC) boards
Four N1OU08 boards
Two N2EGT2 boards
Two N1PSXCS boards
One N4GSCC board
One N1AUX board
Two N1PIU boards

Enhanced OptiX 1100 W 32 A 535 W Two N1SL64 (S-64.2b, LC) boards

OSN 3500 subrack
Two N2SLQ4 (S-4.1, LC) boards
One N1SLT1 (S-1.1, LC) board
Two N1PEG8 boards
Two N1PEX2 boards
Two N1PETF8 boards
Two N2PSXCSA boards
One N1AUX board
Two N6GSCC boards
Two N1PIUA boards

OptiX OSN 3500 2300 W 63 A 709 W Five N1PEG8 boards

type-III subrack
Two N1PEX2 boards
Two N2PEX1 boards
Three N1PETF8 boards
Two N2PSXCSA boards
One N1AUX board
Two N1PIUB boards
Two N6GSCC boards
Three N1FAN boards

a: The maximum power consumption refers to the maximum power consumption configuration that the subrack can support and the maximum heat
dissipation capability of the subrack. In the actual application, the value is much higher than the power consumption of the subrack in typical
configuration.

NOTE:
In the case of transmission equipment, power consumption is generally transformed into heat consumption. Hence, heat consumption (BTU/h) and power
consumption (W) can be converted to each other in the formula: Heat consumption (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) / 0.2931 (Wh).

Table 3 lists the predicted reliability specifications of the OptiX OSN equipment.

Table 3 Equipment predicted reliability

System Availability Mean Time to Repair (MTTR) Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF)

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 70/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

System Availability Mean Time to Repair (MTTR) Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF)

0.999996370 1 hour 31.45 years

Parent topic: Subrack

4 Overview of Boards
This topic describes the appearances, dimensions, bar codes, and classification of the boards used on the OptiX OSN systems.

Appearances and Dimensions of the Boards

Different boards have different appearances and dimensions.

Bar Codes of the Boards

The bar code on the front panel of a board indicates the version, name, and feature code of the board.

Parent topic: Description of Common Hardware

4.1 Appearances and Dimensions of the Boards

Different boards have different appearances and dimensions.
Table 1 provides information about the appearances and dimensions of the boards used on the OptiX OSN 3500.

Table 1 Board appearance and dimensions

Board Appearance Board Name Number of Slots Per Height (mm) Depth (mm) Width (mm)
Board

SL16 1 261.4 235.2 25.4

D75S 1 261.4 125.2 22.0

SXCSA 1 261.4 235.2 40.0

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 71/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Board Appearance Board Name Number of Slots Per Height (mm) Depth (mm) Width (mm)
Board

AUX 1 261.4 125.2 44.0

PIU 1 261.4 125.2 44.0

PEG16 2 261.4 235.2 50.3

Note: The figure in the right cell shows the three dimensions. "H" and "W" indicate the height and width of the front panel respectively and "D"
indicates the depth of the printed circuit board (PCB).

NOTICE:
Wear an ESD wrist strap when holding a board. To prevent the static discharge from damaging the board, ensure that the ESD wrist strap
is grounded properly.

DANGER:
Do not look directly at the optical interface board or optical interface. The laser beams inside the fiber can damage your eyes.

NOTICE:

A level optical module cannot be directly connected to an optical attenuator. If an optical attenuator is required, use the
attenuator on the optical distribution frame (ODF) side.
If an optical attenuator is required, insert the attenuator in the IN interface instead of the OUT interface.
Add an attenuator when performing a loopback at an optical interface to prevent the optical module from being damaged.

Parent topic: Overview of Boards

4.2 Bar Codes of the Boards

The bar code on the front panel of a board indicates the version, name, and feature code of the board.
Two types of bar codes are used for the boards of the OptiX OSN 3500, which are as follows:

16-digit manufacturing code + board version + board name + board feature code

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 72/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
20-digit manufacturing code + board version + board name + board feature code

The bar code is attached to the front panel of a board. Figure 1 shows the bar code with a 16-digit manufacturing code.
Figure 1 Bar code of a board

NOTE:
The positions of bar codes vary according to boards. For details on the feature code of a board, see the topic that describes the feature code of the board.

Parent topic: Overview of Boards

5 Classification of Boards
Boards are functionally classified into cross-connect boards and system control boards, packet processing boards, packet interface
boards, SDH boards, PDH boards, WDM boards, optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards, auxiliary boards, and
power boards.

NOTE:
For details on the board version replacement relationship between boards, see Board Version Replacement .
"Y" indicates that the corresponding board is supported. "N" indicates that the corresponding board is not supported.

oss-Connect Boards and System Control Boards

Table 1 lists all cross-connect boards and system control boards and their applicable products.

Table 1 List of cross-connect boards and system control boards

Board Description OSN 7500 II OSN 7500 OSN 3500 OSN 1500A OSN 1500 B

TNN1SCA System control Y N N N N

and auxiliary
processing
board
TNN1PSXCS Super Cross- Y N N N N
connect and
Synchronous
Timing Board
TNN1IXCS Infinite Cross- Y N N N N
connect and
Synchronous
Timing Board
T1PSXCSA, Super dual- N Y N N N
T2PSXCSA plane cross-
connect and
synchronous
timing board

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 73/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Board Description OSN 7500 II OSN 7500 OSN 3500 OSN 1500A OSN 1500 B

N4GSCC, System Control N Y Y N N

N6GSCC and
Communication
Board
N1PSXCS, Super Cross- N N Y N N
N2PSXCSA, connect and
N3PSXCSA Synchronous
Timing Board
(supporting
packet features)
N1SXCSA Super cross- N N Y N N
connect and
synchronous
timing board
(only applicable
in TDM mode)
R1PCXLN SCC unit, cross- N N N Y Y
connect unit,
and optical
interface unit
integrated
board
(supporting the
packet feature)
N1IXCSA Infinite Cross- N N Y N N
connect and
Synchronous
Timing board
T1IXCSA Infinite Cross- N Y N N N
connect and
Synchronous
Timing board
T1SXCSA Super cross- N Y N N N
connect and
synchronous
timing board
(only applicable
in TDM mode)

NOTE:
Only the T2PSXCSA, TNN1PSXCS, and N3PSXCSA boards support MPLS-TP OAM and centralized MPLS OAM.

cket Processing Boards

Table 2 lists all packet processing boards and their applicable products.

Table 2 List of packet processing boards

Board Description OSN 7500 II OSN 7500 OSN 3500 OSN 1500A OSN 1500 B

TNN1EX2 2x10GE Y N N N N
processing
board
N1PEX2 2-port 10 N Y Y N N
Gigabit
Ethernet
switching
processing
board
N1PEX1 1x10GE N N Y N N
Ethernet
processing
board
N2PEX1 1x10GE N Y Y N N
Ethernet
processing
board
N1PEG16 16xGE Ethernet N N Y N N
processing
board
TNN1EG16 16xGE Ethernet Y N N N N
processing
board

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 74/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Board Description OSN 7500 II OSN 7500 OSN 3500 OSN 1500A OSN 1500 B

TNN1EG8 8xGE Y N N N N
processing
board
N1PEG8 8-port Gigabit N Y Y N N
Ethernet
switching
processing
board
Q1PEGS2 2xGE N N N Y Y
processing
board
R1PEGS1 1xGE N N N Y Y
processing
board
R1PEFS8 8xFE processing N N N Y Y
board
R1PEF4F 4xFE optical N N N Y Y
processing
board
R1ML1 Multi-protocol N N N Y Y
16xE1 electrical
processing
board

cket Interface Boards

Table 3 lists all packet interface boards and their applicable products.

Table 3 List of packet interface boards

Board Description OSN 7500 II OSN 7500 OSN 3500 OSN 1500A OSN 1500 B

TNN1CO1 8-port Y N N N N
channelized
STM-1 CES
optical interface
board
N1CQ1 4-port N Y Y N N
channelized
STM-1 CES
optical interface
board
TNN1D75E 32-port 75-ohm Y N N N N
E1 interface
board
TNN1D12E 32-port 120- Y N N N N
ohm E1
interface board
TNN1ETMC 8xFE+4xFE/GE Y N N N N
electrical
interface board
TNN1AFO1 8-port ATM Y N N N N
STM-1 service
interface board
TNN1EFF8 8-port FE Y N N N N
optical interface
board
N1PEFF8 8-port FE N Y Y N N
optical interface
board
N1PETF8 8xFE electrical N Y Y N N
interface board
N1MD12 Multi-protocol N Y Y N N
32xE1 interface
board (120
ohms)
N1MD75 Multi-protocol N Y Y N N
32xE1 interface
board (75
ohms)

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 75/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
D Boards
Table 4 lists all EoD boards and their applicable products.

Table 4 List of EoD boards

Board Description OSN 7500 II OSN 7500 OSN 3500 OSN 1500A OSN 1500 B

N1EDQ41 4-port 622/155 Y Y Y N N

Mbit/s SDH
optical interface
Ethernet dual-
mode multi-
function
processing
board

art Line Boards

Table 5 lists all smart line boards and their applicable products.

Table 5 List of service-hybrid line boards

Board Description OSN 7500 II OSN 7500 OSN 3500 OSN 1500A OSN 1500 B

TNN1HUNS3 Smart 40G line Y N N N N

service
processing
board
TNN1HUNQ2 4x10G hybrid Y N N N N
service
processing
board
TNN1HSNQ2 Smart 4*10G Y N N N N
Line Service
Processing
Board
N1HSNS3 Smart 40G Line N Y Y N N
Service
Processing
Board

N Tributary Boards

Table 6 OTN Tributary Boards

Board Description OSN 7500 II OSN 7500 OSN 3500 OSN 1500A OSN 1500 B

TNN1TOA 8-port any-rate Y N N N N

tributary service
processing
board
TNN1TQX 4x10 Gbit/s Y N N N N
tributary service
processing
board

H Boards
Table 7 lists all SDH boards and their applicable products.

Table 7 List of SDH boards

Board Description OSN 7500 II OSN 7500 OSN 3500 OSN 1500A OSN 1500 B

N4SLD64 2xSTM-64 Y Y Y N N
optical interface
board
N1SLD64 2xSTM-64 N Y Y N N
optical interface
board
N4SFD64 2xSTM-64 N Y Y N N
optical interface
board with the
FEC function
T2SL64, 1xSTM-64 N Y N N N
T2SL64A optical interface
board

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 76/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Board Description OSN 7500 II OSN 7500 OSN 3500 OSN 1500A OSN 1500 B

N1SF64, 1xSTM-64 N Y Y N N
N1SF64A, optical interface
N4SF64 board (with the
forward error
correction (FEC)
function)
N1SL64 1xSTM-64 N Y Y N N
optical interface
board
N2SL64 1xSTM-64 N N Y N N
optical interface
board
N4SL64 1xSTM-64 Y Y Y N N
optical interface
board
N4SLO16 8xSTM-16 Y Y Y N N
optical interface
board
N1SLO16 8xSTM-16 N Y Y N N
optical interface
board
N4SLQ16 4xSTM-16 Y Y Y N N
optical interface
board
N1SLQ16, 4xSTM-16 N Y Y N N
N2SLQ16 optical interface
board
N1SLD16 2xSTM-16 N N Y N N
optical interface
board
N3SL16, 1xSTM-16 Y Y Y Y Y
N3SL16A optical interface
board
N1SL16, 1xSTM-16 N Y Y Y Y
N1SL16A, optical interface
N2SL16, board
N2SL16A
N1SF16 1xSTM-16 N Y Y Y Y
optical interface
board (with the
outband FEC
function)
N1SF16E 1xSTM-16 N Y Y Y Y
optical interface
board (with the
outband EFEC
function)
N3SLH41 16xSTM-4/STM- Y Y Y N N
1 optical
interface board
N3SLQ41 4xSTM-4/STM-1 Y Y Y Y Y
optical interface
board
N1SLQ4, 4xSTM-4 optical N Y Y Y Y
N2SLQ4 interface board
N1SLQ4A 4xSTM-4 optical Y Y Y Y Y
interface board
N1SLD4, 2xSTM-4 optical N Y Y Y Y
N2SLD4, interface board
N1SLD4A
R1SLD4 2xSTM-4 optical N N N Y Y
interface board
(divided slot)
R1SL4 1xSTM-4 optical N N N Y Y
interface board
(divided slot)

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 77/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Board Description OSN 7500 II OSN 7500 OSN 3500 OSN 1500A OSN 1500 B

N1SL4, 1xSTM-4 optical N Y Y Y Y

N2SL4, interface board
N1SL4A
N1SLH1 16xSTM-1 Y Y Y N N
signal
processing
board
N1SLT1 12xSTM-1 N Y Y Y Y
optical interface
board
N1EU08 8xSTM-1 Y Y Y N Y
electrical
interface board
N1OU08 8xSTM-1 Y Y Y N Y
optical/electrical
interface board
(LC)
N2OU08 8xSTM-1 optical N Y Y N Y
interface board
(SC)
N2SLO1, 8xSTM-1 optical N Y Y Y Y
N3SLO1 interface board
N1SLQ1, 4xSTM-1 optical N Y Y Y Y
N2SLQ1 interface board
N1SLQ1A 4xSTM-1 optical Y Y Y Y Y
interface board
R1SLQ1 4xSTM-1 optical N N N Y Y
interface board
(divided slot)
N1EU04 4xSTM-1 N N Y N Y
electrical
interface board
N1SEP1 2xSTM-1 line N Y Y Y Y
processing
board when
interfaces are
available on the
front panel
8xSTM-1 line
processing
board when
interfaces are
available on the
corresponding
interface board

N1SL1, 1xSTM-1 optical N Y Y Y Y

N2SL1, interface board
N1SL1A
R1SL1 1xSTM-1 optical N N N Y Y
interface board
(divided slot)

H Boards
Table 8 lists all PDH boards and their applicable products.

Table 8 List of PDH boards

Board Description OSN 7500 II OSN 7500 OSN 3500 OSN 1500A OSN 1500 B

N1SPQ4 4xE4/STM-1 N N Y N Y
electrical
processing
board
N2SPQ4 4xE4/STM-1 Y Y Y N Y
electrical
processing
board
N1MU04 4xE4/STM-1 Y Y Y N Y
electrical
interface board

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 78/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Board Description OSN 7500 II OSN 7500 OSN 3500 OSN 1500A OSN 1500 B

N2PQ3 12xE3/T3 Y Y Y N Y
service
processing
board
N1D34S 6xE3/T3 Y Y Y N Y
electrical
switching
interface board
N1C34S 3xE3/T3 N Y Y N Y
electrical
switching
interface board
N1PD3, 6xE3/T3 service N Y Y N Y
N2PD3 processing
board
N1PL3, 3xE3/T3 service N Y Y N Y
N2PL3 processing
board
N1PL3A, 3xE3/T3 service N Y Y Y Y
N2PL3A processing
board
(Interfaces are
available on the
front panel.)
N1PQ1 63xE1 service N Y Y N Y
processing
board
N2PQ1 63xE1 service Y Y Y N Y
processing
board
N1PQM 63xE1/T1 Y Y Y N Y
service
processing
board
N1D12B 32xE1/T1 Y Y Y N Y
electrical
switching
interface board
N1D12S 32xE1/T1 Y Y Y N Y
electrical
switching
interface board
(120 ohms)
N1D75S 32xE1 electrical Y Y Y N Y
switching
interface board
(75 ohms)
R1PD1, 32xE1 service N N N Y Y
R2PD1 processing
board
R1PL1 16xE1 service N N N Y Y
processing
board
R1L12S 16xE1/T1 N N N Y N
electrical
switching
interface board
(120 ohms)
R1L75S 16xE1 electrical N N N Y N
switching
interface board
(75 ohms)
N1PFL1 8xE1 optical N Y Y Y Y
processing
board
N1TSB8 8-port electrical Y Y Y N Y
switching
interface board

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 79/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Board Description OSN 7500 II OSN 7500 OSN 3500 OSN 1500A OSN 1500 B

N1TSB4 4-port electrical N N Y N Y

switching
interface board
N1DX1 DDN service N Y Y N Y
accessing and
converging
board
N3DX1 DDN service Y Y Y Y Y
accessing and
converging
board
N1DXA DDN service N Y Y Y Y
converging and
processing
board
N1DM12 DDN service Y Y Y N Y
interface board

S Boards
Table 9 lists all EoS boards and their applicable products.

Table 9 List of EoS boards

Board Description OSN 7500 II OSN 7500 OSN 3500 OSN 1500A OSN 1500 B

N1EFT8 8xFE/16xFE N Y Y Y Y
transparent
transmission
board
N2EFT8 8xFE/16xFE N Y Y Y Y
transparent
transmission
board
N1EFT8A 8xFE N Y Y Y Y
transparent
transmission
board
N2EFT8A 8xFE N Y Y Y Y
transparent
transmission
board
N1EFS0A 16xFE switching Y Y Y N Y
and processing
board
N1EFS0 8xFE switching N N Y N Y
and processing
board
N2EFS0, 8xFE switching N Y Y N Y
N4EFS0, and processing
N5EFS0 board
N1EFS4, 4xFE switching N Y Y Y Y
N2EFS4, and processing
N3EFS4 board
R1EFT4, 4xFE N N N Y Y
R2EFT4 transparent
transmission
board (divided
slot)
N1EAS2 2x10GE Layer 2 N Y Y N N
switching and
processing
board
N3EAS2 2x10GE Layer 2 Y Y Y N N
switching and
processing
board
N1EGSH 16xGE switching Y Y N N N
and processing
board

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 80/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Board Description OSN 7500 II OSN 7500 OSN 3500 OSN 1500A OSN 1500 B

N1EMS4 4xGE and 16xFE N Y Y Y Y

switching and
processing
board
N1EMS2 2xGE and 16xFE N Y Y Y Y
switching and
processing
board
N1EGS4, 4xGE switching N Y Y Y Y
N3EGS4 and processing
board
N4EGS4 4xGE switching Y Y Y Y Y
and processing
board
N1EGT2, 2xGE N Y Y Y Y
N2EGT2 transparent
transmission
board
N2EGS2, 2xGE switching N Y Y Y Y
N3EGS2 and processing
board
N1EFF8 8x100M Y Y Y N Y
Ethernet optical
interface board
N1EFF8A 8x100M N Y Y N Y
Ethernet optical
interface board
N1ETF8 8x100M N Y Y N Y
Ethernet
twisted-pair
interface board
N1ETF8A 8x100M Y Y Y N Y
Ethernet
twisted-pair
interface board
N1ETS8 8x10/100M Y Y Y N Y
Ethernet twisted
pair interface
switching board

M Boards
Table 10 lists all ATM boards and their applicable products.

Table 10 List of ATM boards

Board Description OSN 7500 II OSN 7500 OSN 3500 OSN 1500A OSN 1500 B

N1ADL4, 1xSTM-4 ATM N Y Y Y Y

N1IDL4 service
processing
board
N1ADQ1, 4xSTM-1 ATM N Y Y Y Y
N1IDQ1 service
processing
board

R Boards
Table 11 lists all PRP boards and their applicable products.

Table 11 List of RPR boards

Board Description OSN 7500 II OSN 7500 OSN 3500 OSN 1500A OSN 1500 B

N2EGR2 2xGE ring N Y Y Y Y

processing
board
N2EMR0 12xFE and 1xGE N Y Y Y Y
ring processing
board

N/Video Boards

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 81/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Table 12 lists all SAN/video boards and their applicable products.

Table 12 List of SAN/video boards

Board Description OSN 7500 II OSN 7500 OSN 3500 OSN 1500A OSN 1500 B

N1VST4 4-port video Y Y Y Y Y

service
transparent
transmission
board
N1MST4 4-port multi- N Y Y Y Y
service
transparent
transmission
board

M Boards
Table 13 lists all PCM boards and their applicable products.

Table 13 List of PCM boards

Board Description OSN 7500 II OSN 7500 OSN 3500 OSN 1500A OSN 1500 B

N1FXSO12 12-port N N Y Y Y
FXS/FXO
processing
board
N1FXS12 12-port FXS N N Y Y Y
processing
board
N1FXO12 12-port FXO N N Y Y Y
processing
board
N1AT6 6-port 2/4 wire N N Y Y Y
and E&M
processing
board
N2AT6 6-port 2/4 wire N N Y Y Y
and E&M
processing
board
N1DX1 DDN service N Y Y N Y
accessing and
converging
board
N3DX1 DDN service Y Y Y Y Y
accessing and
converging
board
N1DM12 DDN service Y Y Y N Y
interface board

DM Boards
Table 14 lists all WDM boards and their applicable products.

Table 14 List of WDM boards

Board Description OSN 7500 II OSN 7500 OSN 3500 OSN 1500A OSN 1500 B

TN11CMR4 4-channel N Y Y N N
optical
add/drop
multiplexing
board
TN11CMR2 2-channel N Y Y N N
optical
add/drop
multiplexing
board
N1MR2A 2-channel N Y Y Y Y
optical
add/drop
multiplexing
board

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 82/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Board Description OSN 7500 II OSN 7500 OSN 3500 OSN 1500A OSN 1500 B

N1MR2B 2-channel N N N Y Y
optical
add/drop
multiplexing
board
N1MR2C 2-channel N Y Y N Y
optical
add/drop
multiplexing
board
TN11MR2 2-port optical Y Y Y N N
add/drop
multiplexing
board
TN11MR4 4-port optical Y Y Y N N
add/drop
multiplexing
board
N1CMD2 2-channel Y Y Y N Y
bidirectional
optical
multiplexer and
demultiplexer
board
TNN1XMD2 2-channel Y N N N N
bidirectional
optical
add/drop
multiplexing
board
N1LWX Arbitrary bit N Y Y Y Y
rate wavelength
conversion
board
N1FIB Filter isolating N Y Y Y Y
board

xiliary Boards
Table 15 lists all auxiliary boards and their applicable products.

Table 15 List of auxiliary boards

Board Description OSN 7500 II OSN 7500 OSN 3500 OSN 1500A OSN 1500 B

T1EOW Orderwire N Y N N N
processing
board
R1EOW Orderwire N N N Y Y
processing
board
T1AUX System auxiliary N Y N N N
interface board
N1AUX System auxiliary N N Y N N
interface board
R1AUX, System auxiliary N N N Y Y
R2AUX interface board
R1AMU Orderwire N N N Y Y
processing or
alarm cascading
board
TN81FAN Fan board Y N N N N
N1FANA Fan board (high N Y N N N
power)
N1FAN Fan board N N Y N N
R1FAN Fan board N N N Y Y

tical Amplifier Boards Boards

Table 16 lists all optical amplifier boards and their applicable products.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 83/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Table 16 List of optical amplifier boards
Board Description OSN 7500 II OSN 7500 OSN 3500 OSN 1500A OSN 1500 B

N1BPA One-channel N Y Y Y Y
power amplifier
and one-
channel pre-
amplifier board
N2BPA One-channel Y Y Y Y Y
power amplifier
and one-
channel pre-
amplifier board
N1COA, Case-shaped Y Y Y Y Y
61COA, optical amplifier
62COA
TN11OBU1 Optical booster N Y Y N N
amplifier board
TN12OBU1 Optical booster Y N N N N
amplifier board
TN12OBU2 Optical booster N Y Y N N
amplifier board
N1BA2 Two-channel N Y Y Y Y
power amplifier
board
N1RPC01 Forward Raman Y Y Y Y Y
driving board
(external)
N1RPC02 Backward Y Y Y Y Y
Raman driving
board (external)

persion Compensation Boards

Table 17 lists all dispersion compensation boards and their applicable products.

Table 17 List of dispersion compensation boards

Board Description OSN 7500 II OSN 7500 OSN 3500 OSN 1500A OSN 1500 B

N1DCU Dispersion N Y Y N N
compensation
board
N2DCU Dispersion Y Y Y N N
compensation
board

wer Boards
Table 18 lists all power boards and their applicable products.

Table 18 List of power boards

Board Description OSN 7500 II OSN 7500 OSN 3500 OSN 1500A OSN 1500 B

TN81PIU Power interface Y N N N N

board
UPM Uninterruptible N Y Y Y Y
power module
T1PIU Power interface N Y N N N
board
(supporting
standard
subracks)
N1PIU Power interface N N Y N N
board
(supporting
standard
subracks)
T1PIUB Power interface N Y N N N
board
(supporting
type III
subracks)

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 84/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Board Description OSN 7500 II OSN 7500 OSN 3500 OSN 1500A OSN 1500 B

N1PIUA Power interface N N Y N N

board
(supporting
1100 W
enhanced
subrack.)
N1PIUB Power interface N N Y N N
board
(supporting
type III
subracks)
R1PIU Power interface N N N N Y
board
(supporting
OptiX OSN
1500B subrack)
R1PIUA Power interface N N N Y N
board
(supporting
OptiX OSN
1500A subrack)
R1PIUB Power interface N N N N Y
board
(supporting
enhanced OptiX
OSN 1500B
subrack)
R1PIUC Power interface N N N Y N
board
(supporting
enhanced OptiX
OSN 1500A
subrack)

Parent topic: Description of Common Hardware

6 Cross-Connect Boards and System Control Boards

This topic describes the system control boards and the cross-connect boards that have different capacities.

IXCSA
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the IXCSA
(infinite cross-connect and synchronous timing board).

SXCSA
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the SXCSA
(super cross-connect and synchronous timing board).

PSXCS(A)
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the PSXCS(A)
(super dual-plane cross-connect and timing board).

GSCC
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the GSCC
(system control and communication board).

Parent topic: Description of Common Hardware

6.1 IXCSA
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the IXCSA (infinite
cross-connect and synchronous timing board).

Application
The IXCSA is an infinite cross-connect and synchronous timing board. The IXCSA provides service grooming and clock input/output
functions in the OptiX OSN 3500 system.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 85/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Functions and Features
The IXCSA grooms services and inputs/outputs clock signals.

Front Panel
The front panel of the IXCSA has indicators and a bar code.

Parent topic: Cross-Connect Boards and System Control Boards

6.1.1 Application
The IXCSA is an infinite cross-connect and synchronous timing board. The IXCSA provides service grooming and clock input/output
functions in the OptiX OSN 3500 system.

The cross-connect and synchronous timing board provides the other boards in the system with the timing information and grooms the
services between line boards or tributary boards.
Figure 1 shows the position of the cross-connect and synchronous timing board in the OptiX OSN system.
Figure 1 Position of the cross-connect and synchronous timing board in the system

Parent topic: IXCSA

6.1.2 Functions and Features

The IXCSA grooms services and inputs/outputs clock signals.

oss-Connect Unit
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the cross-connect unit of the IXCSA.

Table 1 Functions and features of the cross-connect unit of the IXCSA

Function and Feature IXCSA

Basic functions Higher order cross-connect capacity: 200 Gbit/s

Lower order cross-connect capacity: 40 Gbit/s
Access capacity: 155 Gbit/s

Service processing Supports the flexible service grooming and supports the fully non-blocking cross-connect, multicast,
and broadcast services.
Enables the communication between the IXCSA and the other boards.
Supports the tact switch and performs the protection switching without interrupting services.
Supports the SNCP protection at the VC-4-4c, VC-4-8c, VC-4-16c, VC-4-64c, VC-4, VC-12, VC-3, and
AU-3 levels.
Supports VC-4-4c, VC-4-8c, VC-4-16c, and VC-4-64c concatenation services.
Supports a maximum of 40 linear MSP groups.
Supports a maximum of 12 ring MSP groups.
supports a maximum of 8064 SNCP groups.
Supports a maximum of 592 SNCMP groups.
Supports a maximum of 512 SNCTP groups.

Protection schemes Supports the 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units (non-revertive, by default).

ck Unit
Table 2 provides the functions and features of the clock unit of the IXCSA.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 86/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Table 2 Functions and features of the clock unit of the IXCSA

Function and Feature IXCSA

Basic functions Provides the standard system synchronization clock.

Other functions Supports the processing of the S1 byte to realize the clock protection switching.
Supports the extraction, insertion, and management of the SSM and clock ID.
Provides the RTC.
Supports the IEEE 1588v2 clock.

Input and output Through the AUX board:

Inputs two-channel 2048 kHz or 2048 kbit/s timing signals, and selects the external timing source.
Outputs two-channel 2048 kHz or 2048 kbit/s timing signals.

Parent topic: IXCSA

6.1.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the IXCSA has indicators and a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the IXCSA.

Figure 1 Front panel of the IXCSA

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Synchronization clock status indicator (SYNC) – two colors (red and green)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the IXCSA has no interface. The AUX provides the IXCSA with the external clock interface that can be set in 2048 kHz
mode or 2048 kbit/s mode. The AUX provides two BITS clock interfaces with 120-ohm or 75-ohm impedance. For details, see AUX.

Parent topic: IXCSA

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 87/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

6.2 SXCSA
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the SXCSA (super
cross-connect and synchronous timing board).

Application
The SXCSA is a super cross-connect and synchronous timing board. The SXCSA provides service grooming and clock input/output
functions in the OptiX OSN system.

Functions and Features

The SXCSA grooms services and inputs/outputs clock signals.

Front Panel
The front panel of the SXCSA has indicators and a bar code.

Parent topic: Cross-Connect Boards and System Control Boards

6.2.1 Application
The SXCSA is a super cross-connect and synchronous timing board. The SXCSA provides service grooming and clock input/output
functions in the OptiX OSN system.

The cross-connect and synchronous timing board provides the other boards in the system with the timing information, converges and
grooms services, communicates with the other boards in the system, and performs the configuration and management functions for the
other boards in the system.
Figure 1 shows the position of the cross-connect and synchronous timing board in the OptiX OSN system.
Figure 1 Position of the cross-connect and synchronous timing board in the system

NOTE:
PCM boards are available only in V200R013C00 or later.
Smart line boards are available only in V200R015C20 and later.

Parent topic: SXCSA

6.2.2 Functions and Features

The SXCSA grooms services and inputs/outputs clock signals.

oss-Connect Unit
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the cross-connect unit of the SXCSA.

Table 1 Functions and features of the cross-connect unit of the SXCSA

Function and Feature SXCSA

Basic functions Realizes 200 Gbit/s higher order cross-connection at the VC-4 level, 20 Gbit/s lower order cross-connection at
the VC-3 or VC-12 level, and 155 Gbit/s access.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 88/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature SXCSA

Service processing Supports the flexible service grooming and supports the fully non-blocking cross-connect, multicast,
and broadcast services.
Enables the communication between the SXCSA and the other boards.
Supports the tact switch and performs the protection switching without interrupting services.
Supports the SNCP protection at the VC-4-4c, VC-4-8c, VC-4-16c, VC-4-64c, VC-4, VC-12, VC-3, and
AU-3 levels.
Supports VC-4-4c, VC-4-8c, VC-4-16c, and VC-4-64c concatenation services.
Supports a maximum of 40 linear MSP groups.
Supports a maximum of 12 ring MSP groups.
Supports a maximum of 2016 SNCP groups.
Supports a maximum of 592 SNCMP groups.
Supports a maximum of 512 SNCTP groups.

Protection schemes Supports the 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units (non-revertive, by default).

ck Unit
Table 2 provides the functions and features of the clock unit of the SXCSA.

Table 2 Functions and features of the clock unit of the SXCSA

Function and Feature SXCSA

Basic functions Provides the standard system synchronization clock.

Other functions Supports the processing of the S1 byte to realize the clock protection switching.
Supports the extraction, insertion, and management of the SSM and clock ID.
Provides the real-time clock (RTC).

Input and output Through the AUX board:

Inputs/Outputs two-channel 2 MHz or 2048 kbit/s timing signals (75-ohm) and allows selection of
external timing sources.
Inputs/Outputs two-channel 2 MHz or 2048 kbit/s timing signals (120-ohm) and allows selection of
external timing sources.

Parent topic: SXCSA

6.2.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the SXCSA has indicators and a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SXCSA.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 89/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the SXCSA

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Synchronization clock status indicator (SYNC) – two colors (red and green)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the SXCSA has no interface. The AUX provides the SXCSA with the external clock interface that can be set in 2048 kHz
mode or 2048 kbit/s mode. The AUX provides two BITS clock interfaces with 120-ohm or 75-ohm impedance. For details, see AUX.

Parent topic: SXCSA

6.3 PSXCS(A)
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the PSXCS(A) (super
dual-plane cross-connect and timing board).

Application
The PSXCS(A) is a super cross-connect and synchronous timing board. The PSXCS(A) provides service grooming and clock
input/output functions in the OptiX OSN system.

Functions and Features

The PSXCS(A) board grooms services and inputs/outputs clock signals.

Front Panel
The front panel of the PSXCS(A) has indicators and a bar code.

Parent topic: Cross-Connect Boards and System Control Boards

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 90/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

6.3.1 Application
The PSXCS(A) is a super cross-connect and synchronous timing board. The PSXCS(A) provides service grooming and clock input/output
functions in the OptiX OSN system.

The board provides the other boards in the system with the timing information, converges and grooms services, communicates with the
other boards in the system, and performs the configuration and management functions for the other boards in the system.
Figure 1 shows the position of the board in the OptiX OSN system.

Figure 1 Position of the board in the OptiX OSN system

NOTE:
PCM boards are available only in V200R013C00 or later.
Smart line boards are available only in V200R015C20 and later.

Parent topic: PSXCS(A)

6.3.2 Functions and Features

The PSXCS(A) board grooms services and inputs/outputs clock signals.

oss-Connect Unit
Table 1 provides the functions and features supported by the cross-connect unit of the PSXCS(A) board.

Table 1 Functions and features supported by the cross-connect unit of the PSXCS(A) board
Function and Description
Feature

Basic functions Cross-connect capacity N1PSXCS N2PSXCSA/N3PSXCSA

Higher order cross-connect capacity (Gbit/s) 200 200
Lower order cross-connect capacity (Gbit/s) 20 20
Packet switching capacity (Gbit/s) 80 160
Service access capacity TDM mode (Gbit/s) 155 155
Packet mode (Gbit/s) 60 100
Service Provides the flexible service grooming capability, supports non-blocking full cross-connection, and provides multicast and
processing broadcast services.
Communicates with other boards.
Supports the tact switch and performs the protection switching without interrupting services.
Supports SNCP at the VC-4-4c, VC-4-8c, VC-4-16c, VC-4-64c, VC-4, VC-12, VC-3, and AU-3 levels.
Supports VC-4, VC-12, VC-3, and AU-3 services.
Supports VC-4-4c, VC-4-8c, VC-4-16c, and VC-4-64c concatenation services.
Supports a maximum of 40 linear MSP groups.
Supports a maximum of 12 ring MSP groups.
An N1PSXCS board supports a maximum of 8064 SNCP groups.
An N2PSXCSA/N3PSXCSA board supports a maximum of 8904 SNCP groups.
Supports a maximum of 592 SNCMP groups.
Supports a maximum of 512 SNCTP groups.

Protection Supports 1+1 hot standby. The default reversion mode is the non-revertive switching mode.
scheme
Others Queries and reports the working temperature of the cross-connect and timing board and the entire equipment.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 91/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
ck Unit
Table 2 provides the functions and features supported by the clock unit of the PSXCS(A) board.

Table 2 Functions and features supported by the clock unit of the PSXCS(A) board
Function and Feature Description

Basic functions Provides the standard clock for system synchronization.

Other functions Supports the processing of the S1 byte to implement the clock protection switching.
Supports the extraction, insertion, and processing of the SSM information and clock ID.
Supports IEEE 1588v2 synchronization.
Supports frequency deviation detection by the N2PSXCSA and N3PSXCSA boards.

Input and output Working with the AUX board:

Inputs/Outputs two-channel 2 MHz or 2048 kbit/s timing signals (75-ohm) and allows selection of
external timing sources.
Inputs/Outputs two-channel 2 MHz or 2048 kbit/s timing signals (120-ohm) and allows selection of
external timing sources.

Parent topic: PSXCS(A)

6.3.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the PSXCS(A) has indicators and a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PSXCS(A).

Figure 1 Front panel of the PSXCS(A)

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Synchronization clock status indicator (SYNC) – two colors (red and green)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Alarm Indicators on the Boards.

erfaces

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 92/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
The front panel of the PSXCS(A) has no interface. The AUX provides the PSXCS(A) with the external clock interface that can be set in 2048
kHz mode or 2048 kbit/s mode. The AUX provides two BITS clock interfaces with 120-ohm or 75-ohm impedance. For details, see the
topic that describes the interfaces of the AUX.

Parent topic: PSXCS(A)

6.4 GSCC
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the GSCC (system
control and communication board).

Application
The GSCC is the intelligent system control board. The GSCC works with the to manage the boards on the equipment and realize the
communication between different pieces of equipment.

Functions and Features

The GSCC supports the system control, orderwire, communication, and system power supply monitoring.

Front Panel
The front panel of the GSCC has indicators and a bar code.

Parent topic: Cross-Connect Boards and System Control Boards

6.4.1 Application
The GSCC is the intelligent system control board. The GSCC works with the to manage the boards on the equipment and realize the
communication between different pieces of equipment.
Figure 1 shows the position of the GSCC in the system.

Figure 1 Position of the GSCC in the system

Parent topic: GSCC

6.4.2 Functions and Features

The GSCC supports the system control, orderwire, communication, and system power supply monitoring.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the GSCC.

Table 1 Functions and features of the GSCC

Function and Feature GSCC

Basic functions Performs the service configuration function and service grooming function, monitors the service performance, and
collects information about performance events and alarms.
Interfaces Provides the 10M/100M Ethernet port, which is used for communicating with the NMS. The Ethernet port is
accessed through the AUX.
Provides the F&f interface, which is accessed through the AUX and is used to manage the COA.
Provides one 64 kbit/s synchronous data port F1, which is accessed through the AUX.
Provides the RS232 OAM interface, which is used for connecting a PC or workstation, and supports the
remote maintenance by using a modem that uses the RS232 DCE interface. The OAM interface is accessed
through the AUX.

DCC communication Processes a maximum of 160 DCCs (D1–D3). In this manner, the link is provided for transmitting the NM information.

Overhead processing Processes the E1, E2, F1, and serial1–serial4 bytes.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 93/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature GSCC

Clock function Provides the RTC.

Supports the high-precision clock synchronization feature, and complies with the IEEE 1588 V2 protocol. The
N4GSCC receives the time information through interfaces S1–S4 of the AUX. The S1, S3 and ALMI4 interfaces
receive the first channel of time information, and the S2, S4 and ALMI4 interfaces receive the second channel
of time information.

Alarms and maintenance Supports service performance monitoring and collects information about performance events and alarms.
features
Provides 16 alarm inputs and four alarm outputs through the AUX.
Provides one 4-output alarm cascading port through the AUX.
Controls the four cabinet indicators through the AUX.
Supports intelligent fan speed control and manages the fan alarms.
Supports simulation package loading and diffused loading.
Supports the function of detecting whether a packet data board is in position.

Power supply management Supports the monitoring of the –48 V or –60 V power supply.
Supports the in-service check function for the PIU board and supports the failure check function for the
lightning protection module of the PIU.

Protection schemes Supports the 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit. When the active board is faulty, services are switched to the standby board
automatically.

NOTE:
If GSCC boards are used in packet systems, two N4GSCC/N6GSCC boards of the same version need to be configured in 1+1 backup mode.

Packet function The N4GSCC and N6GSCC support the packet function.
For information about the performance of the packet system, see Packet System Performance.

Parent topic: GSCC

6.4.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the GSCC has indicators and a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the N4GSCC/N6GSCC.
Figure 1 Front panel of the N4GSCC/N6GSCC

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 94/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)
–48 V power supply indicator of channel A (PWRA) – two colors (red and green)
–48 V power supply indicator of channel B (PWRB) – two colors (red and green)
+3.3 V backup power supply indicator of the system (PWRC) – two colors (red and green)
Alarm mute indicator (ALMC) – one color (yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the GSCC has no interface. The AUX provides interfaces for the GSCC. For details, see AUX.
The front panel of the N4GSCC/N6GSCC has one warm reset switch and one alarm cut switch. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the
switches

Table 1 Types and usage of the switches of the GSCC

Switch Type of Switch Usage

RESET Warm reset switch Press the switch to perform a warm reset for the SCC unit.
ALM CUT Alarm cut switch Press the switch to mute the alarm. Press the switch for five seconds to mute the alarm
permanently. Press the switch again for five seconds to resume the alarm sound.

Parent topic: GSCC

7 Packet Processing Boards

The packet processing boards include the PEX1, PEX2, PEG16, and PEG8. They achieve the packet switching function in the packet
domain.

PEX2
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the PEX2 (2-
port 10 Gigabit Ethernet switching processing board).

PEG8
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the PEG8 (8-
Port Gigabit Ethernet switching processing board).

PEG16
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the PEG16
(16xGE Ethernet processing board).

Parent topic: Description of Common Hardware

7.1 PEX2
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the PEX2 (2-port 10
Gigabit Ethernet switching processing board).

Application
The PEX2 is mainly used in the packet data transmission field to transmit/receive data packets, manage bandwidths, and implement
switching of data packets.

Functions and Features

PEX2 boards process and forward 2x10 Gbit/s Ethernet services and support QoS functions such as traffic management, congestion
control, and queue scheduling of data packets.

Front Panel
The front panel of the PEX2 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: Packet Processing Boards

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 95/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

7.1.1 Application
The PEX2 is mainly used in the packet data transmission field to transmit/receive data packets, manage bandwidths, and implement
switching of data packets.
shows the typical networking and application of the PEX2. The PEX2 works with the cross-connect board that provides the packet
Figure 1
switching function to meet the requirement of packet features. With this board, the TDM domain can be overlapped with the packet
domain on the OptiX OSN equipment so that the data can be transmitted in the two domains. In this manner, an MSTP network can
smoothly evolve to a packet switching network.

Figure 1 Networking and application of the PEX2

Parent topic: PEX2

7.1.2 Functions and Features

PEX2 boards process and forward 2x10 Gbit/s Ethernet services and support QoS functions such as traffic management, congestion
control, and queue scheduling of data packets.
Table 1 lists the functions and features supported by PEX2 boards.

Table 1 Functions and features supported by PEX2 boards

Function and Feature Description

Basic functions Receives/Transmits and processes 2x10 GE services.

Port types Supports 10GBASE-LR (LAN), 10GBASE-ER (LAN), and 10GBASE-ZR (LAN) Ethernet optical ports. The optical ports use
LC connectors and support the transmission distances of 10 km, 40 km, and 80 km.
Supports CWDM and DWDM colored optical ports. The optical ports use LC connectors. CWDM optical ports support
the transmission distance of 70 km. DWDM optical ports support the transmission distance of 40 km or 80 km.

Functions when A PEX2 board does not support an interface board, and provides two 10GE ports on the front panel.
being used with an
interface board
Port characteristics Pluggable optical module Supports XFP optical modules.
Single-fiber bidirectional Not supported
optical module
Working modes 10GE full-duplex (only in LAN mode)
Flow control at ports Auto-negotiation mode: not supported
Non-autonegotiation mode: supported
Query/Setting of port status Supported
Query of port types Supported

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 96/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature Description

Query/Setting of optical Supported

power thresholds
Query/Setting of Supported
unidirectional-mode
Service Processing capability Processes 20 Gbit/s services in full-duplex mode.
specifications
Service bearing modes MPLS: supported
QinQ: supported
Port: supported
PW specifications Maximum number of PWs: 16K
Maximum number of MS-PWs: 8K
Tunnel specifications Number of unidirectional MPLS tunnels (with tunnel resources shared):
4K, when working with the N4GSCC
16K, when working with the N6GSCC

Number of bidirectional MPLS tunnels (with tunnel resources shared):

2K, when working with the N4GSCC
8K, when working with the N6GSCC

MFL for ports Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 960 bytes to 9600 bytes. After the
setting becomes valid, the length of the packets that enter or exit the ports is restricted by the
preset MFL.
MTU for services For packet services carried by PWs, PEX2 boards support the setting of the packet length,
which ranges from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes. For packet services carried in other modes, PEX2
boards do not support the setting of the packet length.
Ethernet service capability E-Line service: supported
Number of supported E-Line services:
4K, when working with the N4GSCC
8K, when working with the N6GSCC

E-LAN service: supported

Number of supported E-LAN services: 1020
Number of static MAC addresses in E-LAN services: 2K

E-AGGR service: not supported

Formats of Ethernet data Supports the encapsulation in the IEEE 802.3 format, Ethernet II format, or IEEE 802.1q/p
frames format.
Maximum number of QinQ 1K
links
Jumbo frame Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes.
Protection schemes Tunnel APS Supports the 1+1 (single-ended/dual-ended) and 1:1 (dual-ended) tunnel APS in compliance
with ITU-T Y.1720 and ITU-T G.8131.
Number of supported tunnel APS protection groups: 1K
PW APS
Supports the PW FPS (single-ended), 1+1 (single-ended/dual-ended) and 1:1 (dual-ended) PW
APS in compliance with ITU-T Y.1720 and ITU-T G.8131.
Supports a maximum of 1K PW APS protection groups, and a PW protection group can bind a
maximum of 512 members.

NOTE:
PW APS and tunnel APS share the protection resources.

MRPS
Supports MRPS.
Protection group type: two-fiber bidirectional
Switching type: wrapping switching

LAG
Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation.
Supports the load sharing mode and load non-sharing mode.
Complies with IEEE 802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX.

MC-LAG Supported, which complies with IEEE 802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX.
MSTP Supported, which complies with IEEE 802.1s.
LPT Point-to-point LPT: supported
Point-to-multipoint LPT: supported
Synchronization Synchronous Ethernet Clock Supports two channels of synchronous Ethernet clock signals.
1588v2 Supports two channels of IEEE 1588v2 time synchronization and clock synchronization signals.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 97/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature Description

Maintenance ETH OAM a

Ethernet Service OAM :
features
Supports CC, LB and LT. These functions comply with IEEE 802.1ag.
Supports LM and 2DM. These functions comply with ITU-T Y.1731.
Number of services that support Ethernet OAM (ETH OAM): 2K

a
Ethernet Port OAM :
Supports OAM auto-discovery, and link performance monitoring. These functions comply with
IEEE 802.3ah.
Number of ports that support ETH OAM: 2K
Distributed MPLS OAM/Centralized
MPLS OAM MPLS tunnel OAMa:
Supports CV, FFD, BDI, FDI, tunnel ping, and tunnel traceroute. These functions comply with
ITU-T Y.1711.
Number of MPLS tunnels that support OAM: 2K

MPLS PW OAMa:
Supports CV, FFD, BDI, FDI, PW traceroute, and PW ping. These functions comply with ITU-T
Y.1711.
Number of MPLS PWs that support OAM: 2K
MPLS-TP OAM
MPLS-TP tunnel OAMa:
Supports CC, RDI, AIS, LB, LT, LM, 1DM, TST, LCK, and 2DM. These functions comply with ITU-T
G.8113.1.
Number of tunnels that support MPLS-TP OAM: 2K

MPLS-TP PW OAMa:
Supports CC, RDI, AIS, LB, LT, LM, 1DM, TST, LCK, CSF, and 2DM. These functions comply with
ITU-T G.8113.1.
Number of PWs that support MPLS-TP OAM: 2K

Loopback capability PHY layer at Ethernet ports: not supported

MAC layer at Ethernet ports: inloops and outloops supported
RMON Supported
Port Mirroring Supported
Inband DCN Supported
HQoS Supports service WRED policies, WFQ policies, PW polices, QinQ polices, V-UNI ingress policies, V-UNI egress policies, port
policies, port shaping.
IGMP Snooping Protocol enabling Supported
Port aging time Supported
Fast leave Supported
Discarding of unknown Supported
broadcast packets
Static broadcast entry Supported
Query of electronic Supported
labels

NOTE:
a: MPLS tunnel OAM, MPLS PW OAM, MPLS-TP tunnel OAM, MPLS-TP PW OAM, and ETH OAM share OAM resources.

Parent topic: PEX2

7.1.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the PEX2 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PEX2.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 98/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the PEX2

icators

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Connection status indicator (LINK) – one color (green)
Data receiving and transmission indicator (ACT) – one color (orange)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Alarm Indicators on the Boards.

erfaces
The front panel of the PEX2 has two optical interfaces. Table 1 describes the type and usage of the optical interfaces of the PEX2.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the PEX2

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN1-IN2 LC (pluggable) Receives 10GE signals.

OUT1-OUT2 LC (pluggable) Transmits 10GE signals.

Parent topic: PEX2

7.2 PEG8
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the PEG8 (8-Port
Gigabit Ethernet switching processing board).

Application
The PEG8 is mainly used in the packet data transmission field to transmit/receive data packets, manage bandwidths, and realize
switching of data packets.

Functions and Features

PEG8 boards process and forward 8xGE services and support QoS functions such as traffic management, congestion control, and
queue scheduling for data packets.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 99/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Front Panel
The front panel of the PEG8 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: Packet Processing Boards

7.2.1 Application
The PEG8 is mainly used in the packet data transmission field to transmit/receive data packets, manage bandwidths, and realize switching
of data packets.
shows the typical networking and application of the PEG8. The PEG8 works with the cross-connect board that provides the packet
Figure 1
switching function to meet the requirement of packet features. With this board, the TDM domain can be overlapped with the packet
domain on the OptiX OSN equipment so that the data can be transmitted in the two domains. In this manner, an MSTP network can
smoothly evolve to a packet switching network.
Application describes the typical networking and application when the PEG8 works with the PETF8.
Application describes the typical networking and application when the PEG8 works with the PEFF8.
Application describes the typical networking and application when the PEG8 works with the CQ1.
Application describes the typical networking and application when the PEG8 works with the MD12.
Application describes the typical networking and application when the PEG8 works with the MD75.
Figure 1 Networking and application of the PEG8

Parent topic: PEG8

7.2.2 Functions and Features

PEG8 boards process and forward 8xGE services and support QoS functions such as traffic management, congestion control, and queue
scheduling for data packets.
Table 1 lists the functions and features supported by PEG8 boards.

Table 1 Functions and features supported by PEG8 boards

Function and Feature Description

Basic functions Provides eight GE optical/electrical ports on the front panel to receive/transmit and process 8xGE signals.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 100/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature Description

Port types Supports 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX, 1000BASE-VX, and 1000BASE-ZX optical ports. The optical ports use LC
connectors and support the transmission distances of 0.5 km, 10 km, 40 km, and 80 km.
Supports CWDM colored optical ports. The optical ports use LC connectors and support the transmission distances of
40 km and 80 km.
Supports DWDM colored optical ports. The optical ports use LC connectors and support the transmission distance of
120 km.
Supports GE electrical ports. The electrical ports use RJ45 connectors and meet the specifications of the 1000BASE-T
physical layer provided in IEEE 802.3.

Functions when Works with the interface board PETF8/PEFF8/CQ1/MD12/MD75. One PEG8 board can receive/transmit the
being used with an FE/channelized E1/STM-1 CES services from a maximum of two interface boards.
interface board
Works with the interface board MD12/MD75. One PEG8 board can receive/transmit the ATM/IMA services from a
maximum of two interface boards.

Port characteristics Pluggable Supports SFP optical/electrical modules.

optical/electrical module
Single-fiber bidirectional Supports SFP single-fiber bidirectional optical modules.
optical module
Working modes 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation for GE optical ports
Auto-negotiation for GE electrical ports (The negotiation result can only be 1000M full-duplex.)

Flow control at ports Auto-negotiation mode: supported

Non-autonegotiation mode: supported
Query/Setting of port Supported
status
Query of port types Supported
Query/Setting of optical Supported
power thresholds
Query/Setting of Not supported
unidirectional-mode
Service specifications Processing capability The processing capability varies according to slots.
When a PEG8 is installed in any slot of slots 1-3 and 16, it processes 2.5 Gbit/s services in
full-duplex mode.
When a PEG8 is installed in any slot of slots 4-6 and 13-15, it processes 5 Gbit/s services in
full-duplex mode.

Service bearing modes MPLS: supported

QinQ: supported
Port: supported
PW specifications Maximum number of PWs: 16K
Maximum number of MS-PWs: 8K
Tunnel specifications Number of unidirectional MPLS tunnels (with tunnels shared):
When working with the N4GSCC: 4K
When working with the N6GSCC: 16K

Number of bidirectional MPLS tunnels (with tunnels shared):

When working with the N4GSCC: 2K
When working with the N6GSCC: 8K

MFL for ports Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 960 bytes to 9600 bytes. After the
setting becomes valid, the length of the packets that enter or exit the ports is restricted by the
preset MFL.
MTU for services For packet services carried by PWs, PEG8 boards support the setting of the packet length, which
ranges from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes. For packet services carried in other modes, PEG8 boards do not
support the setting of the packet length.
Ethernet service E-Line service: supported
capability Number of supported E-Line services:
When working with the N4GSCC: 4K
When working with the N6GSCC: 8K

E-LAN service: supported

Number of supported E-LAN services: 1020
Number of static MAC addresses in E-LAN services: 2K

E-AGGR service: not supported

Formats of Ethernet data Supports the encapsulation in IEEE 802.3 format, Ethernet II format, or IEEE 802.1q/p format.
frames

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 101/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature Description

Maximum number of 1K
QinQ links
Jumbo frame Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes.
Protection schemes Tunnel APS
Supports the 1+1 (single-ended/dual-ended) and 1:1 (dual-ended) tunnel APS in compliance with
ITU-T Y.1720 and ITU-T G.8131.
Number of supported tunnel APS protection groups: 1K
PW APS
Supports the PW FPS (single-ended), 1+1 (single-ended/dual-ended) and 1:1 (dual-ended) PW APS
in compliance with ITU-T Y.1720 and ITU-T G.8131.
Supports a maximum of 1K PW APS protection groups, and a PW protection group can bind a
maximum of 512 members.

NOTE:
PW APS and tunnel APS share the protection resources.

MRPS
Supports MRPS.
Protection group type: two-fiber bidirectional
Switching type: wrapping switching

LAG
Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation.
Supports the load sharing mode and load non-sharing mode.
Complies with IEEE 802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX.

MC-LAG Supported, which complies with IEEE 802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX.
MSTP Supported, which complies with IEEE 802.1s.
LPT Point-to-point LPT: supported
Point-to-multipoint LPT: supported
Synchronization Synchronous Ethernet Clock Supports eight channels of synchronous Ethernet clock signals (only by GE optical ports).
1588v2 Supports eight channels of IEEE 1588v2 time synchronization and clock synchronization (only by GE
optical ports).
Maintenance ETH OAM a
Ethernet Service OAM :
features
Supports CC, LB and LT. These functions comply with IEEE 802.1ag.
Supports LM and 2DM. These functions comply with ITU-T Y.1731.
Number of services that support Ethernet OAM (ETH OAM): 2K

Ethernet Port OAMa:

Supports OAM auto-discovery, remote loopback, fault detection, and link performance monitoring.
These functions comply with IEEE 802.3ah.
Number of ports that support ETH OAM: 2K
Distributed MPLS
OAM/Centralized MPLS OAM MPLS tunnel OAMa:
Supports CV, FFD, BDI, FDI, Tunnel ping, and Tunnel traceroute. These functions comply with ITU-T
Y.1711.
Number of MPLS tunnels that support OAM: 2K

MPLS PW OAMa:
Supports CV, FFD, BDI, FDI, PW traceroute, and PW ping. These functions comply with ITU-T Y.1711.
Number of MPLS PWs that support OAM: 2K
MPLS-TP OAM
MPLS-TP tunnel OAMa:
Supports CC, RDI, AIS, LB, LT, LM, 1DM, TST, LCK, and 2DM. These functions comply with ITU-T
G.8113.1.
Number of tunnels that support MPLS-TP OAM: 2K

MPLS-TP PW OAMa:
Supports CC, RDI, AIS, LB, LT, LM, 1DM, TST, LCK, CSF, and 2DM. These functions comply with ITU-T
G.8113.1.
Number of PWs that support MPLS-TP OAM: 2K

Loopback capability PHY layer at Ethernet ports: not supported

MAC layer at Ethernet ports: supports inloops and outloops.
RMON Supported
Port Mirroring Supported
Inband DCN Supported
HQoS Supports service WRED policies, WFQ policies, PW polices, QinQ polices, V-UNI ingress policies, V-UNI egress policies, port
policies, port shaping.
IGMP Snooping Protocol enabling Supported

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 102/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature Description

Port aging time Supported

Fast leave Supported
Discarding of unknown Supported
broadcast packets
Static broadcast entry Supported
Query of electronic Supported
labels

NOTE:
a: MPLS tunnel OAM, MPLS PW OAM, MPLS-TP tunnel OAM, MPLS-TP PW OAM, and ETH OAM share OAM resources.

Parent topic: PEG8

7.2.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the PEG8 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PEG8.

Figure 1 Front panel of the PEG8 with optical interfaces

icators

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Alarm Indicators on the Boards.

erfaces
The front panel of the PEG8 has eight optical/electrical interfaces. Table 1 describes the type and usage of the interface of the PEG8.

Table 1 Interfaces of the PEG8

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 103/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Interface Type of Interface Usage

RX1-RX8 LC/RJ-45 (pluggable) Receives GE signals.

TX1-TX8 LC/RJ-45 (pluggable) Transmits GE signals.

Parent topic: PEG8

7.3 PEG16
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the PEG16 (16xGE
Ethernet processing board).

Application
The PEG16 is mainly used in the packet data transmission field to transmit/receive data packets, manage bandwidths, and realize
switching and aggregation of data packets.

Functions and Features

PEG16 boards receive/transmit and forward 16xGE services, and support the QoS functions such as traffic measurement, congestion
control, and queue scheduling for data packets.

Front Panel
The front panel of the PEG16 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: Packet Processing Boards

7.3.1 Application
The PEG16 is mainly used in the packet data transmission field to transmit/receive data packets, manage bandwidths, and realize
switching and aggregation of data packets.
shows the typical networking and application when the PEG16 works with the other boards on the network. The PEG16 works with
Figure 1
the cross-connect board that provides the packet switching function to meet the requirement of packet features. With this board, the
TDM domain can be overlapped with the packet domain on the OptiX OSN equipment to transmit data in the two domains. In this way,
the equipment realizes the smooth evolution from the MSTP network to the packet switching network.
For the typical networking and application when the PEG16 works with the PETF8, see Application.

Figure 1 Networking and application of the PEG16

Parent topic: PEG16

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 104/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

7.3.2 Functions and Features

PEG16 boards receive/transmit and forward 16xGE services, and support the QoS functions such as traffic measurement, congestion
control, and queue scheduling for data packets.
Table 1

Table 1 Functions and features supported by PEG16 boards

Function and Feature Description

Basic functions Receives/Transmits and processes 16xGE services.

Port types Supports 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX, 1000BASE-VX, and 1000BASE-ZX optical ports. The optical ports use LC
connectors and support the transmission distances of 0.5 km, 10 km, 40 km, and 80 km.
Supports CWDM colored optical ports. The optical ports use LC connectors and support the transmission distance of
40 km.

Functions when being Provides ports on the front panel or works with the interface board PETF8. One PEG16 board can receive/transmit the FE
used with an interface services of a maximum of two interface boards.
board
Port characteristics Pluggable optical Supports SFP optical modules.
module
Single-fiber bidirectional Not supported
optical module
Working modes Full-duplex and auto-negotiation for GE ports
Flow control at ports Auto-negotiation mode: not supported
Non-autonegotiation mode: not supported
Query/Setting of port Supported
status
Query of port types Supported
Query/Setting of optical The setting of input optical power thresholds is supported.
power thresholds
Query/Setting of Not supported
unidirectional-mode
Service specifications Processing capability Processes 10 Gbit/s services in full-duplex mode.
Service bearing modes MPLS: supported
QinQ: supported
Port: supported
PW specifications Maximum number of PWs: 16K
Maximum number of MS-PWs: 8K
Tunnel specifications Number of unidirectional MPLS tunnels (with tunnels shared): 4K

Number of bidirectional MPLS tunnels (with tunnels shared): 2K

MFL for ports Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 960 bytes to 9600 bytes. After the
setting becomes valid, the length of the packets that enter or exit the ports is restricted by the
preset MFL.
MTU for services Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes.
Ethernet service E-Line service: supported
capability Number of supported E-Line services:
4K, when working with the N4GSCC
8K, when working with the N6GSCC

E-LAN service: supported

Number of supported E-LAN services: 1020.
Number of static MAC addresses in E-LAN services: 2K.

E-AGGR service: 4, each of which supports 127 leaf ports

Formats of Ethernet data Supports the encapsulation in IEEE 802.3 format, Ethernet II format, or IEEE 802.1q/p format.
frames
Maximum number of 1K
QinQ links
Jumbo frame Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes.
Protection schemes Tunnel APS
Supports the 1+1 (single-ended/dual-ended) and 1:1 (dual-ended) tunnel APS in compliance with
ITU-T Y.1720 and ITU-T G.8131.
Number of supported Tunnel APS protection groups:1K
PW APS Not supported

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 105/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature Description

LAG
Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation.
Supports the load sharing mode and load non-sharing mode.
Complies with IEEE 802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX.

MC-LAG Not supported

MSTP Not supported
LPT Point-to-point LPT: supported
Point-to-multipoint LPT: supported
Synchronization Synchronous Ethernet Clock Provides two GE optical ports (only by the first two optical ports) that support the synchronous
Ethernet clock feature.
IEEE 1588v2 Not supported
Maintenance features ETH OAM a
Ethernet Service OAM :
Supports CC, LB and LT. These functions comply with IEEE 802.1ag.
Supports LM and 2DM. These functions comply with ITU-T Y.1731.
Number of services that support Ethernet OAM (ETH OAM): 2K

Ethernet Port OAMa:

Supports OAM auto-discovery, remote loopback, fault detection, and link performance monitoring.
These functions comply with IEEE 802.3ah.
Number of ports that support ETH OAM: 2K
Distributed MPLS
OAM/Centralized MPLS OAM MPLS tunnel OAMa:
Supports CV, FFD, BDI, FDI, Tunnel ping, and Tunnel traceroute. These functions comply with ITU-T
NOTE:
Y.1711.
PEG16 boards support only
distributed MPLS OAM. Number of MPLS tunnels that support OAM: 2K

MPLS PW OAM: not supported

MPLS-TP OAM MPLS-TP tunnel OAM: not supported
MPLS-TP PW OAM: not supported
Loopback capability PHY layer at Ethernet ports: supports inloops and outloops.
MAC layer at Ethernet ports: supports inloops.
RMON Supported
Port Mirroring Not supported
Inband DCN Supported
HQoS Supports service WRED policies, WFQ policies, PW polices, QinQ polices, V-UNI ingress policies, V-UNI egress policies, port
policies.
IGMP Snooping Protocol enabling Supported
Port aging time Supported
Fast leave Supported
Discarding of unknown Supported
broadcast packets
Static broadcast entry Supported
Query of electronic Supported
labels

NOTE:
For MPLS tunnel OAM and ETH OAM share OAM resources.

Parent topic: PEG16

7.3.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the PEG16 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PEG16.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 106/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the PEG16

icators

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Alarm Indicators on the Boards.

erfaces
The front panel of the PEG16 has sixteen GE optical interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the PEG16.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the PEG16

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN1–IN16 LC (pluggable) Receives GE signals.

OUT1–OUT16 LC (pluggable) Transmits GE signals.

Parent topic: PEG16

8 Packet Interface Boards

The packet interface boards include the PETF8, PEFF8, CQ1, MD12, and MD75. They provide packet switching boards with cable
input/output interfaces for myriad signals.

PETF8
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the PETF8 (8xFE
electrical interface board).

PEFF8
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the PEFF8 (8-
port fast Ethernet optical interface processing board).

CQ1
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the CQ1 (4-
channel channelized STM-1 CES optical interface board).

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 107/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
MD12
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the MD12
(multi-protocol 32-channels E1 interface processing board).

MD75
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the MD75
(multi-protocol 32-channels E1 interface processing board).

Parent topic: Description of Common Hardware

8.1 PETF8
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the PETF8 (8xFE
electrical interface board).

Application
The PETF8 is mainly used in the packet data transmission field to transmit/receive data packets, manage bandwidths, and realize
switching of data packets.

Functions and Features

PETF8 boards receive/transmit 8xFE electrical signals and work with PEG8/PEG16 boards to process services.

Front Panel
The front panel of the PETF8 has indicators, interfaces, and a bar code.

Parent topic: Packet Interface Boards

8.1.1 Application
The PETF8 is mainly used in the packet data transmission field to transmit/receive data packets, manage bandwidths, and realize
switching of data packets.
shows the typical networking and application of the PETF8. The PETF8 works with the cross-connect board that provides the packet
Figure 1
switching function to meet the requirement of packet features. With this board, the TDM domain can be overlapped with the packet
domain on the OptiX OSN equipment to transmit data in the two domains. In this way, the equipment realizes the smooth evolution from
the MSTP network to the packet switching network.

Figure 1 Networking and application of the PETF8

Parent topic: PETF8

8.1.2 Functions and Features

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 108/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
PETF8 boards receive/transmit 8xFE electrical signals and work with PEG8/PEG16 boards to process services.
lists the functions and features supported by PETF8 boards. Functions and Features lists the functions and features supported by PETF8
Table 1
boards that work with PEG8 boards. Functions and Features lists the functions and features supported by PETF8 boards that work with PEG16
boards.

Table 1 Functions and features supported by PETF8 boards

Function and Feature Description

Basic functions Receives/Transmits and processes 8xFE electrical signals.

Port types Uses the RJ45 connector and meets the specifications of the 100BASE-TX physical layer provided in IEEE 802.3.
Port characteristics Pluggable optical Not supported
module
Single-fiber Not supported
bidirectional
optical module
Working modes 100 Mbit/s full-duplex or auto-negotiation for FE electrical ports (In auto-negotiation mode, only the
100 Mbit/s full-duplex working mode is supported.)
Flow control at Auto-negotiation mode: not supported
ports
Non-autonegotiation mode: not supported
Query/Setting of Supported
port status
Query of port Not supported
types
Query/Setting of Not supported
optical power
thresholds
Query/Setting of Not supported
unidirectional-
mode
Service specifications Service bearing MPLS: supported
modes
QinQ: supported
Port: supported
MFL for ports When working with PEG16 boards, PETF8 boards do not support the setting of the packet length, which
takes the default value of 9600 bytes. When working with PEG8 boards, PETF8 boards support the
setting of the packet length, which ranges from 960 bytes to 4600 bytes. After the setting becomes
valid, the length of a packet that enters or exits a port is restricted by the MFL preset for the port.

MTU for services For packet services carried by PWs, PETF8 boards support the setting of the packet length, which ranges
from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes. For packet services carried in other modes, PETF8 boards do not support
the setting of the packet length.
Ethernet service E-Line service: supported
capability
E-LAN service: supported
E-AGGR service: When working with PEG16 boards, PETF8 boards support the E-AGGR service.
Formats of Supports the encapsulation in IEEE 802.3 format, Ethernet II format, or IEEE 802.1q/p format.
Ethernet data
frames
Jumbo frame When working with PEG8 boards, PETF8 boards support a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 4600
bytes.
When working with PEG16 boards, PETF8 boards support a jumbo frame with a maximum length of
9600 bytes.

MS-PW Supports static MS-PWs.

Protection schemes Tunnel APS Supports the 1+1 (single-ended/dual-ended) and 1:1 (dual-ended) tunnel APS in compliance with ITU-T
Y.1720 and ITU-T G.8131.
PW APS
Supports the PW FPS (single-ended), 1+1 (single-ended/dual-ended) and 1:1 (dual-ended) PW APS
when working with the PEG8 in compliance with ITU-T Y.1720 and ITU-T G.8131.
Does not support PW APS when working with the PEG16.
MRPS
Supports MRPS.
Protection group type: two-fiber bidirectional
Switching type: wrapping switching

LAG
Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation.
Supports the load sharing mode and load non-sharing mode.
Complies with IEEE 802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 109/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature Description

MC-LAG
Supports MC-LAG when working with the PEG8 in compliance with 802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX.
Does not support MC-LAG when working with the PEG16.
MSTP Supported, which complies with IEEE 802.1s.
LPT Point-to-point LPT: supported
Point-to-multipoint LPT: supported
Synchronization Synchronous Ethernet
Clock PETF8 boards support eight channels of synchronous Ethernet clocks.
1588v2 PETF8 boards support eight channels of IEEE 1588v2 time synchronization and clock synchronization.
Maintenance features ETH OAM Ethernet Service OAMa:
Supports CC, LB and LT. These functions comply with IEEE 802.1ag.
Supports LM and 2DM. These functions comply with ITU-T Y.1731.

Ethernet Port OAMa:

Supports OAM auto-discovery, fault detection, and link performance monitoring. These functions
comply with IEEE 802.3ah.
Distributed MPLS
OAM/Centralized MPLS MPLS tunnel OAMa:
OAM Supports CV, FFD, BDI, FDI, Tunnel ping, and Tunnel traceroute. These functions comply with ITU-T
Y.1711.

MPLS PW OAMa:
Supports CV, FFD, BDI, FDI, PW traceroute, and PW ping. These functions comply with ITU-T Y.1711.
MPLS-TP OAM
MPLS-TP tunnel OAMa:
NOTE: Supports CC, RDI, AIS, LB, LT, LM, 1DM, TST, LCK, and 2DM. These functions comply with ITU-T G.8113.1.
When working with
PEG8 boards, PETF8 MPLS-TP PW OAMa:
boards support MPLS-TP
OAM. Supports CC, RDI, AIS, LB, LT, LM, 1DM, TST, LCK, CSF, and 2DM. These functions comply with ITU-T
G.8113.1.

Loopback PHY layer at Ethernet ports: supports inloops.

capability
MAC layer at Ethernet ports: supports inloops and outloops.
RMON Supported
Port Mirroring Supported
Inband DCN Supported
HQoS Supports service WRED policies, WFQ policies, PW polices, QinQ polices, V-UNI ingress policies, V-UNI egress policies, port
policies, port shaping.
IGMP Snooping Protocol enabling Supported
Port aging time Supported
Fast leave Supported
Discarding of Supported
unknown
broadcast packets
Static broadcast Supported
entry
Query of electronic Supported
labels

NOTE:
a: MPLS tunnel OAM, MPLS PW OAM, MPLS-TP tunnel OAM, MPLS-TP PW OAM, and ETH OAM share OAM resources.

Parent topic: PETF8

8.1.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the PETF8 has indicators, interfaces, and a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PETF8.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 110/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the PETF8

icators

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – two colors (red and green)
Connection status indicator (LINK) – one color (green and located on the RJ45 connector)
Data receiving and transmission indicator (ACT) – one color (orange and located on the RJ45 connector)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Alarm Indicators on the Boards.

erfaces
The front panel of the PETF8 has eight FE electrical interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the electrical interfaces of the
PETF8.

Table 1 Electrical interfaces of the PETF8

Interface Type of Interface Usage

FE1–FE8 RJ-45 Transmits and receives FE signals.

Parent topic: PETF8

8.2 PEFF8
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the PEFF8 (8-port
fast Ethernet optical interface processing board).

Application
The PEFF8 is mainly used in the packet data transmission field to transmit/receive data packets, manage bandwidths, and implement
switching of data packets.

Functions and Features

PEFF8 boards receive/transmit 8xFE optical signals and work with the PEG8 to process services.

Front Panel
The front panel of the PEFF8 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: Packet Interface Boards

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 111/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

8.2.1 Application
The PEFF8 is mainly used in the packet data transmission field to transmit/receive data packets, manage bandwidths, and implement
switching of data packets.
shows the typical networking and application of the PEFF8. The PEFF8 works with the cross-connect board that provides the packet
Figure 1
switching function to meet the requirement of packet features. With this board, the TDM domain can be overlapped with the packet
domain on the OptiX OSN equipment so that the data can be transmitted in the two domains. In this manner, an MSTP network can
smoothly evolve to a packet switching network.
Figure 1 Networking and application of the PEFF8

Parent topic: PEFF8

8.2.2 Functions and Features

PEFF8 boards receive/transmit 8xFE optical signals and work with the PEG8 to process services.
lists the functions and features supported by PEFF8 boards. When working with PEG8 boards, PEFF8 boards support the functions
Table 1
and features as described in Functions and Features.

Table 1 Functions and features supported by PEFF8 boards

Function and Description
Feature

Basic functions Receives/Transmits and processes 8xFE optical signals.

Port types Supports 100Base-FX/LX/VX/ZX Ethernet optical ports. The optical ports use LC connectors and support the transmission
distances of 2 km, 15 km, 40 km, and 80 km.
Port characteristics Pluggable optical Supports SFP optical modules.
module
Single-fiber Supports SFP single-fiber bidirectional optical modules.
bidirectional optical
module
Working modes 100M full-duplex
Flow control at ports Auto-negotiation mode: not supported
Non-autonegotiation mode: not supported
Query/Setting of port Supported
status
Query of port types Supported
Query/Setting of Supported
optical power
thresholds

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 112/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Description

Feature

Query/Setting of Not supported

unidirectional-mode
Service Service bearing MPLS: supported
specifications modes
QinQ: supported
Port: supported
MFL for ports Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 960 bytes to 4600 bytes. After the setting
becomes valid, the length of the packets that enter or exit the ports is restricted by the preset MFL.
MTU for services For packet services carried by PWs, PEFF8 boards support the setting of the packet length, which ranges
from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes. For packet services carried in other modes, PEFF8 boards do not support
the setting of the packet length.
Ethernet service E-Line service: supported
capability
E-LAN service: supported
E-AGGR service: not supported
Formats of Ethernet Supports the encapsulation in IEEE 802.3 format, Ethernet II format, or IEEE 802.1q/p format.
data frames
Jumbo frame Supports a jumbo frame with a length not more than 4600 bytes.

MS-PW Supports static MS-PWs.

Protection Tunnel APS Supports the 1+1 (single-ended/dual-ended) and 1:1 (dual-ended) MPLS Tunnel APS in compliance with
schemes ITU-T Y.1720 and ITU-T G.8131.
PW APS Supports the PW FPS (single-ended), 1+1 (single-ended/dual-ended) and 1:1 (dual-ended) MPLS PW
APS in compliance with ITU-T Y.1720 and ITU-T G.8131.
MRPS
Supports MRPS.
Protection group type: two-fiber bidirectional
Switching type: wrapping switching

LAG
Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation.
Supports the load sharing mode and load non-sharing mode.
Complies with IEEE 802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX.

MC-LAG Supported when working with a PEG8 board in compliance with 802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX.
MSTP
Supported, which complies with IEEE 802.1s.
LPT Point-to-point LPT: supported
Point-to-multipoint LPT: supported
Synchronization Synchronous Ethernet Clock Supports eight channels of synchronous Ethernet clock signals.
1588v2 Supports eight channels of IEEE 1588v2 time synchronization and clock synchronization.
Maintenance ETH OAM a
Ethernet Service OAM :
features
Supports CC, LB and LT. These functions comply with IEEE 802.1ag.
Supports LM and 2DM. These functions comply with ITU-T Y.1731.

a
Ethernet Port OAM :
Supports OAM auto-discovery, fault detection, link performance monitoring, and selfloop test. These
functions comply with IEEE 802.3ah.
Distributed MPLS
OAM/Centralized MPLS MPLS tunnel OAMa:
OAM Supports CV, FFD, BDI, FDI, Tunnel ping, and Tunnel traceroute. These functions comply with ITU-T
Y.1711.

MPLS PW OAMa:
Supports CV, FFD, BDI, FDI, PW traceroute, and PW ping. These functions comply with ITU-T Y.1711.
MPLS-TP OAM
MPLS-TP tunnel OAMa:
Supports CC, RDI, AIS, LB, LT, LM, 1DM, TST, LCK, and 2DM. These functions comply with ITU-T G.8113.1.

MPLS-TP PW OAMa:
Supports CC, RDI, AIS, LB, LT, LM, 1DM, TST, LCK, CSF, and 2DM. These functions comply with ITU-T
G.8113.1.

Loopback capability PHY layer at Ethernet ports: supports inloops.

MAC layer at Ethernet ports: supports inloops and outloops.
RMON Supported
Port Mirroring Supported
Inband DCN Supported

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 113/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Description

Feature
HQoS Supports service WRED policies, WFQ policies, PW polices, QinQ polices, V-UNI ingress policies, V-UNI egress policies, port
policies, port shaping.
IGMP Snooping Protocol enabling Supported
Port aging time Supported
Fast leave Supported
Discarding of Supported
unknown broadcast
packets
Static broadcast entry Supported
Query of Supported
electronic labels

NOTE:
a: MPLS tunnel OAM, MPLS PW OAM, MPLS-TP tunnel OAM, MPLS-TP PW OAM, and ETH OAM share OAM resources.

Parent topic: PEFF8

8.2.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the PEFF8 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PEFF8.
Figure 1 Front panel of the PEFF8

icators

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – two colors (red and green)
Connection status indicator (L/A1-L/A8) – two colors (yellow and green)

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 114/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Alarm Indicators on the Boards.

erfaces
The front panel of the PEFF8 has eight FE optical interfaces. Table 1 describes the interfaces of the PEFF8.

Table 1 Interfaces of the PEFF8

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN1-IN8 LC (pluggable) Receives FE signals.

OUT1-OUT8 LC (pluggable) Transmits FE signals.

Parent topic: PEFF8

8.3 CQ1
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the CQ1 (4-channel
channelized STM-1 CES optical interface board).

Application
The CQ1 directly receives channelized STM-1 services from the TDM domain, transmits the channelized STM-1 services on the
packet ring, and directly separates the channelized STM-1 services from other services on the Base Station Controller (BSC) side. In
this manner, the smooth evolution from the TDM domain to the packet domain is implemented.

Functions and Features

The CQ1 receives four-port channelized STM-1 services, and works with the PEG8 to process CES service signals.

Front Panel
The front panel of the CQ1 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: Packet Interface Boards

8.3.1 Application
The CQ1 directly receives channelized STM-1 services from the TDM domain, transmits the channelized STM-1 services on the packet
ring, and directly separates the channelized STM-1 services from other services on the Base Station Controller (BSC) side. In this manner,
the smooth evolution from the TDM domain to the packet domain is implemented.
Figure 1 shows the application of the CQ1. The CQ1 works with the PEG8 to transmit channelized STM-1 services on the packet ring.
Figure 1 Networking and application of the CQ1

Parent topic: CQ1

8.3.2 Functions and Features

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 115/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
The CQ1 receives four-port channelized STM-1 services, and works with the PEG8 to process CES service signals.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the CQ1.

Table 1 Functions and features of the CQ1

Function and Feature CQ1

Basic functions Transmits and receives four-port channelized STM-1 optical signals, and works with the PEG8 to process four-port
channelized STM-1 CES services.
Interface types Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 to meet requirements for transmission
distances. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G.957.
Interface ALS Not supported
characteristics
Loopback types of the port Inloops and outloops at STM-1 ports
Inloops and outloops on VC-12 paths

Auto disabling of port Supported

loopback
Detection and query of optical Supported
module information
Hot insertion and removal of Supported
SFP optical modules
CES Supported CES services 252
Supported emulation mode CESoPSN
SAToP

NOTE:
For CES services in CESoPSN mode, CQ1 boards can compress idle timeslots to improve the bandwidth utilization on
the NNI side.

Jitter buffering time 0.375 ms to 16 ms; increment: 0.125 ms

Packet loading time 0.25 ms TO 5 ms; increment: 0.125 ms

NOTE:
The packet loading time needs to be set to the same value for the NEs at both ends.
The jitter buffering time needs to be more than at least two times of the packet loading time.

Protection scheme Supports the 1+1 and 1:1 Packet-based linear MSP.
SSM protocol Supported
PRBS Not supported
Query of laser Supported
transmission distance

Parent topic: CQ1

8.3.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the CQ1 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the CQ1.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 116/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the CQ1

icators

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Alarm Indicators on the Boards.

erfaces
The front panel of the CQ1 has four optical interfaces. Table 1 describes the type and usage of the optical interfaces of the CQ1.

Table 1 Interfaces of the CQ1

Optical Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN1-IN4 LC (pluggable) Channelized STM-1 signal input interface

OUT1-OUT4 LC (pluggable) Channelized STM-1 signal output interface

Parent topic: CQ1

8.4 MD12
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the MD12 (multi-
protocol 32-channels E1 interface processing board).

NOTE:
The interface on the MD12 is a 120-ohm E1 interface.

Application
The MD12 directly receives E1 services from the TDM domain, transmits the E1 services on the packet ring, and directly separates
the E1 services from other services on the BSC side. In this manner, the smooth evolution from the TDM domain to the packet
domain is implemented.

Functions and Features

The MD12 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals and works with the PEG8 to process E1 CES and ATM/IMA services.

Front Panel
The front panel of the MD12 has interfaces and a bar code.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 117/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Parent topic: Packet Interface Boards

8.4.1 Application
The MD12 directly receives E1 services from the TDM domain, transmits the E1 services on the packet ring, and directly separates the E1
services from other services on the BSC side. In this manner, the smooth evolution from the TDM domain to the packet domain is
implemented.
Figure 1 shows the application of the MD12. The MD12 works with the PEG8 to transmit E1 services on the packet ring.
Figure 1 Networking and application of the MD12

Parent topic: MD12

8.4.2 Functions and Features

The MD12 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals and works with the PEG8 to process E1 CES and ATM/IMA services.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the MD12.

Table 1 Functions and features of the MD12

Function and Feature MD12

Basic functions Transmits and receives 32xE1 signals, and works with the PEG8 to process E1 CES and ATM/IMA services.
Interface types Supports 120-ohm E1 electrical interface. The electrical interface uses the DB44 connector.
Interface Loopback types of Inloop
characteristics the port Outloop
Non-loopback

Auto disabling of Supported

port loopback
CES Number of CES 32
services
Emulation mode CESoPSN, SAToP

Jitter compensation The jitter compensation buffering time of CES services can be set to a value in the range of 0.375 ms to
buffering time 16 ms with a step of 0.125 ms.
Packet loading time The packet loading time of CES services can be set to a value in the range of 0.125 ms to 5 ms with a
step of 0.125 ms.

NOTE:
The packet loading time needs to be set to the same value for the NEs at both ends.
The jitter compensation buffering time needs to be more than at least two times of the packet loading time.

ATM/IMA Number of IMA 32

groups

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 118/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature MD12

Maximum number of 16
E1 links in each IMA
group
Number of V-UNI 512
ports
Number of V-NNI 128
ports
Cell concatenation Type:
Concatenation
Non-concatenation

Quantity: 31
ATM OAM Type:
CC
LB
RDI
AIS

Quantity: 512
Service categories CBR, UBR, UBR+, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR
ATM QoS Supported
Clock function Restores four CES adaptive clock recover (ACR) clocks.
Clocks that are recovered from services over ports 1 and 9 can be added to the clock priority list.

NOTE:
Clock recovery over ports 1 to 16 is independent of clock recovery over ports 17 to 32. That is, clocks that are recovered from services over ports 1 to 16 can be
transmitted out of ports 1 to 16 and clocks that are recovered from services over ports 17 to 32 can be transmitted out of ports 17 to 32.

Clock mode Line Clock Mode and Null.

Line code of E1 link HDB3 code
Frame format of E1 Unframed format, double-framed format, or E1 CRC-4 multiframe format (default value)
link
Maintenance Supports the query of the board manufacturer information.
features
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the PRBS function. For details, see Availability.

Parent topic: MD12

8.4.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the MD12 has interfaces and a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the MD12.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 119/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the MD12

erfaces
The front panel of the MD12 has four DB44 interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the MD12.

Table 1 Interfaces of the MD12

Interface Type of Interface Usage

1-8 DB44 Receives E1 signals from the 1st channel to the 8th channel.
9-16 DB44 Receives E1 signals from the 9th channel to the 16th channel.
17-24 DB44 Receives E1 signals from the 17th channel to the 24th channel.
25-32 DB44 Receives E1 signals from the 25th channel to the 32nd channel.

Table 2 lists the pins of the DB44 interface.

Table 2 Pin description of the DB44 interfaces on the MD12

Front View Pin Usage Pin Usage

38 R1 to receive the first channel 34 R5 to receive the fifth channel of

of signals signals
23 19
37 R2 to receive the second 33 R6 to receive the sixth channel
channel of signals of signals
22 18
36 R3 to receive the third 32 R7 to receive the seventh
channel of signals channel of signals
21 17
35 R4 to receive the fourth 31 R8 to receive the eighth channel
channel of signals of signals
20 16
15 T1 to transmit the first 11 T5 to transmit the fifth channel
channel of signals of signals
30 26
14 T2 to transmit the second 10 T6 to transmit the sixth channel
channel of signals of signals
29 25
13 T3 to transmit the third 9 T7 to transmit the seventh
channel of signals channel of signals
28 24
12 T4 to transmit the fourth 8 T8 to transmit the eighth
channel of signals channel of signals
27 7

Parent topic: MD12

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 120/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

8.5 MD75
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the MD75 (multi-
protocol 32-channels E1 interface processing board).

NOTE:
The interface on the MD75 is a 75-ohm E1 interface.

Application
The MD75 directly receives E1 services from the TDM domain, transmits the E1 services on the packet ring, and directly separates
the E1 services from other services on the BSC side. In this manner, the smooth evolution from the TDM domain to the packet
domain is implemented.

Functions and Features

The MD75 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals and works with the PEG8 to process E1 CES and ATM/IMA services.

Front Panel
The front panel of the MD75 has interfaces and a bar code.

Parent topic: Packet Interface Boards

8.5.1 Application
The MD75 directly receives E1 services from the TDM domain, transmits the E1 services on the packet ring, and directly separates the E1
services from other services on the BSC side. In this manner, the smooth evolution from the TDM domain to the packet domain is
implemented.
Figure 1 shows the application of the MD75. The MD75 works with the PEG8 to transmit E1 services on the packet ring.

Figure 1 Networking and application of the MD75

Parent topic: MD75

8.5.2 Functions and Features

The MD75 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals and works with the PEG8 to process E1 CES and ATM/IMA services.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the MD75.

Table 1 Functions and features of the MD75

Function and MD75
Feature

Basic functions Transmits and receives 32xE1 signals, and works with the PEG8 to process E1 CES and ATM/IMA services.
Interface types Supports 75-ohm E1 electrical interface. The electrical interface uses the DB44 connector.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 121/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and MD75

Feature

Interface Loopback types of Inloop

characteristics the port Outloop
Non-loopback

Auto disabling of Supported

port loopback
CES Number of CES 32
services
Emulation mode CESoPSN, SAToP

Jitter compensation The jitter compensation buffering time of CES services can be set to a value in the range of 0.375 ms to 16
buffering time of ms with a step of 0.125 ms.
CES services
Packet loading The packet loading time of CES services can be set to a value in the range of 0.125 ms to 5 ms with a step
time of CES packets of 0.125 ms.

NOTE:
The packet loading time needs to be set to the same value for the NEs at both ends.
The jitter compensation buffering time needs to be more than at least two times of the packet loading time.

ATM/IMA Number of IMA 32

groups
Maximum number 16
of E1 links in each
IMA group
Number of V-UNI 512
ports
Number of V-NNI 128
ports
Cell concatenation Type:
Concatenation
Non-concatenation

Quantity: 31
ATM OAM Type:
CC
LB
RDI
AIS

Quantity: 512
Service categories CBR, UBR, UBR+, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR
ATM QoS Supported
Clock function Recovers four CES ACR clocks.
Clocks that are recovered from services over ports 1 and 9 can be added to the clock priority list.

NOTE:
Clock recovery over ports 1 to 16 is independent of clock recovery over ports 17 to 32. That is, clocks that are recovered from services over ports 1 to 16 can be
transmitted out of ports 1 to 16 and clocks that are recovered from services over ports 17 to 32 can be transmitted out of ports 17 to 32.

Clock mode Line Clock Mode and Null.

Line code of E1 link HDB3 code
Frame format of E1 Unframed format, double-framed format, or E1 CRC-4 multiframe format (default value)
link
Loopback mode Inloop, outloop, or non-loopback (default value)
Maintenance Supports the query of the board manufacturer information.
features
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the PRBS function. For details, see Availability.

Parent topic: MD75

8.5.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the MD75 has interfaces and a bar code.
localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 122/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
gram of the Front Panel
Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the MD75.

Figure 1 Front panel of the MD75

erfaces
The front panel of the MD75 has four DB44 interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the MD75.

Table 1 Interfaces of the MD75

Interface Type of Interface Usage

1-8 DB44 Receives E1 signals from the 1st channel to the 8th channel.
9-16 DB44 Receives E1 signals from the 9th channel to the 16th channel.
17-24 DB44 Receives E1 signals from the 17th channel to the 24th channel.
25-32 DB44 Receives E1 signals from the 25th channel to the 32nd channel.

Table 2 lists the pins of the DB44 interface.

Table 2 Pin description of the DB44 interfaces on the MD75

Front View Pin Usage Pin Usage

38 R1 to receive the first channel 34 R5 to receive the fifth channel of

of signals signals
23 19
37 R2 to receive the second 33 R6 to receive the sixth channel
channel of signals of signals
22 18
36 R3 to receive the third 32 R7 to receive the seventh
channel of signals channel of signals
21 17
35 R4 to receive the fourth 31 R8 to receive the eighth channel
channel of signals of signals
20 16
15 T1 to transmit the first 11 T5 to transmit the fifth channel
channel of signals of signals
30 26
14 T2 to transmit the second 10 T6 to transmit the sixth channel
channel of signals of signals
29 25
13 T3 to transmit the third 9 T7 to transmit the seventh
channel of signals channel of signals
28 24
12 T4 to transmit the fourth 8 T8 to transmit the eighth

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 123/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Front View Pin channel

Usage of signals Pin channel
Usage of signals

27 7

Parent topic: MD75

9 EoD Boards
The OptiX OSN equipment supports the EoD (Ethernet over Dual Domains) board EDQ41, which bridges Ethernet services between the
TDM domain and packet domain.

EDQ41
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the
EDQ41 (4-port 622/155 Mbit/s SDH optical interface Ethernet double domain multiple function processing board).

Parent topic: Description of Common Hardware

9.1 EDQ41
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the
EDQ41 (4-port 622/155 Mbit/s SDH optical interface Ethernet double domain multiple function processing board).

Application
The EDQ41 is mainly used for interoperation between the SDH network and the packet network. The board converges the TDM
signals and Ethernet packets from the SDH access network and deconverges the TDM signals to the SDH ring and the Ethernet
packets to the packet ring. In this manner, the board achieves the interoperation between the TDM domain and the packet domain,
facilitating the smooth evolution of the network.

Functions and Features

EDQ41 boards process 4x155 Mbit/s or 4x622 Mbit/s SDH services and 2.5 Gbit/s EoS services at the same time.

Front Panel
The front panel of the EDQ41 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: EoD Boards

9.1.1 Application
The EDQ41 is mainly used for interoperation between the SDH network and the packet network. The board converges the TDM signals
and Ethernet packets from the SDH access network and deconverges the TDM signals to the SDH ring and the Ethernet packets to the
packet ring. In this manner, the board achieves the interoperation between the TDM domain and the packet domain, facilitating the
smooth evolution of the network.
Figure 1 shows the typical networking and application of the EDQ41.
Figure 1 Networking and application of the EDQ41

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 124/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
The EDQ41 is applicable in five typical networking scenarios. Figure 2 shows the service signal flow in each application scenario.

Application 1: The EDQ41 receives EoS services from other NEs and then converts the EoS services to packet services, therefore
implementing transition from the STM-1/STM-4 SDH network to the GE/10GE packet network.
Application 2: The EDQ41 receives EoS services from line boards on the same NE and then converts the EoS services to packet
services, therefore implementing transition from the SDH network to the GE/10GE packet network.
Application 3: The EDQ41 board receives SDH services (including SDH services and EoS services) from SDH line board, processes
and then distributes the services to GE/10GE packet networks and STM-1/STM-4 SDH networks.
Application 4: The EDQ41 board receives SDH services (including pure SDH services and EoS services) from SDH line boards,
processes and then sends the services directly to the SDH network. In this case, the EDQ41 board functions like an SDH line
board.

NOTE:
The EDQ41 supports the maximum processing capacity of 2.5 Gbit/s. Therefore, only 2.5 Gbit/s services of the services received from STM-N (1≤N≤64) line boards
can be processed and sent to the packet network.

Figure 2 Service signal flow on the EDQ41

Parent topic: EDQ41

9.1.2 Functions and Features

EDQ41 boards process 4x155 Mbit/s or 4x622 Mbit/s SDH services and 2.5 Gbit/s EoS services at the same time.
As a dual-domain board, EDQ41 boards are applicable in the case of SDH services, packet services, and EoS services. Table 1, Table 2, and Table
3 provide the functions and features supported by EDQ41 boards in each service application scenario.

Table 1 Functions and features supported by EDQ41 boards

Function and Feature Description

Basic functions Transmits and receives 4xSTM-1/STM-4 optical signals.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 125/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature Description

Port specifications The STM-1 or STM-4 optical module can be used.

When the STM-1 optical module is used, the standard S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 optical ports are
supported. The optical ports comply with ITU-T G.957.
When the STM-4 optical module is used, the standard S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, and Ve-4.2 optical ports are
supported. The optical ports of the S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2 types comply with ITU-T G.957. The optical
ports of the Ve-4.2 type comply with the standards defined by Huawei.

Optical module specifications Supports the detection and query of the information about optical modules.
Supports the usage and detection of SFP pluggable optical modules, facilitating the maintenance of
optical modules.
Provides the ALS function. The optical ports support the function of setting the on/off state of a laser.

Service processing Supports VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services when the STM-1 optical module is used.
Supports VC-12/VC-3/VC-4/VC-4-4c services when the STM-4 optical module is used.

Overhead processing Processes the section overheads of STM-4/STM-1 signals.

Processes path overheads.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Supports the ECC communication.

NOTE:
Ports 1 to 4 do not support the setting of lower order overhead bytes. That is, only port 5 supports the setting of lower order overhead bytes.

Loopback function Supports inloops and outloops at optical ports.

Supports inloops and outloops at the VC-4 level.

Alarms and performance events Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
equipment.
Protection scheme Supports Two-fiber ring MSP.
Supports Four-fiber ring MSP.
Supports Linear MSP.
Supports SNCP.
Supports SNCMP.
Supports SNCTP.
Supports fiber-shared virtual trail protection.

Maintenance features Supports warm resets and cold resets. Warm resets do not affect services.
Supports the PRBS function in the line direction.
Supports the alarm detection function and reports various alarms and performance events, which
facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.

Table 2 Packet features supported by EDQ41 boards

Function and Feature Description

Basic functions Bridges a maximum of 2.5 Gbit/s EoS services to the packet domain.
Format of service Supports the encapsulation in IEEE 802.3 format, Ethernet II format, or IEEE 802.1q/p format.
frames
Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes.

Maximum uplink 2.5 Gbit/s

bandwidth
MFL for ports Supports the query of the MFLs specified for ports but does not support MFL setting. The default MFL specified for ports is
9600 bytes.
MTU for services Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes.
Type of Ethernet Supports point-to-point E-Line services.
services
Supports multipoint-to-multipoint E-LAN services.

NOTE:
EDQ41 boards support only PW-carried E-Line and E-LAN services on the NNI side.

Number of When working with the N4GSCC: 4K

supported E-Line
When working with the N6GSCC: 8K
services
Number of 1K
supported E-LAN
services
HQoS
Supports service WRED policies, WFQ policies, V-UNI ingress policies, and V-UNI egress policies on the UNI side.
Supports service WRED policies, WFQ policies, and PW polices on the NNI side.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 126/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature Description

Protection scheme Tunnel APS

Supports 1+1 (single-ended/dual-ended) and 1:1 (dual-ended) tunnel APS in compliance with ITU-T
Y.1720 and ITU-T G.8131.
Number of supported tunnel APS protection groups: 1K
PW APS
Supports the 1+1 (single-ended/dual-ended), 1:1 (dual-ended), and PW FPS (single-ended) PW APS
in compliance with ITU-T Y.1720 and ITU-T G.8131.
Number of supported PW APS protection groups: 1K
LAG
Supports manual link aggregation.
Supports the load non-sharing mode.
Complies with IEEE 802.3ad.

MC-LAG Supported, which complies with IEEE 802.3ad.

Maintenance ETH OAM Not supported
features
NOTE:
EDQ41 boards do not support creation of maintenance points but support transparent transmission of ETH OAM packets.

Distributed MPLS MPLS tunnel Supports CV, FFD, BDI, FDI, Tunnel ping, and Tunnel traceroute. These functions
OAM/Centralized MPLS OAM
OAMa comply with ITU-T Y.1711.
Number of MPLS tunnels that support OAM: 2K

MPLS PW Supports CV, FFD, BDI, FDI, PW traceroute, and PW ping. These functions comply with
OAMa ITU-T Y.1711. The number of supported MPLS PW OAM is 2K.
MPLS-TP OAM MPLS-TP Supports CC, RDI, AIS, LB, LT, LM, 1DM, TST, LCK, and 2DM. These functions comply
tunnel with ITU-T G.8113.1.
OAMa Number of tunnels that support MPLS-TP OAM: 2K

MPLS-TP Supports CC, RDI, AIS, LB, LT, LM, 1DM, TST, LCK, CSF, and 2DM. These functions
PW OAMa comply with ITU-T G.8113.1.
Number of PWs that support MPLS-TP OAM: 2K
MSTP Not supported
IGMP Snooping Protocol enabling Supported
Port aging time Supported
Fast leave Supported
Discarding of unknown Supported
broadcast packets
Static broadcast entry Supported

NOTE:
a: MPLS tunnel OAM, MPLS PW OAM, MPLS-TP tunnel OAM, and MPLS-TP PW OAM share OAM resources.

Table 3 EoS data features supported by EDQ41 boards

Function and Feature EDQ41

Basic function Supports transparent transmission of Ethernet services.

Encapsulation format Supports the GFP-F protocol.
EPL Supports transparent transmission of PORT-based EPL services.
Number of VCTRUNKs Binds a maximum of 62 VCTRUNKs, equivalent to 504 VC-12s, 48 VC-3s, or 16 VC-4s.
Configuration features:
The first eight VC-4s (including VC-3s and VC-12s in the VC-4s) and the last eight VC-4s (including VC-
3s and VC-12s in the VC-4s) cannot be bound to the same VCTRUNK.
Only 5th to 8th and the 13th to 16th VC-4s can bind VC-12 paths. In addition, VC-12s in the 5th to 8th
VC-4s cannot be bound to the same VCTRUNK as the VC-12s in the 13th to 16th VC-4s.
VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK8 each can be bound to a maximum of eight VC-4s. VCTRUNK9 to VCTRUNK63
each can be bound to a maximum of one VC-4, three VC-3s, or 63 VC-12s.
A VC-4 cannot bind VC-3 and VC-12 paths at the same time.

NOTE:
VCTRUNK62 cannot be configured on the NMS.

LCAS Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T
G.7042.
Test frames Supports the transmitting and receiving of GFP test frames or Ethernet test frames.

Parent topic: EDQ41

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 127/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

9.1.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the EDQ41 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the front panel of the EDQ41.

Figure 1 Front panel of the EDQ41

icators

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the indicators, see Alarm Indicators on the Boards.

erfaces
The front panel of the EDQ41 has four optical interfaces. Table 1 lists the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the EDQ41.

Table 1 Interfaces of the EDQ41

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN1-IN4 LC (pluggable) Receives the STM-1/STM-4 optical signals.

OUT1-OUT4 LC (pluggable) Transmits the STM-1/STM-4 optical signals.

Parent topic: EDQ41

10 Smart Line Boards

The smart line board includes the HSNS3.

HSNS3
This section describes the version, functions, working principles, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of an HSNS3
board (Smart 40G Line Service Processing Board).

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 128/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Parent topic: Description of Common Hardware

10.1 HSNS3
This section describes the version, functions, working principles, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of an HSNS3 board
(Smart 40G Line Service Processing Board).

Application
An HSNS3 board can transmit and receive 4x10GE signals (supporting SDH service transmission, with the SDH services being
specified at STM-16/STM-64 granularities), boosting network bandwidths and achieving flexible, large-granularity traffic grooming.

Functions and Features

An HSNS3 board receives mixed signals of STM-16/STM-64 services with the total bandwidth not higher than 40 Gbit/s from the
backplane, encapsulates them into ODU1/ODU2/ODU3/OTU3 units, and transmits them out through an optical port.

Front Panel
An HSNS3 board has indicators, an optical port, a bar code, and a laser hazard level label on its front panel.

Parent topic: Smart Line Boards

10.1.1 Application
An HSNS3 board can transmit and receive 4x10GE signals (supporting SDH service transmission, with the SDH services being specified at
STM-16/STM-64 granularities), boosting network bandwidths and achieving flexible, large-granularity traffic grooming.

Figure 1 shows the typical networking and application of HSNS3 boards.

Figure 1 Typical networking and application of HSNS3 boards

Parent topic: HSNS3

10.1.2 Functions and Features

An HSNS3 board receives mixed signals of STM-16/STM-64 services with the total bandwidth not higher than 40 Gbit/s from the
backplane, encapsulates them into ODU1/ODU2/ODU3/OTU3 units, and transmits them out through an optical port.
Table 1 and Table 2 list the functions and features supported by an HSNS3 board.

Table 1 Functions and features supported by an HSNS3 board

Function and Description
Feature

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 129/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Description

Feature

Basic functions Provides one OTU3 optical port to transmit/receive and process 1xOTU3 services.
Supports four virtual ports to carry 4 x 10 Gbit/s SDH services.
Supports a maximum of four virtual ports when receiving/transmitting STM-16 services.
Supports a maximum of four virtual ports when receiving/transmitting STM-64 services.
NOTICE:
The board capacity is license-controlled. One license provides a 10 Gbit/s capacity and one board provides a maximum capacity of 40 Gbit/s.

The board license is granted on a per-board basis.

Optical module Supports CFP pluggable optical modules.

specifications
Supports the monitoring and querying of optical module information.
Switches lasers on or off and provides automatic laser shutdown (ALS).

Error correction Supports forward error correction (FEC) coding in compliance with ITU-T G.709.
coding
Supports EFEC coding in compliance with ITU-T G.975.1.

NOTE:
HSNS3 boards using different error correction coding schemes cannot interconnect with each other.

Synchronization Supports four channels of SDH clock signals or one channel of OTN clock signals.
Overhead Supports processing of D1-D12 bytes by virtual ports 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 59, and 63, and processing of D1-D3 bytes by the other
processing eight virtual ports.
Alarm Monitors the bias current and operating temperature of lasers, and the optical power.
monitoring and
performance
monitoring
Automatic fiber Supported
search
Maintenance Supports inloops and outloops at optical ports.
features
Supports ODU1/ODU2 loopbacks.
Supports warm and cold resets, with warm resets not affecting services.
Supports the querying of manufacturer information.
Supports in-service FPGA loading.
Supports smooth upgrades of board software.
Monitors and reports voltage performance.
Supports one-click data collection.
Supports pseudo random binary sequence (PRBS) tests.

Automatically Only virtual ports 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 59 and 63 support SDH ASON.
switched optical
network (ASON)

Table 2 SDH functions and features supported by HSNS3 boards

Function and Description
Feature

Basic functions Receives a maximum of 4xSTM-16 or 4xSTM-64 SDH service signals from the backplane, encapsulates the received signals into
ODU1/ODU2/ODU3/OTU3OTU3 units, and sends out the multiplexed signals from its optical port.
The service mapping paths are as follows:
STM-16 <-> ODU1 <-> ODU3 <-> OTU3
STM-64 <-> ODU2 <-> ODU3 <-> OTU3

Limitations on Four virtual port IDs 51, 55, 59 and 63 can be configured.
virtual ports
Service Supports VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-4-4c, VC-4-8c, VC-4-16c, and VC-4-64c services (VC-4-4c, VC-4-8c, VC-4-16c, and VC-4-64c
processing services are concatenated services).
Overhead Processes section overheads of STM-16 or STM-64 signals.
processing
Transparently transmits or terminates path overheads.
Supports the setting and querying of J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Supports one channel of GCC0 communication and ECC communication on four virtual ports.

Protection Supports two-fiber bidirectional ring multiplex section protection (MSP).

schemes
Supports Linear MSP.
Supports subnetwork connection protection (SNCP).
Supports subnetwork connection tunnel protection (SNCTP).

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 130/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Description

Feature

Maintenance Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths.

features

Parent topic: HSNS3

10.1.3 Front Panel

An HSNS3 board has indicators, an optical port, a bar code, and a laser hazard level label on its front panel.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the front panel of an HSNS3 board.
Figure 1 Front panel of an HSNS3 board

icators

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) - one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) - two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) - three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the indicators, see Alarm Indicators on the Boards.

rts
An HSNS3 board has an optical port on its front panel. Table 1 describes the type and usage of the optical port.

Table 1 Port on an HSNS3 board

Port Port Type Usage

IN LC Receives OTU3 optical signals.

OUT LC Transmits OTU3 optical signals.

Parent topic: HSNS3

11 SDH Boards
This topic describes the SDH boards that operate at the STM-64, STM-16, STM-4, and STM-1 rates.

SL1
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the SL1
(1xSTM-1 optical interface board).

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 131/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
SL1A
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the SL1A
(1xSTM-1 optical interface board).

SLQ1
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the SLQ1
(4xSTM-1 optical interface board).

SLQ1A
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the SLQ1A
(4xSTM-1 optical interface board).

SLO1
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the SLO1
(8xSTM-1 optical interface board).

SLT1
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the SLT1
(12xSTM-1 optical interface board).

SLH1
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the SLH1
(16xSTM-1 signal processing board).

SEP1
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the SEP1
(8xSTM-1 line processing board).

SL4
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the SL4 (1xSTM-
4 optical interface board).

SL4A
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the SL4A
(1xSTM-4 optical interface board).

SLD4
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the SLD4
(2xSTM-4 optical interface board).

SLD4A
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the SLD4A
(2xSTM-4 optical interface board).

SLQ4
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the SLQ4
(4xSTM-4 optical interface board).

SLQ4A
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the SLQ4A
(4xSTM-4 optical interface board).

SL16
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the SL16
(1xSTM-16 optical interface board).

SL16A
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the SL16A
(1xSTM-16 optical interface board).

SLD16
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the SLD16
(2xSTM-16 optical interface board).

SLQ16
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the SLQ16
(4xSTM-16 optical interface board).

SLO16
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the SLO16
(8xSTM-16 optical interface board).

SF16
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the SF16
(1xSTM-16 optical interface board with the out-band FEC function).

SF16E
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the SF16E
(1xSTM-16 optical interface board with the out-band EFEC function).
localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 132/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
SL64
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the SL64
(1xSTM-64 optical interface board).

SLD64
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the SLD64
(2xSTM-64 optical interface board).

SF64
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the SF64
(1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function).

SF64A
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the SF64A
(1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function).

SFD64
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the SFD64
(2xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function).

SLQ41
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the SLQ41
(4xSTM-4/STM-1 optical interface board).

SLH41
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the SLH41
(16xSTM-1/STM-4 optical interface board with the variable rate).

EU04
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the EU04
(4xSTM-1 electrical interface board).

EU08
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the EU08
(8xSTM-1 electrical interface board).

OU08
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the N1OU08
(8xSTM-1 optical/electrical interface board) and the N2OU08 (8xSTM-1 optical interface board).

Parent topic: Description of Common Hardware

11.1 SL1
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the SL1 (1xSTM-1
optical interface board).

Application
The SL1 is a line board. The SL1 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-1 optical signals. The
SL1 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition,
the SL1 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.

Functions and Features

The SL1 transmits and receives STM-1 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-1 optical signals, extracts and inserts
overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.

Front Panel
The front panel of the SL1 has indicators, interfaces, and a bar code.

Parent topic: SDH Boards

11.1.1 Application
The SL1 is a line board. The SL1 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-1 optical signals. The SL1
converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SL1
converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.

shows the application of the SDH processing boards. The SDH processing boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the
Figure 1
system.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 133/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Networking and application of the SDH processing boards

NOTE:
The SL1 does not support the two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP.

Parent topic: SL1

11.1.2 Functions and Features

The SL1 transmits and receives STM-1 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-1 optical signals, extracts and inserts
overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the SL1.

Table 1 Functions and features of the SL1

Function and SL1
Feature

Basic functions Transmits and receives 1xSTM-1 optical signals.

Specifications of Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, and Ve-1.2.
the optical
The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 types comply with ITU-T G.957.
interface
The characteristics of the optical interface of the Ve-1.2 type comply with the standards defined by Huawei.

Specifications of Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module.
the optical
Supports the usage and detection of the small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical module, which facilitates the
module
maintenance of the optical module.
Provides the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a
laser.

Service Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, and VC-4 services.
processing
The N2SL1 supports the AU-3 services.

Overhead Processes the section overheads of the STM-1 signals.

processing
Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Supports one channel of ECC communication.

Alarms and Provides various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.
performance
events
Protection Supports the Two-fiber ring MSP,only supports two-fiber unidirectional MSP ring.
schemes
Supports the Four-fiber ring MSP.
Supports the Linear MSP.
Supports the SNCP.
Supports the SNCMP.
Supports the SNCTP.

Maintenance Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.

features
The N1SL1 supports inloops on VC-4 paths.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
The N2SL1 supports the TCM function.
Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.

Parent topic: SL1

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 134/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

11.1.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the SL1 has indicators, interfaces, and a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SL1.
Figure 1 Front panel of the SL1

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the SL1 has one optical interface. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the SL1.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the SL1

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN LC Receives optical signals.

OUT LC Transmits optical signals.

Parent topic: SL1

11.2 SL1A
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the SL1A (1xSTM-1
optical interface board).

Application
The SL1A is a line board. The SL1A can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-1 optical signals.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 135/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
The SL1A converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In
addition, the SL1A converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical
signals.

Functions and Features

The SL1A transmits and receives STM-1 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-1 optical signals, extracts and inserts
overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.

Front Panel
The front panel of the SL1A has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: SDH Boards

11.2.1 Application
The SL1A is a line board. The SL1A can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-1 optical signals. The
SL1A converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the
SL1A converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.

shows the application of the SDH processing boards. The SDH processing boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the
Figure 1
system.
Figure 1 Networking and application of the SDH processing boards

Parent topic: SL1A

11.2.2 Functions and Features

The SL1A transmits and receives STM-1 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-1 optical signals, extracts and inserts
overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the SL1A.

Table 1 Functions and features of the SL1A

Function and Feature SL1A

Basic functions Transmits and receives 1xSTM-1 optical signals.

Specifications of the optical Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, and Ve-1.2.
interface
The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 types comply with ITU-T G.957.
The characteristics of the optical interface of the Ve-1.2 type comply with the standards defined by Huawei.

Specifications of the optical Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module.
module
Supports the usage and detection of the SFP optical module, which facilitates the maintenance and
upgrading of the optical module.
Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser.
Supports the single-fiber bidirectional optical module, and the single-fiber bidirectional optical module does
not support loopbacks as the optical interface by using fiber jumpers.

Service processing Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, and VC-4 services.
Overhead processing Processes the section overheads of the STM-1 signals.
Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Supports one channel of ECC communication.

Alarms and performance Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
events equipment.
Protection schemes Supports the Two-fiber ring MSP, Four-fiber ring MSP, Linear MSP, SNCP, SNCTP, and SNCMP.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 136/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature SL1A

Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.

Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.

Parent topic: SL1A

11.2.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the SL1A has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SL1A.

Figure 1 Front panel of the SL1A

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the SL1A has one optical interface. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the SL1A.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the SL1A

Interface Type of Interface Usage

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 137/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN LC Receives optical signals.

OUT LC Transmits optical signals.

Parent topic: SL1A

11.3 SLQ1
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the SLQ1 (4xSTM-1
optical interface board).

Application
The SLQ1 is a line board. The SLQ1 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-1 optical signals.
The SLQ1 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In
addition, the SLQ1 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical
signals.

Functions and Features

The SLQ1 transmits and receives 4xSTM-1 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-1 optical signals, extracts and
inserts overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.

Front Panel
The front panel of the SLQ1 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: SDH Boards

11.3.1 Application
The SLQ1 is a line board. The SLQ1 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-1 optical signals. The
SLQ1 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the
SLQ1 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.

shows the application of the SDH processing boards. The SDH processing boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the
Figure 1
system.

Figure 1 Networking and application of the SDH processing boards

Parent topic: SLQ1

11.3.2 Functions and Features

The SLQ1 transmits and receives 4xSTM-1 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-1 optical signals, extracts and inserts
overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the SLQ1.

Table 1 Functions and features of the SLQ1

Function and Feature SLQ1

Basic functions Transmits and receives 4xSTM-1 optical signals.

Specifications of the optical Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ie-1, and Ve-1.2.
interface
The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 types comply with ITU-T G.957.
The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the Ie-1 and Ve-1.2 types comply with the standards defined by
Huawei.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 138/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature SLQ1

Specifications of the optical Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module.
module
Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser.
Supports the usage and detection of the SFP optical module, which facilitates the maintenance of the optical
module.
The N1SLQ1 supports the single-fiber bidirectional optical module, and the single-fiber bidirectional optical
module does not support loopbacks at the optical interface by using fiber jumpers.

Service processing Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, and VC-4 services.
The N2SLQ1 supports the AU-3 services.

Overhead processing Processes the section overheads of the STM-1 signals.

Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Supports one to four channels of ECC communication.

Alarms and performance Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
events equipment.
Protection schemes Supports Two-fiber ring MSP, Four-fiber ring MSP, Linear MSP, SNCP, SNCTP, and SNCMP..
Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.
The N1SLQ1 supports inloops on VC-4 paths.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
The N2SLQ1 supports the TCM function.
Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.

Parent topic: SLQ1

11.3.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the SLQ1 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SLQ1.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 139/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the SLQ1

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the SLQ1 has four optical interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the SLQ1.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the SLQ1

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN1-IN4 LC Receives optical signals.

OUT1-OUT4 LC Transmits optical signals.

Parent topic: SLQ1

11.4 SLQ1A
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the SLQ1A (4xSTM-1
optical interface board).

Application
The SLQ1A is a line board. The SLQ1A can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-1 optical
signals. The SLQ1A converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect
side. In addition, the SLQ1A converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the
optical signals.

Functions and Features

The SLQ1A transmits and receives STM-1 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-1 optical signals, extracts and inserts
overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 140/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Front Panel
The front panel of the SLQ1A has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: SDH Boards

11.4.1 Application
The SLQ1A is a line board. The SLQ1A can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-1 optical signals. The
SLQ1A converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition,
the SLQ1A converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.

shows the application of the SDH processing boards. The SDH processing boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the
Figure 1
system.
Figure 1 Networking and application of the SDH processing boards

Parent topic: SLQ1A

11.4.2 Functions and Features

The SLQ1A transmits and receives STM-1 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-1 optical signals, extracts and inserts
overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the SLQ1A.

Table 1 Functions and features of the SLQ1A

Function and Feature SLQ1A

Basic functions Transmits and receives 4xSTM-1 optical signals.

Specifications of the optical Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ie-1, and Ve-1.2.
interface
The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 types comply with ITU-T G.957.
The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the Ie-1 and Ve-1.2 types comply with the standards defined by
Huawei.

Specifications of the optical Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module.
module
Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser.
Supports the usage and detection of the SFP optical module, which facilitates the maintenance and
upgrading of the optical module.

Service processing Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, and VC-4 services.
Overhead processing Processes the section overheads of the STM-1 signals.
Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Supports one to four channels of ECC communication.

Alarms and performance Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
events equipment.
Protection schemes Supports Two-fiber ring MSP, Four-fiber ring MSP, Linear MSP, SNCP, SNCTP, and SNCMP.
Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.
Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 141/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Parent topic: SLQ1A

11.4.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the SLQ1A has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SLQ1A.
Figure 1 Front panel of the SLQ1A

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the SLQ1A has four optical interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the SLQ1A.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the SLQ1A

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN1–IN4 LC Receives optical signals.

OUT1–OUT4 LC Transmits optical signals.

Parent topic: SLQ1A

11.5 SLO1

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 142/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the SLO1 (8xSTM-1
optical interface board).

Application
The SLO1 is a line board. The SLO1 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-1 optical signals.
The SLO1 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In
addition, the SLO1 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical
signals.

Functions and Features

The SLO1 transmits and receives 8xSTM-1 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-1 optical signals, extracts and
inserts overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.

Front Panel
The front panel of the SLO1 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: SDH Boards

11.5.1 Application
The SLO1 is a line board. The SLO1 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-1 optical signals. The
SLO1 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the
SLO1 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.

shows the application of the SDH processing boards. The SDH processing boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the
Figure 1
system.
Figure 1 Networking and application of the SDH processing boards

Parent topic: SLO1

11.5.2 Functions and Features

The SLO1 transmits and receives 8xSTM-1 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-1 optical signals, extracts and inserts
overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the SLO1.

Table 1 Functions and features of the SLO1 board

Function and Feature SLO1

Basic functions Receives and transmits 8xSTM-1 optical signals.

Specifications of the optical Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, and Ve-1.2.
interface
The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 types comply with ITU-T
G.957.
The characteristics of the optical interface of the Ve-1.2 type comply with the standards defined by
Huawei.

Specifications of the optical Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module.
module
Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser.
Supports the usage and detection of the SFP optical module, which facilitates the maintenance and
upgrading of the optical module.

Service processing Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, and VC-4 services.
The N2SLO1 supports the AU-3 services.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 143/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature SLO1

Overhead processing Processes the section overheads of the STM-1 signals.

Processes the path overheads.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Supports one to eight channels of ECC communication.

Alarms and performance events Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
equipment.
Protection schemes Supports the Two-fiber ring MSP, Four-fiber ring MSP, Linear MSP, SNCP, SNCTP, and SNCMP.
Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.
The N3SLO1 supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
The N2SLO1 supports the TCM function.
The N3SLO1 supports the PRBS function. For details, see Availability.
Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.

Parent topic: SLO1

11.5.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the SLO1 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 and Figure 2 show the appearance of the front panel of the SLO1.

Figure 1 Front panel of the SLO1 (with level optical interfaces)

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 144/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 2 Front panel of the SLO1 (with slanting optical interfaces)

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the SLO1 has eight optical interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the SLO1.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the SLO1

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN1-IN8/RX1-RX8 LC Receives optical signals.

OUT1-OUT8/TX1-TX8 LC Transmits optical signals.

NOTICE:
For SLO1 boards with level optical interfaces, use optical attenuators only on the ODF side.

Parent topic: SLO1

11.6 SLT1
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the SLT1 (12xSTM-1
optical interface board).

Application
The SLT1 is a line board. The SLT1 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-1 optical signals.
The SLT1 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In
addition, the SLT1 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical
signals.

Functions and Features

The SLT1 transmits and receives STM-1 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-1 optical signals, extracts and inserts
overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.

Front Panel
The front panel of the SLT1 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 145/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Parent topic: SDH Boards

11.6.1 Application
The SLT1 is a line board. The SLT1 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-1 optical signals. The
SLT1 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the
SLT1 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.

shows the application of the SDH processing boards. The SDH processing boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the
Figure 1
system.
Figure 1 Networking and application of the SDH processing boards

Parent topic: SLT1

11.6.2 Functions and Features

The SLT1 transmits and receives STM-1 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-1 optical signals, extracts and inserts
overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the SLT1.

Table 1 Functions and features of the SLT1

Function and Feature SLT1

Basic functions Transmits and receives 12xSTM-1 optical signals.

Specifications of the optical Supports S-1.1, L-1.1 and L-1.2 standard optical interfaces whose characteristics comply with ITU-T G.957.
interface
Specifications of the optical Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module.
module
Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser.
Supports the usage and detection of the SFP optical module, which facilitates the maintenance of the optical
module.
Supports the single-fiber bidirectional optical module, and the single-fiber bidirectional optical module does
not support loopbacks at the optical interface by using fiber jumpers.

Service processing Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, and VC-4 services.
Overhead processing Processes the section overheads of the STM-1 signals.
Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Supports one to twelve channels of ECC communication. Port 1 to port 8 support the ECC communication by
using bytes D1–D12. Port 9 to port 12 support the ECC communication by using bytes D1–D3.
Supports the time synchronization feature and transmission of the time information by using the section
overhead bytes.

Alarms and performance Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
events equipment.
Protection schemes Supports the Two-fiber ring MSP, Four-fiber ring MSP, Linear MSP, SNCP, SNCTP, and SNCMP.
Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.
Supports inloops on VC-4 paths.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the PRBS function. For details, see Availability.
Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 146/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Parent topic: SLT1

11.6.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the SLT1 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SLT1.
Figure 1 Front panel of the SLT1

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the SLT1 has 12 optical interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the SLT1.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the SLT1

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN1–IN12 LC Receives optical signals.

OUT1–OUT12 LC Transmits optical signals.

NOTICE:
The optical interfaces of the SLT1 are level optical interfaces. Hence, use an optical attenuator only on the ODF side.

Parent topic: SLT1

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 147/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

11.7 SLH1
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the SLH1 (16xSTM-1
signal processing board).

Application
The SLH1 is a line board. The SLH1 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-1 optical/electrical
signals. The SLH1 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect
side, or directly sends the received electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SLH1 converts the electrical signals
sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.

Functions and Features

The SLH1 processes STM-1 optical and electrical signals.

Front Panel
The front panel of the SLH1 has indicators and a bar code.

Board Protection
The SLH1 supports the 1:N (N≤3) tributary protection switching (TPS) protection.

Parent topic: SDH Boards

11.7.1 Application
The SLH1 is a line board. The SLH1 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-1 optical/electrical
signals. The SLH1 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side, or
directly sends the received electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SLH1 converts the electrical signals sent from the
cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.

shows the application of the SDH processing boards. The SDH processing boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the
Figure 1
system.

Figure 1 Networking and application of the SDH processing boards

Parent topic: SLH1

11.7.2 Functions and Features

The SLH1 processes STM-1 optical and electrical signals.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the SLH1.

Table 1 Functions and features of the SLH1

Function and Feature SLH1

Basic functions Processes 16xSTM-1 signals.

Specifications of the optical Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module.
module
Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser.
Supports the usage and detection of the SFP optical module, which facilitates the maintenance and
upgrading of the optical module.
Supports the single-fiber bidirectional optical module, and the single-fiber bidirectional optical module
does not support loopbacks at the optical interface by using fiber jumpers.

Service processing Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, and VC-4 services.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 148/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature SLH1

Overhead processing Processes the section overheads of the STM-1 signals.

Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Supports one to sixteen channels of ECC communication. Port 1 to port 8 support the ECC communication
by using bytes D1-D12. Port 9 to port 16 support the ECC communication by using bytes D1-D3.

Alarms and performance Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
events equipment.
Protection schemes Supports the Two-fiber ring MSP.
Supports the Four-fiber ring MSP.
Supports the Linear MSP.
Supports the SNCP.
Supports the SNCMP.
Supports the SNCTP.
Supports the TPS protection when used with the interface board and the switching and bridging board.

Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.

Supports inloops on VC-4 paths.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.

When the SLH1 works with different interface boards and electrical interface switching boards, the access capabilities for the STM-1
signals are different. For details, refer to Table 2.

Table 2 Access capabilities of the SLH1 when the SLH1 works with different interface boards and electrical interface switching
boards
Interface Board SLH1

None The SLH1 cannot transmit/receive signals.

EU08 Transmits/Receives and processes 8-channel or 16-channel electrical signals.
OU08 Transmits/Receives and processes 8-channel or 16-channel optical signals.
EU08 + OU08 Transmits/Receives and processes 8-channel electrical signals and 8-channel optical signals.
EU08 + TSB8 Transmits/Receives and processes 8-channel or 16-channel STM-1 electrical signals, and realizes the 1:N (N≤3) TPS
protection.

Parent topic: SLH1

11.7.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the SLH1 has indicators and a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

The front panel of the SLH1 does not have an interface. Hence, the SLH1 must be used with the EU08 or OU08. Figure 1 shows the
appearance of the front panel of the SLH1.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 149/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the SLH1

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

Parent topic: SLH1

11.7.4 Board Protection

The SLH1 supports the 1:N (N≤3) tributary protection switching (TPS) protection.

otection Principle
The TPS protection is equipment-level protection. When the working board fails, the accessed signals are switched to the protection
board. Hence, complex network-level protection operations such as the MSP and SNCP are not triggered. In addition, the reliability of the
equipment is enhanced.
The SLH1 can work with the EU08 and TSB8 to realize one 1:N (N≤3) TPS protection group for 8xSTM-1 or 16xSTM-1 electrical signals.
Figure 1 shows the TPS protection provided by the SLH1.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 150/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 TPS protection provided by the SLH1

Normal state
When each working board functions normally, the traffic signal is directly transmitted to the corresponding working board
through position 1 of the control switch on the interface board.

Switching state
When a working board detects a failure and requires the switching operation, the control switch of the corresponding interface
board switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the protection switching board switches to
the corresponding position so that the protection board can protect the failed working board.

NOTE:
TPS trigger conditions on the OptiX OSN equipment are detected by the cross-connect and timing board. Therefore, TPS is successful even though the system
control board cannot be detected or is faulty.

rdware Configuration
Figure 2 shows the slot configuration for two 1:3 TPS protection groups for 16xSTM-1 signals of the SLH1.
Figure 2 Slot configuration for two 1:3 TPS protection groups of the SLH1

In Figure 2, the board in slot 2 protects the boards in slots 3-5. The board in slot 16 protects the boards in slots 13-15.
Table 1 lists the slots for the SLH1, EU08, and TSB8.

Table 1 Slots for the SLH1, EU08, and TSB8

Board Protection Group 1 Protection Group 2

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 151/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Board Protection Group 1 Protection Group 2

SLH1 (protection board) Slot 2 Slot 16

TSB8 Slots 19-20 Slots 35-36
SLH1 (working board) Slots 3-5 Slots 13-15
EU08 Slots 21-26 Slots 29-34

NOTE:
When the equipment is configured for two 1:3 TPS protection groups for 8xSTM-1 signals of the SLH1, the TSB8 and EU08 can be inserted only in the odd slots.

Parent topic: SLH1

11.8 SEP1
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the SEP1 (8xSTM-1
line processing board).

Application
The SEP1 is a line board. The SEP1 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-1 optical/electrical
signals. The SEP1 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect
side, or directly sends the received electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SEP1 converts the electrical signals
sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.

Functions and Features

The SEP1 processes STM-1 signals. When the interfaces are available on the front panel of the SEP1 (the logical board of the SEP1 is
displayed as SEP1 on the U2000), the SEP1 processes 2xSTM-1 electrical signals. When the SEP1 is used with the interface board (the
logical board of the SEP1 is displayed as SEP on the U2000), the SEP1 processes 8xSTM-1 optical/electrical signals or 4xSTM-1
electrical signals. The physical boards of the two types of logical boards (SEP1 and SEP) are the SEP1. When the logical boards do
not need to be differentiated, both the SEP1 and SEP are defined as SEP1.

Front Panel
The front panel of the SEP1 has indicators, interfaces, and a bar code.

Board Protection
The TPS protection is equipment-level protection. When the working board fails, the accessed services are switched to the
protection board. Hence, complex network-level protection operations such as the MSP and SNCP are not triggered. In addition, the
reliability of the equipment is enhanced.

Parent topic: SDH Boards

11.8.1 Application
The SEP1 is a line board. The SEP1 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-1 optical/electrical
signals. The SEP1 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side, or
directly sends the received electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SEP1 converts the electrical signals sent from the
cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.

shows the application of the SDH processing boards. The SDH processing boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the
Figure 1
system.
Figure 1 Networking and application of the SDH processing boards

Parent topic: SEP1

11.8.2 Functions and Features

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 152/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
The SEP1 processes STM-1 signals. When the interfaces are available on the front panel of the SEP1 (the logical board of the SEP1 is
displayed as SEP1 on the U2000), the SEP1 processes 2xSTM-1 electrical signals. When the SEP1 is used with the interface board (the
logical board of the SEP1 is displayed as SEP on the U2000), the SEP1 processes 8xSTM-1 optical/electrical signals or 4xSTM-1 electrical
signals. The physical boards of the two types of logical boards (SEP1 and SEP) are the SEP1. When the logical boards do not need to be
differentiated, both the SEP1 and SEP are defined as SEP1.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the SEP1.

Table 1 Functions and features of the SEP1

Function and Feature SEP1

Basic functions Processes 2xSTM-1 signals when the interfaces are available on the front panel.
Processes 8xSTM-1 or 4xSTM-1 signals when the SEP1 works with an interface board.

Service processing Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, and VC-4 services.
Overhead processing Processes the section overheads of the STM-1 signals.
Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Supports one or two channels of ECC communication.

Alarms and performance Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
events equipment.
Protection schemes Supports the Two-fiber ring MSP.
Supports the Four-fiber ring MSP.
Supports the Linear MSP.
Supports the SNCP.
Supports the SNCMP.
Supports the SNCTP.
Supports the TPS protection when used with the interface board and the switching and bridging board.

Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.

Supports inloops on VC-4 paths.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.

When the SEP1 works with different interface boards and electrical interface switching boards, the access capabilities for the STM-1
signals are different. For details, refer to Table 2.

Table 2 Access capabilities of the SEP1 when the SEP1 works with different interface boards and electrical interface switching
boards
Interface Board SEP1

None Transmits/Receives and processes 2xSTM-1 electrical signals, but does not support the TPS protection.
EU04 Transmits/Receives and processes 4xSTM-1 electrical signals.
EU08 Transmits/Receives and processes 8xSTM-1 electrical signals.
OU08 Transmits/Receives and processes 8xSTM-1 optical signals.
EU04 + TSB4 Transmits/Receives and processes 4xSTM-1 electrical signals, and supports the TPS protection.
EU08 + TSB8 Transmits/Receives and processes 8xSTM-1 electrical signals, and supports the TPS protection.
EU04 + TSB8 Transmits/Receives and processes 4xSTM-1 electrical signals, and supports the TPS protection.

NOTE:
One SEP1 can transmit/receive services from only one interface board. When the SEP1 works with an interface board, the two interfaces on the front panel of the
SEP1 are invalid.

Parent topic: SEP1

11.8.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the SEP1 has indicators, interfaces, and a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SEP1.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 153/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the SEP1

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the SEP1 has two pairs of electrical interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the electrical interfaces of the
SEP1.

Table 1 Electrical interfaces of the SEP1

Interface Type of Interface Usage

AIN–BIN 75-ohm SMB Receives the STM-1 signals.

AOUT–BOUT 75-ohm SMB Transmits the STM-1 signals.

Note: The SEP1 can be used with the interface board EU04, EU08, or OU08. In this case, the SEP1 is defined as SEP. When the SEP1 is used with the
interface board, the two interfaces on the front panel are invalid.

Parent topic: SEP1

11.8.4 Board Protection

The TPS protection is equipment-level protection. When the working board fails, the accessed services are switched to the protection
board. Hence, complex network-level protection operations such as the MSP and SNCP are not triggered. In addition, the reliability of the
equipment is enhanced.

NOTE:
When the SEP1 is used with the interface board, the logical board of the SEP1 is displayed as SEP on the .

otection Principle
The SEP can work with the EU08 and TSB8 to provide two 1:N (N≤3) TPS protection groups for 8xSTM-1 electrical signals.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 154/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
The SEP can also work with the EU04 and TSB4 to provide two 1:N (N≤3) TPS protection groups for 4xSTM-1 electrical signals.
When the SEP works with the EU08 and TSB8 to realize the TPS protection, the protection principle and valid slots of the involved boards
are the same as the protection principle and valid slots of the involved boards when the SEP works with the EU04 and TSB4 to realize the
TPS protection. Figure 1 shows the TPS protection provided by the SEP.
Figure 1 TPS protection provided by the SEP

Normal state
When each working board functions normally, the traffic signal is directly transmitted to the corresponding working board
through position 1 of the control switch on the interface board.
Switching state
When a working board detects a failure and requires the switching operation, the control switch of the corresponding interface
board switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the protection switching board switches to
the corresponding position so that the protection board can protect the failed working board.

NOTE:
TPS trigger conditions on the OptiX OSN equipment are detected by the cross-connect and timing board. Therefore, TPS is successful even though the system
control board cannot be detected or is faulty.

rdware Configuration
Figure 2 shows the slot configuration for the two 1:3 TPS protection groups of the SEP.

Figure 2 Slot configuration for the two 1:3 TPS protection groups of the SEP

In Figure 2, the board in slot 2 protects the boards in slots 3-5. The board in slot 16 protects the boards in slots 13-15.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 155/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Table 1 lists the slots for the SEP, EU08, and TSB8.

Table 1 Slots for the SEP, EU08, and TSB8

Board Protection Group 1 Protection Group 2

SEP (protection board) Slot 2 Slot 16

TSB8 Slot 19 Slot 35
SEP (working board) Slots 3-5 Slots 13-15
EU08 Slots 21, 23, and 25 Slots 29, 31, and 33

Parent topic: SEP1

11.9 SL4
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the SL4 (1xSTM-4
optical interface board).

Application
The SL4 is a line board. The SL4 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-4 optical signals. The
SL4 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition,
the SL4 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.

Functions and Features

The SL4 transmits and receives 1xSTM-4 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-4 optical signals, extracts and inserts
overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.

Front Panel
The front panel of the SL4 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: SDH Boards

11.9.1 Application
The SL4 is a line board. The SL4 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-4 optical signals. The SL4
converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SL4
converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.

shows the application of the SDH processing boards. The SDH processing boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the
Figure 1
system.
Figure 1 Networking and application of the SDH processing boards

Parent topic: SL4

11.9.2 Functions and Features

The SL4 transmits and receives 1xSTM-4 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-4 optical signals, extracts and inserts
overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the SL4.

Table 1 Functions and features of the SL4

Function and Feature SL4

Basic functions Receives and transmits 1xSTM-4 optical signals, and processes 1xSTM-4 standard or concatenation services.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 156/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature SL4

Specifications of the optical Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, and Ve-4.2.
interface
The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2 types comply with ITU-T G.957.
The characteristics of the optical interface of the Ve-4.2 type comply with the standards defined by Huawei.

Specifications of the optical Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module.
module
Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser.
Supports the usage and monitoring of the SFP optical module, which facilitates the maintenance and
upgrading of the optical module.

Service processing Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, and VC-4-4c concatenation services.
The N2SL4 supports the AU-3 services.

Overhead processing Processes the section overheads of the STM-4 signals.

Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Supports one channel of ECC communication.

Alarms and performance Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
events equipment.
Protection schemes Supports the Two-fiber ring MSP, Four-fiber ring MSP, Linear MSP, SNCP, SNCTP, and SNCMP.
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and SNCP. One SL4 supports a maximum of two MSP protection rings.

Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.

The N1SL4 supports inloops on VC-4 paths.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
The N2SL4 supports the TCM function.
Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.

Parent topic: SL4

11.9.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the SL4 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SL4.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 157/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the SL4

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the SL4 has one optical interface. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the SL4.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the SL4

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN LC Receives optical signals.

OUT LC Transmits optical signals.

The SL4 can use the swappable optical modules to facilitate maintenance.

Parent topic: SL4

11.10 SL4A
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the SL4A (1xSTM-4
optical interface board).

Application
The SL4A is a line board. The SL4A can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-4 optical signals.
The SL4A converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In
addition, the SL4A converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical
signals.

Functions and Features

The SL4A transmits and receives 1xSTM-4 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-4 optical signals, extracts and inserts

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 158/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.

Front Panel
The front panel of the SL4A has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: SDH Boards

11.10.1 Application
The SL4A is a line board. The SL4A can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-4 optical signals. The
SL4A converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the
SL4A converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.

shows the application of the SDH processing boards. The SDH processing boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the
Figure 1
system.
Figure 1 Networking and application of the SDH processing boards

Parent topic: SL4A

11.10.2 Functions and Features

The SL4A transmits and receives 1xSTM-4 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-4 optical signals, extracts and inserts
overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the SL4A.

Table 1 Functions and features of the SL4A

Function and Feature SL4A

Basic functions Receives and transmits 1xSTM-4 optical signals, and processes 1xSTM-4 standard or concatenation services.
Specifications of the optical Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, and Ve-4.2. The
interface characteristics of the optical interfaces of the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2 types comply with ITU-T G.957. The
characteristics of the optical interface of the Ve-4.2 type comply with the standards defined by Huawei.
Supports the CWDM and DWDM colored optical interfaces. The optical interface uses the LC connector. The CWDM
optical interface supports the transmission distance of 80 km, and the DWDM optical interface supports the
transmission distance of 120 km.

Specifications of the optical Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module.
module
Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser.
Supports the usage and monitoring of the SFP optical module, which facilitates the maintenance and
upgrading of the optical module.
Supports the single-fiber bidirectional optical module, and the single-fiber bidirectional optical module
does not support loopbacks at the optical interface by using fiber jumpers.

Service processing Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, and VC-4-4c concatenation services.
Overhead processing Processes the section overheads of the STM-4 signals.
Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Supports one channel of ECC communication.

Alarms and performance Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
events equipment.
Protection schemes Supports the Two-fiber ring MSP, Four-fiber ring MSP, Linear MSP, SNCP, SNCTP, and SNCMP.
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and SNCP and processes two sets of K bytes. One SL4A supports a
maximum of two MSP protection rings.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 159/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature SL4A

Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.

Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.

Parent topic: SL4A

11.10.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the SL4A has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SL4A.

Figure 1 Front panel of the SL4A

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the SL4A has one optical interface. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the SL4A.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the SL4A

Interface Type of Interface Usage

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 160/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN LC Receives optical signals.

OUT LC Transmits optical signals.

The SL4A can use the swappable optical modules to facilitate maintenance.

Parent topic: SL4A

11.11 SLD4
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the SLD4 (2xSTM-4
optical interface board).

Application
The SLD4 is a line board. The SLD4 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-4 optical signals.
The SLD4 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In
addition, the SLD4 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical
signals.

Functions and Features

The SLD4 transmits and receives 2xSTM-4 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-4 optical signals, extracts and inserts
overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.

Front Panel
The front panel of the SLD4 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: SDH Boards

11.11.1 Application
The SLD4 is a line board. The SLD4 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-4 optical signals. The
SLD4 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the
SLD4 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.

shows the application of the SDH processing boards. The SDH processing boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the
Figure 1
system.

Figure 1 Networking and application of the SDH processing boards

Parent topic: SLD4

11.11.2 Functions and Features

The SLD4 transmits and receives 2xSTM-4 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-4 optical signals, extracts and inserts
overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the SLD4.

Table 1 Functions and features of the SLD4

Function and Feature SLD4

Basic functions Receives and transmits 2xSTM-4 optical signals, and processes 2xSTM-4 standard or concatenation services.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 161/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature SLD4

Specifications of the optical Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, and Ve-4.2.
interface
The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2 types comply with ITU-T G.957.
The characteristics of the optical interface of the Ve-4.2 type comply with the standards defined by
Huawei.

Specifications of the optical Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module.
module
Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser.
Supports the usage and monitoring of the SFP optical module, which facilitates the maintenance and
upgrading of the optical module.
The N1SLD4 supports the single-fiber bidirectional optical module, and the single-fiber bidirectional
optical module does not support loopbacks at the optical interface by using fiber jumpers.

Service processing Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, and VC-4-4c concatenation services.
The N2SLD4 supports the AU-3 services.

Overhead processing Processes the section overheads of the STM-4 signals.

Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Supports one or two channels of ECC communication.

Alarms and performance events Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
equipment.
Protection schemes Supports the Two-fiber ring MSP, Four-fiber ring MSP, Linear MSP, SNCP, SNCTP, and SNCMP.
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and SNCP and processes four sets of K bytes. A single optical interface
supports two MSP protection rings, and one SLD4 supports a maximum of four MSP protection rings.

Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.

The N1SLD4 supports inloops on VC-4 paths.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
The N2SLD4 supports the TCM function.
Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.

Parent topic: SLD4

11.11.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the SLD4 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SLD4.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 162/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the SLD4

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the SLD4 has two optical interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the SLD4.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the SLD4

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN1-IN2 LC Receives optical signals.

OUT1-OUT2 LC Transmits optical signals.

The SLD4 can use the swappable optical modules to facilitate maintenance.

Parent topic: SLD4

11.12 SLD4A
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the SLD4A (2xSTM-4
optical interface board).

Application
The SLD4A is a line board. The SLD4A can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-4 optical
signals. The SLD4A converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect
side. In addition, the SLD4A converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the
optical signals.

Functions and Features

The SLD4A transmits and receives STM-4 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-4 optical signals, extracts and inserts

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 163/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.

Front Panel
The front panel of the SLD4A has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: SDH Boards

11.12.1 Application
The SLD4A is a line board. The SLD4A can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-4 optical signals. The
SLD4A converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition,
the SLD4A converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.

shows the application of the SDH processing boards. The SDH processing boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the
Figure 1
system.
Figure 1 Networking and application of the SDH processing boards

Parent topic: SLD4A

11.12.2 Functions and Features

The SLD4A transmits and receives STM-4 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-4 optical signals, extracts and inserts
overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the SLD4A.

Table 1 Functions and features of the SLD4A

Function and Feature SLD4A

Basic functions Receives and transmits 2xSTM-4 optical signals, and processes 2xSTM-4 standard or concatenation services.
Specifications of the optical Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, and Ve-4.2.
interface
The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2 types comply with ITU-T G.957.
The characteristics of the optical interface of the Ve-4.2 type comply with the standards defined by
Huawei.

Specifications of the optical Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module.
module
Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser.
Supports the usage and monitoring of the SFP optical module, which facilitates the maintenance and
upgrading of the optical module.

Service processing Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, and VC-4-4c concatenation services.
Overhead processing Processes the section overheads of the STM-4 signals.
Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Supports one or two channels of ECC communication.

Alarms and performance events Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
equipment.
Protection schemes Supports the Two-fiber ring MSP, Four-fiber ring MSP, Linear MSP, SNCP, SNCTP, and SNCMP.
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and SNCP and processes four sets of K bytes. A single optical interface
supports two MSP protection rings, and one SLD4A supports a maximum of four MSP protection rings.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 164/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature SLD4A

Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.

Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.

Parent topic: SLD4A

11.12.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the SLD4A has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SLD4A.

Figure 1 Front panel of the SLD4A

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the SLD4A has two optical interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the SLD4A.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the SLD4A

Interface Type of Interface Usage

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 165/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN1–IN2 LC Receives optical signals.

OUT1–OUT2 LC Transmits optical signals.

The SLD4A can use the swappable optical modules to facilitate maintenance.

Parent topic: SLD4A

11.13 SLQ4
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the SLQ4 (4xSTM-4
optical interface board).

Application
The SLQ4 is a line board. The SLQ4 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-4 optical signals.
The SLQ4 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In
addition, the SLQ4 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical
signals.

Functions and Features

The SLQ4 transmits and receives STM-4 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-4 optical signals, extracts and inserts
overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.

Front Panel
The front panel of the SLQ4 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: SDH Boards

11.13.1 Application
The SLQ4 is a line board. The SLQ4 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-4 optical signals. The
SLQ4 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the
SLQ4 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.

shows the application of the SDH processing boards. The SDH processing boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the
Figure 1
system.

Figure 1 Networking and application of the SDH processing boards

Parent topic: SLQ4

11.13.2 Functions and Features

The SLQ4 transmits and receives STM-4 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-4 optical signals, extracts and inserts
overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the SLQ4.

Table 1 Functions and features of the SLQ4

Function and Feature SLQ4

Basic functions Transmits and receives 4xSTM-4 optical signals.

Specifications of the optical Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, and Ve-4.2.
interface
The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2 types comply with ITU-T G.957.
The characteristics of the optical interface of the Ve-4.2 type comply with the standards defined by Huawei.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 166/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature SLQ4

Specifications of the optical

module
Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module.
Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser.
Supports the usage and monitoring of the SFP optical module, which facilitates the maintenance and
upgrading of the optical module.
The N1SLQ4 supports the single-fiber bidirectional optical module, and the single-fiber bidirectional optical
module does not support loopbacks at the optical interface by using fiber jumpers.

Service processing Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, and VC-4-4c concatenation services.
The N2SLQ4 supports the AU-3 services.

Overhead processing Processes the section overheads of the STM-4 signals.

Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Supports one to four channels of ECC communication.

Alarms and performance Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
events equipment.
Protection schemes Supports the Two-fiber ring MSP, Four-fiber ring MSP, Linear MSP, SNCP, SNCTP, and SNCMP.
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and SNCP and processes eight sets of K bytes. A single optical interface
supports two MSP protection rings, and one SLQ4 supports a maximum of eight MSP protection rings.

Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.

The N1SLQ4 supports inloops on VC-4 paths.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
The N2SLQ4 supports the TCM function.
Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.

Parent topic: SLQ4

11.13.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the SLQ4 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SLQ4.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 167/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the SLQ4

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the SLQ4 has four optical interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the SLQ4.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the SLQ4

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN1-IN4 LC Receives optical signals.

OUT1-OUT4 LC Transmits optical signals.

The SLQ4 can use the swappable optical modules to facilitate maintenance.

Parent topic: SLQ4

11.14 SLQ4A
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the SLQ4A (4xSTM-4
optical interface board).

Application
The SLQ4A is a line board. The SLQ4A can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-4 optical
signals. The SLQ4A converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect
side. In addition, the SLQ4A converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the
optical signals.

Functions and Features

The SLQ4A transmits and receives STM-4 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-4 optical signals, extracts and inserts

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 168/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.

Front Panel
The front panel of the SLQ4A has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: SDH Boards

11.14.1 Application
The SLQ4A is a line board. The SLQ4A can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-4 optical signals. The
SLQ4A converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition,
the SLQ4A converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.

shows the application of the SDH processing boards. The SDH processing boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the
Figure 1
system.
Figure 1 Networking and application of the SDH processing boards

Parent topic: SLQ4A

11.14.2 Functions and Features

The SLQ4A transmits and receives STM-4 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-4 optical signals, extracts and inserts
overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the SLQ4A.

Table 1 Functions and features of the SLQ4A

Function and Feature SLQ4A

Basic functions Transmits and receives 4xSTM-4 optical signals.

Specifications of the optical Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, and Ve-4.2.
interface
The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2 types comply with ITU-T G.957.
The characteristics of the optical interface of the Ve-4.2 type comply with the standards defined by Huawei.

Specifications of the optical Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module.
module
Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser.
Supports the usage and monitoring of the SFP optical module, which facilitates the maintenance and
upgrading of the optical module.

Service processing Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, and VC-4-4c concatenation services.
Overhead processing Processes the section overheads of the STM-4 signals.
Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Supports one to four channels of ECC communication.

Alarms and performance Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
events equipment.
Protection schemes Supports the Two-fiber ring MSP, Four-fiber ring MSP, Linear MSP, SNCP, SNCTP, and SNCMP.
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and SNCP and processes eight sets of K bytes. A single optical interface
supports two MSP protection rings, and one SLQ4A supports a maximum of eight MSP protection rings.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 169/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature SLQ4A

Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.

Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.

Parent topic: SLQ4A

11.14.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the SLQ4A has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SLQ4A.

Figure 1 Front panel of the SLQ4A

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the SLQ4A has four optical interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the SLQ4A.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the SLQ4A

Interface Type of Interface Usage

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 170/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN1–IN4 LC Receives optical signals.

OUT1–OUT4 LC Transmits optical signals.

The SLQ4A can use the swappable optical modules to facilitate maintenance.

Parent topic: SLQ4A

11.15 SL16
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the SL16 (1xSTM-16
optical interface board).

Application
The SL16 is a line board. The SL16 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-16 optical signals.
The SL16 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In
addition, the SL16 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical
signals.

Functions and Features

The SL16 receives and transmits 1xSTM-16 optical signals and processes overhead bytes.

Front Panel
The front panel of the SL16 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, a laser safety class label, and an APD alarm label.

Parent topic: SDH Boards

11.15.1 Application
The SL16 is a line board. The SL16 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-16 optical signals. The
SL16 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the
SL16 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.

shows the application of the SDH processing boards. The SDH processing boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the
Figure 1
system.

Figure 1 Networking and application of the SDH processing boards

Parent topic: SL16

11.15.2 Functions and Features

The SL16 receives and transmits 1xSTM-16 optical signals and processes overhead bytes.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the SL16.

Table 1 Functions and features of the SL16

Function and Feature SL16

Basic functions Transmits and receives 1xSTM-16 optical signals.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 171/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature SL16

Specifications of the optical Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je (with the booster
interface amplifier (BA)), and U-16.2Je (with the BA and pre-amplifier (PA)). The characteristics of the optical interface of
the L-16.2 type comply with ITU-T G.957 and ITU-T G.692. The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the L-
16.2Je, V-16.2Je (with the BA), and U-16.2Je (with the BA and PA) types comply with the standards defined by
Huawei. U-16.2Je is compatible with U-16.2.
Supports the output of the standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.692. The U-16.2Je optical interface
can be directly connected to the dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) equipment.
The N3SL16 supports DWDM colored optical interfaces, which use LC connectors and support the
transmission distances of 170 km and 640 km.

Specifications of the optical Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module.
module
Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser.

Service processing Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, VC-4-8c
concatenation services, and VC-4-16c concatenation services.
The N2SL16 supports the AU-3 services.

Overhead processing Processes the section overheads of the STM-16 signals.

Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Supports one channel of ECC communication.

Alarms and performance Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
events equipment.
Specifications of the REG The N2SL16/N3SL16 board supports the setting and query of the REG working mode.
With the REG function enabled, the board is in RS loopback mode and processes only the regeneration
section overhead.

Protection schemes Supports the tTwo-fiber ring MSP, Four-fiber ring MSP, Linear MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP.
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and SNCP and processes two sets of K bytes. One SL16 supports a maximum
of two MSP protection rings.

Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.

The N1SL16 supports inloops on VC-4 paths. The N3SL16 board supports inloops and outloops on paths.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
The N2SL16 and N3SL16 support the TCM function.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
The N2SL16/N3SL16 board supports the TCM function.
Supports the PRBS function. For details, see Availability.
Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.

Parent topic: SL16

11.15.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the SL16 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, a laser safety class label, and an APD alarm label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SL16.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 172/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the SL16

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the SL16 has one optical interface. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the SL16.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the SL16

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN LC Receives optical signals.

OUT LC Transmits optical signals.

Parent topic: SL16

11.16 SL16A
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the SL16A (1xSTM-
16 optical interface board).

Application
The SL16A is a line board. The SL16A can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-16 optical
signals. The SL16A converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect
side. In addition, the SL16A converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the
optical signals.

Functions and Features

The SL16A receives and transmits 1xSTM-16 optical signals, processes overhead bytes, and performs the MSP.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 173/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Front Panel
The front panel of the SL16A has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, a laser safety class label, and an APD alarm label.

Parent topic: SDH Boards

11.16.1 Application
The SL16A is a line board. The SL16A can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-16 optical signals. The
SL16A converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition,
the SL16A converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.

shows the application of the SDH processing boards. The SDH processing boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the
Figure 1
system.
Figure 1 Networking and application of the SDH processing boards

Parent topic: SL16A

11.16.2 Functions and Features

The SL16A receives and transmits 1xSTM-16 optical signals, processes overhead bytes, and performs the MSP.

Table 1 describes the functions and features of the SL16A.

Table 1 Functions and features of the SL16A

Function and Feature SL16A

Basic functions Transmits and receives 1xSTM-16 optical signals.

Specifications of the optical interface Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, and L-16.2. The
characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G.957 and ITU-T G.692.
The N3SL16A supports U-16.2Je (with the BA and pre-amplifier (PA)). The characteristics of the optical
interfaces of the U-16.2Je (with the BA and PA) comply with the standards defined by Huawei. U-16.2Je is
compatible with U-16.2.
The N3SL16A supports the CWDM and DWDM colored optical interfaces. The optical interface uses the LC
connector. The CWDM optical interface supports the transmission distance of 80 km, and the DWDM optical
interface supports the transmission distance of 120 km.

Specifications of the optical module Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module.
Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser.
Supports the usage and monitoring of the SFP optical module, which facilitates the maintenance and
upgrading of the optical module.

Service processing Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, VC-4-8c
concatenation services, and VC-4-16c concatenation services.
The N2SL16A supports the AU-3 services.

Overhead processing Processes the section overheads of the STM-16 signals.

Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Supports one channel of ECC communication.

Alarms and performance events Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
equipment.

Specifications of the REG The N2SL16A/N3SL16A board supports the setting and query of the REG working mode.
With the REG function enabled, the board is in RS loopback mode and processes only the
regeneration section overhead.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 174/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature SL16A

Protection schemes Supports the Two-fiber ring MSP.

Supports the Four-fiber ring MSP.
Supports the Linear MSP.
Supports the SNCP.
Supports the SNCMP.
Supports the SNCTP.
Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection.
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and processes two sets of K bytes. One SL16A supports a maximum
of two MSP rings.

Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.

The N1SL16A supports inloops on VC-4 paths. The N3SL16A board supports inloops and outloops
on VC-4 paths.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
The N2SL16A/N3SL16A board supports the TCM function.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the PRBS function. For details, see Availability.
Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.

Parent topic: SL16A

11.16.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the SL16A has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, a laser safety class label, and an APD alarm label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SL16A.

Figure 1 Front panel of the SL16A

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 175/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the SL16A has one optical interface. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the SL16A.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the SL16A

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN LC Receives optical signals.

OUT LC Transmits optical signals.

Parent topic: SL16A

11.17 SLD16
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the SLD16 (2xSTM-
16 optical interface board).

Application
The SLD16 is a line board. The SLD16 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-16 optical
signals. The SLD16 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect
side. In addition, the SLD16 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the
optical signals.

Functions and Features

The SLD16 receives and transmits 2xSTM-16 optical signals, processes overhead bytes, and performs the MSP.

Front Panel
The front panel of the SLD16 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: SDH Boards

11.17.1 Application
The SLD16 is a line board. The SLD16 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-16 optical signals.
The SLD16 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In
addition, the SLD16 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.

shows the application of the SDH processing boards. The SDH processing boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the
Figure 1
system.
Figure 1 Networking and application of the SDH processing boards

Parent topic: SLD16

11.17.2 Functions and Features

The SLD16 receives and transmits 2xSTM-16 optical signals, processes overhead bytes, and performs the MSP.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the SLD16.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 176/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Table 1 Functions and features of the SLD16
Function and Feature SLD16

Basic functions Transmits and receives 2xSTM-16 optical signals.

Specifications of the optical Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, and L-16.2. The
interface characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G.957 and ITU-T G.692.
Supports the output of the standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.692.

Specifications of the optical Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module.
module
Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser.
Supports the usage and detection of the SFP optical module, which facilitates the maintenance and upgrading
of the optical module.

Service processing Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, VC-4-8c concatenation
services, and VC-4-16c concatenation services.
Overhead processing Processes the section overheads of the STM-16 signals.
Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Supports one or two channels of ECC communication.
Supports the time synchronization feature and transmission of the time information by using the section
overhead bytes.

Alarms and performance Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
events equipment.
Specifications of the REG Does not support the REG.
Protection schemes Supports the Two-fiber ring MSP.
Supports the Four-fiber ring MSP.
Supports the Linear MSP.
Supports the SNCP.
Supports the SNCMP.
Supports the SNCTP.
Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection.
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and processes four sets of K bytes. A single optical interface can process two
sets of K bytes. One SLD16 supports a maximum of four MSP rings.

Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.

Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.

Parent topic: SLD16

11.17.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the SLD16 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SLD16.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 177/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the SLD16

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the SLD16 has two optical interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the SLD16.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the SLD16

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN1–IN2 LC Receives optical signals.

OUT1–OUT2 LC Transmits optical signals.

Parent topic: SLD16

11.18 SLQ16
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the SLQ16 (4xSTM-
16 optical interface board).

Application
The SLQ16 is a line board. The SLQ16 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-16 optical
signals. The SLQ16 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect
side. In addition, the SLQ16 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the
optical signals.

Functions and Features

The SLQ16 receives and transmits 4xSTM-16 optical signals, processes overhead bytes, and performs the MSP.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 178/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Front Panel
The front panel of the SLQ16 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: SDH Boards

11.18.1 Application
The SLQ16 is a line board. The SLQ16 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-16 optical signals.
The SLQ16 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In
addition, the SLQ16 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.

shows the application of the SDH processing boards. The SDH processing boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the
Figure 1
system.
Figure 1 Networking and application of the SDH processing boards

Parent topic: SLQ16

11.18.2 Functions and Features

The SLQ16 receives and transmits 4xSTM-16 optical signals, processes overhead bytes, and performs the MSP.
Table 1 describes the functions and features of the SLQ16.

Table 1 Functions and features of the SLQ16

Function and Feature SLQ16

Basic functions Transmits and receives 4xSTM-16 optical signals.

Specifications of the optical Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, and L-16.2. The
interface characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G.957 and ITU-T G.692.
The N4SLQ16 supports the CWDM and DWDM colored optical interfaces. The optical interface uses the LC
connector. The CWDM optical interface supports the transmission distance of 80 km, and the DWDM optical
interface supports the transmission distances of 120 km.

Specifications of the optical Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module.
module
Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser.
Supports the usage and detection of the SFP optical module, which facilitates the maintenance and
upgrading of the optical module.
The N4SLQ16 supports the single-fiber bidirectional optical module, and the single-fiber bidirectional
optical module does not support loopbacks at the optical interface by using fiber jumpers.

Service processing Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, VC-4-8c
concatenation services, and VC-4-16c concatenation services.
The N2SLQ16 supports the AU-3 services.

Overhead processing Processes the section overheads of the STM-16 signals.

Supports the configuration of the D1-D12, E1, and E2 bytes as transparent transmission bytes or into
other unused overheads bytes.
Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Supports one to four channels of ECC communication.

Alarms and performance events Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
equipment.
Specifications of the REG Does not support the REG.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 179/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature SLQ16

Protection schemes Supports the Two-fiber ring MSP.

Supports the Four-fiber ring MSP.
Supports the Linear MSP.
Supports the SNCP.
Supports the SNCMP.
Supports the SNCTP.
Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection.
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and processes eight sets of K bytes. A single optical interface can process
two sets of K bytes. One SLQ16 supports a maximum of eight MSP rings.

Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.

The N1SLQ16 supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths.
The N4SLQ16 supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.
The N2SLQ16 supports the TCM function.
The N4SLQ16 supports detection and query of the voltage.
Supports the PRBS function. For details, see Availability.

Parent topic: SLQ16

11.18.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the SLQ16 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the N1SLQ16/N4SLQ16.

Figure 1 Front panel of the N1SLQ16/N4SLQ16

Figure 2 shows the appearance of the front panel of the N2SLQ16.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 180/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 2 Front panel of the N2SLQ16

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the SLQ16 has four optical interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the SLQ16.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the SLQ16

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN1-IN4 LC Receives optical signals.

OUT1-OUT4 LC Transmits optical signals.

Parent topic: SLQ16

11.19 SLO16
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the SLO16 (8xSTM-
16 optical interface board).

Application
The SLO16 is a line board. The SLO16 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-16 optical
signals. The SLO16 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect
side. In addition, the SLO16 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the
optical signals.

Functions and Features

The SLO16 receives and transmits 8xSTM-16 optical signals, processes overhead bytes, and performs the MSP protection.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 181/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Front Panel
The front panel of the SLO16 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: SDH Boards

11.19.1 Application
The SLO16 is a line board. The SLO16 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-16 optical signals.
The SLO16 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In
addition, the SLO16 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.

shows the application of the SDH processing boards. The SDH processing boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the
Figure 1
system.
Figure 1 Networking and application of the SDH processing boards

Parent topic: SLO16

11.19.2 Functions and Features

The SLO16 receives and transmits 8xSTM-16 optical signals, processes overhead bytes, and performs the MSP protection.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the SLO16.

Table 1 Functions and features of the SLO16

Function and Feature SLO16

Basic functions Transmits and receives 8xSTM-16 optical signals.

Specifications of the optical Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, and L-16.2. The
interface characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G.957 and ITU-T G.692.
The N4SLO16 supports the CWDM and DWDM colored optical interfaces. The optical interface uses the LC
connector. The CWDM optical interface supports the transmission distance of 80 km, and the DWDM optical
interface supports the transmission distances of 120 km.

Specifications of the optical Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module.
module
Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser.
Supports the usage and detection of the SFP optical module, which facilitates the maintenance and
upgrading of the optical module.
The N4SLO16 supports the single-fiber bidirectional optical module, and the single-fiber bidirectional
optical module does not support loopbacks as the optical interface by using fiber jumpers.

Service processing Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, VC-4-8c
concatenation services, and VC-4-16c concatenation services.
Overhead processing Processes the section overheads of the STM-16 signals.
Supports the configuration of the D1–D12, E1, and E2 bytes as transparent transmission bytes or into
other unused overheads bytes.
Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Supports one to eight channels of ECC communication.

Alarms and performance events Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
equipment.
Specifications of the REG Does not support the REG.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 182/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature SLO16

Protection schemes Supports Two-fiber ring MSP.

Supports Four-fiber ring MSP.
Supports Linear MSP.
Supports SNCP.
Supports SNCMP.
Supports SNCTP.
Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection.
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and processes 16 sets of K bytes. A single optical interface can process
two sets of K bytes. One SLO16 supports a maximum of 16 MSP rings.

Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.

Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.
The N4SLO16 supports detection and query of the voltage.
Supports the PRBS function. For details, see Availability.

Parent topic: SLO16

11.19.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the SLO16 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SLO16.

Figure 1 Front panel of the SLO16

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 183/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the SLO16 has eight optical interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the SLO16.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the SLO16

Interface Type of Interface Usage

RX1–RX8 LC Receives optical signals.

TX1–TX8 LC Transmits optical signals.

Parent topic: SLO16

11.20 SF16
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the SF16 (1xSTM-16
optical interface board with the out-band FEC function).

Application
The SF16 is a line board. The SF16 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-16 optical signals.
The SF16 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In
addition, the SF16 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical
signals.

Functions and Features

The SF16 receives and transmits 1xSTM-16 optical signals (2.666 Gbit/s with the out-band FEC function) and processes overhead
bytes.

Front Panel
The front panel of the SF16 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: SDH Boards

11.20.1 Application
The SF16 is a line board. The SF16 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-16 optical signals. The
SF16 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the
SF16 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.

shows the application of the SDH processing boards. The SDH processing boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the
Figure 1
system.
Figure 1 Networking and application of the SDH processing boards

Parent topic: SF16

11.20.2 Functions and Features

The SF16 receives and transmits 1xSTM-16 optical signals (2.666 Gbit/s with the out-band FEC function) and processes overhead bytes.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the SF16.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 184/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Table 1 Functions and features of the SF16

Function and Feature SF16

Basic functions Receives and transmits 1xSTM-16 optical signals (2.666 Gbit/s with the out-band FEC function).
Supports the enabling or disabling of the FEC function.

Specifications of the Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, and Ue-16.2f. The
optical interface characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with the standards defined by Huawei.
Supports the output of the standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.692 and can be directly connected
to the DWDM equipment.
Supports the DWDM colored optical interfaces. The optical interface uses the LC connector. The DWDM optical
interface supports the transmission distance of 640 km.

Specifications of the Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module.
optical module
Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser.

Service processing Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, VC-4-8c
concatenation services, and VC-4-16c concatenation services.
Encapsulates and encodes the signals with the FEC function, and processes overhead bytes, which comply with
ITU-T G.709.

Overhead processing Processes the section overheads of the STM-16 signals.

Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Supports one channel of ECC communication.

Alarms and performance Reports various alarms and performance events.

events
Specifications of the REG Does not support the REG.
Protection schemes Supports the Two-fiber ring MSP, Four-fiber ring MSP, Linear MSP, SNCP, SNCTP, and SNCMP.
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and SNCP and processes two sets of K bytes. One SF16 supports a maximum of
two MSP protection rings.

Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.

Supports inloops on VC-4 paths.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.

Parent topic: SF16

11.20.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the SF16 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SF16.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 185/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the SF16

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the SF16 has one optical interface. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the SF16.

NOTE:
The SF16 uses the unswappable optical module.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the SF16

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN LC Receives optical signals.

OUT LC Transmits optical signals.

Parent topic: SF16

11.21 SF16E
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the SF16E (1xSTM-16
optical interface board with the out-band EFEC function).

Application
SF16E boards are line boards. They can transmit and receive STM-16 optical signals when being used on the OptiX OSN equipment,
and can achieve ultra-long distance transmission when working with BPA, OBU1, OBU2, RPC01, or RPC02 boards.

Functions and Features

The SF16E receives and transmits 1xSTM-16 optical signals (2.666 Gbit/s with the out-band EFEC function) and processes overhead
bytes.
localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 186/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Front Panel
The front panel of the SF16E has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: SDH Boards

11.21.1 Application
SF16E boards are line boards. They can transmit and receive STM-16 optical signals when being used on the OptiX OSN equipment, and
can achieve ultra-long distance transmission when working with BPA, OBU1, OBU2, RPC01, or RPC02 boards.
SF16E boards can be used in four typical scenarios, as shown in Figure 1.

Application 1: SF16E boards can achieve 72 dB span transmission if working with OBU1/OBU2 boards, RPC02 boards, and PAs.
Application 2: SF16E boards can achieve 67 dB span transmission if working with OBU1/OBU2 boards and PAs.
Application 3: SF16E boards can achieve 75 dB span transmission if working with BAs, RPC01 boards, RPC02 boards, and PAs.
Application 4: SF16E boards can achieve 61 dB span transmission if working with BAs and PAs.

Figure 1 Typical networking and application of SF16E boards

Parent topic: SF16E

11.21.2 Functions and Features

The SF16E receives and transmits 1xSTM-16 optical signals (2.666 Gbit/s with the out-band EFEC function) and processes overhead bytes.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the SF16E.

Table 1 Functions and features of the SF16E

Function and Feature SF16E

Basic functions Receives and transmits 1xSTM-16 optical signals (2.666 Gbit/s with the out-band EFEC function).
Supports the enabling or disabling of the EFEC function.

Specifications of the Supports the output of the standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.692 and can be directly connected
optical interface to the DWDM equipment.
Supports the DWDM colored optical interfaces. The optical interface uses the LC connector. The DWDM optical
interface supports the transmission distance of 120 km.

Specifications of the Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module.
optical module
Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser.

Service processing Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, VC-4-8c
concatenation services, and VC-4-16c concatenation services.
Encapsulates and encodes the signals with the EFEC function, and processes overhead bytes, which comply with
ITU-T G.709.

Overhead processing Processes the section overheads of the STM-16 signals.

Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Supports one channel of ECC communication.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 187/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature SF16E

Alarms and performance Reports various alarms and performance events.

events
Specifications of the REG Supported.
Protection schemes Supports the Two-fiber ring MSP, Four-fiber ring MSP, Linear MSP, SNCP, SNCTP, and SNCMP.
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and SNCP and processes two sets of K bytes. One SF16E supports a maximum
of two MSP protection rings.

Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.

Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.
Supports the PRBS function. For details, see Availability.

Parent topic: SF16E

11.21.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the SF16E has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SF16E.
Figure 1 Front panel of the SF16E

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the SF16E has one optical interface. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the SF16E.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the SF16E

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 188/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN LC Receives optical signals.

OUT LC Transmits optical signals.

Parent topic: SF16E

11.22 SL64
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the SL64 (1xSTM-64
optical interface board).

Application
The SL64 is a line board. The SL64 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-64 optical signals.
The SL64 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In
addition, the SL64 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical
signals.

Functions and Features

The SL64 receives and transmits 1xSTM-64 optical signals and processes overhead bytes.

Front Panel
The front panel of the SL64 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, a laser safety class label, and an APD alarm label.

Parent topic: SDH Boards

11.22.1 Application
The SL64 is a line board. The SL64 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-64 optical signals. The
SL64 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the
SL64 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.

shows the application of the SDH processing boards. The SDH processing boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the
Figure 1
system.
Figure 1 Networking and application of the SDH processing boards

Parent topic: SL64

11.22.2 Functions and Features

The SL64 receives and transmits 1xSTM-64 optical signals and processes overhead bytes.

Table 1 describes the functions and features of the SL64.

Table 1 Functions and features of the SL64

Function and Feature SL64

Basic functions Transmits and receives 1xSTM-64 optical signals.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 189/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature SL64

Specifications of the The N1SL64/N2SL64 supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-64.1, I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-
optical interface 64.2b (BA), Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, and V-64.2b (BA + PA + dispersion compensation unit (DCU)). The characteristics of
the optical interfaces of the S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Ls-64.2, and V-64.2b types comply with ITU-T G.691 and ITU-T
G.692. The characteristics of the optical interface of the Le-64.2 type comply with the standards defined by
Huawei.
The N4SL64 supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-64.1, S-64.2b, Le-64.2, P1L1-
2D2, and V-64.2b (BA + PA + DCU). The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the I-64.1, S-64.2b, Le-64.2, and
V-64.2b types comply with ITU-T G.691. The characteristics of the optical interface of the P1L1-2D2 type comply
with ITU-T G.959.
The N1SL64/N2SL64 supports the DWDM colored optical interfaces, which use LC connectors. The DWDM optical
interface supports the transmission distance of 40 km.
The N4SL64 supports the CWDM and DWDM colored optical interfaces. The optical interface uses the LC
connector. The CWDM optical interface supports the transmission distance of 70 km, and the DWDM optical
interface supports the transmission distance of 40 km and 80 km.
N4SL64 supports one-fiber bidirectional optical modules.
Supports the output of the standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.692 and can be directly connected to
the WDM equipment.

Specifications of the Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module.
optical module
Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser.
The N4SL64 supports the usage and detection of the pluggable XFP optical module, which facilitates the
maintenance and upgrading of the optical module.

Service processing Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, and VC-4 services.
The N1SL64, N2SL64, and N4SL64 support the VC-4-4c concatenation services, VC-4-8c concatenation services,
Vc-4-16c concatenation services, and VC-4-64c concatenation services.
The N2SL64 supports the AU-3 services.

Overhead processing Processes the section overheads of the STM-64 signals.

Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Supports one channel of ECC communication.

Alarms and performance Reports various alarms and performance events.

events
Specifications of the REG Supports the setting and query of the REG working mode.
With the REG function enabled, the board is in RS loopback mode and processes only the regeneration section
overhead.

Protection schemes Supports Two-fiber ring MSP.

Supports Four-fiber ring MSP.
Supports Linear MSP.
Supports SNCP.
Supports SNCMP.
Supports SNCTP.
Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection.
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and processes two sets of K bytes. One SL64 supports a maximum of two MSP
rings.

Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.

The N1SL64/N4SL64 supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
The N2SL64 supports the TCM function.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.
The N4SL64 detects and reports voltage performance.
Supports the PRBS function. For details, see Availability.

Parent topic: SL64

11.22.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the SL64 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, a laser safety class label, and an APD alarm label.

gram of the Front Panel

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 190/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the N1SL64/N2SL64.

Figure 1 Appearance of the front panel of the N1SL64/N2SL64

Figure 2 shows the appearance of the N4SL64.

Figure 2 Appearance of the front panel of the N4SL64

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 191/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the SL64 has one optical interface. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the SL64.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the SL64

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN LC Receives optical signals.

OUT LC Transmits optical signals.

Parent topic: SL64

11.23 SLD64
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the SLD64 (2xSTM-
64 optical interface board).

Application
The SLD64 is a line board. The SLD64 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-64 optical
signals. The SLD64 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect
side. In addition, the SLD64 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the
optical signals.

Functions and Features

The SLD64 receives and transmits 2xSTM-64 optical signals, processes overhead bytes, and performs the MSP protection.

Front Panel
The front panel of the SLD64 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: SDH Boards

11.23.1 Application
The SLD64 is a line board. The SLD64 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-64 optical signals.
The SLD64 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In
addition, the SLD64 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.

shows the application of the SDH processing boards. The SDH processing boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the
Figure 1
system.
Figure 1 Networking and application of the SDH processing boards

Parent topic: SLD64

11.23.2 Functions and Features

The SLD64 receives and transmits 2xSTM-64 optical signals, processes overhead bytes, and performs the MSP protection.
Table 1 describes the functions and features of the SLD64.
localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 192/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Table 1 Functions and features of the SLD64

Function and Feature SLD64

Basic functions Provides two optical interfaces to transmit and receive 2xSTM-64 optical signals. Processes 2xSTM-64 standard
services or concatenated services, which are encapsulated in XFP format.
Specifications of the optical Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-64.1 and S-64.2b. The characteristics of the
interface optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G.691.
The N4SLD64 provides standard P1L1-2D2 optical ports, whose specifications comply with ITU-T G.959.
The N4SLD64 supports the CWDM and DWDM colored optical interfaces. The optical interface uses the LC
connector. The CWDM optical interface supports the transmission distance of 70 km, and the DWDM optical
interface supports the transmission distances of 80 km.
N4SLD64 supports one-fiber bidirectional optical modules.

Specifications of the optical Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the optical module. The SLD64 also reports the
module performance events that indicate the performance of the optical module.
Supports the default off state of the laser, and the setting and query of the on/off state of the laser.
Supports the usage and detection of the XFP optical module, therefore facilitating maintenance of the
optical module.

Service processing Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, VC-4-8c
concatenation services, VC-4-16c concatenation services, and VC-4-64c concatenation services.
Overhead processing Processes the section overheads of the STM-64 signals.
Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Supports two channels of ECC communication.

Alarms and performance events Reports various alarms and performance events.
Specifications of the REG Does not support the REG.
Protection schemes Supports the Two-fiber ring MSP.
Supports the Four-fiber ring MSP.
Supports the Linear MSP.
Supports the SNCP.
Supports the SNCMP.
Supports the SNCTP.
Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection.
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and processes four sets of K bytes. A single optical interface can process
two sets of K bytes. One SLD64 supports a maximum of four MSP rings.

Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.

Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.
The N4SLD64 supports detection and query of the voltage.
Supports the PRBS function. For details, see Availability.

Parent topic: SLD64

11.23.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the SLD64 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SLD64.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 193/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the SLD64

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the SLD64 has two optical interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the SLD64.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the SLD64

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN1–IN2 LC Receives optical signals.

OUT1–OUT2 LC Transmits optical signals.

Parent topic: SLD64

11.24 SF64
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the SF64 (1xSTM-64
optical interface board with the FEC function).

Application
The SF64 is a line board. The SF64 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-64 optical signals.
The SF64 can achieve ultra-long distance transmission when working with the BPA and DCU board.

Functions and Features

The SF64 receives and transmits 1xSTM-64 optical signals and processes overhead bytes.

Front Panel
The front panel of the SF64 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 194/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Parent topic: SDH Boards

11.24.1 Application
The SF64 is a line board. The SF64 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-64 optical signals. The
SF64 can achieve ultra-long distance transmission when working with the BPA and DCU board.

Figure 1 Networking and application of the SDH line board

The SF64 can be interconnected with the wavelength division multiplexing (WDM) equipment.

Parent topic: SF64

11.24.2 Functions and Features

The SF64 receives and transmits 1xSTM-64 optical signals and processes overhead bytes.

Table 1 describes the functions and features of the SF64.

Table 1 Functions and features of the SF64

Function and Feature SF64

Basic functions Transmits and receives 1xSTM-64 optical signals.

Supports the enabling or disabling of the FEC function.

Specifications of the optical Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e.
interface The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with the standards defined by Huawei.
Supports the output of the standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.692 and can be directly
connected to the DWDM equipment.
The N1SF64/N4SF64 supports the DWDM colored optical interfaces. The optical interface uses the LC
connector. The DWDM optical interface supports the transmission distance of 40 km.

Specifications of the optical Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module.
module
Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser.
The N4SF64 supports the usage and detection of the XFP optical module, therefore facilitating
maintenance of the optical module.

Service processing Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, VC-4-8c
concatenation services, VC-4-16c concatenation services, and VC-4-64c concatenation services.
Overhead processing Processes the section overheads of the STM-64 signals.
Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Supports one channel of ECC communication.

Alarms and performance events Reports various alarms and performance events.
Specifications of the REG Supports the setting and query of the REG working mode.
With the REG function enabled, the board is in RS loopback mode and processes only the regeneration
section overhead and the FEC overhead.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 195/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature SF64

Protection schemes Supports the Two-fiber ring MSP.

Supports the Four-fiber ring MSP.
Supports the Linear MSP.
Supports the SNCP.
Supports the SNCMP.
Supports the SNCTP.
Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection.
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and processes two sets of K bytes. One SF64 supports a maximum of two
MSP rings.

Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.

Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.
The N4SF64 supports detection and query of the voltage.
Supports the PRBS function. For details, see Availability.

Parent topic: SF64

11.24.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the SF64 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the N1SF64.

Figure 1 Front panel of the N1SF64

Figure 2 shows the appearance of the front panel of the N4SF64.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 196/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 2 Front panel of the N4SF64

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the SF64 has one optical interface. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the SF64.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the SF64

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN LC Receives optical signals.

OUT LC Transmits optical signals.

Parent topic: SF64

11.25 SF64A
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the SF64A (1xSTM-64
optical interface board with the FEC function).

Application
The SF64A is a line board. The SF64A can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-64 optical
signals. The SF64A converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect
side. In addition, the SF64A converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the
optical signals.

Functions and Features

The SF64A receives and transmits 1xSTM-64 optical signals and processes overhead bytes.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 197/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Front Panel
The front panel of the SF64A has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: SDH Boards

11.25.1 Application
The SF64A is a line board. The SF64A can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-64 optical signals. The
SF64A converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition,
the SF64A converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.
The SF64A can also be used for interconnecting with the WDM equipment.

shows the application of the SDH processing boards. The SDH processing boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the
Figure 1
system.
Figure 1 Networking and application of the SDH processing boards

The SF64A can also be used for interconnecting with the WDM equipment.

Parent topic: SF64A

11.25.2 Functions and Features

The SF64A receives and transmits 1xSTM-64 optical signals and processes overhead bytes.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the SF64A.

Table 1 Functions and features of the SF64A

Function and Feature SF64A

Basic functions Transmits and receives 1xSTM-64 optical signals.

Supports the enabling or disabling of the FEC function.

Specifications of the optical Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e.
interface The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with the standards defined by Huawei.
Supports the output of the standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.692 and can be directly
connected to the DWDM equipment. Supports the variable-wavelength DWDM.
Supports the DWDM colored optical interfaces. The optical interface uses the LC connector. The DWDM
optical interface supports the transmission distance of 40 km.

Specifications of the optical Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module.
module
Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser.

Service processing Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, VC-4-8c
concatenation services, VC-4-16c concatenation services, and VC-4-64c concatenation services.
Overhead processing Processes the section overheads of the STM-64 signals.
Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Supports one channel of ECC communication.

Alarms and performance events Reports various alarms and performance events.
Specifications of the REG Supports the setting and query of the REG working mode.
With the REG function enabled, the board is in RS loopback mode and processes only the regeneration
section overhead and the FEC overhead.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 198/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature SF64A

Protection schemes Supports the Two-fiber ring MSP, Four-fiber ring MSP, Linear MSP, SNCP, SNCTP, and SNCMP.
Supports the fiber-shared MSP and SNCP and processes two sets of K bytes. One SF64A supports a
maximum of two MSP protection rings.

Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.

Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.

Parent topic: SF64A

11.25.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the SF64A has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SF64A.

Figure 1 Front panel of the SF64A

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the SF64A has one optical interface. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the SF64A.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 199/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the SF64A

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN LC Receives optical signals.

OUT LC Transmits optical signals.

Parent topic: SF64A

11.26 SFD64
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the SFD64 (2xSTM-
64 optical interface board with the FEC function).

Application
The SFD64 is a line board. The SFD64 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-64 optical
signals. The SFD64 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect
side. In addition, the SFD64 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the
optical signals.

Functions and Features

The SFD64 receives and transmits 2xSTM-64 optical signals and processes overhead bytes.

Front Panel
The front panel of the SFD64 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: SDH Boards

11.26.1 Application
The SFD64 is a line board. The SFD64 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-64 optical signals.
The SFD64 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In
addition, the SFD64 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.

shows the application of the SDH processing boards. The SDH processing boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the
Figure 1
system.

Figure 1 Networking and application of the SDH processing boards

The SFD64 can also be used for interconnecting with the WDM equipment.

Parent topic: SFD64

11.26.2 Functions and Features

The SFD64 receives and transmits 2xSTM-64 optical signals and processes overhead bytes.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the SFD64.

Table 1 Functions and features of the SFD64

Functions and Features Value

Basic functions Transmits and receives 2xSTM-64 optical signals.

Enables and disables the FEC function.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 200/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Functions and Features Value

Specifications of the optical Supports the optical interfaces compliant with Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e system specifications. The
interface optical interfaces compliant with Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e system specifications are defined by
Huawei.
Supports the standard wavelength output compliant with ITU-T G.692 and the direct access of the WDM
equipment.
Supports the DWDM colored optical interfaces. The optical interface uses the LC connector. The DWDM
optical interface supports the transmission distance of 40 km.

Specifications of the optical Supports the usage and detection of the XFP optical module, facilitating the maintenance of the optical
module module.
Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module.
Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the function of setting the on/off state of a laser.

Service processing Supports VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services, VC-4-4c, VC-4-8c, VC-4-16c, and VC-4-64c concatenation services.
Overhead processing Processes the section overheads of STM-64 signals.
Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Supports two channels of ECC communication.

Alarms and performance Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.
events
REG specifications Not supported.
Protection schemes Supports the Two-fiber ring MSP.
Supports the Four-fiber ring MSP.
Supports the Linear MSP.
Supports the SNCP.
Supports the SNCMP.
Supports the SNCTP.
Supports fiber-shared virtual trail protection.
Supports optical-path-shared MSP. Each optical interface can process two sets of K bytes. One SFD64 can
support a maximum of four MSP rings.

Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.

Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths.
Supports the warm reset and cold reset. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information about a board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports detection and query of the voltage.
Supports the PRBS function. For details, see Availability.
Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.

Parent topic: SFD64

11.26.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the SFD64 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SFD64.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 201/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the SFD64

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the SFD64 has two optical interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the SFD64.

Table 1 Description of the optical interfaces of the SFD64

Interface Type of Interface Usage

RX1-RX2 LC Receives optical signals.

TX1-TX2 LC Transmits optical signals.

Parent topic: SFD64

11.27 SLQ41
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the SLQ41 (4xSTM-
4/STM-1 optical interface board).

Application
The SLQ41 is a line board. The SLQ41 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-1/STM-4 optical
signals. The SLQ41 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect
side. In addition, the SLQ41 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the
optical signals.

Functions and Features

The SLQ41 transmits and receives STM-1 or STM-4 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-1 or STM-4 optical signals,
extracts and inserts overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 202/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Front Panel
The front panel of the SLQ41 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: SDH Boards

11.27.1 Application
The SLQ41 is a line board. The SLQ41 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-1/STM-4 optical
signals. The SLQ41 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In
addition, the SLQ41 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.

shows the application of the SDH processing boards. The SDH processing boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the
Figure 1
system.
Figure 1 Networking and application of the SDH processing boards

Parent topic: SLQ41

11.27.2 Functions and Features

The SLQ41 transmits and receives STM-1 or STM-4 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-1 or STM-4 optical signals,
extracts and inserts overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.

Table 1 provides the functions and features of the SLQ41.

Table 1 Functions and features of the SLQ41

Function and Feature SLQ41

Basic functions Transmits and receives 4xSTM-1 or 4xSTM-4 optical signals.

Specifications of the optical The STM-1 optical module or STM-4 optical module can be used.
interface
When the STM-1 optical module is used, the SLQ41 supports different types of standard optical
interfaces, namely, the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, and Ve-1.2. The characteristics of the optical interfaces of
the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 types comply with ITU-T G.957. The characteristics of the optical
interface of the Ve-1.2 type comply with the standards defined by Huawei.
When the STM-4 optical module is used, the SLQ41 supports different types of standard optical
interfaces, namely, the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, and Ve-4.2. The characteristics of the optical interfaces of
the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2 types comply with ITU-T G.957. The characteristics of the optical
interface of the Ve-4.2 type comply with the standards defined by Huawei.
Supports the CWDM and DWDM colored optical interfaces. The optical interface uses the LC connector. The
CWDM optical interface supports the transmission distance of 80 km, and the DWDM optical interface
supports the transmission distance of 120 km.

Specifications of the optical module Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module.
Supports the usage and detection of the SFP optical module, which facilitates the maintenance and
upgrading of the optical module.
Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser.
The SLQ41 supports the single-fiber bidirectional optical module, and the single-fiber bidirectional
optical module does not support loopbacks at the optical interface by using fiber jumpers.

Service processing When the STM-1 optical module is used, the SLQ41 supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, and
VC-4 services.
When the STM-4 optical module is used, the SLQ41 supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4
services, and VC-4-4c concatenation services.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 203/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature SLQ41

Overhead processing Processes the section overheads of the STM-1 signals or STM-4 signals.
Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Supports one to four channels of ECC communication.

Alarms and performance events Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
equipment.
Protection schemes Supports the Two-fiber ring MSP (only two-fiber unidirectional protection is supported when STM-1 optical
modules are installed).
Supports the Four-fiber ring MSP.
Supports the Linear MSP.
Supports the SNCP.
Supports the SNCMP.
Supports the SNCTP.

Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.

Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the PRBS function. For details, see Availability.
Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.

Parent topic: SLQ41

11.27.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the SLQ41 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SLQ41.

Figure 1 Front panel of the SLQ41

icators
localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 204/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the SLQ41 has four optical interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the SLQ41.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the SLQ41

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN1–IN4 LC Receives optical signals.

OUT1–OUT4 LC Transmits optical signals.

Parent topic: SLQ41

11.28 SLH41
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the SLH41 (16xSTM-
1/STM-4 optical interface board with the variable rate).

Application
The SLH41 is a line board. The SLH41 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-1/STM-4 optical
signals. The SLH41 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect
side. In addition, the SLH41 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the
optical signals.

Functions and Features

The SLH41 is used to transmit and receive 16xSTM-1/STM-14 optical signals, to perform O/E conversion for the STM-1/STM-4
optical signals, to extract or insert overhead bytes, and to report alarms generated on the line.

Front Panel
The front panel of the SLH41 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: SDH Boards

11.28.1 Application
The SLH41 is a line board. The SLH41 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive STM-1/STM-4 optical
signals. The SLH41 converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In
addition, the SLH41 converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.

shows the application of the SDH processing boards. The SDH processing boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the
Figure 1
system.

Figure 1 Networking and application of the SDH processing boards

Parent topic: SLH41

11.28.2 Functions and Features

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 205/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
The SLH41 is used to transmit and receive 16xSTM-1/STM-14 optical signals, to perform O/E conversion for the STM-1/STM-4 optical
signals, to extract or insert overhead bytes, and to report alarms generated on the line.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the SLH41.

Table 1 Functions and features of the SLH41

Functions and Features Value

Basic functions Transmits and receives 16xSTM-1/STM-4 optical signals.

Specifications of the optical The STM-1/STM-4 optical module can be used, which supports the adaptive modulation (AM) technology.
interface
When the STM-1 optical module is used, the standard S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 optical interfaces are supported.
The optical interfaces of the S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 types comply with ITU-T G.957.
When the STM-4 optical module is used, the standard S-4.1 and L-4.2 optical interface is supported. The
optical interface of the S-4.1 and L-4.2 type complies with ITU-T G.957.
Supports the CWDM and DWDM colored optical interfaces. The optical interface uses the LC connector. The CWDM
optical interface supports the transmission distance of 80 km, and the DWDM optical interface supports the
transmission distance of 120 km.

Specifications of the optical Uses the SFP optical module.

module
Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module.
Supports the single-fiber bidirectional optical module, and the single-fiber bidirectional optical module does
not support loopbacks at the optical interface by using fiber jumpers.
Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the function of setting the on/off state of a laser.

Service processing When the STM-1 optical module is used, the SLH41 supports VC-12 services, VC-3 services, and VC-4 services.
When the STM-4 optical module is used, the SLH41 supports VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, and
VC-4-4c concatenation services.

Overhead processing Processes the section overheads of the STM-1/STM-4 signals.

Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Supports one to sixteen channels of ECC communication. The first eight optical interfaces support the ECC
communication in D1-D12 mode. The last eight optical interfaces support the ECC communication in D1-D3
mode.

Alarms and performance Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
events equipment.
Protection schemes Supports the Two-fiber ring MSP (only two-fiber unidirectional protection is supported when STM-1 optical
modules are installed).
Supports the Four-fiber ring MSP.
Supports the Linear MSP.
Supports the SNCP.
Supports the SNCMP.
Supports the SNCTP.

Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.

Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths.
Supports the warm reset and cold reset. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information about a board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the PRBS function. For details, see Availability.
Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.

Parent topic: SLH41

11.28.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the SLH41 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SLH41.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 206/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the SLH41

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the SLH41 has 16 optical interfaces. A silkscreen "16SFP" is marked below the indicators.

Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the SLH41.

Table 1 Description of the optical interfaces of the SLH41

Interface Type of interface Usage

RX1-RX16 LC Receives optical signals.

TX1-TX16 LC Transmits optical signals.

NOTE:
The G.657A2 fiber jumper rather than the G.652D fiber jumper is used if an optical attenuator is inserted into the transmit port. Otherwise, the cabinet door cannot
be closed. Figure 2 shows the G.657A2 fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 207/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 2 G.657A2 fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper

Parent topic: SLH41

11.29 EU04
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the EU04 (4xSTM-1
electrical interface board).

Application
The EU04 is an STM-1 electrical interface board. The EU04 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive
signals for the STM-1 electrical processing board.

Functions and Features

The EU04 receives and transmits 4xSTM-1 electrical signals. The EU04 must work with the SEP.

Front Panel
The front panel of the EU04 has interfaces and a bar code.

Parent topic: SDH Boards

11.29.1 Application
The EU04 is an STM-1 electrical interface board. The EU04 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive
signals for the STM-1 electrical processing board.

Parent topic: EU04

11.29.2 Functions and Features

The EU04 receives and transmits 4xSTM-1 electrical signals. The EU04 must work with the SEP.

Parent topic: EU04

11.29.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the EU04 has interfaces and a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EU04.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 208/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the EU04

erfaces
The front panel of the EU04 has four pairs of electrical interfaces.
Table 1 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the EU04.

Table 1 Interfaces of the EU04

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN1–IN4 SMB Receives the 1st to the 4th channels of STM-1 electrical signals.
OUT1–OUT4 SMB Transmits the 1st to the 4th channels of STM-1 electrical signals.

Parent topic: EU04

11.30 EU08
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the EU08 (8xSTM-1
electrical interface board).

Application
The EU08 is an STM-1 electrical interface board. The EU08 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive
signals for the STM-1 electrical processing board.

Functions and Features

The EU08 receives and transmits 8xSTM-1 electrical signals. The EU08 must work with the SLH1 or SEP1.

Front Panel
The front panel of the EU08 has interfaces and a bar code.

Parent topic: SDH Boards

11.30.1 Application
The EU08 is an STM-1 electrical interface board. The EU08 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive
signals for the STM-1 electrical processing board.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 209/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Parent topic: EU08

11.30.2 Functions and Features

The EU08 receives and transmits 8xSTM-1 electrical signals. The EU08 must work with the SLH1 or SEP1.

Parent topic: EU08

11.30.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the EU08 has interfaces and a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EU08.

Figure 1 Front panel of the EU08

erfaces
The front panel of the EU08 has eight pairs of electrical interfaces.
Table 1 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the EU08.

Table 1 Interfaces of the EU08

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN1–IN8 SMB Receives the 1st to the 8th channels of STM-1 electrical signals.
OUT1–OUT8 SMB Transmits the 1st to the 8th channels of STM-1 electrical signals.

Parent topic: EU08

11.31 OU08
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the N1OU08 (8xSTM-
1 optical/electrical interface board) and the N2OU08 (8xSTM-1 optical interface board).

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 210/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Application
The N1OU08 is an STM-1 optical/electrical interface board, and the N2OU08 is an STM-1 optical interface board. The OU08 can be
used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive signals for the STM-1 optical processing board.

Functions and Features

The N1OU08 receives and transmits 8xSTM-1 optical/electrical signals, and the N2OU08 receives and transmits 8xSTM-1 optical
signals. The OU08 must work with the SLH1 or SEP1.

Front Panel
The front panel of the OU08 has interfaces and a bar code.

Parent topic: SDH Boards

11.31.1 Application
The N1OU08 is an STM-1 optical/electrical interface board, and the N2OU08 is an STM-1 optical interface board. The OU08 can be used
on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive signals for the STM-1 optical processing board.

Parent topic: OU08

11.31.2 Functions and Features

The N1OU08 receives and transmits 8xSTM-1 optical/electrical signals, and the N2OU08 receives and transmits 8xSTM-1 optical signals.
The OU08 must work with the SLH1 or SEP1.

Parent topic: OU08

11.31.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the OU08 has interfaces and a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the N1OU08. Figure 2 shows the appearance of the front panel of the N2OU08.

Figure 1 Front panel of the N1OU08 with optical interfaces

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 211/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 2 Front panel of the N2OU08

erfaces
The front panel of the N1OU08 has eight optical/electrical interfaces. The front panel of the N2OU08 has eight optical interfaces.
describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the N1OU08. Table 2 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the
Table 1
N2OU08.

Table 1 Interfaces of the N1OU08

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN1–IN8 LC/SAA Receives the first to the eighth channels of STM-1 optical/electrical signals.
OUT1–OUT8 LC/SAA Transmits the first to the eight channels of STM-1 optical/electrical signals.

Table 2 Interfaces of the N2OU08

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN1–IN8 SC Receives the first to the eighth channels of STM-1 optical signals.
OUT1–OUT8 SC Transmits the first to the eighth channels of STM-1 optical signals.

Parent topic: OU08

12 PDH Boards
The PDH boards include the PDH service interface boards and PDH service processing boards, to transmit/receive and process E1/T1
signals, E3/T3 signals, E4/STM-1 electrical signals, and DDN signals.

PQ1
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the PQ1 (63xE1
service processing board).

PQM
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the PQM
(63xE1/T1 service processing board).

PFL1
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the PFL1 (8xE1
optical processing board).

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 212/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
PL3
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the PL3
(3xE3/T3 service processing board).

PL3A
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the PL3A
(3xE3/T3 service processing board with the interfaces on the front panel).

PD3
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the PD3 (6xE3/T3
service processing board).

PQ3
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the PQ3
(12xE3/T3 service processing board).

DX1
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the DX1 (DDN
service accessing and converging board).

DXA
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the DXA (DDN
service converging and processing board).

SPQ4
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the SPQ4
(4xE4/STM-1 electrical processing board).

D12B
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the D12B
(32xE1/T1 access board).

D12S
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the D12S
(32xE1/T1 switching access board).

D75S
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the D75S (32xE1
switching access board).

D34S
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the D34S
(6xE3/T3 switching access board).

C34S
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the C34S
(3xE3/T3 switching access board).

MU04
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the MU04
(4xE4/STM-1 electrical interface board).

DM12
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the DM12 (DDN
service interface board).

TSB4
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the TSB4 (4-
channel electrical interface protection switching board).

TSB8
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the TSB8 (8-
channel electrical interface protection switching board).

Parent topic: Description of Common Hardware

12.1 PQ1
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the PQ1 (63xE1
service processing board).

Application
The PQ1 is a PDH processing board. The PQ1 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to add and drop PDH signals. To
transmit/receive and process 63xE1 signals, the PQ1 must be used with the interface board.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 213/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Functions and Features
The PQ1 processes E1 signals, processes overhead bytes, reports alarms and performance events, provides maintenance features,
and supports the TPS protection.

Front Panel
The front panel of the PQ1 has indicators.

Board Protection
The PQ1 supports the 1:N TPS protection.

Parent topic: PDH Boards

12.1.1 Application
The PQ1 is a PDH processing board. The PQ1 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to add and drop PDH signals. To
transmit/receive and process 63xE1 signals, the PQ1 must be used with the interface board.

shows the application of the PDH processing boards. The PDH processing boards add tributary signals to line signals and drops
Figure 1
tributary signals to line signals.
Figure 1 Networking and application of the PDH processing boards

Parent topic: PQ1

12.1.2 Functions and Features

The PQ1 processes E1 signals, processes overhead bytes, reports alarms and performance events, provides maintenance features, and
supports the TPS protection.

Table 1 provides the functions and features of the PQ1.

Table 1 Functions and features of the PQ1

Function and Feature PQ1
N1PQ1 N2PQ1

Basic functions Processes 63xE1 signals. Processes 63xE1 signals.

Service processing Processes 63xE1 electrical signals Processes 63xE1 electrical signals when working with the interface board.
when working with the interface
Supports the E13 function, which is used to converge E1 services into E3 services.
board.
Overhead processing Supports the processing of the path overheads at the VC-12 level, such as the J2 byte.
Alarms and Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.
performance events
Maintenance Supports inloops and outloops at electrical interfaces.
features
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the PRBS function. For details, see Availability.
The N1PQ1 does not support the CRC function, but the N2PQ1 supports the CRC function.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 214/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature PQ1

N1PQ1 N2PQ1

Protection schemes Supports the TPS protection when working with the interface board.
The N1PQ1 supports hybrid protection. When the working board is the N1PQ1, the protection board can be the
N1PQ1, N2PQ1, or N1PQM.
The N2PQ1 does not support hybrid protection. When the working board is the N2PQ1, the protection board can
only be the N2PQ1.

Parent topic: PQ1

12.1.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the PQ1 has indicators.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PQ1.

Figure 1 Front panel of the PQ1

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the PQ1 does not have an interface.
The D75S, D12S, and D12B provide 75-ohm or 120-ohm E1 interfaces for the PQ1. For details, see the topics that describe the D75S,
D12S, and D12B.

Parent topic: PQ1

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 215/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

12.1.4 Board Protection

The PQ1 supports the 1:N TPS protection.

otection Principle
The PQ1 boards work with the D75S or D12S boards to realize one 1:N (N≤8) TPS protection group.
shows the TPS protection provided by the PQ1. When the cross-connect and timing board detects that a working PQ1 is faulty, the
Figure 1
cross-connect and timing board issues a service switching command to control the interface board to switch the services from the faulty
PQ1 to the protection PQ1, which realizes the protection of the services.

Figure 1 TPS protection provided by the PQ1

NOTE:
TPS trigger conditions on the OptiX OSN equipment are detected by the cross-connect and timing board. Therefore, TPS is successful even though the system
control board cannot be detected or is faulty.

rdware Configuration
Table 1 shows the slot configuration for the 1:8 TPS protection of the PQ1.

Table 1 Slot configuration for the 1:8 TPS protection of the PQ1
Working Board Protection Board Slot Configuration

PQ1A (75-ohm) PQ1A (75-ohm) Slot 1 can house a protection board. The board in slot 1
protects the boards in slots 2-5 and 13-16. Figure 2 shows the
PQ1B (120-ohm) PQ1B (120-ohm) or PQM slot configuration for the 1:8 TPS protection of the PQ1.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 216/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 2 Slot configuration for the 1:8 TPS protection of the PQ1

Parent topic: PQ1

12.2 PQM
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the PQM (63xE1/T1
service processing board).

Application
The PQM is a PDH processing board. The PQM can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to add and drop PDH signals. To
transmit/receive and process 63xE1/T1 signals, the PQM must be used with the interface board.

Functions and Features

The PQM processes E1/T1 signals, processes overhead bytes, reports alarms and performance events, provides maintenance
features, and supports the TPS protection.

Front Panel
The front panel of the PQM has indicators.

Board Protection
The PQM supports the 1:N TPS protection.

Parent topic: PDH Boards

12.2.1 Application
The PQM is a PDH processing board. The PQM can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to add and drop PDH signals. To
transmit/receive and process 63xE1/T1 signals, the PQM must be used with the interface board.

shows the application of the PDH processing boards. The PDH processing boards add tributary signals to line signals and drops
Figure 1
tributary signals to line signals.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 217/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Networking and application of the PDH processing boards

Parent topic: PQM

12.2.2 Functions and Features

The PQM processes E1/T1 signals, processes overhead bytes, reports alarms and performance events, provides maintenance features, and
supports the TPS protection.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the PQM.

Table 1 Functions and features of the PQM

Function and Feature PQM

Basic functions Processes 63xE1/T1 signals.

Service processing Transmits/Receives and processes 63xE1/T1 electrical signals when working with the interface board. Each channel can be
configured as E1 or T1.
Overhead processing Supports the processing of the path overheads at the VC-12 level, such as the J2 byte.
Alarms and performance Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.
events
Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at electrical interfaces.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the PRBS function. For details, see Availability.
Supports the CRC function.

Protection schemes Supports the TPS protection when working with the interface board.
When the working board is the N1PQ1, the protection board can be the N1PQ1, N2PQ1 or N1PQM. In this case,
the hybrid protection is provided.
When the working board is the N1PQM, the protection board can only be the N1PQM.

Parent topic: PQM

12.2.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the PQM has indicators.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PQM.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 218/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the PQM

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the PQM does not have an interface. The D12S and D12B provide 120-ohm E1 interfaces or 100-ohm T1 interfaces for
the PQM. For details, see the topics that describe the D12S and D12B.

Parent topic: PQM

12.2.4 Board Protection

The PQM supports the 1:N TPS protection.

otection Principle
The PQM boards can work with the D12S boards to realize one 1:N (N≤8) TPS protection group.
Figure 1 shows the TPS protection provided by the PQM.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 219/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 TPS protection provided by the PQM (E1 services are provided as an example)

When the cross-connect and timing board detects that a working PQM is faulty, the cross-connect and timing board issues a service
switching command. Then, the interface board switches the services from the faulty PQM to the protection PQM, which realizes the
protection of the services.

NOTE:
TPS trigger conditions on the OptiX OSN equipment are detected by the cross-connect and timing board. Therefore, TPS is successful even though the system
control board cannot be detected or is faulty.

rdware Configuration
Table 1 shows the slot configuration for the 1:8 TPS protection of the PQM.

Table 1 Slot configuration for the 1:8 TPS protection of the PQM
Working Board Protection Board Slot Configuration

PQM (E1) PQM (E1) Slot 1 can house a protection board. The board in slot 1 protects the
boards in slots 2-5 and 13-16. Figure 2 shows the slot configuration for the
PQM (T1) PQM (T1) 1:8 TPS protection of the PQM.

Figure 2 Slot configuration for the 1:8 TPS protection of the PQM

Parent topic: PQM

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 220/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

12.3 PFL1
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the PFL1 (8xE1
optical processing board).

Application
The PFL1 is a PDH processing board. The PFL1 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to receive/transmit and process
8xE1 optical signals.

Functions and Features

The PFL1 processes E1 optical signals and overheads, and supports alarms, performance events, and maintenance features.

Front Panel
The front panel of the PFL1 has indicators.

Parent topic: PDH Boards

12.3.1 Application
The PFL1 is a PDH processing board. The PFL1 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to receive/transmit and process 8xE1
optical signals.

shows the application of the PDH processing boards. The PDH processing boards add tributary signals to line signals and drops
Figure 1
tributary signals to line signals.

Figure 1 Networking and application of the PDH processing boards

Parent topic: PFL1

12.3.2 Functions and Features

The PFL1 processes E1 optical signals and overheads, and supports alarms, performance events, and maintenance features.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the PFL1.

Table 1 Functions and features of the PFL1

Function and Feature PFL1

Basic functions Processes 8xE1 optical signals.

Service processing Receives/Transmits and processes 8 x E1 optical signals. During receiving and transmission of E1 optical signals, the
peer device must trace the clock of the local device.
Optical port specifications Supports I-2M optical ports, which comply with standards defined by Huawei.
Optical module Supports the detection and query of information about an optical module.
specifications
Allows setting the on/off state of a laser and supports the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.
Supports the usage and monitoring of eSFP optical modules, facilitating optical module maintenance.

Overhead processing Processes path overheads at the VC-12 level, such as J2 bytes.
Alarms and performance Provides various alarms and performance events, facilitating equipment management and maintenance.
events

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 221/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature PFL1

Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at optical ports.

Supports warm resets and cold resets. Warm resets do not affect ongoing services.
Supports the query of board manufacturer information.
Supports in-service FPGA loading.
Supports board software upgrades without affecting ongoing services.
Supports the PRBS function. For details, see Availability.

Protection scheme TPS protection is not supported.

Parent topic: PFL1

12.3.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the PFL1 has indicators.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the front panel of the PFL1.

Figure 1 Front panel of the PFL1

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the PFL1 has eight optical interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces on the PFL1.

Table 1 Electrical ports on the PFL1

Port Port Type Usage

RX1-RX8 LC Receives optical signals.

TX1-TX8 LC Transmits optical signals.

Parent topic: PFL1

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 222/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

12.4 PL3
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the PL3 (3xE3/T3
service processing board).

Application
The PL3 is a PDH processing board. The PL3 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to add and drop PDH signals. To
transmit/receive and process 3xE3/T3 signals, the PL3 must be used with the interface board.

Functions and Features

The PL3 processes E3/T3 signals, processes overhead bytes, reports alarms and performance events, provides maintenance features,
and supports the TPS protection.

Front Panel
The front panel of the PL3 has indicators.

Board Protection
The PL3 supports the 1:N TPS protection.

Parent topic: PDH Boards

12.4.1 Application
The PL3 is a PDH processing board. The PL3 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to add and drop PDH signals. To
transmit/receive and process 3xE3/T3 signals, the PL3 must be used with the interface board.

shows the application of the PDH processing boards. The PDH processing boards add tributary signals to line signals and drops
Figure 1
tributary signals to line signals.

Figure 1 Networking and application of the PDH processing boards

Parent topic: PL3

12.4.2 Functions and Features

The PL3 processes E3/T3 signals, processes overhead bytes, reports alarms and performance events, provides maintenance features, and
supports the TPS protection.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the PL3.

Table 1 Functions and features of the PL3

Function and Feature PL3

Basic functions Processes 3xE3/T3 signals.

Service processing Transmits/Receives and processes 3xE3/T3 electrical signals.
The N2PL3 supports the E13 function, which is used to converge E1 services into E3 services.
The N2PL3 supports the M13 function, which is used to converge T1 services into T3 services.

Overhead processing Supports the setting and query of all the path overhead bytes at the VC-3 level.
Alarms and performance events Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
equipment.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 223/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature PL3

Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at electrical interfaces.

Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the PRBS function. For details, see Availability.
The N1PL3 does not support the CRC function, but the N2PL3 supports the CRC function.

Protection schemes Supports the TPS protection when working with the interface board and the switching and bridging board.

Parent topic: PL3

12.4.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the PL3 has indicators.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PL3.

Figure 1 Front panel of the PL3

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the PL3 does not have an interface.
The C34S provides E3/T3 interfaces for the PL3. For details, see the topic that describes the C34S.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 224/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Parent topic: PL3

12.4.4 Board Protection

The PL3 supports the 1:N TPS protection.

otection Principle
The PL3 can be configured into two 1:N (N≤3) TPS protection groups when the PL3 works with the C34S and TSB8/TSB4.
Figure 1 shows the TPS protection provided by the PL3.
Figure 1 TPS protection provided by the PL3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack

Normal state
When each working board functions normally, the traffic signal is directly transmitted to the corresponding working board
through position 1 of the control switch on the interface board.
Switching state
When a working board detects a failure and requires the switching operation, the control switch of the corresponding interface
board switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the protection switching board switches to
the corresponding position so that the protection board can protect the failed working board.

NOTE:
TPS trigger conditions on the OptiX OSN equipment are detected by the cross-connect and timing board. Therefore, TPS is successful even though the system
control board cannot be detected or is faulty.

rdware Configuration
Table 1 shows the slot configuration for the 1:3 TPS protection of the PL3.

Table 1 Slot configuration for the 1:3 TPS protection of the PL3
Working Board Protection Board Slot Configuration

PL3 (E3) PL3 (E3)/PD3 (E3) If the working board is the PL3, the PD3 can be the protection board.
Figure 2 shows the slot configuration for the 1:3 TPS protection of the
PL3 (T3) PL3 (T3)/PD3 (T3) PL3.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 225/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 2 Slot configuration for the two 1:3 TPS protection groups of the PL3

In Figure 2, the board in slot 2 protects the boards in slots 3-5. The board in slot 16 protects the boards in slots 13-15.
Table 2 lists the slots for the PL3, C34S, and TSB8/TSB4.

Table 2 Slots for the PL3, C34S, and TSB8/TSB4

Board Protection Group 1 Protection Group 2

PL3 (working board) Slots 3, 4, and 5 Slots 13, 14, and 15

PL3 (protection board) Slot 2 Slot 16
TSB8/TSB4 Slot 19 Slot 35
C34S Slots 21, 23, and 25 Slots 29, 31, and 33

Parent topic: PL3

12.5 PL3A
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the PL3A (3xE3/T3
service processing board with the interfaces on the front panel).

Application
The PL3A is a PDH processing board. The PL3A can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to add and drop PDH signals. To
transmit/receive and process 3xE3/T3 signals, the PL3A uses the interfaces on its front panel.

Functions and Features

The PL3A processes E3/T3 signals, processes overhead bytes, reports alarms and performance events, provides maintenance
features, and supports the TPS protection.

Front Panel
The front panel of the PL3A has indicators and interfaces.

Parent topic: PDH Boards

12.5.1 Application
The PL3A is a PDH processing board. The PL3A can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to add and drop PDH signals. To
transmit/receive and process 3xE3/T3 signals, the PL3A uses the interfaces on its front panel.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 226/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
shows the application of the PDH processing boards. The PDH processing boards add tributary signals to line signals and drops
Figure 1
tributary signals to line signals.

Figure 1 Networking and application of the PDH processing boards

Parent topic: PL3A

12.5.2 Functions and Features

The PL3A processes E3/T3 signals, processes overhead bytes, reports alarms and performance events, provides maintenance features, and
supports the TPS protection.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the PL3A.

Table 1 Functions and features of the PL3A

Function and Feature PL3A

Basic functions Processes 3xE3/T3 signals.

Service processing Transmits/Receives and processes 3xE3/T3 electrical signals.

The N2PL3A supports the E13 function, which is used to converge E1 services into E3 services.
The N2PL3A supports the M13 function, which is used to converge T1 services into T3 services.

Overhead processing Supports the setting and query of all the path overhead bytes at the VC-3 level.
Alarms and performance events Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
equipment.
Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at electrical interfaces.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the PRBS function. For details, see Availability.
The N1PLS3A does not support the CRC function, but the N2PL3A supports the CRC function.

Parent topic: PL3A

12.5.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the PL3A has indicators and interfaces.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PL3A.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 227/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the PL3A

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the PL3A has three pairs of 75-ohm unbalanced interfaces, which are of the SMB type.

Parent topic: PL3A

12.6 PD3
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the PD3 (6xE3/T3
service processing board).

Application
The PD3 is a PDH processing board. The PD3 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to add and drop PDH signals. To
transmit/receive and process 6xE3/T3 signals, the PD3 must be used with the interface board.

Functions and Features

The PD3 processes E3/T3 signals, processes overhead bytes, reports alarms and performance events, provides maintenance features,
and supports the TPS protection.

Front Panel
The front panel of the PD3 has indicators.

Board Protection
The PD3 supports the 1:N TPS protection.

Parent topic: PDH Boards

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 228/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

12.6.1 Application
The PD3 is a PDH processing board. The PD3 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to add and drop PDH signals. To
transmit/receive and process 6xE3/T3 signals, the PD3 must be used with the interface board.

shows the application of the PDH processing boards. The PDH processing boards add tributary signals to line signals and drops
Figure 1
tributary signals to line signals.

Figure 1 Networking and application of the PDH processing boards

Parent topic: PD3

12.6.2 Functions and Features

The PD3 processes E3/T3 signals, processes overhead bytes, reports alarms and performance events, provides maintenance features, and
supports the TPS protection.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the PD3.

Table 1 Functions and features of the PD3

Function and Feature PD3

Basic functions Processes 6xE3/T3 signals.

Service processing Transmits/Receives and processes 6xE3/T3 electrical signals.
The N2PD3 supports the E13 function, which is used to converge E1 services into E3 services.
The N2PD3 supports the M13 function, which is used to converge T1 services into T3 services.

Overhead processing Supports the setting and query of all the path overhead bytes at the VC-3 level.
Alarms and performance Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.
events
Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at electrical interfaces.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the PRBS function. For details, see Availability.
The N1PD3 does not support the CRC function, but the N2PD3 supports the CRC function.

Protection schemes Supports the TPS protection when working with the interface board and the switching and bridging board.

Parent topic: PD3

12.6.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the PD3 has indicators.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PD3.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 229/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the PD3

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the PD3 does not have an interface.
The D34S provides E3/T3 interfaces for the PD3. For details, see the topic that describes the D34S.

Parent topic: PD3

12.6.4 Board Protection

The PD3 supports the 1:N TPS protection.

otection Principle
The PD3 can be configured into two 1:N (N≤3) TPS protection groups when the PD3 works with the D34S and TSB8. Figure 1 shows the TPS
protection provided by the PD3.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 230/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 TPS protection provided by the PD3

Normal state
When each working board functions normally, the traffic signal is directly transmitted to the PD3 through position 1 of the
control switch on the D34S.
Switching state
When a working board detects a failure and requires the switching operation, the control switch of the corresponding D34S
switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the TSB8 switches to the corresponding position so
that the protection board can protect the failed working board.

NOTE:
TPS trigger conditions on the OptiX OSN equipment are detected by the cross-connect and timing board. Therefore, TPS is successful even though the system
control board cannot be detected or is faulty.

rdware Configuration
Table 1 shows the slot configuration for the 1:3 TPS protection of the PD3.

Table 1 Slot configuration for the 1:3 TPS protection of the PD3
Working Board Protection Board Slot Configuration

PD3 (E3) PD3 (E3) Figure 2 shows the slot configuration for the 1:3 TPS protection of the PD3.
PD3 (T3) PD3 (T3)

Figure 2 Slot configuration for the 1:3 TPS protection of the PD3

In Figure 2, the board in slot 2 protects the boards in slots 3-5. The board in slot 16 protects the boards in slots 13-15.
Table 2 lists the slots for the PD3, D34S, and TSB8.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 231/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Table 2 Slots for the PD3, D34S, and TSB8
Board Protection Group 1 Protection Group 2

PD3 (working board) Slots 3-5 Slots 13-15

PD3 (protection board) Slot 2 Slot 16
TSB8 Slot 19 Slot 35
D34S Slots 21, 23, and 25 Slots 29, 31, and 33

Parent topic: PD3

12.7 PQ3
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the PQ3 (12xE3/T3
service processing board).

Application
The PQ3 is a PDH processing board. The PQ3 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to add and drop PDH signals. To
transmit/receive and process 12xE3/T3 signals, the PQ3 must be used with the interface board.

Functions and Features

The PQ3 processes E3/T3 signals, processes overhead bytes, reports alarms and performance events, provides maintenance features,
and supports the TPS protection.

Front Panel
The front panel of the PQ3 has indicators.

Board Protection
The PQ3 supports the 1:N TPS protection.

Parent topic: PDH Boards

12.7.1 Application
The PQ3 is a PDH processing board. The PQ3 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to add and drop PDH signals. To
transmit/receive and process 12xE3/T3 signals, the PQ3 must be used with the interface board.

shows the application of the PDH processing boards. The PDH processing boards add tributary signals to line signals and drops
Figure 1
tributary signals to line signals.
Figure 1 Networking and application of the PDH processing boards

Parent topic: PQ3

12.7.2 Functions and Features

The PQ3 processes E3/T3 signals, processes overhead bytes, reports alarms and performance events, provides maintenance features, and
supports the TPS protection.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the PQ3.

Table 1 Functions and features of the PQ3

Function and Feature PQ3

Basic functions Processes 12xE3/T3 signals.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 232/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature PQ3

Service processing

Transmits/Receives and processes 12xE3/T3 electrical signals.

Supports the E13 function, which is used to converge E1 services into E3 services.
Supports the M13 function, which is used to converge T1 services into T3 services.

Overhead processing Supports the setting and query of all the path overhead bytes at the VC-3 level.
Alarms and performance Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.
events
Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at electrical interfaces.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Supports the PRBS function. For details, see Availability.
Supports the CRC function.

Protection schemes Supports the TPS protection when working with the interface board and the switching and bridging board.

Parent topic: PQ3

12.7.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the PQ3 has indicators.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PQ3.
Figure 1 Front panel of the PQ3

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 233/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the PQ3 does not have an interface.
The D34S provides E3/T3 interfaces for the PQ3. For details, see the topic that describes the D34S.

Parent topic: PQ3

12.7.4 Board Protection

The PQ3 supports the 1:N TPS protection.

otection Principle
The PQ3 boards can be configured into two 1:N (N≤3) TPS protection groups when the PQ3 boards work with two D34S boards and two
TSB8 boards. Figure 1 shows the TPS protection provided by the PQ3.
Figure 1 TPS protection provided by the PQ3

Normal state
When each working board functions normally, the traffic signal is directly transmitted to the PQ3 through position 1 of the
control switch on the D34S.
Switching state
When a working board detects a failure and requires the switching operation, the control switch of the corresponding D34S
switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the TSB8 switches to the corresponding position so
that the protection board can protect the failed working board.

NOTE:
TPS trigger conditions on the OptiX OSN equipment are detected by the cross-connect and timing board. Therefore, TPS is successful even though the system
control board cannot be detected or is faulty.

rdware Configuration

NOTE:
When you configure the N2PQ3 as the TPS protection board, two TSB8 boards are required.

Table 1 shows the slot configuration for the 1:3 TPS protection of the PQ3.

Table 1 Slot configuration for the 1:3 TPS protection of the PQ3
Working Board Protection Board Slot Configuration

PQ3 (E3) PQ3 (E3) Figure 2 shows the slot configuration for the 1:3 TPS protection of the
PQ3.
PQ3 (T3) PQ3 (T3)

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 234/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 2 Slot configuration for the two 1:3 TPS protection groups of the PQ3

In Figure 2, the board in slot 2 protects the boards in slots 3-5. The board in slot 16 protects the boards in slots 13-15.
Table 2 lists the slots for the PQ3, D34S, and TSB8.

Table 2 Slots for the PQ3, D34S, and TSB8

Board Protection Group 1 Protection Group 2

PQ3 (working board) Slots 3-5 Slots 13-15

PQ3 (protection board) Slot 2 Slot 16
TSB8 Slots 19 and 20 Slots 35 and 36
D34S Slots 21-26 Slots 29-34

Parent topic: PQ3

12.8 DX1
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the DX1 (DDN
service accessing and converging board).

Application of DX1
The DX1 is used on OptiX OSN equipment to receive and aggregate services and cross-connect 64 kbit/s system-side E1 signals.

Functions and Features of DX1

DX1 boards can receive, transmit, and process Nx64 kbit/s, framed E1, G.703 64 kbit/s co-directional, sub-rate, 2–/4–wire audio, and
E&M relay services.

Front Panel of DX1

The front panel of the DX1 has indicators.

Protection of DX1
The DX1 supports the 1:N TPS protection.

Parent topic: PDH Boards

12.8.1 Application of DX1

The DX1 is used on OptiX OSN equipment to receive and aggregate services and cross-connect 64 kbit/s system-side E1 signals.

The N1DX1 works with the DM12 to receive eight channels of sub-rate/eight channels of Nx64 kbit/s services and eight channels of
framed E1 services, as well as cross-connect 48 channels of 64 kbit/s system-side E1 signals.
The N3DX1 can receive eight channels of PCM services through ports on its front panel. It can also work with the DM12 to receive eight
channels of framed E1 services, eight channels of sub-rate services/eight channels of Nx64 kbit/s services, and eight channels of G.703 64
kbit/s codirectional services, cross-connect 63 channels of 64 kbit/s system-side E1 signals and 8 kbit/s signals, and support PCM
conference services, multiplexer services, and E1 DCN.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 235/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 shows the application of the DX1. The DX1 boards add/drop tributary signals to/from line signals.

Figure 1 Networking and application of the DX1

Parent topic: DX1

12.8.2 Functions and Features of DX1

DX1 boards can receive, transmit, and process Nx64 kbit/s, framed E1, G.703 64 kbit/s co-directional, sub-rate, 2–/4–wire audio, and E&M
relay services.
Table 1 and Table 2 provide the functions and features of the DX1.

Table 1 Functions and features of the N1DX1

Function and Feature DX1

Basic functions Works with the interface board to receive, process, and transmit eight channels of Nx64 kbit/s services (1≤N≤31)
and eight channels of framed E1 services.
Works with the interface board to receive and process eight channels of sub-rate services.
Synchronous/asynchronous (2.4 kbit/s, 4.8 kbit/s, 9.6 kbit/s, 19.2 kbit/s and 48 kbit/s) services can be encapsulated
in X.50 D3 mode.
Cross-connects 48 channels of E1 signals at the 64 kbit/s level on the system side.

Port working mode Allows the port working mode to be specified.

Framed E1: PCM30(CAS) or PCM31(CCS)
Serial port: DTE or DCE

Port External ports: DDN-1 to DDN-16, representing 16 external ports. External ports are provided by DM12 interface
boards.
Framed E1 ports: With their IDs ranging from 1 to 8, they are E1 ports 1 to 8 on the DM12 board with a
smaller slot ID in each DM12 pair.
Nx64 kbit/s or sub-rate ports: Their IDs range from 9 to 16. In each DM12 pair, ports DDN1 to DDN4 on the
DM12 board with a smaller slot ID are numbered 9 to 12, and those on the DM12 board with a larger slot
ID are numbered 13 to 16.
Internal ports: 2M-1 to 2M-48, representing 48 E1 internal ports which use timeslots 1-31 (PCM30 (CAS)does not
support timeslot 16), with port IDs being 65 to 112.

Service processing One DX1 board can work with two DM12 boards.
Transmits/Receives eight channels of Nx64 kbit/s and eight channels of framed E1 services, or eight channels of
sub-rate services and eight channels of framed E1 services and implements 1:N TPS protection when working with
the DM12.
Processes PCM conference services.

NOTE:
Nx64 kbit/s services, sub-rate services, and framed E1 services use the following ports:
Nx64 kbit/s services: V.35, V.24, X.21, RS-449, RS-530, and RS-530A ports
Sub-rate services: RS-232, RS-422, X.21, V.35, and V.24 ports
Framed E1 services: framed E1 ports

Alarms and Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.
performance events
Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at electrical interfaces.
Supports the PRBS function. For details, see Availability.
Supports the CRC function.

Connectors The DB28 connector is used for the Nx64 kbit/s and sub-rate signals, and the DB44 connector is used for the framed E1
signals. The DB28 connectors and DB44 connectors are present on the front panel of the DM12.
Protection schemes Supports TPS protection when working with the interface board.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 236/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Table 2 Functions and features of the N3DX1

Function and Feature DX1

Basic functions Works with the interface board to receive, process, and transmit eight channels of sub-rate services or eight
channels of Nx64 kbit/s services (1≤N≤31), eight channels of framed E1 services, and eight channels of G.703 64
kbit/s codirectional services.
Receives and processes eight channels of PCM services through ports on its front panel, including the following
services:
Two channels of RS-232 sub-rate services and two channels of RS-485 sub-rate services.
Two channels of analog voice signals at the FXS/FXO port
Two channels of 2- or 4-wire audio and E&M signals
Cross-connects 63 channels of E1 signals at the 64 kbit/s level on the system side.

Port working mode Allows the port working mode to be specified.

Framed E1: PCM30(CAS) or PCM31(CCS)
Serial port: DTE or DCE (Only Nx64 kbit/s or sub-rate services support the setting of the port working mode. G.703
64 kbit/s codirectional services do not support the setting of the port working mode.)
ATI port: 1E1M
FXS/FXO port: FXS, FXO

NOTE:
To configure hotline services, Z interface extension services, or 2- or 4-wire audio and E&M trunk services on N3DX1 boards, set Working Mode of ports to
PCM30 (CAS).

Port External ports: DDN-1 to DDN-32, representing 32 external ports. External ports are provided by one pair of DM12
interface boards and one N3DX1 board.
If cables are connected only to the DM12 pair:
Framed E1 ports: With their IDs ranging from 1 to 8, they are E1 ports 1 to 8 on the DM12 board
with a smaller slot ID in each DM12 pair.
Nx64 kbit/s or sub-rate ports: Their IDs range from 9 to 16. In each DM12 pair, ports DDN1 to
DDN4 on the DM12 board with a smaller slot ID are numbered 9 to 12, and those on the DM12
board with a larger slot ID are numbered 13 to 16.
Sub-rate ports: synchronous/asynchronous (0.6 kbit/s, 1.2 kbit/s, 2.4 kbit/s, 4.8 kbit/s, 9.6 kbit/s,
19.2 kbit/s, 38.4 kbit/s, and 48 kbit/s) and synchronous (56 kbit/s). The ports can receive and
process other types of sub-rate services by means of over-sampling, only if the ports are
configured as synchronous and the to-be-receive sub-rate service rate is four or more times of the
port access rate.
G.703 64 kbit/s codirectional ports: With their IDs ranging from 17 to 24, they are E1 ports 1 to 8
on the DM12 board with a larger slot ID in each DM12 pair.
If cables are connected only to the N3DX1 board:
RS-485 (asynchronous sub-rate) ports: With their IDs being 25 and 26, they are RS-485 ports on
the N3DX1 board. For sub-rate services, the port access rate is 0.6 kbit/s, 1.2 kbit/s, 2.4 kbit/s, 4.8
kbit/s, 9.6 kbit/s, 19.2 kbit/s, 38.4 kbit/s, or 48 kbit/s
RS-232 (asynchronous sub-rate) ports: With their IDs being 27 and 28, they are RS-232 ports on
the N3DX1 board. For sub-rate services, the port access rate is 0.6 kbit/s, 1.2 kbit/s, 2.4 kbit/s, 4.8
kbit/s, 9.6 kbit/s, 19.2 kbit/s, 38.4 kbit/s, or 48 kbit/s.
FXS/FXO ports: With their IDs being 29 and 30, they are ports FXSO 1 and FXSO 2 on the N3DX1
board, respectively.
E&M and 2- or 4-wire ports: With their IDs being 31 and 32, they are ports EM 1 and EM 2 on the
N3DX1 board, respectively.
Internal ports: 2M-1 to 2M-63, representing 63 E1 internal ports which use timeslots 1-31 (PCM30 (CAS)does not
support timeslot 16), with port IDs being 65 to 127.

NOTE:
Figure 1shows the internal and external ports of an N3DX1 board.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 237/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature DX1

Service processing One N3DX1 board needs to work with two DM12 boards to transmit/receive eight channels of sub-rate services or
eight channels of Nx64 kbit/s services, eight channels of framed E1 services, and eight channels of G.703 64 kbit/s
codirectional services
Transmits/Receives eight channels of PCM services with ports available on the front panel.
Cross-connects 63 channels of E1 signals at the 64 kbit/s level on the system side.
Cross-connects E1 services and sub-rate services as well as 8 kbit/s E1 services but does not cross-connect 8 kbit/s
sub-rate services.
Supports the encapsulation of sub-rate services in X.50 D3 mode and V.110 mode.
Synchronous/Asynchronous (2.4 kbit/s, 4.8 kbit/s, 9.6 kbit/s, 19.2 kbit/s and 48 kbit/s) services can be encapsulated
in X.50 D3 mode.
Synchronous/Asynchronous (0.6 kbit/s, 1.2 kbit/s, 2.4 kbit/s, 4.8 kbit/s, 9.6 kbit/s, 19.2 kbit/s and 38.4 kbit/s) and
synchronous (48 kbit/s and 56 kbit/s) services can be encapsulated in V.110 mode.
Nx64 kbit/s services: V.35, V.24, X.21, RS-449, RS-530, and RS-530A ports
N3DX1 supports the association of signaling and services.
None: no to associate.
Signaling Reception: When the port reception status M wire is idle, the audio services sent to the cross-
connection side are invalid; when the M wire is busy, the audio services are valid.
Signaling Transmission: When the audio services received from the cross-connect side are invalid, the port
transmission status E wire is idle; when the services are valid, the E wire is busy.
Signaling Reception and Transmission: associates signaling with services in both the receive and transmit
directions.

NOTE:
When working in 2E2M mode, the board processes only the first channel of E&M signaling, if signaling and services are associated.

Alarms and Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.
performance events
Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at electrical interfaces.
Supports the PRBS function. For details, see Availability.
Supports the CRC function.

Connectors When working with DM12 boards, N3DX1 boards receive Nx64 kbit/s and sub-rate signals using DB28 connectors
on the DM12 boards, and receive framed E1 and G.703 64 kbit/s codirectional signals using DB44 connectors on
the DM12 boards.
When not working with an interface board, N3DX1 boards receive RS-232 and RS-485 sub-rate signals using their
RJ45 connectors.
When not working with an interface board, N3DX1 boards receive analog voice signals using their RJ11 connectors.

Protection schemes Supports TPS protection only when working with DM12 boards.
Supports E1 SNCP.

Figure 1 The internal and external ports of an N3DX1 board

Parent topic: DX1

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 238/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

12.8.3 Front Panel of DX1

The front panel of the DX1 has indicators.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 and Figure 2 show the appearance of the front panel of the DX1.

Figure 1 Front panel of the N1DX1

Figure 2 Front panel of the N3DX1

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 239/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
erfaces
The front panel of the N1DX1 does not have an interface.
One N1DX1 board needs to work with two DM12 boards to receive and transmit framed E1 signals and Nx64 kbit/s or sub-rate signals.
For details, see the topic DM12.
An N3DX1 board has six physical interfaces on its front panel (eight logical interfaces are displayed on the NMS). Table 1 provides the
connector type and usage of each interface.

Table 1 Interfaces on the N3DX1

Interface Connector Type Usage

RS485, RS232 RJ-45 RS485 receives and transmits two channels of RS-485 sub-rate signals.
RS232 receives and transmits two channels of RS-232 sub-rate signals.

FXSO 1, FXSO 2 RJ-11 Receives and transmits two channels of analog voice signals at the FXS/FXO port.

EM 1, EM 2 RJ-45 Receives and transmits two channels of 2– or 4–wire audio and E&M signals.

Table 2 Pin assignments for an RJ-45 port (RS485 port)

Pin Usage

1 First channel of signals (+)

2 First channel of signals (-)
3 Not used
4 Grounded
5 Grounded
6 Not used
7 Second channel of signals (+)
8 Second channel of signals (-)

Table 3 Pin assignments for an RJ-45 port (RS232 port)

Pin Usage

1 Transmits the first channel of signals.

2 Grounded
3 Receives the first channel of signals.
4 Not used
5 Transmits the second channel of signals.
6 Grounded
7 Receives the second channel of signals.
8 Grounded

Table 4 Pin assignments for an RJ-45 port (EM 1/EM 2 port)

Pin Usage
4-Wire Audio 2-Wire Audio

1 Unused
2 E: transmits signaling.
3 Ring (TX-): transmits audio signals (-). Unused
4 Ring (RX-): receives audio signals (-). Ring: receives and transmits audio signals (-).
5 Tip (RX+): receives audio signals (+). Tip: receives and transmits audio signals (+).
6 TIP (TX+): transmits audio signals (+). Unused
7 M: receives signaling.
8 Unused

Table 5 Pins of the RJ-11 ports

Pin Usage

1 No connected
2 Ring
3 Tip
4 No connected

Parent topic: DX1

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 240/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

12.8.4 Protection of DX1

The DX1 supports the 1:N TPS protection.

otection Principle
The DX1 can be configured into one 1:N (N ≤ 8) TPS protection group when the DX1 works with the DM12.
Figure 1 shows the TPS protection provided by the DX1.
Figure 1 TPS protection provided by the DX1

When the cross-connect and timing board detects that a working DX1 is faulty, the cross-connect and timing board issues a service
switching command to control the interface board to switch the services from the faulty board to the protection board, which realizes the
protection of the services.

rdware Configuration
Figure 2 shows the slot configuration for the 1:8 TPS protection of the DX1.
Figure 2 Slot configuration for the 1:8 TPS protection of the DX1

In Figure 2, the board in slot 1 protects the boards in slots 2–5 and 13–16.
Table 1 lists the slots for the DX1 and DM12.

Table 1 Slots for the DX1 and DM12

Board Protection Group

DX1 (working board) Slots 2–5 and 13–16

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 241/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Board Protection Group

DX1 (protection board) Slot 1

DM12 Slots 19–26 and 29–36

Parent topic: DX1

12.9 DXA
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the DXA (DDN service
converging and processing board).

Application
The DXA is a DDN service processing board. The DXA can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit/receive and
converge DDN services. To cross-connect the 63 channels of Nx64 kbit/s signals and framed E1 signals on the system side.

Functions and Features

The DXA cross-connects 63xE1 signals at the 64 kbit/s level on the system side.

Front Panel
The front panel of the DXA has indicators.

Parent topic: PDH Boards

12.9.1 Application
The DXA is a DDN service processing board. The DXA can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit/receive and converge
DDN services. To cross-connect the 63 channels of Nx64 kbit/s signals and framed E1 signals on the system side.

shows the application of the DDN service processing boards. The DDN service processing boards add DDN service signals to line
Figure 1
signals and drops line signals to DDN service signals.

Figure 1 Networking and application of the DDN service processing boards

Parent topic: DXA

12.9.2 Functions and Features

The DXA cross-connects 63xE1 signals at the 64 kbit/s level on the system side.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the DXA.

Table 1 Functions and features of the DXA

Function and Feature DXA

Basic functions Cross-connects 63 channels of framed E1 signals.

Alarms and performance events Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
equipment.
Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops.
Supports the CRC function.

Parent topic: DXA

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 242/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

12.9.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the DXA has indicators.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the DXA.

Figure 1 Front panel of the DXA

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the DXA does not have an interface.

Parent topic: DXA

12.10 SPQ4
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the SPQ4
(4xE4/STM-1 electrical processing board).

Application
The SPQ4 is a PDH processing board. The SPQ4 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive E4/STM-1
electrical signals. To transmit/receive and process 4xE4/STM-1 electrical signals, the SPQ4 must be used with the interface board.

Functions and Features

The SPQ4 processes 4xE4/STM-1 electrical signals, processes overhead bytes, reports alarms and performance events, provides
maintenance features, and supports protection schemes.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 243/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Front Panel
The front panel of the SPQ4 has indicators.

Board Protection
The SPQ4 supports the 1:N TPS protection.

Parent topic: PDH Boards

12.10.1 Application
The SPQ4 is a PDH processing board. The SPQ4 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive E4/STM-1
electrical signals. To transmit/receive and process 4xE4/STM-1 electrical signals, the SPQ4 must be used with the interface board.

shows the application of the PDH processing boards. The PDH processing boards add tributary signals to line signals and drops
Figure 1
tributary signals to line signals.
Figure 1 Networking and application of the PDH processing boards

Parent topic: SPQ4

12.10.2 Functions and Features

The SPQ4 processes 4xE4/STM-1 electrical signals, processes overhead bytes, reports alarms and performance events, provides
maintenance features, and supports protection schemes.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the SPQ4.

Table 1 Functions and features of the SPQ4

Function and Feature SPQ4

Basic functions Processes 4xSTM-1/E4 signals.

Service processing Transmits/Receives and processes 4xE4/STM-1 electrical signals. The E4 signals and STM-1 signals are compatible
on each channel. Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, and VC-4 services.
Overhead processing Processes the section overheads of the STM-1 signals, such as B1, B2, K1, K2, M1, F1, and D1–D12.
Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overhead bytes including J1, B3, C2, G1,
and H4.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.

Alarms and performance Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
events equipment.
Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.
Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
Does not support the CRC function.

Protection schemes Supports the TPS protection when working with the interface board and the switching and bridging board.
Supports the Two-fiber ring MSP.
Supports the Linear MSP.
Supports the SNCP.

Parent topic: SPQ4

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 244/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

12.10.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the SPQ4 has indicators.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SPQ4.

Figure 1 Front panel of the SPQ4

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the SPQ4 does not have an interface. Hence, the SPQ4 needs to work with the MU04 to receive and transmit the
E4/STM-1 signals. For details, see the topic that describes the MU04.

Parent topic: SPQ4

12.10.4 Board Protection

The SPQ4 supports the 1:N TPS protection.

otection Principle
The SPQ4 can be configured into two 1:N (N≤3) TPS protection groups when the SPQ4 works with the MU04 and TSB8/TSB4.
Figure 1 shows the TPS protection provided by the SPQ4.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 245/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 TPS protection provided by the SPQ4

Normal state
When each working board functions normally, the traffic signal is directly transmitted to the working board through position 1 of
the control switch on the interface board.
Switching state
When a working board detects a failure and requires the switching operation, the control switch of the corresponding interface
board switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the protection switching board switches to
the corresponding position so that the protection board can protect the failed working board.

NOTE:
TPS trigger conditions on the OptiX OSN equipment are detected by the cross-connect and timing board. Therefore, TPS is successful even though the system
control board cannot be detected or is faulty.

rdware Configuration
Figure 2 shows the slot configuration for the 1:3 TPS protection of the SPQ4.

Figure 2 Slot configuration for the two 1:3 TPS protection groups of the SPQ4

In Figure 2, the board in slot 2 protects the boards in slots 3-5. The board in slot 16 protects the boards in slots 13-15.
Table 1 lists the slots for the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8/TSB4.

Table 1 Slots for the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8/TSB4

Board Protection Group 1 Protection Group 2

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 246/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Board Protection Group 1 Protection Group 2

SPQ4 (working board) Slots 3-5 Slots 13-15

SPQ4 (protection board) Slot 2 Slot 16
MU04 Slots 21, 23, and 25 Slots 29, 31, and 33
TSB8/TSB4 Slot 19 Slot 35

Parent topic: SPQ4

12.11 D12B
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the D12B (32xE1/T1
access board).

Application
The D12B is a PDH interface board. The D12B can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive signals for
the PDH processing board. To transmit/receive and process signals, the interface board must be used with its corresponding
processing board.

Functions and Features

The D12B receives and transmits 32xE1/T1 electrical signals. The D12B must work with the PQ1, or PQM.

Front Panel
The front panel of the D12B has interfaces and a bar code.

Parent topic: PDH Boards

12.11.1 Application
The D12B is a PDH interface board. The D12B can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive signals for the
PDH processing board. To transmit/receive and process signals, the interface board must be used with its corresponding processing
board.

Parent topic: D12B

12.11.2 Functions and Features

The D12B receives and transmits 32xE1/T1 electrical signals. The D12B must work with the PQ1, or PQM.

Parent topic: D12B

12.11.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the D12B has interfaces and a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the D12B.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 247/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the D12B

erfaces
The front panel of the D12B has four DB44 interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the D12B.

Table 1 Interfaces of the D12B

Interface Type of Interface Usage

1–8 DB44 Receives the 1st to the 8th channels of E1/T1 signals.
9–16 DB44 Receives the 9th to the 16th channels of E1/T1 signals.
17–24 DB44 Receives the 17th to the 24th channels of E1/T1 signals.
25–32 DB44 Receives the 25th to the 32nd channels of E1/T1 signals.

Table 2 provides the pin assignments of the DB44 interface.

Table 2 Pin assignments of the DB44 interface

Front View Pin Usage Pin Usage

38 Receives the 1st channel of 34 Receives the 5th channel of

signals (R1). signals (R5).
23 19
37 Receives the 2nd channel of 33 Receives the 6th channel of
signals (R2). signals (R6).
22 18
36 Receives the 3rd channel of 32 Receives the 7th channel of
signals (R3). signals (R7).
21 17
35 Receives the 4th channel of 31 Receives the 8th channel of
signals (R4). signals (R8).
20 16
15 Transmits the 1st channel of 11 Transmits the 5th channel of
signals (T1). signals (T5).
30 26
14 Transmits the 2nd channel of 10 Transmits the 6th channel of
signals (T2). signals (T6).
29 25
13 Transmits the 3rd channel of 9 Transmits the 7th channel of
signals (T3). signals (T7).
28 24
12 Transmits the 4th channel of 8 Transmits the 8th channel of
signals (T4). signals (T8).
27 7

Parent topic: D12B

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 248/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

12.12 D12S
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the D12S (32xE1/T1
switching access board).

Application
The D12S is a PDH interface switching board. The D12S can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive
signals for the PDH processing board. In addition, when the corresponding PDH processing board is configured with the TPS
protection, the interface switching board is required to perform the TPS protection.

Functions and Features

The D12S receives and transmits 32xE1/T1 electrical signals. The D12S must work with the PQ1, or PQM.

Front Panel
The front panel of the D12S has interfaces and a bar code.

Parent topic: PDH Boards

12.12.1 Application
The D12S is a PDH interface switching board. The D12S can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive signals
for the PDH processing board. In addition, when the corresponding PDH processing board is configured with the TPS protection, the
interface switching board is required to perform the TPS protection.

Parent topic: D12S

12.12.2 Functions and Features

The D12S receives and transmits 32xE1/T1 electrical signals. The D12S must work with the PQ1, or PQM.

Parent topic: D12S

12.12.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the D12S has interfaces and a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the D12S.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 249/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the D12S

erfaces
The front panel of the D12S has four DB44 interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the D12S.

Table 1 Interfaces of the D12S

Interface Type of Interface Usage

1–8 DB44 Receives the 1st to the 8th channels of E1/T1 signals.
9–16 DB44 Receives the 9th to the 16th channels of E1/T1 signals.
17–24 DB44 Receives the 17th to the 24th channels of E1/T1 signals.
25–32 DB44 Receives the 25th to the 32nd channels of E1/T1 signals.

Table 2 provides the pin assignments of the DB44 interface.

Table 2 Pin assignments of the DB44 interface

Front View Pin Usage Pin Usage

38 Receives the 1st channel of 34 Receives the 5th channel of signals

signals (R1). (R5).
23 19
37 Receives the 2nd channel of 33 Receives the 6th channel of signals
signals (R2). (R6).
22 18
36 Receives the 3rd channel of 32 Receives the 7th channel of signals
signals (R3). (R7).
21 17
35 Receives the 4th channel of 31 Receives the 8th channel of signals
signals (R4). (R8).
20 16
15 Transmits the 1st channel of 11 Transmits the 5th channel of
signals (T1). signals (T5).
30 26
14 Transmits the 2nd channel of 10 Transmits the 6th channel of
signals (T2). signals (T6).
29 25
13 Transmits the 3rd channel of 9 Transmits the 7th channel of
signals (T3). signals (T7).
28 24
12 Transmits the 4th channel of 8 Transmits the 8th channel of
signals (T4). signals (T8).
27 7

Parent topic: D12S

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 250/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

12.13 D75S
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the D75S (32xE1
switching access board).

Application
The D75S is a PDH interface switching board. The D75S can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive
signals for the PDH processing board. In addition, when the corresponding PDH processing board is configured with the TPS
protection, the interface switching board is required to perform the TPS protection.

Functions and Features

The D75S receives and transmits 32xE1 electrical signals. The D75S must work with the PQ1.

Front Panel
The front panel of the D75S has interfaces and a bar code.

Parent topic: PDH Boards

12.13.1 Application
The D75S is a PDH interface switching board. The D75S can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive signals
for the PDH processing board. In addition, when the corresponding PDH processing board is configured with the TPS protection, the
interface switching board is required to perform the TPS protection.

Parent topic: D75S

12.13.2 Functions and Features

The D75S receives and transmits 32xE1 electrical signals. The D75S must work with the PQ1.

Parent topic: D75S

12.13.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the D75S has interfaces and a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the D75S.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 251/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the D75S

erfaces
The front panel of the D75S has four DB44 interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the D75S.

Table 1 Interfaces of the D75S

Interface Type of Interface Usage

1–8 DB44 Receives the 1st to the 8th channels of E1 signals.

9–16 DB44 Receives the 9th to the 16th channels of E1 signals.
17–24 DB44 Receives the 17th to the 24th channels of E1 signals.
25–32 DB44 Receives the 25th to the 32nd channels of E1 signals.

Table 2 provides the pin assignments of the DB44 interface.

Table 2 Pin assignments of the DB44 interface

Front View Pin Usage Pin Usage

38 Receives the 1st channel of 34 Receives the 5th channel of

signals (R1). signals (R5).
23 19
37 Receives the 2nd channel of 33 Receives the 6th channel of
signals (R2). signals (R6).
22 18
36 Receives the 3rd channel of 32 Receives the 7th channel of
signals (R3). signals (R7).
21 17
35 Receives the 4th channel of 31 Receives the 8th channel of
signals (R4). signals (R8).
20 16
15 Transmits the 1st channel of 11 Transmits the 5th channel of
signals (T1). signals (T5).
30 26
14 Transmits the 2nd channel of 10 Transmits the 6th channel of
signals (T2). signals (T6).
29 25
13 Transmits the 3rd channel of 9 Transmits the 7th channel of
signals (T3). signals (T7).
28 24
12 Transmits the 4th channel of 8 Transmits the 8th channel of
signals (T4). signals (T8).
27 7

Parent topic: D75S

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 252/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

12.14 D34S
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the D34S (6xE3/T3
switching access board).

Application
The D34S is a PDH interface switching board. The D34S can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive
signals for the PDH processing board. In addition, when the corresponding PDH processing board is configured with the TPS
protection, the interface switching board is required to perform the TPS protection.

Functions and Features

The D34S receives and transmits 6xE3/T3 electrical signals. The D34S must work with the PD3 or PQ3.

Front Panel
The front panel of the D34S has interfaces and a bar code.

Parent topic: PDH Boards

12.14.1 Application
The D34S is a PDH interface switching board. The D34S can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive signals
for the PDH processing board. In addition, when the corresponding PDH processing board is configured with the TPS protection, the
interface switching board is required to perform the TPS protection.

Parent topic: D34S

12.14.2 Functions and Features

The D34S receives and transmits 6xE3/T3 electrical signals. The D34S must work with the PD3 or PQ3.

Parent topic: D34S

12.14.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the D34S has interfaces and a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the D34S.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 253/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the D34S

erfaces
The front panel of the D34S has six pairs of electrical interfaces.
Table 1 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the D34S.

Table 1 Interfaces of the D34S

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN1–IN6 SMB Receives the 1st to the 6th channels of E3/T3 electrical signals.
OUT1–OUT6 SMB Transmits the 1st to the 6th channels of E3/T3 electrical signals.

Parent topic: D34S

12.15 C34S
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the C34S (3xE3/T3
switching access board).

Application
The C34S is a PDH interface switching board. The C34S can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive
signals for the PDH processing board. In addition, when the corresponding PDH processing board is configured with the TPS
protection, the interface switching board is required to perform the TPS protection.

Functions and Features

The C34S receives and transmits 3xE3/T3 electrical signals. The C34S must work with the PL3.

Front Panel
The front panel of the C34S has interfaces and a bar code.

Parent topic: PDH Boards

12.15.1 Application
The C34S is a PDH interface switching board. The C34S can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive signals
for the PDH processing board. In addition, when the corresponding PDH processing board is configured with the TPS protection, the
interface switching board is required to perform the TPS protection.
localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 254/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Parent topic: C34S

12.15.2 Functions and Features

The C34S receives and transmits 3xE3/T3 electrical signals. The C34S must work with the PL3.

Parent topic: C34S

12.15.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the C34S has interfaces and a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the C34S.
Figure 1 Front panel of the C34S

erfaces
The front panel of the C34S has three pairs of electrical interfaces.
Table 1 describes the type and usage of the interface of the C34S.

Table 1 Interfaces of the C34S

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN1–IN3 SMB Receives the 1st to the 3rd channels of E3/T3 electrical signals.
OUT1–OUT3 SMB Transmits the 1st to the 3rd channels of E3/T3 electrical signals.

Parent topic: C34S

12.16 MU04
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the MU04 (4xE4/STM-
1 electrical interface board).

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 255/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Application
The MU04 is an E4/STM-1 electrical interface board. The MU04 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and
receive signals for the E4/STM-1 electrical processing board.

Functions and Features

The MU04 receives and transmits 4xE4/STM-1 electrical signals. The MU04 must work with the SPQ4.

Front Panel
The front panel of the MU04 has interfaces and a bar code.

Parent topic: PDH Boards

12.16.1 Application
The MU04 is an E4/STM-1 electrical interface board. The MU04 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive
signals for the E4/STM-1 electrical processing board.

Parent topic: MU04

12.16.2 Functions and Features

The MU04 receives and transmits 4xE4/STM-1 electrical signals. The MU04 must work with the SPQ4.

Parent topic: MU04

12.16.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the MU04 has interfaces and a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the MU04.

Figure 1 Front panel of the MU04

erfaces
localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 256/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
The front panel of the MU04 has four pairs of electrical interfaces.
Table 1 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the MU04.

Table 1 Interfaces of the MU04

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN1–IN4 SMB Receives the 1st to the 4th channels of E4/STM-1 electrical signals.
OUT1–OUT4 SMB Transmits the 1st to the 4th channels of E4/STM-1 electrical signals.

Parent topic: MU04

12.17 DM12
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the DM12 (DDN
service interface board).

Application of DM12
The DM12 is a service interface board. The DM12 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive electrical
signals of the DDN, sub-rate, and framed E1services.

Functions and Features of DM12

The DM12 works with the N1DX1 to receive and transmit four channels of Nx64 kbit/s electrical signals/four channels of sub–rate
electrical signals, and eight channels of framed E1 electrical signals. The DM12 works with the N3DX1 to receive and transmit four
channels of Nx64 kbit/s electrical signals/four channels of sub–rate electrical signals, eight channels of G.703 64 kbit/s codirectional
electrical signals, and eight channels of framed E1 electrical [Link] DM12 VER.C works with the N3DX1 to implement E1 DCN,
which can be configured through DIP switches.

Front Panel of DM12

The front panel of the DM12 has interfaces and a bar code.

Parent topic: PDH Boards

12.17.1 Application of DM12

The DM12 is a service interface board. The DM12 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive electrical
signals of the DDN, sub-rate, and framed E1services.

Parent topic: DM12

12.17.2 Functions and Features of DM12

The DM12 works with the N1DX1 to receive and transmit four channels of Nx64 kbit/s electrical signals/four channels of sub–rate
electrical signals, and eight channels of framed E1 electrical signals. The DM12 works with the N3DX1 to receive and transmit four
channels of Nx64 kbit/s electrical signals/four channels of sub–rate electrical signals, eight channels of G.703 64 kbit/s codirectional
electrical signals, and eight channels of framed E1 electrical [Link] DM12 VER.C works with the N3DX1 to implement E1 DCN, which
can be configured through DIP switches.

Parent topic: DM12

12.17.3 Front Panel of DM12

The front panel of the DM12 has interfaces and a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 and Figure 2 shows the appearance of the front panel of the DM12.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 257/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the DM12 VER.A and VER.B

Figure 2 Front panel of the DM12 VER.C

icators
The following table describes the indicator status meanings for the DM12 VER.C.

Table 1 Mapping between DIP switches and indicator status

DIP Switch (SW1) LED Status Meaning E1 DCN Status Indicator
1 2

ON ON All LEDs are off. E1 DCN is disabled.

OFF ON LED1-2 is on, and other LEDs E1 DCN is enabled on ports 1 and 2.
are off.
ON OFF LED1-4 is on, and other LEDs E1 DCN is enabled on ports 1 to 4.
are off.
NOTE:

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 258/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

DIP Switch (SW1) LED Status Meaning E1 DCN Status Indicator

1 2
In this example, LED1-4 is on, indicating that E1 DCN is
OFF OFF LED1-8 is on, and other LEDs E1 DCN is enabled on ports 1 to 8. enabled for ports 1-4.
are off.

erfaces
The front panel of the DM12 has DB44 and DB28 interfaces. Table 2 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the DM12.

Table 2 Interfaces of the DM12

Interface Type of Interface Usage

E1 (1-8) DB44 Transmits/Receives eight channels of framed E1 or eight channels of G.703 64

kbit/s codirectional signals.

NOTE:
Only 120-ohm E1 cables can transmit G.703 64 kbit/s codirectional signals.

DDN1-DDN4 DB28 Transmits/Receives the 1st to the 4th channels of Nx64 kbit/s or one to four
channels of sub-rate or one to four channels of sub-rate signals.

Table 3 provides the pin assignments of the DB44 interface.

Table 3 Pin assignments of the DB44 interface

Front View Pin Core Usage Pin Core Usage

30 White Transmits the 1st 8 Green Transmits the 8th

channel of signals channel of signals
15 Blue (T1). 7 Red (T8).
29 White Transmits the 2nd 36 Green Receives the 3rd
channel of signals channel of signals
14 Orange (T2). 21 White (R3).
28 White Transmits the 3rd 35 Brown Receives the 4th
channel of signals channel of signals
13 Green (T3). 20 White (R4).
27 White Transmits the 4th 34 Gray Receives the 5th
channel of signals channel of signals
12 Brown (T4). 19 White (R5).
26 White Transmits the 5th 33 Blue Receives the 6th
channel of signals channel of signals
11 Gray (T5). 18 Red (R6).
25 Red Transmits the 6th 32 Orange Receives the 7th
channel of signals channel of signals
10 Blue (T6). 17 Red (R7).
24 Red Transmits the 7th 31 Green Receives the 8th
channel of signals channel of signals
9 Orange (T7). 16 Red (R8).
38 Blue Receives the 1st 44-39 and 6- - Grounding
channel of signals 1
23 White (R1).
37 Orange Receives the 2nd
channel of signals
22 White (R2).

Table 4 provides the pin assignments of the DB28 interface.

Table 4 Pin assignments of the DB28 interface

Front View Pin Usage Pin Usage

1 Transmits data signals. 19 Receives data signals.

2 20
3 Transmits clock signals. 21 Grounding
4 22 Receives the loopback control signal.
11 Detects the carrier. 23 Permits the transmission.
12 24
13 Requests for transmission. 25 Receives the DCE ready signal.
14 26
15 Receives the clock to be 27 Transmits the DTE ready signal.
used in the transmit
16 28
direction from the external
equipment.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 259/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Front View 17
Pin Receives
Usage clock signals. -Pin -Usage
18

Parent topic: DM12

12.18 TSB4
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the TSB4 (4-channel
electrical interface protection switching board).

Application
The TSB4 is a PDH electrical interface protection switching board. The TSB4 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to
realize the TPS protection on the PDH board.

Functions and Features

The TSB4 is used to provide the TPS protection.

Front Panel
The front panel of the TSB4 has a bar code.

Parent topic: PDH Boards

12.18.1 Application
The TSB4 is a PDH electrical interface protection switching board. The TSB4 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to realize
the TPS protection on the PDH board.

Parent topic: TSB4

12.18.2 Functions and Features

The TSB4 is used to provide the TPS protection.
The TSB4 can work with the MU04, C34S, or EU04 to realize the TPS protection on different processing boards.

The TSB4 can work with the MU04 to realize the TPS protection on the SPQ4.
The TSB4 can work with the C34S to realize the TPS protection on the PL3.
The TSB4 can work with the EU04 to realize the TPS protection on the SEP.

Parent topic: TSB4

12.18.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the TSB4 has a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the TSB4.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 260/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the TSB4

Parent topic: TSB4

12.19 TSB8
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the TSB8 (8-channel
electrical interface protection switching board).

Application
The TSB8 is a PDH electrical interface protection switching board. The TSB8 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to
realize the TPS protection on the PDH board.

Functions and Features

The TSB8 is used to provide the TPS protection.

Front Panel
The front panel of the TSB8 has a bar code.

Parent topic: PDH Boards

12.19.1 Application
The TSB8 is a PDH electrical interface protection switching board. The TSB8 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to realize
the TPS protection on the PDH board.

Parent topic: TSB8

12.19.2 Functions and Features

The TSB8 is used to provide the TPS protection.
The TSB8 can work with the C34S, EU04, EU08, ETS8, MU04 and D34S to realize the TPS protection on different processing boards.

The TSB8 can work with the MU04 to realize the TPS protection on the SPQ4.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 261/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
The TSB8 can work with the C34S to realize the TPS protection on the PL3.
The TSB8 can work with the D34S to realize the TPS protection on the PD3.
The TSB8 can work with the D34S to realize the TPS protection on the PQ3.
The TSB8 can work with the EU04 to realize the TPS protection on the SEP1.
The TSB8 can work with the EU08 to realize the TPS protection on the SLH1/SEP1.
The TSB8 can work with the ETS8 to realize the TPS protection on the EFS0.
The TSB8 can work with the ETS8 to realize the TPS protection on the EFS0A.

Parent topic: TSB8

12.19.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the TSB8 has a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the TSB8.

Figure 1 Front panel of the TSB8

Parent topic: TSB8

13 EoS Boards
The EoS boards include the interface boards and processing boards for FE and GE services.

EFT8
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the EFT8
(8xFE/16xFE transparent transmission board).

EFT8A
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the EFT8A (8xFE
transparent transmission board).

EGT2
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the EGT2 (2xGE

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 262/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
transparent transmission board).

EFS0
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the EFS0 (8xFE
switching and processing board).

EFS0A
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the EFS0A
(16xFE switching and processing board).

EFS4
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the EFS4 (4xFE
switching and processing board).

EGS2
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the EGS2 (2xGE
switching and processing board).

EMS2
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the EMS2 (2xGE
and 16xFE switching and processing board).

EMS4
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the EMS4 (4xGE
and 16xFE switching and processing board).

EGS4
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the EGS4 (4xGE
switching and processing board).

EAS2
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the EAS2 (2-
port 10xGE switching and processing board).

EFF8
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the EFF8
(8x100M Ethernet optical interface board).

EFF8A
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the EFF8A
(8x100M Ethernet optical interface board).

ETF8
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the ETF8
(8x100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board).

ETF8A
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the ETF8A
(8x100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board).

ETS8
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the ETS8
(8x10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface switching board).

Parent topic: Description of Common Hardware

13.1 EFT8
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the EFT8 (8xFE/16xFE
transparent transmission board).

Application
The EFT8 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and converge Ethernet services.

Functions and Features

EFT8 boards support the transparent transmission of Ethernet services, LCAS function, and test frames.

Front Panel
The front panel of the EFT8 has indicators, interfaces, and a bar code.

Parent topic: EoS Boards

13.1.1 Application
localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 263/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
The EFT8 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and converge Ethernet services.

shows the typical networking and application of the Ethernet transparent transmission board. The Ethernet transparent
Figure 1
transmission board realizes point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernet services. The Ethernet transparent transmission board
provides the following functions by using the interfaces on the board: data receipt, data transmission, data mapping, and traffic control.
In addition, the Ethernet transparent transmission board performs port-based point-to-point transparent transmission,
encapsulation/decapsulation, overhead bytes and pointers processing, virtual concatenation, SDH mapping/demapping, and LCAS
function.

Figure 1 Networking and application of the Ethernet transparent transmission board

Parent topic: EFT8

13.1.2 Functions and Features

EFT8 boards support the transparent transmission of Ethernet services, LCAS function, and test frames.
Table 1 lists the functions and features supported by EFT8 boards.

Table 1 Functions and features supported by EFT8 boards

Function and Description
Feature

Basic functions Transparently transmits 8xFE or 16xFE services.

Port types Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals. The electrical ports comply with IEEE 802.3u.
Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when working with an ETF8 board. The electrical ports comply with IEEE 802.3u.
Supports 100BASE-FX/100BASE-LX signals when working with an EFF8 board. The optical ports comply with IEEE 802.3u.

Functions when Provides 16 electrical ports to receive/transmit Ethernet signals when working with an ETF8 board.
being used
Provides 8 optical ports and 8 electrical ports to receive/transmit Ethernet signals when working with an EFF8 board.
with an
interface board
Port Working modes 100M full-duplex, 10M full-duplex, auto-negotiation
characteristics
Traffic control Auto-negotiation mode Not supported
mode at ports
Non-autonegotiation mode Supported
Query/Setting of Supported
port status
Query of port Supported
types
Setting of optical Not supported
power thresholds
Pluggable optical Not supported
module
Service EPL service Supports PORT-based transparent transmission.
categories
Service Formats of IEEE 802.3 Supported
specifications Ethernet data
Ethernet II Supported
frames
IEEE 802.1q TAG Supported

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 264/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Description

Feature

Frame length N1EFT8 boards support the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes to 1535 bytes.
range Ports 1-4 and 9-12 on the board support a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 6144 bytes, whereas
ports 5-8 and 13-16 support a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes.
N2EFT8 boards support the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes.
N2EFT8 boards support a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes.

Concatenation Supports VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-Xv (X ≤ 63), and VC-3-Xv (X ≤ 3) granularities.

granularities
Encapsulation HDLC Supported
formats
LAPS Supported
GFP-F Supported
MPLS technology Not supported
VLAN technology Supports VLAN transparent transmission.
Maximum uplink The maximum uplink bandwidth is 1.25 Gbit/s. An EFT8 board can adapt to the bandwidth of its slot.
bandwidth
Maximum bound 24xVC-3, or 126xVC-12 + 18xVC-3
bandwidth
VCTRUNK
Number of supported VCTRUNKs: 16
specifications
Configuration principles are as follows:
Each VC channel can be bound only to one VCTRUNK.
VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK8 must be bound when a board is housed in a slot providing 622M bit/s
bandwidth.
A VCTRUNK can be bound with the VC-12 path or VC-3 path at one time. A VCTRUNK should not be
bound with VC-12 and VC-3 paths at the same time.
A VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of three VC-3s or a maximum of 63 VC-12s.
VCTRUNK 1-VCTRUNK 8 can be bound with VC-3s 1-12 or VC-12s 1-63.
VCTRUNK 9-VCTRUNK 16 can be bound with VC-3s 13-24 or VC-12s 64-126.
A VCTRUNK cannot be bound with VC-12s numbered 1-63 and VC-3s numbered 10-12 at the same
time. In addition, a VCTRUNK cannot be bound with VC-12s numbered 64-126 and VC-3s numbered
22-24 at the same time.
VC-4s numbered 4 and 8 support the binding of VC-3 and VC-12 paths. The other VC-4s support the
binding of VC-3 paths only.
In the case of the configuration of cross-connection, VC-12s numbered 1–63 should be configured into
the fourth VC-4, and VC-12s numbered 64–126 should be configured into the eighth VC-4.

Protection TPS Not supported

schemes LCAS Supports LCAS, which dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in
compliance with ITU-T G.7042.
LPT Supports P2P LPT, which comply with ITU-T G.7042.
LAG Not supported
Clock Synchronous Not supported
synchronization Ethernet
IEEE 1588v2 Not supported
Maintenance ETH OAM N1EFT8 boards do not support the ETH OAM function.
features N2EFT8 boards support CC, LB, LT. These functions comply with IEEE 802.1ag.
N2EFT8 boards support OAM auto-discovery, link performance detection, fault detection, remote loopback and
selfloop test. These functions comply with IEEE 802.3ah.
Test Frame Supports test frames in GFP bearer mode.
Response to ping Not supported
Port Mirroring Not supported
Loopback PHY layer at Ethernet ports Supports inloops.
capability
MAC layer at Ethernet ports Supports inloops.
VC-4 level Not supported
VC-3 level Supports inloops and outloops.
VC-12 level Not supported
RMON Supports Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level.
Warm resets Supported (Warm resets do not affect services.)
Cold resets Supported
Alarms and Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
performance equipment.
events

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 265/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Description

Feature

QoS Not supported

Hub/Spoke Not supported
Traffic control Supports the FE port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.

NOTE:
Only EPL services support port-based traffic control.

Parent topic: EFT8

13.1.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the EFT8 has indicators, interfaces, and a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EFT8.

Figure 1 Front panel of the EFT8

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Connection status indicator (LINK) – one color (green)
Data receiving and transmission indicator (ACT) – one color (orange)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the EFT8 has eight FE interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the EFT8. For information
about the cables connected to the interfaces, see Straight-Through Cable and Crossover Cable.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 266/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Table 1 Interfaces of the EFT8
Interface Type of Interface Usage

FE1 RJ-45 Transmits and receives 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals.

FE2 RJ-45 Transmits and receives 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals.
FE3 RJ-45 Transmits and receives 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals.
FE4 RJ-45 Transmits and receives 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals.
FE5 RJ-45 Transmits and receives 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals.
FE6 RJ-45 Transmits and receives 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals.
FE7 RJ-45 Transmits and receives 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals.
FE8 RJ-45 Transmits and receives 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals.

Table 2 describes the pins of the RJ45 connector.

Table 2 Pins of the RJ45 connector

Pin Description

1 Positive data transmit end

2 Negative data transmit end
3 Positive data receive end
4 Grounding
5 Grounding
6 Negative data receive end
7 Grounding
8 Grounding

Parent topic: EFT8

13.2 EFT8A
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the EFT8A (8xFE
transparent transmission board).

Application
The EFT8A is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and converge Ethernet services.

Functions and Features

EFT8A boards support the transparent transmission of Ethernet services, LCAS function, and test frames.

Front Panel
The front panel of the EFT8A has indicators, interfaces, and a bar code.

Parent topic: EoS Boards

13.2.1 Application
The EFT8A is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and converge Ethernet services.

shows the typical networking and application of the Ethernet transparent transmission board. The Ethernet transparent
Figure 1
transmission board realizes point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernet services. The Ethernet transparent transmission board
provides the following functions by using the interfaces on the board: data receipt, data transmission, data mapping, and traffic control.
In addition, the Ethernet transparent transmission board performs port-based point-to-point transparent transmission,
encapsulation/decapsulation, overhead bytes and pointers processing, virtual concatenation, SDH mapping/demapping, and LCAS
function.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 267/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Networking and application of the Ethernet transparent transmission board

Parent topic: EFT8A

13.2.2 Functions and Features

EFT8A boards support the transparent transmission of Ethernet services, LCAS function, and test frames.
Table 1 lists the functions and features supported by EFT8A boards.

Table 1 Functions and features supported by EFT8A boards

Function and Description
Feature

Basic functions Transparently transmits 8xFE services.

Port types Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals.
Electrical ports comply with IEEE 802.3u.

Functions when Provides ports on the front panel to receive/transmit 8xFE signals.
being used
with an
interface board
Port Working modes 100M full-duplex, 10M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation
characteristics
Traffic control Auto-negotiation mode Not supported
mode at ports
Non-autonegotiation mode Supported
Query/Setting of Supported
port status
Query of port Supported
types
Setting of optical Not supported
power thresholds
Pluggable optical Not supported
module
Service EPL service Supports PORT-based transparent transmission.
categories
Service Formats of IEEE 802.3 Supported
specifications Ethernet data
Ethernet II Supported
frames
IEEE 802.1q TAG Supported
Frame length EFT8A boards support the setting of the method used for processing frames with less than 64 bytes or
range error frames.
N1EFT8A boards support the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes to 1535 bytes.
The first four ports support a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 6144 bytes, whereas the last four
ports support a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes.
N2EFT8A boards support the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes.
N2EFT8A boards support a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes.

Concatenation Supports VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-Xv (X ≤ 63), and VC-3-Xv (X ≤ 3) granularities.

granularities
Encapsulation HDLC Supported

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 268/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and formats

Description
Feature

LAPS Supported
GFP-F Supported
MPLS technology Not supported
VLAN technology Supports VLAN transparent transmission.
Maximum uplink 622 Mbit/s
bandwidth
Maximum bound 12xVC-3, or 63xVC-12 + 9xVC-3
bandwidth
VCTRUNK
Number of supported VCTRUNKs: 8
specifications
Configuration principles are as follows:
Each VC channel can be bound only to one VCTRUNK.
A VCTRUNK can be bound with the VC-12 path or VC-3 path at one time. A VCTRUNK should not be
bound with VC-12 and VC-3 paths at the same time.
A VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of three VC-3s or a maximum of 63 VC-12s.
A VCTRUNK cannot be bound with VC-12s numbered 1-63 and VC-3s numbered 10-12 at the same
time.
VC-4 numbered 4 supports the binding of VC-3 and VC-12 paths. The other VC-4s support the binding
of VC-3 paths only.
VCTRUNK 1–VCTRUNK 8 can be bound with VC-3s numbered 1–12 or VC-12s numbered 1–63.

Protection TPS Not supported

schemes LCAS Supports LCAS, which dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in
compliance with ITU-T G.7042.
LPT Supports P2P LPT in compliance with ITU-T G.7042.
LAG Not supported
Clock Synchronous Not supported
synchronization Ethernet
IEEE 1588v2 Not supported
Maintenance ETH OAM Not supported by N1EFT8A boards
features N2EFT8A boards support CC, LB, and LT. These functions comply with IEEE 802.1ag.
N2EFT8A boards support OAM auto-discovery, link performance monitoring, fault detection, remote loopback
tests, and self-loop tests. These functions comply with IEEE 802.3ah.
Test Frame Supports test frames in GFP bearer mode.
Response to ping Not supported
Port Mirroring Not supported
Loopback PHY layer at Ethernet ports Supports inloops.
capability
MAC layer at Ethernet ports Supports inloops.
VC-4 level Not supported
VC-3 level Supports inloops and outloops.
VC-12 level Not supported
RMON Supports Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level.
Warm resets Supported (Warm resets do not affect services.)
Cold resets Supported
Alarms and Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
performance equipment.
events
QoS Not supported
Hub/Spoke Not supported
Traffic control Supports the FE port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.

NOTE:
Only EPL services support port-based traffic control.

Parent topic: EFT8A

13.2.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the EFT8A has indicators, interfaces, and a bar code.
localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 269/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
gram of the Front Panel
Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EFT8A.

Figure 1 Front panel of the EFT8A

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Connection status indicator (LINK) – one color (green)
Data receiving and transmission indicator (ACT) – one color (orange)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the EFT8A has eight FE interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the EFT8A. For information
about the cables connected to the interfaces, see Straight-Through Cable and Crossover Cable.

Table 1 Interfaces of the EFT8A

Interface Type of Interface Usage

FE1 RJ-45 Transmits and receives 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals.

FE2 RJ-45 Transmits and receives 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals.
FE3 RJ-45 Transmits and receives 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals.
FE4 RJ-45 Transmits and receives 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals.
FE5 RJ-45 Transmits and receives 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals.
FE6 RJ-45 Transmits and receives 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals.
FE7 RJ-45 Transmits and receives 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals.
FE8 RJ-45 Transmits and receives 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals.

Table 2 describes the pins of the RJ45 connector.

Table 2 Pins of the RJ45 connector

Pin Description

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 270/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Pin Description

1 Positive data transmit end

2 Negative data transmit end
3 Positive data receive end
4 Grounding
5 Grounding
6 Negative data receive end
7 Grounding
8 Grounding

Parent topic: EFT8A

13.3 EGT2
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the EGT2 (2xGE
transparent transmission board).

Application
The EGT2 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and converge Ethernet services.

Functions and Features

EGT2 boards support the transparent transmission of Ethernet services, LCAS function, and test frames.

Front Panel
The front panel of the EGT2 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: EoS Boards

13.3.1 Application
The EGT2 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and converge Ethernet services.

shows the typical networking and application of the Ethernet transparent transmission board. The Ethernet transparent
Figure 1
transmission board realizes point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernet services. The Ethernet transparent transmission board
provides the following functions by using the interfaces on the board: data receipt, data transmission, data mapping, and traffic control.
In addition, the Ethernet transparent transmission board performs port-based point-to-point transparent transmission,
encapsulation/decapsulation, overhead bytes and pointers processing, virtual concatenation, SDH mapping/demapping, and LCAS
function.

Figure 1 Networking and application of the Ethernet transparent transmission board

Parent topic: EGT2

13.3.2 Functions and Features

EGT2 boards support the transparent transmission of Ethernet services, LCAS function, and test frames.
localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 271/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Table 1 lists the functions and features supported by EGT2 boards.

Table 1 Functions and features supported by EGT2 boards

Function and Description
Feature

Basic functions Transparently transmits 2xGE services.

Port types EGT2 boards support 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX Ethernet optical ports. The optical ports support the auto-negotiation
function in compliance with IEEE 802.3z. The optical ports use SFP optical modules and support hot swapping. When the
multi-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission distance is 550 m. When the single-mode optical fiber is used,
the maximum transmission distance is 10 km. The optical modules that can meet different requirements for the
transmission distance such as 40 km and 80 km can also be used.
N2EGT2 boards also support 1000BASE-T Ethernet electrical ports. The electrical ports support the 1000M full-duplex
working mode. N2EGT2 boards use SFP electrical ports and support hot swapping. The maximum transmission distance is
100 m.

Functions when Provides ports on the front panel.

being used with
an interface
board
Port Working modes 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation
characteristics
Traffic control Auto-negotiation mode Not supported
mode at ports
Non-autonegotiation mode Supported
Query/Setting of Supported
port status
Query of port Supported
types
Setting of optical Not supported
power thresholds
Pluggable optical Supports SFP optical modules.
module
EPL service Supports PORT-based transparent transmission.
Service Formats of IEEE 802.3 Supported
specifications Ethernet data
Ethernet II Supported
frames
IEEE 802.1q TAG Supported
Frame length Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes.
range
Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes.

Concatenation Supports VC-3, VC-4, VC-3-Xv (X ≤ 24), and VC-4-Xv (X ≤ 8) granularities.

granularities
Encapsulation HDLC Supported
formats
LAPS Supported
GFP-F Supported
MPLS technology Not supported
VLAN technology Supports VLAN transparent transmission.
Maximum uplink The maximum uplink bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s. An EGT2 board can adapt to the bandwidth of its slot.
bandwidth
Maximum bound 16xVC-4, or 48xVC-3
bandwidth
VCTRUNK
Number of supported VCTRUNKs: 2
specifications
Configuration principles are as follows:
Each VC channel can be bound only to one VCTRUNK.
VCTRUNK1 must be bound when a board is housed in a slot providing 1.25G bit/s bandwidth.
A VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of eight VC-4s or a maximum of 24 VC-3s. A VCTRUNK can
be bound with VC-4s numbered 1-16 or VC-3s numbered 1-48.
For an N1EGT2 board, the virtual concatenation modes of the two VCTRUNKs of the board should be
the same. That is, the two VCTRUNKs should be of the VC-4 virtual concatenation or of the VC-3 virtual
concatenation. This restriction does not apply to an N2EGT2 board.

Protection TPS Not supported

schemes LCAS Supports LCAS, which dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in
compliance with ITU-T G.7042.
LPT Supports P2P LPT in compliance with ITU-T G.7042.
LAG Not supported

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 272/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Description

Feature

Synchronization Synchronous Not supported

Ethernet
IEEE 1588v2 Not supported
Maintenance ETH OAM N1EGT2 boards do not support the ETH OAM function.
features
N2EGT2 boards support CC, LB test, and LT test. These functions comply with IEEE 802.1ag.

Test Frame Supports test frames in GFP bearer mode.

Response to ping Not supported
Port Mirroring Not supported
Loopback PHY layer at Ethernet ports Supports inloops.
capability
MAC layer at Ethernet ports Supports inloops.
VC-4 level Not supported
VC-3 level Not supported
VC-12 level Not supported
RMON Supports Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level.
Warm resets Supported (Warm resets do not affect services.)
Cold resets Supported
Alarms and Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
performance equipment.
events
QoS Not supported
Hub/Spoke Not supported
Traffic control Supports the GE port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.

NOTE:
Only EPL services support port-based traffic control.

Parent topic: EGT2

13.3.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the EGT2 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the N1EGT2/N2EGT2 that has the GE optical interface.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 273/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the N1EGT2/N2EGT2 that has the GE optical interface

The N2EGT2 can also be installed with the GE electrical interface. Figure 2 shows the appearance of the front panel of the N2EGT2 that has
the GE electrical interface.

Figure 2 Front panel of the N2EGT2 that has the GE electrical interface

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 274/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Connection status indicator (LINK) – one color (green)
Data receiving and transmission indicator (ACT) – one color (orange)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the N1EGT2/N2EGT2 has two GE optical interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the
N1EGT2/N2EGT2.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the N1EGT2/N2EGT2

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN1/OUT1 LC (swappable) Transmits and receives 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX signals.

IN2/OUT2 LC (swappable) Transmits and receives 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX signals.

The two GE electrical interfaces of the N2EGT2 are of the same type and have the same usage. Table 2 describes the types and usage of the
electrical interfaces of the N2EGT2.

Table 2 Electrical interfaces of the N2EGT2

Interface Type of Interface Usage

GE RJ-45 (swappable) Transmits and receives 1000BASE-T signals.

Table 3 provides the pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface of the N2EGT2.

Table 3 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface of the N2EGT2

Pin Description

1 BI_DA+
2 BI_DA–
3 BI_DB+
4 BI_DC+
5 BI_DC–
6 BI_DB–
7 BI_DD+
8 BI_DD–

Parent topic: EGT2

13.4 EFS0
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the EFS0 (8xFE
switching and processing board).

Application
The EFS0 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services.

Functions and Features

EFS0 boards support the Layer 2 switching, MPLS, and broadcast functions.

Front Panel
The front panel of the EFS0 has indicators and a bar code.

Board Protection
The EFS0 supports the 1:1 TPS protection.

Parent topic: EoS Boards

13.4.1 Application
The EFS0 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 275/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1shows the typical networking and application of the Ethernet switching board. the Ethernet switching board accesses and
converges Ethernet services, and provides the Ethernet data with the following data features: Layer 2 switching, port isolation, flow
classification, traffic control, VLAN management, and priority configuration. In addition, the Ethernet switching board performs
encapsulation/decapsulation, virtual concatenation, and SDH mapping/demapping for data. The Ethernet switching board can be
interconnected with the bandwidth access equipment and the data communication equipment at the same time, thus to provide a
network-level solution.

Figure 1 Networking and application of the Ethernet switching board

Parent topic: EFS0

13.4.2 Functions and Features

EFS0 boards support the Layer 2 switching, MPLS, and broadcast functions.
Table 1 lists the functions and features supported by EFS0 boards.

Table 1 Functions and features supported by EFS0 boards

Function and Feature Description

Basic functions Processes 8xFE services.

Port types An EFS0 board supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when working with an ETF8 board. The electrical ports comply
with IEEE 802.3u.
An EFS0 board supports 100BASE-FX/LX/VX/ZX signals when working with an EFF8 board. The optical ports comply
with IEEE 802.3u.
An N5EFS0 board supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when working with an ETF8A board. The electrical ports
comply with IEEE 802.3u.
An N5EFS0 board supports 100BASE-FX/LX signals when working with an EFF8A board. The optical ports comply with
IEEE 802.3u.

Functions when An EFS0 board provides eight electrical ports to receive/transmit FE signals when working with an ETF8 board.
being used with an
An EFS0 board provides eight optical ports to receive/transmit FE signals when working with an EFF8 board.
interface board
An EFS0 board provides the TPS protection for FE signals received/transmitted through eight electrical ports when
working with an ETS8 board and a TSB8 board.
An N5EFS0 board provides eight electrical ports to receive/transmit FE signals when working with an ETF8A board.
An N5EFS0 board provides eight optical ports to receive/transmit FE signals when working with an EFF8A board.

Port characteristics Working modes FE electrical port: auto-negotiation, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, 10M full-duplex, and 10M
half-duplex
FE optical port: 100M full-duplex
An N5EFS0 board supports only the auto-negotiation and 100M full-duplex working mode when
working with an EFF8A board.

Traffic control Auto-negotiation mode Supported (Not supported by FE optical ports)

mode at ports
Non-autonegotiation mode Supported (not supported if an EFS0 board works
with an EFF8 board)
Query/Setting of Supported
port status
Query of port Supported
types

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 276/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature Description

Setting of optical Not supported

power
thresholds
Pluggable Not supported
optical module
Service categories EPL service Supports PORT-based transparent transmission.
EVPL service Supports PORT-shared EVPL services.
Supports VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services.
The services are isolated by VLAN tags.
The services are isolated by MPLS tags.
Supports a maximum of 4096 links.

EPLAN service N4EFS0/N5EFS0 boards support the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge.
Supports the blacklist that can contain 2K records and also the static MAC address table that can
contain 2K records. The sum of the number of records in the blacklist and the number of addresses
in the static MAC address table must not exceed 2K. The blacklist function of N5EFS0 boards
supports verification of destination MAC addresses only.
Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The capacity of the MAC address table is
16K. The aging time of the MAC address can be set and queried.
Supports the configuration of static MAC routes.
N4EFS0/N5EFS0 boards support the query of dynamic MAC addresses.
The maximum number of supported VBs is 16. The maximum number of logical ports for each VB is
30.
Queries the number of actually learned MAC addresses based on VB+VLAN or VB+LP.

EVPLAN services Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN.

The maximum number of supported VBs is 16. The maximum number of logical ports for each VB is
30.
Supports the setting of a maximum of 4096 VLAN services.
Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1q virtual bridge.

Service Formats of IEEE 802.3 Supported

specifications Ethernet data
Ethernet II Supported
frames
IEEE 802.1 q/p Supported
Frame length Supports the setting of the frame length to a value ranging from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes.
range
Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes.

Concatenation Supports VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-Xv (X ≤ 63), and VC-3-Xv (X ≤ 12) granularities.
granularities
Encapsulation HDLC Not supported
formats
LAPS Not supported
GFP-F Supported
MPLS Supports the MPLS.
technology
VLAN Supports a total number of 4094 VLANs, which comply with IEEE 802.1q/p.
technology
Maximum uplink The maximum uplink bandwidth of an N1EFS0 board is 622 Mbit/s.
bandwidth
The maximum uplink bandwidth of an N2EFS0/N4EFS0/N5EFS0 board is 1.25 Gbit/s.
An EFS0 board can adapt to the bandwidth of its slot.

Maximum bound N1EFS0: 12xVC-3, or 63xVC-12 + 9xVC-3

bandwidth N2EFS0/N4EFS0/N5EFS0: 24xVC-3, or 126xVC-12 + 18xVC-3

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 277/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature Description

VCTRUNK
The number of supported VCTRUNKs is as follows:
specifications
The number of VCTRUNKs supported by an N1EFS0 board is 12.
The number of VCTRUNKs supported by an N2EFS0/N4EFS0/N5EFS0 board is 24.
Configuration principles are as follows:
Each VC channel can be bound only to one VCTRUNK.
VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK12 must be bound when a board is housed in a slot providing 622M bit/s
bandwidth of N2EFS0/N4EFS0/N5EFS0 board.
VCTRUNK 1-VCTRUNK 12 can be bound only with lower order paths in VC-4s numbered 1-4.
VCTRUNK 13-VCTRUNK 24 can be bound only with lower order paths in VC-4s numbered 5-8.
VC-4s numbered 4 and 8 support the binding of VC-3 and VC-12 paths. The other VC-4s support
the binding of VC-3 paths only.
A VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of 12 VC-3s or 63 VC-12s.
A VCTRUNK can be bound with the VC-12 path or VC-3 path at one time. A VCTRUNK should not
be bound with VC-12 and VC-3 paths at the same time.

Protection schemes TPS Not supported by N1EFS0 boards

Supported by N2EFS0/N4EFS0/N5EFS0 boards
BPS Not supported
PPS Not supported
DLAG Not supported
LAG
N1EFS0 boards do not support link aggregation, but N2EFS0/N4EFS0/N5EFS0 boards support manual link
aggregation and the load sharing mode that comply with IEEE 802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX.
LCAS
Not supported by the N1EFS0/N2EFS0.
Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T
G.7042. This protection scheme is supported by the N4EFS0/N5EFS0.
LPT N1EFS0/N2EFS0 boards support P2P LPT. N4EFS0/N5EFS0 boards support P2P LPT and P2MP LPT. LPT
functions comply with Huawei proprietary protocol.
STP/RSTP Supports the broadcast packet suppression function and RSTP, which comply with IEEE 802.1w.
MSTP Not supported
Clock Synchronous Not supported
synchronization Ethernet
IEEE 1588v2 Not supported
Maintenance ETH OAM N1EFS0 and N2EFS0 boards do not support the ETH OAM function.
features
N4EFS0 and N5EFS0 boards support CC, LB tests, and LT tests in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag, and
OAM ping in compliance with Huawei proprietary protocol.
N4EFS0 and N5EFS0 boards support OAM auto-discovery, remote loopbacks, fault detection, and
link performance detection in compliance with IEEE 802.3ah, and selfloop detection in compliance
with Huawei proprietary protocol.

Test Frame
N1EFS0/N2EFS0 boards support test frames in Ethernet bearer mode.
N4EFS0/N5EFS0 boards support test frames in Ethernet/GFP bearer mode.

Response to Not supported

ping
Port Mirroring N1EFS0/N2EFS0/N4EFS0 boards do not support port mirroring. N5EFS0 boards support ingress mirroring.
Loopback PHY layer at Ethernet ports Supports inloops.
capability
MAC layer at Ethernet ports Supports inloops.
VC-4 level Not supported
VC-3 level N1EFS0/N2EFS0/N4EFS0 boards support inloops and
outloops. N5EFS0 boards do not support inloops or
outloops.
VC-12 level Not supported
RMON Supports Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level.
Warm resets N1EFS0/N2EFS0/N4EFS0/N5EFS0 boards support warm resets. If a warm reset is performed on an
N1EFS0/N2EFS0 board, traffic on the board is interrupted, whereas if a warm reset is performed on an
N4EFS0/N5EFS0 board, traffic on the board is not interrupted. If an N4EFS0/N5EFS0 board substitutes for an
N1EFS0/N2EFS0 board, traffic on the N4EFS0/N5EFS0 board is not interrupted.
Cold resets Supported
Alarms and Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
performance equipment.
events

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 278/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature Description

QoS
Supports the CAR. The granularity is 64 kbit/s.
N1EFS0 boards support the service classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN, or PORT+VLAN PRI.
N2EFS0, N4EFS0, and N5EFS0 boards support the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN, or
PORT+VLAN+VLAN PRI.
N5EFS0 boards support the traffic classification based on PORT+SVLAN.

IGMP Snooping Protocol Supported

enabling
Port aging time Supported
Fast leave Not supported by N1EFS0/N2EFS0/N4EFS0 boards
Supported by N5EFS0 boards

Discarding of Not supported by N1EFS0/N2EFS0/N4EFS0 boards

unknown Supported by N5EFS0 boards
broadcast
packets
Static broadcast Not supported
entry
Hub/Spoke Not supported by N1EFS0/N2EFS0 boards
Supported by N4EFS0/N5EFS0 boards

Traffic control Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.

NOTE:
Only EPL services support port-based traffic control.

Traffic monitoring N5EFS0 boards support port-based and VCTRUNK-based traffic monitoring.

Parent topic: EFS0

13.4.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the EFS0 has indicators and a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EFS0.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 279/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the EFS0

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the EFS0 has no interfaces. The interfaces are available on the ETF8 or on the EFF8. When the N5EFS0 is used with the
ETF8A or EFF8A, the interfaces are available on the ETF8A or on the EFF8A.

Parent topic: EFS0

13.4.4 Board Protection

The EFS0 supports the 1:1 TPS protection.

NOTE:
TPS trigger conditions on the OptiX OSN equipment are detected by the cross-connect and timing board. Therefore, TPS is successful even though the system
control board cannot be detected or is faulty.

Figure 1 shows the slot configuration for the 1:1 TPS protection for the EFS0.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 280/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Slot configuration for the 1:1 TPS protection for the EFS0

In Figure 1, the board in slot 2 protects the board in slot 3 and the board in slot 16 protects the board in slot 15. The ETS8 is used with the
working EFS0 and the TSB8 is used with the protection EFS0. Table 1 lists the slots for the EFS0, ETS8, and TSB8.

Table 1 Slots for the EFS0, ETS8, and TSB8

Board Protection Group 1 Protection Group 2

EFS0 (protection) Slot 2 Slot 16

EFS0 (working) Slot 3 Slot 15
TSB8 Slot 19 Slot 35
ETS8 Slot 21 Slot 33

Parent topic: EFS0

13.5 EFS0A
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the EFS0A (16xFE
switching and processing board).

Application
The EFS0A is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services.

Functions and Features

EFS0A boards support the Layer 2 switching, MPLS, and broadcast functions.

Front Panel
The front panel of the EFS0A has indicators and a bar code.

Board Protection
The EFS0A supports the 1:1 TPS protection.

Parent topic: EoS Boards

13.5.1 Application
The EFS0A is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services.

Figure 1shows the typical networking and application of the Ethernet switching board. the Ethernet switching board accesses and
converges Ethernet services, and provides the Ethernet data with the following data features: Layer 2 switching, port isolation, flow
classification, traffic control, VLAN management, and priority configuration. In addition, the Ethernet switching board performs
encapsulation/decapsulation, virtual concatenation, and SDH mapping/demapping for data. The Ethernet switching board can be
interconnected with the bandwidth access equipment and the data communication equipment at the same time, thus to provide a
network-level solution.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 281/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Networking and application of the Ethernet switching board

Parent topic: EFS0A

13.5.2 Functions and Features

EFS0A boards support the Layer 2 switching, MPLS, and broadcast functions.
Table 1 lists the functions and features supported by EFS0A boards.

Table 1 Functions and features supported by EFS0A boards

Function and Description
Feature

Basic functions Processes 16xFE services.

Port types Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when working with an ETF8 board.
Supports 100BASE-FX/LX signals when working with an EFF8 board. The optical ports comply with IEEE 802.3u.

Functions when Provides 16 electrical ports to receive/transmit FE signals when working with an ETF8 board.
being used with
Provides 16 optical ports to receive/transmit FE signals when working with an EFF8 board.
an interface
Provides 8 electrical ports to receive/transmit FE signals when working with an ETF8 board, and provides 8 optical ports to
board
receive/transmit FE signals when working with an EFF8 board.
Provides the TPS protection for FE signals received/transmitted through 16 electrical ports when working with an ETS8
board and a TSB8 board.

Port Working modes FE electrical port: auto-negotiation, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, 10M full-duplex, and 10M half-
characteristics duplex
FE optical port: 100M full-duplex

Traffic control Auto-negotiation mode Supported (Not supported by FE optical ports)

mode at ports
Non-autonegotiation mode Supported
Query/Setting of Supported
port status
Query of port Supported
types
Setting of optical Not supported
power thresholds
Pluggable optical Not supported
module
Service EPL service Supports PORT-based transparent transmission.
categories
EVPL service Supports PORT-shared EVPL services.
Supports VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services.
The services are isolated by VLAN tags.
The services are isolated by MPLS tags.
Supports a maximum of 4096 links.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 282/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Description

Feature

EPLAN service Supports the blacklist that can contain 2K records and also the static MAC address table that can
contain 2K records. The sum of the number of records in the blacklist and the number of addresses in
the static MAC address table must not exceed 2K. The blacklist function supports verification of
destination MAC addresses only.
Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The capacity of the MAC address table is 16K.
The aging time of the MAC address can be set and queried.
Supports the configuration of static MAC routes.
N1EFS0, N2EFS0, and N5EFS0 boards support the query of dynamic MAC addresses.
Supports the query of dynamic MAC addresses.
The maximum number of supported VBs is 16. The maximum number of logical ports for each VB is 48.
Queries the number of actually learned MAC addresses based on VB+VLAN or VB+LP.
Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge.

EVPLAN service Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN.

The maximum number of supported VBs is 16. The maximum number of logical ports for each VB is 48.
Supports the setting of a maximum of 4096 VLAN services.
Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1q virtual bridge and IEEE 802.1ad
provider bridge.

Service Formats of IEEE 802.3 Supported

specifications Ethernet data
Ethernet II Supported
frames
IEEE 802.1 q/p Supported
Frame length Supports the setting of the frame length to a value ranging from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes.
range
Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes.

Bound 48xVC-3, or 252xVC-12 + 36xVC-3

bandwidth
Concatenation Supports VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-Xv (X ≤ 63), and VC-3-Xv (X ≤ 12) granularities.
granularities
Encapsulation HDLC Not supported
formats
LAPS Not supported
GFP-F Supported
MPLS technology Supports the MPLS.
VLAN technology Supports a total number of 4094 VLANs, which comply with IEEE 802.1q/p.
Maximum uplink The maximum uplink bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s.
bandwidth An EFS0A board can adapt to the bandwidth of its slot.

Maximum bound 48xVC-3, or 252xVC-12 + 36xVC-3

bandwidth
VCTRUNK
Number of supported VCTRUNKs: 32
specifications
Configuration principles are as follows:
Each VC channel can be bound only to one VCTRUNK.
VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK16 must be bound when a board is housed in a slot providing 1.25G bit/s
bandwidth.
A VCTRUNK can be bound with the VC-12 path or VC-3 path at one time. A VCTRUNK should not be
bound with VC-12 and VC-3 paths at the same time.
VC-4s numbered 4, 8, 12, and 16 support the binding of VC-3 and VC-12 paths. The other VC-4s
support the binding of VC-3 paths only.
A VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of 12 VC-3s or 63 VC-12s.

Protection TPS Supported

schemes BPS Not supported
PPS Not supported
DLAG Not supported
LAG
Supports manual link aggregation and the load sharing mode that comply with IEEE 802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX.
LCAS Supports LCAS, which dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in
compliance with ITU-T G.7042.
LPT Supports P2P LPT and P2MP LPT in compliance with Huawei proprietary protocol.
STP/RSTP Supports the broadcast packet suppression function and RSTP, which comply with IEEE 802.1w.
MSTP Not supported
Synchronization Synchronous Not supported
Ethernet
IEEE 1588v2 Not supported

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 283/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Description

Feature

Maintenance ETH OAM Supports CC, LB tests, and LT tests in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag, and OAM ping in compliance with
features Huawei proprietary protocol.
Supports OAM auto-discovery, remote loopbacks, fault detection, and link performance detection in
compliance with IEEE 802.3ah, and selfloop detection in compliance with Huawei proprietary protocol.

Test Frame Supports test frames in ETH and GFP bearer modes.
Response to ping Not supported
Port Mirroring Supports ingress mirroring.
Loopback PHY layer at Ethernet ports Supports inloops.
capability
MAC layer at Ethernet ports Supports inloops.
VC-4 level Not supported
VC-3 level Not supported
VC-12 level Not supported
RMON Supports RMON of the Ethernet performance of Ethernet ports.
Warm resets Supported (Warm resets do not affect services.)
Cold resets Supported
Alarms and Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
performance equipment.
events
QoS
Supports the CAR. The granularity is 64 kbit/s.
Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN, PORT+SVLAN, or PORT+VLAN+VLAN PRI.

IGMP Snooping Protocol Supported

enabling
Port aging time Supported
Fast leave Not supported
Discarding of Not supported
unknown
broadcast
packets
Static broadcast Not supported
entry
Hub/Spoke Supported
Traffic control Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.

NOTE:
Only EPL services support port-based traffic control.

Traffic Supports port-based and VCTRUNK-based traffic monitoring.

monitoring

Parent topic: EFS0A

13.5.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the EFS0A has indicators and a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EFS0A.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 284/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the EFS0A

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the EFS0A has no interfaces. The interfaces are available on the ETF8 board or on the EFF8 board.

Parent topic: EFS0A

13.5.4 Board Protection

The EFS0A supports the 1:1 TPS protection.

NOTE:
TPS trigger conditions on the OptiX OSN equipment are detected by the cross-connect and timing board. Therefore, TPS is successful even though the system
control board cannot be detected or is faulty.

Figure 1 shows the slot configuration for the 1:1 TPS protection for the EFS0A.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 285/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Slot configuration for the 1:1 TPS protection for the EFS0A

The board in slot 2 protects the board in slots 3 and the board in slot 16 protects the board in slot 15. The ETS8 is used with the working
EFS0A and the TSB8 is used with the protection EFS0A. Table 1 lists the slots for the EFS0A, ETS8, and TSB8.

Table 1 Slots for the EFS0A, ETS8, and TSB8

Board Protection Group 1 Protection Group 2

EFS0A (protection) Slot 2 Slot 16

EFS0A (working) Slot 3 Slot 15
TSB8 Slots 19 and 20 Slots 35 and 36
ETS8 Slots 21 and 22 Slots 33 and 34

Parent topic: EFS0A

13.6 EFS4
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the EFS4 (4xFE
switching and processing board).

Application
The EFS4 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services.

Functions and Features

EFS4 boards support the Layer 2 switching, MPLS, and broadcast functions.

Front Panel
The front panel of the EFS4 has indicators, interfaces, and a bar code.

Parent topic: EoS Boards

13.6.1 Application
The EFS4 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services.

Figure 1shows the typical networking and application of the Ethernet switching board. the Ethernet switching board accesses and
converges Ethernet services, and provides the Ethernet data with the following data features: Layer 2 switching, port isolation, flow
classification, traffic control, VLAN management, and priority configuration. In addition, the Ethernet switching board performs
encapsulation/decapsulation, virtual concatenation, and SDH mapping/demapping for data. The Ethernet switching board can be
interconnected with the bandwidth access equipment and the data communication equipment at the same time, thus to provide a
network-level solution.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 286/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Networking and application of the Ethernet switching board

Parent topic: EFS4

13.6.2 Functions and Features

EFS4 boards support the Layer 2 switching, MPLS, and broadcast functions.
Table 1 lists the functions and features supported by EFS4 boards.

Table 1 Functions and features supported by EFS4 boards

Function and Description
Feature

Basic functions Processes 4xFE services.

Port types Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals. The optical ports comply with IEEE 802.3u.
Functions when Provides ports on the front panel to receive/transmit 4xFE signals.
being used with
an interface
board
Port Working modes Auto-negotiation, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, 10M full-duplex, and 10M half-duplex
characteristics
Traffic control Auto-negotiation mode Supported
mode at ports
Non-autonegotiation mode Supported
Query/Setting of Supported
port status
Query of port Supported
types
Setting of optical Not supported
power
thresholds
Pluggable Not supported
optical module
Service EPL service Supports PORT-based transparent transmission.
categories
EVPL service Supports PORT-shared EVPL services.
Supports VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services.
The services are isolated by VLAN tags.
The services are isolated by MPLS tags.
Supports a maximum of 4096 links.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 287/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Description

Feature

EPLAN service N2EFS4/N3EFS4 boards support the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge.
Supports the blacklist that can contain 2K records and also the static MAC address table that can contain
2K records. The sum of the number of records in the blacklist and the number of addresses in the static
MAC address table must not exceed 2K. The blacklist function of N3EFS4 boards supports verification of
destination MAC addresses only.
Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The capacity of the MAC address table is 16K. The
aging time of the MAC address can be set and queried.
Supports the configuration of static MAC routes.
N2EFS4 and N3EFS4 boards support the query of dynamic MAC addresses.
N1EFS4 boards do not support the query of dynamic MAC addresses.
The maximum number of supported VBs is 16. The maximum number of logical ports for each VB is 30.
Queries the number of actually learned MAC addresses based on VB+VLAN or VB+LP.

EVPLAN services Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN.

The maximum number of supported VBs is 16. The maximum number of logical ports for each VB is 30.
Supports the setting of a maximum of 4096 VLAN services.
Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1q virtual bridge.
N3EFS4 boards support the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1ad provider bridge.

Service Formats of IEEE 802.3 Supported

specifications Ethernet data
Ethernet II Supported
frames
IEEE 802.1 q/p Supported
Frame length Supports the setting of the frame length to a value ranging from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes.
range
Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes.

Concatenation Supports VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-Xv (X ≤ 63), and VC-3-Xv (X ≤ 12) granularities.
granularities
Encapsulation HDLC Not supported
formats
LAPS Not supported
GFP-F Supported
MPLS Supports the MPLS.
technology
VLAN Supports a total number of 4094 VLANs, which comply with IEEE 802.1q/p.
technology
Maximum uplink The maximum uplink bandwidth of an N1EFS4 board is 622 Mbit/s.
bandwidth
The maximum uplink bandwidth of an N2EFS4 or N3EFS4 board is 1.25 Gbit/s.
An EFS4 board can adapt to the bandwidth of its slot.

Maximum bound N1EFS4: 12xVC-3, or 63xVC-12 + 9xVC-3

bandwidth
N2EFS4/N3EFS4: 24xVC-3 or 126xVC-12 + 18xVC-3

VCTRUNK
The number of VCTRUNKs supported by an N1EFS4 board is 12.
specifications
The number of VCTRUNKs supported by an N2EFS4 or N3EFS4 board is 24.
Configuration principles are as follows:
Each VC channel can be bound only to one VCTRUNK.
VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK12 must be bound when a board is housed in a slot providing 622M bit/s
bandwidth of N2EFS4/N3EFS4 board.
A VCTRUNK can be bound with the VC-12 path or VC-3 path at one time. A VCTRUNK should not be
bound with VC-12 and VC-3 paths at the same time.
VCTRUNK 1-VCTRUNK 12 can be bound only with lower order paths in VC-4s numbered 1-4. VCTRUNK
13-VCTRUNK 24 can be bound only with lower order paths in VC-4s numbered 5-8.
A VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of 12 VC-3s or 63 VC-12s.
VC-4s numbered 4 and 8 support the binding of VC-3 and VC-12 paths. The other VC-4s support the
binding of VC-3 paths only.

Protection TPS Not supported

schemes BPS Not supported
PPS Not supported
DLAG Not supported
LAG N1EFS4 boards do not support this protection scheme. N2EFS4 and N3EFS4 boards support manual link
aggregation and the load sharing mode that comply with IEEE 802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX.
LCAS
Not supported by N1EFS4 boards
Supports LCAS, which dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in
compliance with ITU-T G.7042. This protection scheme is supported by N2EFS4/N3EFS4 boards.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 288/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Description

Feature
LPT
N1EFS4 boards support P2P LPT.
N2EFS4 and N3EFS4 boards support P2P LPT and P2MP LPT.
LPT complies with Huawei proprietary protocol.

STP/RSTP Supports the broadcast packet suppression function and RSTP, which comply with IEEE 802.1w.
MSTP Not supported
Synchronization Synchronous Not supported
Ethernet
IEEE 1588v2 Not supported
Maintenance ETH OAM N1EFS4 boards do not support the ETH OAM function.
features
N2EFS4 and N3EFS4 boards support CC, LB tests, and LT tests in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag, and
OAM ping in compliance with Huawei proprietary protocol.
N2EFS4 and N3EFS4 boards support OAM auto-discovery, remote loopbacks, fault detection, and link
performance detection in compliance with IEEE 802.3ah, and selfloop detection in compliance with
Huawei proprietary protocol.

Test Frame
N1EFS4 boards support test frames in Ethernet bearer mode.
N2EFS4/N3EFS4 boards support test frames in Ethernet/GFP bearer mode.

Response to Not supported

ping
Port Mirroring N3EFS4 boards support ingress mirroring.
Loopback PHY layer at Ethernet ports Supports inloops
capability
MAC layer at Ethernet ports Supports inloops
VC-4 level Not supported
VC-3 level Not supported by N3EFS4 boards
N1EFS4/N2EFS4 boards support inloops and outloops.

VC-12 level Not supported

RMON Supports Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level.
Warm resets N1EFS4/N2EFS4/N3EFS4 boards support warm resets. If a warm reset is performed on an N1EFS4 board, traffic
on the board is interrupted, whereas if a warm reset is performed on an N2EFS4/N3EFS4 board, traffic on the
board is not interrupted. If an N2EFS4/N3EFS4 board substitutes for an N1EFS4 board, traffic on the
N2EFS4/N3EFS4 board is not interrupted.

Cold resets Supported

Alarms and Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
performance equipment.
events
QoS
Supports the CAR. The granularity is 64 kbit/s.
N1EFS4 boards support the service classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN, or PORT+VLAN PRI.
N2EFS4 and N3EFS4 boards support the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN, or PORT+VLAN+VLAN PRI.
N3EFS4 boards support the flow classification based on PORT+SVLAN.
IGMP Snooping Protocol Supported
enabling
Port aging time Supported
Fast leave Not supported

Discarding of Not supported

unknown
broadcast
packets
Static broadcast Not supported
entry
Hub/Spoke Not supported
Traffic control Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.

NOTE:
Only EPL services support port-based traffic control.

Traffic N3EFS4 boards support port-based and VCTRUNK-based traffic monitoring.

monitoring

Parent topic: EFS4

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 289/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

13.6.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the EFS4 has indicators, interfaces, and a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EFS4.

Figure 1 Front panel of the EFS4

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Connection status indicator (LINK) – one color (green)
Data receiving and transmission indicator (ACT) – one color (orange)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the EFS4 has four FE interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the EFS4. For information
about the cables connected to the interfaces, see Straight-Through Cable and Crossover Cable.

Table 1 Interfaces of the EFS4

Interface Type of Interface Usage

FE1 RJ-45 Transmits and receives 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals.

FE2 RJ-45 Transmits and receives 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals.
FE3 RJ-45 Transmits and receives 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals.
FE4 RJ-45 Transmits and receives 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals.

Table 2 describes the pins of the RJ45 connector.

Table 2 Pins of the RJ45 connector

Pin Description

1 Positive data transmit end

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 290/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Pin Description

2 Negative data transmit end

3 Positive data receive end
4 Grounding
5 Grounding
6 Negative data receive end
7 Grounding
8 Grounding

Parent topic: EFS4

13.7 EGS2
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the EGS2 (2xGE
switching and processing board).

Application
The EGS2 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services.

Functions and Features

EGS2 boards support the Layer 2 switching, MPLS, and broadcast functions.

Front Panel
The front panel of the EGS2 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: EoS Boards

13.7.1 Application
The EGS2 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services.

Figure 1shows the typical networking and application of the Ethernet switching board. the Ethernet switching board accesses and
converges Ethernet services, and provides the Ethernet data with the following data features: Layer 2 switching, port isolation, flow
classification, traffic control, VLAN management, and priority configuration. In addition, the Ethernet switching board performs
encapsulation/decapsulation, virtual concatenation, and SDH mapping/demapping for data. The Ethernet switching board can be
interconnected with the bandwidth access equipment and the data communication equipment at the same time, thus to provide a
network-level solution.
Figure 1 Networking and application of the Ethernet switching board

NOTE:
When the service converging FE services into GE services is configured, the GE switching board can be set to the 1000M full-duplex mode or auto-negotiation mode,
the VLAN of the convergence service is variable, and the binding granularity can be at the VC-3 or VC-12 level.

Parent topic: EGS2

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 291/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

13.7.2 Functions and Features

EGS2 boards support the Layer 2 switching, MPLS, and broadcast functions.
Table 1 lists the functions and features supported by EGS2 boards.

Table 1 Functions and features supported by EGS2 boards

Function and Description
Feature

Basic functions Processes 2xGE services.

Port types EGS2 boards support 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX Ethernet optical ports. The optical ports support the auto-negotiation
function in compliance with IEEE 802.3z. The optical ports use SFP optical modules and support hot swapping. When the
multi-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission distance is 550 m. When the single-mode optical fiber is used,
the maximum transmission distance is 10 km. The optical modules that can meet different requirements for the
transmission distance such as 40 km and 80 km can also be used.
N3EGS2 boards also support 1000BASE-T Ethernet electrical ports. The electrical ports support the auto-negotiation
function. The negotiated rate can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, or 1000 Mbit/s. N3EGS2 boards support SFP electrical ports
and hot swapping. The maximum transmission distance is 100 m.

Functions when Provides ports on the front panel.

being used with
an interface
board
Port Working modes GE electrical port: auto-negotiation, 1000M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex, and 10M full-duplex (only
characteristics N3EGS2 boards support GE electrical port.)
GE optical port: auto-negotiation and 1000M full-duplex

Traffic control Auto-negotiation mode Supported

mode at ports
Non-autonegotiation mode Supported
Query/Setting of Supported
port status
Query of port Supported
types
Setting of optical Not supported
power thresholds
Pluggable optical Supports SFP optical modules.
module
Service EPL service Supports PORT-based transparent transmission.
categories
EVPL service Supports PORT-shared EVPL services.
Supports VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services.
The services are isolated by VLAN tags.
The services are isolated by MPLS tags.
Supports a maximum of 4096 links.

EPLAN service Supports the blacklist that can contain 2K records and also the static MAC address table that can
contain 2K records. The sum of the number of records in the blacklist and the number of addresses in
the static MAC address table must not exceed 2K. The blacklist function of N3EGS2 boards supports
verification of destination MAC addresses only.
Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The capacity of the MAC address table is 16K.
The aging time of the MAC address can be set and queried.
Supports the configuration of static MAC routes.
The maximum number of supported VBs is 2. The maximum number of logical ports for each VB is 30.
N3EGS2 supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge.

EVPLAN services Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN.

The maximum number of supported VBs is 2. The maximum number of logical ports for each VB is 30.
Supports the setting of a maximum of 4096 VLAN services.
Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1q virtual bridge.

Service Formats of IEEE 802.3 Supported

specifications Ethernet data
Ethernet II Supported
frames
IEEE 802.1 q/p Supported
Frame length Supports the setting of the frame length to a value ranging from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes.
range
Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes.

Concatenation N2EGS2: VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-Xv (X ≤ 63), VC-3-Xv (X ≤ 12).

granularities N3EGS2: VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-Xv (X ≤ 63), VC-3-Xv (X ≤ 24), VC-4-Xv (x ≤ 8).

Encapsulation HDLC Not supported

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 292/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and formats

Description
Feature

LAPS Not supported

GFP-F Supported
MPLS technology Supported
VLAN technology Supports a total number of 4094 VLANs, which comply with IEEE 802.1q/p.
Maximum uplink The maximum uplink bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s. An EGS2 board can adapt to the bandwidth of its slot.
bandwidth
Maximum bound N2EGS2: 48xVC-3, or 252xVC-12 + 36xVC-3.
bandwidth N3EGS2: 48xVC-3, or 252xVC-12 + 36xVC-3, 16xVC-4.

VCTRUNK
Number of supported VCTRUNKs: 48
specifications
Configuration principles are as follows:
Each VC channel can be bound only to one VCTRUNK.
VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK24 must be bound when a board is housed in a slot providing 1.25G bit/s
bandwidth.
A VCTRUNK can be bound with the VC-12 path or VC-3 path at one time. A VCTRUNK should not be
bound with VC-12 and VC-3 paths at the same time.
In the case of N2EGS2 boards, VCTRUNK 1–VCTRUNK 12 can be bound only with lower order paths in
VC-4s numbered 1–4. VCTRUNK 13–VCTRUNK 24 can be bound only with lower order paths in VC-4s
numbered 5–8. VCTRUNK 25–VCTRUNK 36 can be bound only with lower order paths in VC-4s
numbered 9–12. VCTRUNK 37–VCTRUNK 48 can be bound only with lower order paths in VC-4s
numbered 13–16.
In the case of N3EGS2 boards, there is no requirement regarding VCTRUNK binding. One VCTRUNK can
be bound with up to 24 VC-3s.
In the case of N2EGS2 boards, a VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of 12 VC-3s or 63 VC-12s.
In the case of N3EGS2 boards, a VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of eight VC-4s, 24 VC-3s, or
63 VC-12s.
For N2EGS2 board, VC-4s numbered 4, 8, 12, and 16 support the binding of VC-3 and VC-12 paths. The
other VC-4s support the binding of VC-3 paths only.
For N3EGS2 board, VC-4s numbered 4, 8, 12, and 16 support the binding of VC-4, VC-3 and VC-12
paths. The other VC-4s support the binding of VC-4 and VC-3 paths only.

Protection TPS Not supported

schemes BPS Supported by N3EGS2 boards.
PPS Not supported
DLAG Not supported
LAG Supports manual link aggregation and the load sharing mode that comply with IEEE 802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX.
LCAS Supports LCAS, which dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in
compliance with ITU-T G.7042.
LPT
N2EGS2 boards support P2P LPT.
N3EGS2 boards support P2P LPT and P2MP LPT.
Complies with Huawei proprietary protocol.

STP/RSTP Supports the broadcast packet suppression function and RSTP, which comply with IEEE 802.1w.
MSTP Not supported
Synchronization Synchronous Not supported
Ethernet
IEEE 1588v2 Not supported
Maintenance ETH OAM N2EGS2 boards do not support the ETH OAM function.
features
N3EGS2 boards support CC, LB tests, and LT tests in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag, and OAM ping in
compliance with Huawei proprietary protocol.
N3EGS2 boards support OAM auto-discovery, remote loopbacks, fault detection, and link performance
detection in compliance with IEEE 802.3ah, and selfloop detection in compliance with Huawei
proprietary protocol.

Test Frame
N2EGS2 boards supports test frames in Ethernet bearer mode.
N3EGS2 boards supports test frames in Ethernet bearer mode and GFP bearer mode.

Response to ping Not supported

Port Mirroring N3EGS2 boards support ingress mirroring.
Loopback PHY layer at Ethernet ports Supports inloops.
capability
MAC layer at Ethernet ports Supports inloops.
VC-4 level Not supported
VC-3 level N2EGS2 boards support inloops and outloops. N3EGS2
boards do not support inloops or outloops.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 293/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Description

Feature

VC-12 level Not supported

RMON Supports Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level.
Warm resets N2EGS2/N3EGS2 boards support warm resets. If a warm reset is performed on an N2EGS2 board, traffic on the
board is interrupted, whereas if a warm reset is performed on an N3EGS2 board, traffic on the board is not
interrupted. If an N3EGS2 board substitutes for an N2EGS2 board, traffic on the N3EGS2 board is not
interrupted.

Cold resets Supported

Alarms and Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
performance equipment.
events
QoS
Supports the CAR. The granularity is 64 kbit/s.
Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN, or PORT+VLAN+VLAN PRI.

IGMP Snooping Protocol enabling Supported

Port aging time Supported
Fast leave Supported by N3EGS2 boards

NOTE:
N3EGS2 boards support the IGMP snooping fast-leave function when they substitute for N2EGS2 boards using the board version replacement
function.

Discarding of Supported by N3EGS2 boards

unknown
broadcast
packets
Static broadcast Supported by N3EGS2 boards
entry
Hub/Spoke Supported by N3EGS2 boards
Traffic control Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.

NOTE:
Only EPL services support port-based traffic control.

Traffic N3EGS2 boards support port-based and VCTRUNK-based traffic monitoring.

monitoring

Parent topic: EGS2

13.7.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the EGS2 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the N2EGS2/N3EGS2 that has the GE optical interface.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 294/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the N2EGS2/N3EGS2 that has the GE optical interface

The N3EGS2 can also be installed with the GE electrical interface. Figure 2 shows the appearance of the front panel of the N3EGS2 that has
the GE electrical interface.

Figure 2 Front panel of the N3EGS2 that has the GE electrical interface

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 295/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Connection status indicator (LINK) – one color (green)
Data receiving and transmission indicator (ACT) – one color (orange)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the N2EGS2/N3EGS2 has two GE optical interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the
N2EGS2/N3EGS2.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the N2EGS2/N3EGS2

Interface Type of Interface Usage

OUT1/IN1 LC (swappable) Transmits and receives 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX signals.

OUT2/IN2 LC (swappable) Transmits and receives 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX signals.

When the N3EGS2 has the electrical interfaces, the two GE electrical interfaces are of the same type and have the same usage. Table 2
describes the types and usage of the electrical interfaces of the N3EGS2.

Table 2 Electrical interfaces of the N3EGS2

Interface Type of Interface Usage

GE RJ-45 (swappable) Transmits and receives 1000BASE-T signals.

Table 3 provides the pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface of the N3EGS2.

Table 3 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface of the N3EGS2

Pin Description

1 BI_DA+
2 BI_DA–
3 BI_DB+
4 BI_DC+
5 BI_DC–
6 BI_DB–
7 BI_DD+
8 BI_DD–

Parent topic: EGS2

13.8 EMS2
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the EMS2 (2xGE and
16xFE switching and processing board).

Application
The EMS2 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services.

Functions and Features

EMS2 boards support the Layer 2 switching, link convergence, and multicast functions.

Front Panel
The front panel of the EMS2 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: EoS Boards

13.8.1 Application
The EMS2 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services.

Figure 1shows the typical networking and application of the Ethernet switching board. the Ethernet switching board accesses and
converges Ethernet services, and provides the Ethernet data with the following data features: Layer 2 switching, port isolation, flow
classification, traffic control, VLAN management, and priority configuration. In addition, the Ethernet switching board performs

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 296/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
encapsulation/decapsulation, virtual concatenation, and SDH mapping/demapping for data. The Ethernet switching board can be
interconnected with the bandwidth access equipment and the data communication equipment at the same time, thus to provide a
network-level solution.

Figure 1 Networking and application of the Ethernet switching board

NOTE:
When the service converging FE services into GE services is configured, the GE switching board can be set only to the 1000M full-duplex mode, the VLAN of the
convergence service is variable, and the binding granularity can be at the VC-3 or VC-12 level.

Parent topic: EMS2

13.8.2 Functions and Features

EMS2 boards support the Layer 2 switching, link convergence, and multicast functions.
Table 1 lists the functions and features supported by EMS2 boards.

Table 1 Functions and features supported by EMS2 boards

Function and Description
Feature

Basic functions Receives/Transmits and processes 2xGE and 16xFE services.

Port types Supports 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX Ethernet optical ports. The optical ports support the auto-negotiation function in
compliance with IEEE 802.3z. The optical ports use pluggable SFP optical modules. When the multi-mode optical fiber is
used, the maximum transmission distance is 550 m. When the single-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission
distance is 10 km. The optical modules that can meet different requirements for the transmission distance such as 40 km
and 80 km can also be used.
Supports 1000BASE-T Ethernet electrical ports. The electrical ports support the auto-negotiation function. The negotiated
rate can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, or 1000 Mbit/s. The board supports pluggable SFP electrical ports. The maximum
transmission distance is 100 m.
Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when working with an ETF8 board and supports 100BASE-FX signals when working
with an EFF8 board. The electrical ports comply with IEEE 802.3u.

Functions when Provides 16 electrical ports to receive/transmit FE signals when working with an ETF8 board.
being used with
Provides 16 optical ports to receive/transmit FE signals when working with an EFF8 board.
an interface
Provides 8 electrical ports to receive/transmit FE signals when working with an ETF8 board, and provides 8 optical ports to
board
receive/transmit FE signals when working with an EFF8 board.

Port Working modes GE electrical port: auto-negotiation, 1000M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex, and 10M full-duplex
characteristics
GE optical port: auto-negotiation and 1000M full-duplex
FE electrical port: auto-negotiation, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, 10M full-duplex, and 10M
half-duplex (This working mode is supported only when the EMS2 board works with the ETF8 board.)
FE optical port: 100M full-duplex (This working mode is supported only when the EMS2 board works
with the EFF8 board.)

Traffic control Auto-negotiation mode Supported (Not supported by FE optical ports)

mode at ports
Non-autonegotiation mode Supported
Query/Setting of Supported
port status
Query of port Supported
types

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 297/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Description

Feature

Setting of optical Not supported

power thresholds
Pluggable optical Supports SFP optical modules.
module
Service EPL service Supports PORT-based transparent transmission.
categories
EVPL service Supports PORT-shared EVPL services.
Supports VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services.
The services are isolated by VLAN tags.
The services are isolated by MPLS tags.
Supports a maximum of 4096 links.

EPLAN service Supports the blacklist that can contain 2K records and also the static MAC address table that can
contain 2K records. The sum of the number of records in the blacklist and the number of addresses in
the static MAC address table must not exceed 2K. The blacklist function supports verification of
destination MAC addresses only.
Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The capacity of the MAC address table is 16K.
The aging time of the MAC address can be set and queried.
Supports the configuration of static MAC routes.
Supports the query of dynamic MAC addresses.
The maximum number of supported VBs is 16. The maximum number of logical ports for each VB is 66.
Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge.

EVPLAN service Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN.

The maximum number of supported VBs is 16. The maximum number of logical ports for each VB is 66.
Supports the configuration of up to 4096 VLAN services.
Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1q virtual bridge and IEEE 802.1ad virtual
bridge.

Service Formats of IEEE 802.3 Supported

specifications Ethernet data
Ethernet II Supported
frames
IEEE 802.1q/p Supported
Frame length Supports the setting of the frame length to a value ranging from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes.
range
Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes.

Concatenation VC-12-Xv (X ≤ 63), VC-3-Xv (X ≤ 24), VC-4-Xv (X ≤ 8).

granularities
Encapsulation HDLC Not supported
formats
LAPS Not supported
GFP-F Supported
MPLS technology Not supported
VLAN technology Supports a total number of 4094 VLANs, which comply with IEEE 802.1q/p.

Maximum uplink 2.5 Gbit/s

bandwidth
Maximum bound 16xVC-4, 48xVC-3 or 252xVC-12
bandwidth
VCTRUNK
Number of supported VCTRUNKs: 48
specifications
Configuration principles are as follows:
Each VC channel can be bound only to one VCTRUNK.
A VCTRUNK can be bound with the VC-12 path or VC-3 path at one time. A VCTRUNK should not be
bound with VC-12 and VC-3 paths at the same time.
A VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of eight VC-4s, 24 VC-3s, or 63 VC-12s.
VC-4s numbered 4, 8, 12, and 16 support the binding of VC-4, VC-3 and VC-12 paths. The other VC-4s
support the binding of VC-4 and VC-3 paths only.

Protection TPS Not supported

schemes BPS Not supported
PPS Not supported
DLAG Not supported
LAG Supports manual link aggregation and load sharing link aggregation in compliance with IEEE 802.3ad and IEEE
802.1AX.
LCAS Supports LCAS, which dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in
compliance with ITU-T G.7042.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 298/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Description

Feature
LPT Supports P2P LPT and P2MP LPT in compliance with Huawei proprietary protocol.
STP/RSTP
Supports the broadcast packet suppression function and RSTP, which comply with IEEE 802.1w.
MSTP Not supported
Synchronization Synchronous Not supported
Ethernet
IEEE 1588v2 Not supported
Maintenance ETH OAM Supports CC, LB tests, and LT tests in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag, and OAM ping in compliance with
features Huawei proprietary protocol.
Supports OAM auto-discovery, remote loopbacks, fault detection, and link performance detection in
compliance with IEEE 802.3ah, and selfloop detection in compliance with Huawei proprietary protocol.

Test Frame Supports test frames in Ethernet/GFP bearer mode.

Response to ping Not supported
Port Mirroring Supports ingress mirroring.
Loopback PHY layer at Ethernet ports Supports inloops.
capability
MAC layer at Ethernet ports Supports inloops.
VC-4 level Not supported
VC-3 level Not supported
VC-12 level Not supported
RMON Supports RMON of the Ethernet performance of Ethernet ports and VCTRUNKs.
Warm resets Supported (Warm resets do not affect services.)
Cold resets Supported
Alarms and Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
performance equipment.
events
QoS
Supports the CAR. The granularity is 64 kbit/s.
Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN, PORT+SVLAN, and PORT+VLAN+PRI.

IGMP Snooping Protocol enabling Supported

Port aging time Supported
Fast leave Supported
Discarding of Supported
unknown
broadcast
packets
Static broadcast Supported
entry
Hub/Spoke Supported
Traffic control Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.

NOTE:
Only EPL services support port-based traffic control.

Traffic Supports port-based and VCTRUNK-based traffic monitoring.

monitoring

Parent topic: EMS2

13.8.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the EMS2 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EMS2 that has the GE optical interface.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 299/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the EMS2 that has the GE optical interface

Figure 2 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EMS2 that has the GE electrical interface.
Figure 2 Front panel of the EMS2 that has the GE electrical interface

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 300/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Connection status indicator (LINK) – one color (green)
Data receiving and transmission indicator (ACT) – one color (orange)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the EMS2 has two interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the EMS2 when the EMS2 has the
optical interfaces. When the EMS2 has the electrical interfaces, the two GE electrical interfaces are of the same type and have the same
usage. Table 2 describes the types and usage of the electrical interfaces of the EMS2.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the EMS2

Interface Type of Interface Usage

OUT1/IN1 LC (swappable) Transmits and receives 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX signals.

OUT2/IN2 LC (swappable) Transmits and receives 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX signals.

Table 2 Electrical interfaces of the EMS2

Interface Type of Interface Usage

GE RJ-45 (swappable) Transmits and receives 1000BASE-T signals.

Table 3 provides the pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface of the EMS2.

Table 3 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface of the EMS2

Pin Description

1 BI_DA+
2 BI_DA–
3 BI_DB+
4 BI_DC+
5 BI_DC–
6 BI_DB–
7 BI_DD+
8 BI_DD–

Parent topic: EMS2

13.9 EMS4
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the EMS4 (4xGE and
16xFE switching and processing board).

Application
The EMS4 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services.

Functions and Features

EMS4 boards support the Layer 2 switching, link convergence, and multicast functions.

Front Panel
The front panel of the EMS4 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Board Protection
The EMS4 supports the BPS, PPS, and distributed link aggregation group (DLAG) protection.

Parent topic: EoS Boards

13.9.1 Application
The EMS4 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services.

Figure 1shows the typical networking and application of the Ethernet switching board. the Ethernet switching board accesses and
converges Ethernet services, and provides the Ethernet data with the following data features: Layer 2 switching, port isolation, flow
classification, traffic control, VLAN management, and priority configuration. In addition, the Ethernet switching board performs

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 301/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
encapsulation/decapsulation, virtual concatenation, and SDH mapping/demapping for data. The Ethernet switching board can be
interconnected with the bandwidth access equipment and the data communication equipment at the same time, thus to provide a
network-level solution.

Figure 1 Networking and application of the Ethernet switching board

NOTE:
When the service converging FE services into GE services is configured, the GE switching board can be set only to the 1000M full-duplex mode, the VLAN of the
convergence service is variable, and the binding granularity can be at the VC-3 or VC-12 level.

Parent topic: EMS4

13.9.2 Functions and Features

EMS4 boards support the Layer 2 switching, link convergence, and multicast functions.
Table 1 lists the functions and features supported by EMS4 boards.

Table 1 Functions and features supported by EMS4 boards

Function and Description
Feature

Basic functions Receives/Transmits and processes 4xGE and 16xFE services

Port types Supports 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX Ethernet optical ports. The optical ports support the auto-negotiation function in
compliance with IEEE 802.3z. The optical ports use SFP optical modules. When the multi-mode optical fiber is used, the
maximum transmission distance is 550 m. When the single-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission distance
is 10 km. The optical modules that can meet different requirements for the transmission distance such as 40 km and 80 km
can also be used.
Supports 1000BASE-T Ethernet electrical ports. The electrical ports support the auto-negotiation function. The negotiated
rate can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, or. 1000 Mbit/s. EMS4 boards support SFP electrical ports and hot swapping. The
maximum transmission distance is 100 m.
Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when working with an ETF8 board and supports 100BASE-FX signals when working
with an EFF8 board. The electrical/optical ports comply with IEEE 802.3u.

Functions when Provides 16 electrical ports to receive/transmit FE signals when working with an ETF8 board.
being used with
Provides 16 optical ports to receive/transmit FE signals when working with an EFF8 board.
an interface
Provides 8 electrical ports to receive/transmit FE signals when working with an ETF8 board, and provides 8 optical ports to
board
receive/transmit FE signals when working with an EFF8 board.

Port Working modes GE optical port: auto-negotiation, 1000M full-duplex

characteristics
GE electrical port: auto-negotiation, 1000M full-duplex
An EMS4 board supports the auto-negotiation, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, 10M full-duplex,
and 10M half-duplex working mode when working with an ETF8 board.
An EMS4 board supports only the 100M full-duplex working mode when working with an EFF8 board.

Traffic control Auto-negotiation mode Supported

mode at ports
Non-autonegotiation mode Not supported
Query/Setting of Supported
port status
Query of port Supported
types

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 302/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Description

Feature

Setting of optical Not supported

power thresholds
Pluggable optical Supports SFP optical modules.
module
Service EPL service Supports PORT-based transparent transmission.
categories
EVPL service Supports PORT-shared EVPL services.
Supports VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services.
The services are isolated by VLAN tags.
The services are isolated by QinQ tags.
Supports a maximum of 8000 links.

EPLAN service Supports the blacklist that can contain 512 records and also the static MAC address table that can
contain 512 records. The blacklist function supports verification of destination MAC addresses only.
Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The capacity of the MAC address table is 128K.
The aging time of the MAC address can be set and queried.
Supports the configuration of static MAC routes.
Supports the query of dynamic MAC addresses.
The maximum number of supported VBs is 2. The maximum number of logical ports for each VB is 40.
Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge.

NOTE:
EMS4 boards support SVL and IVL modes. Ensure that all bridges on a board apply the same learning mode.

EVPLAN service Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN.

The maximum number of supported VBs is 2. The maximum number of logical ports for each VB is 40.
Supports the setting of a maximum of 4000 VLAN services.
Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1q virtual bridge and IEEE 802.1ad
provider bridge.

NOTE:
EMS4 boards support SVL and IVL modes. Ensure that all bridges on a board apply the same learning mode.

Service Formats of IEEE 802.3 Supported

specifications Ethernet data
Ethernet II Supported
frames
IEEE 802.1 q/p Supported
Frame length Supports the setting of the frame length to a value ranging from 1518 bytes to 9216 bytes.
range
Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9216 bytes.

Concatenation VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-Xv (X ≤ 64), VC-3-Xv (X ≤ 24), and VC-4-Xv (X ≤ 8).
granularities
Encapsulation HDLC Supported
formats
LAPS Supported
GFP-F Supported
MPLS technology Not supported
VLAN technology Supports a total number of 4094 VLANs, which comply with IEEE 802.1q/p.

Maximum uplink 2.5 Gbit/s.

bandwidth
Maximum bound 16xVC-4, or 48xVC-3, or 1008xVC-12
bandwidth
VCTRUNK
Number of VCTRUNKs: 64
specifications
Notes for configuration:
Each VC channel can be bound only to one VCTRUNK.
A VCTRUNK can be bound with the VC-12 path or VC-3 path at one time. A VCTRUNK should not be
bound with VC-12 and VC-3 paths at the same time.
The maximum bandwidth of a VCTRUNK is 1.25 Gbit/s. A VCTRUNK can be bound to a maximum of
eight VC-4s, 24 VC-3s, or 64 VC-12s.

Protection TPS Not supported

schemes BPS Supported
PPS Supported

NOTE:
An EMS4 board providing GE electrical ports cannot be configured with PPS.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 303/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Description

Feature
DLAG Supported
LAG
Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation.
Supports the load sharing mode and load non-sharing mode.
Complies with IEEE 802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX.
LCAS Supports LCAS, which dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in
compliance with ITU-T G.7042.
LPT Supports P2P LPT and P2MP LPT in compliance with Huawei proprietary protocol.

NOTE:
In P2MP LPT, both strict switching mode and non-strict switching mode are supported.

STP/RSTP
Supports the broadcast packet suppression function and RSTP, which comply with IEEE 802.1w.
MSTP Supported
Synchronization Synchronous Not supported
Ethernet
IEEE 1588v2 Not supported
Maintenance ETH OAM Supports CC, LB tests in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag, and OAM ping in compliance with Huawei
features proprietary protocol.
Supports OAM auto-discovery, remote loopbacks, fault detection, and link performance detection in
compliance with IEEE 802.3ah, and selfloop detection in compliance with Huawei proprietary protocol.

Test Frame Supports test frames in GFP bearer mode.

Response to ping Not supported
Port Mirroring Not supported
Loopback PHY layer at Ethernet ports Supports inloops.
capability
MAC layer at Ethernet ports Not supported
VC-4 level Not supported
VC-3 level Not supported
VC-12 level Not supported
RMON Supports RMON of the Ethernet performance of Ethernet ports and VCTRUNKs.
Warm resets Supported
Cold resets Supported
Alarms and Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
performance equipment.
events
QoS
Supports the CAR. The granularity is 64 kbit/s.
Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN, or PORT+SVLAN.

IGMP Snooping Protocol enabling Supported

Port aging time Supported
Fast leave Supported
Discarding of Supported
unknown
broadcast
packets
Static broadcast Supported
entry
Hub/Spoke Supported
Traffic control Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.

NOTE:
Only EPL services support port-based traffic control.

Parent topic: EMS4

13.9.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the EMS4 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 304/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EMS4 that has the GE optical interface.

Figure 1 Front panel of the EMS4 that has the GE optical interface

Figure 2 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EMS4 that has the GE electrical interface.
Figure 2 Front panel of the EMS4 that has the GE electrical interface

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 305/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Connection status indicator (LINK) – one color (green)
Data receiving and transmission indicator (ACT) – one color (orange)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the EMS4 has four interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the EMS4. When the
EMS4 has the electrical interfaces, the four GE electrical interfaces are of the same type and have the same usage. Table 2 describes the
types and usage of the electrical interfaces of the EMS4.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the EMS4

Interface Type of Interface Usage

OUT1/IN1 LC (swappable) Transmits and receives 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX signals.

OUT2/IN2 LC (swappable) Transmits and receives 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX signals.
OUT3/IN3 LC (swappable) Transmits and receives 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX signals.
OUT4/IN4 LC (swappable) Transmits and receives 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX signals.

Table 2 Electrical interfaces of the EMS4

Interface Type of Interface Usage

GE RJ-45 (swappable) Transmits and receives 1000BASE-T signals.

Table 3 provides the pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface of the EMS4.

Table 3 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface of the EMS4

Pin Description

1 BI_DA+
2 BI_DA–
3 BI_DB+
4 BI_DC+
5 BI_DC–
6 BI_DB–
7 BI_DD+
8 BI_DD–

Parent topic: EMS4

13.9.4 Board Protection

The EMS4 supports the BPS, PPS, and distributed link aggregation group (DLAG) protection.

otection Principle
When the BPS protection is provided for the EMS4, the GE and FE ports are protected by using the single-fed and selective-receiving
scheme. The EMS4 has four GE ports and 16 FE ports and hence may be connected to many sets of communication equipment. Normally,
the active board is working and services are transmitted in two directions of the active link. On the standby link, the EMS4 disables the
transmission of all ports. In this case, the ports of the opposite board are in the link-down state. In addition, the opposite board enables
the transmission but does not transmit services. In this manner, the receive ports of the standby EMS4 are not in the link-down state. The
solid lines in Figure 1 show how the EMS4 normally works.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 306/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Normal working of the EMS4

BPS Protection

When the BPS protection is provided, if the active board detects the link-down state of any link, any fault in the board, or the offline state
of any board, the cross-connect board switches all the services to the standby board. In this manner, services are protected. The solid
lines in Figure 2 show how the BPS protection functions. The services numbered 1, 2 and 3 are all switched to the standby EMS4 and the
corresponding communication equipment.

Figure 2 Principle of the BPS protection for the EMS4

PPS Protection

When the PPS protection is provided, if the active board detects the link-down state of any link, the cross-connect board switches all the
services to the standby board. In this manner, services are protected. The solid lines in Figure 3 show how the PPS protection functions.
Only the service numbered 1 is switched to the standby EMS4 and the standby communication equipment.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 307/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 3 Principle of the PPS protection for the EMS4

NOTE:
In the case of the PPS, when a link failure occurs on a port, only the link services on the port are switched generally. If the services of two ports are associated, for
example, the services of port IP1 and port IP2 are converged into the same VCTRUNK, port IP1 and port IP2 are defined as associated ports. When one port of the
associated ports is faulty, the services of the entire associated port group are switched.

DLAG Protection

The DLAG is a group where the two mapping ports on two identical boards are aggregated to from a protection group, providing 1+1
protection for the ports. By default, the port on the active board is working, and the port on the standby board is protecting the working
port.
When the DLAG is configured, the cross-connect board switches all services from the active board to the standby board if the active
board detects a link failure on a port, a board offline event, or a board hardware failure. As shown in Figure 4, the services carried on port 1
are switched to port 1 of the standby EMS4 and the associated equipment.

Figure 4 Principle of the DLAG protection for the EMS4

CAUTION:
When the board-level BPS/PPS protection is performed, the FE ports support only the 100M full-duplex mode and the GE optical ports
support the auto-negotiation and 1000M full-duplex mode.

ard Configuration

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 308/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Two EMS4 boards should be configured on an NE to provide the board-level protection. One EMS4 is the active board and the other is
the standby board. When you configure the EMS4 board protection, ensure that the access capacity of the slot that houses the standby
board must not be less than the access capacity of the slot that houses the active board.

Parent topic: EMS4

13.10 EGS4
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the EGS4 (4xGE
switching and processing board).

Application
The EGS4 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services.

Functions and Features

EGS4 boards support the Layer 2 switching, link aggregation, and multicast functions.

Front Panel
The front panel of the EGS4 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Board Protection
The EGS4 supports the BPS, PPS, and DLAG protection.

Parent topic: EoS Boards

13.10.1 Application
The EGS4 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services.

Figure 1shows the typical networking and application of the Ethernet switching board. the Ethernet switching board accesses and
converges Ethernet services, and provides the Ethernet data with the following data features: Layer 2 switching, port isolation, flow
classification, traffic control, VLAN management, and priority configuration. In addition, the Ethernet switching board performs
encapsulation/decapsulation, virtual concatenation, and SDH mapping/demapping for data. The Ethernet switching board can be
interconnected with the bandwidth access equipment and the data communication equipment at the same time, thus to provide a
network-level solution.

Figure 1 Networking and application of the Ethernet switching board

NOTE:
When the service converging FE services into GE services is configured, the GE switching board can be set only to the 1000M full-duplex mode, the VLAN of the
convergence service is variable, and the binding granularity can be at the VC-3 or VC-12 level.

Parent topic: EGS4

13.10.2 Functions and Features

EGS4 boards support the Layer 2 switching, link aggregation, and multicast functions.
Table 1 lists the functions and features supported by EGS4 boards.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 309/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Table 1 Functions and features supported by EGS4 boards
Function and Description
Feature

Basic functions Receives/Transmits and processes 4xGE services.

Port types EGS4 boards support 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX Ethernet optical ports. The optical ports support the auto-negotiation
function in compliance with IEEE 802.3z. The optical ports use SFP optical modules. When the multi-mode optical fiber is
used, the maximum transmission distance is 550 m. When the single-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission
distance is 10 km. The optical modules that can meet different requirements for the transmission distance such as 40 km
and 80 km can also be used.
N1EGS4 and N4EGS4 boards also support 1000BASE-T Ethernet electrical ports. The electrical ports support the auto-
negotiation function. N1EGS4 boards support the negotiated rate of 1000 Mbit/s and N4EGS4 boards support the
negotiated rate of 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, or 1000 Mbit/s. N1EGS4 and N4EGS4 boards support SFP electrical ports and hot
swapping. The maximum transmission distance is 100 m.

Functions when Provides ports on the front panel.

being used with
an interface
board
Port Working modes GE electrical port (N1EGS4): auto-negotiation, 1000M full-duplex.
characteristics
GE electrical port (N4EGS4): auto-negotiation, 1000M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex, and 10M full-
duplex.
GE optical port: auto-negotiation and 1000M full-duplex.

NOTE:
Only on N1EGS4 and N4EGS4 boards support GE electrical port.

Traffic control Auto-negotiation mode Supported

mode at ports
Non-autonegotiation mode Supported
Query/Setting of Supported
port status
Query of port Supported
types
Setting of optical Not supported
power thresholds
Pluggable optical Supports SFP optical modules.
module
Service EPL service Supports PORT-based transparent transmission.
categories
EVPL service Supports PORT-shared EVPL services.
Supports VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services.
The services are isolated by VLAN tags.
The services are isolated by QinQ tags.
Supports a maximum of 8000 links.

EPLAN service Supports the blacklist that can contain 512 records and also the static MAC address table that can
contain 512 records. The blacklist function supports verification of destination MAC addresses only.
Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The capacity of the MAC address table is 128K.
The aging time of the MAC address can be set and queried.
Supports the configuration of static MAC routes.
Supports the query of dynamic MAC addresses.
N1EGS4/N3EGS4 supports a maximum of two VBs. The maximum number of logical ports for each VB is
68.
N4EGS4 supports a maximum of 16 VBs. The maximum number of logical ports for each VB is 68.
Queries the number of actually learned MAC addresses based on VB+VLAN or VB+LP.
Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge.

NOTE:
EGS4 boards support SVL and IVL modes. Ensure that all bridges on a board apply the same learning mode.

EVPLAN service Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN.

N1EGS4/N3EGS4 supports a maximum of two VBs. The maximum number of logical ports for each VB is
68.
N4EGS4 supports a maximum of 16 VBs. The maximum number of logical ports for each VB is 68.
Supports the setting of a maximum of 4000 VLAN services.
Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1q virtual bridge and IEEE 802.1ad
provider bridge.

NOTE:
EGS4 boards support SVL and IVL modes. Ensure that all bridges on a board apply the same learning mode.

Service Formats of IEEE 802.3 Supported

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 310/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
specifications
Function and Ethernet data
Description
Feature frames
Ethernet II Supported
IEEE 802.1 q/p Supported
Frame length N1EGS4/N3EGS4:
range
Supports the setting of the frame length to a value ranging from 1518 bytes to 9216 bytes.
Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9216 bytes.
N4EGS4:
Supports the setting of the frame length to a value ranging from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes.
Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes.

Concatenation VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-Xv (X ≤ 64 (N1EGS4/N3EGS4)), VC-12-Xv (X ≤ 63 (N4EGS4)), VC-3-Xv (X ≤ 24), and
granularities VC-4-Xv (X ≤ 8).
Encapsulation HDLC Supported
formats
LAPS Supported
GFP-F Supported
MPLS technology Not supported
VLAN technology Supports a total number of 4094 VLANs, which comply with IEEE 802.1q/p.
Maximum uplink 2.5 Gbit/s
bandwidth
Maximum bound N1EGS4: 16xVC-4, or 48xVC-3, or 1008xVC-12
bandwidth
N3EGS4/N4EGS4: 16xVC-4, or 48xVC-3, or 504xVC-12

VCTRUNK
Number of supported VCTRUNKs: 64
specifications
Configuration principles are as follows:
Each VC channel can be bound only to one VCTRUNK.
A VCTRUNK can be bound with the VC-12 path or VC-3 path at one time. A VCTRUNK should not be
bound with VC-12 and VC-3 paths at the same time.
VC-4s numbered 1-4 and 9-12 of the N3EGS4/N4EGS4 support the binding of VC-4, VC-3 and VC-12
paths. The other VC-4s support the binding of VC-4 and VC-3 paths only.
VC-4s numbered 1-8 and VC-4s numbered 9-16 of the N3EGS4/N4EGS4 belong to two areas. VC-4 and
VC-3 binding must not span the two areas.
VC-4s numbered 1-4 and VC-4s numbered 9-12 of the N3EGS4/N4EGS4 belong to two areas. VC-12
binding must not span the two areas.
In the case of N1EGS4/N3EGS4 boards, a VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of eight VC-4s, 24
VC-3s, or 64 VC-12s.
In the case of N4EGS4 boards, a VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of eight VC-4s, 24 VC-3s, or
63 VC-12s.

Protection TPS Not supported

schemes BPS Supported
PPS Supported

NOTE:
An EGS4 board providing GE electrical ports cannot be configured with PPS.

DLAG Supported
LAG
Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation.
Supports the load sharing mode and load non-sharing mode.
Complies with IEEE 802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX.
LCAS Supports LCAS, which dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in
compliance with ITU-T G.7042.
LPT Supports P2P LPT and P2MP LPT in compliance with Huawei proprietary protocol.
STP/RSTP
Supports the RSTP, which complies with IEEE 802.1w.
MSTP The N1EGS4 supports the MSTP.
Synchronization Synchronous Not supported
Ethernet
IEEE 1588v2 Not supported
Maintenance ETH OAM N1EGS4/N3EGS4 boards support CC and LB tests in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag.
features
N4EGS4 boards support CC, LB tests, and LT tests in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag, and OAM ping in
compliance with Huawei proprietary protocol.
Supports OAM auto-discovery, remote loopbacks, fault detection, and link performance detection in
compliance with IEEE 802.3ah, and selfloop detection in compliance with Huawei proprietary protocol
(N1EGS4/N3EGS4 boards can only initiate remote loopbacks).

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 311/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Description

Feature
Test Frame Supports test frames in GFP bearer mode.
Response to ping Not supported
Port Mirroring N4EGS4 boards support ingress mirroring.
Loopback PHY layer at Ethernet ports Supports inloops.
capability
MAC layer at Ethernet ports Not supported
VC-4 level Not supported
VC-3 level Not supported
VC-12 level Not supported
RMON Supports RMON of the Ethernet performance of Ethernet ports and VCTRUNKs.
Warm resets Supported (Warm resets do not affect services.)
Cold resets Supported
Alarms and Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
performance equipment.
events
QoS
Supports the CAR. The granularity is 64 kbit/s. N1EGS4 boards support 512 rate modes, and N3EGS4 and N4EGS4 boards
support 60 rate modes.
Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN, or PORT+SVLAN.

IGMP Snooping Protocol enabling Supported

Port aging time Supported
Fast leave Supported by N4EGS4 boards

Discarding of Supported by N4EGS4 boards

unknown
broadcast
packets
Static broadcast Not supported
entry
Hub/Spoke Supported
Traffic control Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.

NOTE:
Only EPL services support port-based traffic control.

Traffic N4EGS4 boards support port-based and VCTRUNK-based traffic monitoring.

monitoring

Parent topic: EGS4

13.10.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the EGS4 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the N1EGS4/N3EGS4/N4EGS4 that has the optical interface.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 312/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the N1EGS4/N3EGS4/N4EGS4 that has the optical interface

The N1EGS4/N4EGS4 can also has the GE electrical interface. Figure 2 shows the appearance of the front panel of the N1EGS4/N4EGS4 that
has the GE electrical interface.

Figure 2 front panel of the N1EGS4/N4EGS4 that has the GE electrical interface

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 313/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Connection status indicator (LINK) – one color (green)
Data receiving and transmission indicator (ACT) – one color (orange)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the N1EGS4/N3EGS4/N4EGS4 has four GE optical interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical
interfaces of the N1EGS4/N3EGS4/N4EGS4.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the N1EGS4/N3EGS4/N4EGS4

Interface Type of Interface Usage

OUT1/IN1 LC (swappable) Transmits and receives 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX signals.

OUT2/IN2 LC (swappable) Transmits and receives 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX signals.
OUT3/IN3 LC (swappable) Transmits and receives 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX signals.
OUT4/IN4 LC (swappable) Transmits and receives 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX signals.

The four GE electrical interfaces of the N1EGS4/N4EGS4 are of the same type and have the same usage. Table 2 describes the types and
usage of the electrical interfaces of the N1EGS4/N4EGS4.

Table 2 Electrical interfaces of the N1EGS4/N4EGS4

Interface Type of Interface Usage

GE RJ-45 (swappable) Transmits and receives 1000BASE-T signals.

Table 3 provides the pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface of the N1EGS4/N4EGS4.

Table 3 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface of the N1EGS4/N4EGS4

Pin Description

1 BI_DA+
2 BI_DA–
3 BI_DB+
4 BI_DC+
5 BI_DC–
6 BI_DB–
7 BI_DD+
8 BI_DD–

Parent topic: EGS4

13.10.4 Board Protection

The EGS4 supports the BPS, PPS, and DLAG protection.

otection Principle
When the BPS protection is provided for the EGS4, the GE and FE ports are protected by using the single-fed and selective-receiving
scheme. The EGS4 may be connected to many sets of communication equipment. Normally, the active board is working and services are
transmitted in two directions of the active link. On the standby link, the EGS4 disables the transmission of all ports. In this case, the ports
of the opposite board are in the link-down state. In addition, the opposite board enables the transmission but does not transmit services.
In this manner, the receive ports of the standby EGS4 are not in the link-down state. The solid lines in Figure 1 show how the EGS4 normally
works.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 314/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Normal working of the EGS4

BPS Protection

When the BPS protection is provided, if the active board detects the link-down state of any link, any fault in the board, or the offline state
of any board, the cross-connect board switches all the services to the standby board. In this manner, services are protected. The solid
lines in Figure 2 show how the BPS protection functions. The services numbered 1, 2 and 3 are all switched to the standby EGS4 and the
corresponding communication equipment.

Figure 2 Principle of the BPS protection for the EGS4

PPS Protection

When the PPS protection is provided, if the active board detects the link-down state of any link, the cross-connect board switches all the
services to the standby board. In this manner, services are protected. The solid lines in Figure 3 show how the PPS protection functions.
Only the service numbered 1 is switched to the standby EGS4 and the standby communication equipment.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 315/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 3 Principle of the PPS protection for the EGS4

NOTE:
In the case of the PPS, when a link failure occurs on a port, only the link services on the port are switched generally. If the services of two ports are associated, for
example, the services of port IP1 and port IP2 are converged into the same VCTRUNK, port IP1 and port IP2 are defined as associated ports. When one port of the
associated ports is faulty, the services of the entire associated port group are switched.

DLAG Protection

The DLAG is a group where the two mapping ports on two identical boards are aggregated to from a protection group, providing 1+1
protection for the ports. By default, the port on the active board is working, and the port on the standby board is protecting the working
port.
When the DLAG is configured, the cross-connect board switches all services from the active board to the standby board if the active
board detects a link failure on a port, a board offline event, or a board hardware failure. As shown in Figure 4, the services carried on port 1
are switched to port 1 of the standby EGS4 and the associated equipment.

Figure 4 Principle of the DLAG protection for the EGS4

CAUTION:
When the board-level protection is performed, the GE optical ports support the auto-negotiation and 1000M full-duplex mode.

ard Configuration
Two EGS4 boards should be configured on an NE to provide the board-level protection. One EGS4 is the active board and the other is the
standby board. When you configure the EGS4 board protection, ensure that the access capacity of the slot that houses the standby board

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 316/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
must not be less than the access capacity of the slot that houses the active board.

Parent topic: EGS4

13.11 EAS2
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the EAS2 (2-port
10xGE switching and processing board).

Application
The EAS2 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services.

Functions and Features

EAS2 boards support the transmission of 10 GE Ethernet services, LCAS, and test frame functions.

Front Panel
The front panel of the EAS2 has indicators, ports, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: EoS Boards

13.11.1 Application
The EAS2 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services.

Figure 1shows the typical networking and application of the Ethernet switching board. the Ethernet switching board accesses and
converges Ethernet services, and provides the Ethernet data with the following data features: Layer 2 switching, port isolation, flow
classification, traffic control, VLAN management, and priority configuration. In addition, the Ethernet switching board performs
encapsulation/decapsulation, virtual concatenation, and SDH mapping/demapping for data. The Ethernet switching board can be
interconnected with the bandwidth access equipment and the data communication equipment at the same time, thus to provide a
network-level solution.

Figure 1 Networking and application of the Ethernet switching board

Parent topic: EAS2

13.11.2 Functions and Features

EAS2 boards support the transmission of 10 GE Ethernet services, LCAS, and test frame functions.
Table 1 lists the functions and features supported by EAS2 boards.

Table 1 Functions and features supported by EAS2 boards

Function and Description
Feature

Basic functions Receives/Transmits 2x10 GE Ethernet services.

Port types Supports 10GBASE-LR and 10GBASE-LW Ethernet optical ports, which comply with IEEE 802.3ae.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 317/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Description

Feature

Functions when Provides ports on the front panel.

being used with
an interface
board
Port Working 10GE full-duplex in both WAN mode and LAN mode
characteristics mode
Traffic control Auto-negotiation mode Not supported
mode at ports
Non-autonegotiation mode Supported
Query/Setting Supported
of port status
Query of port Supported
types
Setting of Not supported
optical power
thresholds
Pluggable XFP optical modules supported on N1EAS2 boards
optical SFP+ optical modules supported on N3EAS2 boards
module
N3EAS2 supports one-fiber bidirectional optical modules.

Service Ethernet Supports PORT-based transparent transmission.

categories private line
(EPL) service
Ethernet Supports PORT-shared EVPL services.
virtual private
Supports VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services.
line (EVPL)
service The services are isolated by VLAN tags.
The services are isolated by MPLS tags (supported on N3EAS2 boards).
The services are isolated by QinQ tags.
Supports a maximum of 2048 links in the case of the N1EAS2; supports a maximum of 4096 links in the
case of the N3EAS2.

Ethernet Supports a maximum of one virtual bridge (VB) on N1EAS2 boards. The maximum number of logical ports
private LAN for each VB is 26.
(EPLAN)
Supports a maximum of one VB on N3EAS2 boards. The maximum number of logical ports for each VB is
service
19 (slot bandwidth: 10G bit/s) or 36 (slot bandwidth: 20G bit/s)
Supports the blacklist that can contain 512 records and also the static media access control (MAC) address
table that can contain 512 records.
Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The capacity of the MAC address table is 16K. The
aging time of the MAC address can be set and queried.
Supports the configuration of static MAC routes.
Supports the query of the aging time of an MAC address.
Supports the query of learned MAC addresses by VB+VLAN or VB+LP.
Supports EPLAN services that are based on IEEE 802.1d MAC bridges.

Ethernet Supports EVPLAN services that use stack VLAN encapsulation.

virtual private
Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN.
LAN (EVPLAN)
Supports a maximum of one virtual bridge (VB) on N1EAS2 boards. The maximum number of logical ports
service
for each VB is 26.
Supports a maximum of one VB on N3EAS2 boards. The maximum number of logical ports for each VB is
19 (slot bandwidth: 10G bit/s) or 36 (slot bandwidth: 20G bit/s)
Supports EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1q virtual bridges and IEEE 802.1ad provider bridges.

Service Formats of IEEE 802.3 Supported

specifications Ethernet data
Ethernet II Supported
frames
IEEE 802.1 q/p Supported
Frame length Supports the setting of the frame length to a value ranging from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes.
range
Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes.

Concatenation The following adjacent concatenation granularities are supported on N1EAS2 boards: VC-4-Xv (X≤8), VC-3-Xv
granularities (X≤24), and VC-4-4c.
The following adjacent concatenation granularities are supported on N3EAS2 boards: VC-4-Xv (X≤64) and VC-4-
4c/16c/64c.

NOTE:
For N3EAS2 boards, VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK18 support VC-4-16c/64c adjacent concatenation. Other VCTRUNKs only support VC-4-4c
adjacent concatenation.
N3EAS2 boards support adjacent concatenation only for bidirectional services.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 318/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Description

Feature

Encapsulation HDLC Not supported

formats
LAPS Not supported
GFP-F Supported
MPLS Not supported on N1EAS2 boards
technology Tunnel-based EVPL (transit) supported on N3EAS2 boards

VLAN Supports a total number of 4094 VLANs, which comply with IEEE 802.1q/p.
technology
Maximum An N1EAS2 board supports a maximum of 10 Gbit/s upstream bandwidth and can adapt to the bandwidth of its
uplink slot.
bandwidth An N3EAS2 board supports a maximum of 20 Gbit/s upstream bandwidth and can adapt to the bandwidth of its
slot.

Maximum N1EAS2: 64xVC-4 or 192xVC-3

bound N3EAS2: 128xVC-4
bandwidth
VCTRUNK
An N1EAS2 board supports a maximum of 24 VCTRUNKs.
specifications
Configuration guidelines are as follows:
Each VC channel can be bound only to one VCTRUNK.
A VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of 8 VC-4s or a maximum of 24 VC-3s.
A VCTRUNK can be bound only with VC-4 paths or VC-3 paths. Different VCTRUNKs, however, can be
bound with paths at different levels.
N1EAS2 boards support VC-4-4c adjacent concatenation and VC-3/VC-4 virtual concatenation.
Only VCTRUNKs numbered 1-4 support the Jumbo frame with a length of 9600 bytes. The other VCG ports
do not support the Jumbo frame.
The maximum number of VCTRUNKs supported by the N3EAS2 board is as follows:
If the slot bandwidth is 10 Gbit/s, the maximum number is 17 (VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK17).
If the slot bandwidth is 20 Gbit/s, the maximum number is 34 (VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK34).
Configuration guidelines are as follows:
Each VC channel can be bound only to one VCTRUNK.
VCTRUNK 1 and VCTRUNK 18 can be bound with a maximum of 64 VC-4s, and other VCTRUNKs can be
bound with a maximum of 8 VC-4s.
VCTRUNK 1 to VCTRUNK 17 can be bound only with VC-4-1 to VC-4-64, and VCTRUNK 18 to VCTRUNK 34
can be bound only with VC-4-65 to VC-4-128.

Protection TPS Not supported

schemes BPS Not supported
PPS Not supported
DLAG Supported
LAG
Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation.
Supports the load sharing mode and load non-sharing mode.
Complies with IEEE 802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX.
LCAS Supports LCAS, which dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in compliance
with ITU-T G.7042.
LPT Supports P2P LPT and P2MP LPT in compliance with Huawei proprietary protocol.
STP/RSTP Supports the broadcast packet suppression function and RSTP, which comply with IEEE 802.1w.
MSTP
Not supported on N1EAS2 boards
Supported on N3EAS2 boards
ERPS
Not supported on N1EAS2 boards
Supported on N3EAS2 boards

NOTE:
ERPS does not support the following bridges:
IEEE 802.1d bridge
IEEE 802.1ad bridge with SVL/ingress filter disabled

Synchronization Synchronous Not supported

Ethernet
IEEE 1588v2 Not supported

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 319/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Description

Feature

Maintenance ETH OAM Supports CC, LB tests, and LT tests in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag, and OAM ping in compliance with
features Huawei proprietary protocol.
Supports OAM auto-discovery, remote loopbacks, fault detection, and link performance detection in
compliance with IEEE 802.3ah, and selfloop detection in compliance with Huawei proprietary protocol on
N3EAS2 boards.

Test Frame Supports test frames in ETH and GFP bearer modes.
Response to Supported
ping
Port Mirroring Supports ingress and egress mirroring.
Loopback PHY layer at Ethernet ports Supports inloops.
capability
MAC layer at Ethernet ports Supports inloops.
VC-4 level Not supported
VC-3 level Not supported
VC-12 level Not supported
RMON
Supports Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level.
Supports the query of the rate of a port.
Reports an alarm when the volume of traffic at a port exceeds the threshold (this function is available on
N3EAS2 boards).

Warm resets Supported (Warm resets do not affect services.)

Cold resets Supported
Alarms and Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
performance equipment.
events
QoS
Supports traffic classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN, PORT+VLAN+VLAN PRI, PORT+SVLAN, PORT+SVLAN+CVLAN,
MPLS labels, or MPLS label+EXP value.
Supports the CAR. The granularity is 64 kbit/s.
Each port supports eight priority queues.
Supports shaping based on ports or queues.
IGMP Snooping Protocol Supported
enabling
Port aging Supported
time
Fast leave Not supported
Discarding of Not supported
unknown
broadcast
packets
Static Supported
broadcast
entry
Hub/Spoke Supported
Traffic control Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.

NOTE:
Only EPL services support port-based traffic control.

Parent topic: EAS2

13.11.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the EAS2 has indicators, ports, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

The appearance of the EAS2 front panel is shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 320/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the N1EAS2

Figure 2 Front panel of the N3EAS2

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware state indicator (STAT) - two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) - one color (green)

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 321/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Board software status indicator (PROG) - two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) - three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Connection status indicator (LINK) - one color (green)
Data receiving and transmitting indicator (ACT) - one color (orange)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

rts
The front panel of the EAS2 provides two 10GE ports. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the ports.

Table 1 Ports on an EAS2 board

Port Connector Type Usage

IN1-IN2 LC Receives 10GE signals.

OUT1-OUT2 LC Transmits 10GE signals.

Parent topic: EAS2

13.12 EFF8
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the EFF8 (8x100M
Ethernet optical interface board).

Application
The EFF8 is an Ethernet optical interface board. The EFF8 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive
100M Ethernet optical signals for the data board.

Functions and Features

The EFF8 receives and transmits 8x100M Ethernet optical signals. The EFF8 must work with the Ethernet processing board.

Front Panel
The front panel of the EFF8 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: EoS Boards

13.12.1 Application
The EFF8 is an Ethernet optical interface board. The EFF8 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive 100M
Ethernet optical signals for the data board.

Parent topic: EFF8

13.12.2 Functions and Features

The EFF8 receives and transmits 8x100M Ethernet optical signals. The EFF8 must work with the Ethernet processing board.

Parent topic: EFF8

13.12.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the EFF8 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EFF8.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 322/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the EFF8

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Eight connection status indicators (LINK) – one color (green)

Eight data receiving and transmission indicators (ACT) – one color (orange)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the EFF8 has eight optical interfaces.
Table 1 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the EFF8.

Table 1 Interfaces of the EFF8

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN1–IN8 LC Receives the 1st to the 8th channels of Ethernet optical signals.
OUT1–OUT8 LC Transmits the 1st to the 8th channels of Ethernet optical signals.

Parent topic: EFF8

13.13 EFF8A
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the EFF8A (8x100M
Ethernet optical interface board).

Application
The EFF8A is an Ethernet optical interface board. The EFF8A can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive
100M Ethernet optical signals for the data board.

Functions and Features

The EFF8A receives and transmits 8x100M Ethernet optical signals. The EFF8A must work with the N5EFS0.

Front Panel
The front panel of the EFF8A has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: EoS Boards

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 323/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

13.13.1 Application
The EFF8A is an Ethernet optical interface board. The EFF8A can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive
100M Ethernet optical signals for the data board.

Parent topic: EFF8A

13.13.2 Functions and Features

The EFF8A receives and transmits 8x100M Ethernet optical signals. The EFF8A must work with the N5EFS0.

Parent topic: EFF8A

13.13.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the EFF8A has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EFF8A.
Figure 1 Front panel of the EFF8A

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Eight connection status indicators (LINK) – one color (green)

Eight data receiving and transmission indicators (ACT) – one color (orange)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the EFF8A has eight optical interfaces.
Table 1 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the EFF8A.

Table 1 Interfaces of the EFF8A

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 324/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN1–IN8 LC Receives the 1st to the 8th channels of Ethernet optical signals.
OUT1–OUT8 LC Transmits the 1st to the 8th channels of Ethernet optical signals.

Parent topic: EFF8A

13.14 ETF8
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the ETF8 (8x100M
Ethernet twisted pair interface board).

Application
The ETF8 is an Ethernet electrical interface board. The ETF8 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive
100M Ethernet electrical signals for the data board.

Functions and Features

The ETF8 receives and transmits 8x100M Ethernet electrical signals. The ETF8 must work with the Ethernet processing board.

Front Panel
The front panel of the ETF8 has interfaces and a bar code.

Parent topic: EoS Boards

13.14.1 Application
The ETF8 is an Ethernet electrical interface board. The ETF8 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive
100M Ethernet electrical signals for the data board.

Parent topic: ETF8

13.14.2 Functions and Features

The ETF8 receives and transmits 8x100M Ethernet electrical signals. The ETF8 must work with the Ethernet processing board.

Parent topic: ETF8

13.14.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the ETF8 has interfaces and a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the ETF8.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 325/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the ETF8

erfaces
The front panel of the ETF8 has eight electrical interfaces.
Table 1 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the ETF8. For information about the cables connected to the interfaces, see Straight-
Through Cable and Crossover Cable.

Table 1 Interfaces of the ETF8

Interface Type of Interface Usage

FE1–FE8 RJ-45 Receives the 1st to the 8th channels of Ethernet electrical signals.

Table 2 provides the pin assignments of the RJ45 connector of the ETF8.

Table 2 Pin assignments of the RJ45 connector of the ETF8

Front View Pin Description

1 Transmitting (+)
2 Transmitting (–)
3 Receiving (+)
4 Grounding
5 Grounding
6 Receiving (–)
7 Grounding
8 Grounding

Parent topic: ETF8

13.15 ETF8A
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the ETF8A (8x100M
Ethernet twisted pair interface board).

Application
The ETF8A is an Ethernet electrical interface board. The ETF8A can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and
receive 100M Ethernet electrical signals for the data board.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 326/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Functions and Features
The ETF8A receives and transmits 8x100M Ethernet electrical signals. The ETF8A must work with the N5EFS0.

Front Panel
The front panel of the ETF8A has interfaces and a bar code.

Parent topic: EoS Boards

13.15.1 Application
The ETF8A is an Ethernet electrical interface board. The ETF8A can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive
100M Ethernet electrical signals for the data board.

Parent topic: ETF8A

13.15.2 Functions and Features

The ETF8A receives and transmits 8x100M Ethernet electrical signals. The ETF8A must work with the N5EFS0.

Parent topic: ETF8A

13.15.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the ETF8A has interfaces and a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the ETF8A.

Figure 1 Front panel of the ETF8A

erfaces
The front panel of the ETF8A has eight electrical interfaces.
Table 1 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the ETF8A. For information about the cables connected to the interfaces, see
and Crossover Cable.
Straight-Through Cable

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 327/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Table 1 Interfaces of the ETF8A

Interface Type of Interface Usage

FE1–FE8 RJ-45 Receives the 1st to the 8th channels of Ethernet electrical signals.

Table 2 provides the pin assignments of the RJ45 connector of the ETF8A.

Table 2 Pin assignments of the RJ45 connector of the ETF8A

Front View Pin Description

1 Transmitting (+)
2 Transmitting (–)
3 Receiving (+)
4 Grounding
5 Grounding
6 Receiving (–)
7 Grounding
8 Grounding

Parent topic: ETF8A

13.16 ETS8
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the ETS8 (8x10/100M
Ethernet twisted pair interface switching board).

Application
The ETS8 is an Ethernet electrical interface protection switching board. The ETS8 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to
realize the TPS protection on the data board.

Functions and Features

The ETS8 is used to provide the TPS protection for 8xFE signals at the electrical interface. The ETS8 must work with the EFS0 or
EFS0A.

Front Panel
The front panel of the ETS8 has interfaces and a bar code.

Parent topic: EoS Boards

13.16.1 Application
The ETS8 is an Ethernet electrical interface protection switching board. The ETS8 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to
realize the TPS protection on the data board.

Parent topic: ETS8

13.16.2 Functions and Features

The ETS8 is used to provide the TPS protection for 8xFE signals at the electrical interface. The ETS8 must work with the EFS0 or EFS0A.

Parent topic: ETS8

13.16.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the ETS8 has interfaces and a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the ETS8.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 328/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the ETS8

erfaces
The front panel of the ETS8 has eight electrical interfaces.
Table 1 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the ETS8. For information about the cables connected to the interfaces, see Straight-
Through Cable and Crossover Cable.

Table 1 Interfaces of the ETS8

Interface Type of Interface Usage

FE1–FE8 RJ-45 Receives the 1st to the 8th channels of Ethernet electrical signals.

Table 2 provides the pin assignments of the RJ45 connector of the ETS8.

Table 2 Pin assignments of the RJ45 connector of the ETS8

Front View Pin Description

1 Transmitting (+)
2 Transmitting (–)
3 Receiving (+)
4 Grounding
5 Grounding
6 Receiving (–)
7 Grounding
8 Grounding

Parent topic: ETS8

14 RPR Boards
The RPR boards include FE/GE Ethernet ring processing boards.

EGR2
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the EGR2 (2xGE
ring processing board).

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 329/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
EMR0
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the EMR0
(12xFE and 1xGE ring processing board).

Parent topic: Description of Common Hardware

14.1 EGR2
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the EGR2 (2xGE ring
processing board).

Application
The EGR2 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services.

Functions and Features

The EGR2 supports the Layer 2 switching, port aggregation, and RPR functions.

Front Panel
The front panel of the EGR2 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: RPR Boards

14.1.1 Application
The EGR2 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services.

shows the typical networking and application of the RPR board. The RPR board accesses and converges Ethernet services, and
Figure 1
provides the Ethernet data with the following data features: Layer 2 switching, port isolation, flow classification, traffic control, VLAN
management, and priority configuration. In addition, the RPR board performs encapsulation/decapsulation, virtual concatenation, and
SDH mapping/demapping for data. The RPR board can be interconnected with the bandwidth access equipment and the data
communication equipment at the same time, thus to provide a network-level solution.

NOTE:
When the service converging FE services into GE services is configured, the GE switching board can be set to the 1000M full-duplex mode or auto-negotiation mode,
the VLAN of the convergence service is variable, and the binding granularity is at the VC-3 or VC-4 level.

Figure 1 Networking and application of the RPR board

Parent topic: EGR2

14.1.2 Functions and Features

The EGR2 supports the Layer 2 switching, port aggregation, and RPR functions.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the EGR2.

Table 1 Functions and features of the EGR2

Function and Feature EGR2

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 330/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature EGR2

Basic functions Transmits/Receives and processes 2xGE services.

Supports the RPR feature.

Functions when being used with the Transmits/Receives 2xGE signals by providing interfaces on the front panel.
interface board
Specifications of the optical The optical interfaces are 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX Ethernet optical interfaces.
interface
The optical interfaces support the auto-negotiation function in compliance with IEEE 802.3z.
The optical interfaces use the SFP optical module and support hot swapping.
When the multi-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission distance is 550 m.
When the single-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission distance is 10 km.
The optical modules that can meet different requirements for the transmission distance such
as 40 km and 80 km can also be used.

Format of service frames Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1 q/p formats.
Supports the setting of the frame length to a value ranging from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes.
Supports the Jumbo frame with a length less than 9600 bytes.

Maximum uplink bandwidth 2.5 Gbit/s

The EGR2 can adapt to the bandwidth of the slot.

Mapping granularities Supports VC-3, VC3-Xv (X≤2), VC-4 and VC4-Xv (X≤8) granularities.

NOTE:
VC-3 virtual concatenation on the SDH side supports only one or two VC-3s. In addition, only the first two VC-3 timeslots of the first VC-4 in
the first STM-4 frame of each VCTRUNK can be used.

Encapsulation format Supports the GFP-F and LAPS protocols.

EVPL services Supports EVPL services. The frame format can be Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q TAG, or MPLS
Martini.
Supports the MPLS encapsulation and forwarding based on PORT or PORT+VLAN.
Supports five types of LSPs, including ingress LSP, egress LSP, transit LSP, RPR ingress LSP, and RPR
transit LSP.
Supports a maximum of 512 LSPs.

EVPLAN services Supports EVPLAN services that use the stack VLAN encapsulation.
Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The capacity of the MAC address table in the N2
functional version is 64K. The aging time of the MAC address can be set and queried.
Supports the blacklist that can contain 4K records and also the static MAC address table that can
contain 4K records. The sum of the number of records in the blacklist and the number of addresses in
the static MAC address table must not exceed 4K.
Supports the configuration of the static MAC routes. A maximum of 4K static MAC routes can be
configured.
Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN.
Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. The maximum number of supported VBs is 16.
The maximum number of logical ports for each VB is 32.

MPLS Supports MartinioE.

VLAN Supports 4094 VLAN tags, and the addition, deletion, and exchanging of VLAN tags in compliance with
IEEE 802.1q/p.
Supports the replacement of VLAN tags in Ethernet signal frames.
Supports the stack VLAN.

Link aggregation function Supports the aggregation of the links of two GE ports.
RPR Supports the RPR feature that complies with IEEE 802.17.
Supports a maximum of 255 nodes on the ring network, and supports stripping at the destination
node and weighted fairness algorithm.
Supports five priority levels, including A0, A1, B_EIR, B_CIR, and C, and supports automatic discovery of
topologies, which can display the network status in real time.
Supports three protection modes, including Steering, Wrapping, and Wrapping+Steering. Hence, the
signal failure time is less than 50 ms.
Supports the manual configuration of routes for the services on the RPR ring network.
Supports the self-learning of routes on the ring, that is, supports the learning of mapping between
MAC addresses and node numbers.

RSTP Supports the broadcast packet suppression and RSTP, which comply with IEEE 802.1w.
IGMP Snooping Supports the IGMP snooping function.
QoS
Supports the CAR. The granularity is 64 kbit/s.
Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, or PORT+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 331/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature EGR2

LCAS function Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T
G.7042.
Flow control function Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.
IEEE 1588v2 Not supported.
Echo test frames Supports the echo function specified in the RPR OAM function, which is used to test the connectivity of the
link.
Port Mirroring Does not support port mirroring.
Loopback function Supports inloops on Ethernet ports (at the PHY layer or MAC layer).
Protection schemes Supports the following protection schemes at the Ethernet network level:
STP/RSTP
LCAS
LAG
LPT

Ethernet performance monitoring Supports Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level.
Alarms and performance events Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
equipment.
Warm resets EGR2 boards support warm resets. If a warm reset is performed on an EGR2 board, traffic on the board is
interrupted.
Cold resets Supported
Weighted fairness algorithm Supports the weighted fairness algorithm.
Automatic discovery of topologies Supports the automatic discovery of topologies.
Maximum number of supported 255
nodes
Service priority levels Supports A0, A1, B_CIR, B_EIR, and C.

Parent topic: EGR2

14.1.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the EGR2 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EGR2.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 332/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the EGR2

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Connection status indicator (LINK) – one color (green)
Data receiving and transmission indicator (ACT) – one color (orange)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the EGR2 has two optical interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the EGR2.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the EGR2

Interface Type of Interface Usage

OUT1/IN1 LC (swappable) Transmits and receives 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX signals.

OUT2/IN2 LC (swappable) Transmits and receives 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX signals.

Parent topic: EGR2

14.2 EMR0
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the EMR0 (12xFE and
1xGE ring processing board).

Application
The EMR0 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services.

Functions and Features

The EMR0 supports the Layer 2 switching, port aggregation, and RPR functions.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 333/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Front Panel
The front panel of the EMR0 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: RPR Boards

14.2.1 Application
The EMR0 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services.

shows the typical networking and application of the RPR board. The RPR board accesses and converges Ethernet services, and
Figure 1
provides the Ethernet data with the following data features: Layer 2 switching, port isolation, flow classification, traffic control, VLAN
management, and priority configuration. In addition, the RPR board performs encapsulation/decapsulation, virtual concatenation, and
SDH mapping/demapping for data. The RPR board can be interconnected with the bandwidth access equipment and the data
communication equipment at the same time, thus to provide a network-level solution.

NOTE:
When the service converging FE services into GE services is configured, the GE switching board can be set to the 1000M full-duplex mode or auto-negotiation mode,
the VLAN of the convergence service is variable, and the binding granularity is at the VC-3 or VC-4 level.

Figure 1 Networking and application of the RPR board

Parent topic: EMR0

14.2.2 Functions and Features

The EMR0 supports the Layer 2 switching, port aggregation, and RPR functions.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the EMR0.

Table 1 Functions and features of the EMR0

Function and Feature EMR0

Basic functions Transmits/Receives and processes 12xFE services and 1xGE services.
Supports the RPR feature.

Functions when being used with the Supports four FE ports and one GE port.
interface board
Transmits/Receives 12xFE signals through the electrical interfaces and 1xGE signals through the
optical interfaces when the EMR0 is used with the ETF8.
Transmits/Receives 8xFE signals and 1xGE signals through the optical interfaces and 4xFE signals
through the electrical interfaces when the EMR0 is used with the EFF8.

Specifications of the optical Supports the 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX Ethernet optical interface in compliance with IEEE 802.3z.
interface
Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when the EMR0 is used with the ETF8. The maximum
transmission distance is 100 m.
Supports 100BASE-FX signals in compliance with IEEE 802.3u when the EMR0 is used with the EFF8.

Format of service frames Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1q/p formats.
Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes.
Supports the Jumbo frame with a length less than 9600 bytes.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 334/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature EMR0

Maximum uplink bandwidth 2.5 Gbit/s

The EMR0 can adapt to the bandwidth of the slot.

Mapping granularities Supports VC-3, VC3-Xv (X≤2), VC-4 and VC4-Xv (X≤8) granularities.

NOTE:
VC-3 virtual concatenation on the SDH side supports only two VC-3s. In addition, only the first two VC-3 timeslots of the first VC-4 in the first
STM-4 frame of each VCTRUNK can be used.

Encapsulation format Supports the GFP-F and LAPS protocols.

EPL services Supports the PORT-based transparent transmission.

EVPL services Supports EVPL services. The frame format can be Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, or IEEE 802.1q/p.
Supports the MPLS encapsulation and forwarding based on PORT or PORT+VLAN.
Supports five types of LSPs, including ingress LSP, egress LSP, transit LSP, RPR ingress LSP, and RPR
transit LSP.
Supports a maximum of 512 LSPs.

EVPLAN services Supports EVPLAN services that use the QinQ encapsulation.
Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The capacity of the MAC address table in the
N2 functional version is 64K. The capacity of the MAC address table in the N1 functional version is
16K. The aging time of the MAC address can be set and queried.
Supports the blacklist that can contain 4K records and also the static MAC address table that can
contain 4K records. The sum of the number of records in the blacklist and the number of addresses in
the static MAC address table must not exceed 4K.
Supports the configuration of the static MAC routes. A maximum of 4K static MAC routes can be
configured.
Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN.
Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. The maximum number of VBs supported by the
N2EMR0 is 16. The maximum number of logical ports for each VB is 32.
Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1q virtual bridge.

MPLS Supports MartinioE.

VLAN Supports 4094 VLAN tags, and the addition, deletion, and exchanging of VLAN tags in compliance
with IEEE 802.1q/p.
Supports the replacement of VLAN tags in Ethernet signal frames.
Supports the stack VLAN.

Link aggregation function(LAG) Supports the aggregation of the links of a maximum of eight FE ports.
RPR Supports the RPR feature that complies with IEEE 802.17.
Supports a maximum of 255 nodes on the ring network, and supports stripping at the destination
node and weighted fairness algorithm.
Supports five priority levels, including A0, A1, B_EIR, B_CIR, and C, and supports automatic discovery of
topologies, which can display the network status in real time.
Supports three protection modes, including Steering, Wrapping, and Wrapping+Steering. Hence, the
signal failure time is less than 50 ms.
Supports the self-learning of routes on the ring, that is, supports the learning of mapping between
MAC addresses and node numbers.
The N2EMR0 supports the manual configuration of routes for the services on the RPR ring network.

RSTP Supports the broadcast packet suppression and RSTP, which comply with IEEE 802.1w.
IGMP Snooping Supports the IGMP snooping function.
QoS function Supports the CAR. The granularity is 64 kbit/s.
The N2EMR0 supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, or PORT+VLAN
ID+VLAN PRI.

LCAS function Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T
G.7042.
Flow control function Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.
Echo test frames Supports the echo function specified in the RPR OAM function, which is used to test the connectivity of the
link.
Loopback function Supports inloops on Ethernet ports (at the PHY layer or MAC layer).
Protection schemes Supports the following protection schemes at the Ethernet network level:
STP/RSTP
LCAS
LAG

Ethernet performance monitoring Supports Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level.
Alarms and performance events Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the
equipment.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 335/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature EMR0

Warm resets EMR0 boards support warm resets. If a warm reset is performed on an EMR0 board, traffic on the board is
interrupted.
Cold resets Supported
Weighted fairness algorithm Supports the weighted fairness algorithm.
Automatic discovery of topologies Supports the automatic discovery of topologies.
Maximum number of supported 255
nodes
Service priority levels Supports A0, A1, B_CIR, B_EIR, and C.

Parent topic: EMR0

14.2.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the EMR0 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EMR0.
Figure 1 Front panel of the EMR0

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Connection status indicator (LINK) – one color (green)
Data receiving and transmission indicator (ACT) – one color (orange)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 336/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
The front panel of the EMR0 has five interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of EMR0.

Table 1 Interfaces of the EMR0

Interface Type of Interface Usage

OUT1/IN1 LC (swappable) Transmits and receives 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX signals.

FE1 RJ-45 Transmits and receives 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals.
FE2 RJ-45 Transmits and receives 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals.
FE3 RJ-45 Transmits and receives 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals.
FE4 RJ-45 Transmits and receives 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals.

Parent topic: EMR0

15 PCM Boards
The PCM boards include the FXS/FXO processing board, 2-/4- wire and E&M processing board, DX1 board and DM12 board.

FXSO12
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the FXSO12
(12-port FXS/FXO processing board).

FXS12
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the FXS12 (12-
port FXS processing board).

FXO12
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the FXO12 (12-
port FXO processing board).

AT6
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the AT6 (6-port
2-/4- wire and E&M processing board).

DX1
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the DX1 (DDN
service accessing and converging board).

DM12
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the DM12 (DDN
service interface board).

Parent topic: Description of Common Hardware

15.1 FXSO12
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the FXSO12 (12-port
FXS/FXO processing board).

Application
An FXSO12 board provides 12xFXS/FXO ports, and transmits or receives analog voice signals for voice sessions.

Functions and Features

An FXSO12 board transmits or receives 12-channel analog voice signals, and provides alarms and events for maintenance.

Front Panel
The front panel of the FXSO12 has indicators, ports, and a bar code.

Parent topic: PCM Boards

15.1.1 Application
An FXSO12 board provides 12xFXS/FXO ports, and transmits or receives analog voice signals for voice sessions.
Figure 1 and Figure 2 show two typical application scenarios of the board.

Application 1: FXS and FXO ports are configured in pairs, providing the Z-interface extension function.
Application 2: FXS and FXS ports are configured in pairs, providing the hotline function.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 337/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Z-interface extension

Figure 2 Hotline

Parent topic: FXSO12

15.1.2 Functions and Features

An FXSO12 board transmits or receives 12-channel analog voice signals, and provides alarms and events for maintenance.
Table 1 provides the functions and features supported by an FXSO12 board.

Table 1 Functions and features supported by an FXSO12 board

Function and Feature Description

Basic functions Provides 12 FXS/FXO ports, which can be configured on the NMS.
Supports the BROSCHT function. For details, see BROSCHT.

Port External ports: DDN-1 to DDN-12, representing 12 external ports which always use timeslot 1, with port IDs 1
to 12, respectively.
Internal ports: 2M-1 to 2M-12, representing 12 E1 internal ports which use timeslots 1-15 and 17-31, with port
IDs 65 to 76, respectively.
Supports the setting of the port working mode to PCM30/PCM30 CRC.

Service processing Transmits/Receives and processes 12-channel 64 kbit/s signals.

Overhead processing Supports the setting and query of the V5 and J2 bytes.
Alarms and events Provides alarms and events for maintenance and fault locating.
Maintenance features Supports warm and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.

Parent topic: FXSO12

15.1.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the FXSO12 has indicators, ports, and a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the FXSO12.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 338/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the FXSO12

icators

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) - one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) - two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) - three colors (red, green, and yellow)

Alarm Indicators on the Boards provides the meanings of indicator states.

rts
The front panel of the FXSO12 has twelve electrical ports. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the electrical ports of the FXSO12.

Table 1 Electrical ports of the board

Port Type of Port Usage

1-12 RJ-11 Receives or transmits electrical signals.

Table 2 Pins of the RJ-11 ports

Pin Usage

1 No connected
2 Ring
3 Tip
4 No connected

NOTE:
FXSO12 needs to connect to an external protective unit if its ports need to meet K.20 surge current test requirements.

Parent topic: FXSO12

15.2 FXS12
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the FXS12 (12-port
FXS processing board).

Application
An FXS12 board provides 12 FXS ports, and transmits or receives analog voice signals for voice sessions.

Functions and Features

An FXS12 board transmits or receives 12-channel analog voice signals, and provides alarms and events for maintenance.

Front Panel
The front panel of the FXS12 has indicators, ports, and a bar code.

Parent topic: PCM Boards

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 339/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

15.2.1 Application
An FXS12 board provides 12 FXS ports, and transmits or receives analog voice signals for voice sessions.
Figure 1 and Figure 2 show two typical application scenarios of the board.

Application 1: FXS and FXO ports are configured in pairs, providing the Z-interface extension function.
Application 2: FXS and FXS ports are configured in pairs, providing the hotline function.

Figure 1 Z-interface extension

Figure 2 Hotline

Parent topic: FXS12

15.2.2 Functions and Features

An FXS12 board transmits or receives 12-channel analog voice signals, and provides alarms and events for maintenance.
Table 1 provides the functions and features supported by an FXS12 board.

Table 1 Functions and features supported by an FXS12 board

Function and Feature Description

Basic functions Provides 12 FXS ports.

Supports the BROSCHT function. For details, see BROSCHT.

Port External ports: DDN-1 to DDN-12, representing 12 external ports which always use timeslot 1, with port IDs 1
to 12, respectively.
Internal ports: 2M-1 to 2M-12, representing 12 E1 internal ports which use timeslots 1-15 and 17-31, with port
IDs 65 to 76, respectively.
Supports the setting of the port working mode to PCM30/PCM30 CRC.

Service processing Transmits/Receives and processes 12-channel 64 kbit/s signals.

Overhead processing Supports the setting and query of the V5 and J2 bytes.
Alarms and events Provides alarms and events for maintenance and fault locating.
Maintenance features Supports warm and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.

Parent topic: FXS12

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 340/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

15.2.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the FXS12 has indicators, ports, and a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the FXS12.

Figure 1 Front panel of the FXS12

icators

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) - one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) - two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) - three colors (red, green, and yellow)

Alarm Indicators on the Boards provides the meanings of indicator states.

rts
The front panel of the FXS12 has twelve electrical ports. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the electrical ports of the FXS12.

Table 1 Electrical ports of the board

Port Type of Port Usage

1-12 RJ-11 Receives or transmits electrical signals.

Table 2 Pins of the RJ-11 ports

Pin Usage

1 No connected
2 Ring
3 Tip
4 No connected

NOTE:
The FXS12 needs to connect to an external protective unit if its ports need to meet K.20 surge current test requirements.

Parent topic: FXS12

15.3 FXO12
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the FXO12 (12-port
FXO processing board).

Application
An FXO12 board provides 12 FXO ports, and transmits or receives analog voice signals for voice sessions.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 341/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Functions and Features
An FXO12 board transmits or receives 12-channel analog voice signals, and provides alarms and events for maintenance.

Front Panel
The front panel of the FXO12 has indicators, ports, and a bar code.

Parent topic: PCM Boards

15.3.1 Application
An FXO12 board provides 12 FXO ports, and transmits or receives analog voice signals for voice sessions.
Figure 1 shows an application of FXO12 boards. FXS and FXO ports are configured in pairs, providing the Z-interface extension function.
Figure 1 Application of FXO12 boards

Parent topic: FXO12

15.3.2 Functions and Features

An FXO12 board transmits or receives 12-channel analog voice signals, and provides alarms and events for maintenance.
Table 1 provides the functions and features supported by an FXO12 board.

Table 1 Functions and features supported by an FXO12 board

Function and Feature Description

Basic functions Provides 12 FXO ports.

Port External ports: DDN-1 to DDN-12, representing 12 external ports which always use timeslot 1, with port IDs 1
to 12, respectively.
Internal ports: 2M-1 to 2M-12, representing 12 E1 internal ports which use timeslots 1-15 and 17-31, with port
IDs 65 to 76, respectively.
Supports the setting of the port working mode to PCM30/PCM30 CRC.

Service processing Transmits/Receives and processes 12-channel 64 kbit/s signals.

Overhead processing Supports the setting and query of the V5 and J2 bytes.
Alarms and events Provides alarms and events for maintenance and fault locating.
Maintenance features Supports warm and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.

Parent topic: FXO12

15.3.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the FXO12 has indicators, ports, and a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the FXO12.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 342/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the FXO12

icators

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) - one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) - two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) - three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of indicator states, see Alarm Indicators on the Boards.

rts
The front panel of the FXO12 has twelve electrical ports. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the electrical ports of the FXO12.

Table 1 Electrical ports of the board

Port Type of Port Usage

1-12 RJ-11 Receives or transmits electrical signals.

Table 2 Pins of the RJ-11 ports

Pin Usage

1 No connected
2 Ring
3 Tip
4 No connected

NOTE:
The FXO12 needs to connect to an external protective unit if its ports need to meet K.20 surge current test requirements.

Parent topic: FXO12

15.4 AT6
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the AT6 (6-port 2-/4-
wire and E&M processing board).

Application
An AT6 board provides six 2-/4-wire audio and E&M analog trunk ports, which transparently transmit signaling and voice signals
over a long distance.

Functions and Features

An AT6 board transmits/receives and processes six-channel analog voice signals or E&M signaling, and provides alarms and events
for maintenance.

Front Panel
The front panel of the AT6 has indicators, ports, and a bar code.

Parent topic: PCM Boards

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 343/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

15.4.1 Application
An AT6 board provides six 2-/4-wire audio and E&M analog trunk ports, which transparently transmit signaling and voice signals over a
long distance.
Figure 1 and Figure 2 show two typical application scenarios of AT6.

Application 1: PBXs are connected to OptiX OSN equipment through 2-/4-wire and E&M ports. Signaling is transmitted over E&M
port and voice services are transmitted over the 2-/4-wire. OptiX OSN equipment is equivalent to a signaling and voice relay.
Application 2: A single E&M port transmits only one channel of availability signals, generally remotely transferring
enabling/disabling signals to achieve remote control.

Figure 1 2-/4-wire audio and E&M relay

Figure 2 Point-to-point control signal transfer

Parent topic: AT6

15.4.2 Functions and Features

An AT6 board transmits/receives and processes six-channel analog voice signals or E&M signaling, and provides alarms and events for
maintenance.
Table 1 provides the functions and features supported by an AT6 board.

Table 1 Functions and features supported by an AT6 board

Function and Feature Description

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 344/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature Description

Basic functions Supports the E&M trunk functions.

An N1AT6 board supports only the 1E1M mode. An N2AT6 board supports both the 1E1M and 2E2M modes.
Supports 2-wire/4-wire audio signals.
An N1AT6 board supports the setting of 2-wire/4-wire audio modes by both setting DIP switches manually on
the board and using the NMS. An N2AT6 board supports the setting of 2-wire/4-wire audio modes using the
NMS.
N1AT6 VER.A: supports the Bell type V E&M signaling.
N1AT6 VER.B and N2AT6: support the Bell types I, II, III, IV, V and SSDC5 E&M signaling.
An N2AT6 board supports the association of signaling and services.
None: no to associate.
Signaling Reception: When the port reception status M wire is idle, the audio services sent to the
cross-connection side are invalid; when the M wire is busy, the audio services are valid.
Signaling Transmission: When the audio services received from the cross-connect side are invalid, the
port transmission status E wire is idle; when the services are valid, the E wire is busy.
Signaling Reception and Transmission: associates signaling with services in both the receive and
transmit directions.

NOTE:
When working in 2E2M mode, the board processes only the first channel of E&M signaling, if signaling and services are associated.

Port External ports:

N1AT6: DDN-1 to DDN-6, representing six external ports which always use timeslot 1, with port IDs 1
to 6, respectively.
N2AT6: an Anea 96 port, providing six logical ports each of which consists of 10 wires, representing
DDN-1 to DDN-6.
Internal ports: 2M-1 to 2M-6, representing six E1 internal ports which use timeslots 1-15 and 17-31, with port
IDs 65 to 70, respectively.

Service processing Transmits/Receives and processes six-channel 64 kbit/s signals.

Overhead processing Supports the setting and query of the V5 and J2 bytes.
Alarms and events Provides alarms and events for maintenance and fault locating.
Maintenance features Supports warm and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.

Parent topic: AT6

15.4.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the AT6 has indicators, ports, and a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the N1AT6.

Figure 1 Front panel of the N1AT6

Figure 2 shows the appearance of the front panel of the N2AT6.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 345/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 2 Front panel of the N2AT6

icators

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) - one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) - two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) - three colors (red, green, and yellow)

Each port on an N1AT6 board has two indicators. Status explanation for the indicators is as follows:

When the yellow indicator is on, the M wire in the port receives an off-hook signal; when the yellow indicator is off, the E
(transmitted signaling) wire in the port receives an on-hook signal. When the green indicator is on, the M (received signaling)
wire in the port receives an off-hook signal; when the green indicator is off, the E wire in the port receives an on-hook signal.
The indicators of an EM port not configured with services are off.

Each port on an N2AT6 board has two indicators, one for E1 and E2 wires and the other for M1 and M2 wires.

NOTE:
The E and M indicators on the front panel of the N2AT6 are defined in the signaling unit mode.

The indicator is a three-color indicator. Status explanation for the indicator is as follows:

When the indicator is green on, the E1 (first channel of transmitted signaling)/M1 (first channel of received signaling) wire
receives off-hook signaling.
When the indicator is red on, the E2 (second channel of transmitted signaling)/M2 (second channel of received signaling) wire
receives off-hook signaling.
When the indicator is yellow on, both E1 and E2 wires or both M1 and M2 wires receive off-hook signaling.
When the indicator is off, both E1 and E2 wires or both M1 and M2 wires receive on-hook signaling.

Alarm Indicators on the Boards provides the meanings of indicator states.

rts
The front panel of the AT6 has six electrical ports. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the electrical ports of the AT6.

Table 1 Electrical ports of the board

Port Type of Port Usage

1-6 RJ45 Transmits and receives electrical signals.

Table 2 describes the pins of the RJ45 ports.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 346/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Table 2 Pin assignments for an RJ45 port (N1AT6 with the PCB version being VER.A)
Pin Usage
4-Wire Audio 2-Wire Audio

1 Unused
2 E: transmits signaling.
3 Ring (TX-): transmits audio signals (-). Unused
4 Ring (RX-): receives audio signals (-). Ring: receives and transmits audio signals (-).
5 Tip (RX+): receives audio signals (+). Tip: receives and transmits audio signals (+).
6 TIP (TX+): transmits audio signals (+). Unused
7 M: receives signaling.
8 Unused

Table 3 Pin assignments for an RJ45 port (N1AT6 with the PCB version being VER.B)
Pin Usage
4-Wire Audio 2-Wire Audio

1 Signal ground (SG)

2 E: transmits signaling.
3 Ring (TX-): transmits audio signals (-). Unused
4 Ring (RX-): receives audio signals (-). Ring: receives and transmits audio signals (-).
5 Tip (RX+): receives audio signals (+). Tip: receives and transmits audio signals (+).
6 TIP (TX+): transmits audio signals (+). Unused
7 M: receives signaling.
8 Signal battery (SB)

NOTE:
The SB wire works with an E wire to transmit signaling if the E&M mode is trunk circuit and works with an M wire to receive signaling if the E&M mode is signaling unit.
The SG wire works with an M wire to transmit signaling if the E&M mode is trunk circuit and works with an E wire to receive signaling if the E&M mode is signaling unit.
The SB and SG wires apply to Bell II, III, and IV cables.

NOTE:
The AT6 needs to connect to an external protective unit if its ports need to meet K.20 surge current test requirements.

rts on an N2AT6 Board

An N2AT6 board provides an Anea 96 port on its front panel. For details about the port specifications, see Table 4.

Table 4 Ports of the board

Port Connector Type Description

E&M 2/4 Wire 1-6 Anea 96 A port that supports six channels of 1E1M,
2E2M, or 2-wire/4-wire analog trunk services

An N2AT6 board provides an Anea 96 port on its front panel. The port provides six logical ports each of which consists of 10 wires. The
following describes pin assignments of the Anea 96 port.

NOTE:

The SB wire works with an E wire to transmit signaling if the E&M mode is trunk circuit and works with an M wire to receive signaling if the E&M mode is
signaling unit.
The SG wire works with an M wire to transmit signaling if the E&M mode is trunk circuit and works with an E wire to receive signaling if the E&M mode is
signaling unit.
The SB and SG wires apply to Bell II, III, and IV cables.

Table 5 Pin assignments of an Anea 96 cable for 2/4-wire audio and E&M signals (N2AT6's port 1)
Port 4-Wire Audio 2-Wire Audio Pin No. Wire Color Relationship Tape Color

Audio port Ring (RX-) Ring 1 White Pair Blue 1

Tip (RX+) Tip 2 Blue
Ring (TX-) - 25 White Pair
Tip (TX+) - 26 Orange
E&M signaling E1 (first channel of E1 (first channel of 3 White pair
port transmitted received signaling)
signaling)
E2 (second channel E2 (second channel 4 Green
of transmitted of received
signaling) signaling)

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 347/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Port 4-Wire Audio 2-Wire Audio Pin No. Wire Color Relationship Tape Color

M1 (first channel of M1 (first channel of 27 White pair

received signaling) transmitted
signaling)
M2 (second channel M2 (second channel 28 Brown
of received of transmitted
signaling) signaling)
Signal battery (SB) Signal battery (SB) 5 White White wire in the
white-gray twisted
pair
Signal ground (SG) Signal ground (SG) 29 Red Red wire in the red-
blue twisted pair

Table 6 Pin assignments of an Anea 96 cable for 2/4-wire audio and E&M signals (N2AT6's port 2)
Port 4-Wire Audio 2-Wire Audio Pin No. Wire Color Relationship Tape Color

Audio port Ring (RX-) Ring 7 Red Pair Blue 1

Tip (RX+) Tip 8 Orange
Ring (TX-) - 31 Red Pair
Tip (TX+) - 32 Green
E&M signaling E1 (first channel of E1 (first channel of 9 Red Pair Blue 2
port transmitted received signaling)
signaling)
E2 (second channel E2 (second channel 10 Brown
of transmitted of received
signaling) signaling)
M1 (first channel of M1 (first channel of 33 Red Pair
received signaling) transmitted
signaling)
M2 (second channel M2 (second channel 34 Gray
of received of transmitted
signaling) signaling)
Signal battery (SB) Signal battery (SB) 6 Gray Gray wire in the Blue 1
white-gray twisted
pair
Signal ground (SG) Signal ground (SG) 30 Blue Blue wire in the red-
blue twisted pair

Table 7 Pin assignments of an Anea 96 cable for 2/4-wire audio and E&M signals (N2AT6's port 3)
Port 4-Wire Audio 2-Wire Audio Pin No. Wire Color Relationship Tape Color

Audio port Ring (RX-) Ring 11 Black Pair Blue 2

Tip (RX+) Tip 12 Blue
Ring (TX-) - 35 Black Pair
Tip (TX+) - 36 Orange
E&M signaling E1 (first channel of E1 (first channel of 13 Black Pair
port transmitted received signaling)
signaling)
E2 (second channel E2 (second channel 14 Green
of transmitted of received
signaling) signaling)
M1 (first channel of M1 (first channel of 37 Black Pair
received signaling) transmitted
signaling)
M2 (second channel M2 (second channel 38 Brown
of received of transmitted
signaling) signaling)
Signal battery (SB) Signal battery (SB) 15 Black Black wire in the
black-gray twisted
pair
Signal ground (SG) Signal ground (SG) 39 Yellow Yellow wire in the
yellow-blue twisted
pair

Table 8 Pin assignments of an Anea 96 cable for 2/4-wire audio and E&M signals (N2AT6's port 4)
Port 4-Wire Audio 2-Wire Audio Pin No. Wire Color Relationship Tape Color

Audio port Ring (RX-) Ring 17 White Pair Orange 1

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 348/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Port 4-Wire Audio 2-Wire Audio Pin No. Wire Color Relationship Tape Color

Tip (RX+) Tip 18 Blue

Ring (TX-) - 41 White Pair
Tip (TX+) - 42 Orange
E&M signaling E1 (first channel of E1 (first channel of 19 White Pair
port transmitted received signaling)
signaling)
E2 (second channel E2 (second channel 20 Green
of transmitted of received
signaling) signaling)
M1 (first channel of M1 (first channel of 43 White Pair
received signaling) transmitted
signaling)
M2 (second channel M2 (second channel 44 Brown
of received of transmitted
signaling) signaling)
Signal battery (SB) Signal battery (SB) 16 Gray Gray wire in the Blue 2
black-gray twisted
pair
Signal ground (SG) Signal ground (SG) 40 Blue Blue wire in the
yellow-blue twisted
pair

Table 9 Pin assignments of an Anea 96 cable for 2/4-wire audio and E&M signals (N2AT6's port 5)
Port 4-Wire Audio 2-Wire Audio Pin No. Wire Color Relationship Tape Color

Audio port Ring (RX-) Ring 21 White Pair Orange 1

Tip (RX+) Tip 22 Gray
Ring (TX-) - 45 Red Pair
Tip (TX+) - 46 Blue
E&M signaling E1 (first channel of E1 (first channel of 23 Red Pair
port transmitted received signaling)
signaling)
E2 (second channel E2 (second channel 24 Orange
of transmitted of received
signaling) signaling)
M1 (first channel of M1 (first channel of 47 Red Pair
received signaling) transmitted
signaling)
M2 (second channel M2 (second channel 48 Green
of received of transmitted
signaling) signaling)
Signal battery (SB) Signal battery (SB) 49 Red Red wire in the red- Orange 2
brown twisted pair
Signal ground (SG) Signal ground (SG) 73 Red Red wire in the red-
gray twisted pair

Table 10 Pin assignments of an Anea 96 cable for 2/4-wire audio and E&M signals (N2AT6's port 6)
Port 4-Wire Audio 2-Wire Audio Pin No. Wire Color Relationship Tape Color

Audio port Ring (RX-) Ring 51 Black Pair Orange 2

Tip (RX+) Tip 52 Blue
Ring (TX-) - 75 Black Pair
Tip (TX+) - 76 Orange
E&M signaling E1 (first channel of E1 (first channel of 53 Black Pair
port transmitted received signaling)
signaling)
E2 (second channel E2 (second channel 54 Green
of transmitted of received
signaling) signaling)
M1 (first channel of M1 (first channel of 77 Black Pair
received signaling) transmitted
signaling)
M2 (second channel M2 (second channel 78 Brown
of received of transmitted
signaling) signaling)

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 349/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Port 4-Wire Audio 2-Wire Audio Pin No. Wire Color Relationship Tape Color

Signal battery (SB) Signal battery (SB) 50 Brown Brown wire in the
red-brown twisted
pair
Signal ground (SG) Signal ground (SG) 74 Gray Gray wire in the red-
gray twisted pair

Parent topic: AT6

15.5 DX1
This topic describes the version, application, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the DX1 (DDN
service accessing and converging board).

Application
The DX1 is used on OptiX OSN equipment to receive and aggregate services and cross-connect 64 kbit/s system-side E1 signals.

Functions and Features

DX1 boards can receive, transmit, and process Nx64 kbit/s, framed E1, G.703 64 kbit/s co-directional, sub-rate, 2–/4–wire audio, and
E&M relay services.

Front Panel
The front panel of the DX1 has indicators.

Parent topic: PCM Boards

15.5.1 Application
The DX1 is used on OptiX OSN equipment to receive and aggregate services and cross-connect 64 kbit/s system-side E1 signals.

The N1DX1 works with the DM12 to receive eight channels of sub-rate/eight channels of Nx64 kbit/s services and eight channels of
framed E1 services, as well as cross-connect 48 channels of 64 kbit/s system-side E1 signals.
The N3DX1 can receive eight channels of PCM services through ports on its front panel. It can also work with the DM12 to receive eight
channels of framed E1 services, eight channels of sub-rate services/eight channels of Nx64 kbit/s services, and eight channels of G.703 64
kbit/s codirectional services, cross-connect 63 channels of 64 kbit/s system-side E1 signals and 8 kbit/s signals, and support PCM
conference services, multiplexer services, and E1 DCN.
Figure 1 shows the application of the DX1. The DX1 boards add/drop tributary signals to/from line signals.

Figure 1 Networking and application of the DX1

Parent topic: DX1

15.5.2 Functions and Features

DX1 boards can receive, transmit, and process Nx64 kbit/s, framed E1, G.703 64 kbit/s co-directional, sub-rate, 2–/4–wire audio, and E&M
relay services.
Table 1 and Table 2 provide the functions and features of the DX1.

Table 1 Functions and features of the N1DX1

Function and Feature DX1

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 350/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature DX1

Basic functions Works with the interface board to receive, process, and transmit eight channels of Nx64 kbit/s services (1≤N≤31)
and eight channels of framed E1 services.
Works with the interface board to receive and process eight channels of sub-rate services.
Synchronous/asynchronous (2.4 kbit/s, 4.8 kbit/s, 9.6 kbit/s, 19.2 kbit/s and 48 kbit/s) services can be encapsulated
in X.50 D3 mode.
Cross-connects 48 channels of E1 signals at the 64 kbit/s level on the system side.

Port working mode Allows the port working mode to be specified.

Framed E1: PCM30(CAS) or PCM31(CCS)
Serial port: DTE or DCE

Port External ports: DDN-1 to DDN-16, representing 16 external ports. External ports are provided by DM12 interface
boards.
Framed E1 ports: With their IDs ranging from 1 to 8, they are E1 ports 1 to 8 on the DM12 board with a
smaller slot ID in each DM12 pair.
Nx64 kbit/s or sub-rate ports: Their IDs range from 9 to 16. In each DM12 pair, ports DDN1 to DDN4 on the
DM12 board with a smaller slot ID are numbered 9 to 12, and those on the DM12 board with a larger slot
ID are numbered 13 to 16.
Internal ports: 2M-1 to 2M-48, representing 48 E1 internal ports which use timeslots 1-31 (PCM30 (CAS)does not
support timeslot 16), with port IDs being 65 to 112.

Service processing One DX1 board can work with two DM12 boards.
Transmits/Receives eight channels of Nx64 kbit/s and eight channels of framed E1 services, or eight channels of
sub-rate services and eight channels of framed E1 services and implements 1:N TPS protection when working with
the DM12.
Processes PCM conference services.

NOTE:
Nx64 kbit/s services, sub-rate services, and framed E1 services use the following ports:
Nx64 kbit/s services: V.35, V.24, X.21, RS-449, RS-530, and RS-530A ports
Sub-rate services: RS-232, RS-422, X.21, V.35, and V.24 ports
Framed E1 services: framed E1 ports

Alarms and Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.
performance events
Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at electrical interfaces.
Supports the PRBS function. For details, see Availability.
Supports the CRC function.

Connectors The DB28 connector is used for the Nx64 kbit/s and sub-rate signals, and the DB44 connector is used for the framed E1
signals. The DB28 connectors and DB44 connectors are present on the front panel of the DM12.
Protection schemes Supports TPS protection when working with the interface board.

Table 2 Functions and features of the N3DX1

Function and Feature DX1

Basic functions Works with the interface board to receive, process, and transmit eight channels of sub-rate services or eight
channels of Nx64 kbit/s services (1≤N≤31), eight channels of framed E1 services, and eight channels of G.703 64
kbit/s codirectional services.
Receives and processes eight channels of PCM services through ports on its front panel, including the following
services:
Two channels of RS-232 sub-rate services and two channels of RS-485 sub-rate services.
Two channels of analog voice signals at the FXS/FXO port
Two channels of 2- or 4-wire audio and E&M signals
Cross-connects 63 channels of E1 signals at the 64 kbit/s level on the system side.

Port working mode Allows the port working mode to be specified.

Framed E1: PCM30(CAS) or PCM31(CCS)
Serial port: DTE or DCE (Only Nx64 kbit/s or sub-rate services support the setting of the port working mode. G.703
64 kbit/s codirectional services do not support the setting of the port working mode.)
ATI port: 1E1M
FXS/FXO port: FXS, FXO

NOTE:
To configure hotline services, Z interface extension services, or 2- or 4-wire audio and E&M trunk services on N3DX1 boards, set Working Mode of ports to
PCM30 (CAS).

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 351/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature DX1

Port External ports: DDN-1 to DDN-32, representing 32 external ports. External ports are provided by one pair of DM12
interface boards and one N3DX1 board.
If cables are connected only to the DM12 pair:
Framed E1 ports: With their IDs ranging from 1 to 8, they are E1 ports 1 to 8 on the DM12 board
with a smaller slot ID in each DM12 pair.

Nx64 kbit/s or sub-rate ports: Their IDs range from 9 to 16. In each DM12 pair, ports DDN1 to
DDN4 on the DM12 board with a smaller slot ID are numbered 9 to 12, and those on the DM12
board with a larger slot ID are numbered 13 to 16.
Sub-rate ports: synchronous/asynchronous (0.6 kbit/s, 1.2 kbit/s, 2.4 kbit/s, 4.8 kbit/s, 9.6 kbit/s,
19.2 kbit/s, 38.4 kbit/s, and 48 kbit/s) and synchronous (56 kbit/s). The ports can receive and
process other types of sub-rate services by means of over-sampling, only if the ports are
configured as synchronous and the to-be-receive sub-rate service rate is four or more times of the
port access rate.
G.703 64 kbit/s codirectional ports: With their IDs ranging from 17 to 24, they are E1 ports 1 to 8
on the DM12 board with a larger slot ID in each DM12 pair.
If cables are connected only to the N3DX1 board:
RS-485 (asynchronous sub-rate) ports: With their IDs being 25 and 26, they are RS-485 ports on
the N3DX1 board. For sub-rate services, the port access rate is 0.6 kbit/s, 1.2 kbit/s, 2.4 kbit/s, 4.8
kbit/s, 9.6 kbit/s, 19.2 kbit/s, 38.4 kbit/s, or 48 kbit/s
RS-232 (asynchronous sub-rate) ports: With their IDs being 27 and 28, they are RS-232 ports on
the N3DX1 board. For sub-rate services, the port access rate is 0.6 kbit/s, 1.2 kbit/s, 2.4 kbit/s, 4.8
kbit/s, 9.6 kbit/s, 19.2 kbit/s, 38.4 kbit/s, or 48 kbit/s.
FXS/FXO ports: With their IDs being 29 and 30, they are ports FXSO 1 and FXSO 2 on the N3DX1
board, respectively.
E&M and 2- or 4-wire ports: With their IDs being 31 and 32, they are ports EM 1 and EM 2 on the
N3DX1 board, respectively.
Internal ports: 2M-1 to 2M-63, representing 63 E1 internal ports which use timeslots 1-31 (PCM30 (CAS)does not
support timeslot 16), with port IDs being 65 to 127.

NOTE:
Figure 1shows the internal and external ports of an N3DX1 board.

Service processing One N3DX1 board needs to work with two DM12 boards to transmit/receive eight channels of sub-rate services or
eight channels of Nx64 kbit/s services, eight channels of framed E1 services, and eight channels of G.703 64 kbit/s
codirectional services
Transmits/Receives eight channels of PCM services with ports available on the front panel.
Cross-connects 63 channels of E1 signals at the 64 kbit/s level on the system side.
Cross-connects E1 services and sub-rate services as well as 8 kbit/s E1 services but does not cross-connect 8 kbit/s
sub-rate services.
Supports the encapsulation of sub-rate services in X.50 D3 mode and V.110 mode.
Synchronous/Asynchronous (2.4 kbit/s, 4.8 kbit/s, 9.6 kbit/s, 19.2 kbit/s and 48 kbit/s) services can be encapsulated
in X.50 D3 mode.
Synchronous/Asynchronous (0.6 kbit/s, 1.2 kbit/s, 2.4 kbit/s, 4.8 kbit/s, 9.6 kbit/s, 19.2 kbit/s and 38.4 kbit/s) and
synchronous (48 kbit/s and 56 kbit/s) services can be encapsulated in V.110 mode.
Nx64 kbit/s services: V.35, V.24, X.21, RS-449, RS-530, and RS-530A ports
N3DX1 supports the association of signaling and services.
None: no to associate.
Signaling Reception: When the port reception status M wire is idle, the audio services sent to the cross-
connection side are invalid; when the M wire is busy, the audio services are valid.
Signaling Transmission: When the audio services received from the cross-connect side are invalid, the port
transmission status E wire is idle; when the services are valid, the E wire is busy.
Signaling Reception and Transmission: associates signaling with services in both the receive and transmit
directions.

NOTE:
When working in 2E2M mode, the board processes only the first channel of E&M signaling, if signaling and services are associated.

Alarms and Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.
performance events
Maintenance features Supports inloops and outloops at electrical interfaces.
Supports the PRBS function. For details, see Availability.
Supports the CRC function.

Connectors When working with DM12 boards, N3DX1 boards receive Nx64 kbit/s and sub-rate signals using DB28 connectors
on the DM12 boards, and receive framed E1 and G.703 64 kbit/s codirectional signals using DB44 connectors on
the DM12 boards.
When not working with an interface board, N3DX1 boards receive RS-232 and RS-485 sub-rate signals using their
RJ45 connectors.
When not working with an interface board, N3DX1 boards receive analog voice signals using their RJ11 connectors.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 352/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature DX1

Protection schemes Supports TPS protection only when working with DM12 boards.

Supports E1 SNCP.

Figure 1 The internal and external ports of an N3DX1 board

Parent topic: DX1

15.5.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the DX1 has indicators.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 and Figure 2 show the appearance of the front panel of the DX1.

Figure 1 Front panel of the N1DX1

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 353/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 2 Front panel of the N3DX1

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the N1DX1 does not have an interface.
One N1DX1 board needs to work with two DM12 boards to receive and transmit framed E1 signals and Nx64 kbit/s or sub-rate signals.
For details, see the topic DM12.
An N3DX1 board has six physical interfaces on its front panel (eight logical interfaces are displayed on the NMS). Table 1 provides the
connector type and usage of each interface.

Table 1 Interfaces on the N3DX1

Interface Connector Type Usage

RS485, RS232 RJ-45 RS485 receives and transmits two channels of RS-485 sub-rate signals.
RS232 receives and transmits two channels of RS-232 sub-rate signals.

FXSO 1, FXSO 2 RJ-11 Receives and transmits two channels of analog voice signals at the FXS/FXO port.

EM 1, EM 2 RJ-45 Receives and transmits two channels of 2– or 4–wire audio and E&M signals.

Table 2 Pin assignments for an RJ-45 port (RS485 port)

Pin Usage

1 First channel of signals (+)

2 First channel of signals (-)
3 Not used
4 Grounded
5 Grounded
6 Not used
7 Second channel of signals (+)
8 Second channel of signals (-)

Table 3 Pin assignments for an RJ-45 port (RS232 port)

Pin Usage

1 Transmits the first channel of signals.

2 Grounded
3 Receives the first channel of signals.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 354/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Pin Usage

4 Not used
5 Transmits the second channel of signals.
6 Grounded
7 Receives the second channel of signals.
8 Grounded

Table 4 Pin assignments for an RJ-45 port (EM 1/EM 2 port)

Pin Usage
4-Wire Audio 2-Wire Audio

1 Unused
2 E: transmits signaling.
3 Ring (TX-): transmits audio signals (-). Unused
4 Ring (RX-): receives audio signals (-). Ring: receives and transmits audio signals (-).
5 Tip (RX+): receives audio signals (+). Tip: receives and transmits audio signals (+).
6 TIP (TX+): transmits audio signals (+). Unused
7 M: receives signaling.
8 Unused

Table 5 Pins of the RJ-11 ports

Pin Usage

1 No connected
2 Ring
3 Tip
4 No connected

Parent topic: DX1

15.6 DM12
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the DM12 (DDN
service interface board).

Application
The DM12 is a service interface board. The DM12 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive electrical
signals of the DDN, sub-rate, and framed E1services.

Functions and Features

The DM12 works with the N1DX1 to receive and transmit four channels of Nx64 kbit/s electrical signals/four channels of sub–rate
electrical signals, and eight channels of framed E1 electrical signals. The DM12 works with the N3DX1 to receive and transmit four
channels of Nx64 kbit/s electrical signals/four channels of sub–rate electrical signals, eight channels of G.703 64 kbit/s codirectional
electrical signals, and eight channels of framed E1 electrical [Link] DM12 VER.C works with the N3DX1 to implement E1 DCN,
which can be configured through DIP switches.

Front Panel
The front panel of the DM12 has interfaces and a bar code.

Parent topic: PCM Boards

15.6.1 Application
The DM12 is a service interface board. The DM12 can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to transmit and receive electrical
signals of the DDN, sub-rate, and framed E1services.

Parent topic: DM12

15.6.2 Functions and Features

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 355/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
The DM12 works with the N1DX1 to receive and transmit four channels of Nx64 kbit/s electrical signals/four channels of sub–rate
electrical signals, and eight channels of framed E1 electrical signals. The DM12 works with the N3DX1 to receive and transmit four
channels of Nx64 kbit/s electrical signals/four channels of sub–rate electrical signals, eight channels of G.703 64 kbit/s codirectional
electrical signals, and eight channels of framed E1 electrical [Link] DM12 VER.C works with the N3DX1 to implement E1 DCN, which
can be configured through DIP switches.

Parent topic: DM12

15.6.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the DM12 has interfaces and a bar code.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 and Figure 2 shows the appearance of the front panel of the DM12.
Figure 1 Front panel of the DM12 VER.A and VER.B

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 356/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 2 Front panel of the DM12 VER.C

icators
The following table describes the indicator status meanings for the DM12 VER.C.

Table 1 Mapping between DIP switches and indicator status

DIP Switch (SW1) LED Status Meaning E1 DCN Status Indicator
1 2

ON ON All LEDs are off. E1 DCN is disabled.

OFF ON LED1-2 is on, and other LEDs E1 DCN is enabled on ports 1 and 2.
are off.

ON OFF LED1-4 is on, and other LEDs E1 DCN is enabled on ports 1 to 4.

are off.
NOTE:
OFF OFF LED1-8 is on, and other LEDs E1 DCN is enabled on ports 1 to 8. In this example, LED1-4 is on, indicating that E1 DCN is
are off. enabled for ports 1-4.

erfaces
The front panel of the DM12 has DB44 and DB28 interfaces. Table 2 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the DM12.

Table 2 Interfaces of the DM12

Interface Type of Interface Usage

E1 (1-8) DB44 Transmits/Receives eight channels of framed E1 or eight channels of G.703 64

kbit/s codirectional signals.

NOTE:
Only 120-ohm E1 cables can transmit G.703 64 kbit/s codirectional signals.

DDN1-DDN4 DB28 Transmits/Receives the 1st to the 4th channels of Nx64 kbit/s or one to four
channels of sub-rate or one to four channels of sub-rate signals.

Table 3 provides the pin assignments of the DB44 interface.

Table 3 Pin assignments of the DB44 interface

Front View Pin Core Usage Pin Core Usage

30 White Transmits the 1st 8 Green Transmits the 8th

channel of signals channel of signals
15 Blue 7 Red
(T1). (T8).
29 White Transmits the 2nd 36 Green Receives the 3rd
channel of signals channel of signals

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 357/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Front View Pin Core (T2).

Usage Pin Core (R3).
Usage

14 Orange 21 White
28 White Transmits the 3rd 35 Brown Receives the 4th
channel of signals channel of signals
13 Green 20 White
(T3). (R4).
27 White Transmits the 4th 34 Gray Receives the 5th
channel of signals channel of signals
12 Brown 19 White
(T4). (R5).
26 White Transmits the 5th 33 Blue Receives the 6th
channel of signals channel of signals
11 Gray 18 Red
(T5). (R6).
25 Red Transmits the 6th 32 Orange Receives the 7th
channel of signals channel of signals
10 Blue 17 Red
(T6). (R7).
24 Red Transmits the 7th 31 Green Receives the 8th
channel of signals channel of signals
9 Orange 16 Red
(T7). (R8).
38 Blue Receives the 1st 44-39 and 6- - Grounding
channel of signals 1
23 White
(R1).
37 Orange Receives the 2nd
channel of signals
22 White
(R2).

Table 4 provides the pin assignments of the DB28 interface.

Table 4 Pin assignments of the DB28 interface

Front View Pin Usage Pin Usage

1 Transmits data signals. 19 Receives data signals.

2 20
3 Transmits clock signals. 21 Grounding
4 22 Receives the loopback control signal.
11 Detects the carrier. 23 Permits the transmission.
12 24
13 Requests for transmission. 25 Receives the DCE ready signal.
14 26
15 Receives the clock to be 27 Transmits the DTE ready signal.
used in the transmit
16 direction from the external 28
equipment.
17 Receives clock signals. - -
18

Parent topic: DM12

16 WDM Boards
The WDM boards include the CMR2, CMR4, MR2, MR2A, MR2C, MR4, LWX, and FIB.

MR2
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the TN11MR2
(2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board).

MR4
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the TN11MR4
(4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board).

Parent topic: Description of Common Hardware

16.1 MR2
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the TN11MR2 (2-
channel optical add/drop multiplexing board).

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 358/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Application
The MR2 is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex two channels of wavelength signals to/from the multiplexed signals.

Functions and Features

The MR2 is applied to the dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) system. The channel spacing is 0.8 nm. The MR2
supports the add/drop multiplexing function and channel expansion function.

Front Panel
The front panel of the MR2 has indicators, interfaces, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: WDM Boards

16.1.1 Application
The MR2 is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex two channels of wavelength signals to/from the multiplexed signals.
Figure 1 shows the application of the MR2 in the DWDM system.
Figure 1 Application of the MR2 in the DWDM system

Parent topic: MR2

16.1.2 Functions and Features

The MR2 is applied to the dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) system. The channel spacing is 0.8 nm. The MR2 supports the
add/drop multiplexing function and channel expansion function.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the MR2.

Table 1 Functions and features of the MR2

Function and Feature MR2

Basic functions Adds/Drops and multiplexes any two signals to/from the multiplexed signals.
Channel expansion Provides the interface to cascade another optical add/drop multiplexing board to realize the expansion of the
add/drop channel.

Parent topic: MR2

16.1.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the MR2 has indicators, interfaces, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the MR2.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 359/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the MR2

icators
The front panel of the MR2 has one indicator as follows: board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
For the meanings of the status of the indicator, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the MR2 has eight optical interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the MR2.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the MR2

Interface Type of Interface Usage

A1–A2 LC Receives the signals sent from the optical wavelength converting board or centralized
client-side equipment.
D1–D2 LC Transmits signals to the optical wavelength converting board or centralized client-side
equipment.
IN LC Receives the multiplexed signals.
OUT LC Transmits the multiplexed signals.
MO LC Works as a cascading output optical interface and is connected to the input optical
interface of an OADM board.
MI LC Works as a cascading input optical interface and is connected to the output optical
interface of an OADM board.

Parent topic: MR2

16.2 MR4
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the TN11MR4 (4-
channel optical add/drop multiplexing board).

Application
The MR4 is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex four channels of wavelength signals to/from the multiplexed signals.

Functions and Features

The MR4 is applied to the DWDM system. The channel spacing is 0.8 nm. The MR4 supports the add/drop multiplexing function and
channel expansion function.

Front Panel
The front panel of the MR4 has indicators, interfaces, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: WDM Boards

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 360/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

16.2.1 Application
The MR4 is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex four channels of wavelength signals to/from the multiplexed signals.
Figure 1 shows the application of the MR4 in the DWDM system.

Figure 1 Application of the MR4 in the DWDM system

Parent topic: MR4

16.2.2 Functions and Features

The MR4 is applied to the DWDM system. The channel spacing is 0.8 nm. The MR4 supports the add/drop multiplexing function and
channel expansion function.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the MR4.

Table 1 Functions and features of the MR4

Function and Feature MR4

Basic functions Adds/Drops and multiplexes four continuous signals to/from the multiplexed signals.
Channel expansion Provides the interface to cascade another optical add/drop multiplexing board to realize the expansion of the
add/drop channel.

Parent topic: MR4

16.2.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the MR4 has indicators, interfaces, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the MR4.
Figure 1 Front panel of the MR4

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 361/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
icators
The front panel of the MR4 has one indicator as follows: board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
For the meanings of the status of the indicator, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the MR4 has 12 optical interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the MR4.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the MR4

Interface Type of Interface Usage

A1–A4 LC Receives the signals sent from the optical wavelength converting board or centralized
client-side equipment.
D1–D4 LC Transmits signals to the optical wavelength converting board or centralized client-side
equipment.
IN LC Receives the multiplexed signals.
OUT LC Transmits the multiplexed signals.
MO LC Works as a cascading output optical interface and is connected to the input optical
interface of an OADM board.
MI LC Works as a cascading input optical interface and is connected to the output optical
interface of an OADM board.

Parent topic: MR4

17 Auxiliary Boards
This topic describes the auxiliary boards including the AUX and FAN.

AUX
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the AUX (system
auxiliary interface board).

FAN
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the FAN (fan
board).

Parent topic: Description of Common Hardware

17.1 AUX
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the AUX (system
auxiliary interface board).

Application
The AUX is a system auxiliary interface board. The AUX can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to provide various
management interfaces and auxiliary interfaces.

Functions and Features

The AUX provides various management and auxiliary interfaces for the system, and provides the centralized backup for the +3.3 V
power supply of the boards in the subrack.

Front Panel
The front panel of the AUX has indicators and interfaces of various types.

Parent topic: Auxiliary Boards

17.1.1 Application
The AUX is a system auxiliary interface board. The AUX can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to provide various management
interfaces and auxiliary interfaces.

Parent topic: AUX

17.1.2 Functions and Features

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 362/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
The AUX provides various management and auxiliary interfaces for the system, and provides the centralized backup for the +3.3 V power
supply of the boards in the subrack.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the AUX.

Table 1 Functions and features of the AUX

Item AUX

Management interface Provides the OAM interface, which supports the X.25 protocol.
Provides the management serial interface F&f.
Provides the 10M/100M NM interface.

Auxiliary interface Provides the serial interfaces Serial 1–Serial 4, which can function as four broadcast data interfaces or
two pairs of time interfaces. The two functions of the interfaces are mutually exclusive.
The two pairs of time interfaces work in full-duplex mode and support synchronous time input and
output of two channels.
Both the time interface and the broadcast data interface support the RS-422 level and RS-232 level.
Provides one F1 interface for the 64 kbit/s codirectional data channel.

External time interface Supports the input and output of two channels of time signals, with the external time transmitted in
1pps+TOD mode.
For details about the external time input and output interfaces, see Table 2 and Table 3.

Clock interface Provides two BITS clock input interfaces (CLK1 or CLK2) and two BITS clock output interfaces (CLK1
or CLK2) (impedance: 120 ohms).
Provides two BITS clock input interfaces (CLKI1 or CLKI2) and two BITS clock output interfaces
(CLKO1 or CLKO2)(impedance: 75 ohms).

Alarm interface Provides 16-input and 4-output alarm interfaces.

Provides 4-output alarm cascading interfaces.

Cabinet alarm indicator Provides four cabinet alarm indicator output interfaces.
Provides four cabinet alarm indicator input cascading interfaces.

Orderwire interface Provides two NNI connection signaling interfaces.

Provides one orderwire phone interface.
Provides two NNI voice interfaces.

Interface used for communication Provides one interface used for communication with external boards
with external boards
Internal communication Realizes communication between boards in the subrack.
Power supply backup and checking Monitors the two independent –48 V power supplies, detects the overvoltage (–72 V) and
undervoltage (–38.4 V) conditions, and reports alarms to the SCC unit in the case of overvoltage or
undervoltage occurs.
Provides the centralized backup for the +3.3 V power supply of the boards in the subrack, which
realizes the 1:N protection for the secondary power supply of each board.
Detects the overvoltage (+3.8 V) and undervoltage (+3.1 V) conditions for the +3.3 V backup power
supply.

Audible alarm Supports the audible alarm and the clearing of the audible alarm.
Ethernet port connection status Supports the checking of the Ethernet port connection status.
checking
Note: The COM interface is used only for communication with external boards and must not be used at will. Otherwise, the Ethernet communication
between boards may become abnormal.

Table 2 External time input interfaces

External Time Input TOD-Related Interfacea 1pps-Related Interface

Channel 1 S1 S3 (using the RS422 level)

S1 ALMI4 (using the TTL level)
Channel 2 S2 S4 (using the RS422 level)
S2 ALMI4 (using the TTL level)
a: The TOD-related interfaces can use the RS232 level or RS422 level as required.

NOTE:
Ports S1 and S3 are paired. Ports S2 and S4 are paired.

Table 3 External time input interfaces

External Time Output TOD-Related Interfacea 1pps-Related Interface

Channel 1 S1 S3 (using the RS422 level)

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 363/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

External Time Output TOD-Related Interfacea 1pps-Related Interface

Channel 2 S2 S4 (using the RS422 level)

a: The TOD-related interfaces can use the RS232 level or RS422 level as required.

NOTE:
Ports S1 and S3 are paired. Ports S2 and S4 are paired.

NOTE:
To ensure normal conference calls, each conference call subnet can support a maximum of 10 concurrent conference calls. If there are more than 10 concurrent
conference calls on a conference call subnet, divide the subnet into several ones.

Parent topic: AUX

17.1.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the AUX has indicators and interfaces of various types.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AUX.

Figure 1 Front panel of the AUX

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Connection status indicator (LINK) – one color (green)
Data receiving and transmission indicator (ACT) – one color (orange)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the AUX has 28 interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the AUX.

Table 1 Interfaces of the AUX

Interface Type of Interface Usage

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 364/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Interface Type of Interface Usage

CLKO1 SMB 75-ohm clock output interface 1

CLKO2 SMB 75-ohm clock output interface 2
CLK1 RJ-45 120-ohm clock input/output interface 1
REV RJ-45 Reserved
F&f RJ-45 F&f interface
F1 RJ-45 F1 interface
PHONE RJ-45 Orderwire phone interface
V1 RJ-45 NNI voice interface 1
V2 RJ-45 NNI voice interface 2
OAM RJ-45 OAM interface
S1 RJ-45 Serial 1
S2 RJ-45 Serial 2
S3 RJ-45 Serial 3
S4 RJ-45 Serial 4
CLKI1 SMB 75-ohm clock input interface 1
CLKI2 SMB 75-ohm clock input interface 2
CLK2 RJ-45 120-ohm clock input/output interface 2
ETH RJ-45 NM interface
COM RJ-45 Interface used for communication with external boards
EXT RJ-45 Interface for connection to the extended subrack
LAMP1 RJ-45 Cabinet alarm indicator output interface
LAMP2 RJ-45 Cabinet alarm indicator cascading input interface
ALMO1 RJ-45 Interface for the 1st to the 4th channels of alarm outputs
ALMO2 RJ-45 Alarm signal cascading interface
ALMI1 RJ-45 Interface for the 1st to the 4th channels of alarm inputs
ALMI2 RJ-45 Interface for the 5th to the 8th channels of alarm inputs
ALMI3 RJ-45 Interface for the 9th to the 12th channels of alarm inputs
ALMI4 RJ-45 Interface for the 13th to the 16th channels of alarm inputs
Note: S1/S3 and S2/S4 form a pair of time input and output interfaces.

NOTE:

Ports EXT and COM must not be connected to hubs or switches on the public network.
Ports EXT and COM on the same NE must not be both connected to hubs or switches on the network where the NE is on.
Port EXT on an NE and port COM on another NE must not be both connected to hubs or switches on the network where the NEs are on.

Table 2 describes the pins of the CLK1 and CLK2 interfaces.

Table 2 Pins of the CLK1 and CLK2 interfaces

Front View Pin Usage

1 Receiving (–)
2 Receiving (+)
3 Grounding
4 Transmitting (–)
5 Transmitting (+)
6 Grounding
7, 8 Unspecified

Table 3 describes the pins of the ETH, COM, EXT, and F1 interfaces.

Table 3 Pins of the ETH, COM, EXT, and F1 interfaces

Front View Pin Usage

1 Transmitting (+)
2 Transmitting (–)
3 Receiving (+)
4 Unspecified
5 Unspecified

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 365/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Front View Pin Usage

6 Receiving (–)
7, 8 Unspecified

Table 4 describes the pins of the F&f interface.

Table 4 Pins of the F&f interface

Front View Pin Usage

4 Receive end for RS-232 data

5 Grounding

8 Transmit end for RS-232 data

1, 2, 3, 6, 7 Unspecified

Table 5 describes the pins of the PHONE, V1, and V2 interfaces.

Table 5 Pins of the PHONE, V1, and V2 interfaces

Front View Pin Usage

4 Signal 1

5 Signal 2

1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8 Unspecified

Table 6 describes the pins of the LAMP1 and LAMP2 interfaces.

Table 6 Pins of the LAMP1 and LAMP2 interfaces

Front View Pin Usage

1 Critical alarm signal (+)

2 Critical alarm signal (–)
3 Major alarm signal (+)
4 Power indicator driving signal (+)
5 Power indicator driving signal (–)
6 Major alarm signal (–)
7 Minor alarm signal (+)
8 Minor alarm signal (–)

Table 7 describes the pins of the ALM01 and ALM02 interfaces.

Table 7 Pins of the ALM01 and ALM02 interfaces

Front View Pin Usage

1 Critical and major alarm signal output (+)

2 Critical and major alarm signal output (–)
3 Minor and warning alarm signal output (+)
4 Alarm signal output 1 (+)
5 Alarm signal output 1 (–)
6 Minor and warning alarm signal output (–)
7 Alarm signal output 1 (+)
8 Alarm signal output 1 (–)

Table 8 describes the pins of the OAM interface.

Table 8 Pins of the OAM interface

Front View Pin Usage

1 Requests for transmission.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 366/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Front View Pin Usage

2 Transmits the DTE ready signal.

3 Transmits data.
4 Grounding
5 Grounding
6 Receives data.
7 Transmits the DCE ready signal.
8 Ready for receiving signals.

Table 9 describes the pins of the S1, S2, S3, and S4 interfaces.

Table 9 Pins of the S1, S2, S3, and S4 interfaces of the AUX
Front View Pin S1/S2 Usage S3/S4 Usage

1 RS-422 transmitting (+) (TOD Out) RS-422 transmitting (+) (1pps Out)
2 RS-422 transmitting (-) (TOD Out) RS-422 transmitting (-) (1pps Out)
3 RS-422 receiving (+) (TOD In) RS-422 receiving (+) (1pps In)
4 - -
5 - -
6 RS-422 receiving (-) (TOD In) RS-422 receiving (-) (1pps In)
7 - -
8 - -

Table 10 describes the pins of the ALMI1 interface.

Table 10 Pins of the ALMI1 interface

Front View Pin Usage

1 Alarm input 1
2 Ground for alarm input 1
3 Alarm input 2
4 Alarm input 3
5 Ground for alarm input 3
6 Ground for alarm input 2
7 Alarm input 4
8 Ground for alarm input 4

Table 11 lists the pins of the ALMI2 interface.

Table 11 Pins of the ALMI2 interface

Front View Pin Usage

1 Alarm input 5
2 Ground for alarm input 5
3 Alarm input 6
4 Alarm input 7
5 Ground for alarm input 7
6 Ground for alarm input 6
7 Alarm input 8
8 Ground for alarm input 8

Table 12 describes the pins of the ALMI3 interface.

Table 12 Pins of the ALMI3 interface

Front View Pin Usage

1 Alarm input 9
2 Ground for alarm input 9
3 Alarm input 10
4 Alarm input 11
5 Ground for alarm input 11
6 Ground for alarm input 10
7 Alarm input 12

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 367/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Front View Pin Usage

8 Ground for alarm input 12

Table 13 describes the pins of the ALMI4 interface.

Table 13 Pins of the ALMI4 interface

Front View Pin Usage

1 Alarm input 13
2 Ground for alarm input 13
3 Alarm input 14
4 Alarm input 15
5 Ground for alarm input 15
6 Ground for alarm input 14
7 Alarm input 16
8 Ground for alarm input 16

nnections for Alarm Cascading

Connections for alarm signal cascading

shows the connections when one or multiple cabinets input or output alarm signals. Connect the alarm output interface to the
Figure 2
alarm cascading interface of a lower level. Make the connections one by one until the alarm output is connected to the centralized alarm
system.

Figure 2 Connections for alarm input, alarm cascading, and alarm output

Connections of cabinet alarm indicators

shows the connections of the 4-channel cabinet alarm indicators. Connect LAMP1 of subrack 2 to LAMP2 of subrack 1. Finally,
Figure 3
connect LAMP1 of subrack 1 to the indicator interface at the top of the cabinet.

Figure 3 Connections of cabinet alarm indicators

Parent topic: AUX

17.2 FAN
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the FAN (fan board).

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 368/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Application
The FAN is a system fan board. The FAN can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to provide the heat dissipation function.

Functions and Features

The FAN adjusts the fan speed, checks the fan status, reports the fault on the fan control board, and reports the off-position alarm
of the fan.

Front Panel
The front panel of the FAN has indicators.

Parent topic: Auxiliary Boards

17.2.1 Application
The FAN is a system fan board. The FAN can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to provide the heat dissipation function.

Parent topic: FAN

17.2.2 Functions and Features

The FAN adjusts the fan speed, checks the fan status, reports the fault on the fan control board, and reports the off-position alarm of the
fan.

NOTE:
The average life of a fan assembly varies according to its environment:

Class-A environment: an indoor environment where temperature and humidity can be controlled, for example, a room used for living. In such an
environment, the average life of a fan assembly is 6.5 years.
Class-B environment: an indoor environment where the ambient temperature and humidity are not controlled or the common outdoor environment where
only simple shelter (such as awning) is available and the humidity occasionally reaches 100%. In such an environment, the average life of a fan assembly is 5
years.
Class-C environment: sea environment or outdoor land environment (with simple shielding measures) near pollution sources. In such an environment, the
average life of a fan assembly is 2 years.

The preceding life spans are the average values concluded based on the test data in a lab and the theoretical model, rather than the actual values. They are for
reference only. The actual life span must be determined based on the environment conditions of a specific area. In addition, the previous life spans do not indicate
that a fan tray assembly becomes unavailable immediately at the end of its life span. They are used to prompt users to replace the fan tray assembly in time.

Table 1 provides the functions and features of the FAN.

Table 1 Functions and features of the FAN

Function and Feature FAN

Function of intelligent speed Provides the following functions of intelligent speed adjustment:
adjustment Automatically adjusts the fan speed.
When the temperature difference in the local area is more than 43°C, the fans operate at low
speed.
When the temperature difference in the local area is less than 43°C, the fans operate at medium
speed.
When the temperature difference in the local area is less than 33°C, the fans operate at a high
speed.
Ensures that the fan operates at full speed when the speed adjustment signal is abnormal.
In normal situations, all the fan tray assemblies operate normally. When one fan tray assembly reports
an alarm, the other fan tray assemblies adjust the fan speed to operate at full speed.

NOTE:
The temperature difference is the one between the current temperature measured on the equipment board and the highest normal operating
temperature that the board supports. For example, if the board supports a highest normal operating temperature of 80°C and the currently measured
temperature is 35°C, the temperature difference is 45°C. If the temperature difference is less than 43°C, the fans operate at a low speed. However, if
the currently measured temperature rises to 50°C, the temperature difference is 30°C, which is less than 33°C. Then, the fans operate at a high
speed.

Hot swapping function Provides the hot swapping function for the fan tray assembly.
Backup function Provides the mutual backup function for the power supplies of the fans in the fan tray assemblies.
Status checking Supports the checking of the fan status.
Alarm function Reports the fan alarm and in-service information.
Fan backup Each subrack contains three fan tray assemblies. Two fans are available in each fan tray assembly and function as
a backup for each other. The two fans operate at the same time at the same speed in normal cases. When one
fan is faulty, the other fan is adjusted to operate at full speed.

NOTE:

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 369/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
When any fan in three fan tray assemblies is faulty, the system can continue to properly operate for 96 hours at a temperature from 0°C to 45°C.
Fan tray assemblies must be replaced immediately in one of the following cases:
One or more fans in each of three fan tray assemblies are faulty.
Two fans in any fan tray assembly are faulty.

Parent topic: FAN

17.2.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the FAN has indicators.

gram of the Front Panel

The OptiX OSN equipment series use a modular fan platform.
Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the FAN.

Figure 1 Modular fan tray assembly

icators
The indicator (STATE) on the front panel of the board indicates the running state of the hardware. This indicator is red, green, or yellow
when it is on.
For the meanings of the status of the indicator, see Indicators.

Parent topic: FAN

18 Optical Amplifier Boards

This topic describes the optical amplifier boards.

BA2
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the BA2 (optical
booster amplifier board).

BPA
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the BPA (optical
booster and pre-amplifier board).

COA
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the COA (case-
shaped optical amplifier).

RPC01
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the RPC01
(forward Raman driving board).

RPC02
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the RPC02
(backward Raman driving board).

OBU1
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the OBU1
(optical booster amplifier board).

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 370/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
OBU2
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the TN12OBU2
(optical booster amplifier board).

Parent topic: Description of Common Hardware

18.1 BA2
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the BA2 (optical
booster amplifier board).

Application
The BA2 is a two-channel optical power amplifier board. The BA2 amplifies the power of optical signals and is applicable to the
long-distance optical fiber transmission.

Functions and Features

During the long-haul transmission of optical signals, the attenuation of the signals is high. Hence, the BA is required to ensure that
the optical receiver can receive normal optical signals.

Front Panel
The front panel of the BA2 has indicators and interfaces.

Parent topic: Optical Amplifier Boards

18.1.1 Application
The BA2 is a two-channel optical power amplifier board. The BA2 amplifies the power of optical signals and is applicable to the long-
distance optical fiber transmission.
Figure 1 shows the position of the BA in an optical transmission system.

Figure 1 Position of the BA in an optical transmission system

Parent topic: BA2

18.1.2 Functions and Features

During the long-haul transmission of optical signals, the attenuation of the signals is high. Hence, the BA is required to ensure that the
optical receiver can receive normal optical signals.
The BA2 amplifies the power of two-channel optical signals. Table 1 provides the functions and features of the BA2.

Table 1 Functions and features of the BA2

Function and Feature BA2

Basic functions Increases the launched optical power of the line board to 13–15 dBm or 15–18 dBm. As a result, when the
G.652 optical fiber with a loss of 0.275 dB/km is used, the transmission distance can be 120 km, 130 km, or
above.
Supporting the EDFA Supports the automatic control of the laser temperature and optical power of the EDFA module.
Supports the automatic monitoring of the input and output optical power of the EDFA module and query of
the optical power of the EDFA module.
Supports the protection function of the EDFA module. When no optical signals are received, the laser is
automatically turned off. When optical signals are received, the laser is automatically turned on.

Performance events and alarms Supports the reporting of the performance parameters of the laser. Reports various alarms and performance
monitoring events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.
Software upgrade Supports the software upgrade and expansion without interrupting services.

NOTICE:
The wavelength of the optical signal transmitted to the BA2 must be within the range from 1530 nm to 1565 nm. Otherwise, the input
optical signal cannot be amplified correctly. Hence, make sure that the output wavelength of the line board that is interconnected with
the BA2 is within the required range.

NOTE:

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 371/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
The BA2 provides the intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function. When the IPA function is enabled and no input signals are detected on the receive side of a line
board, the pumping laser is turned off to prevent high laser power from damaging the eyes.

Parent topic: BA2

18.1.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the BA2 has indicators and interfaces.

gram of the Front Panel

The BA2 is available in two types, namely, one-interface BA2 and two-interface BA2.
Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the one-interface BA2.

Figure 1 Front panel of the one-interface BA2

Figure 2 shows the appearance of the front panel of the two-interface BA2.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 372/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 2 Front panel of the two-interface BA2

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the one-interface BA2 has one optical interface. The optical interface transmits and receives one channel of optical
signals. The one-interface BA2 uses the swappable optical module, which facilitates the maintenance and upgrading of the optical
module.
The front panel of the two-interface BA2 has two optical interfaces. The optical interfaces transmit and receive two channels of optical
signals. The two-interface BA2 uses the swappable optical module, which facilitates the maintenance and upgrading of the optical
module.

CAUTION:
If the front panel of the one-interface BA2 has two LC optical interfaces, only the upper optical interface (IN1/OUT1) is valid. In the case
of the BA2 whose front panel has two LC optical interfaces, determine whether the BA2 is a one-interface BA2 or a two-interface BA2
according to Feature Code.

Table 1 describes the type and usage of the optical interface of the one-interface BA2.

Table 1 Optical interface of the one-interface BA2

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN LC Receives one channel of optical signals.

OUT LC Transmits one channel of optical signals.

Table 2 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the two-interface BA2.

Table 2 Optical interfaces of the two-interface BA2

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN1 LC Receives the first channel of optical signals.

OUT1 LC Transmits the first channel of optical signals.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 373/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN2 LC Receives the second channel of optical signals.

OUT2 LC Transmits the second channel of optical signals.

Parent topic: BA2

18.2 BPA
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the BPA (optical
booster and pre-amplifier board).

Application
The BPA is an optical booster and pre-amplifier board. The BPA provides a booster amplifier (BA) and a pre-emplifier (PA), which are
respectively used at the transmit end and receive end of the OptiX OSN equipment.

Functions and Features

During the long-haul transmission of optical signals, the attenuation of the signals is high. Hence, the BA and PA are required to
ensure that the optical receiver can receive normal optical signals.

Front Panel
The front panel of the BPA has indicators, interfaces, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: Optical Amplifier Boards

18.2.1 Application
The BPA is an optical booster and pre-amplifier board. The BPA provides a booster amplifier (BA) and a pre-emplifier (PA), which are
respectively used at the transmit end and receive end of the OptiX OSN equipment.
Figure 1 shows the positions of the BA and PA in an optical transmission system.

Figure 1 Positions of the BA and PA in an optical transmission system

NOTE:

The BPA is used as a BA at the transmit end.

The BPA is used as a PA at the receive end.

Parent topic: BPA

18.2.2 Functions and Features

During the long-haul transmission of optical signals, the attenuation of the signals is high. Hence, the BA and PA are required to ensure
that the optical receiver can receive normal optical signals.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the BPA.

Table 1 Functions and features of the BPA

Function and Feature BPA

Basic functions Increases the launched optical power of the line board to 13–15 dBm or 15–17 dBm. As a result, when the
G.652 optical fiber with a loss of 0.275 dB/km is used, the transmission distance can be 120 km, 130 km, or
above.
Pre-amplification function Provides the PA module to pre-amplify the received optical signals. Increases the power of the small-
volume optical signals by 22-25 dB (N1BPA) or 22-33 dB (N2BPA).
Supporting the EDFA Supports the automatic control of the laser temperature and optical power of the EDFA module.
Supports the automatic monitoring of the input and output optical power of the EDFA module and
query of the optical power of the EDFA module.
Supports the protection function of the EDFA module. When no optical signals are received, the
laser is automatically turned off. When optical signals are received, the laser is automatically turned
on.

Performance events and alarms Supports the reporting of the performance parameters of the laser. Reports various alarms and
monitoring performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 374/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature BPA

Software upgrade Supports the software upgrade and expansion without interrupting services.

Parent topic: BPA

18.2.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the BPA has indicators, interfaces, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the BPA.
Figure 1 Front panel of the BPA

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the BPA has two LC optical interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the BPA.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the BPA

Interface Type of Interface Usage

BIN LC Receives one channel of optical signals for amplification.

BOUT LC Transmits one channel of amplified optical signals.
PIN LC Receives one channel of optical signals for pre-amplification.
POUT LC Transmits one channel of pre-amplified optical signals.

Parent topic: BPA

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 375/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

18.3 COA
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the COA (case-shaped
optical amplifier).

Application
The COA is a case-shaped optical amplifier that is not installed in a slot of the subrack. The COA is mainly used to amplify optical
signals and is applicable to the long-distance optical fiber transmission.

Functions and Features

The COA integrates the optical amplifier module, the driving circuit, and the communication circuit in an aluminium case.

Front Panel
The front panel of the COA has indicators and interfaces.

Parent topic: Optical Amplifier Boards

18.3.1 Application
The COA is a case-shaped optical amplifier that is not installed in a slot of the subrack. The COA is mainly used to amplify optical signals
and is applicable to the long-distance optical fiber transmission.
The application of the 61COA, which amplifies and pre-amplifies optical power, is the same as that of the combination of a BA and a PA
on the OptiX OSN equipment series. The application of the 62COA/N1COA, which pre-amplifies optical power, is the same as that of a PA
on the OptiX OSN equipment series. For details, see Figure 1.

Parent topic: COA

18.3.2 Functions and Features

The COA integrates the optical amplifier module, the driving circuit, and the communication circuit in an aluminium case.
The COA is an external and independent amplifier and does not occupy a slot in the subrack. The COA can work independently. The
equipment supports a maximum of two 61COAs, two N1COAs, or one 62COA.

COA and N1COA

The 61COA/N1COA is equipped with only one EDFA optical module. The 61COA/N1COA can work as a power amplifier, a pre-amplifier,
or a line amplifier.
The optical characteristics of the 61COA/N1COA are the same as the optical characteristics of the optical amplifier boards such as the
BPA and BA2. The difference between the 61COA/N1COA and the optical amplifier boards is that the 61COA/N1COA is an external
optical amplifier unit, which does not occupy a slot in the subrack. The 61COA/N1COA can be directly installed in the ETSI cabinet but
requires separate power supply.
The application of the 61COA/N1COA in the optical transmission system is the same as the application of the BA2 and BPA in the optical
transmission system. Table 1 provides the functions and features of the 61COA/N1COA.

Table 1 Functions and features of the 61COA/N1COA

Function and Feature 61COA/N1COA

Power amplification function The 61COA increases the launched optical power of the line board. As a result, the valid transmission
distance of optical signals is extended.
Pre-amplification function The 61COA/N1COA provides the pre-amplification function.
ALS function Supports the ALS function.
Communication through serial ports Communicates with the GSCC through the RS-232 serial port, reports the alarms and performance events of
the COA to the NMS, and receives the configuration commands issued by the NMS.

COA
The 62COA is a case-shaped Raman optical amplifier and is used at the receive end of the SDH equipment.
The 62COA transmits counter-propagated pumping optical signals to fibers for distributed Raman amplification. The gain medium of
distributed Raman amplification is the line fiber that can reduce noise. This is different from the 61COA. Hence, the 62COA can extend
the transmission distance, increase the signal-to-noise ratio, and realize ultra long hop transmission for a single span.
The 62COA is a case-shaped Raman optical amplifier and is used at the receive end of the optical transmission system. The optical signals
are amplified during transmission based on the stimulated Raman scattering effect of the fiber. The 62COA needs to work with the EDFA
to realize the transmission of optical signals for more than 170 km. For details, see Figure 1.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 376/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Application of the 62COA

The Raman amplifier amplifies optical signals during transmission by transmitting counter-propagated pumping optical signals to fibers
for distributed Raman amplification. As a result, the phase of optical signals is significantly different from the phase of pump signals. The
power fluctuation of the Raman pumping is offset in the counter-propagation. Hence, the noise caused by the pump can be effectively
suppressed.
Table 2 provides the functions and features of the 62COA.

Table 2 Functions and features of the 62COA

Function and Feature 62COA

Basic functions Is configured at the receive end of the SDH system, and realizes extra long-haul transmission (more than 170
km) when working with an EDFA whose output power is 17 dBm at the transmit end.
Pre-amplification function The 62COA provides the pre-amplification function.
ALS function Supports the ALS function.
Communication through serial ports Communicates with the GSCC through the RS-232 serial port, reports the alarms and performance events of
the COA to the NMS, and receives the configuration commands issued by the NMS.

Parent topic: COA

18.3.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the COA has indicators and interfaces.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the 61COA/N1COA.
Figure 1 Front panel of the 61COA/N1COA

NOTE:
Except the board name, a 61COA (BA) and a 61COA (PA) have the same exterior. The 61COA in Figure 1 is a 61COA (PA).

Figure 2 shows the appearance of the front panel of the 62COA.

Figure 2 Front panel of the 62COA

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board running status indicator (RUN) – one color (green)

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 377/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Fan alarm indicator (ALM) – one color (red)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces

The front panel of the 61COA/N1COA has one SC/PC optical interface. The optical interface receives and transmits one channel of optical
signals. The input optical interface of the 62COA is connected to the LSH flange and the output optical interface is connected to the SC
flange. Figure 3 shows the SC/PC fiber connector that the SC/PC optical interfaces of the 61COA and N1COA use.
Figure 3 SC/PC fiber connector

Figure 4 shows the flange and fiber connector that the input optical interface of the 62COA uses.
Figure 4 LSH flange and fiber connector

NOTE:
The protective cap of the LSH fiber jumper is specially designed. When you connect the LSH fiber jumper to an LSH flange, do not remove the protective cap but
insert the LSH fiber jumper into the LSH flange directly.

The COA has two RS-232 serial ports, which function as the control and communication ports. The serial ports communicate with the SCC
unit and report alarms and performance events.
Table 1 provides the pin assignments of the RS-232 serial port.

Table 1 Pin assignments of the RS-232 serial port

Front View Pin of RS-232-1 Pin of RS-232-2 Definition

2 2 Used to receive data.

3 3 Used to transmit data.

5 5 Used for common grounding.

NOTE:
To realize the communication between the COA and the GSCC, use a serial port control line to connect the RS-232-1 serial port of the COA to the F&f port of the
subrack.

The RS-232-2 serial port is used in the scenario where several COAs are used at a single station.
To enable each COA to communicate with the SCC unit, use a serial port line to connect the RS-232-2 port of COA 1 to the RS-232-1 port
of COA 2, and use another serial port line to connect the RS-232-2 port of COA 2 to the RS-232-1 port of COA 3. Connect the other COAs
similarly. In this case, each COA communicates with the SCC unit through the RS-232-1 serial port of COA 1.

NOTE:
When you cascade COAs, set the last four digits of the DIP switch on the front panel of each COA to a unique value. The values are used to identify the COAs. One
subrack supports a maximum of two COAs. The DIP switch IDs are in descending order. The leftmost is the highest significant bit and the rightmost is the least
significant bit. If the last four bits are 0000, the logical slot of the COA on the NMS is slot 101. If the last four bits are 0001, the logical slot of the COA on the NMS is
slot 102.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 378/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
The COA has two MONITOR interfaces. When the 61COA is used alone, the MONITOR-1 interface and MONITOR-2 interface are the
alarm output interfaces. In this case, the two MONITOR interfaces have the same functions. Table 2 provides the pin assignments of the
MONITOR interfaces.

Table 2 Pin assignments of the MONITOR interfaces

Front View Pin of MONITOR-1 Pin of MONITOR-2 Definition

1 and 6 1 and 6 The input optical power of the EDFA module is very
low.
2 and 7 2 and 7 The working current of the pump laser of the EDFA
module exceeds the threshold.
3 and 8 3 and 8 The cooling current of the pump laser of the EDFA
module exceeds the threshold.
4 and 9 4 and 9 The ambient temperature of the EDFA module exceeds
the threshold.
5 5 Digital ground

The 62COA has one RJ45 connector, through which the 62COA is connected to the computer for software loading. Table 3 provides the pin
assignments of the RJ45 connector of the 62COA.

Table 3 Pin assignments of the RJ45 connector of the 62COA

Front View Pin Description

1 Transmitting (+)
2 Transmitting (–)
3 Receiving (+)
4 Not defined
5 Not defined
6 Receiving (–)
7–8 Not defined

The COA has one –48 V power interface. The –48 V power interface receives the –48 V power provided by the PIU in the OptiX OSN 3500
subrack or the PDU at the top of the cabinet. The working voltage under normal working conditions ranges from –38.4 V to –57.6 V (–48
V±20%).
The COA has one DIP switch.

The DIP switches of the 61COA/N1COA are in the lower left corner of the front panel. The DIP switches are used to set the ID of
the 61COA/N1COA. When a bit of the DIP switch is set upwards, the bit is in the OFF position. When the bit is set downwards, the
bit is in the ON position. The SCC identifies a 61COA/N1COA through the ID of the 61COA/N1COA. The SCC communicates with
the 61COAs/N1COAs whose IDs are different in the master-slave calling mode.
The DIP switch of the 62COA is used to set the ID of the 62COA and the type of fiber. The DIP switch has eight bits. The bit on the
leftmost side is numbered "8" and the bit on the rightmost side is numbered "1". When a bit of the DIP switch is set upwards, the
bit indicates "0". When the bit is set downwards, the bit indicates "1". The first four bits (1–4) are used to set the board ID, which
ranges from 20 to 35. In actual situations, the first four bits indicate only the range from 20 to 27. The fifth bit is used to set the
type of fiber. When bit 5 indicates "0", the fiber is of the G.652 type. When bit 5 indicates "1", the fiber is of the G.655 type.

Parent topic: COA

18.4 RPC01
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the RPC01 (forward
Raman driving board).

Application
The RPC01 is an external forward Raman driving board that must work with the EDFA.

Functions and Features

The RPC01 supports the online optical performance monitoring function and other functions.

Front Panel
The front panel of the RPC01 has indicators, interfaces, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: Optical Amplifier Boards

18.4.1 Application
The RPC01 is an external forward Raman driving board that must work with the EDFA.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 379/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 shows the position of the RPC01 in an optical transmission system.

Figure 1 Position of the RPC01 in an optical transmission system

Parent topic: RPC01

18.4.2 Functions and Features

The RPC01 supports the online optical performance monitoring function and other functions.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the RPC01.

Table 1 Functions and features of the RPC01

Function and Feature RPC01

Basic functions Generates multi-channel pump light of high power, which provides energy for the amplification of
signals in the fiber.
Realizes the distributed online amplification of signals over long distance with wide bandwidth and
low noise.

Online optical performance Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical signal can be transmitted to the spectrum
monitoring function analyzer through the interface so that the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed optical signal
can be monitored without a service interruption.
Performance events and alarms Detects the pump optical power, temperature control current, pump current, and back facet current.
monitoring
Supports the setting of the LOS value to disable the output port of the laser.

Parent topic: RPC01

18.4.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the RPC01 has indicators, interfaces, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the RPC01.

Figure 1 Front panel of the RPC01

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board running status indicator (RUN) – one color (green)

Fan alarm indicator (ALM) – one color (red)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the RPC01 has six interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the RPC01.

Table 1 Interfaces of the RPC01

Interface Type of Interface Usage

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 380/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Interface Type of Interface Usage

LINE LSH/APC Transmits the amplified signals to the fibers.

SYS LC Is connected to the BA and receives the optical signals transmitted from the BA.
MON LC Monitors the optical performance.
The power of the MON interface is 1/99 of the power of the SYS interface. That is, the
power of the MON interface is 20 dB less than the power of the SYS interface.

LAN RJ-45 Is connected to the EXT/COM interface of an NE directly or through a hub to realize the
communication with the system control board.
RS232-1/RS232-2 - Is an RS-232 communication interface.

Parent topic: RPC01

18.5 RPC02
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the RPC02 (backward
Raman driving board).

Application
The RPC02 is an external backward Raman driving board that must work with the EDFA.

Functions and Features

The RPC02 supports the online optical performance monitoring function and other functions.

Front Panel
The front panel of the RPC02 has indicators, interfaces, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: Optical Amplifier Boards

18.5.1 Application
The RPC02 is an external backward Raman driving board that must work with the EDFA.
Figure 1 shows the position of the RPC02 in an optical transmission system.

Figure 1 Position of the RPC02 in an optical transmission system

Parent topic: RPC02

18.5.2 Functions and Features

The RPC02 supports the online optical performance monitoring function and other functions.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the RPC02.

Table 1 Functions and features of the RPC02

Function and Feature RPC02

Basic functions Generates multi-channel pump light of high power, which provides energy for the amplification of
signals in the fiber.
Realizes the distributed online amplification of signals over long distance with wide bandwidth and
low noise.

Online optical performance Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical signal can be transmitted to the spectrum
monitoring function analyzer through the interface so that the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed optical signal
can be monitored without a service interruption.
Performance events and alarms Detects the pump optical power, temperature control current, pump current, and back facet current.
monitoring
Supports the setting of the LOS value to disable the output port of the laser.

Parent topic: RPC02

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 381/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

18.5.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the RPC02 has indicators, interfaces, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the RPC02.

Figure 1 Front panel of the RPC02

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board running status indicator (RUN) – one color (green)

Fan alarm indicator (ALM) – one color (red)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the RPC02 has six interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the RPC02.

Table 1 Interfaces of the RPC02

Interface Type of Interface Usage

LINE LSH/APC Receives the optical signals transmitted from the line.
SYS LC Is connected to the BA and transmits the amplified signals to the fibers.
MON LC Monitors the optical performance.
The power of the MON interface is 1/99 of the power of the SYS interface. That is, the
power of the MON interface is 20 dB less than the power of the SYS interface.

LAN RJ-45 Is connected to the EXT/COM interface of an NE directly or through a hub to realize the
communication with the SCC.
RS232-1/RS232-2 - Is an RS-232 communication interface.

Parent topic: RPC02

18.6 OBU1
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the OBU1 (optical
booster amplifier board).

Application
The OBU1 is an optical booster amplifier board that amplifies optical signals.

Functions and Features

The OBU1 supports the online optical performance monitoring function, gain lock, transient control, and other functions.

Front Panel
The front panel of the OBU1 has indicators, interfaces, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: Optical Amplifier Boards

18.6.1 Application
The OBU1 is an optical booster amplifier board that amplifies optical signals.
localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 382/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
The OBU1 is available in two types, namely, OBU101 and OBU103. The OBU101 is used at the receive end and the OBU103 is used at the
transmit end. Figure 1 shows the position of the OBU1 in an optical transmission system.

Figure 1 Position of the OBU1 in an optical transmission system

Parent topic: OBU1

18.6.2 Functions and Features

The OBU1 supports the online optical performance monitoring function, gain lock, transient control, and other functions.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the OBU1.

Table 1 Functions and features of the OBU1

Function and Feature OBU1

Basic functions Amplifies a maximum of 40 channels of optical signals with the channel spacing of 100 GHz at the same time.
Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans without electrical regeneration.

Typical gain The typical gain of the OBU101 is 20 dB and the typical gain of the OBU103 is 23 dB.

Online optical performance Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical signal can be transmitted to the spectrum
monitoring function analyzer through the interface so that the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed optical signal can
be monitored without a service interruption.
Gain lock function The EDFA inside the board has the gain lock function. When one or more channels are added or dropped, or
optical signals of certain channels fluctuate, the signal gain of other channels is not affected.
Transient control function The EDFA inside the board has the transient control function. When channels are added or dropped, the board
can suppress the fluctuation of the optical power in the path to realize the smooth upgrading and expansion.
Performance events and alarms Checks and reports the optical power.
monitoring Controls the temperature of the pump laser.
Detects the pump driving current, back facet current, cooling current, temperature of the pump laser, and
ambient temperature of the board.

NOTE:
The OBU1 is available in two types, namely, OBU101 and OBU103. The OBU101 is used at the receive end and the OBU103 is used at the transmit end.

Parent topic: OBU1

18.6.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the OBU1 has indicators, interfaces, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the OBU1.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 383/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the OBU1

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the OBU1 has three optical interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the OBU1.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the OBU1

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN LC Receives the multiplexed signals to be amplified.

OUT LC Transmits the amplified multiplexed signals.
MON LC Is connected to the test instrument to monitor the in-service performance.

Parent topic: OBU1

18.7 OBU2
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the TN12OBU2
(optical booster amplifier board).

Application
OBU2 boards are optical booster amplifier boards, and they are available in only one type: OBU205.

Functions and Features

The OBU2 supports the online optical performance monitoring function, gain lock, transient control, and other functions.

Front Panel
The front panel of the OBU2 has indicators, interfaces, and a laser safety class label.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 384/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Parent topic: Optical Amplifier Boards

18.7.1 Application
OBU2 boards are optical booster amplifier boards, and they are available in only one type: OBU205.
Figure 1 shows the position of OBU2 boards in an optical transmission system.
Figure 1 Position of OBU2 boards in an optical transmission system

Parent topic: OBU2

18.7.2 Functions and Features

The OBU2 supports the online optical performance monitoring function, gain lock, transient control, and other functions.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the OBU2.

Table 1 Functions and features of the OBU2

Function and Feature OBU2

Basic functions Amplifies a maximum of 40 channels of optical signals with the channel spacing of 100 GHz at the same time.
Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans without electrical regeneration.

Typical gain The typical gain of the OBU205 is 23 dB.

Online optical performance Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical signal can be transmitted to the spectrum
monitoring function analyzer through the interface so that the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed optical signal can
be monitored without a service interruption.
Gain lock function The EDFA inside the board has the gain lock function. When one or more channels are added or dropped, or
optical signals of certain channels fluctuate, the signal gain of other channels is not affected.
Transient control function The EDFA inside the board has the transient control function. When channels are added or dropped, the board
can suppress the fluctuation of the optical power in the path to realize the smooth upgrading and expansion.
Performance events and alarms Checks and reports the optical power.
monitoring Controls the temperature of the pump laser.
Detects the pump driving current, back facet current, cooling current, temperature of the pump laser, and
ambient temperature of the board.

NOTE:
The OBU2 is available in only one type: OBU205.

Parent topic: OBU2

18.7.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the OBU2 has indicators, interfaces, and a laser safety class label.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the OBU2.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 385/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the OBU2

icators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) – one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) – two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, and yellow)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the OBU2 has five optical interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the OBU2.

Table 1 Optical interfaces of the OBU2

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN LC Receives the multiplexed signals to be amplified.

OUT LC Transmits the amplified multiplexed signals.
MON LC Is connected to the test instrument to monitor the in-service performance.
VO LC Transmits the adjusted multiplexed signal to the IN interface.
VI LC Receives the multiplexed signal to be adjusted.

Parent topic: OBU2

19 Dispersion Compensation Boards

This topic describes the dispersion compensation boards.

DCU
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the DCU
(dispersion compensation board).

Parent topic: Description of Common Hardware

19.1 DCU
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the DCU (dispersion
compensation board).

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 386/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Application
The DCU is a dispersion compensation board. The DCU compensates for the dispersion that is accumulated in the fiber during the
transmission of the optical signals in the 10 Gbit/s system, and compresses optical signal pulse. In this manner, the optical signals
that are transmitted can be restored. In addition, the DCU can realize long-haul optical transmission when it works with an optical
amplifier board.

Functions and Features

The DCU can compensate for the dispersion for a maximum of two channels of optical signals. The DCU can be used with the BA
and PA.

Front Panel
The front panel of the DCU has interfaces, and a laser safety class label.

Parent topic: Dispersion Compensation Boards

19.1.1 Application
The DCU is a dispersion compensation board. The DCU compensates for the dispersion that is accumulated in the fiber during the
transmission of the optical signals in the 10 Gbit/s system, and compresses optical signal pulse. In this manner, the optical signals that
are transmitted can be restored. In addition, the DCU can realize long-haul optical transmission when it works with an optical amplifier
board.
During the long-haul transmission (more than 80 km) of 10 Gbit/s signals, the pulse width of the optical signals is expanded and the
signals are severely distorted due to the impact of dispersion. As a result, the optical signals cannot be normally received by the optical
receiver. Therefore, the DCU is required to compensate for the dispersion. Figure 1 shows the position of the DCU in an optical transmission
system.
Figure 1 Position of the DCU in an optical transmission system

NOTE:
The operating wavelength of the chirp grating of the DCU is 1550.12 nm. Therefore, the central wavelength of the optical signals transmitted by the optical interface
board on the opposite end must also be 1550.12 nm. Otherwise, the dispersion of the optical signals cannot be compensated for and the insertion loss is high. As a
result, no optical signals can be transmitted.

Parent topic: DCU

19.1.2 Functions and Features

The DCU can compensate for the dispersion for a maximum of two channels of optical signals. The DCU can be used with the BA and PA.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the DCU.

Table 1 Functions and features of the DCU

Function and Feature N1DCU N2DCU

Basic functions Compensates for the dispersion of a maximum of two Compensates for the dispersion of a maximum of two
channels of optical signals at the same time. Supports the channels of optical signals at the same time. Supports the
compensated dispersion of 1020 ps/nm (for the dispersion compensated dispersion of 680 ps/nm (for the dispersion
caused by the 60 km G.652 optical fiber), 1360 ps/nm (for caused by the 40 km G.652 optical fiber), 1020 ps/nm (for
the dispersion caused by the 80 km G.652 optical fiber), or the dispersion caused by the 60 km G.652 optical fiber),
any combination. 1360 ps/nm (for the dispersion caused by the 80 km G.652
optical fiber), or any combination.
Dispersion Compensates for the dispersion accumulated during the transmission by using the chirp grating and suppresses the pulse
compensation method signals to restore the optical signals.
Long haul transmission Realizes long haul transmission with optical regeneration when working with the BA and PA.
with optical
regeneration

Parent topic: DCU

19.1.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the DCU has interfaces, and a laser safety class label.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 387/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
gram of the Front Panel
Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the one-interface DCU.

Figure 1 Front panel of the one-interface DCU

Figure 2 shows the appearance of the front panel of the two-interface DCU.
Figure 2 Front panel of the two-interface DCU

erfaces

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 388/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
The front panel of the one-interface DCU has one optical interface. The optical interface transmits and receives one channel of optical
signals.
The front panel of the two-interface DCU has two optical interfaces. The optical interfaces transmit and receive two channels of optical
signals.

CAUTION:
If the front panel of the one-interface DCU has two LC optical interfaces, only the upper optical interface (IN1/OUT1) is valid. In the case
of the DCU whose front panel has two LC optical interfaces, determine whether the DCU is a one-interface DCU or a two-interface DCU
according to Feature Code.

Table 1 describes the type and usage of the optical interface of the one-interface DCU.

Table 1 Optical interface of the one-interface DCU

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN LC Receives one channel of optical signals.

OUT LC Transmits one channel of optical signals.

Table 2 describes the types and usage of the optical interfaces of the two-interface DCU.

Table 2 Optical interfaces of the two-interface DCU

Interface Type of Interface Usage

IN1 LC Receives the first channel of optical signals.

OUT1 LC Transmits the first channel of optical signals.
IN2 LC Receives the second channel of optical signals.
OUT2 LC Transmits the second channel of optical signals.

Parent topic: DCU

20 Power Boards
This topic describes the power boards such as the UPM, PIU and PIUA.

UPM
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the UPM
(uninterruptible power module).

PIU
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the PIU (power
interface board).

PIUA
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the PIUA (power
interface board).

PIUB
The PIUB board is the power interface unit between the DC power distribution box and each board on the subrack. This section
describes the versions, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the PIUB board.

Parent topic: Description of Common Hardware

20.1 UPM
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the UPM
(uninterruptible power module).

Application
The UPM is an external uninterruptible power module. The UPM can directly convert 110 V/220 V AC mains power into -48 V DC
power required by the transmission equipment. The UPM is suitable for the telecom carriers who cannot provide -48 V DC power
supply or requires batteries.

Functions and Features

The UPM is a special power supply system and is numbered ETP4890 and EPS75-4815AF. The UPM can directly convert 110 V/220 V
AC power into –48 V DC power that the transmission equipment requires. The UPM is suitable for the telecom carriers who cannot
provide –48 V DC power for the equipment or telecom carriers who require storage batteries.

Front Panel (ETP4890)

The front panel of the UPM has indicators and ports of many types.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 389/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Front Panel (EPS75-4815AF)
The front panel of the UPM has indicators and ports of many types.

Parent topic: Power Boards

20.1.1 Application
The UPM is an external uninterruptible power module. The UPM can directly convert 110 V/220 V AC mains power into -48 V DC power
required by the transmission equipment. The UPM is suitable for the telecom carriers who cannot provide -48 V DC power supply or
requires batteries.
Figure 1 shows the application of the UPM on the OptiX OSN equipment series.
Figure 1 Application of the UPM on the OptiX OSN equipment series

Table 1 shows different mapping policies of UPM.

Table 1 Mapping policies of UPM on the OptiX OSN 3500

Type of Subrack Mapping PDU Mapping PIU Mapping UPM

General OptiX OSN 3500 subrack N1PDU, DPD100-2-8 PDU N1PIU, N1PIUA EPS75-4815AF, ETP4890
Enhanced OptiX OSN 3500 subrack N1PDU, DPD100-2-8 PDU N1PIUA EPS75-4815AF, ETP4890
(1100 W)
OptiX OSN 3500 type III subrack TN51PDU, DPD63-8-8 PDU N1PIUB EPS75-4815AF, ETP4890
(2300 W)

Parent topic: UPM

20.1.2 Functions and Features

The UPM is a special power supply system and is numbered ETP4890 and EPS75-4815AF. The UPM can directly convert 110 V/220 V AC
power into –48 V DC power that the transmission equipment requires. The UPM is suitable for the telecom carriers who cannot provide –
48 V DC power for the equipment or telecom carriers who require storage batteries.
The UPM consists of the rectifier module, monitoring module, and DC/AC power distribution frame. The rectifier module and monitoring
module are hot-swappable so that faulty modules can be replaced without the system being shut down.
The UPM power box can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or an ETSI cabinet.
The storage batteries of the UPM work with one ETP4890 power system or one EPS75-4815AF power system. When the external AC
power system supplies power normally, the batteries store power. When the 110 V/220 V AC power supply is interrupted, the batteries
can supply power for 4 hours. To supply power to the OptiX OSN equipment, only one power system is required to be connected to the
batteries.

P4890
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the ETP4890.

Table 1 Functions and features of the ETP4890 power system

Function and Feature Description

Basic function Converts 220 V AC power input to -48 V DC power output.

Power system configuration AC power Supports 85 V to 300 V AC input voltages
distribution

Rectifier module Supports a maximum of three rectifier modules.

Supports the 90 A rectifier module type.

DC power Provides 47.0 V DC to 56.5 V DC power outputs, with 53.5 V DC by default.

distribution

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 390/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Function and Feature Description

Power monitoring
unit (PMU)
Regulates rectifier module voltages and currents.
Powers on or off the rectifier module.
Manages batteries.
Monitors battery status when being configured with a temperature sensor.

Storage battery Provides a valve regulated lead-acid battery (48 V/65 Ah/12 V-cell batteries).

Installation and maintenance Allows users to perform operations and maintenance using the front panel.
Supports simple operations on the LCD.
Provides the hot-swappable rectifier module and monitoring module.

S75-4815AF
Table 2 provides the functions and features of the EPS75-4815AF.

Table 2 Functions and features of the EPS75-4815AF power system

Function and Feature Description

Hot-swappable function The AC/DC rectifier module of the UPM is hot-swappable. When you replace a faulty rectifier module, the
other rectifier module can still work normally. Therefore, the maintainability of the system is improved.
Storage battery protection function The UPM provides the storage battery protection function. When the mains supply is interrupted, the power
system of the equipment automatically switches to the storage battery, which ensures that the equipment
operates normally. The battery module provides a capacity of 40 to 500 Ah. The default capacity is 65 Ah.
Lightning-proof function The rectifier module is embedded with the lightning-proof protector. The rectifier module can bear ±5
lightning-simulated surges with an 8/20 μs current waveform at the amplitude of 5 kA. When the lightning
current enters the rectifier module along with the power cable, install category-C and category-B light
arresters before you connect the AC mains supply to the power system to prevent the overvoltage caused by
the direct lightning strike from damaging the rectifier module.

NOTE:
The storage batteries do not belong to the ETP4890 or EPS75-4815AF power system. They need to be configured separately. If the batteries are required, a battery
cabinet is provided generally or a dedicated space in the equipment cabinet is reserved for the batteries.

Parent topic: UPM

20.1.3 Front Panel (ETP4890)

The front panel of the UPM has indicators and ports of many types.

nt Panel Diagram
Figure 1 Front panel of an AC power box

ctifier Module
A rectifier module has a power indicator, an alarm indicator, and a fault indicator.

NOTE:
Rectifier modules come in different types that are the same in structure but different in label. The following considers R4830G as an example.

Figure 2 Front panel of a rectifier module

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 391/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Table 1 Indicators on a rectifier module

Mark Indicator Name Description

Power indicator Indicates the power input and running status of a rectifier module.

Alarm indicator Indicates the alarm status of a rectifier module.

Fault indicator Indicates whether a fault occurs on a rectifier module.

nitoring Module
A monitoring module has indicators, a liquid crystal display (LCD), buttons, and communication and monitoring ports on its front panel.
Figure 3 Front panel of a monitoring module

Table 2 Front panel of a monitoring module

No. Name Description

1 Running status indicator Indicates the running status of a monitoring module.

2 Alarm indicator Indicates the alarm status of a monitoring module.
3 LCD Displays system running information and menu options.
4 Button Operates menus displayed on the LCD.
5 Locking switch Locks or unlocks a monitoring module.
6 DB50 port (Reserved)
7 Battery temperature sensor port Connects to a battery temperature sensor.
8 RS485/RS232 port (Reserved)
9 COM port (Reserved)

NOTE:
For details, see ETP4890-A2 User Manual.

Parent topic: UPM

20.1.4 Front Panel (EPS75-4815AF)

The front panel of the UPM has indicators and ports of many types.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the front panel of the EPS75-4815AF power system (subject to the UPM onsite).

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 392/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the EPS75-4815AF power system

1. Control circuit breaker of the AC input (30 2. Control circuit breaker of the battery branch (80 3. Control circuit breaker of load 1 (10 A)
A) A)

4. Control circuit breaker of load 2 (30 A) 5. Control circuit breaker of load 3 (40 A) 6. Control circuit breaker of load 4 (40 A)

7. AC phase line terminal 8. AC zero line terminal 9. Negative 48 V terminal of the battery
branch

10. Negative 48 V terminal of the load branch 11. Positive 48 V terminal of the battery branch 12. Positive 48 V terminal of the load branch

13. Connecting terminal of the PGND cable 14. DB44 signal port 15. Communication port (COM)

icators of the EPS75-4815AF

The front panel of each rectifier module has the following indicators:

Running status indicator (RUN) – one color (green)

Alarm and protection indicator (ALM) – one color (yellow)
Faulty state indicator (FAULT) – one color (red)

The front panel of the monitoring module has the following indicators:

Power supply system fault indicator (ALM) – one color (red)

Power supply system status indicator (RUN) – one color (green)

For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicators.

rts of the EPS75-4815AF Power System

The front panel of the EPS75-4815AF has six ports. Table 1 describes the types and usage of these ports.

Table 1 Ports of the EPS75-4815AF power system

Port Type Usage

Power input port Power port "7" and "8" indicate the AC mains input terminals, which receive 110 V/220 V
AC power.
Power output port Power port The power output ports are in the lower left corner on the front panel of the
UPM. The terminals indicated by "9" and "11" form a battery port, through
which the power system is connected to the battery input socket at the back
of the storage battery box through a battery cable. "10" and "12" indicate the
output ports of four loads. The output ports can supply power to the OptiX
OSN equipment by using power cables.
Connecting terminal of the PGND Power port The UPM is grounded through the cabinet.
cable
DB44 signal port DB44 The backplane of the subrack can be connected to the sensor transfer box
(an optional device) through the DB44 signal port and to the monitoring
module through the 96-pin DIN connector. In addition, the sensor transfer
box can be connected to multiple sensors. As a result, the monitoring
function is extended.
Communication port (COM) RJ-45 Reserved
Switch button Button The switch buttons are on the left of the UPM, as shown in Figure 1. "1"
indicates the control circuit breaker of the AC input (30 A), which enables and
disables the input of the AC mains supply. "2", "3", "4", and "5" indicate the
load control switches, which enable and disable the load output.

Table 2 provides the definition of DB44 signal pins.

Table 2 Definition of DB44 signal pins

Pin Diagram Pin Definition Function Pin Definition Function

1 24 V Auxiliary power output 23 SMOKE Smoke sensor

2 12 V Auxiliary power output 24 WATER Water damage detection

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 393/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Pin Diagram Pin Definition Function Pin Definition Function

3 12 V Auxiliary power output 25 DOOR Door status switch (DSS) signal

detection
4 GND Signal ground 26 WIRE Distribution frame connection
5 GND Signal ground 27 JK1+ Positive terminal of dry contact 1
6 SIM1 Voltage detection of the 28 JK1- Negative terminal of dry contact 1
first battery pack
7 SIM2 Voltage detection of the 29 JK2+ Positive terminal of dry contact 2
second battery pack
8 - - 30 JK2- Negative terminal of dry contact 2
9 - - 31 CONT1O+ Positive terminal for output control of
optical coupler 1
10 GND Signal ground 32 CONT1O- Negative terminal for output control of
optical coupler 1
11 VHUM Ambient humidity 33 CONT2O+ Positive terminal for output control of
measurement optical coupler 2
12 VBTEM1 Battery temperature 34 CONT2O- Negative terminal for output control of
measurement 1 optical coupler 2
13 VBTEM2 Battery temperature 35 FANCTR1+ Positive terminal for fan rotation control
measurement 2
14 VTEM1 Ambient temperature 36 FANCTR1- Negative terminal for fan rotation
measurement 1 control
15 VTEM2 Ambient temperature 37 JKM1+ Positive terminal for a surge protector
measurement 2 failure alarm
16 JTD1 Backup 1 38 JKM1- Negative terminal for a surge protector
failure alarm
17 JTD2 Backup 2 39 JKM2+ Positive terminal for an AC power-off
alarm
18 JTD3 Backup 3 40 JKM2- Negative terminal for an AC power-off
alarm
19 JTD4 Backup 4 41 JKM3+ Positive terminal for a battery
undervoltage alarm
20 JTD5 Backup 5 42 JKM3- Negative terminal for a battery
undervoltage alarm
21 JTD6 Backup 6 43 JKM4+ Positive terminal for power supply
system failure
22 JTD7 Backup 7 44 JKM4- Negative terminal for power supply
system failure

Parent topic: UPM

20.2 PIU
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the PIU (power
interface board).

Application
The PIU is a power interface board that is mainly used to receive the power supply for the OptiX OSN equipment.

Functions and Features

The PIU is used to receive the power supply and to provide the lightning protection function and filtering function.

Front Panel
The front panel of the PIU has power interfaces.

Parent topic: Power Boards

20.2.1 Application
The PIU is a power interface board that is mainly used to receive the power supply for the OptiX OSN equipment.
Figure 1 shows the application of the PIU on the OptiX OSN equipment series.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 394/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Application of the PIU on the OptiX OSN equipment series

Parent topic: PIU

20.2.2 Functions and Features

The PIU is used to receive the power supply and to provide the lightning protection function and filtering function.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the PIU.

Table 1 Functions and features of the PIU

Function and Feature PIU

Lightning protection function Provides the lightning protection function and reports the alarm that indicates a surge protection failure.
Filtering function Enhances the electromagnetic compatibility of the system by filtering the power supply interface and shielding
the structure of the board.
Power supply interface Provides two 50 W power interfaces for external devices such as the COA.
Power supply of the FAN Provides the FAN with normal working voltages.
Alarm monitoring Reports the board in-position alarm.
Power supply backup Supports the 1+1 hot backup. Any one PIU can supply power to an entire subrack.

NOTE:
One PIU can supply power to an entire subrack.

Parent topic: PIU

20.2.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the PIU has power interfaces.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIU.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 395/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the PIU

erfaces
The front panel of the PIU has two power interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the PIU.

Table 1 Interfaces of the PIU

Interface Type of Interface Usage

PWR 3V3 terminal Receives the -48 V/-60 V DC power supply.

PS1/PS2 Four-phase socket Provides the 50 W power output and can supply power to the COA.

Parent topic: PIU

20.3 PIUA
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the PIUA (power
interface board).

Application
The PIUA is a power interface board that is mainly used to receive the power supply for the OptiX OSN equipment.

Functions and Features

The PIUA is used to receive the power supply and to provide the lightning protection function and filtering function.

Front Panel
The front panel of the PIUA has indicators and power interfaces.

Parent topic: Power Boards

20.3.1 Application
The PIUA is a power interface board that is mainly used to receive the power supply for the OptiX OSN equipment.
Figure 1 shows the application of the PIUA on the OptiX OSN equipment series.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 396/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Application of the PIUA on the OptiX OSN equipment series

Parent topic: PIUA

20.3.2 Functions and Features

The PIUA is used to receive the power supply and to provide the lightning protection function and filtering function.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the PIUA.

Table 1 Functions and features of the PIUA

Function and Feature PIUA

Lightning protection function Provides the lightning protection function and reports the alarm that indicates a surge protection failure.
Filtering function Enhances the electromagnetic compatibility of the system by filtering the power supply interface and shielding
the structure of the board.
Power supply interface Provides two 50 W power interfaces for external devices such as the COA and hub.
Alarm monitoring Reports the board in-position alarm.
Power supply backup Supports the 1+1 hot backup. Any one PIUA can supply power to the entire subrack.

Parent topic: PIUA

20.3.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the PIUA has indicators and power interfaces.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIUA.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 397/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the PIUA

icators
The front panel of the board has a power supply indicator (POWER). The POWER indicator is green when it is on.
For the meanings of the status of the indicator, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the PIUA has two power interfaces. Table 1 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the PIUA.

Table 1 Interfaces of the PIUA

Interface Type of Interface Usage

PWR 3V3 terminal Receives the –48 V/-60 V DC power supply.

PS1/PS2 Four-phase socket Provides the 50 W power output and can supply power to the COA.

Parent topic: PIUA

20.4 PIUB
The PIUB board is the power interface unit between the DC power distribution box and each board on the subrack. This section describes
the versions, functions, working principle, front panel, and technical specifications of the PIUB board.

Application
The PIUB board is a power interface board that provides power supply for the OptiX OSN 3500.

Functions and Features

The PIUB is a power interface board that provides power supply, lightning protection, and filtering functions.

Front Panel
The front panel of the PIUB has indicators and power interfaces.

Parent topic: Power Boards

20.4.1 Application
The PIUB board is a power interface board that provides power supply for the OptiX OSN 3500.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 398/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 shows the application of the PIUB board in the OptiX OSN system.

Figure 1 Application of the PIUB board in the OptiX OSN system

Parent topic: PIUB

20.4.2 Functions and Features

The PIUB is a power interface board that provides power supply, lightning protection, and filtering functions.
Table 1 provides the functions and features of the PIUB board.

Table 1 Functions and features of the PIUB board

Functions and Features Description

Lightning protection function Provides the lightning protection function and reports the alarm that indicates a surge protection failure.
Filtering function Enhances the electromagnetic compatibility of the system by filtering the power supply interface and shielding
the structure of the board.
Power supply interface Provides two 50 W power interfaces for external units such as the COA.
Alarm monitoring Reports the board in-position alarm.
Power supply backup Supports 1+1 hot backup. Any one PIUB can supply power to an entire subrack.

Parent topic: PIUB

20.4.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the PIUB has indicators and power interfaces.

gram of the Front Panel

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIUB board.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 399/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Front panel of the PIUB

icators
The front panel of the board has a power supply indicator (POWER). The POWER indicator is green when it is on.
For the meanings of the status of the indicator, see Indicators.

erfaces
The front panel of the PIUB board has two power interfaces. Table 1 provides the types and usage of the power interfaces of the PIUB
board.

Table 1 Description of the interfaces on the PIUB board

Interface Silkscreen Type of Interface Usage

PWR RTN(+), NEG(-) Dual-OT terminal Provides -48 V/-60 V DC power input.
PWS PS1, PS2 Four-phase socket Provides two 50 W power outputs for the COA.

Table 2 provides the pin description of the PS1 and PS2 interfaces on the PIUB board.

Table 2 Pin description of the PWS interfaces on the PIUB board

Front View Pin Usage

1 -48 V/-60 V

2 -48 V/-60 V

3 Grounding

4 Not defined

Parent topic: PIUB

21 Pluggable Optical Module

Certain boards on the OptiX OSN equipment supports the small form-factor pluggable (SFP), enhanced small form-factor pluggable
(eSFP), 10 Gigabit small form-factor pluggable (XFP) optical modules. When you need to adjust the type of accessed services or replace
such a faulty optical module, you just need to directly replace the pluggable optical module without replacing its board.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 400/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Overview
The pluggable optical modules is mainly used for SDH optical communication and Ethernet data communication.

SFP/eSFP/SFP+
This topic describes the BOM number, name, specifications, and supported boards of the SFP/eSFP optical modules.

XFP
This topic describes the BOM number, name, specifications, and supported boards of the XFP optical modules.

CWDM/DWDM
This topic describes the BOM number, name, specifications, and supported boards of the CWDM/DWDM optical modules.

Parent topic: Description of Common Hardware

21.1 Overview
The pluggable optical modules is mainly used for SDH optical communication and Ethernet data communication.

pearance
Figure 1 shows the appearances of the SFP and eSFP optical modules, Figure 2 shows the appearance of the XFP optical module.
Figure 1 SFP/eSFP optical module

The dimensions of the SFP and eSFP optical modules are 13.4 mm (W) x 56.5 mm (D) x 8.5 mm (H).

Figure 2 XFP optical module

The dimensions of the XFP optical module are 18.3 mm (W) x 78 mm (D) x 8.5 mm (H).

M
The BOM of a pluggable optical module is used to identify different types of optical modules. The BOM can be marked on a label that is
attached to each pluggable optical module.
Figure 3 shows the label of a pluggable optical module.

Figure 3 Label of a pluggable optical module

NOTE:
You can check the specifications of an optical module in this manual according to the BOM of the optical module.

Parent topic: Pluggable Optical Module

21.2 SFP/eSFP/SFP+
This topic describes the BOM number, name, specifications, and supported boards of the SFP/eSFP optical modules.

Table 1 lists the BOM numbers and specifications of the SFP/eSFP optical modules.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 401/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Table 1 Mapping table of the BOM numbers and the types of the SFP/eSFP optical modules
BOM Number Name Specifications Compatible Board
(Name-Encapsulation Form-Operating
Wavelength-Rate-Minimum Output Optical Power-
Maximum Output Optical Power-Receiver
Sensitivity-Optical Interface Type-Optical Fiber
Type-Transmission Distance)

34060588 2 Mbit/s eSFP optical module Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, 2.048 Mb/s, N1PFL1
15 dBm, 8 dBm, 26 dBm, LC, SM, 2 km
34060287 155 Mbit/s SFP optical module Optical transceiver, SFP, 1310 nm, STM1, -19 to N1ADQ1, N1EFF8, N1IDQ1, N1MST4, N1SLQ1,
-14 dBm, -30 dBm, LC, MM, 2 km N1SLQ1A, N1IDQ1A, N1EFF8A, N1PEFF8,
R1PEF4F
34060276 155 Mbit/s eSFP optical module Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, STM1, -15 to N1OU08, N1SL1, N2SL1, N1SLQ1, N2SLQ1,
-8 dBm, -31 dBm, LC, SM, 15 km R1SLQ1, R1SL1, N1ADQ1, N1EFF8, N1IDQ1,
N1SLT1, N2SLO1, N1SL1A, N1SLQ1A, N1IDQ1A,
N3SLO1, R3SL1, N1EFF8A, R1PCXLN, N1CQ1,
N1PEFF8, R1PEF4F, N1EDQ41, TNN1CO1,
TNN1AFO1
34060281 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, STM1, -5 to N1SL1, N2SL1, N1SLQ1, N2SLQ1, N1ADQ1,
0 dBm, -37 dBm, LC, SM, 40 km N1IDQ1, N2SLO1, N1SL1A, N1SLQ1A, N3SLO1,
R1SL1, R3SL1, R1SLQ1, N1SLT1, R1PCXLN,
N1PEFF8, R1PEF4F, N1EDQ41, TNN1CO1,
TNN1AFO1
34060282 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1550 nm, STM1, -5 to N1SL1, N2SL1, N1SLQ1, N2SLQ1, R1SLQ1,
0 dBm, -37 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km R1SL1, N1ADQ1, N1IDQ1, N1SL1A, N1SLQ1A,
N3SLO1, R3SL1, N1SLT1, N1PEFF8, R1PEF4F,
N1EDQ41, TNN1CO1, TNN1AFO1
34060277 622 Mbit/s eSFP optical module Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, STM4, -15 to N1SL4, N2SL4, N1SL4A, N1SLD4, N2SLD4,
-8 dBm, -30 dBm, LC, SM, 15 km N1SLD4A, N1SLQ4, N2SLQ4, N1SLQ4A,
R1PCXLN, N1EDQ41, R1SL4, R3SL4, R1SLD4,
R3SLD4, MST4
34060280 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, STM4, -3 to N2SLQ4, N2SL4, N1SL4, N1SLD4, N2SLD4,
2 dBm, -30 dBm, LC, SM, 40 km N1SLQ4, N2SLQ4, R1SL4, R1SLD4, N1ADL4,
N1IDL4, N1MST4, N1SL4A, N1SLD4A, N1SLQ4A,
R3SL4, R3SLD4, R1PCXLN, N1EDQ41
34060284 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1550 nm, STM4, -3 to N1SL4, N2SL4, N1SLD4, N2SLD4, N1SLQ4,
2dBm, -30 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km N2SLQ4, R1SL4, R1SLD4, N1ADL4, N1IDL4,
N1SL4A, N1SLD4A, N1SLQ4A, N1SL4A,
N1SLD4A, N1SLQ4A, R3SL4, R3SLD4, R1PCXLN,
N1EDQ41
34060285 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1550 nm, STM4, -3 to N1SL4, N2SL4, N1SL4A, N1SLD4, N2SLD4,
+2 dBm, -36 dBm, LC, SM, 100 km N1SLD4A, N2SLQ4, N1SLQ4A, R1SL4, R3SL4,
R1SLD4, R3SLD4
34060473 1.25 Gbit/s eSFP optical module Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N2EGR2, N2EMR0, N1EGS4,
-9 to -3 dBm, -20 dBm, LC, SM, 10 km N1EMS4, N3EGS4, N2EGT2, N3EGS2, N4EGS4,
N1EMS2, N1PEG16, N1PEG8, R1PEGS1,
Q1PEGS2, TNN1EG8
34060298 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, N2EGS2, N3EGS2, N1EGT2, N2EGT2, N2EGR2,
-5 to -0 dBm, -23 dBm, LC, SM, 40 km N2EMR0, N1EGS4, N3EGS4, N4EGS4, N1EMS4,
N1EMS2, N1PEG16, N1PEG8, R1PEGS1,
Q1PEGS2, TNN1EG8
34060360 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1550 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, N1EGT2, N3EGS2, N2EGT2, N4EGS4, N1PEG16,
-2 to 5 dBm, -23 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km N1PEG8, R1PEGS1, Q1PEGS2, TNN1EG8
34060487 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, TNN1EG16, N1EGSH
-9.5 to -3 dBm, -20 dBm, LC, SM, 10 km
34060286 2.125 Gbit/s eSFP optical Optical transceiver, eSFP, 850 nm, 2.125 Gbit/s N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N2EMR0, N1EGS4, N1EMS4,
module (multi rate), -9.5 to -2.5 dBm, -17dBm, LC, MM, N3EGS4, N2EGT2, N3EGS2, N4EGS4, N1EMS2,
0.5 km N1PEG16, N1PEG8, R1PEGS1, Q1PEGS2,
TNN1EG8, N1EGSH
34060317 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 850 nm, 2.125 Gbit/s TNN1EG16
(multi rate), -9 to -3.5 dBm, -18dBm, LC, MM, 0.5
km
34060278 2.5 Gbit/s eSFP optical module Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, STM16, -5 N1SLD16, N2SLQ16
to 0 dBm, -21 dBm, LC, SM, 15 km
34060288 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, STM16, -10 N1SLQ16, N2SLQ16, N1SLD16
to -3 dBm, -21 dBm, LC, SM, 2 km
34060484 Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, 155 Mbit/s N1SLO16, N4SLO16, N4SLQ16, N3SL16A
to 2.67 Gbit/s, -10 to -3 dBm, -21 dBm, LC, SM,
2 km

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 402/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

BOM Number Name Specifications Compatible Board

(Name-Encapsulation Form-Operating
Wavelength-Rate-Minimum Output Optical Power-
Maximum Output Optical Power-Receiver
Sensitivity-Optical Interface Type-Optical Fiber
Type-Transmission Distance)

34060485 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, 155 Mbit/s N2SL16A, N3SL16A, N1SLO16, N4SLO16,
to 2.67 Gbit/s, -5 to 0 dBm, -21 dBm, LC, SM, 15 R1PCXLN
km
34060488 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1550 nm, STM16, -2 to N1SLQ16, N2SLQ16, N2SL16A, N3SL16A,
3 dBm, -30 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km N1SLD16, N1SLO16, N4SLQ16, R1PCXLN
03030GGV OptiX HPLAT, SSX2T1SA02, 2.5 Gbit/s ESFP N1SLD16, N1SLO16, N4SLO16, N1SLQ16,
transceiver (-30 dBm to -9 dBm, 1310 nm, 40 N2SLQ16, N4SLQ16, N3SL16A
km, -2 dBm to +3 dBm, LC)
03030GBQ OptiX HPLAT, SSX2T1SA01, 2.5 Gbit/s ESFP N4SLO16, N4SLQ16
transceiver (-31 dBm to -9 dBm, 1550 nm, 1600
ps/nm, 80 km, -2 to +3 dBm, LC)

P+
Table 2 lists the BOM numbers and specifications of the SFP+ optical modules.

Table 2 Mapping table of the BOM numbers and the types of the SFP+ optical modules
BOM Number Name Specifications Compatible Board
(Name-Encapsulation Form-Operating
Wavelength-Rate-Minimum Output Optical Power-
Maximum Output Optical Power-Receiver
Sensitivity-Optical Interface Type-Optical Fiber
Type-Transmission Distance)

34060495 10 Gbit/s SFP+ optical module Optical transceiver, SFP+, 1310 nm, 10 Gbit/s, N3EAS2
-8.2 to +0.5 dBm, -12.6 dBm, LC, SM, 10 km

gle-Fiber Bidirectional Optical Module

Table 3 lists the BOM numbers and specifications of the single-fiber bidirectional eSFP optical modules.

Table 3 Mapping table of the BOM numbers and the types of the single-fiber bidirectional SFP/eSFP optical modules
BOM Number Name (Name-Encapsulation Form-Operating Compatible Board
Wavelength-Rate-Minimum Output Optical Power-
Maximum Output Optical Power-Receiver
Sensitivity-Optical Interface Type-Optical Fiber
Type-Transmission Distance)

34060364 155 Mbit/s single-fiber BiDi transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1550 nm/Rx 1310 nm, N1SLQ1, N1SLT1, N1SLH1, R1SLQ1, N1SL1A,
bidirectional eSFP optical STM1, -15 dBm, -8 dBm, -32 dBm, LC/PC, SM, 15 N1OU08, N3SLQ41, R1PEF4F, N1PEFF8,
module km TNN1EFF8, N3SLH41
34060363 BiDi transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1550 nm,
155M, -15 dBm, -8 dBm, -32 dBm, LC/PC, SM, 15
km
34060329 BiDi transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1550 nm/Rx 1310 nm, N1SLQ1, N1SLT1, N1SLH1, R1SLQ1, N1SL1A,
155M, -5 dBm, -0 dBm, -32 dBm, LC/PC, SM, 40 N1OU08, N3SLQ41
km
34060328 BiDi transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1550 nm,
155M, -5 dBm, -0 dBm, -32 dBm, LC/PC, SM, 40
km
34060475 1.25 Gbit/s single-fiber BiDi transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1490 nm/Rx 1310 nm, N1SLD4, N1SLQ4, N1SL4A, N3SLQ41, R1PEGS1,
bidirectional eSFP optical 1.25 Gbit/s, -9 dBm, -3 dBm, -19.5 dBm, LC, SM, R1PEGS2, N1PEG8, TNN1EG8
module 10 km
34060470 BiDi transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1490 nm,
1.25 Gbit/s, -9 dBm, -3 dBm, -19.5 dBm, LC, SM,
10 km
34060639 BiDi transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1550 nm/Rx 1310 nm, R1PEF4F, N1PEFF8, TNN1EFF8, N3SLH41
0.1 to 1.25Gb/s, -3 dBm, -2 dBm, -25 dBm, LC,
SM, 40 km
34060638 BiDi transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1550 nm,
0.1 to 1.25Gb/s, -3 dBm, -2 dBm, -25 dBm, LC,
SM, 40 km
34060539 BiDi transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1490 nm, R1PEGS1, R1PEGS2, N1PEG8, TNN1EG8
1.25 Gbit/s, -2 dBm, -3 dBm, -23 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
34060540 BiDi transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1490 nm/Rx 1310 nm,
1.25 Gbit/s, -2 dBm, -3 dBm, -23 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 403/502

 2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

BOM Number Name (Name-Encapsulation Form-Operating Compatible Board

Wavelength-Rate-Minimum Output Optical Power-
Maximum Output Optical Power-Receiver
Sensitivity-Optical Interface Type-Optical Fiber
Type-Transmission Distance)

34060595 BiDi transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1570 nm/Rx 1490 nm,

1.25 Gbit/s, -2 dBm, -4 dBm, -26 dBm, LC, SM,
80 km
34060596 BiDi transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1490 nm/Rx 1570 nm,
1.25 Gbit/s, -2 dBm, -4 dBm, -26 dBm, LC, SM,
80 km
34060621 2.5 Gbit/s single-fiber BiDi transceiver, SFP, Tx 1490 nm/Rx 1310 nm, N4SLQ16, N4SLO16
bidirectional SFP optical 2.5G, -5 dBm to 0 dBm, -18 dBm, LC, SMF, 15
module km
34060622 BiDi transceiver, SFP, Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1490 nm,
2.5G, -5 dBm, 0 dBm, -18 dBm, LC, SMF, 15 km

NOTE:
Optical module data is subject to product versions, so contact Huawei local office for latest data.

Parent topic: Pluggable Optical Module

21.3 XFP
This topic describes the BOM number, name, specifications, and supported boards of the XFP optical modules.
Table 1 lists the BOM numbers and specifications of the XFP optical modules.

Table 1 Mapping table of the BOM numbers and the types of the XFP optical modules
BOM Number Name Specifications Compatible Board
(Name-Encapsulation Form-Operating
Wavelength-Rate-Minimum Output Optical Power-
Maximum Output Optical Power-Receiver
Sensitivity-Optical Interface Type-Optical Fiber
Type-Transmission Distance)

34060313 9.95 Gbit/s to 10.71 Gbit/s XFP Optical transceiver, XFP, 1310 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to N1SLD64, N1EAS2, N4SL64, N1PEX1, N2PEX1,
optical module 10.71 Gbit/s, -6 dBm to -1 dBm, -11 dBm, LC, N1PEX2, TNN1EX2
SM, 10 km
34060322 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s XFP Optical transceiver, XFP, 1550 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to N1PEX1, N2PEX1, N1PEX2, TNN1EX2, N4SL64,
optical module 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm to 2 dBm, -15 dBm, LC, SM, N4SLD64
40 km
34060361 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s XFP Optical transceiver, XFP, 1550 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to N1PEX1, N2PEX1, N1PEX2, TNN1EX2, N4SL64,
optical module 11.1 Gbit/s, 0 dBm to 4 dBm, -24 dBm, LC, SM, N4SLD64
80 km
03030JHE 10.71 Gbit/s XFP optical Optical transceiver (-19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, N4SL64
module 800 ps/nm, -1 dBm to +2 dBm, 193.4 THz,
LC/PC), 100 GHz spacing wavelength, FEC, EA
03030LRT 10.71 Gbit/s XFP optical Optical transceiver (-19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, N4SFD64, N4SF64, N4SL64
module 800 ps/nm, -1 dBm to +2 dBm, 193.4 THz,
LC/PC), 100 GHz spacing wavelength, FEC, EA

NOTE:
Optical module data is subject to product versions, so contact Huawei local office for latest data.

Parent topic: Pluggable Optical Module

21.4 CWDM/DWDM
This topic describes the BOM number, name, specifications, and supported boards of the CWDM/DWDM optical modules.

WDM Optical Module

lists the BOM numbers and specifications of the 2.5 Gbit/s CWDM eSFP optical modules. Table 2 lists the BOM numbers and
Table 1
specifications of the 10 Gbit/s CWDM XFP optical modules.

Table 1 Mapping table of the BOM numbers and the types of the 2.5 Gbit/s CWDM eSFP optical modules

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 404/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

BOM Number Name (Name, Encapsulation Form, Operating Compatible Board

Wavelength, Rate, Minimum Output Optical
Power, Maximum Output Optical Power, Receiver
Sensitivity, Optical Interface Type, Optical Fiber
Type, Transmission Distance)

34060483 2.5 Gbit/s CWDM eSFP optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1471 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67 N3SLH41, N1SL4A, N3SLQ41, N3SL16A, N1PEG8,
module Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, -28 dBm, LC, 80 km N4SLO16, N4SLQ16, TNN1EG8, R1PCXLN
34060481 Transceiver, eSFP, 1491 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67
Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, -28 dBm, LC, 80 km
34060479 Transceiver, eSFP, 1511 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67
Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, -28 dBm, LC, 80 km
34060482 Transceiver, eSFP, 1531 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67
Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, -28 dBm, LC, 80 km
34060478 Transceiver, eSFP, 1551 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67
Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, -28 dBm, LC, 80 km
34060476 Transceiver, eSFP, 1571 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67
Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, -28 dBm, LC, 80 km
34060477 Transceiver, eSFP, 1591 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67
Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, -28 dBm, LC, 80 km
34060480 Transceiver, eSFP, 1611 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67
Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, -28 dBm, LC, 80 km
34060416 Transceiver, eSFP, 1471 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67 N1PEG16, R1PEGS1, Q1PEGS2, N1PEG8,
Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, single mode, TNN1EG8
40 km
34060417 Transceiver, eSFP, 1491 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67
Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, single mode,
40 km
34060418 Transceiver, eSFP, 1511 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67
Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, single mode,
40 km
34060419 Transceiver, eSFP, 1531 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67
Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, single mode,
40 km
34060420 Transceiver, eSFP, 1551 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67
Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, single mode,
40 km
34060421 Transceiver, eSFP, 1571 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67
Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, single mode,
40 km
34060422 Transceiver, eSFP, 1591 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67
Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, single mode,
40 km
34060423 Transceiver, eSFP, 1611 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67
Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, single mode,
40 km

Table 2 Mapping table of the BOM numbers and the types of the 10 Gbit/s CWDM XFP optical modules
BOM Number Name (Name, Encapsulation Form, Operating Compatible Board
Wavelength, Rate, Minimum Output Optical
Power, Maximum Output Optical Power, Receiver
Sensitivity, Optical Interface Type, Optical Fiber
Type, Transmission Distance)

34060547 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s Transceiver, XFP, 1471 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 TNN1EX2, N4SL64, N4SLD64, N1PEX2, N2PEX1
CWDM XFP optical module Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 4 dBm, -23 dBm, LC, 70 km
34060548 Transceiver, XFP, 1491 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1
Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 4 dBm, -23 dBm, LC, 70 km
34060549 Transceiver, XFP, 1511 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1
Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 4 dBm, -23 dBm, LC, 70 km
34060550 Transceiver, XFP, 1531 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1
Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 4 dBm, -23 dBm, LC, 70 km
34060551 Transceiver, XFP, 1551 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1
Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 4 dBm, -23 dBm, LC, 70 km
34060552 Transceiver, XFP, 1571 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1
Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 4 dBm, -23 dBm, LC, 70 km
34060553 Transceiver, XFP, 1591 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1
Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 3 dBm, -21 dBm, LC, 70 km

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 405/502

 2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

BOM Number Name (Name, Encapsulation Form, Operating Compatible Board

Wavelength, Rate, Minimum Output Optical
Power, Maximum Output Optical Power, Receiver
Sensitivity, Optical Interface Type, Optical Fiber
Type, Transmission Distance)

34060554 Transceiver, XFP, 1611 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1

Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 3 dBm, -21 dBm, LC, 70 km

WDM Optical Module

lists the BOM numbers and specifications of the 2.5 Gbit/s DWDM eSFP optical modules. Table 4 lists the BOM numbers and
Table 3
specifications of the 10 Gbit/s DWDM XFP optical modules.

Table 3 Mapping table of the BOM numbers and the types of the 2.5 Gbit/s DWDM eSFP optical modules
BOM Number Name (Name, Encapsulation Form, Operating Compatible Board
Wavelength, Rate, Minimum Output Optical
Power, Maximum Output Optical Power, Receiver
Sensitivity, Optical Interface Type, Optical Fiber
Type, Transmission Distance)

34060366 2.5 Gbit/s DWDM eSFP optical Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1560.61 nm, 125 N3SLH41, N1SL4A, N3SLQ41, N3SL16A, N1PEG8,
module Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm, TNN1EG8, N1SF16E, N4SLO16, N4SLQ16,
LC, 120 km R1PCXLN
34060372 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1559.79 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060373 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1558.98 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060374 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1558.17 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 G bit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060375 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1557.36 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060376 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1556.55 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060377 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1555.75 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060378 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1554.94 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060379 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1554.13 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060380 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1553.33 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060381 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1552.52 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060382 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1551.72 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060383 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1550.92 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060384 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1550.12 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060385 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1549.32 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060386 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1548.51 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060387 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1547.72 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 406/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

BOM Number Name (Name, Encapsulation Form, Operating Compatible Board

Wavelength, Rate, Minimum Output Optical
Power, Maximum Output Optical Power, Receiver
Sensitivity, Optical Interface Type, Optical Fiber
Type, Transmission Distance)

34060388 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1546.92 nm, 125

Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060389 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1546.12 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060390 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1545.32 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060391 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1544.53 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060392 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1543.73 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060393 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1542.94 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060394 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1542.14 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060395 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1541.35 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060396 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1540.56 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060397 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1539.77 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060398 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1538.98 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060399 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1538.19 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060400 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1537.40 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060401 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1536.61 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060402 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1535.82 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060403 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1535.04 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060404 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1534.25 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060405 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1533.47 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060406 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1532.68 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060407 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1531.90 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060408 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1531.12 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 407/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

BOM Number Name (Name, Encapsulation Form, Operating Compatible Board

Wavelength, Rate, Minimum Output Optical
Power, Maximum Output Optical Power, Receiver
Sensitivity, Optical Interface Type, Optical Fiber
Type, Transmission Distance)

34060409 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1530.33 nm, 125

Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km
34060410 Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1529.55 nm, 125
Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, -28 dBm,
LC, 120 km

Table 4 Mapping table of the BOM numbers and the types of the 10 Gbit/s DWDM XFP optical modules
BOM Number Name (Name, Encapsulation Form, Operating Compatible Board
Wavelength, Rate, Minimum Output Optical
Power, Maximum Output Optical Power, Receiver
Sensitivity, Optical Interface Type, Optical Fiber
Type, Transmission Distance)

03030JGQ 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s Optical transceiver, XFP, 1560.61 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s N1SL64, N1PEX2, N2PEX1, N4SL64, TNN1EX2
DWDM XFP optical module to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JGR Optical transceiver, XFP, 1559.79 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JGS Optical transceiver, XFP, 1558.98 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JGT Optical transceiver, XFP, 1558.17 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JGU Optical transceiver, XFP, 1557.36 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JGV Optical transceiver, XFP, 1556.55 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JGW Optical transceiver, XFP, 1555.75 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JGX Optical transceiver, XFP, 1554.94 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JGY Optical transceiver, XFP, 1554.13 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JHA Optical transceiver, XFP, 1553.33 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JHB Optical transceiver, XFP, 1552.52 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JHC Optical transceiver, XFP, 1551.72 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JHD Optical transceiver, XFP, 1550.92 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JHE Optical transceiver, XFP, 1550.12 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JHF Optical transceiver, XFP, 1549.32 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JHG Optical transceiver, XFP, 1548.51 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JHH Optical transceiver, XFP, 1547.72 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 408/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

BOM Number Name (Name, Encapsulation Form, Operating Compatible Board

Wavelength, Rate, Minimum Output Optical
Power, Maximum Output Optical Power, Receiver
Sensitivity, Optical Interface Type, Optical Fiber
Type, Transmission Distance)

03030JHJ Optical transceiver, XFP, 1546.92 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s

to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JHK Optical transceiver, XFP, 1546.12 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JHL Optical transceiver, XFP, 1545.32 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JHM Optical transceiver, XFP, 1544.53 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JHN Optical transceiver, XFP, 1543.73 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JHP Optical transceiver, XFP, 1542.94 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JHQ Optical transceiver, XFP, 1542.14 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JHR Optical transceiver, XFP, 1541.35 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JHS Optical transceiver, XFP, 1540.56 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JHT Optical transceiver, XFP, 1539.77 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JHU Optical transceiver, XFP, 1538.98 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JHV Optical transceiver, XFP, 1538.19 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JHW Optical transceiver, XFP, 1537.40 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JHX Optical transceiver, XFP, 1536.61 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JHY Optical transceiver, XFP, 1535.82 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JJA Optical transceiver, XFP, 1535.04 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JJB Optical transceiver, XFP, 1534.25 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JJC Optical transceiver, XFP, 1533.47 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JJD Optical transceiver, XFP, 1532.68 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JJE Optical transceiver, XFP, 1531.90 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JJF Optical transceiver, XFP, 1531.12 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 409/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

BOM Number Name (Name, Encapsulation Form, Operating Compatible Board

Wavelength, Rate, Minimum Output Optical
Power, Maximum Output Optical Power, Receiver
Sensitivity, Optical Interface Type, Optical Fiber
Type, Transmission Distance)

03030JJG Optical transceiver, XFP, 1530.33 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s

to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
03030JJH Optical transceiver, XFP, 1529.55 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -19 dBm, LC, SM,
40 km
34060533 Optical transceiver, XFP, 1551.72 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s N1PEX2, N2PEX1, N4SLD64, N4SL64, TNN1EX2
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 3 dBm, -24 dBm, LC, SM,
80 km
34060501 Optical transceiver, XFP, 1550.92 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 3 dBm, -24 dBm, LC, SM,
80 km
34060502 Optical transceiver, XFP, 1550.12 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 3 dBm, -24 dBm, LC, SM,
80 km
34060514 Optical transceiver, XFP, 1549.32 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 3 dBm, -24 dBm, LC, SM,
80 km
34060531 Optical transceiver, XFP, 1548.51 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 3 dBm, -24 dBm, LC, SM,
80 km
34060534 Optical transceiver, XFP, 1532.68 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 3 dBm, -24 dBm, LC, SM,
80 km
34060503 Optical transceiver, XFP, 1531.90 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 3 dBm, -24 dBm, LC, SM,
80 km
34060504 Optical transceiver, XFP, 1531.12 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 3 dBm, -24 dBm, LC, SM,
80 km
34060515 Optical transceiver, XFP, 1530.33 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 3 dBm, -24 dBm, LC, SM,
80 km
34060532 Optical transceiver, XFP, 1529.55 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s
to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 3 dBm, -24 dBm, LC, SM,
80 km

NOTE:
Optical module data is subject to product versions, so contact Huawei local office for latest data.

Parent topic: Pluggable Optical Module

22 Pluggable Electrical Module

A pluggable electrical module is used at an SFP interface to transmit/receive electrical signals.

pearance
Figure 1 and Figure 2 show the appearance of the SFP electrical module.
Figure 1 Appearance of the GE SFP electrical module

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 410/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 2 Appearance of the STM-1 SFP electrical module

P electrical module
Table 1lists the BOM numbers and specifications of the pluggable electrical modules.

Table 1 Mapping table of the BOM numbers and the types of the electrical modules
BOM Number Name Specifications Compatible Board

34100052 1000BASE-T SFP electrical module 1000BASE-T (RJ45) SFP electrical TNN1EG8, N1PEG8, Q1PEGS2,
module, 100 m R1PEGS1, N3EGS2, N2EGT2,
N1EGS4, N4EGS4, N1EMS4,
N1EMS2
34100104 STM-1 SFP electrical module Electrical active module, electrical N1OU08
transceiver, SFP, STM-1e

Parent topic: Description of Common Hardware

23 Cables
This topic describes the cables that the equipment uses, including the fiber jumper, power cable, alarm cable, management cable, signal
cable, and clock cable.

Fiber Jumper
This topic describes the categories and connectors of the fiber jumpers.

Power Cable and Ground Cable

The power cables and ground cables include the cabinet power cable, subrack power cable, COA power cable, and ground cable of
the cabinet door.

Alarm Cable
The alarm cables that the equipment uses include the cabinet indicator cable, alarm cascading cable, and alarm input/output cable.

Management Cable
The management cables include the serial cable, orderwire phone line, COA cascading cable, and network cable.

Signal Cable
The signal cables include the E1/E3 signal cable, framed E1 signal cable, and Nx64 kbit/s signal cable.

Clock Cable
The clock cables include the 75-ohm/120-ohm clock cable and clock transit cable.

Parent topic: Description of Common Hardware

23.1 Fiber Jumper

This topic describes the categories and connectors of the fiber jumpers.

Categories of the Fiber Jumpers

The OptiX OSN equipment uses various types of fiber jumpers.

Connector
The OptiX OSN equipment uses various types of fiber connectors.

Parent topic: Cables

23.1.1 Categories of the Fiber Jumpers

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 411/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
The OptiX OSN equipment uses various types of fiber jumpers.
Table 1 lists the categories of the fiber jumpers that the OptiX OSN equipment uses.

Table 1 Categories of the fiber jumpers that the OptiX OSN equipment uses
Usage Connector 1 Connector 2 Fiber Available Length

Used to connect the OptiX LC/PC FC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber 6 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, and 50 m

OSN equipment to the ODF or
2 mm multi-mode fiber 3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, and 50 m
to connect an interface board
of the OptiX OSN equipment LC/PC SC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, and 50 m
to other equipment 2 mm multi-mode fiber 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, and 50 m
SC/PC SC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber 2 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 50 m,
and 80 m
Used to connect the OptiX LC/PC LC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber 1.5 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, and 30
OSN equipment m
2 mm multi-mode fiber 3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, and 30 m
LC/PC FC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber 6 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, and 50 m
LC/PC SC/PC 2 mm multi-mode fiber 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, and 50 m

Select the fiber connector and fiber length according to the on-site survey.

Parent topic: Fiber Jumper

23.1.2 Connector
The OptiX OSN equipment uses various types of fiber connectors.
The four types of fiber connectors are described as follows:

Most of the optical interfaces on the front panels of the boards are the LC/PC optical interfaces. See Figure 1.
The N2OU08 and 61COA provide the SC/PC optical interfaces.
The "IN" interface on the case-shaped 62COA that is externally installed uses the LSH/APC connector. See Figure 4.
Generally, the ODF on the client side provides the FC/PC or SC/PC optical interface. Figure 3 and Figure 2 show the corresponding
FC/PC and SC/PC fiber connectors.

Table 1 describes the four types of fiber connectors.

Table 1 Types of fiber connectors

Type of Internal Fiber Connector Description

LC/PC Plug-in square fiber connector/protruding polished

LSH/APC Connector with a dust-proof cover/protruding polished (eight degrees)
FC/PC Round fiber connector/protruding polished
SC/PC Square fiber connector/protruding polished

/PC Fiber Connector

Figure 1 shows the appearance of the LC/PC fiber connector.
Figure 1 Appearance of the LC/PC fiber connector

The axial operation instead of rotation is required to insert or remove an LC/PC fiber connector.
To insert a fiber jumper that uses an LC/PC connector, align the head of the fiber jumper with the optical interface and apply proper
force. To remove the fiber jumper, first, press the clip, then, slightly push the fiber connector inward, and finally, pull out the connector.

/PC Fiber Connector

Figure 2 shows the appearance of the SC/PC fiber connector.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 412/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 2 Appearance of the SC/PC fiber connector

/PC Fiber Connector

Figure 3 shows the appearance of the FC/PC fiber connector.

Figure 3 Appearance of the FC/PC fiber connector

H/APC Fiber Connector

Figure 4 shows the appearance of the LSH/APC fiber connector.

Figure 4 Appearance of the LSH/APC fiber connector

Parent topic: Fiber Jumper

23.2 Power Cable and Ground Cable

The power cables and ground cables include the cabinet power cable, subrack power cable, COA power cable, and ground cable of the
cabinet door.

Power Cable of the Cabinet

The -48 V power cable and BGND power cable are used to supply power to the equipment in a cabinet. One end of the power cable
is connected to the power distribution cabinet and the ground bar in the equipment room, and the other end is connected to the
DC PDU at the top of the cabinet. The PGND power cable grounds the equipment. One end of the PGND power cable is connected
to the power distribution cabinet and ground bar in the equipment room, and the other end is connected to the ground point of
the equipment.

Ground Cable of the Cabinet Door

The ground cable of the cabinet door grounds the front door, rear door and side panels of the cabinet. The ground cables of the
cabinet door are correctly connected before delivery.

Subrack Power Cable

The subrack power cable connects the DC PDU at the top of the cabinet and the PIU in the subrack. The subrack power cable leads
the -48 V power from the top of the cabinet to the subrack. The subrack power cable is correctly connected before delivery.

COA Power Cable

The PIU can supply power to a maximum of two pieces of external equipment (for example, the COA).

RPC Power Cable

One end of the RPC power cable is connected to the power input interface of the case-shaped Raman amplifier, and the other end
is connected to the output interface of the DC power distribution box at the top of the cabinet.

Parent topic: Cables

23.2.1 Power Cable of the Cabinet

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 413/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
The -48 V power cable and BGND power cable are used to supply power to the equipment in a cabinet. One end of the power cable is
connected to the power distribution cabinet and the ground bar in the equipment room, and the other end is connected to the DC PDU
at the top of the cabinet. The PGND power cable grounds the equipment. One end of the PGND power cable is connected to the power
distribution cabinet and ground bar in the equipment room, and the other end is connected to the ground point of the equipment.

ucture
Figure 1 shows the power cables.

Figure 1 Power cable of the cabinet

1. Bare crimping terminal - type OT 2. Cord end terminal 3. Bare crimping terminal - type OT

NOTE:
The terminals in the figure are for reference only. The actual terminals must be prepared onsite.

chnical Specifications

Table 1 Technical specifications of the cabinet power cables

Cable Name Usage Type of Cable Connector Type

-48 V power Inputs -48 V DC power to the equipment. The -48 V power cable is in blue. X1: Bare crimp terminal connected to the
cable PDU
Select cables with proper cross-sectional
areas according to the required length of X2: OT terminal connected to the power
cabinet power cables: distribution cabinet
If the length of the cabinet power
cable is required to be not more
than 20 m, select the cable with a
cross-sectional area of 16 mm2.
If the length of the cabinet power
cable is required to be in the range
from 21 m to 30 m, select the cable
with a cross-sectional area of 25
mm2.
If the length of the cabinet power
cable is required to be in the range
from 31 m to 50 m, select the cable
with a cross-sectional area of 35
mm2.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 414/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Cable Name Usage Type of Cable Connector Type

BGND cable Connects the equipment to the BGND. The BGND power cable is in black. X3: Cord end terminal connected to the
Select cables with proper cross-sectional PDU
areas according to the required length of X4: OT terminal connected to the power
cabinet power cables: distribution cabinet
If the length of the cabinet power
cable is required to be not more
than 20 m, select the cable with a
cross-sectional area of 16 mm2.
If the length of the cabinet power
cable is required to be in the range
from 21 m to 30 m, select the cable
with a cross-sectional area of 25
mm2.
If the length of the cabinet power
cable is required to be in the range
from 31 m to 50 m, select the cable
with a cross-sectional area of 35
mm2.

Parent topic: Power Cable and Ground Cable

23.2.2 Ground Cable of the Cabinet Door

The ground cable of the cabinet door grounds the front door, rear door and side panels of the cabinet. The ground cables of the cabinet
door are correctly connected before delivery.

ucture
Figure 1 shows the structure of the ground cable of the cabinet door.

Figure 1 Structure of the ground cable of the cabinet door

1. Bare crimping terminal - type OT 2. Heat shrink tubing 3. Main label

Assignments
None.

chnical Specifications

Item Description

Terminal X1/X2 Bare crimping terminal - OT - 6 mm2 - M6 - tin plated - round insulated terminal - 12 to 10 AWG
Cable Type Wire - 600 V - UL1015 - 10 AWG - 105-core twisted pair - yellow and green, round - 50 A
Fireproof class UL1015
Length 0.35 m

Parent topic: Power Cable and Ground Cable

23.2.3 Subrack Power Cable

The subrack power cable connects the DC PDU at the top of the cabinet and the PIU in the subrack. The subrack power cable leads the
-48 V power from the top of the cabinet to the subrack. The subrack power cable is correctly connected before delivery.

NOTE:
A type III subrack (2300 W) uses different power cables from those used by a general subrack or an enhanced subrack (1100 W).

ucture
Figure 1 shows the structure of the power cable for the general subrack and enhanced subrack (1100 W).

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 415/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Structure of the power cable for the general subrack and enhanced subrack (1100 W)

1. Cable connector 2. Main label 3. Cable tie 4. Label 5. Cord end terminal

Figure 2 shows the structure of the power cable for the type III subrack (2300 W).

Figure 2 Structure of the power cable for the type III subrack (2300 W)

1. Bare crimping terminal - type OT 2. Common terminal 3. Label 1 4. Label 2 5. Label 3 6. Label 4 7. Main label

Assignments
Table 1 provides the pin assignments of the power cable for the general subrack and enhanced subrack (1100 W).

Table 1 Pin assignments of the power cable for the general subrack and enhanced subrack (1100 W)
Cable Connector Bare Crimping Terminal Connection Color of the Core

X1.A1 X2 A1 is connected to X2. Blue (-48 V power)

X1.A3 X3 A3 is connected to X3. Black (power ground)

chnical Specifications

Table 2 Technical specifications of the power cable for the general subrack and enhanced subrack (1100 W)
Item Description

Cable connector X1 Cable connector - type D - 3-pin - female - without intermediate male terminals
Bare crimping terminals X2 and X3 Single cord end terminal - 4 mm2 - 20 A - insertion depth of 10 mm - gray
Cable Type Power cable - 600 V - 5.26 mm2 - 10 AWG - black (the core is in blue and black) - 41 A
Number of cores 2
Color The core is in blue and black.
Length 2.5 m, 3 m, and 3.5 m

Table 3 Technical specifications of the power cable for the type III subrack (2300 W)
Item Description

Cable connector Bare crimping terminal - OT2- 10 mm2 - 60 A - tin plated

Cable Type
Wire - 450 V/750 V - H07Z - K UL3386 - 10 mm2 - blue
Wire - 450 V/750 V - H07Z - K UL3386 - 10 mm2 - black

Parent topic: Power Cable and Ground Cable

23.2.4 COA Power Cable

The PIU can supply power to a maximum of two pieces of external equipment (for example, the COA).

ucture
Figure 1 shows the structure of the COA power cable.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 416/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Structure of the COA power cable

1. Common terminal - female 2. Common connector - 4-pin 3. Main label A-A. Sectional view in direction A

Assignments
Table 1 provides the pin assignments of the COA power cable.

Table 1 Pin assignments of the COA power cable

Connectors Cables W1 and W2 Color

X1.1 W2 blue
X2.1
X1.3 W1 Black
X2.3

chnical Specifications

Item Description

Connector X3 Common connector - 4-pin - double rows/4.20 mm

Connector X1/X2 Common terminal - female - 4-pin - 18/24 AWG - 1.3~3.1mm– 13.7 mm in length
Model of wire W1/W2 Power cable - 600 V - UL1015 - 18 AWG - black/blue - 13 A - UL
Number of cores 2
Color Black
Length 1.8 m

Parent topic: Power Cable and Ground Cable

23.2.5 RPC Power Cable

One end of the RPC power cable is connected to the power input interface of the case-shaped Raman amplifier, and the other end is
connected to the output interface of the DC power distribution box at the top of the cabinet.

ucture

Figure 1 shows the structure of the RPC power cable.

Figure 1 Structure of the RPC power cable

1. Bare crimping terminal 2. Common connector - 4-pin 3. Common terminal - female A-A. Sectional view in direction A

Assignments
Table 1 provides the pin assignments of the RPC power cable.

Table 1 Pin assignments of the RPC power cable

Connectors X1 and X2 Cables W1 and W2 Color Connector X3

X1 W1 Blue X3.1
X2 W1 Black X3.3

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 417/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
chnical Specifications
Table 2 lists the technical specifications of the RPC power cable.

Table 2 Technical specifications of the RPC power cable

Item Description

Connector X3 Common terminal - female - 18/26 AWG - 13.7 mm in length, common

connector - 4-pin - double rows - 4.2 mm
Connector X1/X2 Bare crimping terminal - single cord end terminal - 1 mm2 - 5 A - tin
plated - insertion depth of 6 mm - yellow
Model of wire W1/W2 Power cable - 600 V - UL1015 - 18 AWG - black - OA
Number of cores 2
Fireproof class VM-1
Color Blue and black
Length 3.5 m

Parent topic: Power Cable and Ground Cable

23.3 Alarm Cable

The alarm cables that the equipment uses include the cabinet indicator cable, alarm cascading cable, and alarm input/output cable.

Cabinet Indicator Cable

The cabinet indicator cable is used to connect the AUX in the subrack to the cabinet indicators. The cabinet indicator cable leads the
indicator signal from the AUX to the cabinet indicators.

Indicator Cascading Cable Between Subracks or Alarm Cascading Cable Between the OptiX OSN Equipment
The indicator cascading cable between subracks or the alarm cascading cable between the OptiX OSN equipment cascades the
indicator signals or alarm signals between the subracks of the OptiX OSN equipment.

Alarm Cascading Cable Between the OptiX OSN Equipment and the Other Huawei Transmission Equipment
The alarm cascading cable cascades the alarm signals of the OptiX OSN equipment and the alarm signals of the other Huawei
transmission equipment such as the OptiX 2500+ and OptiX OSN 9500.

Alarm Input/Output Cable

The alarm input cable transmits the alarm signals of the external equipment to the OptiX OSN equipment. The alarm output cable
transmits the alarm signals of the OptiX OSN equipment to the centralized alarm monitoring equipment.

Parent topic: Cables

23.3.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable

The cabinet indicator cable is used to connect the AUX in the subrack to the cabinet indicators. The cabinet indicator cable leads the
indicator signal from the AUX to the cabinet indicators.

ucture
Figure 1 shows the structure of the cabinet indicator cable.
Figure 1 Structure of the cabinet indicator cable

A-A. Sectional view in direction A B-B. Sectional view in direction B

Assignments
Table 1 provides the pin assignments of the cabinet indicator cable.

Table 1 Pin assignments of the cabinet indicator cable

Connector X1 Direction Connector X2/X3/X4/X5 Relationship Print on the Label

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 418/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Connector X1 Direction Connector X2/X3/X4/X5 Relationship Print on the Label

X1.4 Out X2.2 Twisted pair Green

X1.5 Out X2.1
X1.1 Out X3.2 Twisted pair Red
X1.2 Out X3.1
X1.3 Out X4.2 Twisted pair Orange
X1.6 Out X4.1
X1.7 Out X5.2 Twisted pair Yellow
X1.8 Out X5.1

chnical Specifications

Item Description

Connector X1 Network interface connector - 8-pin - 8-bit - shielded - RJ45 connector

Connector X2/X3/X4/X5 Common connector - 2-pin - single row/2.5 mm
Cable type Symmetrical twisted-pair cable – 100 ohms – SEYVP – 0.48 mm – 26 AWG – 4 pairs – black
Number of cores 8
Diameter of the core 0.5 mm
Length 2.5 m, 3 m, and 3.5 m

Parent topic: Alarm Cable

23.3.2 Indicator Cascading Cable Between Subracks or Alarm Cascading

able Between the OptiX OSN Equipment
The indicator cascading cable between subracks or the alarm cascading cable between the OptiX OSN equipment cascades the indicator
signals or alarm signals between the subracks of the OptiX OSN equipment.
Both ends of the cable use the RJ45 connector. One end of the cable is connected to the LAMP1 or ALMO2 interface of the AUX in one
subrack. The other end of the cable is connected to the LAMP2 or ALMO1 interface of the AUX in another subrack.

ucture
shows the structure of the indicator cascading cable between subracks or the alarm cascading cable between the OptiX OSN
Figure 1
equipment.
Figure 1 Structure of the indicator cascading cable between subracks or the alarm cascading cable between the OptiX OSN equipment

1. RJ-45 network interface connector 2. Label 1 A-A. Sectional view in direction A

Assignments
provides the pin assignments of the indicator cascading cable between subracks or the alarm cascading cable between the OptiX
Table 1
OSN equipment.

Table 1 Pin assignments of the indicator cascading cable between subracks or the alarm cascading cable between the OptiX OSN
equipment
Connector X1 Direction Connector X2 Relationship Alarm Output

X1.1 Out X2.1 Twisted pair Critical alarm output and major alarm output (+)
X1.2 Out X2.2 Critical alarm signal output and major alarm signal output
(-)
X1.3 Out X2.3 Twisted pair Minor alarm signal output and warning alarm signal
output (+)
X1.6 Out X2.6 Minor alarm signal output and warning alarm signal
output (-)
X1.4 Out X2.4 Twisted pair Alarm signal output 1 (+)
X1.5 Out X2.5 Alarm signal output 1 (-)
X1.7 Out X2.7 Twisted pair Alarm signal output 2 (+)
X1.8 Out X2.8 Alarm signal output 2 (-)

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 419/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

chnical Specifications

Item Description

Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector - 8-pin - 8-bit - shielded - RJ45 connector
Cable type Symmetrical twisted-pair cable - 120 ohms - SEYPVPV - 0.5 mm - 24 AWG - 4 pairs - PANTONE 430U
Symmetrical twisted-pair cable - 100 ohms - SEYYP - 0.48 mm - 26 AWG - 4 pairs - black - low smoke zero halogen
cable

Number of cores 8
Diameter of the core 0.5 mm
Length 3 m, 5 m, 10 m, and 20 m

Parent topic: Alarm Cable

23.3.3 Alarm Cascading Cable Between the OptiX OSN Equipment and the
ther Huawei Transmission Equipment
The alarm cascading cable cascades the alarm signals of the OptiX OSN equipment and the alarm signals of the other Huawei
transmission equipment such as the OptiX 2500+ and OptiX OSN 9500.
Both ends of the cable use the RJ45 connector. One end of the cable is connected to the ALMO1 or ALMO2 interface of the OptiX OSN
subrack. The other end of the cable is connected to the alarm output interface or the alarm cascading interface of the subrack of the
other Huawei transmission equipment.

ucture
shows the structure of the alarm cascading cable between the OptiX OSN equipment and the other Huawei transmission
Figure 1
equipment.

Figure 1 Structure of the alarm cascading cable between the OptiX OSN equipment and the other Huawei transmission equipment

1. RJ-45 network interface connector 2. Main label 3. Label 1 4. Cable connector - type D - 9-pin - female

L: 5 m, 10 m, and 20 m - - -

Assignments
provides the pin assignments of the alarm cascading cable between the OptiX OSN equipment and the other Huawei transmission
Table 1
equipment.

Table 1 Pin assignments of the alarm cascading cable between the OptiX OSN equipment and the other Huawei transmission
equipment
Connector X1 Direction Connector X2 Relationship Description

X1.1 Out X2.7 Twisted pair Critical alarm signal output (+)
X1.2 Out X2.3 Critical alarm signal output (-)
X1.3 Out X2.6 Twisted pair Major alarm signal output (+)
X1.6 Out X2.1 Major alarm signal output (-)

chnical Specifications

Item Description

Connector X1 Network interface connector - 8-pin - 8-bit - shielded - RJ45 connector

Connector X2 Cable connector - type D - 9-pin - female
Cable type Symmetrical twisted-pair cable – 100 ohms – SEYVP – 0.48 mm – 26 AWG – 2 pairs – black
Number of cores 4

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 420/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Item Description

Diameter of the core 0.5 mm

Length 5 m, 10 m, and 20 m

Parent topic: Alarm Cable

23.3.4 Alarm Input/Output Cable

The alarm input cable transmits the alarm signals of the external equipment to the OptiX OSN equipment. The alarm output cable
transmits the alarm signals of the OptiX OSN equipment to the centralized alarm monitoring equipment.
The alarm input/output cable uses an RJ45 connector at one end to connect to the alarm input/output interface of the equipment. The
other end of the alarm input/output cable is connected to the external equipment or the centralized alarm monitoring equipment. The
connector needs to be prepared on site as required. Each alarm input/output cable transmits four channels of alarm signals.

ucture
Figure 1 shows the structure of the alarm input/output cable.

Figure 1 Structure of the alarm input/output cable

1. RJ-45 network interface connector 2. Main label A-A. Sectional view in direction A

Assignments
Table 1 provides the pin assignments of the alarm input/output cable.

Table 1 Pin assignments of the alarm input/output cable

Connector X1 Color Relationship Usage

X1.1 Blue Twisted pair Critical or major alarm input/output (+)

X1.2 White Critical or major alarm input/output (-)
X1.3 Orange Twisted pair Minor or warning alarm input/output (+)
X1.6 White Minor or warning alarm input/output (-)
X1.4 Green Twisted pair Alarm signal input/output 1 (+)
X1.5 White Alarm signal input/output 1 (-)
X1.7 Brown Twisted pair Alarm signal input/output 2 (+)
X1.8 White Alarm signal input/output 2 (-)

NOTE:
X1.1 to X1.8 can be set to alarm signal input or alarm signal output as required.

chnical Specifications

Item Description

Connector X1 Network interface connector - 8-pin - 8-bit - shielded - RJ45 connector

Cable type Symmetrical twisted-pair cable - 120 ohms - SEYPVPV - 0.5 mm - 24 AWG - 4 pairs - PANTONE 430U

Number of cores 8
Core diameter 0.5 mm
Length 10 m, 20 m, and 30 m

Parent topic: Alarm Cable

23.4 Management Cable

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 421/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
The management cables include the serial cable, orderwire phone line, COA cascading cable, and network cable.

OAM Serial Cable

The OAM serial cable is used for the management and remote maintenance of the OptiX OSN equipment.

Serial 1 to 4/F1/F&f Serial Cable

The serial 1-4/F1/F&f serial cable uses an RJ45 connector at one end to connect to the serial 1-4 interfaces, F1 serial port, or F&f
serial port, and uses a DB9 connector at the other end to connect to the external detecting equipment or external managed
equipment.

RS-232/RS-422 Serial Cable

The RS-232/RS-422 serial cable is used to transport the management signals between subnets.

Orderwire Telephone Line

The orderwire telephone line is used to connect the orderwire phone. Both ends of the orderwire telephone line use the RJ11
connector. One end of the orderwire telephone line is connected to the PHONE interface of the equipment, and the other end is
connected to the interface of the orderwire phone.

COA Cascading Cable

When multiple COAs are installed in a cabinet, use COA cascading cables to cascade the COAs.

Straight-Through Cable
The straight-through cable is used to connect the OptiX OSN equipment to an NM computer.

Crossover Cable
The crossover cable is used to connect the OptiX OSN equipment, network management computer, and Ethernet to achieve
communication. Both ends of the crossover cable use the RJ45 connector.

Parent topic: Cables

23.4.1 OAM Serial Cable

The OAM serial cable is used for the management and remote maintenance of the OptiX OSN equipment.
The OAM serial cable uses an RJ45 connector at one end to connect to the OAM interface of the equipment and uses a DB25 connector
at the other end to connect to a laptop computer, serial NMS, or modem.

ucture
Figure 1 shows the structure of the OAM serial cable (using the DB25 connector).
Figure 1 Structure of the OAM serial cable

1. RJ-45 network interface 2. Main 3. Cable connector - DB25 A-A. Sectional view in direction B-B. Sectional view in direction
connector label male A B

Assignments
Table 1 provides the pin assignments of the OAM serial cable.

Table 1 Pin assignments of the OAM serial cable

Connector X1 Direction Connector X2 color Relationship Description

X1.2 Out X2.20 blue Single Data terminal ready (DTR)

X1.3 Out X2.2 orange Single Transmitting data (TD)
X1.6 In X2.3 green Single Receiving data (RD)
X1.4 - X2.7 white/brown Twisted pair Signaling ground (SG)
X1.5 - brown

chnical Specifications

Item Description

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 422/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Item Description

Connector X1 Network interface connector - RJ45 connector - 8-pin - 8-bit - shielded - connector
Connector X2 Cable connector - type D - 25-pin - male, or cable connector - type D - 9-pin - male
Type Symmetrical twisted-pair cable – 100 ohms – shielded-CAT5E SFTP – 0.51 mm - 24 AWG – 8 cores – PANTONE 430U -
use with plug
Number of cores 8
Length 5m

Parent topic: Management Cable

23.4.2 Serial 1 to 4/F1/F&f Serial Cable

The serial 1-4/F1/F&f serial cable uses an RJ45 connector at one end to connect to the serial 1-4 interfaces, F1 serial port, or F&f serial
port, and uses a DB9 connector at the other end to connect to the external detecting equipment or external managed equipment.
The serial 1-4/F1/F&f serial cable performs the following functions:

Transparently transmits the environment monitoring data signal.

Manages external devices such as the COA.

ucture
Figure 1 shows the structure of the serial 1-4/F1/F&f serial cable.

Figure 1 Structure of the serial 1-4/F1/F&f serial cable

1. RJ-45 network interface 2. Main 3. Cable connector - DB9 A-A. Sectional view in direction B-B. Sectional view in direction
connector label male A B

Assignments
Table 1 provides the pin assignments of the serial 1-4/F1/F&f serial cable.

Table 1 Pin assignments of the serial 1-4/F1/F&f serial cable

Connector X1 Direction Connector X2 color Relationship Description

X1.1 Out X2.8 White/orange Twisted pair Positive receive end of the RS-
422 port
X1.2 Out X2.9 Orange Negative receive end of the RS-
422 port
X1.3 In X2.6 white/blue Twisted pair Positive transmit end of the RS-
422 port
X1.6 In X2.7 blue Negative transmit end of the RS-
422 port
X1.4 In X2.3 White/green Twisted pair Signal ground cable
X1.8 Out X2.2 Green RS-232 receive end
X1.5 - X2.5 Brown Single RS-232 transmit end

chnical Specifications
Item Description

Connector X1 Network interface connector - RJ45 connector - 8-pin - 8-bit - shielded - connector
Connector X2 Cable connector - type D - 9-pin - male
Cable type Type 1: Symmetrical twisted-pair cable – 100 ohms – shielded-CAT5E SFTP – 0.51 mm - 24 AWG – 8 cores – PANTONE
430U - use with plug
Type 2: Symmetrical twisted-pair cable – 100 ohms – SEYVP – 0.48 mm - 26 AWG - 4 pairs - black

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 423/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Item Description

Number of cores 8
Length 15 m in the case of cable type 1 and 3 m in the case of cable type 2

Parent topic: Management Cable

23.4.3 RS-232/RS-422 Serial Cable

The RS-232/RS-422 serial cable is used to transport the management signals between subnets.
Both ends of the RS-232/RS-422 serial cable use the RJ45 connector. One end of the RS-232/RS-422 serial cable is connected to the RS-
232/RS-422 serial port of the equipment. The other end is connected to the RS-232/RS-422 serial port of another piece of equipment
that needs to make orderwire calls to the other equipment.

ucture
Figure 1 shows the structure of the RS-232/RS4-22 serial cable.

Figure 1 Structure of the RS-232/RS-422 serial cable

1. RJ-45 network interface connector 2. Main label A-A. Sectional view in direction A

Assignments
Table 1 provides the pin assignments of the RS-232/RS-422 serial cable.

Table 1 Pin assignments of the RS-232/RS-422 serial cable

Connector X1 Direction Connector X2 color Relationship Description

X1.3 In X2.1 white/blue Twisted pair RX+

X1.6 In X2.2 blue RX-
X1.1 Out X2.3 white/orange Twisted pair TX+
X1.2 Out X2.6 orange TX-
X1.5 Out X2.5 white/green Twisted pair 232TX
X1.4 In X2.8 green 232RX
X1.8 - X2.4 brown Single SG

chnical Specifications
Item Description

Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector - RJ45 connector - 8-pin - 8-bit - shielded - connector
Cable type Symmetrical twisted-pair cable – 100 ohms – shielded-CAT5E SFTP – 0.51 mm - 24 AWG – 8 cores – PANTONE
430U - use with plug
Number of cores 8
Length 15 m

Parent topic: Management Cable

23.4.4 Orderwire Telephone Line

The orderwire telephone line is used to connect the orderwire phone. Both ends of the orderwire telephone line use the RJ11 connector.
One end of the orderwire telephone line is connected to the PHONE interface of the equipment, and the other end is connected to the
interface of the orderwire phone.

ucture

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 424/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 shows the structure of the orderwire telephone line.

Figure 1 Structure of the orderwire telephone line

1. RJ11 connector 2. Main label

Assignments
Table 1 provides the pin assignments of the orderwire telephone line.

Table 1 Pin assignments of the orderwire telephone line

Connector X1 Connector X2 color Description

X1.1 X2.1 - Not connected

X1.2 X2.2 - Not connected
X1.3 X2.3 yellow TIP
X1.4 X2.4 green RING
X1.5 X2.5 - Not connected
X1.6 X2.6 - Not connected

chnical Specifications
Item Description

Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector - 6-pin - 26 to 28 AWG

Cable type Electric cable - 150 V - UL20251 - 2 x 28 AWG - black (2 cores: yellow, green) - 1A - telephone cable - UL
Number of cores 2
Length 15 m

Parent topic: Management Cable

23.4.5 COA Cascading Cable

When multiple COAs are installed in a cabinet, use COA cascading cables to cascade the COAs.
Both ends of the COA cascading cable use the DB9 connector. One end of the COA cascading cable is connected to the RS232-1 serial
port of one COA, and the other end is connected to the RS232-2 serial port of another COA.

ucture
Figure 1 shows the structure of the COA cascading cable.

Figure 1 Structure of the COA cascading cable

1. Cable connector - DB9 male 2. Label A-A. Sectional view in direction A

Assignments
Table 1 provides the pin assignments of the COA cascading cable.

Table 1 Pin assignments of the COA cascading cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Remarks

3 2 One pair
2 3

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 425/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Connector X1 Connector X2 Remarks

5 5 Grounding

chnical Specifications
Item Description

Connector X1/X2 Cable connector - type D - 9-pin - male

Cable type Symmetrical twisted-pair cable - 100 ohms - UL2464 - 0.32 mm - 28 AWG - 2P - Huawei gray
Number of cores Two pairs
Length 0.6 m and 2.5 m

Parent topic: Management Cable

23.4.6 Straight-Through Cable

The straight-through cable is used to connect the OptiX OSN equipment to an NM computer.
Both ends of the straight-through cable use the RJ45 connector. One end of the straight-through cable is connected to the ETH interface
of the equipment, and the other end is connected to the network interface of the NM computer.

NOTE:
As the ETH interface of the OptiX OSN equipment supports the auto-sensing function, the ETH interface can use a straight-through cable or a crossover cable.

ucture
Figure 1 shows the structure of the straight-through cable.
Figure 1 Structure of the straight-through cable

1. RJ-45 network interface connector 2. Main label 3. Network cable

Assignments
Table 1 provides the pin assignments of the straight-through cable.

Table 1 Pin assignments of the straight-through cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relationship

X1.1 X2.1 White/Orange Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.2 Orange
X1.3 X2.3 White/Green Twisted pair
X1.6 X2.6 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair
X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue
X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown

chnical Specifications

Item Description

Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector - RJ45 connector - 8-pin - 8-bit - shielded - connector - 24 to 26 AWG - CAT
6/configured with the SFTP network cable
Cable type Communication cable - 100±15 ohms - CAT5E SFTP 24 AWG - 8-core - PANTONE 445U
Number of cores 8
Length 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, and 30 m

Parent topic: Management Cable

23.4.7 Crossover Cable

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 426/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
The crossover cable is used to connect the OptiX OSN equipment, network management computer, and Ethernet to achieve
communication. Both ends of the crossover cable use the RJ45 connector.

ucture
Figure 1 shows the structure of the crossover cable.

Figure 1 Structure of the crossover cable

1. RJ-45 network interface connector 2. Main label 3. Network cable

Assignments
Table 1 provides the pin assignments of the crossover cable.

Table 1 Pin assignments of the crossover cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relationship

X1.6 X2.2 Orange Twisted pair

X1.3 X2.1 White/Orange
X1.1 X2.3 White/Green Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.6 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair
X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue
X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown

chnical Specifications
Item Description

Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector - RJ45 connector - 8-pin - 8-bit - shielded - connector - 24 to 26 AWG - CAT
6/configured with the SFTP network cable
Cable type Communication cable - 100±5 ohms - CAT5E SFTP 24 AWG - 8-core - PANTONE 646U
Number of cores 8
Length 5 m and 30 m

Parent topic: Management Cable

23.5 Signal Cable

The signal cables include the E1/E3 signal cable, framed E1 signal cable, and Nx64 kbit/s signal cable.

75-ohm 8xE1 Cable

The 75-ohm 8xE1 cable is used to receive and transmit E1 signals.

120-ohm 8xE1 Cable

The 120-ohm 8xE1 cable is used to receive and transmit E1 signals.

E3/T3/STM-1 Cable
The E3/T3/STM-1 cable is used to receive and transmit E3/T3/STM-1 electrical signals. The E3/T3/STM-1 cable uses an SMB
connector at one end to connect to the E3/T3/STM-1 electrical access board. The other end of the E3/T3/STM-1 cable is connected
to the DDF. The connector needs to be chosen on site as required.

Framed E1 Cable
The framed E1 cable is connected to the DB44 connector of the DM12 to transmit/receive eight channels of framed E1 signals.

Nx64 kbit/s Cable

The Nx64 kbit/s cable is connected to the DB28 connector of the DM12 to transmit/receive one channel of Nx64 kbit/s or sub-rate
signals.

Anea 96 E1 Signal Cable

The Anea 96 cable is used for accessing E1 signals.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 427/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Anea 96 2/4-wire Audio and E&M Signal Cable
The Anea 96 cable is used for accessing 2/4–wire audio and E&M signals.

RJ-45 2/4-wire Audio and E&M Signal Cable

The RJ-45 2/4-wire audio and E&M signal cable receives and transmits 2/4-wire audio and E&M signals.

RS485/RS232 Sub-rate Cable

The RS485/RS232 sub-rate cable receives and transmits sub-rate signals.

FXS/FXO Audio Cable

The FXS/FXO audio cable receives and transmits audio signals.

Parent topic: Cables

23.5.1 75-ohm 8xE1 Cable

The 75-ohm 8xE1 cable is used to receive and transmit E1 signals.
The 75-ohm 8xE1 cable uses a DB44 connector at one end to connect to the D75S. The other end of the 75-ohm 8xE1 cable is connected
to the digital distribution frame (DDF). The connector needs to be prepared on site as required. Each 75-ohm 8xE1 cable can transmit
8xE1 signals.

ucture
Figure 1 shows the structure of the 75-ohm 8xE1 cable.
Figure 1 Structure of the 75-ohm 8xE1 cable

1. Cable connector - type D - 44-pin - male 2. Main label

Assignments
Table 1 provides the pin assignments of the 75-ohm 8xE1 cable.

Table 1 Pin assignments of the 75-ohm 8xE1 cable

Connector Cable W Remarks Direction Connector Cable W Remarks Direction
Core No. Core No.

38 Ring 1 R1 In 34 Ring 9 R5 In
23 Tip In 19 Tip In
37 Ring 3 R2 In 33 Ring 11 R6 In
22 Tip In 18 Tip In
36 Ring 5 R3 In 32 Ring 13 R7 In
21 Tip In 17 Tip In
35 Ring 7 R4 In 31 Ring 15 R8 In
20 Tip In 16 Tip In
15 Ring 2 T1 Out 11 Ring 10 T5 Out
30 Tip Out 26 Tip Out
14 Ring 4 T2 Out 10 Ring 12 T6 Out
29 Tip Out 25 Tip Out
13 Ring 6 T3 Out 9 Ring 14 T7 Out
28 Tip Out 24 Tip Out
12 Ring 8 T4 Out 8 Ring 16 T8 Out
27 Tip Out 7 Tip Out

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 428/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Connector Cable W Remarks Direction Connector Cable W Remarks Direction

Core No. Core No.

Shell External braid shield layer/Without the - Shell External braid shield layer/Without -
external braid shield layer the external braid shield layer
Note: The Tip and Ring form a pair of differential lines to transmit differential signals.

chnical Specifications
The external layer of the 75-ohm E1 cable may be of the shielded type or unshielded type. The specifications of the 75-ohm E1 cable with
the shielded layer are different from the specifications of the 75-ohm E1 cable with the unshielded layer. Table 2 lists the specifications of
the 75-ohm E1 cable with the external braid shield layer. Table 3 lists the specifications of the 75-ohm E1 cable without the external braid
shield layer.

Table 2 Specifications of the 75-ohm E1 cable with the external braid shield layer
Item Description

Connector X Connector accessories- type D - 44-pin - male - cable welding type - 3-row pins
Cable type Coaxial cable - SYFVZP-LC 75-1-1x16 - 75 ohms - 13.10 mm - 1.2 mm - 0.254 mm - Pantone Warm Gray 1U
Number of cores 16 cores, 8xE1
Diameter of the shield layer - diameter 13.10 mm - 1.2 mm - 0.254 mm
of the internal insulation layer -
diameter of the internal conductor
Length 3 m, 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 35 m, 40 m, 45 m, and 50 m

Table 3 Specifications of the 75-ohm E1 cable without the external braid shield layer
Item Description

Connector X Connector accessories- type D - 44-pin - male - cable welding type - 3-row pins
Cable type Coaxial cable - SYFVZ-LC 75-1-1x16 - 75 ohms - 12.40 mm - 1.2 mm - 0.254 mm - Pantone Warm Gray 1U
Number of cores 16 cores, 8xE1
Diameter of the shield layer - diameter 12.40 mm - 1.2 mm - 0.254 mm
of the internal insulation layer -
diameter of the internal conductor
Length 5 m, 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 35 m, 40 m, 45 m, and 50 m

NOTICE:
The pin assignment table is delivered with the 75-ohm 8xE1 cable in a packing bag. You must keep the table carefully.

Parent topic: Signal Cable

23.5.2 120-ohm 8xE1 Cable

The 120-ohm 8xE1 cable is used to receive and transmit E1 signals.
The 120-ohm 8xE1 cable uses a DB44 connector at one end to connect to the 120-ohm E1 electrical interface board. The other end of the
120-ohm 8xE1 cable is connected to the DDF. The connector needs to be prepared on site as required. Each 120-ohm 8xE1 cable can
transmit 8xE1 signals.

NOTE:
The 120-ohm 8xE1 cable can also transmit/receive codirectional G.703 64 kbit/s signals.

ucture
Figure 1 shows the structure of the 120-ohm 8xE1 cable.

Figure 1 Structure of the 120-ohm 8xE1 cable

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 429/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
1. Cable connector - type D - 44-pin - male 2. Label 1, marked with "W1 (TX1-8)"

3. Label 3, marked with "W2 (RX1-8)" 4. Main label

Assignments
Table 1 provides the pin assignments of the 120-ohm 8xE1 cable.

Table 1 Pin assignments of the 120-ohm 8xE1 cable

Connector Cable W1 Remarks Direction Connector Cable W2 Remarks Direction
Core No. Core No.

15 Blue Twisted pair TX1 Out 38 Blue Twisted pair RX1 In

30 White Out 23 White In
14 Orange Twisted pair TX2 Out 37 Orange Twisted pair RX2 In
29 White Out 22 White In
13 Green Twisted pair TX3 Out 36 Green Twisted pair RX3 In
28 White Out 21 White In
12 Brown Twisted pair TX4 Out 35 Brown Twisted pair RX4 In
27 White Out 20 White In
11 Gray Twisted pair TX5 Out 34 Gray Twisted pair RX5 In
26 White Out 19 White In
10 Blue Twisted pair TX6 Out 33 Blue Twisted pair RX6 In
25 Red Out 18 Red In
9 Orange Twisted pair TX7 Out 32 Orange Twisted pair RX7 In
24 Red Out 17 Red In
8 Green Twisted pair TX8 Out 31 Green Twisted pair RX8 In
7 Red Out 16 Red In
Shell External braided shield - Shell External braided shield -

chnical Specifications
Item Description

Connector X Cable connector - type D - 44-pin - male

Cable type Communication cable - 120 ohms - SEYPVPV - 0.5 mm - 24 AWG - 16-core - PANTONE 430U
Number of cores 16
Diameter of the internal 0.5 mm
conductor
Length 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 30 m, and 40 m

Parent topic: Signal Cable

23.5.3 E3/T3/STM-1 Cable

The E3/T3/STM-1 cable is used to receive and transmit E3/T3/STM-1 electrical signals. The E3/T3/STM-1 cable uses an SMB connector at
one end to connect to the E3/T3/STM-1 electrical access board. The other end of the E3/T3/STM-1 cable is connected to the DDF. The
connector needs to be chosen on site as required.

ucture
Figure 1 shows the structure of the E3/T3/STM-1 cable.

Figure 1 Structure of the E3/T3/STM-1 cable

1. Coaxial connector - SMB 2. Main label 3. Coaxial cable

Assignments
None.

chnical Specifications

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 430/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Item Description

Connector Coaxial connector - SMB connector - 75 ohms - straight - female

Cable I Coaxial cable - 75 ohms - 3.9 mm - 2.1 mm - 0.34 mm - shielded
Diameter of the shield layer - diameter of the internal insulation layer - diameter of the internal conductor: 3.9 mm -
2.1 mm - 0.34 mm
Length: 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, and 30 m
Cable II Coaxial cable - 75 ohms - 4.4 mm - 2.4 mm - 0.4 mm - shielded - gray
Diameter of the shield layer - diameter of the internal insulation layer - diameter of the internal conductor: 4.4 mm -
2.4 mm - 0.4 mm
Length: 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, and 40 m
Cable III Coaxial cable - 75 ohms - 6.7 mm - 3.8 mm - 0.61 mm - shielded - gray
Diameter of the shield layer - diameter of the internal insulation layer - diameter of the internal conductor: 6.7 mm -
3.8 mm - 0.61 mm
Length: 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, and 130 m
Cable IV Coaxial cable - 75 ohms - 5.80 mm - 3.71 mm - 0.643 mm - black
Diameter of the shield layer - diameter of the internal insulation layer - diameter of the internal conductor: 5.80 mm
- 3.71 mm - 0.643 mm
Length: 30 cm
Cable V Coaxial cable - 75 ohms - 3.9 mm - 2.1 mm - 0.34 mm - shielded
Diameter of the shield layer - diameter of the internal insulation layer - diameter of the internal conductor: 3.9 mm -
2.1 mm - 0.34 mm
Length: 10 m

Parent topic: Signal Cable

23.5.4 Framed E1 Cable

The framed E1 cable is connected to the DB44 connector of the DM12 to transmit/receive eight channels of framed E1 signals.
The framed E1 cables are available in two types, namely, 75-ohm framed E1 cable and 120-ohm framed E1 cable.

For the structure, pin assignments, and technical specifications of the 75-ohm framed E1 cable, see 75-ohm 8xE1 cable.
For the structure, pin assignments, and technical specifications of the 120-ohm framed E1 cable, see 120-ohm 8xE1 cable.

Parent topic: Signal Cable

23.5.5 Nx64 kbit/s Cable

The Nx64 kbit/s cable is connected to the DB28 connector of the DM12 to transmit/receive one channel of Nx64 kbit/s or sub-rate
signals.
Table 1 provides the pin assignments of the DB28 connector.

Table 1 Pin assignments of the DB28 connector of the DM12

Pin Signal Direction Description

1 TXD+ ---> Transmits data.

2 TXD- ---> Transmits data.
3 TXC+ <--> Transmits the clock signal provided by the DCE to the DTE.
4 TXC- <--> Transmits the clock signal provided by the DCE to the DTE.
5 NC - -
6 GND ----- Circuit_GND
7 MODE0 <--- Receives the signal that identifies the type of cable.
8 MODE1 <--- Receives the signal that identifies the type of cable.
9 MODE2 <--- Receives the signal that identifies the type of cable.
10 MODE_DCE <--- Receives the signal that identifies the type of DCE/DTE cable.
11 DCD+ <--> Detects the carrier.
12 DCD- <--> Detects the carrier.
13 RTS+ ---> Requests for transmission.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 431/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Pin Signal Direction Description

14 RTS- ---> Requests for transmission.

15 TXCE+ ---> Transmits the data clock in the case of the DCE and loops back the clock
in the case of the DTE.
16 TXCE- ---> Transmits the data clock in the case of the DCE and loops back the clock
in the case of the DTE.
17 RXC+ <--- Receives clock signals.
18 RXC- <--- Receives clock signals.
19 RXD+ <--- Receives data.
20 RXD- <--- Receives data.
21 GND ----- Shield_GND
22 LL <--> Receives the loopback control signal.
23 CTS+ <--- Permits the transmission.
24 CTS- <--- Permits the transmission.
25 DSR+ <--- Receives the DCE ready signal.
26 DSR- <--- Receives the DCE ready signal.
27 DTR+ ---> Transmits the DTE ready signal.
28 DTR- ---> Transmits the DTE ready signal.

The Nx64 kbit/s cables are classified into the following categories according to the protocol, which the Nx64 kbit/s signals comply with:

V.35 DCE cable

V.35 DTE cable
V.24 DCE cable
V.24 DTE cable
X.21 DCE cable
X.21 DTE cable
RS-449 DCE cable
RS-449 DTE cable
RS-530 DCE cable
RS-530 DTE cable

5 DCE Cable
Figure 1 shows the structure of the V.35 DCE cable.

Figure 1 Structure of the V.35 DCE cable

1. Cable connector - D28 - male 2. Main label

3. Cable connector - D34 - female + D34 plastic shell -

Table 2 provides the pin assignments of the V.35 DCE cable.

Table 2 Pin assignments of the V.35 DCE cable

Connector X1 Signal Direction Description Connector X2 Relationship

19 RXD+ <--- Receives data. P Twisted pair

20 RXD- <--- Receives data. S
1 TXD+ ---> Transmits data. R Twisted pair
2 TXD- ---> Transmits data. T

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 432/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Connector X1 Signal Direction Description Connector X2 Relationship

15 TXCE+ ---> Transmits the data V Twisted pair

clock in the case of the
DCE and loops back
the clock in the case of
the DTE.
16 TXCE- ---> Transmits the data X
clock in the case of the
DCE and loops back
the clock in the case of
the DTE.
3 TXC+ <--> Transmits the clock Y Twisted pair
signal provided by the
DCE to the DTE.
4 TXC- <--> Transmits the clock AA
signal provided by the
DCE to the DTE.
17 RXC+ <--- Receives clock signals. U Twisted pair
18 RXC- <--- Receives clock signals. W
11 DCD+ <--> Detects the carrier. F -
22 LL <--> Receives the loopback J -
control signal.
23 CTS+ <--- Permits the C -
transmission.
13 RTS+ ---> Requests for D -
transmission.
25 DSR+ <--- Receives the DCE ready H -
signal.
27 DTR+ ---> Transmits the DTE E -
ready signal.
21 GND ----- Shield_GND B -
6+7+8 GND ----- Shield_GND A Pins 6, 7, and 8 are
short-circuited.

The technical specifications of the V.35 DCE cable are as follows.

Item Description

Connector X1 Cable connector - type-D dual-edge subassembly - 28-pin - straight - male - cable welding type - spacing 0.80
mm - matching with 28 to 30 AWG, exclusively used by the OEM
Connector X2 Cable connector - V35 plug - 34-pin - molding shell - kit, exclusively used by the OEM
Cable connector - V35 DCE plug - 34-pin - female - cable crimping type - housing core, exclusively used by the
OEM
Cable type Symmetrical twisted-pair cable - 100 ohms - 0.38 mm - 28 AWG - 5 pairs - 8 cores - PANTONE 296U - exclusively
used by the OEM
Number of cores Five pairs and eight cores
Diameter of the core 0.32 mm
Length 3m

5 DTE Cable
Figure 2 shows the structure of the V.35 DTE cable.

Figure 2 Structure of the V.35 DTE cable

1. Cable connector - D28 - male 2. Main label 3. Cable connector - D34 - plastic shell

4. Ordinary terminal 5. Cable connector - D34 - male

Table 3 provides the pin assignments of the V.35 DTE cable.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 433/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Table 3 Pin assignments of the V.35 DTE cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship

1 P Twisted pair
2 S
19 R Twisted pair
20 T
17 V Twisted pair
18 X
3 Y Twisted pair
4 AA
15 U Twisted pair
16 W
11 F -
22 J -
13 C -
23 D -
27 H -
25 E -
21 B -
6 + 10 + 7 + 8 A Pins 6, 7, 8, and 10 are short-circuited.

The technical specifications of the V.35 DTE cable are as follows.

Item Description

Connector X1 Cable connector - type-D dual-edge subassembly - 28-pin - straight - male - cable welding type - spacing 0.80 mm -
matching with 28 to 30 AWG, exclusively used by the OEM
Connector X2 Cable connector - V35 plug - 34-pin - molding shell - kit, exclusively used by the OEM
Cable connector - V35 DTE plug - 34-pin - female - cable crimping type - housing core, exclusively used by the OEM
Cable type Symmetrical twisted-pair cable - 100 ohms - 0.38 mm - 28 AWG - 5 pairs - 8 cores - PANTONE 296U - exclusively used by
the OEM
Number of cores Five pairs and eight cores
Diameter of the core 0.32 mm
Length 3m

4 DCE Cable
Figure 3 shows the structure of the V.24 DCE cable.
Figure 3 Structure of the V.24 DCE cable

1. Cable connector - D25 - female 2. Main label 3. Cable connector - D28 - male

Table 4 provides the pin assignments of the V.24 DCE cable.

Table 4 Pin assignments of the V.24 DCE cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship

19 2 Twisted pair
1 3
23 4 Twisted pair
13 5
25 20 Twisted pair
27 6
11 8 Twisted pair
22 18

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 434/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship

3 15 Twisted pair
17 24
15 17 -
21 1 Single
6+7 7 Pins 6 and 7 are short-circuited.

The technical specifications of the V.24 DCE cable are as follows.

Table 5 Technical specifications of the V.24 DCE cable

Item Description

Connector X1 Cable connector - type-D dual-edge subassembly - 28-pin - straight - male - cable welding type - spacing 0.80 mm -
matching with 28 to 30 AWG, exclusively used by the OEM
Connector X2 Cable connector - type D - 25-pin - female - cable welding type
Cable type Symmetrical twisted-pair cable - 100 ohms - 0.38 mm - 28 AWG - 5 pairs - 8 cores - PANTONE 296U - exclusively used
by the OEM
Number of cores Five pairs and eight cores
Diameter of the core 0.32 mm
Length 3m

4 DTE Cable
Figure 4 shows the structure of the V.24 DTE cable.

Figure 4 Structure of the V.24 DTE cable

1. Cable connector - D25 - male 2. Main label 3. Cable connector - D28 - male

Table 6 provides the pin assignments of the V.24 DTE cable.

Table 6 Pin assignments of the V.24 DTE cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship

1 2 Twisted pair
19 3
13 4 Twisted pair
23 5
27 20 Twisted pair
25 6
11 8 Twisted pair
22 18
3 15 Twisted pair
15 24
17 17 -
21 1 Single
6 + 10 + 7 7 Pins 6, 10, and 7 are short-circuited.

The technical specifications of the V.24 DTE cable are as follows.

Table 7 Technical specifications of the V.24 DTE cable

Item Description

Connector X1 Cable connector - type-D dual-edge subassembly - 28-pin - straight - male - cable welding type - spacing 0.80 mm -
matching with 28 to 30 AWG, exclusively used by the OEM
Connector X2 Cable connector - type D - 25-pin - male - cable welding type
Cable type Symmetrical twisted-pair cable - 100 ohms - 0.38 mm - 28 AWG - 5 pairs - 8 cores - PANTONE 296U - exclusively used
by the OEM
Number of cores Five pairs and eight cores

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 435/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Item Description

Diameter of the core 0.32 mm

Length 3m

1 DCE Cable
Figure 5 shows the structure of the X.21 DCE cable.
Figure 5 Structure of the X.21 DCE cable

1. Cable connector - D15 - female 2. Main label 3. Cable connector - D28 - male

Table 8 provides the pin assignments of the X.21 DCE cable.

Table 8 Pin assignments of the X.21 DCE cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship

13 5 Twisted pair
14 12
23 3 Twisted pair
24 10
19 2 Twisted pair
20 9
1 4 Twisted pair
2 11
15 6 Twisted pair
16 13
21 1 -
6+9 8 Pins 6 and 9 are short-circuited.

The technical specifications of the X.21 DCE cable are as follows.

Table 9 Technical specifications of the X.21 DCE cable

Item Description

Connector X1 Cable connector - type-D dual-edge subassembly - 28-pin - straight - male - cable welding type - spacing 0.80 mm -
matching with 28 to 30 AWG, exclusively used by the OEM
Connector X2 Cable connector - type D - 15-pin - female - cable welding type
Cable type Symmetrical twisted-pair cable - 100 ohms - 0.38 mm - 28 AWG - 5 pairs - 8 cores - PANTONE 296U - exclusively used
by the OEM
Number of cores Five pairs and eight cores
Diameter of the core 0.32 mm
Length 3m

1 DTE Cable
Figure 6 shows the structure of the X.21 DTE cable.

Figure 6 Structure of the X.21 DTE cable

1. Cable connector - D15 - male 2. Main label 3. Cable connector - D28 - male

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 436/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Table 10 provides the pin assignments of the X.21 DTE cable.

Table 10 Pin assignments of the X.21 DTE cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship

13 3 Twisted pair
14 10
23 5 Twisted pair
24 12
19 4 Twisted pair
20 11
1 2 Twisted pair
2 9
15 6 Twisted pair
16 13
17 6 Twisted pair
18 13
21 1 -
6 + 10 + 9 8 Pins 6, 10, and 9 are short-circuited.

The technical specifications of the X.21 DTE cable are as follows.

Table 11 Technical specifications of the X.12 DTE cable

Item Description

Connector X1 Cable connector - type-D dual-edge subassembly - 28-pin - straight - male - cable welding type - spacing 0.80 mm -
matching with 28 to 30 AWG, exclusively used by the OEM
Connector X2 Cable connector - type D - 15-pin - male - cable welding type
Cable type Symmetrical twisted-pair cable - 100 ohms - 0.38 mm - 28 AWG - 5 pairs - 8 cores - PANTONE 296U - exclusively used
by the OEM
Number of cores Five pairs and eight cores
Diameter of the core 0.32 mm
Length 3m

-449 DCE Cable

Figure 7 shows the structure of the RS-449 DCE cable.

Figure 7 Structure of the RS-449 DCE cable

1. Cable connector - D28 - male 2. Main label 3. Cable connector - D37 - female - I

Table 12 provides the pin assignments of the RS-449 DCE cable.

Table 12 Pin assignments of the RS-449 DCE cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship

27 11 Twisted pair
28 29
25 12 Twisted pair
26 30
13 9 Twisted pair
14 27
23 7 Twisted pair
24 25
11 13 Twisted pair
12 31

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 437/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship

19 4 Twisted pair
20 22
1 6 Twisted pair
2 24
15 8 Twisted pair
16 26
17 17 Twisted pair
18 35
3 5 Twisted pair
4 23
22 10 -
21 1 -
6+8 19 Pins 6 and 8 are short-circuited.

The technical specifications of the RS-449 DCE cable are as follows.

Table 13 Technical specifications of the RS-449 DCE cable

Item Description

Connector X1 Cable connector - type-D dual-edge subassembly - 28-pin - straight - male - cable welding type - spacing 0.80
mm - matching with 28 to 30 AWG, exclusively used by the OEM
Connector X2 Cable connector - type D - 37-pin - female - cable welding type, exclusively used by the OEM
Cable type Symmetrical twisted-pair cable - 100 ohms - communication cable - 0.32 mm - 28 AWG - 26-core - PANTONE
296U - exclusively used by the OEM
Number of cores 26
Diameter of the core 0.32 mm
Length 3m

-449 DTE Cable

Figure 8 shows the structure of the RS-449 DTE cable.
Figure 8 Structure of the RS-449 DTE cable

1. Cable connector - D28 - male 2. Main label 3. Cable connector - D37 - male - I

Table 14 provides the pin assignments of the RS-449 DTE cable.

Table 14 Pin assignments of the RS-449 DTE cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship

27 12 Twisted pair
28 30
25 11 Twisted pair
26 29
13 7 Twisted pair
14 25
23 9 Twisted pair
24 27
11 13 Twisted pair
12 31
19 6 Twisted pair
20 24
1 4 Twisted pair

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 438/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship

2 22
15 17 Twisted pair
16 35
17 8 Twisted pair
18 26
3 5 Twisted pair
4 23
22 10 -
21 1 -
6 + 8 + 10 19 Pins 6, 8, and 10 are short-circuited.

The technical specifications of the RS-449 DTE cable are as follows.

Table 15 Technical specifications of the RS-449 DTE cable

Item Description

Connector X1 Cable connector - type-D dual-edge subassembly - 28-pin - straight - male - cable welding type - spacing 0.80 mm -
matching with 28 to 30 AWG, exclusively used by the OEM
Connector X2 Cable connector - type D - SUB plug - 37-pin - straight - male - cable welding type - two rows, standard installation
holes, exclusively used by the OEM
Cable type Symmetrical twisted-pair cable - 100 ohms - communication cable - 0.32 mm - 28 AWG - 26-core - PANTONE 296U -
exclusively used by the OEM
Number of cores 26
Diameter of the core 0.32 mm
Length 3m

-530 DCE Cable

Figure 9 shows the structure of the RS-530 DCE cable.

Figure 9 Structure of the RS-530 DCE cable

1. Cable connector - D25 - female 2. Main label 3. Cable connector - D28 - male

Table 16 provides the pin assignments of the RS-530 DCE cable.

Table 16 Pin assignments of the RS-530 DCE cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship

28 22 Twisted pair
27 6
26 23 Twisted pair
25 20
24 19 Twisted pair
23 4
22 18 Single
21 1 Single
20 14 Twisted pair
19 2
18 11 Twisted pair
17 24
16 9 Twisted pair
15 17
14 13 Twisted pair
13 5

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 439/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship

12 10 Twisted pair
11 8
4 12 Twisted pair
3 15
2 16 Twisted pair
1 3
6+7+9 7 Pins 6, 7, and 9 are short-circuited.

The technical specifications of the RS-530 DCE cable are as follows.

Table 17 Technical specifications of the RS-530 DCE cable

Item Description

Connector X1 Cable connector - type-D dual-edge subassembly - 28-pin - straight - male - cable welding type - spacing 0.80 mm -
matching with 28 to 30 AWG, exclusively used by the OEM
Connector X2 Cable connector - type D - 25-pin - female - cable welding type
Cable type Symmetrical twisted-pair cable - 100 ohms - communication cable - 0.32 mm - 28 AWG - 26-core - PANTONE 296U -
exclusively used by the OEM
Number of cores 26
Diameter of the core 0.32 mm
Length 3m

-530 DTE Cable

Figure 10 shows the structure of the RS-530 DTE cable.
Figure 10 Structure of the RS-530 DTE cable

1. Cable connector - D25 - male 2. Main label 3. Cable connector - D28 - male

Table 18 provides the pin assignments of the RS-530 DTE cable.

Table 18 Pin assignments of the RS-530 DTE cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship

27 20 Twisted pair
28 23
25 6 Twisted pair
26 22
13 4 Twisted pair
14 19
23 5 Twisted pair
24 13
11 8 Twisted pair
12 10
19 3 Twisted pair
20 16
1 2 Twisted pair
2 14
15 24 Twisted pair
16 11
17 17 Twisted pair
18 9
3 15 Twisted pair
4 12

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 440/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship

22 18 -
21 1 -
6 + 7 + 9 + 10 7 Pins 6, 7, 9, and 10 are short-circuited.

The technical specifications of the RS-530 DTE cable are as follows.

Table 19 Technical specifications of the RS-530 DTE cable

Item Description

Connector X1 Cable connector - type-D dual-edge subassembly - 28-pin - straight - male - cable welding type - spacing 0.80 mm -
matching with 28 to 30 AWG, exclusively used by the OEM
Connector X2 Cable connector - type D - 25-pin - male - cable welding type
Cable type Symmetrical twisted-pair cable - 100 ohms - communication cable - 0.32 mm - 28 AWG - 26-core - PANTONE 296U -
exclusively used by the OEM
Number of cores 26
Diameter of the core 0.32 mm
Length 3m

Parent topic: Signal Cable

23.5.6 Anea 96 E1 Signal Cable

The Anea 96 cable is used for accessing E1 signals.

ucture
Figure 1 shows the structure of an Anea 96 cable.

Figure 1 Anea 96 cable structure

1. Cable connector, Anea 96, pin 2. Label 1 3. Main label 4. Label 2

Assignments of an Anea 96 Cable

Table 1 Pin assignments of an Anea 96 cable

X1 Pin Wire Color Remarks Relationship Tape Color X1 Pin Wire Color Remarks Relationship Tape Color

X1.1 White R0 Pair Blue X1.17 White R8 Pair Orange

X1.2 Blue X1.18 Blue
X1.25 White T0 Pair X1.41 White T8 Pair
X1.26 Orange X1.42 Orange
X1.3 White R1 Pair X1.19 White R9 Pair
X1.4 Green X1.20 Green
X1.27 White T1 Pair X1.43 White T9 Pair
X1.28 Brown X1.44 Brown
X1.5 White R2 Pair X1.21 White R10 Pair
X1.6 Gray X1.22 Gray
X1.29 Red T2 Pair X1.45 Red T10 Pair

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 441/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

X1 Pin Wire Color Remarks Relationship Tape Color X1 Pin Wire Color Remarks Relationship Tape Color

X1.30 Blue X1.46 Blue

X1.7 Red R3 Pair X1.23 Red R11 Pair
X1.8 Orange X1.24 Orange
X1.31 Red T3 Pair X1.47 Red T11 Pair
X1.32 Green X1.48 Green
X1.9 Red R4 Pair Blue X1.49 Red R12 Pair Orange
X1.10 Brown X1.50 Brown
X1.33 Red T4 Pair X1.73 Red T12 Pair
X1.34 Gray X1.74 Gray
X1.11 Black R5 Pair X1.51 Black R13 Pair
X1.12 Blue X1.52 Blue
X1.35 Black T5 Pair X1.75 Black T13 Pair
X1.36 Orange X1.76 Orange
X1.13 Black R6 Pair X1.53 Black R14 Pair
X1.14 Green X1.54 Green
X1.37 Black T6 Pair X1.77 Black T14 Pair
X1.38 Brown X1.78 Brown
X1.15 Black R7 Pair X1.55 Black R15 Pair
X1.16 Gray X1.56 Gray
X1.39 Yellow T7 Pair X1.79 Yellow T15 Pair
X1.40 Blue X1.80 Blue
- - - - - [Link] HEIELD - - -

chnical Specifications
Item Description

Connector X1/X2 Cable Connector – Anea – 96 pin – vertical female – female connector with shielding Misc – IDC type – 24 to 26
AWG wire – 1A
Cable type Symmetrical twisted-pair cable – 120 ohms – SEYVP – 0.4 mm – 26 AWG – 42 pairs – PANTONE 430U
Number of cores 42 pairs
Length 5m

Parent topic: Signal Cable

23.5.7 Anea 96 2/4-wire Audio and E&M Signal Cable

The Anea 96 cable is used for accessing 2/4–wire audio and E&M signals.

ucture
Figure 1 shows the structure of an Anea 96 cable.

Figure 1 Anea 96 cable structure

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 442/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
1. Cable connector, Anea 96, pin 2. Label 1 3. Main label 4. Label 2

Assignments of an Anea 96 Cable

Table 1 Pin assignments of an Anea 96 cable for 2/4-wire audio and E&M signals (N2AT6's port 1)
Port 4-Wire Audio 2-Wire Audio Pin No. Wire Color Relationship Tape Color

Audio port Ring (RX-) Ring 1 White Pair Blue 1

Tip (RX+) Tip 2 Blue
Ring (TX-) - 25 White Pair
Tip (TX+) - 26 Orange
E&M signaling E1 (first channel of E1 (first channel of 3 White pair
port transmitted received signaling)
signaling)
E2 (second channel E2 (second channel 4 Green
of transmitted of received
signaling) signaling)
M1 (first channel of M1 (first channel of 27 White pair
received signaling) transmitted
signaling)
M2 (second channel M2 (second channel 28 Brown
of received of transmitted
signaling) signaling)
Signal battery (SB) Signal battery (SB) 5 White White wire in the
white-gray twisted
pair
Signal ground (SG) Signal ground (SG) 29 Red Red wire in the red-
blue twisted pair

Table 2 Pin assignments of an Anea 96 cable for 2/4-wire audio and E&M signals (N2AT6's port 2)
Port 4-Wire Audio 2-Wire Audio Pin No. Wire Color Relationship Tape Color

Audio port Ring (RX-) Ring 7 Red Pair Blue 1

Tip (RX+) Tip 8 Orange
Ring (TX-) - 31 Red Pair
Tip (TX+) - 32 Green
E&M signaling E1 (first channel of E1 (first channel of 9 Red Pair Blue 2
port transmitted received signaling)
signaling)
E2 (second channel E2 (second channel 10 Brown
of transmitted of received
signaling) signaling)
M1 (first channel of M1 (first channel of 33 Red Pair
received signaling) transmitted
signaling)
M2 (second channel M2 (second channel 34 Gray
of received of transmitted
signaling) signaling)
Signal battery (SB) Signal battery (SB) 6 Gray Gray wire in the Blue 1
white-gray twisted
pair
Signal ground (SG) Signal ground (SG) 30 Blue Blue wire in the red-
blue twisted pair

Table 3 Pin assignments of an Anea 96 cable for 2/4-wire audio and E&M signals (N2AT6's port 3)
Port 4-Wire Audio 2-Wire Audio Pin No. Wire Color Relationship Tape Color

Audio port Ring (RX-) Ring 11 Black Pair Blue 2

Tip (RX+) Tip 12 Blue
Ring (TX-) - 35 Black Pair
Tip (TX+) - 36 Orange
E&M signaling E1 (first channel of E1 (first channel of 13 Black Pair
port transmitted received signaling)
signaling)
E2 (second channel E2 (second channel 14 Green
of transmitted of received
signaling) signaling)

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 443/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Port 4-Wire Audio 2-Wire Audio Pin No. Wire Color Relationship Tape Color

M1 (first channel of M1 (first channel of 37 Black Pair

received signaling) transmitted
signaling)
M2 (second channel M2 (second channel 38 Brown
of received of transmitted
signaling) signaling)
Signal battery (SB) Signal battery (SB) 15 Black Black wire in the
black-gray twisted
pair
Signal ground (SG) Signal ground (SG) 39 Yellow Yellow wire in the
yellow-blue twisted
pair

Table 4 Pin assignments of an Anea 96 cable for 2/4-wire audio and E&M signals (N2AT6's port 4)
Port 4-Wire Audio 2-Wire Audio Pin No. Wire Color Relationship Tape Color

Audio port Ring (RX-) Ring 17 White Pair Orange 1

Tip (RX+) Tip 18 Blue
Ring (TX-) - 41 White Pair
Tip (TX+) - 42 Orange
E&M signaling E1 (first channel of E1 (first channel of 19 White Pair
port transmitted received signaling)
signaling)
E2 (second channel E2 (second channel 20 Green
of transmitted of received
signaling) signaling)
M1 (first channel of M1 (first channel of 43 White Pair
received signaling) transmitted
signaling)
M2 (second channel M2 (second channel 44 Brown
of received of transmitted
signaling) signaling)
Signal battery (SB) Signal battery (SB) 16 Gray Gray wire in the Blue 2
black-gray twisted
pair
Signal ground (SG) Signal ground (SG) 40 Blue Blue wire in the
yellow-blue twisted
pair

Table 5 Pin assignments of an Anea 96 cable for 2/4-wire audio and E&M signals (N2AT6's port 5)
Port 4-Wire Audio 2-Wire Audio Pin No. Wire Color Relationship Tape Color

Audio port Ring (RX-) Ring 21 White Pair Orange 1

Tip (RX+) Tip 22 Gray
Ring (TX-) - 45 Red Pair
Tip (TX+) - 46 Blue
E&M signaling E1 (first channel of E1 (first channel of 23 Red Pair
port transmitted received signaling)
signaling)
E2 (second channel E2 (second channel 24 Orange
of transmitted of received
signaling) signaling)
M1 (first channel of M1 (first channel of 47 Red Pair
received signaling) transmitted
signaling)
M2 (second channel M2 (second channel 48 Green
of received of transmitted
signaling) signaling)
Signal battery (SB) Signal battery (SB) 49 Red Red wire in the red- Orange 2
brown twisted pair
Signal ground (SG) Signal ground (SG) 73 Red Red wire in the red-
gray twisted pair

Table 6 Pin assignments of an Anea 96 cable for 2/4-wire audio and E&M signals (N2AT6's port 6)
Port 4-Wire Audio 2-Wire Audio Pin No. Wire Color Relationship Tape Color

Audio port Ring (RX-) Ring 51 Black Pair Orange 2

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 444/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Port 4-Wire Audio 2-Wire Audio Pin No. Wire Color Relationship Tape Color

Tip (RX+) Tip 52 Blue

Ring (TX-) - 75 Black Pair
Tip (TX+) - 76 Orange
E&M signaling E1 (first channel of E1 (first channel of 53 Black Pair
port transmitted received signaling)
signaling)
E2 (second channel E2 (second channel 54 Green
of transmitted of received
signaling) signaling)
M1 (first channel of M1 (first channel of 77 Black Pair
received signaling) transmitted
signaling)
M2 (second channel M2 (second channel 78 Brown
of received of transmitted
signaling) signaling)
Signal battery (SB) Signal battery (SB) 50 Brown Brown wire in the
red-brown twisted
pair
Signal ground (SG) Signal ground (SG) 74 Gray Gray wire in the red-
gray twisted pair

chnical Specifications

Item Description

Connector X1/X2 Cable Connector – Anea – 96 pin – vertical female – female connector with shielding Misc – IDC type – 24 to 26
AWG wire – 1A
Cable type Symmetrical twisted-pair cable – 120 ohms – SEYVP – 0.4 mm – 26 AWG – 32 pairs – PANTONE 430U
Number of cores 32 pairs
Length 5m

Parent topic: Signal Cable

23.5.8 RJ-45 2/4-wire Audio and E&M Signal Cable

The RJ-45 2/4-wire audio and E&M signal cable receives and transmits 2/4-wire audio and E&M signals.
The cable has an RJ-45 connector at one end. The connector at the other end must be prepared onsite according to the pin assignment.

ucture
Figure 1 shows the structure of the RJ-45 2/4-wire audio and E&M signal cable.
Figure 1 Structure of the RJ-45 2/4-wire audio and E&M signal cable

1. RJ-45 network interface connector 2. Main label 3. Network cable

Assignment
Table 1 describes the pin assignment.

Table 1 Pin assignments for an RJ45 port (N1AT6 with the PCB version being VER.A)
Pin Usage
4-Wire Audio 2-Wire Audio

1 Unused
2 E: transmits signaling.
3 Ring (TX-): transmits audio signals (-). Unused
4 Ring (RX-): receives audio signals (-). Ring: receives and transmits audio signals (-).
5 Tip (RX+): receives audio signals (+). Tip: receives and transmits audio signals (+).
6 TIP (TX+): transmits audio signals (+). Unused

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 445/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Pin Usage
4-Wire Audio 2-Wire Audio

7 M: receives signaling.
8 Unused

NOTE:
This table also applies to the RJ-45 connector for the EM1/EM2 port on the N3DX1 board.

Table 2 Pin assignments for an RJ45 port (N1AT6 with the PCB version being VER.B)
Pin Usage
4-Wire Audio 2-Wire Audio

1 Signal ground (SG)

2 E: transmits signaling.
3 Ring (TX-): transmits audio signals (-). Unused
4 Ring (RX-): receives audio signals (-). Ring: receives and transmits audio signals (-).
5 Tip (RX+): receives audio signals (+). Tip: receives and transmits audio signals (+).
6 TIP (TX+): transmits audio signals (+). Unused
7 M: receives signaling.
8 Signal battery (SB)

NOTE:
The SB wire works with an E wire to transmit signaling if the E&M mode is trunk circuit and works with an M wire to receive signaling if the E&M mode is signaling unit.
The SG wire works with an M wire to transmit signaling if the E&M mode is trunk circuit and works with an E wire to receive signaling if the E&M mode is signaling unit.
The SB and SG wires apply to Bell II, III, and IV cables.

chnical Specifications

Item Description

Connector X1 Network port connector - RJ-45 connector - 8-pin - 8-bit - shielded - connector - 24 to 26 AWG - CAT
6/configured with the SFTP network cable
Cable type Communication cable - 100±15 ohms - CAT5E SFTP - 24 AWG - 8 cores - 8 cores - PANTONE 445U
Number of cores 8 cores

Parent topic: Signal Cable

23.5.9 RS485/RS232 Sub-rate Cable

The RS485/RS232 sub-rate cable receives and transmits sub-rate signals.
The cable has an RJ-45 connector at one end that connects to the corresponding port on a board. The connector at the other end must
be prepared onsite according to the pin assignment.

ucture
Figure 1 shows the structure of the RS485/RS232 sub-rate cable.

Figure 1 Structure of the straight-through cable

1. RJ-45 network interface connector 2. Main label 3. Network cable

Assignment
Table 1 describes the pin assignment.

Table 1 Pin assignments for an RJ-45 port (RS485 port)

Pin Usage

1 First channel of signals (+)

2 First channel of signals (-)
3 Not used

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 446/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Pin Usage

4 Grounded
5 Grounded
6 Not used
7 Second channel of signals (+)
8 Second channel of signals (-)

Table 2 Pin assignments for an RJ-45 port (RS232 port)

Pin Usage

1 Transmits the first channel of signals.

2 Grounded
3 Receives the first channel of signals.
4 Not used
5 Transmits the second channel of signals.
6 Grounded
7 Receives the second channel of signals.
8 Grounded

chnical Specifications

Item Description

Connector X1/X2 Network port connector - RJ-45 connector - 8-pin - 8-bit - shielded - connector - 24 to 26 AWG - CAT
6/configured with the SFTP network cable
Cable type Communication cable - 100±15 ohms - CAT5E SFTP - 24 AWG - 8 cores - 8 cores - PANTONE 445U
Number of cores 8 cores
Length 15 m

NOTE:
The transmission distance of an RS232 cable must be within 15 m. If the transmission distance is longer than 15 m, you are advised to use an RS232-RS422 converter.

Parent topic: Signal Cable

23.5.10 FXS/FXO Audio Cable

The FXS/FXO audio cable receives and transmits audio signals.

ucture
Figure 1 shows the structure of the FXS/FXO audio cable.
Figure 1 Structure of the straight-through cable

Assignment
Table 1 describes the pin assignment.

Table 1 Pin assignments of the orderwire telephone line

Connector X1 Connector X2 color Description

X1.1 X2.1 - Not connected

X1.2 X2.2 - Not connected
X1.3 X2.3 yellow TIP
X1.4 X2.4 green RING
X1.5 X2.5 - Not connected
X1.6 X2.6 - Not connected

chnical Specifications

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 447/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Item Description

Connector X1/X2 Network port connector – 6-pin – 26–28 AWG

Cable type Electric cable - 150 V - UL20251 - 2 x 28 AWG - black (2 cores: yellow, green) - 1A - telephone cable - UL
Number of cores 2 cores

Parent topic: Signal Cable

23.6 Clock Cable

The clock cables include the 75-ohm/120-ohm clock cable and clock transit cable.

75-ohm/120-ohm Clock Cable

The clock cables are available in two types, namely, 75-ohm clock cable and 120-ohm clock cable. The clock cable is used to receive
and transmit external clock signals. In the case of the 75-ohm clock cable, the cable uses an SMB connector at one end to connect
to the external clock interface of the OptiX OSN equipment. The other end of the cable is connected to the external clock
equipment. The connector needs to be prepared on site as required. In the case of the 120-ohm clock cable, the cable uses an RJ-45
connector at one end to connect to the external clock interface of the OptiX OSN equipment. The other end of the cable is
connected to the external clock equipment. The connector needs to be prepared on site as required.

One-Channel Clock Transit Cable and Two-Channel Clock Transit Cable

The clock transit cables are available in two types, namely, one-channel 75-ohm-to-120-ohm clock transit cable and two-channel
75-ohm-to-120-ohm clock transit cable.

1PPS+TOD RJ45 Cable

A 1PPS+TOD RJ45 cable transmits 1PPS and TOD signals at the RS422 level.

Parent topic: Cables

23.6.1 75-ohm/120-ohm Clock Cable

The clock cables are available in two types, namely, 75-ohm clock cable and 120-ohm clock cable. The clock cable is used to receive and
transmit external clock signals. In the case of the 75-ohm clock cable, the cable uses an SMB connector at one end to connect to the
external clock interface of the OptiX OSN equipment. The other end of the cable is connected to the external clock equipment. The
connector needs to be prepared on site as required. In the case of the 120-ohm clock cable, the cable uses an RJ-45 connector at one
end to connect to the external clock interface of the OptiX OSN equipment. The other end of the cable is connected to the external clock
equipment. The connector needs to be prepared on site as required.

ucture
Figure 1 shows the structure of the 75-ohm clock cable. Figure 2 shows the structure of the 120-ohm clock cable.
Figure 1 Structure of the 75-ohm clock cable

1. Coaxial connector – SMB 2. Main label

Figure 2 Structure of the 120-ohm clock cable

1. Label 1 (R) and label 2 (T) 2. Communication cable 3. Main label 4. Network interface connector - RJ-45

Assignments
Table 1 provides the pin assignments of the 120-ohm clock cable.

Table 1 Pin assignments of the 120-ohm clock cable

X1 W Remarks

X1.1 Blue W1

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 448/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

X1 W Remarks

X1.2 White
X1.4 Orange W2
X1.5 White

Table 2 Pin assignments of the 120-ohm clock cable

X1 Relationship Description

External Clock Mode External Time Mode

(1 PPS + Time Information)

X1.1 Twisted pair CLK receive end (-) Not defined

X1.2 CLK receive end (+) Not defined

X1.3 Twisted pair Not defined 1 PPS signal (-)

X1.6 Not defined 1 PPS signal (+)

X1.4 Twisted pair CLK transmit end (-) Grounding end

X1.5 CLK transmit end (+) Grounding end

X1.7 Twisted pair Not defined Time information (-)

X1.8 Not defined Time information (+)

chnical Specifications

Item Description

75-ohm clock cable Connector: coaxial connector - SMB - 75 ohms - straight - female
Cable type: coaxial cable - 75 ohms - 3.9 mm - 2.1 mm - 0.34 mm - shielded
Diameter of the shield layer - diameter of the internal insulation layer - diameter of the internal conductor: 3.9 mm - 2.1 mm
- 0.34 mm
Length: 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, and 30 m
120-ohm clock cable Connector X: network interface connector - 8-pin - 8-bit - shielded - crystal model connector
Cable type: symmetrical twisted-pair cable - 120 ohms - SEYPVPV - 0.4 mm - 26 AWG - 2 pairs - PANTONE 430U
Diameter of the internal conductor: 0.4 mm/26 AWG
Length: 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 40 m, 50 m, 70 m, and 100 m

Parent topic: Clock Cable

23.6.2 One-Channel Clock Transit Cable and Two-Channel Clock Transit

able
The clock transit cables are available in two types, namely, one-channel 75-ohm-to-120-ohm clock transit cable and two-channel 75-
ohm-to-120-ohm clock transit cable.

ucture
shows the structure of the one-channel 75-ohm-to-120-ohm clock transit cable. Figure 2 shows the structure of the two-channel 75-
Figure 1
ohm-to-120-ohm clock transit cable.
Figure 1 Structure of the one-channel 75-ohm-to-120-ohm clock transit cable

1. Coaxial connector - SMB - 75 ohms - straight/plug - female 2. Main label 3. 75-ohm-to-120-ohm transit PCB

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 449/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 2 Structure of the two-channel 75-ohm-to-120-ohm clock transit cable

1. Coaxial connector - SMB - 75 ohms - straight/plug - female 2. Label 1: "1#" 3. Label 2: "2#" 4. Main label

5. 75-ohm-to-120-ohm transit PCB 6. Label 3: "1#" 7. Label 4: "2#"

Assignments
Table 1 provides the pin assignments of the two-channel 75-ohm-to-120-ohm clock transit cable.

Table 1 Pin assignments of the two-channel 75-ohm-to-120-ohm clock transit cable

Connector 75-ohm Cable Color 120-ohm Cable

X1 Core Blue W3
Shield layer White
X2 Core Blue W4
Shield layer White

chnical Specifications

Item Description

One channel Connector: coaxial connector - SMB - 75 ohms - straight - female

75-ohm cable: coaxial cable - 75 ohms - 3.9 mm - 2.1 mm - 0.34 mm - shielded
75-ohm cable: diameter of the shield layer (3.9 mm) - diameter of the internal insulation layer (2.1 mm) - diameter of the
internal conductor (0.34 mm)
120-ohm cable: symmetrical twisted-pair cable - 120 ohms - SEYPVPV - 0.4 mm - 26 AWG - 2 pairs - PANTONE 430U
Diameter of the internal conductor of the 120-ohm cable: 0.4 mm/26 AWG
Length: 30 m
Two channels Connector X1/X2: coaxial connector - SMB - 75 ohms - straight - female
75-ohm cable: coaxial cable - 75 ohms - 3.9 mm - 2.1 mm - 0.34 mm - shielded
75-ohm cable: diameter of the shield layer (3.9 mm) - diameter of the internal insulation layer (2.1 mm) - diameter of the
internal conductor (0.34 mm)
120-ohm cable: symmetrical twisted-pair cable - 120 ohms - SEYPVPV - 0.4 mm - 26 AWG - 2 pairs - PANTONE 430U
Diameter of the internal conductor of the 120-ohm cable: 0.4 mm/26 AWG
Length: 30 m

Parent topic: Clock Cable

23.6.3 1PPS+TOD RJ45 Cable

A 1PPS+TOD RJ45 cable transmits 1PPS and TOD signals at the RS422 level.

ucture
Figure 1 Structure of the 1PPS+TOD RJ45 cable

1. Network interface connector - RJ-45 2. Main label 3. Communication cable

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 450/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Assignment

Table 1 PIN assignment of the 1PPS+TOD RJ45 connector on an OSN 3500's external time port
PIN Wire Color Signal Remark

1 White/Orange NC Disconnected by default (high impedance)

2 Orange NC Disconnected by default (high impedance)
3 White/Green 422_1_N 1PPS (In/Out)
4 Blue GND Level GND
5 White/Blue GND Level GND
6 Green 422_1_P 1PPS (In/Out)
7 White/Brown 422_2_N TOD (In/Out)
8 Brown 422_2_P TOD (In/Out)

Table 2 In the transmit direction: pin assignment for a cable of an OSN 3500's external time port in the transmit direction
Pin Assignment of the Connector Connecting to a Meter (Standard Network Pin Assignment of the Connector Connecting to Equipment
Cable)
PIN Wire Color RJ45 Connector 1 Connecting to the RJ45 Connector 2 Connecting to the
S1/S2 Port for TOD Signal Output S3/S4 Port for 1PPS Signal Output

1 White/Orange 8 Brown 6 Green

2 Orange 7 White/Brown 3 White/Green
3 White/Green - -
4 Blue - -
5 White/Blue 4 Blue 5 White/Blue
6 Green - -
7 White/Brown - -
8 Brown - -

Table 3 In the receive direction: pin assignment for a cable of an OSN 3500's external time port in the receive direction
Pin Assignment of the Connector Connecting to a Meter (Standard Network Pin Assignment of the Connector Connecting to Equipment
Cable)
PIN Wire Color RJ45 Connector 1 Connecting to the RJ45 Connector 2 Connecting to the
S1/S2 Port for TOD Signal Input S3/S4 Port for 1PPS Signal Input

1 White/Orange - -
2 Orange - -
3 White/Green 8 Brown 6 Green
4 Blue - -
5 White/Blue 4 Blue 5 White/Blue
6 Green 7 White/Brown 3 White/Green
7 White/Brown - -
8 Brown - -

Parent topic: Clock Cable

Description of Common Features

Feature at a Glance
This section provides all the features supported by the OSN equipment and the mapping product and NMS versions.

Packet Features

TDM Features

OTN Features

ASON Feature

Clock Solution

Security Management Features

Outband DCN

Inband DCN

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 451/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

1 Feature at a Glance
This section provides all the features supported by the OSN equipment and the mapping product and NMS versions.

NOTE:

Initial supportive product version/initially supported iManager U2000 version: For example, if the initial supportive product version is V100R001, then it
means the product supports the feature since V100R001.
This document describes the features based on the latest version of each related product. For detailed descriptions of the features in other versions, see the
related documents for those versions.

Table 1 Packet Features

Name Short Description Initially Supported Product Version Initially Supported iManager U2000
Version
MPLS Basics Based on IP routes and control protocols, MPLS OSN 1500/3500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
is a connection-oriented switching technology V100R009C03 V100R002C01
for the network layer. MPLS uses short and fixed-
OSN 7500: V200R011C00 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
length labels at different link layers for packet
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01
encapsulation, and switches labels based on the
encapsulated labels.
PWE3 Basics In a packet switched network (PSN), PWE3 is a OSN 1500/3500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
Layer 2 service bearing technology that emulates V100R009C03 V100R002C01
as faithfully as possible the basic behaviors and
OSN 7500: V200R011C00 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
characteristics of ATM services, Ethernet services,
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01
low-rate time division multiplexing (TDM) circuit
services, and other services. Such a technology
can interconnect the traditional network with
PSN network to share resources and expand the
network.
ATM PWE3 The ATM PWE3 technology emulates the basic OSN 3500/7500: OSN 3500/7500: V100R005
behaviors and characteristics of ATM services on V200R011C02 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
a packet switched network (PSN) by using the
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01
PWE3 mechanism, so that the emulated ATM
services can be transmitted on a PSN.
ETH PWE3 The ETH PWE3 technology emulates the basic OSN 1500/3500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
behaviors and characteristics of Ethernet services V100R009C03 V100R002C01
on a packet switched network (PSN) by using the
OSN 7500: V200R011C00 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
PWE3 mechanism, so that the Ethernet services
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01
can be transmitted on a PSN.
TDM PWE3 The TDM PWE3 technology emulates the basic OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
behaviors and characteristics of TDM services on V200R011C00 V100R002C01
a packet switched network (PSN) by using the
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
PWE3 mechanism, so that the emulated TDM
services can be transmitted on a PSN.
Layer 2 Switching On a LAN, a bridge or Layer 2 switch forwards OSN 1500/3500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
Ethernet data based on MAC addresses. A MAC V100R009C03 V100R002C01
address is a Layer 2 (data link layer) address in
OSN 7500: V200R011C00 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
the OSI model. Therefore, this data forwarding
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01
mode is called Layer 2 switching.
Smart Line Board Solution With the smart line board solution, no boards OSN 3500/7500: OSN 3500/7500:
need to be replaced when TDM networks evolve V200R015C20 V200R016C50
into packet networks. The smart line board
OSN 7500 II: V200R013C00 OSN 7500 II: V100R009C00
solution effectively increases the bandwidth of
the aggregation layer on a transport network,
and allows bandwidths to be configured for TDM
and packet services flexibly.
ATM OAM ATM OAM is used for detecting and locating OSN 3500/7500: OSN 3500/7500: V100R005
ATM faults, and monitoring ATM performance. V200R011C02 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01

ATM QoS ATM QoS is a mechanism provided by the ATM OSN 3500/7500: OSN 3500/7500: V100R005
network. With the mechanism, an ATM network V200R011C02 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
assures services of expected QoS objectives such
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01
as amount of bandwidth, delay, delay variation,
and packet loss ratio in whatever situations, so
that users can know the expected service level.
IMA The inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) OSN 3500/7500: OSN 3500/7500: V100R005
technology multiplexes multiple low-speed ATM V200R011C02 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
links into a high-speed link, providing protection
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01
for services when one of the low-speed ATM
links fail.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 452/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Name Short Description Initially Supported Product Version Initially Supported iManager U2000
Version
Ethernet Port OAM Ethernet port OAM helps maintain the end-to- OSN 1500/3500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
end Ethernet link between two directly- V100R009C03 V100R002C01
connected devices.
OSN 7500: V200R011C00 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01

Ethernet Service OAM ETH OAM enhances Ethernet Layer 2 OSN 1500/3500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
maintenance functions and it strongly supports V100R009C03 V100R002C01
service continuity verification, service
OSN 7500: V200R011C00 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
deployment commissioning, and network fault
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01
locating.
MPLS OAM The MPLS OAM technology provides a defect Tunnel OAM: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
detection tool and a defect correction V100R002C01
OSN 1500/3500:
mechanism for the MPLS network. Through the
V100R009C03 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
MPLS OAM and protection switching functions,
OSN 7500: V200R011C00
the detection function on the forwarding plane
for the MPLS network can be realized and the OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01
protection switching can be complete after a PW OAM:
defect occurs. In this manner, the impact caused OSN 1500/3500/7500:
by the defect is minimized. V200R011C00
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01
MPLS-TP OAM MPLS-TP OAM is an OAM mechanism defined in 3500/7500/OSN 7500 II: 3500/7500/OSN 7500 II:
MPLS-TP and is extended according to transport V200R012C00 V100R006C02
network requirements.
HQoS Hierarchical QoS (HQoS) is a QoS technology OSN 1500/3500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
that controls user traffic and performs priority- V100R009C03 V100R002C01
based traffic scheduling.
OSN 7500: V200R011C00 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01

IGMP Snooping By snooping the IGMP packet of Layer 3, the V200R011C01 V100R003C00
IGMP Snooping function creates and maintains
the Layer 2 multicast function and thus prevents
the multicast packets from being broadcast
among the Layer 2 equipment.
LAG With no need for hardware upgrades, link OSN 1500/3500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
aggregation binds several Ethernet ports as a V100R009C03 V100R002C01
logical port for higher link bandwidth and link
OSN 7500: V200R011C00 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
reliability.
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01

LPT With LPT enabled, transmission NEs detect faults OSN 1500/3500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
on a service access node or on a service network V100R009C03 V100R002C01
and instruct the devices at both ends of the
OSN 7500: V200R011C00 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
service network to immediately activate a backup
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01
network for communication.
MC-LAG Multi-chassis link aggregation group (MC-LAG) is OSN 3500/7500: OSN 3500/7500:
a supplement to the single-chassis link V200R011C00 V100R002C01
aggregation group (SC-LAG) and allows
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
aggregation of inter-chassis links. On a 3G bearer
network, MC-LAG can work with PW APS to
implement dual-homing of E-Line or E-LAN
services when a dual-homed node becomes
faulty or an AC-side link or NNI-side service fails.
PW APS PW APS is a function that protects PWs based on OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
the APS protocol. When the working PW is faulty, V200R011C00 V100R002C01
PW APS switches services to a preconfigured
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
protection PW.
Tunnel APS Tunnel APS is a function that protects tunnels OSN 1500/3500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
based on the APS protocol. When the working V100R009C03 V100R002C01
tunnel is faulty, tunnel APS switches services to a
OSN 7500: V200R011C00 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
preconfigured protection tunnel.
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01

MRPS MPLS-TP ring protection switching (MRPS) OSN 3500/3500/7500 II: OSN 3500/3500/7500 II:
implements rapid protection switching in V200R013C00 V100R009C00
link/node failures and therefore ensures high
service quality.
MS-PW Multi-segment pseudo wire (MS-PW) involves OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
setting up static PW segments to provide edge- V200R011C00 V100R002C01
to-edge virtual connections and reduce the
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
number of MPLS tunnels on the convergence
ring.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 453/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Name Short Description Initially Supported Product Version Initially Supported iManager U2000
Version
MSTP The Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) is a OSN 3500/3500/7500 II: OSN 3500/3500/7500 II:
type of spanning tree protocols. The MSTP is V200R012C00 V100R006C02
compatible with the STP and RSTP, and the
defects in the STP and RSTP are fixed in the
MSTP.
Packet-based linear MSP The packet-based linear MSP uses the MSOH OSN 3500/7500: OSN 3500/7500:
bytes K1 and K2 to implement automatic V200R011C00 V100R002C01
protection switching and thus to protect services.
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
The OptiX OSN equipment supports 1:1 packet-
based linear MSP.
Port Mirroring With the development of network technologies, OSN 1500/3500/3500/7500 II: OSN 1500/3500/3500/7500 II:
carriers require faster fault diagnosis and V200R012C01 V100R008C00
realtime monitoring over service traffic without
affecting services. The port mirroring technology
fulfills the preceding requirements by replicating
the traffic at one port to another port.
PRBS The PRBS functional module is equivalent to a OSN 3500/7500: OSN 3500/7500:
simple instrument that transmits and receives V200R011C00 V100R002C01
unframed services. Therefore, you can perform a
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
test without a real instrument during the
deployment or fault locating.
Protection Solutions for a 3G To meet the requirements of a 3G bearer - -
Bearer Network
network, Huawei provides a variety of protection
schemes to ensure reliable operation of
equipment. In addition, Huawei provides a
complete set of protection solutions applicable
to some typical network topologies.
RMON The RMON defines a serial of statistic formats OSN 1500/3500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
and functions to realize the data exchange V100R009C03 V100R002C01
between the control stations and detection
OSN 7500: V200R011C00 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
stations that complies with the RMON standards.
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01

Table 2 TDM Features

Name Short Description Initially Supported Product Version Initially Supported iManager U2000
Version
ATM and IMA Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) is a OSN 1500/3500/7500: V100R003 OSN 1500/3500/7500:
connection-oriented and fast packet switching V100R002C00
technology. The ATM, integrating the advantages
of circuit switching and packet switching, is a
standard broadband integrated services digital
network (B-ISDN) transfer mode. IMA stands for
inverse multiplexing over ATM.
AU-3 Three VC-3 services are bound into an AU-3 OSN 1500/3500/7500: V100R003 OSN 1500/3500/7500:
service for higher order cross-connection. V100R002C00
BPS Board protection switching (BPS) is used to OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
protect services on the entire data board. When V100R006 V100R002C00
the working board fails, the BPS enables services
OSN 7500 II: V200R012C00 OSN 7500 II: V100R006C02
to switch to the protection board in an accepted
period. In this manner, 1+1 board-level
protection is achieved for important services.
DLAG The distributed link aggregation group (DLAG) is OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
a board-level port protection technology used to V100R008 V100R002C00
detect unidirectional fiber cuts and to negotiate
OSN 7500 II: V200R012C00 OSN 7500 II: V100R006C02
with the opposite end. In the case of a link down
failure on a port or a hardware failure on a board,
the services can automatically be switched to the
slave board, thus realizing 1+1 protection for the
inter-board ports.
E1 SNCP E1 sub-network connection protection (SNCP) OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
protects framed E1 services. E1 SNCP is based on V200R013C30 V200R014C60
the dual fed and selective receiving mechanism.
OSN 7500 II: V200R015C00 OSN 7500 II: V200R015C50

Ethernet Port OAM Ethernet port OAM helps maintain the end-to- OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
end Ethernet link between two directly- V100R007 V100R002C00
connected devices.
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 454/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Name Short Description Initially Supported Product Version Initially Supported iManager U2000
Version
Ethernet Service OAM ETH OAM enhances Ethernet Layer 2 OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
maintenance functions and it strongly supports V100R006 V100R002C00
service continuity verification, service
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
deployment commissioning, and network fault
locating.
ERPS Based on the traditional Ethernet mechanism, the OSN 3500/7500/7500 II: OSN 3500/7500/7500 II:
Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) uses V200R012C01 V100R008C00
the ETH OAM function and the ring automatic
protection switching (R-APS) protocol to achieve
fast protection switching on the Ethernet ring
network.
IGMP Snooping By snooping the IGMP packet of Layer 3, the OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
IGMP Snooping function creates and maintains V100R006 V100R002C00
the Layer 2 multicast function and thus prevents
OSN 7500 II: V200R012C00 OSN 7500 II: V100R006C02
the multicast packets from being broadcast
among the Layer 2 equipment.
IPA In the case of a fiber cut, the intelligent power OSN 1500/3500/7500: V100R006 OSN 1500/3500/7500:
adjustment (IPA) function can automatically V100R002C00
adjust the output power of the local OAU to a
safe value. In this manner, the IPA function
provides protection against laser radiation that is
harmful to human body and especially to the
eyes.
LAG Link aggregation combines multiple links OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
attached to the same equipment into a LAG so V100R006 V100R002C00
that the bandwidth of the LAG increases and
OSN 7500 II: V200R012C00 OSN 7500 II: V100R006C02
links are made more reliable. The aggregated
links are treated as a single logical link.
LCAS The link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS) OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
technology emerges as a solution to the V100R006 V100R002C00
preceding problems. The LCAS improves and
OSN 7500 II: V200R012C00 OSN 7500 II: V100R006C02
complements the virtual concatenation
technology. The LCAS dynamically adjusts the
number of virtual containers required for service
mapping to meet the requirements of various
service bandwidths. This elevates the bandwidth
utilization and enhances the robustness of virtual
concatenation.
LMSP The linear MSP applies to the point-to-point OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
physical network, providing MS protection for V100R003 V100R002C00
the services between two points. The linear MSP
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
uses the K1 and K2 bytes in the multiplex section
overhead to realize automatic protection
switching.
Orderwire Call The E1 and E2 bytes in section overheads are OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
used for transmitting voice packets and signaling V100R001 V100R001C00
in orderwire calls. During deployment
OSN 7500 II: V200R015C00 OSN 7500 II: V200R015C50
commissioning, orderwire calls are often used for
inter-site communication. In areas with poor
communication conditions, orderwire calls are
crucial for inter-site communication.
LPT As a protection scheme based on the link, the OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
LPT passes through states of the point-to-point V100R003 V100R002C00
link and point-to-multipoint link. In this way, the
OSN 7500 II: V200R012C00 OSN 7500 II: V100R006C02
LPT makes sure the network level protection for
the transmission of point-to-point private line
services and for the transmission of the point-to-
multipoint convergence services.
MSTP Like the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) and Rapid V200R012C01 V100R008C00
Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), the Multiple
Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) is used to
prevent loops on a network and the resultant
broadcast storms.
MSP Ring The ring MSP protects services between nodes OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
on a ring network. The ring MSP uses the K1 and V100R003 V100R002C00
K2 bytes in the multiplex section overhead to
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
realize automatic protection switching.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 455/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Name Short Description Initially Supported Product Version Initially Supported iManager U2000
Version
Embedded PCM Pulse code modulation (PCM) technique is widely OSN 1500/3500: OSN 1500/3500:
used in electricity, rail transportation, highway V200R013C00 V100R009C00
networks, aviation, and other industries. It
OSN 7500: V200R013C20 OSN 7500: V200R014C50
applies to scenarios where high requirements are
OSN 7500 II: V200R015C00 OSN 7500 II: V200R015C50
posed on the data transmission efficiency and
bandwidth, such as point-to-point hotlines,
dedicated telephone exchanges, and transparent
transmission of monitoring data for devices that
are operating remotely.
Power Consumption Control The power consumption control function helps OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
users manage the power consumption of high V100R007 V100R002C00
power-consuming data boards and thus ensures
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
the normal operation of the equipment.
PPS Port protection switching (PPS) is used to protect OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
services on specific ports. When the working port V100R006 V100R002C00
fails, the PPS enables services to switch to the
OSN 7500 II: V200R012C00 OSN 7500 II: V100R006C02
protection port in an accepted period. In this
manner, 1+1 port protection is achieved for
important services.
PRBS The PRBS functional module is equivalent to a OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
simple instrument that transmits and receives V100R007 V100R002C00
unframed services. Therefore, you can perform a
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
test without a real instrument during the
deployment or fault locating.
QinQ The QinQ technology provides a cheap and easy OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
layer-2 (L2) virtual private network (VPN) V100R004C02 V100R002C00
solution. With the VLAN stacking and nesting
OSN 7500 II: V200R012C00 OSN 7500 II: V100R006C02
technology, the data packets carry two VLAN
tags at two different layers to identify different
data packets. This clears the limit of the original
solution in which only one VLAN tag at one layer
is used to identify different data packets. As a
result, the VLAN IDs are extended.
QoS The quality of service (QoS) means that the OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
expected class of service, in terms of the V100R003 V100R002C00
bandwidth, delay, delay jitter, and packet loss
OSN 7500 II: V200R012C00 OSN 7500 II: V100R006C02
ratio, can be guaranteed under all circumstances
in a communications network. In this way, the
request and response of an application satisfy an
expectable class of service.
RMON By using the remote monitoring (RMON), you OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
can transmit network monitoring data between V100R006 V100R002C00
different network sections.
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00

RPR The RPR function can be used to adjust the data OSN 1500/3500/7500: V100R003 OSN 1500/3500/7500:
traffic of the network and detect whether the V100R002C00
nodes in the network are reachable. The RPR
function can enhance the robustness and
flexibility of the network.
SNCP Sub-network connection protection (SNCP) OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
protects the service that traverses more than one V100R003 V100R002C00
subnet. SNCP is based on the dually-fed and
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
selectively-receiving mechanism. The subnet can
be a chain, a ring, or a more complex network.
SNCMP The sub-network connection multi-route OSN 1500/3500/7500: V100R003 OSN 1500/3500/7500:
protection (SNCMP) scheme provides functions V100R002C00
similar to the SNCP scheme. With regard to their
difference, the SNCP scheme provides 1+1
protection and the SNCMP scheme provides N+1
protection (in which multiple protection paths
protect one working path).
SNCTP SNCTP is short for subnetwork connection tunnel OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
protection. SNCTP provides protection paths at V100R007 V100R002C00
the VC4 level. When the working path is faulty,
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
all its services can be switched to the protection
path.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 456/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Name Short Description Initially Supported Product Version Initially Supported iManager U2000
Version
STP and RSTP The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) and Rapid OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) are used in the V100R006 V100R002C00
loop network. The two protocols realize routing
OSN 7500 II: V200R012C00 OSN 7500 II: V100R006C02
redundancy by adopting certain algorithms and
break the loop network into a loop-free tree
network, therefore preventing packets from
increasing and cycling in an endless manner in
the loop network. In this manner, the application
of the two protocols can prevent the occurrence
of the broadcast storm and MAC address table
flapping.
TCM On a large network, or when network resources OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
are leased to different network carriers, the TCM V100R003 V100R002C00
is used to monitor the quality of transmission
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
paths in a specific network area (for example, the
transmission network of the line resource leaser).
The TCM function that uses the N1 or N2
overhead byte does not require you to use the
network management system to query all
stations, but to query only the quality report of
paths at the TCM sub-layer at the edge interface
of the network. In this way, a fault is located or a
network dispute is solved quickly.
TPS Tributary protection switching (TPS) provides All V100R002C00
board-level protection. It uses one service board
to protect N service boards of the same board
type. TPS switches services from a working board
to the protection board when it detects a faulty
working board.
Test frame The test frame is mainly used for commissioning OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
Ethernet services or locating Ethernet service V100R003 V100R002C00
faults.
OSN 7500 II: V200R012C00 OSN 7500 II: V100R006C02

Transmux A remote NE transmits E1(T1)/E3(T3) services (all OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
the timeslots in the E3(T3) services may not be V100R008 V100R002C00
occupied) to the central NE at VC-12 or VC-3
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
granularity on the SDH line. After receiving the
E1(T1)/E3(T3) services, the central NE first
demultiplexes all the received services into E1(T1)
services. Then, the central NE grooms the E1(T1)
services and multiplexes the E1(T1) services into
E3(T3) services by using the E13(M13) function.
Finally, the central NE transmits the E3(T3)
services.

Table 3 OTN Features

Name Short Description Initially Supported Product Version Initially Supported iManager U2000
Version
OTN Overheads When different operators' networks are OSN 3500/7500: OSN 3500/7500:
interconnected, the OTN overheads at the V200R015C20 V200R016C50
tandem connection monitoring (TCM) layer can
OSN 7500 II: V200R013C00 OSN 7500 II: V100R009C00
be used to monitor the quality of the channels
that the different operators provide. The ODUk
TCM function facilitates fault location.
ODUk SNCP ODUk SNCP protects optical channel data unit - k OSN 7500 II: V200R015C20 OSN 7500 II: V200R016C50
(ODUk) services through dual feeding and
selective receiving. (SNCP stands for subnetwork
connection protection.)
Tributary SNCP Tributary SNCP protects client-side services OSN 7500 II: V200R015C20 OSN 7500 II: V200R016C50
received by tributary boards through dual feeding
and selective receiving. (SNCP stands for
subnetwork connection protection.)

Table 4 Clock Features

Name Short Description Initially Supported Product Version Initially Supported iManager U2000
Version

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 457/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Name Short Description Initially Supported Product Version Initially Supported iManager U2000
Version
Physical Clocks (SDH and Digital signals transmitted on lines or links are
OTN) OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
coded or scrambled to reduce consecutive '0's or V100R003 V100R002C00
'1's. Therefore, the code stream carries plentiful
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
clock information. The clock information can be
extracted by applying phase lock and filter
technologies and used for synchronization
references.
IEEE 1588v2 The IEEE 1588 standard, which is generally called OSN 3500/7500/7500 II: OSN 3500/7500/7500 II:
the precision time protocol (PTP), is a precision V200R015C10 V200R015C60
clock synchronization protocol for networked
measurement and control systems. The
equipment that complies with IEEE 1588 meets
the requirement for the time synchronization
precision at the microsecond level.
Synchronous Ethernet The synchronous Ethernet clock is a technology
Clock OSN 1500/3500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
of frequency synchronization over the physical V100R009C03 V100R002C01
layer, which is similar to the SDH clock.
OSN 7500: V200R011C00 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01

CES ACR CES ACR uses the adaptive clock recovery (ACR) OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
technology to recover clock synchronization V200R011C00 V100R002C01
information carried by CES packets. CES ACR is
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
available in two types: standard and enhanced.

Table 5 Security Management Features

Name Short Description Initially Supported Product Version Initially Supported iManager U2000
Version
RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
(RADIUS) can improve the security of client-side V200R012C00 V100R002C01
equipment, helping customers reduce input in
OSN 7500 II: V200R012C00 OSN 7500 II: V100R006C02
network O&M.

Table 6 DCN Features

Name Short Description Initially Supported Product Version Initially Supported iManager U2000
Version
Outband DCN (HWECC) HWECC is a Huawei proprietary protocol stack OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
that is developed for communication between V100R003 V100R002C00
NEs based on the ESC, or extended channels. The
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
HWECC solution encapsulates network
supervisory information into HWECC protocol
packets for transmission.
Outband DCN (IP over In the IP over DCC solution, NEs use unified DCC
DCC) OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
channels to transmit the TCP/IP protocol packets, V100R003 V100R002C00
enabling the NMS to manage them.
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00

Outband DCN (OSI over The NEs use unified DCCs to transmit the data of
DCC) OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
the OSI protocol by using the OSI over DCC V100R003 V100R002C00
solution. In this way, the U2000 can manage NEs.
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
The OSI over DCC solution applies to a network
that is comprised of the OptiX equipment and the
third-party equipment that supports the OSI over
DCC function.
Outband DCN (DCC When interworking with the third-party
Transparent Transmission) OSN 1500/3500/7500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
equipment, the OptiX equipment can V100R003 V100R002C00
transparently transmit the OAM information of
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
the third-party equipment through the DCC
physical channel so that the third-party
equipment can traverse the Huawei DCN to
communicate with the NMS of the third party; the
OAM information of the OptiX equipment can
also be transparently transmitted by the DCC
physical channel of the third-party equipment so
that the OptiX equipment can communicate with
the NMS.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 458/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Name Short Description Initially Supported Product Version Initially Supported iManager U2000
Version
Outband DCN (Transparent Transparent transmission of DCC bytes through OSN 1500: V100R003 OSN 1500: V100R002C00
Transmission of DCC Bytes
Through the External Clock the external clock interface refers to a solution in
Interface) which the external clock interface is used to place
the DCC bytes in a specified E1 service that
traverses a third-party network. When this
solution is used, the transmission bandwidth of
one E1 service is occupied. The solution can be
used if network management information needs
to traverse third-party equipment but none of OSI
over DCC, IP over DCC, and DCC transparent
transmission is supported.
Outband DCN (E1 DCN) When Huawei NMS needs to management OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500 II: OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500 II:
remote Huawei equipment and a third-party V200R015C10 V200R015C60
network is deployed between them, the E1 DCN
solution uses E1 services of the third-party
network to transparently transmit the DCN
information carried by E1 services of the Huawei
equipment.
Inband DCN The inband DCN refers to the networking mode OSN 1500/3500: OSN 1500/3500/7500:
that uses the service path provided by the V100R009C03 V100R002C01
managed equipment to realize the management
OSN 7500: V200R011C00 OSN 7500 II: V100R003C00
of the network equipment. In this mode, the
OSN 7500 II: V200R011C01
network management information is transmitted
on the service path of the equipment.

Parent topic: Description of Common Features

2 Packet Features
MPLS Basics
This chapter describes the basics of the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) technology.

PWE3 Basics
In a packet switched network (PSN), PWE3 is a Layer 2 service bearing technology that emulates as faithfully as possible the basic
behaviors and characteristics of ATM services, Ethernet services, low-rate time division multiplexing (TDM) circuit services, and other
services. Such a technology can interconnect the traditional network with PSN network to share resources and expand the network.

ETH PWE3
This chapter describes the ETH PWE3 feature.

TDM PWE3
This chapter describes the TDM PWE3 feature.

Layer 2 Switching
This chapter describes the Layer 2 switching feature.

Smart Line Board Solution

To address the growth of bandwidths and the evolution to packet services, Huawei provides the smart line board solution to enable
OptiX OSN equipment to meet the new requirements of traditional bearer networks.

Ethernet Port OAM

Ethernet port OAM maintains point-to-point Ethernet links between directly-connected devices by performing OAM auto-discovery,
link performance monitoring, fault check, remote loopback, and selfloop check.

Ethernet Service OAM

Ethernet service OAM focuses on Ethernet services and maintains end-to-end Ethernet links. It implements sectional and segmental
maintenance over service flows by specifying maintenance domains, maintenance associations, and maintenance points.

MPLS OAM
The MPLS OAM technology provides a defect detection tool and a defect correction mechanism for the MPLS network. You can
perform the detection function of the forwarding plane through the MPLS OAM and protection switching mechanism, and complete
a protection switching in 50 ms after a defect occurs. In this way, the impact caused by the defect is minimized.

MPLS-TP OAM
Multiprotocol label switching transport profile OAM (MPLS-TP OAM) is developed based on MPLS OAM, providing stronger
network diagnosis functions. MPLS-TP OAM can quickly locate a network fault.

HQoS
Hierarchical QoS (HQoS) is a QoS technology that controls user traffic and performs priority-based traffic scheduling.

IGMP Snooping
The Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Snooping function can improve bandwidth utilization and enhance network

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 459/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
security and reliability.

LAG
With no need for hardware upgrades, link aggregation binds several Ethernet ports as a logical port for higher link bandwidth and
link reliability.

MC-LAG
Multi-chassis link aggregation group (MC-LAG) is a supplement to the single-chassis link aggregation group (SC-LAG) and allows
aggregation of inter-chassis links. On a 3G bearer network, MC-LAG can work with PW APS to implement dual-homing of E-Line or
E-LAN services when a dual-homed node becomes faulty or an AC-side link or NNI-side service fails.

PW APS
The PW APS uses the protection PW to protect the working PW. When the working PW is faulty, the services are switched to the
protection PW and remain unaffected.

Tunnel APS
In the case of tunnel APS, an tunnel is set to protect the working tunnel. In this case, when the working tunnel fails, services are
switched to the protection tunnel for transmission and thus to realize the service protection.

MRPS
Currently, transmission systems usually adopt ring topologies. Multiprotocol label switching transport profile (MPLS-TP) rings carry
an increasing number of services and the service priorities are ascending. MPLS-TP ring protection switching (MRPS) implements
rapid protection switching in link/node failures and therefore ensures high service quality.

MS-PW
Multi-segment pseudo wire (MS-PW) involves setting up static PW segments to provide edge-to-edge virtual connections and
reduce the number of tunnels on the convergence ring.

MSTP
Like the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) is used
to prevent loops on a network and the resultant broadcast storms.

Packet-based linear MSP

The packet-based linear MSP scheme is applicable to a point-to-point physical network, providing MS-layer protection for the
service between two points.

Port Mirroring
With the development of network technologies, carriers require faster fault diagnosis and real-time monitoring over service traffic
without affecting services. The port mirroring technology fulfills the preceding requirements by replicating the traffic at one port to
another port.

PRBS
If a special test tool is unavailable, you can perform the pseudo random binary sequence (PRBS) test by using the embedded test
system on the E1 interface board.

RMON
Remote network monitoring (RMON) is used to remotely monitor data traffic on a network segment or on an entire network.
Currently, the RMON standard is one of the most widely applied network management standards.

TP-Assist Solution
Transport packet assist (TP-Assist) allows a packet network to be efficiently planned, quickly deployed, and easily maintained like an
SDH network.

Parent topic: Description of Common Features

2.1 MPLS Basics

This chapter describes the basics of the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) technology.

Introduction
This section provides the definition of MPLS and describes its purpose.

Basic Concepts
This section describes the basic concepts associated with MPLS.

Specifications
This section describes the capacity of the OptiX OSN equipment for supporting MPLS.

Parent topic: Packet Features

2.1.1 Introduction
This section provides the definition of MPLS and describes its purpose.
localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 460/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
finition
Based on IP routes and control protocols, MPLS is a connection-oriented switching technology for the network layer. MPLS uses short
and fixed-length labels at different link layers for packet encapsulation, and switches labels based on the encapsulated labels.
MPLS has two planes: control plane and forwarding plane. The control plane is connectionless, featuring powerful and flexible routing
functions to meet network requirements for a variety of new applications. This plane is mainly responsible for label distribution, setup of
label forwarding tables, and setup and removal of label switched paths (LSPs). The forwarding plane is also called the data plane. It is
connection-oriented and supports Layer 2 networks such as ATM and Ethernet networks. The forwarding plane adds or deletes IP packet
labels, and forwards the packets according to the label forwarding table.

rpose
In the packet domain, MPLS helps to set up MPLS tunnels to carry PWs that transmit a variety of services on a PSN in an end-to-end
manner. These services include TDM, ATM, and Ethernet services. Figure 1 shows the typical MPLS application in the packet domain. In the
figure, the services between the NodeBs and RNCs are transmitted by PW1 and PW2 carried by the MPLS tunnel.

Figure 1 Typical MPLS application

Parent topic: MPLS Basics

2.1.2 Basic Concepts

This section describes the basic concepts associated with MPLS.

MPLS Network Architecture

An MPLS network, also called an MPLS domain, is a network area that consists of interconnected label switching routers (LSRs). An
LSR, also called an MPLS node, is a network device that performs MPLS label switching and packet forwarding.

LSP
Label switched paths (LSPs), also called MPLS tunnels, are classified into various types depending on different classification criteria.

Bearer Mode for MPLS Packets

The OptiX OSN equipment uses Ethernet frames to bear MPLS packets.

MPLS Label
MPLS uses short and fixed-length labels at different link layers for packet encapsulation, and supports MPLS label stacking to form
label stacks.

Parent topic: MPLS Basics

[Link] MPLS Network Architecture

An MPLS network, also called an MPLS domain, is a network area that consists of interconnected label switching routers (LSRs). An LSR,
also called an MPLS node, is a network device that performs MPLS label switching and packet forwarding.
shows the MPLS network architecture. On an MPLS network, LSRs on the network edge are called label edge routers (LERs), and
Figure 1
LSRs within the network range are called core LSRs. An LER may have one or more adjacent non-LSR nodes, but all the adjacent nodes of
a core LSR are LSRs.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 461/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 MPLS network architecture

An LSR ID uniquely identifies an LSR on an MPLS network. An LSR ID can be 4-byte long or 16-byte long. A 4-byte LSR ID is based on an
IPv4 address, and a 16-byte LSR ID is based on an IPv6 address.

NOTE:
Currently, the OptiX OSN equipment supports only LSR IDs based on the IPv4 address.

Parent topic: Basic Concepts

[Link] LSP
Label switched paths (LSPs), also called MPLS tunnels, are classified into various types depending on different classification criteria.

sic Concepts of LSPs

On an MPLS network, an LSR adopts the same label switching mechanism to forward packets with the same characteristics. The packets
with the same characteristics are called a forwarding equivalence class (FEC). The path along which an FEC travels through the MPLS
network is called an LSP, or an MPLS tunnel.
To provide a unified interface for upper-level applications of an LSP, the system needs to assign an ID to the LSP. This ID is called an LSP
ID or tunnel ID. An LSP ID is 4-byte long, and is only valid for the local LSR.
An LSP is unidirectional. As shown in Figure 1, LSRs on an LSP can be classified into the following types:

Ingress
An LSP ingress node pushes a label onto the packet for MPLS packet encapsulation and forwarding. One LSP has only one ingress
node.
Transit
An LSP transit node swaps labels and forwards MPLS packets according to the label forwarding table. One LSP may have one or
more transits nodes.
Egress
An LSP egress node pops the label and recovers the packet for forwarding. One LSP has only one egress node.

Figure 1 Classification of LSRs on an LSP

P Types
LSPs are classified into various types depending on different classification criteria. For details, see Table 1.

Table 1 LSP types

Aspect LSP Type Definition

Setup mode Static tunnel It refers to an LSP for which a static label is
configured by using the management plane.
Dynamic tunnel It refers to an LSP established by running the
label distribution protocol (LDP).
Direction Unidirectional tunnel It refers to an LSP in a specific direction.
Bidirectional tunnel It refers to a pair of LSPs that have the same
path but reverse directions.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 462/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Aspect LSP Type Definition

DiffServ identification mode E-LSP An E-LSP uses the EXP field for prioritizing
packet scheduling. One E-LSP supports PWs
belonging to up to eight scheduling types.
L-LSP An L-LSP uses the MPLS label value for
prioritizing packet scheduling priority. One L-
LSP supports PWs belonging to one scheduling
type.
LSP mode Uniform When an egress node pops the label, it renews
the packet scheduling priority according to the
EXP field in the label.
Pipe When an egress pops the label, it does not
renew the packet scheduling priority.

Parent topic: Basic Concepts

[Link] Bearer Mode for MPLS Packets

The OptiX OSN equipment uses Ethernet frames to bear MPLS packets.
Figure 1 shows how an Ethernet frame bears an MPLS packet.

Figure 1 Bearer mode for MPLS packets

Destination address: It is the MAC address of the opposite interface, learned through the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP). It
changes at each hop.
Source address: It always takes the MAC address of the transmit port and changes at each hop.
802.1q header: The OptiX OSN equipment determines whether an Ethernet frame at the egress port carries the 802.1q header
based on the TAG attribute of an Ethernet port. If the TAG attribute is Access, the Ethernet frame will not carry the 802.1q header;
if the TAG attribute is Tag aware, the VLAN ID of the 802.1q header in an MPLS packet is the tunnel VLAN ID that is set on the
NMS; if the tunnel VLAN ID is absent, the VLAN ID of the 802.1q header is the default VLAN ID (that is, 1) at the NNI port
transmitting MPLS packets.
Length/Type: It is always set to 0x8847. After detecting the value, the OptiX OSN equipment considers the packet is the Ethernet
frame carrying MPLS packet. The NE will not detect MPLS packets at the ingress port based on the TAG attribute and VLAN ID of
an LSP.
MPLS packet: It consists of the MPLS label and Layer 3 user packet. For details on its format, see MPLS Label.
Frame check sequence (FCS): It is used to verify that the Ethernet frame is correct.

NOTE:
The ARP is used to translate the IP address at the network layer (that is, logical address) into the MAC address at the data link layer (that is, physical address). By
default when the TAG attribute of a NNI port is Tag ware, an ARP packet that is transmitted or received through an NNI port has a VLAN ID that is the default value
of the NNI port. Therefore, the TAG attribute and default VLAN ID of an NNI port must be the same as those of a peer NNI port.

Parent topic: Basic Concepts

[Link] MPLS Label

MPLS uses short and fixed-length labels at different link layers for packet encapsulation, and supports MPLS label stacking to form label
stacks.

bel Format
The OptiX OSN equipment uses Ethernet frames to bear MPLS packets. Figure 1 shows the format of the MPLS label.

Figure 1 Format of the MPLS label

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 463/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Label: This 20-bit field indicates the actual label value.
EXP: Theis 3-bit field is reserved for experimental use. On the OptiX OSN equipment, the EXP is used to identify the priority of an
MPLS packet, similar to the VLAN priority specified in IEEE 802.1q.
S: This 1-bit field identifies the bottom of stack. MPLS supports multiple labels, that is, label stacking. This bit is set to 1 for the
bottom label in the label stack.
Time to Live (TTL): This 8-bit field has the same meaning as the TTL specified for IP packets.

bel Stack
A label stack refers to an ordered set of labels. MPLS allows a packet to carry multiple labels. The label next to the Layer 2 header is called
the top label or outer label, and the label next to the IP header is called the bottom label or inner label. Theoretically, an unlimited
number of MPLS labels can be stacked.
Figure 2 MPLS label stack

The label stack is organized as a Last In, First Out stack. The top label is always processed first.

bel Space
The value range for label distribution is called a label space. Two types of label space are available:

Per-platform label space

An LSR uses one label space; that is, the labels are unique per LSR.
Per-interface label space
Each interface on an LSR uses a label space; that is, the labels are unique per interface, but can be repeated on different
interfaces.

The OptiX OSN equipment supports only the per-platform label space. Values of 0 to 15 are reserved for special use and cannot be
assigned to LSPs as service labels. Ingress labels and egress labels must be unique per NE.

Parent topic: Basic Concepts

2.1.3 Specifications
This section describes the capacity of the OptiX OSN equipment for supporting MPLS.
Table 1 provides specifications associated with MPLS.

Table 1 Specifications associated with MPLS

Item Specifications

Type of port carrying the tunnel FE/GE/10GE

Maximum number of tunnels Unidirectional tunnel

OptiX OSN 1500: 512
OptiX OSN 3500/7500:
N4GSCC: 4K
N6GSCC: 16K
OptiX OSN 7500 II: 16K
Bidirectional tunnel
OptiX OSN 1500: 256
OptiX OSN 3500/7500:
N4GSCC: 2K
N6GSCC: 8K
OptiX OSN 7500 II: 8K

Tunnel type Setup mode Static tunnel

Direction Unidirectional
Bidirectional

Scheduling attribute E-LSP

LSP mode Uniform

Pipe

Per-platform label space size OptiX OSN 3500/7500/7500 II: 32768

OptiX OSN 1500: 2048

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 464/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Item Specifications

Format of LSR ID Based on the IPv4 address

Tunnel APS Supported

NOTE:
For details, see Specifications.

Tunnel OAM (Y.1711) Supported

NOTE:
For details, see Specifications.

MPLS-TP tunnel OAM Supported

NOTE:
For details, see Specifications.

QoS Restricting tunnel bandwidth

Mapping between the EXP values and the PHB levels

Parent topic: MPLS Basics

2.2 PWE3 Basics

In a packet switched network (PSN), PWE3 is a Layer 2 service bearing technology that emulates as faithfully as possible the basic
behaviors and characteristics of ATM services, Ethernet services, low-rate time division multiplexing (TDM) circuit services, and other
services. Such a technology can interconnect the traditional network with PSN network to share resources and expand the network.

Introduction
This section provides the definition of pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) and describes its purpose.

Basic Concepts
This section describes the basic concepts associated with PWE3.

Specifications
This section describes the capacity of the OptiX OSN equipment for supporting PWE3.

Parent topic: Packet Features

2.2.1 Introduction
This section provides the definition of pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) and describes its purpose.

finition
PWE3 is a Layer 2 service bearer technology that emulates the basic behaviors and characteristics of services such as ATM/IMA, Ethernet,
and TDM on a packet switched network (PSN).
Aided by the PWE3 technology, conventional networks can be connected by a PSN. Therefore, resource sharing and network scaling can
be achieved.

rpose
PWE3 aims to transmit various services such as ATM, Ethernet, and TDM over a PSN. Figure 1 shows the PWE3 application. The Ethernet,
ATM, and TDM services between NodeBs and RNCs are emulated by means of PWE3 on NE1 and NE2, and then are transmitted on the
pseudo wires (PWs) between NE1 and NE2.

Figure 1 Typical application of PWE3

Parent topic: PWE3 Basics

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 465/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

2.2.2 Basic Concepts

This section describes the basic concepts associated with PWE3.

PWE3 Network Reference Model

In the PWE3 network reference model, a PW connects two provider edges (PEs), and an attachment circuit (AC) connects a PE device
and a customer edge (CE) device.

PWE3 Protocol Reference Model

The protocol reference model used by the OptiX OSN equipment includes pre-processing of native services.

PWE3 Encapsulation Format

The specific PWE3 encapsulation format varies slightly according to the type of emulated service, but a generic encapsulation
format is also available.

MS-PW
A PW that is carried in a PSN tunnel is called a single-segment PW (SS-PW). A PW is called a multi-segment PW (MS-PW) if it is
segmented and carried in multiple PSN tunnels.

VCCV
As specified in IETF RFC5085, virtual circuit connectivity verification (VCCV) is an end-to-end fault detection and diagnostics
mechanism for a PW. The VCCV mechanism is, in its simplest description, a control channel between a PW's ingress and egress
points over which connectivity verification messages can be sent.

Parent topic: PWE3 Basics

[Link] PWE3 Network Reference Model

In the PWE3 network reference model, a PW connects two provider edges (PEs), and an attachment circuit (AC) connects a PE device and
a customer edge (CE) device.
shows the PWE3 network reference model. One or more PWs are created between PE1 and PE2 based on the service access
Figure 1
requirements at the CEs. Several PWs can be carried in one or more PSN tunnels. In this manner, native services can be transmitted over a
PSN.

Figure 1 PWE3 network reference model

AC: attachment circuit CE: customer edge

PE: provider edge PW: pseudo wire

NOTE:
In the network reference model, PWs are carried in a PSN tunnel; that is, a single-segment PW (SS-PW).

The concepts found in the network reference model shown in Figure 1 are defined as follows.

A CE is a device that originates or terminates a service. The CE is not aware that it is using an emulated service rather than a native
service.

A PE is a device that provides PWE3 to a CE. Located at the edge of a network, a PE is connected to a CE through an AC.
In the PWE3 network reference model, the mapping relationship between an AC and a PW is determined once a PW is created between
two PEs. As a result, Layer 2 services on CEs can be transmitted over a PSN.

An AC is a physical or virtual circuit attaching a CE to a PE. An AC can be, for example, an Ethernet port, a VLAN, or a TDM link.

W
A PW is a mechanism that carries emulated services from one PE to another PE over a PSN. By means of PWE3, point-to-point channels
are created, separated from each other. Users' Layer 2 packets are transparently transmitted on a PW.
localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 466/502
 2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
PWs are available in two types depending on whether signaling protocols are used or not. Specifically, a PW that does use signaling
protocols is called a dynamic PW, whereas a PW that does not use signaling protocols is called a static PW.

NOTE:
The OptiX OSN equipment supports only static PWs.

nnel
A tunnel provides a mechanism that transparently transmits information over a network. In a tunnel, one or more PWs can be carried. A
tunnel connects a local PE and a remote PE for transparently transmitting data.
PSN tunnels are available in several types, but the OptiX OSN equipment supports only MPLS tunnels. In this document, PWE3 is
generally based on the MPLS tunnel (LSP), unless otherwise specified.

NOTE:
PW and tunnel are both logical concepts. PW bandwidth is the bandwidth of its carried service, and tunnel bandwidth is the bandwidth of all its carried PWs.

Parent topic: Basic Concepts

[Link] PWE3 Protocol Reference Model

The protocol reference model used by the OptiX OSN equipment includes pre-processing of native services.
Figure 1 shows the PWE3 protocol reference model.
Figure 1 PWE3 protocol reference model

In the PWE3 protocol reference model, pre-processing involves the native service processing layer and forwarder layer, whereas protocol
processing involves the encapsulation layer and demultiplexer layer. The main functions of these layers are described as follows.

ive Service Processing

Native service processing refers to the processing of service payloads (such as QoS processing), before emulation of the native services
are received on an AC.

rwarder
A forwarder selects the PW for the service payloads received on an AC. The mapping relationships can be specified in the service
configuration, or implemented through dynamically configured information.

yload Encapsulation Layer

The encapsulation layer provides support for real-time processing and encapsulates the data transmitted on a PW into PWE3 packets in
standard format. The encapsulation layer also provides support for adding and extracting timing information, in addition to sequencing
packets.

W Demultiplexer Layer
The PW demultiplexer layer enables one or more PWs to be carried in a single PSN tunnel.

Parent topic: Basic Concepts

[Link] PWE3 Encapsulation Format

The specific PWE3 encapsulation format varies slightly according to the type of emulated service, but a generic encapsulation format is
also available.
Figure 1 shows the generic PWE3 encapsulation format. A PWE3 packet contains the MPLS label, control word, and payload.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 467/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 PWE3 encapsulation format

LS Label
The MPLS labels include tunnel labels and PW labels, which are used to identify tunnels and PWs respectively. The format of the tunnel
label is the same as that of the PW label. For details, see MPLS Label.

ntrol Word
The 4-byte control word is a header used to carry packet information over an MPLS PSN.
The control word is used to check the packet sequence, to fragment packets, and to restructure packets. As shown in Table 1, the specific
format of the control word is determined by the service type carried by PWE3 and the encapsulation mode adopted.

Table 1 Formats of the control word for various services in different encapsulation modes
Service Type Format of Control Word

TDM PWE3 SAToP

CESoPSN

ATM PWE3 ATM N-to-one cell encapsulation

ATM one-to-one cell encapsulation

ETH PWE3 Ethernet encapsulation

yload
Payload indicates the payload of a service in a PWE3 packet.

Parent topic: Basic Concepts

[Link] MS-PW
A PW that is carried in a PSN tunnel is called a single-segment PW (SS-PW). A PW is called a multi-segment PW (MS-PW) if it is
segmented and carried in multiple PSN tunnels.

-PW Network Reference Model

Figure 1 shows the MS-PW network reference model.
Figure 1 MS-PW network reference model

T-PE: terminating provider edge S-PE: switching provider edge

In the preceding network reference model, T-PE1 and T-PE2 provide PWE3 services to CE1 and CE2. The PWs are carried in two PSN
tunnels, and constitute the MS-PW.
The two tunnels (PSN tunnel 1 and PSN tunnel 2) that are used to carry PWs reside in different PSN domains. PSN tunnel 1 extends from
T-PE1 to S-PE1, and PSN tunnel 2 extends from S-PE1 to T-PE2. Labels of PW1 carried in PSN tunnel 1 and PW3 carried in PSN tunnel 2
are swapped at S-PE1. Similarly, labels of PW2 carried in PSN tunnel 1 and PW4 carried in PSN tunnel 2 are swapped at S-PE1.

-PW Application
Compared with the SS-PW, the MS-PW has the following characteristics:

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 468/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Reduces required tunnel resources.
Traverses different PSNs.
Provides segment-based protection for tunnels.

The following paragraphs and figures compare the application scenarios of the SS-PW and MS-PW to show that it is easier for the MS-
PW to implement segment-based protection for tunnels.
shows the SS-PW networking mode. The services between PE1 and PE2 are transmitted on PW1 carried in MPLS tunnel 1. Both
Figure 2
MPLS tunnel 1 and MPLS tunnel 2 are configured with 1:1 protection. Protection, however, fails to be provided if disconnection faults
occur on different sides of the operator device (called the P device).

Figure 2 SS-PW application

shows the MS-PW networking mode. The services between T-PE1 and T-PE2 are transmitted on PW1 carried in MPLS tunnel 1 and
Figure 3
PW2 carried on MPLS tunnel 2. The paired tunnels (MPLS tunnel 1 and MPLS tunnel 3; MPLS tunnel 2 and MPLS tunnel 4) are configured
with 1:1 protection. In this configuration, protection can still be provided even when disconnection faults occur on different sides of the
S-PE1 device.

Figure 3 MS-PW application

Parent topic: Basic Concepts

[Link] VCCV
As specified in IETF RFC5085, virtual circuit connectivity verification (VCCV) is an end-to-end fault detection and diagnostics mechanism
for a PW. The VCCV mechanism is, in its simplest description, a control channel between a PW's ingress and egress points over which
connectivity verification messages can be sent.
The VCCV messages are exchanged between PEs to verify connectivity of PWs. To ensure that VCCV messages and PW packets traverse
the same path, VCCV messages must be encapsulated in the same manner as PW packets and be transmitted in the same tunnel as the
PW packets.
VCCV messages have the following formats.

rmat of a VCCV Message Based on Control Word

Figure 1 Format of a VCCV message based on control word

The control word in a VCCV message is defined as follows:

Header: This field is always 0001.

Version: This field is always 0.
Reserved: This field is always 0.
Channel type: The Channel Type is set to 0x0021 for IPv4 payloads and 0x0057 for IPv6 payloads.

The payloads are MPLS echo packets encapsulated in IPv4 UDP.

rmat of a VCCV Message Based on OAM Alert Label

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 469/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 2 Format of a VCCV message based on OAM alert label

The main fields in a VCCV message based on OAM alert label are defined as follows:

Label: The value of this field is 1 and indicates an OAM packet.

Time to Live (TTL): The value of this field is set to 1, to ensure that the MPLS OAM packet is not transmitted beyond the sink end
of the monitored LSP.

The payloads are MPLS echo packets encapsulated in IPv4 UDP.

The principle of the VCCV for a PW, refer to PW Ping.

Parent topic: Basic Concepts

2.2.3 Specifications
This section describes the capacity of the OptiX OSN equipment for supporting PWE3.
Table 1 provides specifications associated with PWE3.

Table 1 Specifications associated with PWE3

Item Specifications

Maximum number of PWs OptiX OSN 1500: 512

OptiX OSN 3500/7500/7500 II: 16K

Bearer type Tunnel

NOTE:
One tunnel can bear a maximum of 1 K PWs

PW setup mode Static PW

PW service type TDM PWE3
ETH PWE3
ATM PWE3

MS-PW Supported

NOTE:
For details, see Specifications.

VCCV Control Channel Type CW

Alert Label

VCCV Verification Mode Ping

PW APS Supported

NOTE:
For details, see Specifications.

PW OAM (Y.1711) Supported

NOTE:
For details, see Specifications.

MPLS-TP PW OAM Supported

NOTE:
For details, see Specifications.

Parent topic: PWE3 Basics

2.3 ETH PWE3

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 470/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
This chapter describes the ETH PWE3 feature.

Introduction
This section provides the definition of ETH PWE3 and describes its purpose.

Basic Concepts
This section describes the basic concepts associated with ETH PWE3.

Specifications
This section describes the capacity of the OptiX OSN equipment for supporting ETH PWE3.

Parent topic: Packet Features

2.3.1 Introduction
This section provides the definition of ETH PWE3 and describes its purpose.

finition
The ETH PWE3 technology emulates the basic behaviors and characteristics of Ethernet services on a packet switched network (PSN) by
using the PWE3 mechanism, so that the Ethernet services can be transmitted on a PSN.

rpose
ETH PWE3 aims to transmit Ethernet services over a PSN. Figure 1 shows the typical application of ETH PWE3.
Figure 1 Typical application of ETH PWE3

Parent topic: ETH PWE3

2.3.2 Basic Concepts

This section describes the basic concepts associated with ETH PWE3.

Format of an ETH PWE3 Packet

After an Ethernet frame is encapsulated into a PWE3 packet, the PWE3 packet contains the MPLS label, control word (optional), and
payload.

Service-Delimiting Tag and PW Encapsulation Mode

The service-delimiting tag and PW encapsulation mode are used to indicate how the outer layer of the C-/S-VLAN tag of an
Ethernet packet is processed when the Ethernet packet is forwarded.

QoS of ETH PWE3

After being encapsulated into ETH PWE3 packets, Ethernet services still retain the original PHB service levels.

E-Line Services Carried on PWs

For the E-Line service category, a PW can be used to carry Ethernet services on an Ethernet port. In this scenario, this type of
Ethernet service is called the E-Line service carried on PWs.

E-LAN Services Carried on PWs

PW-carried E-LAN services connect VSIs at different locations using VLAN-based logical channels. The connected VSIs function as if
they were in the same LAN.

Parent topic: ETH PWE3

[Link] Format of an ETH PWE3 Packet

After an Ethernet frame is encapsulated into a PWE3 packet, the PWE3 packet contains the MPLS label, control word (optional), and
payload.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 471/502

 2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
cket Format
Figure 1 shows the format of an ETH PWE3 packet, consisting of the MPLS label, control word, and payload.

Figure 1 Format of an ETH PWE3 packet

LS Label
MPLS labels include tunnel labels and PW labels, which are used to identify tunnels and PWs respectively. The format of the tunnel label
is the same as that of the PW label. For details, see MPLS Label.

ntrol Word
The 4-byte control word within an ETH PWE3 packet is optional and contains the following fields:

0000: This field indicates the first 4 bits and they must be set to 0.
Reserved: This field has a length of 12 bits and is reserved.
Sequence number: This field has a length of 16 bits and indicates the delivery sequence number of an ETH PWE3 packet. Its initial
value is random, and is increased by one integer with each ETH PWE3 packet sent.

yload
The payload refers to the Ethernet frame that is encapsulated into an ETH PWE3 packet. One ETH PWE3 packet can encapsulate only one
Ethernet frame. During the encapsulation, the preset PW Encapsulation Mode is adopted.

Parent topic: Basic Concepts

[Link] Service-Delimiting Tag and PW Encapsulation Mode

The service-delimiting tag and PW encapsulation mode are used to indicate how the outer layer of the C-/S-VLAN tag of an Ethernet
packet is processed when the Ethernet packet is forwarded.

rvice-Delimiting Tag
The service-delimiting tag is used to indicate the user access mode, that is, the encapsulation mode when the Ethernet service is received
by the AC. Service-delimiting tags are classified into two categories:

User
If the service-delimiting tag is User, the user access mode is Ethernet. In this case, the Ethernet frame that the CE sends to the PE
does not carry a provider-tag (P-Tag). If the frame header contains the VLAN tag, the VLAN tag is the inner VLAN tag of the user
packet, which is called user-tag (U-Tag). The PE does not identify or process a U-Tag.
Service
If the service-delimiting tag is Service, the user access mode is VLAN. In this case, the Ethernet frame that the CE sends to the PE
carries a provider-tag (P-Tag), which is provided for the carrier to differentiate users. The PE identifies and processes a P-Tag
based on the PW encapsulation mode.

NOTE:
The structure of a P-Tag is the same as that of an S-Tag.

W Encapsulation Mode
The PW encapsulation mode is used to indicate whether a P-Tag is added when an Ethernet frame is encapsulated into an ETH PWE3
packet. The PW encapsulation modes are classified into two categories:

Ethernet mode
In this mode:
When the service-delimiting tag is User, in the direction that an Ethernet frame enters the PW, the PE directly
encapsulates the Ethernet frame into a PWE3 packet after receiving it from the AC; in the direction that an Ethernet frame
leaves the PW, the PE transmits the decapsulated Ethernet frame to the AC.
When the service-delimiting tag is Service, in the direction that an Ethernet frame enters the PW, the PE strips the outer
tag (P-Tag) of the Ethernet frame and encapsulates it into a PWE3 packet after receiving it from the AC; in the direction

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 472/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
that an Ethernet frame leaves the PW, the PE adds a P-Tag to the decapsulated Ethernet frame before transmitting it to
the AC.

Ethernet Tagged mode

In this mode:
When the service-delimiting tag is User, in the direction that an Ethernet frame enters the PW, the PE adds a P-Tag and
encapsulates the Ethernet frame into a PWE3 packet after receiving it from the AC (the added P-Tag is called request
VLAN); in the direction that an Ethernet frame leaves the PW, the PE strips a P-Tag off the decapsulated Ethernet frame
before transmitting it to the AC.
When the service-delimiting tag is Service, in the direction that an Ethernet frame enters the PW, the PE swaps P-Tag for
U-Tag, and encapsulates the Ethernet frame into a PWE3 packet after receiving it from the AC (the added P-Tag is called
request VLAN); in the direction that an Ethernet frame leaves the PW, the PE decapsulates the Ethernet frame, and swaps
U-Tag for P-Tag before transmitting it to the AC.

NOTE:
For the OptiX OSN equipment, you can set a request VLAN value for each PW whose encapsulation mode is the Ethernet tagged mode, but the T-PID value
in the request VLAN must be unique on the NE.

pical Application
Figure 1 shows a NodeB backhaul network.

The RNC can process S-VLAN tags. It allocates an S-VLAN ID to each NodeB to separate the services of a NodeB from those of
another.
The NodeB can process C-VLAN tags only. It allocates an C-VLAN ID to each type of service on a NodeB.

Therefore, the request VLAN function must be enabled to add S-VLAN IDs to isolate the services on different NodeBs.
Set the request VLAN values on NE1 and NE2 as follows:

If the PW1 encapsulation mode of NE1 is the ethernet tagged mode, set the request VLAN to 100; if PW2 encapsulation mode of
NE1 is the ethernet tagged mode, set the request VLAN to 200.
The PW1 and PW2 encapsulation mode of NE2 is the ethernet mode.

NE1 and NE2 process the services as follows:

In the service uplink direction, to transmit the service of NodeB 1 from NE1 to PW1, NE1 adds the request VLAN (S-VLAN) 100 to
the service because the PW encapsulation mode is the ethernet tagged mode; to transmit the service from NE2 to the RNC, NE2
decapsulates the service packet and transparently transmits the S-VLAN tag (100). Likewise, the service of NodeB 2 carries an S-
VLAN tag (200) when transmitted from NE2 to the RNC. In this case, the services at the same port (PORT1) are isolated.
In the service downlink direction, to transmit the service of the RNC from NE2 to PW1, NE2 directly adds the S-VLAN tag to the
service because the PW encapsulation mode is the ethernet mode; to transmit the service from NE1 to NodeB 1, NE1
decapsulates the service packet and strips the S-VLAN tag. Likewise, the service of the NodeB 2 does not carry an S-VLAN tag
when transmitted from NE1 to NodeB 2.

Figure 1 Typical application of the PW encapsulation mode

Parent topic: Basic Concepts

[Link] QoS of ETH PWE3

After being encapsulated into ETH PWE3 packets, Ethernet services still retain the original PHB service levels.

The OptiX OSN equipment performs QoS for ETH PWE3 packets as follows.

Ingress node
The PHB service class of an ETH PWE3 packet can be manually specified. When a packet leaves a node, the EXP value of the
packet is determined according to the mapping (between PHB service classes and EXP values) defined by the DiffServ domain of
the egress port.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 473/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Transit node
When a packet enters a transit node, the PHB service class of the packet is determined according to the mapping (between EXP
values and PHB service classes) defined by the DiffServ domain of the ingress port. When a packet leaves a transit node, the EXP
value of the packet is determined according to the mapping (between PHB service classes and EXP values) defined by the DiffServ
domain of the egress port.

NOTE:
When an MPLS tunnel uses a manually specified EXP value, the EXP value of ETH PWE3 packets is fixed, not affected by a DiffServ domain.

Parent topic: Basic Concepts

[Link] E-Line Services Carried on PWs

For the E-Line service category, a PW can be used to carry Ethernet services on an Ethernet port. In this scenario, this type of Ethernet
service is called the E-Line service carried on PWs.

rvice Mode
Table 1 defines the model of the E-Line services carried on PWs.

Table 1 Model of the E-Line services carried on PWs

Service Model Service Flow Service Direction Port Mode Encapsulation Mode of Service Description
Port

Model 1 PORT+CVLAN (source) UNI-NNI Layer 2 (source) IEEE 802.1q (source) A UNI port processes
PW (sink) Layer 3 (sink) - (sink) the packets carrying a
specific C-VLAN ID
based on its tag
attribute, and then
sends the packets to
the NNI side for
transmission on PWs.
Model 2 PORT+SVLAN (source) UNI-NNI Layer 2 (source) QinQ (source) A UNI port processes
PW (sink) Layer 3 (sink) - (sink) the packets carrying a
specific S-VLAN ID
based on its QinQ
attribute, and then
sends the packets to
the NNI side for
transmission on PWs.
Model 3 PORT (source) UNI-NNI Layer 2 (source) Null, 802.1Q or QinQ A UNI port processes
PW (sink) Layer 3 (sink) (source) the packets carrying a
- (sink) specific C-VLAN ID
based on its tag
attribute or QinQ type
domain (The packets
are not processed at a
null port), and then
sends the packets to
the NNI side for
transmission on PWs.

pical Application
shows the typical application of service model 1. Service 1 is present between the NodeB 1 and the RNC, and service 2 is present
Figure 1
between the NodeB 2 and the RNC. The two services have different VLAN IDs and need to be transmitted over the PSN.
On the UNI side of NE1, service 1 is transmitted to port 1 and service 2 is transmitted to port 2. On the NNI side of NE1, service 1 and
service 2 are transmitted on different PWs. In this manner, the two services are separately transmitted.
NE2 processes the two services in the same manner as NE1.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 474/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Typical application of service model 1

shows the typical application of service model 2. Service 1 (QinQ service) is present between NodeB 1 and the RNC, and service 2
Figure 2
(QinQ service) is present between the NodeB 2 and the RNC. The two services have different S-VLAN IDs and need to be transmitted over
the PSN.
On the UNI side of NE1, service 1 is transmitted to port 1 and service 2 is transmitted to port 2. On the NNI side of NE1, service 1 and
service 2 are transmitted on different PWs. In this manner, the two services are separately transmitted.
NE2 processes the two services in the same manner as NE1.

Figure 2 Typical application of service model 2

shows the typical application of service model 3. Service 1 (Ethernet service) is present between the NodeB 1 and the RNC, and
Figure 3
service 2 (Ethernet service) is present between the NodeB 2 and the RNC. Service 1 carries various C-VLAN IDs, and service 2 carries
various S-VLAN IDs. The two services need to be transmitted over the PSN.
On the UNI side of NE1, service 1 is transmitted to port 1 and service 2 is transmitted to port 2. On the NNI side of NE1, service 1 and
service 2 are transmitted on different PWs. In this manner, the two services are separately transmitted.
NE2 processes the two services in the same manner as NE1.
Figure 3 Typical application of service model 3

Parent topic: Basic Concepts

[Link] E-LAN Services Carried on PWs

PW-carried E-LAN services connect VSIs at different locations using VLAN-based logical channels. The connected VSIs function as if they
were in the same LAN.

rvice Model
Table 1 shows the PW-carried E-LAN service models.

Table 1 PW-carried E-LAN service models

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 475/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Service Model Tag Attribute Learning Mode Logical UNI Port Type Encapsulation Mode at a Logical NNI Port Type
UNI Port

Model 1 Tag-Transparent SVL PORT Null PW

Model 2 C-Aware SVL/IVL PORT+VLAN list 802.1Q PW

PORTa

Model 3 S-Aware SVL/IVL PORT+SVLAN list QinQ PW

PORTa

NOTE:
a: VLAN filtering tables need to be configured.

pical application of service model 1

shows a typical application of service model 1. NE2 and NE3 receive services A from users and send them to the convergence node
Figure 1
NE1. On NE1, no service separation is required and a Tag-Transparent VSI is created to connect VSIs at other locations using PWs.

Figure 1 Typical application of service model 1

pical application of service model 2

shows the typical application of service model 2. NE2 and NE3 receive services G and H from users and send them to the
Figure 2
convergence node NE1. Services G and H carry different VLAN IDs, so two C-Aware VSIs need to be created on NE1. In this manner,
services G and H are separated, and packets that do not carry the VLAN ID of service G or H cannot be forwarded using the VSIs.
Figure 2 Typical application of service model 2

pical application of service model 3

shows the typical application of service model 3. NE2 and NE3 receive services G and H from users and send them to the PSN.
Figure 3
Services G and H carry the same C-VLAN tag, so E-Line services need to be configured on NE2 and NE3. The service-delimiting tag of the
PWs that carry the E-Line services must be User, and the encapsulation mode of the PWs must be Tag. After the configuration, NE2 and
NE3 add different S-VLAN tags to services G and H. Because the services arriving at NE1 carry S-VLAN tags, a S-Aware VSI needs to be
configured on NE1 to forward the services.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 476/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 3 Typical application of service model 3

Parent topic: Basic Concepts

2.3.3 Specifications
This section describes the capacity of the OptiX OSN equipment for supporting ETH PWE3.
Table 1 provides specifications associated with ETH PWE3.

Table 1 Specifications associated with ETH PWE3

Item Specifications

Service type E-Line service

E-LAN service
E-Aggr service

NOTE:
The following equipments and boards support E-Aggr service:
OptiX OSN 1500
The N1PEG16, N1PEX1, and the corresponding interface boards of the OptiX OSN 3500.

PW type Ethernet
Ethernet Tagged Mode

MS-PW Supported

NOTE:
For details, see Specifications.

VCCV Supported
PW APS Supported

NOTE:
For details, see Specifications.

PW OAM (Y.1711) Supported

NOTE:
For details, see Specifications.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 477/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Item Specifications

MPLS-TP PW OAM Supported

NOTE:
For details, see Specifications.

Parent topic: ETH PWE3

2.4 TDM PWE3

This chapter describes the TDM PWE3 feature.

Introduction
This section provides the definition of TDM PWE3 and describes its purpose.

Basic Concepts
This section describes the basic concepts associated with TDM PWE3.

Specifications
This section describes the capacity of the OptiX OSN equipment for supporting TDM PWE3.

Parent topic: Packet Features

2.4.1 Introduction
This section provides the definition of TDM PWE3 and describes its purpose.

finition
The TDM PWE3 technology emulates the basic behaviors and characteristics of TDM services on a packet switched network (PSN) by
using the PWE3 mechanism, so that the emulated TDM services can be transmitted on a PSN.
TDM PWE3 services are also called CES services carried by PWE3. In this document, all the CES services are carried by PWE3.

rpose
TDM PWE3 aims to transmit TDM services over a PSN. Especially, the CESoPSN mode can compress idle timeslots to reduce the required
transmission bandwidth.
shows the typical application of TDM PWE3. The native TDM services between the BTS and the BSC are transmitted over a PSN. PE1
Figure 1
emulates the native TDM services from the BTS into CES services by using the CESoPSN technology. Then, the CES services are
transmitted to PE2 over the PSN. Finally, PE2 restores the CES services to the native TDM services for transmission to the BSC.

Figure 1 Typical application of TDM PWE3 (CESoPSN mode)

Aided by the TDM PWE3 technology, conventional TDM networks can be connected by a PSN. In this manner, PWE3 protects customer
investment in TDM networks and constructs all-IP network architecture.

Parent topic: TDM PWE3

2.4.2 Basic Concepts

This section describes the basic concepts associated with TDM PWE3.

E1 Frame Format
An E1 frame consists of 32 timeslots. E1 frames are available in different formats when classified based on the usage of timeslot 0
and timeslot 16.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 478/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
SAToP
Structure-Agnostic Time division multiplexing over Packet (SAToP) is a method for encapsulating TDM serial bit streams as pseudo
wires.

CESoPSN
Circuit Emulation Service over Packet Switched Network (CESoPSN) is a method for encapsulating TDM frames as pseudo wires.

Data Jitter Buffer

After CES packets are transmitted over a PSN, the intervals between packet arrivals may be different and the packets may be
misordered. To ensure that the TDM bit streams can be reconstructed on the egress PE, a jitter buffer is required to smooth the
intervals between packet arrivals and to reorder the misordered packets.

CES Alarm Transmission

The OptiX OSN equipment uses the L/M and R fields in the control word to transparently transmit alarms.

Clock Recovery Schemes of TDM PWE3

When clocks need to be transmitted with CES services, you can adopt CES retiming or CES adaptive clock recovery (ACR) as
required.

QoS of TDM PWE3

The QoS of TDM services features low delay, low jitter, and fixed bandwidth. Therefore, a high enough per-hop behavior (PHB) level
needs to be assigned to CES packets.

Parent topic: TDM PWE3

[Link] E1 Frame Format

An E1 frame consists of 32 timeslots. E1 frames are available in different formats when classified based on the usage of timeslot 0 and
timeslot 16.

me Formats Based on the Usage of Timeslot 0

Figure 1 shows the formats of timeslot 0 in E1 frames.
Figure 1 Formats of timeslot 0 in E1 frames

As shown in Figure 1, the format of timeslot 0 in an odd-numbered frame is different from that in an even-numbered frame. The signal
contained in timeslot 0 of an even-numbered frame is called frame alignment signal (FAS); the signal contained in timeslot 0 of an odd-
numbered frame is called not frame alignment signal (NFAS), which contains the A-bit indicating remote alarms and spare bits Sa4 to
Sa8. The FAS and NFAS each contain an X-bit. Based on the function of the X-bit, E1 frames are classified into generic dual-frames and
cyclic redundancy check 4 (CRC-4) multiframes.

When the E1 frame is a generic dual-frame, the X-bit functions as the Si-bit.
When the E1 frame is a CRC-4 multiframe, the X-bit is used to transmit CRC-4 multiframe check signal, CRC-4 check error bits,
and multiframe alignment signal (MFAS).

me Formats Based on the Usage of Timeslot 16

E1 frames can be classified into PCM30 frames and PCM31 frames, depending on whether timeslot 16 transmits voice or signaling.

A PCM30 frame uses channel associated signaling (CAS). In this mode, timeslot 0, as a synchronous timeslot, cannot carry voice;
timeslot 16, to carry CAS, cannot carry voice either. As a result, one E1 frame can carry only 30 voice signals, and it is therefore
called a PCM30 frame.
A PCM31 frame uses common channel signaling (CCS). A multiframe in CCS mode does not need to transmit CAS. In this mode,
except for timeslot 0 that carries synchronous signals, one E1 frame can carry 31 voice signals and it is therefore called a PCM31
frame.

The two classification methods focus on two attributes of E1 frames, and they can be combined. Specifically, there are four E1 frame
formats in actual application:

PCM30CRC (PCM30 + CRC-4 multiframe)

PCM30NOCRC (PCM30 + generic dual-frame)
PCM31CRC (PCM31 + CRC-4 multiframe)
PCM31NOCRC (PCM31 + generic dual-frame)

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 479/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Parent topic: Basic Concepts

[Link] SAToP
Structure-Agnostic Time division multiplexing over Packet (SAToP) is a method for encapsulating TDM serial bit streams as pseudo wires.
SAToP provides the emulation and transport functions for unchannelized TDM services. That is, it addresses only structure-agnostic
transport. Therefore, SAToP can meet the transport needs when a user needs services based on E1s.
SAToP segments and encapsulates TDM services as serial bit streams, and then transmits the bit streams in PW tunnels. Although it
disregards the TDM frame structure, it supports transmission of synchronous information.
Figure 1 shows the encapsulation format of a SAToP packet.
Figure 1 Encapsulation format of a SAToP packet

A SAToP packet contains the MPLS label, control word, RTP header, and TDM data.

LS Label
MPLS labels include tunnel labels and PW labels, which are used to identify tunnels and PWs respectively. The format of the tunnel label
is the same as that of the PW label. For details, see MPLS Label.

ntrol Word
The control word of a SAToP packet is 4-byte long and contains the following fields:

0000: The 4 bits are generally set to all 0s. They are used to indicate the start of an Associated Channel Header (ACH). The ACH is
needed if the state of the SAToP PW is monitored using virtual circuit connectivity verification (VCCV).
L: This bit indicates whether the TDM data carried in a packet is valid. If set to 1, it indicates that the TDM data is omitted in order
to conserve bandwidth.
R: This bit indicates whether its local CE-side interworking function (IWF) is in the packet loss state. If set to 0, it indicates that a
preconfigured number of consecutive packets are received.
RSV: The 2 bits are reserved.
FRG: The 2 bits indicate fragmentation with the following values:
00: indicates that the entire TDM data is encapsulated in the packet.
01: indicates that the first fragmentation of the TDM data is encapsulated in the packet.
10: indicates that the last fragmentation of the TDM data is encapsulated in the packet.
11: indicates that the middle fragmentation of the TDM data is encapsulated in the packet.

LEN: The 6 bits indicate the length of the SAToP packet (including the SAToP header and TDM data). The minimum length of a
transport unit on a PSN is 64 bytes. When a packet is shorter than 64 bytes, LEN indicates the actual length of the packet,
representing padding bits. If a packet is longer than 64 bytes, LEN is set to all 0s.

NOTE:
If LEN is 0, the packet length is supposed to be equal to the default value. If the actual packet length is different from the default value, the packet is
considered as a malformed packet.

Sequence number: The 16 bits indicate the transmission sequence number of a SAToP packet. Its initial value is random, and is
incremented by one with each SAToP data packet sent. If the sequence number of a packet reaches the maximum (65535), the
sequence number of its next packet will start with the minimum. The sequence number can be in two modes:
Huawei mode: applies to the scenario where only Huawei equipment composes a network. In this mode, the minimum
sequence number is 0.
Standard mode: applies to the scenario where Huawei equipment networks with third-party equipment. In this mode, the
minimum sequence number is 1.

P Header
The Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) header is used to carry timestamp information to the remote end so that the packet clock can be
restored. The RTP header is 12-byte long. The 32-bit timestamp field in the RTP header represents the timestamp information.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 480/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 2 shows the RTP header format.

Figure 2 RTP header format

Set Version (V) to 2. Set Padding (P), Header Extension (X), CSRC Count (CC), and Marker (M) to 0.
Payload type (PT):

PT values are allocated to each direction of a PW, and the PT values are in a dynamic value range. The receive and transmit
directions of a PW can share a PT value. Different PWs can share a PT value.
The PE on the upstream PW puts the allocated PT value in the PT field of the RTP header.
The PE on the upstream PW can detect exceptional packets according to the received PT value.

The sequence number must be the same as the serial number in the SAToP control word.
The timestamp is used for carrying the time information in the network. Two timestamp generation modes are as follows:

Absolute mode: The TDM circuit can restore clock information and upstream PE sets the timestamp according to the clock. The
timestamp is closely related to the serial number. All equipment supporting CESoPSN must support the absolute mode.
Differential mode: The PE on the PW receives high-quality synchronization clock source, which is used to generate the timestamp.
The timestamp indicates the difference between the common clock source and the TDM circuit clock. The differential mode is
optional.

The synchronization source identifiers are used for detecting errored connections.

NOTE:
On the OptiX OSN equipment, you can set whether the RTP header is encapsulated into the SAToP packet.

M Data
"TDM data" indicates the TDM data payload in the form of serial bit stream. When a PW packet is shorter than 64 bytes, fixed bits are
padded to meet Ethernet transmission requirements.
The amount of E1 bit streams that are encapsulated in a PW packet is determined by Packet Loading Time. Packet Loading Time
indicates the duration for a PW packet to load TDM bit streams. Regarding that the number of loaded TDM bit streams is equal to Packet
Loading Time multiplied by the E1 rate, Packet Loading Time limits the number of loaded TDM bit streams. For instance, when the
packet loading time is 1 ms, each PW packet can load 2048-bit-long E1 payloads.

Parent topic: Basic Concepts

[Link] CESoPSN
Circuit Emulation Service over Packet Switched Network (CESoPSN) is a method for encapsulating TDM frames as pseudo wires.
CESoPSN provides the emulation and transport functions for channelized TDM services. That is, it identifies the TDM frame format and
signaling in the frame. Therefore, CESoPSN can meet the transport needs when a user needs services based on timeslots.
With the frame format of the TDM service identified, CESoPSN does not transmit idle timeslot channels; instead, CESoPSN extracts only
the usable timeslots from the service flow and then encapsulates these timeslots as PW packets for transmission.

NOTE:
CESoPSN does not support the automatic detection of idle timeslots. Therefore, idle timeslots must be manually specified.

Figure 1 shows the encapsulation format of a CESoPSN packet.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 481/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Encapsulation format of a CESoPSN packet

A CESoPSN packet contains the MPLS label, control word, RTP header, and TDM data.

LS Label
MPLS labels include tunnel labels and PW labels, which are used to identify tunnels and PWs respectively. The format of the tunnel label
is the same as that of the PW label. For details, see MPLS Label.

ntrol Word
The control word of a CESoPSN packet is 4-byte long and contains the following fields:

0000: The 4 bits are generally set to all 0s. They are used to indicate the start of an Associated Channel Header (ACH). The ACH is
needed if the state of the CESoPSN PW is monitored using virtual circuit connectivity verification (VCCV).
L: This bit indicates whether the TDM data carried in a packet is valid. If set to 1, it indicates that the TDM data is omitted in order
to conserve bandwidth.
R: This bit indicates whether its local CE-side interworking function (IWF) is in the packet loss state. If set to 0, it indicates that a
preconfigured number of consecutive packets are received.
M: The 2 bits are used for alarm transparent transmission, indicating that the CE end or AC side of the uplink PE detects a critical
alarm.
RSV: The 2 bits are reserved.
FRG: The 2 bits indicate fragmentation with the following values:
00: indicates that the entire TDM data is encapsulated in the packet.
01: indicates that the first fragmentation of the TDM data is encapsulated in the packet.
10: indicates that the last fragmentation of the TDM data is encapsulated in the packet.
11: indicates that the middle fragmentation of the TDM data is encapsulated in the packet.

LEN: The 6 bits indicate the length of the CESoPSN packet (including the CESoPSN header and TDM data). The minimum length
of a transport unit on a PSN is 64 bytes. When a packet is shorter than 64 bytes, LEN indicates the actual length of the packet,
representing padding bits. If a packet is longer than 64 bytes, LEN is set to all 0s.
Sequence number: The 16 bits indicate the transmission sequence number of a CESoPSN packet. Its initial value is random, and is
incremented by one with each CESoPSN data packet sent. If the sequence number of a packet reaches the maximum (65535), the
sequence number of its next packet will start with the minimum. The sequence number can be in Huawei mode or standard
mode. In Huawei mode, the minimum sequence number is 0; in standard mode, the minimum sequence number is 1.

P Header
The Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP) header is used to carry timestamp information to the remote end so that the packet clock can be
restored. The RTP header is 12-byte long. The 32-bit timestamp field in the RTP header represents the timestamp information.
Figure 2 shows the RTP header format.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 482/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 2 RTP header format

Set Version (V) to 2. Set Padding (P), Header Extension (X), CSRC Count (CC), and Marker (M) to 0.
Payload type (PT):

PT values are allocated to each direction of a PW, and the PT values are in a dynamic value range. The receive and transmit
directions of a PW can share a PT value. Different PWs can share a PT value.
The PE on the upstream PW puts the allocated PT value in the PT field of the RTP header.
The PE on the upstream PW can detect abnormal packets according to the received PT value.

The sequence number must be the same as the serial number in the CESoPSN control word.
The timestamp is used for carrying the time information in the network. Two timestamp generation modes are as follows:

Absolute mode: The TDM circuit can restore clock information and upstream PE sets the timestamp according to the clock. The
timestamp is closely related to the serial number. All equipment supporting CESoPSN must support the absolute mode.
Differential mode: The PE on the PW receives high-quality synchronization clock source, which is used to generate the timestamp.
The timestamp indicates the difference between the common clock source and the TDM circuit clock. The differential mode is
optional.

The synchronization source identifiers are used for detecting errored connections.

NOTE:
On the OptiX OSN equipment, you can set whether the RTP header is encapsulated into the CESoPSN packet.

M Data
"TDM data" indicates TDM data payloads. When a PW packet is shorter than 64 bytes, fixed bits are padded to meet Ethernet
transmission requirements.
"Timeslot" indicates the timeslot in TDM frames. Each timeslot uses 8 bits. All the timeslots are encapsulated as TDM data payloads
(excluding the CRC bit). The number of encapsulated frames and the number of timeslots in each frame can be set as required.

NOTE:
On the OptiX OSN equipment: CESoPSN does not encapsulate timeslot 0 of E1 into the payload, and the remote PE restructure the timeslots.

The amount of E1 frames that are encapsulated in a PW packet is determined by Packet Loading Time. Packet Loading Time indicates
the duration for a PW packet to load TDM frames, and therefore limits the number of loaded TDM frames. The period of a TDM frame is
125 μs. As a result, if the packet loading time is 1 ms, each PW packet loads eight TDM frames.

Parent topic: Basic Concepts

[Link] Data Jitter Buffer

After CES packets are transmitted over a PSN, the intervals between packet arrivals may be different and the packets may be misordered.
To ensure that the TDM bit streams can be reconstructed on the egress PE, a jitter buffer is required to smooth the intervals between
packet arrivals and to reorder the misordered packets.
Figure 1 shows the working principle of the data jitter buffer.

Figure 1 Working principle of the data jitter buffer

The data jitter buffer works as follows:

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 483/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
The data jitter buffer enables the packets to enter the queue in the order that the packets arrive at the interface. At the same
time, data jitter buffer enables the packets to leave the queue in the order that the packets enter the queue.
When the packets are received with consecutive sequence numbers, the write pointer writes data into the queue, beginning at the
tail of the queue; the read pointer reads data from the queue, beginning at the head of the queue.
When the received packets are misordered, the read pointer automatically accommodates to reading packets in the correct order.

The size of the data jitter buffer can be set as required. A low-capacity jitter buffer easily overflows, and as a result data may be lost at
different degrees; a high-capacity jitter buffer can absorb jitters resulting from larger packet transmission intervals on the network, but a
large delay may be generated when the TDM bit streams are reconstructed. Therefore, during service deployment, you need to properly
configure the data jitter buffer based on the actual network delay and jitter conditions.

Parent topic: Basic Concepts

[Link] CES Alarm Transmission

The OptiX OSN equipment uses the L/M and R fields in the control word to transparently transmit alarms.
CES alarm transparent transmission involves transmitting local CES alarms to the remote end, and inserting corresponding alarms to
notify the remote end of faults in the local end. Depending on the position where the alarm is generated, CES alarm transparent
transmission can be between AC sides, and from the NNI side to the AC side.

S Alarm Transparent Transmission Between AC Sides

There are two scenarios where CES alarms are transparently transmitted between AC sides.

The fault information on the AC link or port is transmitted through the PSN as follows:

Figure 1 CES alarm transparent transmission between AC sides (1)

If PE1 detects a link fault or an E1 port fault on the AC1 side, PE1 returns RDI to upstream and informs PE2 of the fault through
the L field of control word. Upon receiving the control word, PE2 reports the CESPW_OPPOSITE_ACFAULT alarm and inserts AIS to
the AC2 side.
The service alarms on the AC side are transparently transmitted through the PSN as follows:

Figure 2 CES alarm transparent transmission between AC sides (2)

If the RNC detects a link fault or an E1 port fault on the AC2 side, the RNC returns RDI to PE2; PE2 reports the RAI alarm and
informs PE1 of the fault through the L/M field of control word. Upon receiving the control word, PE1 reports the RAI alarm and
returns RDI to AC1.

NOTE:
The SAToP encapsulation mode does not support the M field, and therefore cannot transparently transmit the RAI alarm.

S Alarm Transparent Transmission from the NNI Side to the AC Side

Figure 3 shows the CES alarm transparent transmission from the NNI side to the AC side.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 484/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 3 CES alarm transparent transmission from the NNI side to the AC side

When detecting that packet loss ratio continuously beyond the preset threshold, PE2 inserts the AIS alarm into AC2, and uses the R field
in the control word to transmit the information to PE1. Then, PE1 reports the RAI alarm based on the R field.

Parent topic: Basic Concepts

[Link] Clock Recovery Schemes of TDM PWE3

When clocks need to be transmitted with CES services, you can adopt CES retiming or CES adaptive clock recovery (ACR) as required.

S Retiming
CES retiming is an approach to reduce signal jitter after CES services traverse a transmission network. It combines the timing reference
signal and CES service signal for transmission. Therefore, the transmitted CES service signal carries the timing information that is
synchronized with the timing reference signal. CES retiming is applicable when the following conditions are met:

All the clocks on the PSN are synchronous.

All the clocks on the PSN are synchronized with the clock of the incoming service.

shows a clock solution wherein the BSC transmits synchronization information to the BTS over the PSN with CES retiming enabled.
Figure 1
In this solution:

PE1 receives an E1 service from the BSC, and extracts the clock from the E1 service (the E1 service is emulated into the CES service
after entering the PSN). The extracted clock functions as the primary reference clock, and is traced by the other NEs on the PSN.
In this manner, all the clocks on the PSN are synchronized with the clock of the BSC.
CES retiming is enabled on PE2 so that the system clock of PE2 can be carried in the E1 service sent to the BTS (the CES service is
restored to the E1 service after leaving the PSN). The clock of PE2 is synchronized with that of the BSC, so the BTS can extract the
clock of the BSC from the received E1 service.

Figure 1 Principles of CES retiming

CES retiming is implemented as follows: The E1 bit streams restored from the CES service are written into a First In, First Out (FIFO) queue,
and then are read out from the FIFO queue by using the retiming clock. The output signal contains the retiming clock; therefore, it is
synchronized with the primary reference clock, with the jitter and wander in the original E1 service absorbed by the data jitter buffer.

S ACR
CES ACR is a technology wherein the CES service is used to restore the clock of the source end in an adaptive manner. The sink end
recovers the clock based on the packet received on its NNI side.

All the clocks on the PSN are not synchronous.

All the clocks on the PSN are synchronous, but the clocks on the PSN are not synchronized with the clock of the incoming service.

Parent topic: Basic Concepts

[Link] QoS of TDM PWE3

The QoS of TDM services features low delay, low jitter, and fixed bandwidth. Therefore, a high enough per-hop behavior (PHB) level
needs to be assigned to CES packets.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 485/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
The OptiX OSN equipment performs QoS for TDM PWE3 packets as follows.

Ingress node
The PHB service class of a TDM PWE3 packet can be manually specified (the PHB service class is set to EF, by default). When a
packet leaves an ingress node, the EXP value of the packet is determined according to the mapping (between PHB service classes
and EXP values) defined by the DiffServ domain of the egress port.
Transit node
When a packet enters a transit node, the PHB service class of the packet is determined according to the mapping (between EXP
values and PHB service classes) defined by the DiffServ domain of the ingress port. When a packet leaves a transit node, the EXP
value of the packet is determined according to the mapping (between PHB service classes and EXP values) defined by the DiffServ
domain of the egress port.

NOTE:
When an MPLS tunnel uses a manually specified EXP value, the EXP value of TDM PWE3 packets is fixed, not affected by a DiffServ domain.

In addition, the OptiX OSN equipment supports the CES CAC function. If bandwidth resources are insufficient when CES services are
created, the services cannot be created and the system will display a prompt message.

NOTE:
To enable the CES CAC function, set the bandwidth of tunnel carrying CES services, and PW bandwidth of other PWE3 services carried on the tunnel.

Parent topic: Basic Concepts

2.4.3 Specifications
This section describes the capacity of the OptiX OSN equipment for supporting TDM PWE3.
Table 1 provides the specifications associated with TDM PWE3.

Table 1 Specifications associated with TDM PWE3

Item Specifications

Maximum number of private line CES services supported OptiX OSN 1500: 64
by the equipment OptiX OSN 3500: 4032
OptiX OSN 7500: 2016
OptiX OSN 7500 II: 4096

Number of CES services supported by boards The R1ML1 on the OptiX OSN 1500: 16
OptiX OSN 3500/7500
N1CQ1: 252
N1MD75 and N1MD12: 32
OptiX OSN 7500 II
TNN1CO1: 504
TNN1D75E and TNN1D12E: 32

Emulation mode SAToP

CESoPSN

Number of CES ACR clocks supported by boards R1ML1 on the OptiX OSN 1500, N1MD75/N1MD12 on the OptiX OSN 3500/7500, and
TNN1D75E/TNN1D12E on the OptiX OSN 7500 II: 4

Packet loading time N1CQ1/TNN1CO1: 250 μs to 5000 μs, in steps of 125 μs

N1MD75/N1MD12/TNN1D75E/TNN1D12E: 125 μs to 5000 μs, in steps of 125 μs

Jitter buffer time OptiX OSN 3500/7500/7500 II: 375 μs to 16000 μs, in steps of 125 μs
OptiX OSN 1500: 125 μs to 64000 μs, in steps of 125 μs

Maximum number of available timeslots for CES services 31

MS-PW Supported

NOTE:
For details, see Specifications.

VCCV Supported
PW APS Supported

NOTE:
For details, see Specifications.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 486/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Item Specifications

PW OAM (Y.1711) Supported

NOTE:

For details, see Specifications.

MPLS-TP PW OAM Supported

NOTE:
For details, see Specifications.

Parent topic: TDM PWE3

2.5 Layer 2 Switching

This chapter describes the Layer 2 switching feature.

Introduction
This section defines Layer 2 switching and describes the purpose of using this feature.

Basic Concepts
This section describes the basic concepts related to Layer 2 switching.

Specifications
This section describes the specifications of Layer 2 switching.

Parent topic: Packet Features

2.5.1 Introduction
This section defines Layer 2 switching and describes the purpose of using this feature.

finition
On a LAN, a bridge or Layer 2 switch forwards Ethernet data based on MAC addresses. A MAC address is a Layer 2 (data link layer)
address in the OSI model. Therefore, this data forwarding mode is called Layer 2 switching.

rpose
If an Ethernet processing unit supports Layer 2 switching, its switching domain can be divided into multiple independent sub-switching
domains. Then, LAN services are separated and bridge resources are dynamically shared.
shows a typical application of Layer 2 switching. Company A has three departments, and Ethernet services of the three
Figure 1
departments are transmitted to the transmission network through NE1, NE2, and NE3. The convergence node NE2 needs to perform
Layer 2 switching for Ethernet services from the two access nodes NE1 and NE3, and NE1 and NE3 do not need to communicate with
each other.
Figure 1 Application of Layer 2 switching

Parent topic: Layer 2 Switching

2.5.2 Basic Concepts

This section describes the basic concepts related to Layer 2 switching.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 487/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
VPLS
Virtual private LAN service (VPLS) is a service type defined by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).

E-LAN Services Carried on PWs

PW-carried E-LAN services connect VSIs at different locations using VLAN-based logical channels. The connected VSIs function as if
they were in the same LAN.

Split Horizon Group

A split horizon group consists of some specified ports. The ports in one split horizon group cannot forward packets to each other.

MAC Address Table Management

Entries in a MAC address table show the mapping between MAC addresses and ports. The entries can be divided into dynamic
entries, static entries, and blacklist entries.

Parent topic: Layer 2 Switching

[Link] VPLS
Virtual private LAN service (VPLS) is a service type defined by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).

finition
In a broad sense, VPLS services are point-to-multipoint L2VPN services transmitted on public networks. Nodes of VPLS services are
connected through public networks and function as if they were in the same LAN, as shown in Figure 1. VPLS services in a broad sense are
equivalent to E-LAN services for which the types of public networks and service transmission channels are not defined. In a narrow sense,
the networks that transmit VPLS services are packet switched networks and service transmission channels are PWs. VPLS services in a
narrow sense are equivalent to PW-carried E-LAN services. The VPLS services mentioned in this document are PW-carried E-LAN services.
Figure 1 VPLS

Whatever types of transmission channels between nodes, VPLS service packets are forwarded based on VSIs. VSIs are bridges in essence.
Conventional bridges allow the mounting of only UNI ports, but VSIs allow the mounting of PWs and QinQ links in addition to UNI ports.
The OptiX OSN equipment supports three types of VSIs: Tag-Transparent, C-Aware, and S-Aware.

Table 1 VSI types supported by the OptiX OSN equipment

Item Tag-Transparent C-Aware S-Aware

Logical port type PORT (UNI port) PORT (UNI port) PORT (UNI port)
PW (NNI port) PORT+CVLAN list (UNI port) PORT+SVLAN list (UNI port)
QinQ link (NNI port) PW (NNI port) PW (NNI port)

MAC address learning mode SVL SVL/IVLa SVL/IVLa

Broadcast domain All VUNI ports and NNI ports VUNI ports that match C-VLAN tags VUNI ports that match S-VLAN tags
and all NNI ports and all NNI ports
Tag processing by NNI ports Stripping off tags before sending packets to VSIs
Adding tags after receiving packets from VSIs

NOTE:
a: A PORT-based UNI port to which VPLS services are mounted must use the SVL mode, and VLAN filtering tables need to be configured.

Figure 2 provides the three types of VSIs supported by the OptiX OSN equipment.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 488/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 2 VSI types

Parent topic: Basic Concepts

[Link] E-LAN Services Carried on PWs

PW-carried E-LAN services connect VSIs at different locations using VLAN-based logical channels. The connected VSIs function as if they
were in the same LAN.

rvice Model
Table 1 shows the PW-carried E-LAN service models.

Table 1 PW-carried E-LAN service models

Service Model Tag Attribute Learning Mode Logical UNI Port Type Encapsulation Mode at a Logical NNI Port Type
UNI Port

Model 1 Tag-Transparent SVL PORT Null PW

Model 2 C-Aware SVL/IVL PORT+VLAN list 802.1Q PW

PORTa

Model 3 S-Aware SVL/IVL PORT+SVLAN list QinQ PW

PORTa

NOTE:
a: VLAN filtering tables need to be configured.

pical application of service model 1

shows a typical application of service model 1. NE2 and NE3 receive services A from users and send them to the convergence node
Figure 1
NE1. On NE1, no service separation is required and a Tag-Transparent VSI is created to connect VSIs at other locations using PWs.
Figure 1 Typical application of service model 1

pical application of service model 2

shows the typical application of service model 2. NE2 and NE3 receive services G and H from users and send them to the
Figure 2
convergence node NE1. Services G and H carry different VLAN IDs, so two C-Aware VSIs need to be created on NE1. In this manner,
services G and H are separated, and packets that do not carry the VLAN ID of service G or H cannot be forwarded using the VSIs.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 489/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 2 Typical application of service model 2

pical application of service model 3

shows the typical application of service model 3. NE2 and NE3 receive services G and H from users and send them to the PSN.
Figure 3
Services G and H carry the same C-VLAN tag, so E-Line services need to be configured on NE2 and NE3. The service-delimiting tag of the
PWs that carry the E-Line services must be User, and the encapsulation mode of the PWs must be Tag. After the configuration, NE2 and
NE3 add different S-VLAN tags to services G and H. Because the services arriving at NE1 carry S-VLAN tags, a S-Aware VSI needs to be
configured on NE1 to forward the services.

Figure 3 Typical application of service model 3

Parent topic: Basic Concepts

[Link] Split Horizon Group

A split horizon group consists of some specified ports. The ports in one split horizon group cannot forward packets to each other.
To better isolate E-LAN services and to prevent a broadcast storm resulting from a service loop, you can configure a split horizon group
for the E-LAN services at the specified nodes.
shows a typical application of the split horizon group. NEs on the network are configured with E-LAN services, and the east and
Figure 1
west NNI ports and service access ports are configured as mounted ports of a bridge. In this case, if a split horizon group is not
configured at NE1, a broadcast storm occurs due to a network loop as the east and west NNI ports can forward packets to each other. If a

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 490/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
split horizon group is configured at NE1 and the east and west NNI ports are configured as members of the split horizon group, the east
and west NNI ports do not forward packets to each other. Therefore, a service loop is prevented.

Figure 1 Service model that applies a split horizon group

NOTE:
For ring topology, in addition to a split horizon group, the spanning tree protocol must be configured for prevent route flapping caused by frequent update of MAC
addresses.

Parent topic: Basic Concepts

[Link] MAC Address Table Management

Entries in a MAC address table show the mapping between MAC addresses and ports. The entries can be divided into dynamic entries,
static entries, and blacklist entries.

NOTE:
A MAC address is automatically deleted if dynamic entry is not updated within a specified period, that is, no new packet from the MAC address defined in the entry
is received to enable the re-learning of this MAC address within a specified period. This mechanism is called aging, and the specified period is called aging time.

Dynamic entry
A dynamic entry is obtained by a bridge in SVL or IVL mode. A dynamic entry will be aged out and will be lost after the Ethernet
processing unit is cold reset.
Static entry
A static entry is manually added to the MAC address table by a network administrator on the NMS. A static entry will not be aged
out. Generally, a static entry is configured if a piece of equipment with a known MAC address is mounted to a port and the
equipment has constant heavy traffic. A static entry is not lost after the Ethernet processing unit is reset.
Blacklist entry
A blacklist entry is also called a MAC disabled entry or blackhole entry. If the source MAC address or destination MAC address of
a data frame is defined in a blacklist entry, this data frame is discarded. A blacklist entry is configured by a network administrator.
A blacklist entry will not be aged out, and will not be lost after the Ethernet processing board is reset.

Parent topic: Basic Concepts

2.5.3 Specifications
This section describes the specifications of Layer 2 switching.
Table 1 provides the specifications of Layer 2 switching.

Table 1 Specifications of Layer 2 switching

Item Specifications

Number of E-LAN services OptiX OSN 1500: 64

OptiX OSN 3500/7500: 1020
OptiX OSN 7500 II: 1024

Maximum number of split horizon groups OptiX OSN 1500: 64

OptiX OSN 3500/7500: 1020
OptiX OSN 7500 II: 1024

Number of MAC address in one VSI OptiX OSN 1500: 32768

OptiX OSN 3500/7500/7500 II: 65534

Number of static entries in the MAC address table 2048

Number of blacklist entries in the MAC address table 2048
MAC address aging time 1 minute to 640 minutes

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 491/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Item Specifications

Maximum number of V-UNI broadcast packet suppression 1K

Parent topic: Layer 2 Switching

2.6 Smart Line Board Solution

To address the growth of bandwidths and the evolution to packet services, Huawei provides the smart line board solution to enable
OptiX OSN equipment to meet the new requirements of traditional bearer networks.

Introduction
The smart line board solution does not require board replacement for TDM to packet evolution. This solution significantly increases
the aggregation-layer bandwidth on a transport network, enabling flexible bandwidth configuration for TDM and packet services.

Technology
The smart line board solution is implemented based on the photonics integrated device (PID) and Smart technologies.

Specifications
This section describes the specifications of the smart line board solution that OptiX OSN equipment supports.

Parent topic: Packet Features

2.6.1 Introduction
The smart line board solution does not require board replacement for TDM to packet evolution. This solution significantly increases the
aggregation-layer bandwidth on a transport network, enabling flexible bandwidth configuration for TDM and packet services.
Metro transport networks have evolved from 2G networks into 3G networks and now are evolving into LTE networks. The aggregation
layer of metro transport networks is facing the following problems:

The traditional WDM technology satisfies ever-increasing bandwidth demands, and more fiber resources are required. In addition,
complex optical layer technologies have been introduced, which makes site deployment and maintenance difficult.
TDM and packet services will coexist for a long period of time. However, TDM and packet resources are independent of each
other and cannot be shared. As TDM services shrink, the original investment in TDM services cannot be used by packet services.

The smart line board solution resolves the preceding problems. This solution has the following advantages:

1. As aggregation layer equipment, the OptiX OSN 580 and OptiX OSN 7500 II works with equipment at the access and core layers.
A single optical port on the OptiX OSN 580 or OptiX OSN 7500 II supports a maximum of 40 Gbit/s bandwidth.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 492/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Aggregation-layer comparison before and after the smart line board solution is implemented

2. A smart line board supports hybrid transmission of TDM and packet services over the same optical fiber, which reduces usage of
optical fiber resources.
As shown in the following figure, in traditional mode, one packet service and one SDH service are transmitted over two or more
pairs of fibers. For example, if one GE service, one 10GE service, and one STM-64 service are transmitted, three pairs of fibers are
required in traditional mode, whereas only one pair of fibers is required if an HUNS3 board is used. Specifically, the smart line
board maps the GE service into one ODU0, the 10GE service into one ODU2, and the STM-64 service into one ODU2. The board
then maps the three ODU0 and ODU2s into one ODU3, maps the ODU3 into one OTU3, and finally transmits the OTU3 over one
pair of fibers. The smart line board supports a maximum 80 km transmission distance if no optical amplifier is deployed.
Figure 2 10 Gbit/s and 40 Gbit/s service transmission comparison before and after the smart line board solution is implemented

3. The proportions of upstream bandwidths used by TDM and packet services can be smoothly adjusted.
As shown in the following figure, the smart line board dynamically adjusts the original 30 Gbit/s TDM service and 10GE packet
service to 10 Gbit/s TDM service and 30GE packet service.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 493/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 3 Dynamic adjustment of TDM and packet services

4. The optical layer design is not required. No optical amplifier or dispersion compensation component is required for service
transmission within an 80 km distance.
5. A smart line board integrates the functions of the packet processing board, SDH processing board, and
multiplexer/demultiplexer board, improving equipment integration and reducing power by at least 40%.

Parent topic: Smart Line Board Solution

2.6.2 Technology
The smart line board solution is implemented based on the photonics integrated device (PID) and Smart technologies.

PID Technology
The photonics integrated device (PID) technology integrates the optical transponder unit (OTU) and multiplexer/demultiplexer unit
on a smart line board. A smart line board is equivalent to the combination of N GE/10GE packet processing boards, N STM-16/STM-
64 SDH line boards, and N multiplexer/demultiplexer boards. It implements hybrid transmission of TDM and packet services,
improving equipment integration. The PID technology has the following advantages:

Smart Technology
The core of the Smart technology is to schedule services of any granularity or any type on the TDM and packet planes. The Smart
technology enables TDM and packet services to be transmitted together and then converged at smart line board ports on the NNI
side.

Parent topic: Smart Line Board Solution

[Link] PID Technology

The photonics integrated device (PID) technology integrates the optical transponder unit (OTU) and multiplexer/demultiplexer unit on a
smart line board. A smart line board is equivalent to the combination of N GE/10GE packet processing boards, N STM-16/STM-64 SDH
line boards, and N multiplexer/demultiplexer boards. It implements hybrid transmission of TDM and packet services, improving
equipment integration. The PID technology has the following advantages:

Provides large-capacity line ports, which can be used to create simple and easy-to-maintain metropolitan area networks (MANs)
with lager capacity.
A smart line board can provide line ports with the maximum capacity of 40 Gbit/s. Two smart line boards can be
connected using two optical fibers to create a 40 Gbit/s point-to-point transmission system with no need for any other
optical-layer components.
The OTU and multiplexer/demultiplexer unit are integrated on a smart line board. The PID-based smart line board has
large capacity like a wavelength division multiplexing (WDM) system, but eliminates the trouble of complex optical-layer
design and commissioning that a WDM system suffers from.

Figure 1 shows the differences before and after smart line boards are used when OptiX OSN equipment transmits 40 Gbit/s services.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 494/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Figure 1 Differences before and after smart line boards are used

Provides stable and reliable networks.

With transmission capacity unchanged, optical fiber connections between OptiX OSN equipment greatly decrease after 40
Gbit/s smart line boards are used, which significantly reduces faults caused by optical fiber connections.
With transmission capacity unchanged, boards used by OptiX OSN equipment greatly decrease, which reduces possible
failure points.
Protection can be configured for TDM and packet services.

Parent topic: Technology

[Link] Smart Technology

The core of the Smart technology is to schedule services of any granularity or any type on the TDM and packet planes. The Smart
technology enables TDM and packet services to be transmitted together and then converged at smart line board ports on the NNI side.

NOTE:
The following uses 40 Gbit/s service transmission by the HUNS3 boards as an example to describe the Smart technology.

If the UNI-side services are pure TDM services, the smart line board adapts the TDM services to STM-16 or STM-64 channels.
If the UNI-side services are TDM and packet services, the smart line board adapts the services to STM-16 and GE/nGE/10GE any-
rate channels or STM-64 and GE/nGE/10GE any-rate channels.
If the UNI-side services are pure packet services, the smart line board adapts the packet services to GE/nGE/10GE any-rate
channels.

Figure 1 shows the application of the Smart technology when OptiX OSN equipment transmits 40 Gbit/s services.
Figure 1 Application of the Smart technology

The Smart technology uses an architecture with the UNI side and NNI side separated to achieve long-term stable operation of networks.
Carriers do not need to adjust or even replan NNI-side networks when service types or count changes. The service changes can be

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 495/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
implemented by replacing or adding UNI-side TDM or packet boards. For example, if new types of services are required, carriers only
need to replace TDM or packet boards to receive/transmit the new services. The Smart technology helps carriers maximize return on
investment and shortens the time required for service deployment.

Parent topic: Technology

2.6.3 Specifications
This section describes the specifications of the smart line board solution that OptiX OSN equipment supports.

Item Specifications

Number of virtual ports HUNS3, HUNQ2

When the service scheduling granularity is 10GE/STM-64, a maximum of four virtual ports are supported,
which can be SDH ports or packet ports. The number of SDH ports and the number of packet ports can be
configured flexibly.
When the service scheduling granularity is GE/nGE, a maximum of 24 virtual packet ports are supported.
When the service scheduling granularity is STM-16, a maximum of four virtual SDH ports are supported.
HSNS3
When the service scheduling granularity is STM-64, a maximum of four virtual SDH ports are supported.
When the service scheduling granularity is STM-16, a maximum of four virtual SDH ports are supported.
HSNQ2: SDH mode
When the service scheduling granularity is STM-64, a maximum of four virtual SDH ports are supported.
When the service scheduling granularity is STM-16, a maximum of sixteen virtual SDH ports are supported.
HSNQ2: SDH+OTN hybrid mode
When the service scheduling granularity is STM-64, a maximum of two virtual SDH ports are supported.
When the service scheduling granularity is STM-16, a maximum of eight virtual SDH ports are supported.
NOTICE:
A smart line board has the capability to process a maximum of 40 Gbit/s services. The real processing capability of a smart line board relates to the number
of licenses loaded into the smart line board.

Service access capacity HUNS3: 40 Gbit/s for a single optical port

HUNQ2: 10 Gbit/s for a single optical port
When the service scheduling granularity is 10GE/STM-64, the maximum access capability is 4xSTM-64/10GE.
The bandwidth can be configured flexibly.
When the service scheduling granularity is GE/nGE, the maximum access capability is 24xGE/nGE.
When the service scheduling granularity is STM-16, the maximum access capability is 4xSTM-16.

NOTE:
If the service scheduling granularity is GE/nGE/STM-16, the maximum access capability is 30GE packet services and 10G SDH service.

HSNS3: 40 Gbit/s for a single optical port

When the service scheduling granularity is STM-64, the maximum access capability is 4xSTM-16.
When the service scheduling granularity is STM-16, the maximum access capability is 4xSTM-16.
HSNQ2: SDH mode (10 Gbit/s for a single optical port)
When the service scheduling granularity is STM-64, the maximum access capability is 4xSTM-16.
When the service scheduling granularity is STM-16, the maximum access capability is 16xSTM-16.
HSNQ2: SDH+OTN hybrid mode (10 Gbit/s for a single optical port)
When the service scheduling granularity is STM-64, the maximum access capability is 2xSTM-16.
When the service scheduling granularity is STM-16, the maximum access capability is 8xSTM-16.

Transmission distance 10 km, 40 km and 80 km

Parent topic: Smart Line Board Solution

2.7 Ethernet Port OAM

Ethernet port OAM maintains point-to-point Ethernet links between directly-connected devices by performing OAM auto-discovery, link
performance monitoring, fault check, remote loopback, and selfloop check.

Introduction
With the continuous development of Ethernet, especially when the network develops from LAN to WAN, carriers pay more attention
to equipment maintainability. Solutions to operations, administration, and maintenance (OAM) on the transmission network are
required urgently. Therefore, ETH OAM is developed. ETH OAM enhances the Ethernet Layer 2 maintenance to strongly support the
service connectivity verification, service deployment commissioning and network fault locating.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 496/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Basic Concepts
Ethernet port OAM focuses on maintenance of the end-to-end Ethernet link between two systems that are connected directly. It
does not focus on specific services, but maintains the end-to-end Ethernet link by using OAM auto-discovery, link performance
monitoring, fault locating, remote loopback, and selfloop test.

Specifications
This section describes the capacity of OptiX OSN equipment for supporting Ethernet port OAM.

Parent topic: Packet Features

2.7.1 Introduction
With the continuous development of Ethernet, especially when the network develops from LAN to WAN, carriers pay more attention to
equipment maintainability. Solutions to operations, administration, and maintenance (OAM) on the transmission network are required
urgently. Therefore, ETH OAM is developed. ETH OAM enhances the Ethernet Layer 2 maintenance to strongly support the service
connectivity verification, service deployment commissioning and network fault locating.

finition
As a protocol based on the MAC layer, ETH OAM checks Ethernet links by transmitting OAM protocol packets. The protocol is
independent from the transmission medium. OAM packets are processed only at the MAC layer, having no impact at other layers on the
Ethernet. Moreover, as a low-rate protocol, the ETH OAM protocol occupies a low bandwidth. Therefore, this protocol does not affect
services carried on the link.

plication
Figure 1 shows the application of Ethernet service OAM and Ethernet port OAM.
Figure 1 Application of Ethernet service OAM and Ethernet port OAM

The application of Ethernet service OAM is based on services. It implements end-to-end Ethernet link maintenance within each
maintenance domain.
The Ethernet port OAM does not focus on specific services, but focuses on end-to-end link maintenance between two directly-
connected equipment in the first mile (EFM).

The Ethernet services between router 1 and router 3 pass through CE1, PE1, P, PE2, and CE3.
On the premise that router 1 supports the Ethernet port OAM protocol, Ethernet port OAM can be used to test the end-to-end Ethernet
link connectivity and performance from client-side router 1 to CE1 at the access layer.
Ethernet service OAM can be used to test the connectivity and performance of end-to-end Ethernet links between CE1 and CE3 at the
access layer.
For the maintenance domain, Figure 1 shows two main application scenarios of Ethernet service OAM.

Maintenance domain for users at the access layer: MEPs are created on CE1 and CE3 at two ends of the network, and MIPs are
created on PE1 and PE2. In this manner, all links carrying customer services on the entire Ethernet can be detected.
Maintenance domain for the carrier at the core layer: MEPs are created on PE1 and PE2. In this manner, the link quality on the
access side can be ignored and the network of the carrier is focused on.

rpose
Comparison between ETH OAM and existing network maintenance and fault locating methods is described as follows:

The current frame test method is only applicable to the data with the same encapsulation format. If different encapsulation
formats (such as GFP and HDLC) are used, the frame test method is inapplicable.
The current port loopback function focuses on all packets on a port. The loopback cannot be performed for a specific service
selectively.
ETH OAM can detect hardware faults.
ETH OAM can detect and locate faults automatically.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 497/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Parent topic: Ethernet Port OAM

2.7.2 Basic Concepts

Ethernet port OAM focuses on maintenance of the end-to-end Ethernet link between two systems that are connected directly. It does not
focus on specific services, but maintains the end-to-end Ethernet link by using OAM auto-discovery, link performance monitoring, fault
locating, remote loopback, and selfloop test.

M Auto-Discovery
OAM auto-discovery is the first phase for running the Ethernet port OAM protocol. By exchanging the information OAM protocol data
unit (OAMPDU) periodically, equipment at two ends inform each other of the capability for supporting the Ethernet port OAM protocol.
OAM auto-discovery is a prerequisite to realize the link performance monitoring, fault locating, and remote loopback.

k Performance Monitoring
Link performance monitoring is used to monitor the bit error performance (error frames or error signals) of links. When bit errors cross
the threshold, the event notification OAMPDU is used to inform the remote OAM entity of bit error events.

ult Locating
When faults (including link faults, dying gasps, and critical events) occur at the local end, the local OAM entity transmits the OAMPDU
containing the fault information to the remote end. In this manner, the fault notification is realized.

mote Loopback
By transmitting the loopback control OAMPDU to the remote OAM entity, the local OAM entity applies for the loopback from the remote
OAM entity.
In the loop mode, all packets, excluding OAMPDU packets, revert back to original routes. In the case of equipment installation and
troubleshooting, the remote loopback provides necessary assistance.

floop Test
Ethernet service processing boards enabled with the self-loop detection function can detect a self-loop. In self-loop mode, a fiber from
the transmit port is looped back to the receive port on the same board.
When a self-loop is detected, an alarm is reported and ports where the self-loop occurs are blocked.

Parent topic: Ethernet Port OAM

2.7.3 Specifications
This section describes the capacity of OptiX OSN equipment for supporting Ethernet port OAM.
Table 1 provides specifications associated with Ethernet port OAM.

Table 1 Ethernet port OAM specifications

Item Specification

OAM operation Auto-discovery

Remote loopback
Link performance monitoring
Monitoring on error frame events
Monitoring on error frame second events
Monitoring on error frame period events
Remote fault detection
Self-loop test

OAM mode Active

Passive

Parent topic: Ethernet Port OAM

2.8 Ethernet Service OAM

Ethernet service OAM focuses on Ethernet services and maintains end-to-end Ethernet links. It implements sectional and segmental
maintenance over service flows by specifying maintenance domains, maintenance associations, and maintenance points.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 498/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
Introduction
With the continuous development of Ethernet, especially when the network develops from LAN to WAN, carriers pay more attention
to equipment maintainability. Solutions to operations, administration, and maintenance (OAM) on the transmission network are
required urgently. Therefore, ETH OAM is developed. ETH OAM enhances the Ethernet Layer 2 maintenance to strongly support the
service connectivity verification, service deployment commissioning and network fault locating.

Basic Concepts
Ethernet service OAM focuses on maintenance of end-to-end Ethernet links. By defining the maintenance domain, maintenance
association, and maintenance point, ETH OAM can manage service flows by segment and by layer.

Specifications
This section describes the capacity of OptiX OSN equipment for supporting Ethernet service OAM.

Parent topic: Packet Features

2.8.1 Introduction
With the continuous development of Ethernet, especially when the network develops from LAN to WAN, carriers pay more attention to
equipment maintainability. Solutions to operations, administration, and maintenance (OAM) on the transmission network are required
urgently. Therefore, ETH OAM is developed. ETH OAM enhances the Ethernet Layer 2 maintenance to strongly support the service
connectivity verification, service deployment commissioning and network fault locating.

finition
As a protocol based on the MAC layer, ETH OAM checks Ethernet links by transmitting OAM protocol packets. The protocol is
independent from the transmission medium. OAM packets are processed only at the MAC layer, having no impact at other layers on the
Ethernet. Moreover, as a low-rate protocol, the ETH OAM protocol occupies a low bandwidth. Therefore, this protocol does not affect
services carried on the link.

plication
Figure 1 shows the application of Ethernet service OAM and Ethernet port OAM.
Figure 1 Application of Ethernet service OAM and Ethernet port OAM

The application of Ethernet service OAM is based on services. It implements end-to-end Ethernet link maintenance within each
maintenance domain.
The Ethernet port OAM does not focus on specific services, but focuses on end-to-end link maintenance between two directly-
connected equipment in the first mile (EFM).

The Ethernet services between router 1 and router 3 pass through CE1, PE1, P, PE2, and CE3.
On the premise that router 1 supports the Ethernet port OAM protocol, Ethernet port OAM can be used to test the end-to-end Ethernet
link connectivity and performance from client-side router 1 to CE1 at the access layer.
Ethernet service OAM can be used to test the connectivity and performance of end-to-end Ethernet links between CE1 and CE3 at the
access layer.
For the maintenance domain, Figure 1 shows two main application scenarios of Ethernet service OAM.

Maintenance domain for users at the access layer: MEPs are created on CE1 and CE3 at two ends of the network, and MIPs are
created on PE1 and PE2. In this manner, all links carrying customer services on the entire Ethernet can be detected.
Maintenance domain for the carrier at the core layer: MEPs are created on PE1 and PE2. In this manner, the link quality on the
access side can be ignored and the network of the carrier is focused on.

rpose
Comparison between ETH OAM and existing network maintenance and fault locating methods is described as follows:

The current frame test method is only applicable to the data with the same encapsulation format. If different encapsulation
formats (such as GFP and HDLC) are used, the frame test method is inapplicable.

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 499/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
The current port loopback function focuses on all packets on a port. The loopback cannot be performed for a specific service
selectively.
ETH OAM can detect hardware faults.
ETH OAM can detect and locate faults automatically.

Parent topic: Ethernet Service OAM

2.8.2 Basic Concepts

Ethernet service OAM focuses on maintenance of end-to-end Ethernet links. By defining the maintenance domain, maintenance
association, and maintenance point, ETH OAM can manage service flows by segment and by layer.
As a protocol based on the MAC layer, Ethernet service OAM detects Ethernet links by transmitting OAM packets. The OAM packets are
processed at only the MAC layer.
With regard to Ethernet service OAM, the following concepts must be defined:

Maintenance domain (MD): An MD refers to a network that requires OAM.

Maintenance association (MA): An MA is a domain associated with services, and an MA consists of several maintenance end
points (MEPs) and maintenance intermediate points (MIPs).
Maintenance point (MP): MPs include MEPs and MIPs.
MEP: MEPs initiate and terminate all OAM packets, and are associated with services. On a network, an MA and a
maintenance point identification (MPID) work together to specify a unique MEP.
MIP: MIPs cannot initiate OAM packets. If a non-standard protocol is used, MIPs can respond to and forward LB packets
and LT packets, and can only forward CC packets. If the standard protocol is used, MIPs can forward CC packets and LB
packets, and can respond to and forward LT packets.

On a network, customers, service providers, and carriers focus on different network segments. Therefore, management must be
implemented over different network segments that a service traverses. In addition, different service flows need to be managed
separately. Ethernet service OAM maintains the Ethernet by performing end-to-end check based on MDs.

An MA is a part of an MD. An MD can be divided into one or multiple MAs. On a carrier network, a VLAN corresponds to a service
instance; on equipment, a VLAN corresponds to one or multiple MAs. Therefore, you can detect the connectivity faults of a network that
transmits a certain service instance by dividing an MD into multiple MAs. An MA is at the same level as the MD it belongs to.

An MP is the functional entity of Ethernet service OAM. MPs are classified into MEPs and MIPs.
Each MP has a unique MPID on the entire network. The information about the MP, in which the service type, service ID, and VLAN tag is
key, is recorded in the MAC address table, MP table, and routing table. Once a Huawei MP is created successfully, the protocol packet
carrying the information about this MP is broadcast to the entire network periodically. Then, the other MPs receive the protocol packet
and record the information for future use.

NOTE:
All OAM operations must be initiated by an MEP. An MIP cannot initiate any OAM operation or send any OAM packet.

MEP
An MEP specifies the starting position of an MA. It initiates and terminates all OAM packets, and is associated with services. On a
network, an MA and an MEP ID work together to specify a unique MEP.
As shown in Figure 1, an arrow indicates an MEP and the direction of the arrow specifies the direction of the MEP.
An MEP provides the following functions:

Allows transmission of all service packets without any requirement for their directions.
Checks all the OAM packets that traverse the MEP along the direction of the arrow.
Allows transmission of the OAM packets at a level higher than the level of the local MEP, without performing
further checks.
Discards the OAM packets at a level lower than or the same as the level of the local MEP.

Checks all the OAM packets that traverse the MEP in the opposite direction of the arrow.
Allows transmission of the OAM packets at a level higher than the level of the local MEP, without performing
further checks.
Processes the OAM packets at the same level as the local MEP.
Discards the OAM packets at a level lower than the local MEP.

An MEP can generate OAM packets at the same level as the local MEP and transmit them in a specified direction.
localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 500/502
2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage
MIP
As shown in Figure 1, an ellipse indicates an MIP, which has no direction.
An MIP provides the following functions:
Allows transmission of all service packets.
Checks all OAM packets that need to traverse the local MIP.
Allows transmission of all OAM packets at a level higher than the local MIP.
Based on the special operation code or destination MAC address, processes the packets as follows:
Transparently transmits them.
Transparently transmits and processes them.
Intercepts the OAM packets at the same level as the local MIP and processes them.

Based on the special operation code, discards all the OAM packets at a level lower than the local MIP.

yered Management
Ethernet service OAM adds the management level fields to OAM protocol packets to implement layered management. A higher-level MD
can cross a lower-level MD, but a lower-level MD cannot cross a higher-level MD. Based on such layered management, a service can be
maintained differently in different segments, and different service flows can be managed separately.
Figure 1 shows the logical diagram of MD layers.

Figure 1 Logical diagram of MD layers

Currently, the protocol specifies division of 8-level layers, from level 0 to level 7. Eight maintenance domains (MD) levels are assigned to
differentiate customers, service providers, and carriers.
Layer levels are arranged in a descending order as follows: customer MD level > service provider MD level > operator MD level.
The dashed lines in Figure 1 show the logical paths that Ethernet service OAM packets travel through. MPs at different layers process OAM
protocol packets as follows:

MPs transparently transmit OAM protocol packets at a higher layer level.

MPs discard OAM protocol packets at a lower layer level.
MPs choose to respond to or terminate OAM protocol packets at the same layer level, based on the message types of the
packets.

Parent topic: Ethernet Service OAM

2.8.3 Specifications
This section describes the capacity of OptiX OSN equipment for supporting Ethernet service OAM.
Table 1 provides specifications associated with Ethernet service OAM.

Table 1 Ethernet service OAM specifications

Item Specification

OAM operation CC
LB
LT
Single-ended LM
Two-way DM

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 501/502

2019/3/27 HedEx Startpage

Item Specification

Number of supported MDs OptiX OSN 3500/7500/7500 II: 64

OptiX OSN 1500: 16

Number of supported MAs OptiX OSN 3500/7500/7500 II: 1024

OptiX OSN 1500: 256

Number of supported MPs OptiX OSN 3500/7500/7500 II:

MEP: 2048
MIP: 2048

NOTE:
One-slot boards cannot be configured as MIPs.

OptiX OSN 1500:

MEP: 512

CCM transmission interval 3.33 ms

10 ms
100 ms
1s
10s
1 min
10 min
Default: 1s

Parent topic: Ethernet Service OAM

localhost:7890/[Link]?time=Wed Mar 27 2019 17:20:49 GMT+0800 (中国标准时间) 502/502